File info: application/pdf · 1803 pages · 52.05MB
DOPSoft User Manual DOPSoft User Manual
DOPSoft User Manual. 1-2. November, 2018. 1. 1.1 Features of DOPSoft. DOPSoft software supports editing the DOP-100 series HMI screens.
Full PDF Document
If the inline viewer fails, it will open the original document in compatibility mode automatically. You can also open the file directly.
Extracted Text
Industrial Automation Headquarters
Delta Electronics, Inc. Taoyuan Technology Center No.18, Xinglong Rd., Taoyuan District, Taoyuan City 33068, Taiwan TEL: 886-3-362-6301 / FAX: 886-3-371-6301
Asia
Delta Electronics (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. No.182 Minyu Rd., Pudong Shanghai, P.R.C. Post code : 201209 TEL: 86-21-6872-3988 / FAX: 86-21-6872-3996 Customer Service: 400-820-9595
Delta Electronics (Japan), Inc. Tokyo Office Industrial Automation Sales Department 2-1-14 Shibadaimon, Minato-ku Tokyo, Japan 105-0012 TEL: 81-3-5733-1155 / FAX: 81-3-5733-1255
Delta Electronics (Korea), Inc. Seoul Office 1511, 219, Gasan Digital 1-Ro., Geumcheon-gu, Seoul, 08501 South Korea TEL: 82-2-515-5305 / FAX: 82-2-515-5302
Delta Energy Systems (Singapore) Pte Ltd. 4 Kaki Bukit Avenue 1, #05-04, Singapore 417939 TEL: 65-6747-5155 / FAX: 65-6744-9228
Delta Electronics (India) Pvt. Ltd. Plot No.43, Sector 35, HSIIDC Gurgaon, PIN 122001, Haryana, India TEL: 91-124-4874900 / FAX : 91-124-4874945
Delta Electronics (Thailand) PCL. 909 Soi 9, Moo 4, Bangpoo Industrial Estate (E.P.Z), Pattana 1 Rd., T.Phraksa, A.Muang, Samutprakarn 10280, Thailand TEL: 66-2709-2800 / FAX : 662-709-2827
Delta Energy Systems (Australia) Pty Ltd. Unit 20-21/45 Normanby Rd., Notting Hill Vic 3168, Australia TEL: 61-3-9543-3720
Americas
Delta Electronics (Americas) Ltd. Raleigh Office P.O. Box 12173, 5101 Davis Drive, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, U.S.A. TEL: 1-919-767-3813 / FAX: 1-919-767-3969
Delta Greentech (Brasil) S/A S�o Paulo Office Rua Itapeva, 26 � 3� Andar - Bela Vista CEP: 01332-000 � S�o Paulo � SP - Brasil TEL: 55-11-3530-8642 / 55-11-3530-8640
Delta Electronics International Mexico S.A. de C.V. Mexico Office V�a Dr. Gustavo Baz No. 2160, Colonia La Loma, 54060 Tlalnepantla Estado de Mexico TEL: 52-55-2628-3015 #3050/3052
EMEA
Headquarters: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V. Sales: Sales.IA.EMEA@deltaww.com Marketing: Maketing.IA.EMEA@deltaww.com Technical Support: iatechnicalsupport@deltaww.com Customer Support: Customer-Support@deltaww.com Service: Service.IA.emea@deltaww.com TEL: +31(0)40 800 3800
BENELUX: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V. De Witbogt 20,5652 AG Eindhoven,The Netherlands Mail: Sales.IA.Benelux@deltaww.com TEL: +31(0)40 800 3800
DACH: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V. Coesterweg 45,D-59494 Soest,Germany Mail: Sales.IA.DACH@deltaww.com TEL: +49(0)2921 987 0
France: Delta Electronics (France) S.A. ZI du bois Challand 2,15 rue des Pyr�n�es, Lisses, 91090 Evry Cedex, France Mail: Sales.IA.FR@deltaww.com TEL: +33(0)1 69 77 82 60
Iberia: Delta Electronics Solutions (Spain) S.L.U Ctra. De Villaverde a Vallecas, 265 1� Dcha Ed. Hormigueras � P.I. de Vallecas 28031 Madrid TEL: +34(0)91 223 74 20
C/Llull, 321-329 (Edifici CINC) | 22@Barcrelona, 08019 Barcelona Mail: Sales.IA.Iberia@deltaww.com TEL: +34 93 303 00 60
Italy: Delta Electronics (Italy) S.r.l. Ufficio di Milano Via Senigallia 18/2 20161 Milano (MI) Piazza Grazioli 18 00186 Roma Italy Mail: Sales.IA.Italy@deltaww.com TEL: +39 02 64672538
Russia: Delta Energy System LLC Vereyskaya Plaza II, office 112 Vereyskaya str. 17 121357 Moscow Russia Mail: Sales.IA.RU@deltaww.com TEL: +7 495 644 3240
Turkey: Delta Greentech Elektronik San. Ltd. Sti. (Turkey) erifali Mah. Hendem Cad. Kule Sok. No:16-A 34775 �mraniye � stanbul Mail: Sales.IA.Turkey@deltaww.com TEL: + 90 216 499 9910
GCC: Delta Energy Systems AG (Dubai BR) P.O. Box 185668, Gate 7, 3rd Floor, Hamarain Centre Dubai, United Arab Emirates Mail: Sales.IA.MEA@deltaww.com TEL: +971(0)4 2690148
Egypt + North Africa: Delta Electronics 511 Cairo Business Plaza, North 90 street, New Cairo, Cairo, Egypt Mail: Sales.IA.MEA@deltaww.com
*We reserve the right to change the information in this catalogue without prior notice.
DOPSoft User Manual
DOPSoft User Manual
www.deltaww.com
Table of Contents
1 2
Welcome to DOPSoft
1.1 Features of DOPSoft ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������1-2 1.2 Operating environment �����������������������������������������������������������������������������������1-2 1.3 List of supported models ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������1-3
Installation and General Operation
2.1 How to install DOPSoft �����������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-4 2.1.1 Install DOPSoft on Windows XP operating system�������������������������������������������2-4 2.1.2 Install DOPSoft on Windows 7 operating system ��������������������������������������������2-11
2.2 Window taskbar ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 2-17 2.2.1 File ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-29 2.2.1.1 New... �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-30 2.2.1.2 Open...������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-34 2.2.1.3 Close ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-37 2.2.1.4 Save���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-38 2.2.1.5 Save As ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-39 2.2.1.6 Create Screen Data File... ������������������������������������������������������������������ 2-39 2.2.1.7 Create Auto Update Data File ������������������������������������������������������������� 2-41 2.2.1.8 Open Screen Data File...�������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-43 2.2.1.9 Create Download Screen Exe. File... ���������������������������������������������������� 2-44 2.2.1.10 Password Protect ��������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-47 2.2.2 Edit ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-51 2.2.2.1 Duplicate ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-52 2.2.2.2 Edit Points �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-54 2.2.2.3 Find����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-55 2.2.2.4 Replace ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-58 2.2.2.5 Replace PLC Address ����������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-60 2.2.2.6 Group �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-62 2.2.2.7 UnGroup ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-64 2.2.2.8 Order ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-65 2.2.2.9 Align ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-69 2.2.2.10 Make Same Size ���������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-74 2.2.2.11 Text Process ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-76
November, 2018
2.2.2.12 Bitmap Process ������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 2-80 2.2.2.13 Import Multi-language Text / Export Multi-language Text �������������������������� 2-85 2.2.3 View ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-91 2.2.3.1 Screen Management ������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-93 2.2.3.2 Zoom In ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-96 2.2.3.3 Zoom Out ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-97 2.2.3.4 Actual Size ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-98 2.2.3.5 Full Screen ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-99 2.2.3.6 I/O Screen �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-99 2.2.3.7 Grid Settings ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-100 2.2.3.8 Element Address List �����������������������������������������������������������������������2-101 2.2.3.9 Memory List �����������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-102 2.2.4 Screen������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-104 2.2.4.1 New Screen �����������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-104 2.2.4.2 Open Screen ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-105 2.2.4.3 Screensaver�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-106 2.2.4.4 Cut Screen ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-108 2.2.4.5 Copy Screen ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-108 2.2.4.6 Paste Screen ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-109 2.2.4.7 Delete Screen���������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-109 2.2.4.8 Export �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-109 2.2.4.9 Import �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-111 2.2.4.10 Clear imported data������������������������������������������������������������������������2-112 2.2.4.11 Screen Properties ��������������������������������������������������������������������������2-112 2.2.4.12 Screen Map����������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-120 2.2.5 Tools ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-123 2.2.5.1 Compile ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-123 2.2.5.2 Compile All ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-124 2.2.5.3 Download All Data ���������������������������������������������������������������������������2-124 2.2.5.4 Upload All Data �������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-126 2.2.5.5 Download Screen ����������������������������������������������������������������������������2-128 2.2.5.6 Upload Recipe ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-129 2.2.5.7 Download Recipe ����������������������������������������������������������������������������2-129 2.2.5.8 Download Boot Screen ���������������������������������������������������������������������2-130 2.2.5.9 Reset Default Boot Screen ����������������������������������������������������������������2-131 2.2.5.10 On-line Simulation �������������������������������������������������������������������������2-131 2.2.5.11 Off-line Simulation��������������������������������������������������������������������������2-139 2.2.5.12 Firmware Update ���������������������������������������������������������������������������2-139 2.2.5.13 Get Firmware Information ����������������������������������������������������������������2-140 2.2.5.14 Reset HMI������������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-141
November, 2018
2.2.6 Window�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-142 2.2.6.1 Close Current Window����������������������������������������������������������������������2-142 2.2.6.2 Close All Windows ���������������������������������������������������������������������������2-142 2.2.6.3 Next Window ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-143 2.2.6.4 Previous Window ����������������������������������������������������������������������������2-144
2.2.7 Help ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-145 2.3 How to create a project? ������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-146
2.3.1 Flowchart of creating a project �����������������������������������������������������������������2-146
3 Internal Memory
3.1 Internal Register ($) ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������3-2 3.2 Non-volatile Internal Register ($M) ��������������������������������������������������������������������3-3 3.3 Indirect Address Register (*$)���������������������������������������������������������������������������3-3 3.4 Internal Parameter �����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������3-5
4 5
Control Block and Status Block
4.1 Control Block �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������4-8 4.2 Status Block ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 4-21
Buttons
5.1 Set to On / Set to Off / Maintained / Momentary����������������������������������������������������5-3 5.2 Multistate ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-26 5.3 Set Value ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-51 5.4 Set Constant ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-73 5.5 Increment / Decrement ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-94 5.6 Goto Screen ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������5-113 5.7 Other elements ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������5-138
5.7.1 System Date and Time ���������������������������������������������������������������������������5-138 5.7.2 Password Table Setup����������������������������������������������������������������������������5-139 5.7.3 Enter Password ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������5-140 5.7.4 Contrast Brightness �������������������������������������������������������������������������������5-140 5.7.5 Set Low Security �����������������������������������������������������������������������������������5-141 5.7.6 System Menu ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������5-141 5.7.7 Print Output �����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������5-141 5.7.8 Report List �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������5-142 5.7.9 Screen Capture ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������5-142 5.7.10 Remove Storage �����������������������������������������������������������������������������������5-143 5.7.11 Import / Export Recipe����������������������������������������������������������������������������5-144 5.7.12 Calibration �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������5-144
November, 2018
6
5.7.13 Language Change���������������������������������������������������������������������������������5-145 5.7.14 Import / Export FileSlot ���������������������������������������������������������������������������5-146 5.7.15 Shared properties of other elements����������������������������������������������������������5-147 5.8 Multiple actions ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������5-153
Meter
6.1 Meter(1) / Meter(2) / Meter(3) / Meter(4) ��������������������������������������������������������������6-2
7
Bar Chart
7.1 Normal bar ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������7-2 7.2 Differential bar ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7-13
8 Pipe Chart
8.1 Pipe(1) / Pipe(2) ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������8-2 8.2 Pipe(3) / Pipe(4) / Pipe(5) ������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 8-13 8.3 Pipe(6) / Pipe(7) ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 8-18
9 Pie Chart
9.1 Pie(1) / Pie(2) / Pie(3) / Pie(4) ��������������������������������������������������������������������������9-2
10 Indicator
11
10.1 Multistate Indicator �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 10-2 10.2 Range Indicator �����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������10-20 10.3 Simple Indicator�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������10-36
Data Display
11.1 Numeric Display ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������11-2 11.2 Character Display ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������11-25 11.3 Date Display / Time Display / Week Display �����������������������������������������������������11-34
11.2.1 Date Display ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������11-35 11.2.2 Time Display����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������11-41 11.2.3 Week Display���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������11-47 11.4 General Message Display ����������������������������������������������������������������������������11-56 11.5 Moving Sign����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������11-69
November, 2018
12 Graph Display
12.1 State Graphic��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 12-2 12.2 Animated Graphic ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������12-17 12.3 Real-time Image ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������12-30
13
Input
13.1 Numeric Entry �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 13-2 13.2 Character Entry �����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������13-33 13.3 Barcode Input �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������13-54 13.4 Multi-language Input �����������������������������������������������������������������������������������13-69
14
Curve
14.1 Trend Graph ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 14-2 14.2 X-Y Chart �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������14-19 14.3 X-Y Distribution �����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������14-36 14.4 Curve Input ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������14-47
15 Sampling
15.1 History Buffer ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 15-2 15.2 Historical Trend Graph ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������15-40 15.3 Historical Data Table�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������15-62 15.4 Historical Event Table ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������15-78 15.5 Historical Overview Table ����������������������������������������������������������������������������15-90 15.6 Operation Log Table ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������15-113
16
Alarm
16.1 Alarm Settings�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 16-2 16.2 Alarm History Table ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������16-29 16.3 Active Alarm List ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������16-45 16.4 Alarm Frequency Table �������������������������������������������������������������������������������16-61 16.5 Alarm Moving Sign �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������16-77
17 Keypad 17.1 Keypad(1) ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 17-2 17.2 Keypad(2) ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������17-13
November, 2018
17.3 Keypad(3) ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������17-24
18 Analog
18.1 Slider ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 18-2
19 List
19.1 ComboBox ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 19-2 19.2 ListBox ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������19-23 19.3 GridBox ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������19-42 19.4 PDF Viewer ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������19-86
20 Frame
20.1 Embedded Subscreen ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 20-2
21 Basic Shape
21.1 Rhombus �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 21-3 21.2 Right Triangle �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 21-9 21.3 Pentagon �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������21-15 21.4 Pie Chart �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������21-21 21.5 Arc ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������21-27 21.6 Hexagon ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������21-33 21.7 Star Shape �����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������21-39 21.8 Triangle ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������21-45 21.9 Hollow Circle ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������21-51 21.10 Stop Circle����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������21-57 21.11 1/4 Arc ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������21-63
22 Drawing
22.1 Line ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 22-3 22.2 Rectangle ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������22-10 22.3 Circle ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������22-23 22.4 Polygon ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������22-31 22.5 Text ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������22-37 22.6 Scale ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������22-46 22.7 Table�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������22-54
November, 2018
23 Recipe
23.1 16-bit Recipe ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 23-3
23.2 32-bit Recipe ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������23-20
23.3 Indirect recipe index register (*RCP) ��������������������������������������������������������������23-37
23.4 Enhanced recipe����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������23-40
24
23.5 Enhanced indirect recipe index register (*ENRCP) ��������������������������������������������23-62
Macro
24.1 Types of macro ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 24-3 24.1.1 On Macro / Off Macro������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 24-4 24.1.2 Before Execute Macro ����������������������������������������������������������������������������� 24-5 24.1.3 After Execute Macro ������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 24-6 24.1.4 Screen Open Macro�������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 24-7 24.1.5 Screen Close Macro ������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 24-8 24.1.6 Screen Cycle Macro ������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 24-9 24.1.7 Submacro��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������24-12 24.1.8 Initial Macro �����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������24-21 24.1.9 Background Macro ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������24-23 24.1.10 Clock Macro ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������24-25
24.2 Macro edit window ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������24-28 24.3 Macro commands ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������24-34
24.3.1 Arithmetic ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������24-40 24.3.2 Logical Operation ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������24-61 24.3.3 Data transfer ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������24-70 24.3.4 Data Conversion �����������������������������������������������������������������������������������24-80 24.3.5 Comparison �����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������24-97 24.3.6 Flow Control ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������24-145 24.3.7 Bit Setting������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������24-151 24.3.8 Communication�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������24-155 24.3.9 Drawing ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������24-182 24.3.10 File Access��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������24-189 24.3.11 Others ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������24-197 24.4 Macro error codes ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������24-243
November, 2018
25 Multi-language
25.1 Multi-language setup ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 25-2
26 Print Setup 26.1 Screen print setup ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 26-4 26.2 ePrinter ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������26-10 26.2.1 PrnServer �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������26-11 26.2.2 HMI link settings�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������26-14 26.3 Error code of printer �����������������������������������������������������������������������������������26-19
27 Parameter Settings
27.1 Configuration ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 27-2 27.2 Communication Settings������������������������������������������������������������������������������27-46 27.3 Change model ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������27-59 27.4 Environment settings ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������27-60
28 Advanced Settings 28.1 Tag Table �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 28-2 28.2 HMI Identifier ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������28-13 28.3 FileSlot File Management ����������������������������������������������������������������������������28-15 28.4 Device Data table ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������28-22 28.5 Picture Bank ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������28-27 28.6 Text Bank �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������28-31 28.7 Multi-Lang input character count calculation ����������������������������������������������������28-35
November, 2018
Appendix
A System Screen
A.1 System screen overview ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������A-3 A.2 System Setting ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������A-8 A.3 Up/Download ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������A-29 A.4 System Info ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������A-38 A.5 HMI Doctor �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������A-39
B Multi-Drop
B.1 Multi-drop example ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������B-2
C Communication Error Messages
C.1 Communication error messages ���������������������������������������������������������������������� C-2
D Write and Read Offset Address
D.1 Write and read offset address ������������������������������������������������������������������������� D-2
November, 2018
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
November, 2018
Welcome to DOPSoft
This chapter provides the information about the features, operating environment, and the list of supported models.
1.1 Features of DOPSoft����������������������������������������������������������������������� 1-2 1.2 Operating environment �������������������������������������������������������������������� 1-2 1.3 List of supported models ������������������������������������������������������������������ 1-3
November, 2018
1-1
Welcome to DOPSoft
DOPSoft User Manual
1
1.1 Features of DOPSoft
DOPSoft software supports editing the DOP-100 series HMI screens. This version provides more advanced and user-friendly functions as below: (1) User-friendly editing interface (2) Versatile 3D image library (3) Delicate elements (4) Smooth display for Meter and other elements (5) Faster software download speed (6) Powerful search function (7) Improved readability for the output results after compilation
1.2 Operating environment
Hardware / software PC
Backup memory Hard disc Display Printer
Operation system
Specifications Pentium 4; 1.6 GHz and above
2 GB and above 400 MB and above Supports 1024x768 solution full-color display Printers compatible with Windows XP / Windows 7 / Windows 8 / Windows 10 Windows XP / Windows 7 / Windows 8 / Windows 10
1-2
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Welcome to DOPSoft
1.3 List of supported models
Series DOP-100
Model DOP-103BQ DOP-103WQ DOP-107BV DOP-107CV DOP-107EG DOP-107EV DOP-107WV DOP-110CS DOP-110WS
Note
1
The software can open and covert the DOP-B, DOP-W, and DOP-H series projects into the DOP-100 series projects.
November, 2018
1-3
Welcome to DOPSoft
1
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
DOPSoft User Manual
1-4
November, 2018
Installation and General Operation
This chapter covers the information about how to install the software, the general function bars in the software window, how to create a project, select a controller, edit screens, and download the screens to the HMI.
2.1 How to install DOPSoft ����������������������������������������������������������������������2-4 2.1.1 Install DOPSoft on Windows XP operating system ���������������������������2-4 2.1.2 Install DOPSoft on Windows 7 operating system ����������������������������2-11
2.2 Window taskbar ����������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-17 2.2.1 File �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-29 2.2.1.1 New... ������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-30 2.2.1.2 Open... ������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 2-34 2.2.1.3 Close �������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-37 2.2.1.4 Save ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-38 2.2.1.5 Save As ����������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-39 2.2.1.6 Create Screen Data File... ����������������������������������������������������� 2-39 2.2.1.7 Create Auto Update Data File ������������������������������������������������� 2-41 2.2.1.8 Open Screen Data File... ������������������������������������������������������� 2-43 2.2.1.9 Create Download Screen Exe. File...���������������������������������������� 2-44 2.2.1.10 Password Protect ���������������������������������������������������������������� 2-47 2.2.2 Edit ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-51 2.2.2.1 Duplicate ��������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-52 2.2.2.2 Edit Points�������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-54 2.2.2.3 Find ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-55 2.2.2.4 Replace ����������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-58 2.2.2.5 Replace PLC Address����������������������������������������������������������� 2-60 2.2.2.6 Group ������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-62 2.2.2.7 UnGroup���������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-64 2.2.2.8 Order �������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-65 2.2.2.9 Align ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-69 2.2.2.10 Make Same Size ����������������������������������������������������������������� 2-74 2.2.2.11 Text Process����������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-76 2.2.2.12 Bitmap Process ������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-80 2.2.2.13 Import Multi-language Text / Export Multi-language Text ��������������� 2-85
November, 2018
2-1
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
2-2
2.2.3 View ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 2-91 2.2.3.1 Screen Management ������������������������������������������������������������ 2-93 2.2.3.2 Zoom In ����������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-96 2.2.3.3 Zoom Out �������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-97 2.2.3.4 Actual Size ������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-98 2.2.3.5 Full Screen������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-99 2.2.3.6 I/O Screen ������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-99 2.2.3.7 Grid Settings ���������������������������������������������������������������������2-100 2.2.3.8 Element Address List�����������������������������������������������������������2-101 2.2.3.9 Memory List ����������������������������������������������������������������������2-102
2.2.4 Screen ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-104 2.2.4.1 New Screen ����������������������������������������������������������������������2-104 2.2.4.2 Open Screen ���������������������������������������������������������������������2-105 2.2.4.3 Screensaver ����������������������������������������������������������������������2-106 2.2.4.4 Cut Screen ������������������������������������������������������������������������2-108 2.2.4.5 Copy Screen ���������������������������������������������������������������������2-108 2.2.4.6 Paste Screen ���������������������������������������������������������������������2-109 2.2.4.7 Delete Screen ��������������������������������������������������������������������2-109 2.2.4.8 Export ������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-109 2.2.4.9 Import ������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-111 2.2.4.10 Clear imported data�������������������������������������������������������������2-112 2.2.4.11 Screen Properties ���������������������������������������������������������������2-112 2.2.4.12 Screen Map�����������������������������������������������������������������������2-120
2.2.5 Tools�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-123 2.2.5.1 Compile����������������������������������������������������������������������������2-123 2.2.5.2 Compile All ������������������������������������������������������������������������2-124 2.2.5.3 Download All Data ��������������������������������������������������������������2-124 2.2.5.4 Upload All Data ������������������������������������������������������������������2-126 2.2.5.5 Download Screen ���������������������������������������������������������������2-128 2.2.5.6 Upload Recipe �������������������������������������������������������������������2-129 2.2.5.7 Download Recipe ���������������������������������������������������������������2-129 2.2.5.8 Download Boot Screen ��������������������������������������������������������2-130 2.2.5.9 Reset Default Boot Screen ���������������������������������������������������2-131 2.2.5.10 On-line Simulation ��������������������������������������������������������������2-131 2.2.5.11 Off-line Simulation ��������������������������������������������������������������2-139 2.2.5.12 Firmware Update ����������������������������������������������������������������2-139 2.2.5.13 Get Firmware Information �����������������������������������������������������2-140 2.2.5.14 Reset HMI�������������������������������������������������������������������������2-141
2.2.6 Window �������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-142 2.2.6.1 Close Current Window ���������������������������������������������������������2-142
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
2.2.6.2 Close All Windows ��������������������������������������������������������������2-142 2.2.6.3 Next Window ���������������������������������������������������������������������2-143 2.2.6.4 Previous Window����������������������������������������������������������������2-144 2.2.7 Help������������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-145 2.3 How to create a project? �����������������������������������������������������������������2-146 2.3.1 Flowchart of creating a project ��������������������������������������������������2-146
2
November, 2018
2-3
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
2.1 How to install DOPSoft
You can install the DOPSoft on Windows XP / Vista / Windows 7 / Windows 8. The following section introduces the methods of installing the software on Windows XP and Windows 7. To download the DOPSoft, go to Delta's website at http://www.deltaww.com/services/DownloadCenter2.aspx?secID=8&pid=2&tid=0&CID=06&itemI D=060302&typeID=1&downloadID=,&title=--%20%E8%AB%8B%E9%81%B8%E6%93%87%20 --&dataType=8;&check=1&hl=zh-TW
2.1.1 Install DOPSoft on Windows XP operating system
After downloading the DOPSoft software at Delta's website, you can start your PC and launch the Windows XP operating system. Then, execute the DOPSoft software and follow the installation steps below.
Select the Installer Language. There are four languages available, Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, English, and Turkish. After selecting the language, click OK.
Figure 2.1.1.1 Installer Language on Windows XP
2-4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
Click Browse to select the installation location for the software; to use the default location, click Next.
2
Figure 2.1.1.2 Choose Installation Location on Windows XP
November, 2018
2-5
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
Make sure you have checked the DOPSoft100 component, as shown in Figure 2.1.1.3, and click Install.
Figure 2.1.1.3 Select the component to install on Windows XP
2-6
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
After you click Install, the software displays the installation progress bar.
2
Figure 2.1.1.4 The installation progress bar displayed on Windows XP
When the installation is complete, the progress bar displays "Completed". Then, the PC displays the device driver for installation, click Next to continue.
Figure 2.1.1.5 The progress bar shows the installation on Windows XP is complete
November, 2018
2-7
Installation and General Operation
2
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 2.1.1.6 Device Driver Installation Wizard
After the driver is installed, you will see the screen showing installation completed. Click Finish to close the driver installation window and then click Close to close the DOPSoft installation screen.
Figure 2.1.1.7 Device Driver installation is complete
2-8
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
2
Figure 2.1.1.8 Windows XP completes the installation
November, 2018
2-9
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
After the installation is complete, go to the toolbar at the bottom of the PC screen. Select [Start] > [All Programs] > [Delta Industrial Automation] > [HMI] > [DOPSoft 4.00.0x] > [DOPSoft 4.00.0x] to execute the DOPSoft application.
2-10
Figure 2.1.1.10 Follow the path to install the software on Windows XP November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
2.1.2 Install DOPSoft on Windows 7 operating system
After downloading the DOPSoft software at Delta's website, you can start your PC and enter the Windows 7 operating system. Before executing the DOPSoft, please go to [Control Panel] > [User Accounts and Family Safety] > [User Accounts] > [Change User Account Control settings] and set Never notify for the account level, as shown in Figure 2.1.2.1 and 2.1.2.2.
2
Figure 2.1.2.1 Change User Account Control settings on Windows 7
Figure 2.1.2.2 Select Never notify for the User Account Control Settings on Windows 7 November, 2018
2-11
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
After completing the User Account Control Settings, please execute the DOPsoft and follow the installation instructions:
Select the Installer Language. There are four languages available, Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, English, and Turkish. After selecting the language, click OK.
Figure 2.1.2.3 Installer Language on Windows 7
Click Browse to select the installation location for the software; to use the default location, click Next.
2-12
Figure 2.1.2.4 Choose Installation Location on Windows 7 November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
Make sure you have checked the DOPSoft100 component, as shown in Figure 2.1.2.5, and click Install.
2
Figure 2.1.2.5 Select the component to install on Windows 7 After you click Install, the software displays the installation progress bar.
November, 2018
Figure 2.1.2.6 The installation progress bar on Windows 7
2-13
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
When the installation is complete, the progress bar displays "Completed". Then, the PC displays the device driver for installation, click Next to continue.
Figure 2.1.2.7 The progress bar shows the installation on Windows 7 is complete
2-14
Figure 2.1.2.8 Device Driver Installation Wizard
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
After the driver is installed, you will see the screen showing installation completed. Click Finish to close the driver installation window and then click Close to close the DOPSoft installation screen.
2
Figure 2.1.2.9 Device Driver installation is complete
November, 2018
Figure 2.1.2.10 Windows 7 installation completed
2-15
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
Go to the toolbar at the bottom of the PC screen. Select [Start] > [All Programs] > [Delta Industrial Automation] > [HMI] > [DOPSoft 4.00.0x] > [DOPSoft 4.00.0x] to execute the DOPSoft application.
Figure 2.1.1.11 Follow the path to install the software on Windows 7
2-16
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
2.2 Window taskbar
The editing window of the DOPSoft has eight sections, which include a function list, toolbars, element windows (Element List and Element Bank), a properties window, an output window, a screen management window, a screen editing window, and a status bar as shown in Figure 2.2.1. The parts marked with arrows are the toolbars provided by the software.
2
The toolbars are standard Windows� programs so they work the same ways as that in Windows� . They are customizable; for example, the element toolbar can be moved to the left side of the screen. You can drag the toolbars to the position based on your preference as shown in Figure 2.2.2.
Figure 2.2.1 DOPSoft toolbars
You can drag the tool bar to the position as required.
Figure 2.2.2 DOPSoft draggable toolbar Function list As shown in the following figure, the DOPSoft provides nine function categories.
November, 2018
2-17
Installation and General Operation
2
Toolbar The DOPSoft provides 8 toolbars.
(1)
(2)
(4)
(3)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(8)
(1) General toolbar (2) Zoom in / out
toolbar (3) Language
selection bar (4) Text toolbar (5) Picture toolbar (6) Drawing toolbar (7) Element toolbar
(8) Layout toolbar
DOPSoft User Manual
2-18
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
Element Tool The Element Tool includes the Element Bank and Cust-keypad, proving the customized keypad templates and element banks for saving the edited elements. You can save the edited elements in the Element Bank and drag it to the editing screen next time you need to reuse it.
2
Figure 2.2.3 Element Bank
November, 2018
2-19
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
Figure 2.2.4 illustrates how to create an Element Bank. (1) Go to the Element Bank page.
(2) Click
to create a new Element Bank. (3) Create an element; (4) Click
to import the
element data.
(4) (2)
(3)
(1) Figure 2.2.4 Steps to create the Element Bank
2-20
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
To use the customized keypad, go to the Element Bank to select the keypad style and drag it to the screen. Click [Element Bank] > [Keypad-Template], and you can see the 16 keypad template styles provided by the software. KP (1): decimal keypad (two styles with two different sizes for each, large and small) KP (2): hexadecimal keypad (two styles with two different sizes for each, large and small) KP (3): ASCII keypad (two styles with two different sizes for each, large and small) EASCII (3): extended ASCII keypad (one style with two different sizes, large and small) KP_Swedish: Swedish keypad (one style with two different sizes, large and small)
2
November, 2018
Figure 2.2.5 Element Bank - Keypad styles
2-21
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
Apart from the built-in keypad styles of the software, you can also use the customized elements in Cust-Keypad to create customized keypad styles.
Figure 2.2.6 Cust-Keypad elements
2-22
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
With the customized elements, you can replace the original keypad provided by the software by simply ungrouping the keypad elements and adding the elements of the Cust-Keypad into the keypad. See figure below.
2
November, 2018
Figure 2.2.7 Replace the keypad with customized elements
2-23
Installation and General Operation Properties
2
All elements of the current editing screen
DOPSoft User Manual
Element state count
Figure 2.2.8 Properties window
2-24
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
Output window This window records users' editing operations and output messages for screen data compilation. When you execute the Compile function, the DOPSoft compiles the program data; when the compilation completes, you can use the filter in the Output window to promptly check errors and warning messages. The Message tab displays all compiling records; the Error tab displays the error message only; the Warning tab displays the warning messages only, as shown in Figure 2.2.9. By clicking on the error message, you are automatically directed to the screen where the error element is located.
2
Figure 2.2.9 Output window
November, 2018
2-25
Installation and General Operation
2
Project window The Project window has two tabs, Project and Address.
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 2.2.10 Project window
2-26
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
The Project tab displays the frequently used functions in the Options toolbar. You can double-click the Project window to open the editing window. The Address tab displays the register addresses used for the editing screens. Apart from the memory addresses set by the screen elements, the address list shows all the addresses used for the macros, and the control section, status section, alarms, recipes, and history in the global setting. Note: the external PLC address display is currently only available on Delta PLCs.
2
Figure 2.2.11 Address window
November, 2018
2-27
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
Screen Management window If you have created multiple screens, you can use the Screen Management window to preview the screens. It allows you to check which elements are in the screen without switching to the actual screen. You can also double-click the screen you need to view and switch to this screen.
Figure 2.2.12 Screen Management window
Status Bar The Status Bar displays the current editing status, as shown in Figure 2.2.13.
Function description
Download method
Display the coordinates of the cursor in the editing
zone
Coordinates and size of the selected element.
HMI model
Figure 2.2.13 Status Bar
Caps Lock Number Lock
Scroll Lock
2-28
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
Screen editing zone Provide applicable editing range based on the selected HMI model.
Screen editing zone
2
Figure 2.2.14 Screen editing zone
The following introduces the general function lists such as File, Edit, View, Screen, Tools, Window, and Help.
2.2.1 File
In addition to general functions of opening, closing, and saving files, the File list also provides options of Create Screen Data File, Create Auto Update Data File, Open Screen Data File, Create Download Screen Exe. File, and Password Protect.
November, 2018
Figure 2.2.1.1 File function list
2-29
Installation and General Operation 2.2.1.1 New...
DOPSoft User Manual
2
When you click
or use the system keyboard shortcut Ctrl+N to create a new project, the
DOPSoft prompts the Project Wizard as shown in the figure below, and you can select the HMI model or printer to use and edit the project name and screen name. After completing the basic settings, click Next to go to the Communication Settings.
(1) (2)
Figure 2.2.1.1.1 Project Wizard
No.
Item
Description
(1)
System Menu Language
Available system languages are English, Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese and Spanish.
(2)
HMI Rotation
Selectable rotation degrees are 0�, 90�, 180�, and 270�.
For Communication Settings, you can set the controller model and COM port or Ethernet port to use, as well as the parameters for communications between the HMI and controller, as shown in Figure 2.2.1.1.2.
2-30
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual (1)
Installation and General Operation
2
(2)
Figure 2.2.1.1.2 Project Wizard
No.
Item
Description
(1)
Up and Down arrows
Use the up and down arrows to switch among COM1, COM2, and COM3.
To use the Multi-Drop communication mode, you can simply select
(2)
Multi-Drop
Host or Client for Multi-Drop; to disable the Multi-Drop mode, select
Disable.
November, 2018
2-31
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
If you are using Ethernet for communication, click the Ethernet1 icon to set the controller
parameters. Go to the Device page and click
to add an Ethernet link and set its Controller
model, Controller IP address, Comm. Delay Time, and parameters for Timeout and Retry, as
shown in Figure 2.2.1.1.3.
Figure 2.2.1.1.3 Project Wizard
2-32
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
You can also switch to the Localhost page to set the Localhost IP address and enable the network applications, as shown in Figure 2.2.1.1.4.
2
Figure 2.2.1.1.4 Project Wizard About the Localhost: This is the Localhost IP address of the HMI, which you can set the IP address or to obtain an IP address automatically. Uncheck [Overwrite IP]:
When you leave this checkbox unchecked, the HMI uses the default IP address, 0.0.0.0. If you choose not to use the Overwrite IP option in the software, you can go to [System Setting] > [Network] to change its IP address.
Check [Overwrite IP]: If you check [Overwrite IP], it means you are going to change the IP address with the software, so you can set the IP address to be written and the HMI model name.
Check both [Overwrite IP] and [Obtain an IP address automatically]: If you check both options, it means the HMI uses the DHCP mode to get the IP address. To know the exact IP address, you can go to [System Setting] > [Network] to check.
November, 2018
2-33
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
After you complete all the settings, click Finish to go the DOPSoft project editing screen.
2
Figure 2.2.1.1.5 DOPSoft editing screen
2.2.1.2 Open...
To open the project file that has been saved in the DOPSoft, you can click [File] > [Open...], as
shown in Figure 2.2.1.2.1, click
in the toolbar, or use the system keyboard shortcut Ctrl+O.
2-34
Figure 2.2.1.2.1 Open... option November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
If there is a modified project in the software editing screen and you click Open..., the software reminds you that the program has been changed and asks if you want to save the changes, as shown in Figure 2.2.1.2.2.
2
Figure 2.2.1.2.2 Confirmation dialog box for saving the changes
You can click Yes to save or click No to not to save the project. Whether the project is saved, the previous project will be opened, as shown in Figure 2.2.1.2.3.
Figure 2.2.1.2.3 Open the previous project
The filename extension for the file in DOPSoft 4.0 is ".dpa", but it can also be ".dps "(edited with DOPSoft 2.00.0x), ".dpb "(edited with Screen Editor 2.00.xx) or ".dop "(edited with Screen Editor 1.05.xx). If you open a ".dpb "file, it means the previous screen data is copied to the DOPSoft for editing without anything changed.
November, 2018
2-35
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
If you select a ".dop "file to open, the DOPSoft converts all the data in the A series HMI into the data for the 100 series for screen editing. So, the software prompts a message asking you which series of HMI to use, as shown in Figure 2.2.1.2.4 and Figure 2.2.1.2.5.
Figure 2.2.1.2.4 Open file of the A series HMI
2-36
Figure 2.2.1.2.5 Select the HMI model to convert to
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
Note: if you open an old version HMI project such as a .dpb or .dop file that has been edited with the Screen Editor, and assume you have compiled the file with the DOPSoft and overwrite the original file, then you are unable to open this file with the previous Screen Editor. Therefore, please backup the old file for future use if needed.
2
2.2.1.3 Close To close the file, you can only go to [File] > [Close]. After the file is closed, if there are edited projects in the window, a window pops up to check whether you want to save this project. Click Yes to save the changes before closing the project; click No to discard the changes and directly close the project; or click Cancel to cancel the action of closing the project.
Figure 2.2.1.3.1 Close the project
November, 2018
2-37
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
2.2.1.4 Save
To save the current project file, you can go to [File] > [Save], use
on the toolbar, or use the
keyboard shortcut Ctrl+S provided by the software. You can use all the above three methods to
save the file. When you use any of the three methods, the software detects whether the current
project file is newly created or existing. If it is a newly created project file, the software prompts a
Save As window asking you to save the current project file, as shown in Figure 2.2.1.4.1. On the
other hand, if it is an existing project file and you click Save, the current project file is directly
saved without any window popping up.
Figure 2.2.1.4.1 Save the file
2-38
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
2.2.1.5 Save As
Save As is to save the screen data you are editing to the system disk and you can name the file. You can execute this action only by going to [File] > [Save As]. Whether the project file is a new or an existing one, as long as you execute this function, the software prompts a Save As window, as shown in Figure 2.2.1.5.1. Click Save and the project will be saved in the path you specified for Save As.
2
Figure 2.2.1.5.1 Save As
2.2.1.6 Create Screen Data File...
After creating the screen data file, the DOPSoft will ask you whether to enable the protection. When you check Enable Protection, you can set the password for copying the files. The default is 12345678, as shown in Figure 2.2.1.6.1. Next, the software prompts a saving directory for you to select. After you select the directory, the software copies the compiled screen data to the specified directory, which is usually in the SD Card or USB Disk, as shown in Figure 2.2.1.6.2. You can insert the SD Card or USB Disk and start the HMI. Go to the system screen and click [System Setting] > [File Manager] to use the functions of Copy File, F/W Update, and Multi-Screen File. Details for these three functions are described in Appendix A System Screen.
November, 2018
Figure 2.2.1.6.1 Enable Protection and password for copying files
2-39
Installation and General Operation
2
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 2.2.1.6.2 Directory for saving the create screen data file Figure 2.2.1.6.3 The screen data is created successfully
2-40
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
2.2.1.7 Create Auto Update Data File
After you execute Create Auto Update Data File, the DOPSoft will ask you whether to enable the protection. When you check Enable Protection, you can set the password for copying the files. The default is 12345678, as shown in Figure 2.2.1.7.1. Next, the software prompts a saving directory for you to select. After you select the directory, the software copies the compiled screen data to the specified directory, which is usually in the SD card or USB drive, as shown in Figure 2.2.1.7.2. The only difference between this function and Create Screen Data File is that before HMI powering on or returning to the system screen, if you insert a USB Disk, the HMI detects whether there is an auto update file (Disk auto update check). If detected, the HMI prompts a window to ask if you want to start the automatic update, as shown in Figure 2.2.1.7.4. Select YES and the HMI automatically updates the firmware and screens; select NO and the HMI is unchanged.
2
Figure 2.2.1.7.1 Enable Protection and password for copying files
November, 2018
Figure 2.2.1.7.2 Directory for saving the create screen data file
2-41
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
Figure 2.2.1.7.3 The screen data is created successfully
Figure 2.2.1.7.4 The HMI confirmation window for starting the auto update procedure
Once the auto update screen file is created, there will be an HMI_AutoUP folder saved in the external device.
Figure 2.2.1.7.5 The directory generated by the auto update screen file you created Note: if the external devices, the USB Disk and SD Card, both have this HMI_AutoUP folder for firmware and screen update, the HMI first updates the USB Disk and then the SD Card.
2-42
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
The rest of the functions are the same as the function of Create Screen Data File. You can insert the SD Card or USB Disk and start the HMI to go to the system screen. Click [System Setting] > [File Manager] to use the functions of Copy File, F/W Update, and Multi-Screen File. Details for these three functions are described in Appendix A System Screen.
2.2.1.8 Open Screen Data File... Once you click [Open Screen Data File], the software prompts you to select the directory where the screen data file is saved, as shown in Figure 2.2.1.8.1.
2
Figure 2.2.1.8.1 Select the screen data file
November, 2018
2-43
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
After you select the screen data file to open, the software will again ask you whether to rename or save the screen data file you open, as shown in Figure 2.2.1.8.2.
Figure 2.2.1.8.2 Save screen data file
2.2.1.9 Create Download Screen Exe. File... This function is mainly for generating the execution file, which allows you to download the screen projects to the HMI without the DOPSoft. Click [Create Download Screen Exe. File...], and the software will prompt a directory for you to save the download screen execution file, as shown in Figure 2.2.1.9.1.
2-44
Figure 2.2.1.9.1 Select the output folder
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
Select the output folder and execution filename. You can also change the output folder, as shown in Figure 2.2.1.9.2.
2
Figure 2.2.1.9.2 Directory for saving the created download screen execution file Click Create to start creating the download execution file.
Figure 2.2.1.9.3 Start creating the download execution file
Figure 2.2.1.9.4 Creating the download execution file is complete
November, 2018
2-45
Installation and General Operation
2
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 2.2.1.9.5 Execution file icon The output folder will display the DownloadScreen.exe. file, and you can double-click the mouse left button to execute it and download the screen project to the HMI without the DOPSoft installed in your PC. Click the DownloadScreen.exe file and the screen is shown as follows.
Figure 2.2.1.9.6 Execute download Click OK and you can download the screen project to the HMI.
2-46
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
2.2.1.10 Password Protect
To execute password protection, you can go to [File] > [Password Protect] to enable this function. After you click Password Protect, the software prompts a message to notify that the password protection is enabled.
2
Figure 2.2.1.10.1 Password protection enabled
You can again click [File] > [Password Protect] to check if password protection is enabled for this project file. If enabled, the function list is shown as Figure 2.2.1.10.2.
Figure 2.2.1.10.2 Password Protect enabled successfully
November, 2018
2-47
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
After Password Protect is enabled, you can change the password by going to [Options] > [Configuration] to change to a new set of password from the default Highest security password "12345678".
Figure 2.2.1.10.3 Security Level and Password settings Once you complete the setting for the Highest security password, please exit and save the project. And the next time you try to open the project, you will be asked to enter the password for opening this protected file.
Figure 2.2.1.10.4 Request for entering the Highest security password
2-48
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
If you enter the wrong password, the software prompts a message window of incorrect password.
2
Figure 2.2.1.10.5 Enter the wrong password for the Highest security password
You can click Retry to re-enter the password or click Cancel to exit the password input window. If the password is correct, you can open the password-protected project file. To disable the password protection, you need to go to [File] > [Password Protect] to disable this function. And the software will also prompt you that the Password Protect is disabled.
Figure 2.2.1.10.6 Password protection disabled
November, 2018
2-49
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
In the same way, you can go to [File] > [Password Protect] to check if this password protection is disabled for this project file. If it is disabled successfully, the Password Protect option is unchecked as shown in Figure 2.2.1.10.7.
Figure 2.2.1.10.7 Password Protect disabled successfully
Once the Password Protect is disabled, please exit and save the project. You do not need password verification the next time you open the project.
2-50
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
2.2.2 Edit
There is an Edit function list with the following functions for you to use.
2
Figure 2.2.2.1 Edit function list
November, 2018
2-51
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
2.2.2.1 Duplicate
The Duplicate function allows you to select one element and then right-click the mouse button to execute multiple duplicate actions. With this function, you can select one element and duplicate the element based on the addresses in descending or ascending order, which saves the time for manually setting the element addresses. You can also go to [File] > [Duplicate] to execute this function. Click Duplicate and the window is shown as Figure 2.2.2.1.1.
Figure 2.2.2.1.1 Duplicate The following table is the detailed description for Duplicate, including Copies, Spacing, and Offset address.
Table 2.2.2.1.1 Duplicate
Copies
Columns Rows
In the Copies section, select the number of columns (X) and number of rows (Y) to get a total number of X * Y elements. To duplicate the element in single direction, select Horizontal Direction or Vertical Direction to enable this function.
Spacing (Pixels)
Offset address
Horizontal Vertical
Horizontal Direction
The spacing between each element. After you select the spacing value, the new elements will automatically be separated based on the spacing you set after the duplication is complete.
You can first determine the address to be set in ascending order (positive
value) or descending order (negative value), and then execute Duplicate
based on the settings of Horizontal Direction and Vertical Direction. If the
element data type is Word, the address value increases / decreases in
Word as the unit; on the other hand, if the element data type is Bit, then
the address increases / decreases in Bit as the unit.
Horizontal Direction
Vertical Direction
Vertical Direction
2-52
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
For the Duplicate function example settings, please refer to the following table.
Element address
2.2.2.1.2 Duplicate example
Duplicate
Word
Bit
$0
$0.0
2
Copies
Spacing (Pixels)
Offset address
Word
Bit
Execution results
November, 2018
2-53
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
2.2.2.2 Edit Points
The DOPSoft also provides another function, Edit Points. This function allows you to edit the polygon, hollow circle, stop circle, arc, and pie chart elements. To use this function, please create one of the elements mentioned above before clicking [Edit] > [Edit Points].
After you create the element and click [Edit] > [Edit Points], the editing points on the polygon, hollow circle, stop circle, arc, and pie chart elements are shown as the diagrams in the table below .
Table 2.2.2.2.1 Before using Edit Points
Polygon
Before using Edit Points
Hollow Circle
Stop Circle
Arc
Pie Chart
You can adjust the shape as required as shown in Table 2.2.2.2.2.
Polygon
Table 2.2.2.2.2 After using Edit Points
After using Edit Points
Hollow Circle
Stop Circle
Arc
Pie Chart
2-54
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
2.2.2.3 Find
To find the specified text and address, you can go to [Edit] > [Find] or use the keyboard shortcut CTRL + F provided by the system. This function allows you to quickly find the result. The Find function also adds the Data Type options so the results are more accurate and can be categorized in the displaying result window. After you click the Find function, please enter the content to be found and then go to Options to select Current Screen or All Screens. The Type search options are Text, Element read address, Element write address, and All Addresses. In addition, the selectable search options for Data Type are Bit, WORD, or DWORD. See Figure 2.2.2.3.1.
2
Figure 2.2.2.3.1 Find
November, 2018
2-55
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
Set the Type and Data Type to search and show the results in Search Results 1 or Search Results 2. Then, click Find and the system finds the matched contents for you. When the contents are found, the found elements are output to the specified result window. If you click the items in the output window, the cursor automatically specifies the corresponding element as shown in Figure 2.2.2.3.2.
Figure 2.2.2.3.2 Output results
2-56
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
The following provides the setting screens for the Find function.
Table 2.2.2.3.1 Description for Find function
Find What Options
Type
Data Type
Find Options
Result Options
Find
Enter the content to be found.
Current Screen
The system scans the current screens to compare each element in the current screen, and then displays the matched results in the output window. You can double-click the items in the output window to find the searched elements.
All Screens
The system scans all screens to compare every element in each screen, and then displays the matched results in the output window. You can also double-click the items in the output window to find the searched elements.
Text
Compare the element text.
Element read address Compare the element read address.
Element write address Compare the element write address.
All Addresses
Compare the read and write addresses of the element.
None
Select None to search the register address without specifying the data type.
Bit
Search for the address in Bit.
WORD
Search for the address in WORD.
DWORD
Search for the address in DWORD.
Match whole word only
Compare all input contents when searching.
If this box is unchecked, it means the HMI searches the contents that are both partly and fully matched; if this box is checked, the HMI only searches the content that is fully matched.
Multi-language search
This is only available for searching texts.
If this box is unchecked, the HMI only searches for the contents based on the currently used language; if the box is checked, the HMI searches for the contents for all languages.
Find results in 1 window
Output the search results to Search Results 1.
Find results in 2 window
Output the search results to Search Results 2.
2
November, 2018
2-57
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
2.2.2.4 Replace
To replace the specified text or address, click [Edit] > [Replace] or use the system keyboard shortcut CTRL + R. Input the contents to find and replace, and select Current Screen or All Screens. The Type for Replace can be Text, Read Address, or Write Address. The Data Type becomes selectable only when you select Read Address or Write Address for Type. The options are Bit, WORD, and DWORD, as shown in Figure 2.2.2.4.1.
Figure 2.2.2.4.1 Replace
2-58
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
The following introduces the setting screens of the Replace function.
Find What Replace
With Options
Type
Data Type
Filter
Table 2.2.2.4.1 Description for the Replace function
Enter the content to be found.
Replace
Enter the content to be replaced.
Current Screen
The system scans the current screens to compare each element in the current screen, and then replaces the matched items.
All Screens
The system scans all screens to compare every element in each screen, and then replaces the matched items.
Text
Replace the matched text.
Read Address Replace the matched read address.
Write Address Replace the matched write address.
Bit WORD DWORD
This is enabled only when the target to be replaced is a read address or a write address; the available data types are Bit, WORD, and DWORD.
The Data Type you select is determined by the element data type you search.
It is enabled when the target to be replaced is a read address or a write address. The available options are Element, Macro, Control/Status Block, History Buffer, Alarm, Recipe, Sound, and Screen Print Setup.
(1) Set $555 for the write addresses of the Increment and Decrement buttons.
(2) Execute the Replace function. Input $555 for Find What and $999 for Replace With. Since the addresses of the Increment and Decrement buttons are write addresses, you must select Write Address for Type of the replacement. And you need to select Word because the Data Type set for the Increment and Decrement buttons is Word.
(3) After you click Replace All, the addresses $555 of the Increment and Decrement buttons are replaced with $999.
2
Example (1)
(2) (3)
November, 2018
2-59
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
2.2.2.5 Replace PLC Address
To replace the station number, click [Edit] > [Replace PLC Address]. This function allows you to quickly find the station number and replace it with a new station number, and select its Link Name and Options. If the project file has multiple links, you can specify the link name for replacement.
Figure 2.2.2.5.1 Replace PLC Address
Find Station Value
Replace Station Value
Table 2.2.2.5.1 Replace PLC Address example Replace PLC Address
Enter the content to be found.
Enter the content to be replaced. You can determine the Link Name to be replaced based on the base port you created, as shown in the figure below.
Link Name
2-60
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
Replace PLC Address There are ten categories for you to select for replacement, as shown in the figure below.
2
Options
Before replacing
station No.
Example
After replacing
station No.
Click Replace and {Link2}1 is replaced with {Link2}10.
November, 2018
2-61
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
2.2.2.6 Group
To use the Group function, select two or more elements before grouping the elements.
You can go to [Edit] > [Group], click
on the Layout toolbar
menu to select Group.
, or use the right-click
Figure 2.2.2.6.1 Group
To edit a single element in the grouped elements, you can simply click on the group, and select and double-click the element to be edited. Note: regardless of how many elements you select, once these elements are grouped, the software treats this group of elements as one element. When you move the elements, all the grouped elements are moved all at once; when resizing the elements, the grouped elements are resized all at once.
2-62
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
Table 2.2.4.8 Group function example Group
2
Before grouping
Please select two or more elements before executing
the Group function.
Move
Resize
After grouping
Move the grouped elements at once.
Resize the grouped elements at once.
November, 2018
2-63
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
2.2.2.7 UnGroup To use the UnGroup function, please first select the grouped elements. Then, go to [Edit] >
[UnGroup], click
in the Layout toolbar
, or use the right-click menu to select UnGroup. The software treats the ungrouped elements as independent elements, so you can only operate them individually.
Figure 2.2.2.7.1 UnGroup
2-64
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
2.2.2.8 Order
The Order function includes options of Bring to Front, Sent to Bottom, Bring Forward, and Bring Backward. After you set the order for the elements, the element layer order changes depending on the element creation order. To use this function, please go to [Edit] > [Order] or click
on the layout toolbar.
Icon
Item
Table 2.2.2.8.1 Order example
Order Content
There are three elements in the figure below; in this example, it executes Bring to Front for element (3).
2
Before
(2)
(1)
Bring to Front
(3)
After the execution, element (3) is brought to the top of the three elements.
After
(2)
(1)
(3)
November, 2018
2-65
Installation and General Operation
2
Icon
Item
Order Content
Select element (3) to execute Send to Bottom.
Before (1)
DOPSoft User Manual (2)
Send to Bottom
(3)
After the execution, element (3) is sent to the bottom of the three elements.
After
(2)
(1)
(3)
2-66
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Icon
Item
Installation and General Operation
Order Content
Select element (3) to execute Bring Forward.
(2) Before
(1)
2
Bring Forward
(3)
After the execution, element (3) is moved up one layer, becoming the second layer of the three elements.
(2) After
(1)
(3)
November, 2018
2-67
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
Icon
Item
Order Content
Select element (3) to execute Send Backward.
(2) Before
(1)
Send Backward
(3)
After the execution, element (3) is moved down one layer, becoming the bottom layer of the elements.
(2) After
(1)
(3)
2-68
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
2.2.2.9 Align
The Align function includes options of Align left, Align Right, Align Top, Align Bottom, Vertical
Centering, Horizontal Centering, Horizontal Equal Space, and Vertical Equal Space. This function
allows you to align the element coordinates. To use this function, please go to [Edit] > [Align] or
click
on the Layout toolbar.
2
Note: 1. The reference element is the element first selected. The reference element is displayed with green
squares when you select multiple elements.
2. To execute Align Left, Align Right, Align Top, and Align Bottom, you must select at least two elements. It is because the alignment function uses the coordinates of the selected reference element's very left, right, top, and bottom as the new coordinates for all elements.
3. You can use Vertical Centering and Horizontal Centering independently. When used, these functions automatically align the element center based on the setting.
4. To execute Horizontal Equal Space and Vertical Equal Space, you must select at least three elements. When you execute Horizontal Equal Space, the software calculates the equal spaces between each element in horizontal direction and realign the elements. When you execute Vertical Equal Space, the software calculates the equal spaces between each element in vertical direction and realign the elements.
November, 2018
2-69
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
Table 2.2.2.9.1 Align function example
Icon
Item
Align
Content
To execute Align Left, you must select at least two elements.
Before
Align Left
After
To execute Align Right, you must select at least two elements. Before
Align Right
After
2-70
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Icon
Item
Installation and General Operation
Align Content
To execute Align Top, you must select at least two elements.
Before
2
Align Top
After
To execute Align Bottom, you must select at least two elements.
Before
Align Bottom
After
November, 2018
2-71
Installation and General Operation
2
Icon
Item
Before
Align
Content
Vertical Centering
After
DOPSoft User Manual
Before
Horizontal Centering
After
2-72
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Icon
Item
Installation and General Operation
Align Content
To execute Horizontal Equal Space, you must select at least three elements.
Before
2
Horizontal Equal Space
The software calculates the equal spaces between the three elements in horizontal direction and realign them to make equal spaces between the three in horizontal direction.
After
To execute Vertical Equal Space, you must select at least three elements.
Before
Vertical Equal Space
The software calculates the equal spaces between the three elements in vertical direction and realign them to make equal spaces between the three in vertical direction.
After
November, 2018
2-73
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
2.2.2.10 Make Same Size
This function includes Make Same Width, Make Same Height, and Make Same Size. It allows you to make same size of the elements. You can go to [Edit] > [Make Same Size] or click
on the Layout toolbar.
Note: 1. The reference element is the element first selected. The reference element is displayed with green
squares when you select multiple elements.
2. To execute Make Same Size, please select at least two elements. The software takes the selected reference element as the standard to make the elements the same width, height, or size.
Icon
Item
Table 2.2.2.10.1 Make Same Size example
Make Same Size Content
Use the element on the left as the reference element to make the elements the same width.
Before
Width
The element on the right is made as the same width referring to the reference element on the left.
After
2-74
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
Make Same Size Use the element on the left as the reference element to make the elements the same height.
Before
2
Height
The element on the right is made as the same height referring to the reference element on the left.
After
Use the element on the left as the reference element to make the elements the same height.
Before
Both
The element on the right is made as the same size referring to the reference element on the left.
After
November, 2018
2-75
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2.2.2.11 Text Process
2
This function processes the state of the element text, such as aligning the text to the left, to the right, and to the center. To use this function, you can go to [Edit] > [Text Process] or select
on the Text toolbar.
Icon
Item
Align Left
Table 2.2.2.11.1 Text Process function example Text Process Content
Before
After
Horiz. Centering
Before After
Align Right
Before After
Align Top
Before After
Vert. Centering
Before After
2-76
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Align Bottom
Before After
Text Process
Installation and General Operation
2
The Text Process function allows you to link with the Text Bank and import the edited texts into the selected element, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 2.2.2.10.1 Import texts from Text Bank
November, 2018
2-77
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
If you have set the multi-language data, you can edit the text data in the Text Bank in advance, as shown in Figure 2.2.2.10.2.
Figure 2.2.2.10.2 Edit multi-language text in the Text Bank
2-78
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
Go to [Text Process] > [Import Text] and select [Import all selected languages] to import the multi-language data from the Text Bank to the specified element.
2
Figure 2.2.2.10.3 After importing the multi-language text data from the Text Bank
November, 2018
2-79
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
After importing the text from the Text Bank, you can go to the Text Bank to change the imported text messages. Click Close and you will be asked whether to update the messages. Select Yes to update the text message; select No, the text message remains unchanged.
Figure 2.2.2.10.4 Synchronize the contents in Text Bank and element displaying texts
For the details on creating and using the Text Bank, please refer to the introduction of Section 28.6 Text Bank.
2.2.2.12 Bitmap Process
This function processes the states of the element pictures such as execute Align Left, Align Right,
and Align Center for the picture. You can go to [Edit] > [Bitmap Process] or use the Picture
toolbar
.
Table 2.2.2.12.1 Bitmap Process function example
Bitmap Process
Icon
Item
Content
You can specify a color in the picture and turn this color into transparent with this function. As shown in the figure below, create one element and set the
Foreground Color to blue. Next, import one picture and click the
icon to
select the orange part of the broom, and the software turns this part into
transparent, which becomes the element foreground color blue.
Transparent Color
Before
2-80
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Icon
Item
Installation and General Operation
Bitmap Process Content
2
After
Process pictures of all
states Stretch to fit the
element Picture Stretch
1:1
Actual Size
If you select the icon of Process pictures of all states, assume that the elements have multiple states and some pictures do not fill the full element display area, you can use this function to process all pictures instead of setting them one by one, which saves the editing time.
Stretch to fit the element
If you select Stretch to fit the element, the picture fills the full element display area.
Picture Stretch 1:1
If you select Picture Stretch 1:1, the picture displays in 1:1 size without referring to the element width and length.
Actual Size
If you select Actual Size, regardless of the element size, the picture displays in its actual size in the element display area.
Before Left
After
November, 2018
2-81
Installation and General Operation
2
Icon
Item
Before
Bitmap Process Content
Center
After
DOPSoft User Manual
Before Right
After
2-82
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Icon
Item
Before
Installation and General Operation
Bitmap Process Content
2
Top
After
Before Center
After
November, 2018
2-83
Installation and General Operation
2
Icon
Item
Before
Bitmap Process Content
Bottom
After
DOPSoft User Manual
2-84
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
2.2.2.13 Import Multi-language Text / Export Multi-language Text
These two functions allow you to import or export the text more easily when you edit multi-language texts. They are useful especially when you have multi-language texts or multiple states to edit. In addition, the import and export formats are both .xls which you can use in Excel. Contents in the import or export files are the text language data of all elements in the displaying screen.
2
Export Multi-language Text
Figure 2.2.2.13.1 Export Multi-language Text November, 2018
2-85
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
After you export the multi-language text, the software will ask you to save the file to be exported.
2
Figure 2.2.2.13.2 Save the multi-language text export file
Figure 2.2.2.13.3 Saving complete for the multi-language text export file
2-86
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
When saving is complete, please follow the path to open this file. You can see this file contains the multi-language text data of all the elements in the current project file, as shown in the figure below.
2
Figure 2.2.2.13.4 Contents of the multi-language text export file
November, 2018
2-87
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
Import Multi-language Text You can first edit the exported multi-language text before importing the data. See the example below. Change the Chinese text of the 5th line $0.0 to " ON " and add the English text "ON
Button".
Figure 2.2.2.13.5 Contents of the multi-language text import file
2-88
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
2
Figure 2.2.2.13.6 Import Multi-language Text
November, 2018
2-89
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
When you execute Import Multi-language Text, the software will ask you to select the file to be imported.
Figure 2.2.2.13.7 Select the Multi-language Text file to be imported
Figure 2.2.2.13.8 Import complete for the Multi-language Text file
2-90
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
After you import the multi-language text, you can check whether the edited data is completely imported.
Chinese
English
Not imported
2
Imported
Chinese
English
Please refer to Chapter 25 for the usage of Multi-language.
2.2.3 View
The View option on the function list provides the following functions.
Figure 2.2.3.1 View function list
Below is the introduction of Screen Management (Manager) window, Zoom In, Zoom Out, Actual Size, Full Screen, I/O Screen, Grid Settings, Address Cross Reference Table, Element Address List, and Memory List.
November, 2018
2-91
Installation and General Operation
2
DOPSoft User Manual
2-92
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
2.2.3.1 Screen Management
The Screen Management window provided by the DOPSoft allows you to easily view the elements in all screens. You can go to [View] > [Screen Manager] to determine whether to display its window.
2
Figure 2.2.3.1.1 Screen Management window
You can right-click the Screen Management window and execute the actions relevant to the screens.
Figure 2.2.3.1.2 Screen Management window settings
November, 2018
2-93
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
Table 2.2.3.1.1 Screen Management window description
New Screen
Edit Cut Copy Paste Delete
Screen Management window
Like the case of going to [Screen] > [New Screen], you can create a new screen after executing New Screen. Please refer to Section 2.2.4.1 New Screen for the detailed settings.
In the Screen Management window, you can select one screen and click Edit to go to the editing window for this screen.
The actions of Cut, Copy, Paste, and Delete are identical to the actions you execute by going to [Screen] > [Cut Screen] / [Copy Screen] / [Paste Screen] / [Delete Screen]. For the detailed settings, please refer to Section 2.2.4.4 Cut Screen, 2.2.4.5 Copy Screen, 2.2.4.6 Paste Screen, and 2.2.4.7 Delete Screen.
After you copy the screen in the Screen Management window, you can use this function to paste this screen to the screen with the number you specified. This function also supports batch copy, which you can copy multiple screens at once and specify the screen start number and the system automatically number them in sequence.
Paste the specified
screen
Export Rename
Note: if the specified screen number already exists, the system automatically set the screen number plus 1.
Like the case of executing the function by going to [Screen] > [Export], the Export function can export the selected screens and determine whether to display the border. Please refer to Section 2.2.4.8 Export for detailed settings.
Rename the screen name that has previously been set.
This is the same as setting the default screen by going to [Options] > [Configuration] > [Default]. It can set the first screen after HMI booting.
Set as Default Screen
2-94
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
Function Key
Screensaver Screen
Screen Properties
Screen Management window
The function keys are supported on models of B07S201, B07S211, B07S401K, B07S411K, and DOP-H series. If the HMI has no function keys, this function is disabled. Please refer to Section 2.2.4.11 Function Keys for details.
It is the same as setting the screensaver screen by going to [Screen] > [Screensaver]. Please refer to Section 2.2.4.3 Screensaver for detailed settings.
Click Screen Properties and you can set the relevant properties for the screen. You can also set the screen as the subscreen, and specify the screen name, screen height and width, and the X-Y coordinates, etc. Please refer to Section 2.2.4.12 Screen Properties for detailed settings.
2
November, 2018
2-95
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
2.2.3.2 Zoom In Use this function to zoom in the screen for editing. You can also use the icon toolbar to zoom in the image as shown in Table 2.2.3.2.1.
in the zoom
Before: 75%
After: 100%
2-96
Table 2.2.3.2.1 Zoom In function example November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
2.2.3.3 Zoom Out Use this function to zoom out the editing screen. You can also click the toolbar to zoom out the screen as shown in Table 2.2.3.3.1.
icon in the zoom
2
Before: 75%
After: 50%
November, 2018
Table 2.2.3.2.1 Zoom Out function example
2-97
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
2.2.3.4 Actual Size
The Actual Size is to reset the screen display to ratio 100%; this ratio is adjusted based on the
HMI screen. You can also click in Table 2.2.3.4.1.
in the zoom toolbar to reset the display to 100% as shown
Before: 50%
After: 100%
2-98
Table 2.2.3.4.1 Actual Size function example November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
2.2.3.5 Full Screen
This function enables the editing screen to display in full screen and have the set macro line number displayed in the lower left corner of the screen. You can use ESC or left-click the mouse to cancel the display in full screen.
2
Figure 2.2.3.5.1 Full Screen
2.2.3.6 I/O Screen It is very similar to the Full Screen function, the only difference is that the I/O Screen displays the memory addresses on the elements. Similarly, the macro line number set in the editing screen is also displayed and you can click ESC or left-click the mouse to exit the display in full screen.
November, 2018
Figure 2.2.3.6.1 I/O Screen
2-99
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
2.2.3.7 Grid Settings
The Grid Settings has two options, Show Grid and Snap to Grid. When you check Show Grid, the grid is displayed on the editing screen; Snap to Grid helps you to better align the elements while moving them. Apart from that, you can set the spacing for the alignment grid in the range of 4 - 50 in integer. The default spacing of Height and Width is 4.
Figure 2.2.3.7.1 Grid Settings
Uncheck Show Grid
Check Show Grid
2-100
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Set both the height and width spacings to 20.
Spacing
Installation and General Operation
2
Figure 2.2.3.7.1 Grid Settings example
2.2.3.8 Element Address List You can use this function to sort all elements in the screen by the screen number and by element type or address. All properties of the element are listed on the list by their sorting types, including Element Name, Write Address, Read Address, Trigger Address, Trigger Mode, Interlock Address, Interlock State, Data Type, Data Format, and Coordinates, and Height and Width of the element. By Element
November, 2018
Figure 2.2.3.9.1 Element Address List - By Element
2-101
Installation and General Operation By Address
2
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 2.2.3.9.2 Element Address List - By Address 2.2.3.9 Memory List This list enables you to check the memory used by the HMI screen and the remaining memory. You must create the project and compile the data to get this information. The list includes four parts, ROM, Non-Volatile Area, SDRAM, and External Storage.
Table 2.2.3.10.1 Memory List The memory used after you download the screen data to the HMI (including the recipe, screen data, printer data, etc.)
ROM
2-102
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
The default storage location of the non-volatile data is the Non-Volatile Area. When the project file you edited has created data such as the history records and alarms, you can use this section to check the memory usage.
Non-Volatile Area
2
Display the SDRAM space required for the operation of each screen. The calculation of SDRAM is by page. If the project has two pages, the SDRAM displays the data for the two pages.
SDRAM
External Storage
This refers to the memory space of the external storage. When you set the location of the non-volatile area as an external storage device, such as the USB Disk or SD Card, the data blocks originally stored in the non-volatile area (SRAM) are moved to the external storage device.
November, 2018
2-103
Installation and General Operation
2
2.2.4 Screen
The Screen option on the function list provides the following functions.
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 2.2.4.1 Screen function list
2.2.4.1 New Screen
To create a new editing screen, you can go to [Screen] > [New Screen], use
in the General
toolbar, or use the system keyboard shortcut Shift + N. After creating a new screen, you can set
the Screen Name, Screen No., and Screen Type to create. And the Screen Type includes Screen,
Subscreen, and Keypad Screen.
2-104
Figure 2.2.4.1.1 New Screen
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
2.2.4.2 Open Screen
To open a previously created screen, you can go to [Screen] > [Open Screen], use
in the
General toolbar, or use the system keyboard shortcut Shift + O. When you select the screen to
open, you can view all the elements in the screen from the Preview section on the right.
2
Figure 2.2.4.2.1 Open Screen
November, 2018
2-105
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
2.2.4.3 Screensaver
The setting of the DOPSoft Screensaver is the same as that of Windows. To set the screen for the screensaver, drag the screen to the Screensaver Screen section on the right. The steps are as follows: 1. Go to [Screen] > [Screensaver] to go to the Screensaver Setup page.
2. Select the screen for the screensaver from the left section. Left-click the mouse and hold, a green arrow directs you to drag the selected screen.
2-106
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
3. Once the green arrow displays, you can start dragging the screen. In the figure below, Screen_2 is dragged to the Screensaver Screen.
2
4. To delete the screensaver screen, click and hold the screen to be deleted, and the screen with the mark is as shown as follows.
November, 2018
2-107
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
5. Next, left-click the screen to be deleted and hold the mouse button, drag the screen to the All Screens section on the left, and a black X sign will display, then you can release the mouse left button to delete the screen for the Screensaver.
2.2.4.4 Cut Screen To cut the screen, you can go to [Screen] > [Cut Screen], or use the system keyboard shortcut Shift + T. Cut Screen is the same as the cut action for editing general texts. You can cut the screen and paste the screen.
Note: you cannot undo the action after you cut the screen.
Figure 2.2.4.4.1 Cut Screen
2.2.4.5 Copy Screen To copy the screen, you can go to [Screen] > [Copy Screen], or use the system keyboard shortcut Shift + C. You can first copy the screen, click Paste Screen, and then the screen you copied will be pasted, which is similar to the copy action for text editing.
2-108
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
2.2.4.6 Paste Screen To paste the screen, you can go to [Screen] > [Paste Screen], or use the system keyboard shortcut Shift + P. Paste Screen is operable after you cut or copy the screen. After you paste the screen, the software automatically assigns the screen number.
2.2.4.7 Delete Screen To delete the screen, you can go to [Screen] > [Delete Screen], or use the system keyboard shortcut Shift + D.
2
Note: you cannot undo the action after you delete the screen.
Figure 2.2.4.7.1 Delete Screen
2.2.4.8 Export
Save the current screen data as a .bmp image file in the disk. You can go to [Screen] > [Export],
use
in the General toolbar, or use the system keyboard shortcut Shift + E. After you
execute Export, you will be asked whether to show the border on the exported screen.
Figure 2.2.4.8.1 Export Click OK and the default file name is "NewHMI "and the file format is .bmp.
November, 2018
2-109
Installation and General Operation
2
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 2.2.4.8.2 Export and save file
Figure 2.2.4.8.3 Image format after exported
2-110
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
If you have checked Show Border, the image is presented with a bold black border line.
2
Figure 2.2.4.8.4 Image with black border
2.2.4.9 Import
Import any of the images from the file and set it as the background image for this editing screen. Supported image file formats for Import include BMP, JPG, GIF, ICO, and PNG. You can go to [Screen] > [Import] or use the system keyboard shortcut Shift + I.
Figure 2.2.4.9.1 Supported file format for Import Note: 1. The imported background image is different from the base screen. The imported image data is not
treated as an element whereas the base screen is saved as an element in the editing screen after it is compiled. 2. For the definition and usage of the base screen, please refer to 2.2.4.11 Screen Properties.
November, 2018
2-111
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
2.2.4.10 Clear imported data To clear the imported background image, you can simply go to [Screen] > [Clear imported data] to clear the external background image in the current editing screen.
2.2.4.11 Screen Properties The Screen Properties is for setting the properties of the screen. It allows you to set the screen as a subscreen, Display Title Bar, Width and Height, and X-Y coordinates of the subscreen. You can go to [Screen] > [Screen Properties] or click the screen and then select the Screen Properties of the Properties table, as shown in Figure 2.2.4.12.1 and 2.2.4.12.2.
Figure 2.2.4.12.1 Screen Properties
2-112
Figure 2.2.4.12.2 Screen Properties settings
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
Please refer to the table below for the parameter settings of Screen Properties.
Item
Description
Screen No.
The Screen No. is from 1 to 65535 and repeating number for different screens is not allowed.
Screen application
General View
Screen
Apply Print Screen
Set as the General View Screen
Set the screen as the print screen. This option is only operable when the the project file specifies the printer model. For more details, please refer to Chapter 26 Print Setup.
It can set the screen as Screen, Subscreen, Keypad Screen, and Print Screen.
2
Screen:
Width Height
Set the width of the subscreen. The unit is pixel.
Set the height of the subscreen. The unit is pixel.
In the subscreen settings, you can set to [Place at Screen center] or specify its position when screen opened. Please directly input the coordinates or click
to go to the Preview Modification screen to adjust the size or position of the screen, as shown in the figure below.
Subscreen settings
Position of subscreen
display
November, 2018
2-113
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
Item
Description
Checking Show Border means the subscreen displays with a border; leaving Show Border unchecked means the subscreen displays without a border, as shown in the figure below.
Show Border
S u b s c r e e n
Show border
Not to show border
You can set whether to display the title bar and set the corresponding text title based on the set language. In addition, you can set the text size, font, and color.
s e t t i n g s Display Title Bar
Macro Cycle Delay
The interval for executing the Screen Cycle Macro. The range is 100 ms - 5000 ms with the default of 100 ms.
2-114
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
Item Setting
Description
This is operable only when the project file specifies the printer model. For more details, please refer to Chapter 26 Print Setup.
Hard Copy Print range
Top-Left
RightBottom
Set the range to print. The unit is pixel. If you set the Screen as Subscreen, the base screen options are grayed out.
2
Base Screen
Select the Base
Screen you need.
If you set the Screen as Screen, then you can set any of the editing screens as the base screen in all screens. The base screen is placed at the bottom layer as the background image in the editing section.
November, 2018
2-115
Installation and General Operation Item
2
Description
DOPSoft User Manual
Single Multiple
You can go to any of the screens (except for the current screen) and set it as the base screen. The Single option indicates the base screen has only one screen.
The Multiple option indicates all screens except for the current one can be set as the base screen. The main difference between options of Single and Multiple is that you can use multiple screens as base screens when selecting Multiple.
2-116
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
Item
Description
You can use this bit to lock the screen. When the setting value is 1, the screen is locked and you can only select the elements on the current screen; when the setting value is 0, the screen is unclocked and you can select all elements of the HMI. You can set a constant or memory address for the Screen Lock Bit.
Variables
Internal backup memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Screen Lock Bit
Below is the example of Screen Lock Bit.
Create two screens. Set Screen 2 as the subscreen and set the Screen Lock Bit as $100.0.
2
Create a subscreen
Screen Lock Bit
Create two buttons in Screen 1 and set their addresses as $100.0 and $100.1.
Create Maintained
buttons
Create one button in Screen 2 and set its address as $100.2.
November, 2018
2-117
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
Item
2
Description Create a change screen button in Screen 1 and set it to switch to Screen 2.
Create a change screen button
Screen Lock Bit
After creating the element, please compile and download the elements to the HMI. Next, press $100.0 and then press Change to Screen 2. In this case, Screen 2 is locked and you can only press $100.2 on Screen 2. You must close Screen 2 before pressing $100.1 on Screen 1.
(1)
(3)
Execution results
(2)
(1) Press $100.0 to lock Screen 2. (2) Go to Screen 2. (3) After you lock Screen 2, only the element on Screen 2 is operable.
2-118
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
Item
Description
On the other hand, if you switch to Screen 2 without pressing $100.0, as Screen 2 is unlocked, all buttons in Screen 1 and Screen 2 are operable.
If you do not execute $100.0 to lock Screen 2, all buttons in the HMI are operable.
2
Execution results
Press the button to switch to Screen 2 first.
When multiple screens use the Screen Lock Bit, the operable range is determined by the screen opening sequence. The screens opened following the lock screen are all operable; for example, if you switch from Screen 1, Screen 2, Screen 3, and then to Screen 4, if you lock Screen 3, then the selectable range will be Screen 3 and 4, so all elements in Screen 3 and 4 are operable. Screen Lock Bit After Screen 3 is locked, the operable range is Screen 3 and Screen 4.
Note: 1. The embedded subscreen does not support Screen Lock Bit. 2. The subscreen remains locked even when you minimize the screen. 3. You can lock the subscreen even when it has no title setting. Make sure you created the change page
button in case the subscreen cannot be closed. 4. For models without the System Key (refer to Appendix A), when the screen is locked, you can press and
hold the background image to go the system directory.
November, 2018
2-119
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
2.2.4.12 Screen Map The Screen Map enables you to view the linkage between each screen and also allows you to directly change the screen number as required.
The toolbar for Screen Map:
Icon
Function
Description
Zoom In Zoom in to make the screen map appear larger.
Zoom Out Zoom out to make the screen map appear smaller.
1:1
Show the screen map in the original size.
If you add, modify, or delete any screen button, the background color shows in pale yellow when you open the screen map, meaning the linkage between screens have been changed; meanwhile, you can click this button to update all screen numbers.
Update
2-120
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
Icon
Function
Description
It is for selecting the relation lines of multiple screens. The selected screens are linked with red lines.
Multiple Selection
2
When the Screen Map is zoomed in and becomes too large so the screen number cannot be identified, you can use this button to select the node and switch to the linked screen number.
1. Zoom in the Screen Map
Display nodes on the screen after
selection 2.
Click
to select the yellow node of Screen_1.
November, 2018
2-121
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
Icon
Function
Description
3. You will be directed to the screen number linking the yellow node of Screen_1.
Display nodes on the screen after
selection
This function directly changes the original linked screen number to another number on the Screen Map.
1. Select node 001 of Screen_1.
2. After you click
and select Screen_2, the software prompts a message
window showing the original linkage cannot be restored after this change.
If you want to continue, click Yes and node 001 of Screen_1 that is originally
linked to Screen_3 is changed to link to Screen_2.
Select Target Screen
3. The screen number linking to node 001 is changed to Screen_2.
2-122
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
2.2.5 Tools
The Tools option on the function list provides the following functions.
2
Figure 2.2.5.1 Toolbar function list
2.2.5.1 Compile For more user-friendly operation and usage, the DOPSoft provides the Compile function for individual pages. When you create multiple screens but only modify one of them, you can use Compile instead of Compile All to save the time for compiling all the screens.
Edit Screen 2
Execute Compile
Compile Screen 2 only
Display messages in the Output window
Set the screen elements again
Compilation successful
Compilation failed
Figure 2.2.5.1.1 Flowchart of Compile
You can go to [Tools] > [Compile], use shortcut Ctrl+ F7.
on the Layout toolbar, or use the system keyboard
November, 2018
2-123
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
2.2.5.2 Compile All This function is the same as Compile but Compile All is for compiling all screens. In the compiling process, the output column will display the related message. If an error occurs after you execute Compile, the output column also displays the error message to remind you. You can click on this message to check the element in error.
10 screens
Execute Compile All
Compile 10 screens
Display messages in the Output window
Set the screen elements again
Compilation successful
Compilation failed
Figure 2.2.5.2.1 Flowchart of Compile All
Compile and Compile All functions are to ensure no error occurs in the edited screen.
2.2.5.3 Download All Data
Download All Data is for downloading both the screen data and recipes to the HMI. You can go to
[Tools] > [Download All Data], use
on the Layout toolbar, or use the system keyboard
shortcut Ctrl+ F8. When you execute Download All Data, the software detects whether the HMI
is connected with the PC, and if the transmission interface is not enabled, then an error message
will pop up for warning.
2-124
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Normal transmission
Installation and General Operation
Figure 2.2.5.3.1 Download all data
Abnormal transmission The error message pops up when the software fails to access the USB channel.
2
USB channel check
The error message pops up when the transmission cable is removed or the communication is disconnected during data download.
The HMI model name is incorrect. Model check
November, 2018
2-125
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
2.2.5.4 Upload All Data
When uploading all data, the software will prompt you to enter the password, as shown in Figure 2.2.5.4.2. The system default password "12345678 "is input here. You can go to [Options] > [Configuration] to set its password.
Figure 2.2.5.4.1 Set the security password Figure 2.2.5.4.2 Upload All Data
2-126
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
After you enter the password, the software will ask you to save the screen file to be uploaded, as shown in Figure 2.2.5.4.3.
2
Figure 2.2.5.4.3 Save the uploaded data as another file After you set the file and path to be saved, the screen data starts uploading until it reaches 100%. You can also click Stop to stop the data upload.
Figure 2.2.5.4.4 Data uploading
November, 2018
2-127
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
In addition to uploading the screen data to the PC, you can also go to [Options] > [Environment] to set whether to include the picture data when uploading.
Figure 2.2.5.4.5 Include picture data when uploading 2.2.5.5 Download Screen
This function is to download the screen data without any recipe. Its download method is the
same as that of Download All Data (you can refer to Section 2.2.5.3 Download All Data). You can
go to [Tools] > [Download Screen], use
on the Layout toolbar, or use the system keyboard
shortcut Ctrl+ F9.
2-128
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
2.2.5.6 Upload Recipe The method of uploading the recipe and uploading all data is the same; you must enter the password before uploading the recipe. The steps to set the password is identical to the description in Section 2.2.5.4 Upload All Data and you can refer to it if needed.
2.2.5.7 Download Recipe To download the recipe only, you can simply execute Download Recipe. This function allows you to save the time for downloading the screens when you need to change the recipe without changing other screen data. After you execute the function, the software will ask you to select the recipe file (.rcp) to download. Once selected, you can start downloading this recipe file to the HMI.
2
Figure 2.2.5.7.1 Download Recipe - select the recipe file
November, 2018
2-129
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
2.2.5.8 Download Boot Screen To download the boot screen only, you can simply execute Download Boot Screen and then the [Download Logo...] window will pop up.
Figure 2.2.5.8.1 Download Boot Screen
When the boot screen function is disabled and you execute Download Boot Screen, an error occurs as shown below.
Figure 2.2.5.8.2 Enable Download Boot Screen
When you do not select any of the boot screens and execute Download Boot Screen, an error occurs as shown below.
Figure 2.2.5.8.3 Cannot find the boot screen file
Note: 1. After downloading the boot screen or executing Reset Boot Screen, please cycle power on the HMI. 2. The following models do not support boot screens: B04S211, B05S100, B05S101, B07S201, and
B07S211. 3. Supported image file formats include BMP, JPG, GIF, ICO, and PNG.
2-130
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
2.2.5.9 Reset Default Boot Screen To use the Delta HMI default boot screen, you can simply execute Reset Default Boot Screen.
2.2.5.10 On-line Simulation
The On-line simulation is to simulate the PC as the HMI to communicate with the PLC. Its way of
communication is to use the PC's COM port and PLC as the communication interface. If the
communication of the On-line Simulation is OK, the PC is able to simulate the PLC operation.
After executing the On-line Simulation, the software first compiles the data and checks if the
screens are correct. You can go to [Tools] > [On-line Simulation], use
on the Layout toolbar,
or use the system keyboard shortcut Ctrl+F4.
Procedure of On-line Simulation
Compilation failed
Edit screens Set HMI COM port (COM1/COM2/COM3)
2
Compile
Execute On-line Simulation
Communication failed
Compilation successful
Select the COM port for communication between
PC and HMI
Communication successful
The PC is able to simulate the HMI operation
Figure 2.2.5.10.1 Flowchart of On-line Simulation
November, 2018
2-131
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
After you execute the On-line Simulation, the software will ask you to set the PC port number for communicating with the HMI, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 2.2.5.10.2 COM Port Setting
When all settings are correct, the On-line Simulation can start the communication with the PLC on behalf of the HMI.
Figure 2.2.5.10.3 On-line simulation result
2-132
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
There is an option [Ask on every time] in the COM Port Setting which allows you to determine whether to prompt the COM Port Setting window each time you execute the On-line Simulation. If [Ask on every time] is unchecked, you can right-click the mouse on the On-line Simulation screen and select COM Setting to have the window show again, as shown in Figure 2.2.5.10.2.
2
Figure 2.2.5.10.4 Right-click to enter COM Setting
November, 2018
2-133
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
The Monitoring IO function allows you to monitor values of the I/O devices. Right-click the On-line Simulation screen and select Monitor IO, a window pops up (shown in Figure 2.2.5.12.5) and you can start setting and monitoring the I/O devices.
Figure 2.2.5.10.5 Right-click to go to Monitor IO screen
New item New blank Delete item
Table 2.2.5.10.1 Properties of Monitor IO Properties of Monitor IO
Create a new monitoring address with an input box. Add a new monitoring column. Different from New item, you can directly copy and paste the monitoring address instead of using an input box to enter the address.
Delete the selected monitoring address.
Start Monitor Click this button to start monitoring.
Stop Monitor Click this button to stop monitoring.
Device Addr. Device Value
Available options are internal memory and controller register address.
Display the values of the monitoring internal memory or controller register and it also promptly changes the values.
If you are using Delta PLCs, setting the length is not required.
Value Format There are four selectable formats: Signed Decimal, Unsigned Decimal, Hexadecimal, and Bit.
2-134
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
The following section is the example of Monitor IO.
Table 2.2.5.10.2 Monitor IO example
Monitor IO example Create two Numeric Entry elements, and set the write memory address to $500 and {Link2}2@D100.
2
Create Numeric
Entry elements
Step1: click [Tools] > [On-line Simulation].
Enter the Monitor IO
window. Step 2: right-click the simulation screen and select Monitor IO.
D100
$500
November, 2018
2-135
Installation and General Operation
Monitor IO example Step1: click New item to create a new monitoring address.
2
DOPSoft User Manual
Set the monitoring
address
Step 2: select {Link2}2@D100 as the monitoring address.
2-136
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Monitor IO example
After setting is completed, the screen is as follows:
Installation and General Operation
2
Set the monitoring
address
Repeat Step 1 and 2 to set the other monitoring address $500:
November, 2018
2-137
Installation and General Operation Monitor IO example
Press Start Monitor to start monitoring.
2
Start monitoring
the address
DOPSoft User Manual
The Monitor IO window enables you to promptly monitor the set address and monitor the values of {Link2}2@D100 and $500 in the Device Value column as well as modifying the device values in this window.
D100
Execution results
$500
2-138
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
2.2.5.11 Off-line Simulation
The main difference between the Off-line Simulation and On-line Simulation is that the Off-line Simulation does not require PLC communication. In this case, the off-line mode is mainly for checking the correctness of the edited screens, read/write memory addresses, and macros.
You can use [Tools] > [Off-line Simulation], the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+F5.
icon on the Layout toolbar, or the system
After you execute the Off-line Simulation, the software first compiles the data and then goes to
the Off-line Simulation screen.
2
Figure 2.2.5.11.1 Off-line Simulation screen
2.2.5.12 Firmware Update Firmware Update is to update the HMI firmware. This is to ensure the HMI firmware is the latest version and enables the HMI become more stable. Therefore, make sure your software version and HMI firmware version are consistent before using the DOPSoft.
November, 2018
Figure 2.2.5.12.1 Firmware Update
2-139
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
2.2.5.13 Get Firmware Information You can get the firmware version and related information of the HMI by using the option of Get Firmware Information.
Figure 2.2.5.13.1 Get Firmware Information
2-140
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
2.2.5.14 Reset HMI
If you forget the Highest security password and you have selected [Check password when downloading program], you need to enter the password after uploading data to the PC. If you need to go to the system screen to format the screen, password verification is also required. In this condition, HMI data download/upload or screen formatting cannot be done. Therefore, the DOPSoft provides the Reset HMI option for you to restore your HMI to the factory setting, which includes formatting files, deleting all screen data, and clearing passwords, etc.
2
Figure 2.2.5.14.1 Reset HMI
Select Yes to reset the HMI.
Note: 1. After executing this function, the HMI is reset to the default values. 2. After executing this function, the screen data is completely cleared and you are unable to recover the
file of which you forget the password.
November, 2018
2-141
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
2.2.6 Window
The Window function enables you to efficiently arrange the window layout and display, etc.
Figure 2.2.6.1 Window function list
2.2.6.1 Close Current Window Current editing screen displayed in the software is closed after you execute this function.
2.2.6.2 Close All Windows When you execute this function, all windows in the project are closed and no editing window is displayed.
Figure 2.2.6.2.1 Close All Windows
2-142
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
2.2.6.3 Next Window Use this function to go to the next window with the screen number in ascending order.
Table 2.2.6.3.1 Next Window
2
Before
After
November, 2018
2-143
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
2.2.6.4 Previous Window Use this function to go the previous window with the screen number in descending order.
Table 2.2.6.4.1 Previous Window
Before
After
2-144
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
2.2.7 Help
This is for you to acquire the information about the current software version and firmware version.
2
Figure 2.2.7.1 Help function list
Figure 2.2.7.2 Software / firmware version information
November, 2018
2-145
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
2.3 How to create a project?
The following section provides a simple example of how to create a project.
2.3.1 Flowchart of creating a project
Please refer to the flowchart below. This includes the basic steps to create a project.
Start the DOPSoft (1)
Create a new project (2)
Select the HMI model, controller, and
communication format (3)
Create the screen (How to create an
element?) (4)
Compile the screen data (Compile) (5)
Download the screen data to the HMI (6)
Save and close the project (7)
Figure 2.3.1.1 Flowchart of creating a project
2-146
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Next, each step in the procedure is described as follows. 1. Start the DOPSoft.
Installation and General Operation
2
a. Double-click
on the desktop or go to [Start] > [All Programs] > [Delta Industrial
Automation] > [DopSoft 4.00.0x] and execute the DOPSoft 4.00.0x application.
Figure 2.3.1.2 Start the DOPSoft software. b. Execute the DOPSoft 4.00.0x application, and the screen is shown as follows.
November, 2018
Figure 2.3.1.3 DOPSoft displaying screen
2-147
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
2. Create a new project. a. When you successfully start the DOPSoft, the following window pops up. Please click the
Create Project icon
or go to [File] > [New] to create a new project.
Figure 2.3.1.4 Click the icon to create a new project
Figure 2.3.1.5 Click New... to create a new project
3. Select the HMI model, controller, and communication format. a. After the project is created, the Project Wizard will guide you to select the HMI model,
controller, and communication format. In the example below, it selects DOP-107WV as the model and name this project as "NewHMI".
2-148
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual The steps are as follows: (1) Select the HMI model. (2) Input the project name. (3) Click Next.
(1)
1)
Installation and General Operation
2
(2)
(3) Figure 2.3.1.6 Select the HMI model and input project name
November, 2018
2-149
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
b. Next, please select the communication port, controller, and communication format, etc. You can use the up and down arrows at the upper left corner to select COM1, COM2, or COM3 to be used. Please refer to Section 27.2 Communication Settings for more details. In the example below, COM 2 and Delta DVP PLC is selected.
Use the up and down arrows to select the COM port to use.
Select the controller to be used and its manufacturer and series.
Communication Parameters settings
Click Finish to create the project.
Figure 2.3.1.7 Select the communication port, controller, and communication format
4. Create the screen (How to create an element) a. Follow the Project Wizard and you can start creating a new project. Now, you can start
editing the screen and creating elements.
2-150
Figure 2.3.1.8 Editing screen
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
Below is the demonstration for using the Set to On, Set to Off, Momentary, and Maintained buttons (go to [Element] > [Button]) with the Multistate indicator (go to [Element] > [Indicator]). The software provides three methods for you to create the element and you can choose based on your preference. Please refer to the table for the available methods.
Method 1: Function list
Method 2: Element toolbar
2
November, 2018
2-151
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
Method 3: right-click the mouse in the editing screen.
2-152
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
b. If you use the Element function list to create the Set to On, Set to Off, Momentary, and
Maintained buttons from the Button option and the Multistate Indicator element from the
Indicator option, you must input the memory addresses to have these elements work.
To have users to know the function of each element, all the created elements will have their
own text description and the set memory addresses. Please refer to the following steps to
create the elements:
Steps to create the elements: Go to [Element] > [Button], and select the Set to On, Set to Off, Momentary, and
Maintained elements. Double-click or select the elements to set the memory address with the Properties
window on the right. Set M0 as the Write Addresses for Set to On and Set to Off; set M10 as the Write Address for the Momentary button; set M20 as the Write Address for the Maintained button.
2
Step1
November, 2018
2-153
Installation and General Operation
2
Steps to create the elements:
DOPSoft User Manual
Step1
2-154
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
Steps to create the elements:
2
Step1
Double-click the element and go to the Text page to input the corresponding text. Input "Set On (1@M0) "for both State 0 and State 1 of the Set to On button. Input "Set Off (1@M0) "for State 0 and State 1 of the Set to Off button. Input "(1@M10) "for State 0 and State 1 of the Momentary button. Input "(1@M20) "for State 0 and State 1 of the Maintained button.
November, 2018
2-155
Installation and General Operation
Steps to create the elements:
2
DOPSoft User Manual
2-156
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
Steps to create the elements:
After you created the Set to On, Set to Off, Momentary, and Maintained elements, the screen is shown as follows.
2
Note: Set to On, Set to Off, Momentary, and Maintained elements all have actions for State 0 and State 1. You can double-click the elements to set State 0 and State 1 or use the upper right corner of the Properties window to view State 0 and State 1.
Step1
November, 2018
2-157
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
Steps to create the elements:
Click [Elements] > [Indicator] > [Multistate Indicator]. Create three Multistate Indicator elements corresponding to Write addresses of the Set to On / Set to Off, Momentary and Maintained elements respectively.
After you double-click or select the element, use the Properties window on the right to set the memory address. The setting method of memory address is the same as that of button elements; you can set Data Type to Bit and State Counts to 2.
a. Set the Read Address of the Multistate Indicator as M0 to correspond to the Set to On and Set to Off buttons.
b. Set the Read Address of the Multistate Indicator as M10 to correspond the Momentary button.
c. Set the Read Address of the Multistate Indicator as M20 to correspond to the Maintained button.
Step2 Double-click the element and go to the Text page to input the corresponding text. 1. Input "Multistate Indicator(1@M0) OFF "for State 0; input "Multistate Indicator(1@M0) ON " for State 1.
State 0
2-158
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual State 1
Installation and General Operation Steps to create the elements:
2
2. Input "Multistate Indicator 1@M10 OFF" for State 0; input "Multistate Indicator 1@M10 ON " for State 1.
Step2
State 0
November, 2018
2-159
Installation and General Operation Steps to create the elements:
2
State 1
DOPSoft User Manual
3. Input "Multistate Indicator(1@M20) OFF "for State 0; input "Multistate Indicator(1@M20) ON "for State 1.
Step2
State 0
2-160
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual State 1
Installation and General Operation Steps to create the elements:
2
November, 2018
2-161
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
2
Steps to create the elements:
Double-click the three Multistate Indicator elements you just created and go to the Main page. Change the Foreground Color of State 1 to red for differentiating State 0 from State 1.
Step2
Note: the Multistate Indicator changes its state value depending on the State Counts. Since there are different settings, Set to On, Set to Off, Momentary, and Maintained (with State 0 and 1), you can double-click the element to set the State Counts in the Main page.
2-162
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
Steps to create the elements: After you created the elements, the screen is shown as follows.
2
Step3
5. Compile The purpose of compiling the screens is to ensure the memory address format you use is correct and check if you have input the memory address. There are two compiling methods. The first is to go to [Tools] > [Compile All] in the function list.
November, 2018
Figure 2.3.1.9 Compile All
2-163
Installation and General Operation
DOPSoft User Manual
The second method is using the Compile All icon
on the Layout toolbar.
2
After the compilation, the Output Message is shown as Figure 2.3.1.10.
Figure 2.3.1.10 Output window for data compilation
2-164
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
6. Download screen data to the HMI When compilation is successful, it means the screen you configure is correct and you can start downloading the screen data to the HMI. The following is the three methods of downloading screen data. Method 1: go to [Tools] > [Download All Data].
2
Figure 2.3.1.11 Tools function list - Download All Data
Method 2: use the download screen data icon
on the Layout toolbar.
Method 3: use the system keyboard shortcut Ctrl + F8. Make sure the USB cable is connected between the HMI and PC and the PLC communication cable is connected to COM 2. Next, you can start downloading the screen data to the HMI. Then, the software displays the downloading progress as shown in the figure below.
Figure 2.3.1.12 Downloading the screen data a. After downloading the screen data is complete, you can check the HMI to see if the screen is
identical to the screen edited with the PC and check if an error occurs.
November, 2018
2-165
Installation and General Operation
2
b. The following is the button actions.
Operation
Touch button
Results
Press Set to On and the Multistate Indicator 1@M0 displays ON.
DOPSoft User Manual
Set to ON
If you press Set to Off, the Multistate Indicator 1@M0 displays OFF.
Set to OFF
If you press Momentary, the Multistate Indicator 1@M10 displays ON; once you release this button, the Multistate Indicator 1@M10 displays OFF. Momentary
If you press Maintained, the Multistate Indicator 1@M20 continues to display ON. To cancel the ON state, re-press Maintained.
Maintained
2-166
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Installation and General Operation
7. Save and close the project. Please save the screen you just edited before closing the project. You can save the project with three methods: Method 1: go to [File] > [Save] in the function list.
2
Figure 2.3.1.13 File function list - Save file
Method 2: use the save icon
in the General toolbar.
Method 3: use the system keyboard shortcut Ctrl + S. Once you saved the project, the software prompts a window to ask for the file saving destination and filename. If you follow the Project Wizard to create a project, the default project name is "test", so the filename remains "test "after you click Save. You can change the filename and this action will not change the project operation.
November, 2018
2-167
Installation and General Operation
2
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 2.3.1.15 Save as file window
After saving the project, you can go the destination folder to check if the project file is saved. To re-open the project, double-click the file or directly execute the DOPSoft and go to [File] > [Open...], as shown in the figure below.
Figure 2.3.1.16 File function list � Open...
You can also click the open file icon
in the General toolbar to open the existing file.
2-168
November, 2018
Internal Memory
This chapter introduces the internal memory addresses and storage range of the HMI.
3.1 Internal Register ($) �������������������������������������������������������������������������3-3 3.2 Non-volatile Internal Register ($M) ������������������������������������������������������3-3 3.3 Indirect Address Register (*$) �������������������������������������������������������������3-3 3.4 Internal Parameter ���������������������������������������������������������������������������3-5
November, 2018
3-1
Internal Memory
DOPSoft User Manual
3
Delta's HMI has registers of twelve different functions, including: 1. Internal register ($) 2. Non-volatile internal register ($M) 3. Indirect address register (*$) 4. Recipe register (RCP) 5. Recipe number register (RCPNO) 6. Recipe group register (RCPG) 7. Recipe indirect address register (*RCP) 8. Enhanced recipe register (ENRCP) 9. Enhanced recipe number register (ENRCPNO) 10. Enhanced recipe group register (ENRCPG) 11. Enhanced recipe group name register (ENRCPGNAME) 12. Enhanced recipe indirect address register (*ENRCP)
The fourth to twelfth registers are introduced and explained along with the 16-bit, 32-bit, and enhanced recipe in Chapter 23.
Figure 3.1.1 HMI Internal Memory
3-2
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Internal Memory
3.1 Internal Register ($)
The internal register is the HMI internal memory that freely reads data and supports all kinds of configurations, such as the element communication address, etc. The internal register is volatile so the data in the register is not maintained when the power is off. The HMI provides 65536 sets of 16-bit internal registers.
Access type Word Bit
Note: n = Word (0 - 65535); b - Bit (0 - 15)
Device type $n $n.b
Storage range $0 - $65535 $0.0 - $65535.15
3
3.2 Non-volatile Internal Register ($M)
The register is a non-volatile register. The data in the register is maintained when the power is off so that you can record important data in this register. The HMI provides 1024 sets of 16-bit non-volatile internal registers ($M0.0 - $M1023.15).
Access type Word Bit
Note: n = Word (0 - 1023); b = Bit (0 - 15)
Device type $Mn $Mn.b
Storage range $0 - $1023
$0.0 - $1023.15
3.3 Indirect Address Register (*$)
The indirect address register is volatile so the data in the register is not maintained when the power is off.
Access type Word
Note: n = Word (0 - 65535)
Device type *$n
Storage range $0 - $65535
The indirect address register (*$n) obtains the value from $n, sets the value as a new address, and then accesses the value from the new address. For instance, $10 = 101, and $101 = 55, so *$10 = 55. See Figure 3.3.1.
November, 2018
3-3
Internal Memory
3
$10 101
Indirect address
*$10 55
Memory address
$100
Value
$101 55 $102 $103 $104
Figure 3.3.1 Diagram of indirect address
DOPSoft User Manual
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Function element
Indirect address register
Figure 3.3.2 Example of indirect address register
Step 1 2 3
4
Executing content
Create a Numeric Entry element and set the write address to $10. Create a Numeric Entry element and set the write address to $10. Create a Numeric Entry element and set the write address to $101.
Use the button
to compile the data and download to the HMI.
Firstly, input 101 to the element $10; next, input any value to the
element $101; then, you can find that *$10 automatically generates
the value data inputted to $101.
3-4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Internal Memory
3.4 Internal Parameter
The HMI provides the Internal Parameter aside from the eleven kinds of internal memory. The Internal Parameter enables you to check the HMI internal state values through these parameters, including system time value (TIME_YEAR, TIME_MONTH, etc.), external storage device status (SD_STATUS and USB_STATUS), touch X / Y coordinate (TP_X and TP_Y), touch status (TP_STATUS), remaining battery voltage in percentage (BATTERY_VOLTAGE), network parameter (NET1_IP1, NET1_IP2, NET1_IP3, NET1_IP4), and firmware version (FW_VERSION1 and FW_VERSION2), etc.
3
Note: the Internal Parameter function is available only for Word elements. You are unable to select this function if you create Bit elements.
November, 2018
3-5
Internal Memory
DOPSoft User Manual
3
When using Word elements to set the memory address, you can select Internal Parameter from the pull-down menu of the Link to select the 39 kinds of internal parameters available from the HMI.
Figure 3.4.1 Internal Parameter
3-6
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Internal Memory
TP_STATUS TP_X
Table 3.4.1 Internal Parameter
Internal Parameter
HMI panel state value
State value
Result
0
Panel not touched, 0.
1
Panel touched, 1.
X / Y coordinate when touching the panel.
Coordinate
Result
X
X
Y
TP_Y
Y
TIME_YEAR
Display the HMI system time, including yyyy / mm / dd / hr / mi / se.
Time / Date
Result
TIME_MONTH TIME_DAY TIME_HOUR
TIME_MINUTE TIME_SECOND
BATTER_VOLTAGE
TIME_YEAR (yyyy)
TIME_MONTH (mm)
TIME_DAY (dd)
TIME_HOUR (hr)
TIME_MINUTE (mi)
TIME_SECOND (se)
Display the remaining battery voltage in percentage (%).
3
NET_IP1 NET_IP2 NET_IP3 NET_IP4
Display the HMI IP address, e.g. 192.168.123.62:
NET_IP
Result
NET_IP1
NET_IP2
NET_IP3
NET_IP4
November, 2018
3-7
Internal Memory
DOPSoft User Manual
3
SUBMASK_IP1 SUBMASK_IP2 SUBMASK_IP3 SUBMASK_IP4
GWAY_IP1 GWAY_IP2 GWAY_IP3 GWAY_IP4
SD_STATUS
USB_STATUS
Internal Parameter
Display the HMI SUBMASK_IP address, e.g. 255.255.255.0:
SUBMASK_IP
Result
SUBMASK_IP1
SUBMASK_IP2
SUBMASK_IP3
SUBMASK_IP4
Display the HMI GATEWAY_IP address, e.g. 192.168.123.254:
GWAY_IP
Result
GWAY _IP1
GWAY _IP2
GWAY _IP3
GWAY _IP4
Display the HMI state value for an external storage device SD card.
State value
Result
0
SD card not inserted, 0.
1
SD card inserted, 1.
Display the HMI state value for an external storage device USB disk.
State value
Result
0
USB disk not inserted, 0.
1
USB disk inserted, 1.
Display the HMI network connection.
The parameter function sorts the newly-added EthernetLink device number in sequence. If the device is connected, it displays 1; not connected, 0.
Please set the Data Format as Binary when setting the internal parameter.
NET_STATUS
3-8
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Internal Memory
NET_MAC1
Internal Parameter
Display the MAC address of the HMI network port. Please set the Data Format as Hexadecimal when setting this internal
parameter.
3
NET_MAC2
NET_MAC3 REMO_COUNT
The display position for high / low digits is in reverse. When NET_MAC1 displays 1800, it refers to 00:18.
Display the amount of HMI being connected to remote devices, including eServer, asynchronous eRemote, and LUA Online debug.
FW_VERSION1
DOP-103WQ 65536 Colors � Version: 1.0018
Main version
Sub-version
November, 2018
3-9
Internal Memory
3
DOPSoft User Manual
Internal Parameter Display the HMI firmware main version Please set the Data Format as Hexadecimal when setting this internal
parameter.
Display the HMI firmware sub-version. Please set the Data Format as Hexadecimal when setting this internal
parameter.
FW_VERSION2
3-10
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Internal Memory
Internal Parameter
Display the total amount of alarm triggered so far, including the triggered and canceled ones.
DOP-100 presents the alarm messages by recording the triggered and canceled alarm messages within one set of data. As a result, Alarm_Count shows ten sets of data when there are ten alarm messages.
3
ALARM_COUNT
The function reminds you to export alarm messages to prevent the initial alarm message contents from being removed when the sets of data reach the set maximum amount.
ACCOUNT Program_Status
Display the current account logged in.
If your account contains English and figures, you can use the Character Display elements to display; if your account contains non-ASCII characters, please use the Multi-language input elements for display.
This parameter acquires Lua's operating state.
State value
Result
0
Stop
1
Operate
2
Break point
3
Pause
November, 2018
3-11
Internal Memory
3
DNS1_IP1
Internal Parameter Display the Domain Name Server IP address of the HMI.
DNS1_IP2
DNS1_IP3
DNS1_IP4
DOPSoft User Manual
3-12
November, 2018
Control Block and Status Block
This chapter illustrates how the HMI uses the Control Block and Status Block commands.
4.1 Control Block ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������4-8 4.2 Status Block����������������������������������������������������������������������������������4-21
November, 2018
4-1
Control Block and Status Block
DOPSoft User Manual
4
The DOPSoft provides the Control Block and Status Block functions for you to execute or monitor part of the system operation or status. You can define the memory start address of the Control Block and Status Block by going to [Options] > [Configuration] > [Control Block].
Figure 4.1 Configuration
4-2
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Control Block and Status Block
4
Figure 4.2 Control Block and Status Block
November, 2018
4-3
Control Block and Status Block
DOPSoft User Manual
4
The DOPSoft provides the Control Block and Status Block configurations for you to select the functions based on your needs, which is different from the conventional Screen Editor. Take the Control Block for instance. As long as you check Screen No. and Recipe Group Number, the Control Block configures them in continuous address automatically, and enables the applications of screen switch and recipe group number. See Figure 4.3.
Figure 4.3 DOPSoft Control Block
4-4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Control Block and Status Block
If you check one more function, General Control, the memory addresses are arranged in continuous sequence from top to bottom. See Figure 4.4.
4
Figure 4.4 DOPSoft Control Block
Sampling Cycle The Sampling Cycle enables you to control the sampling time flexibly. The default sampling cycle time is 300 ms, denoting that the interval for executing sampling is 300 ms. The minimum sampling cycle is 200 ms; the maximum sampling cycle is 1000 ms.
November, 2018
4-5
Control Block and Status Block
DOPSoft User Manual
4
Auto Reset Flags To reactivate some of functions in the Control Block, you must turn the flag OFF and then ON again. You can check Auto Reset Flags and the HMI automatically resets the flags.
Figure 4.5 Auto Reset Flags
4-6
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Control Block and Status Block
Control Block Data Format You can set the Data Format to either Unsigned Decimal or BCD.
4
Figure 4.6 Control Block - Data Format
November, 2018
4-7
Control Block and Status Block
DOPSoft User Manual
4
4.1 Control Block
You can define the register addresses of the Control Block in the controller or the HMI internal memory. You can control the HMI operations with the Control Block settings, such as screen switch, backlight disabling, security settings, curve and history buffer sampling or clearing, recipe control, enhanced recipe control, multi-language settings, printing, etc. The Control Block is a continuous data block in word as the unit.
Table 4.1.1 Control Block - Register type
Control Block register type
Screen No. General control Curve control History buffer sampling History buffer clearing Recipe control Recipe group number System control flag Enhanced recipe control Enhanced recipe group control
Controller register
Register (D) Example
Dn
D0
Dn+1
D1
Dn+2
D2
Dn+3
D3
Dn+4
D4
Dn+5
D5
Dn+6
D6
Dn+7
D7
Dn+8
D8
Dn+9
D9
Internal memory
Register ($) Example
$n
$15
$n+1
$16
$n+2
$17
$n+3
$18
$n+4
$19
$n+5
$20
$n+6
$21
$n+7
$22
$n+8
$23
$n+9
$24
Screen number register
Table 4.1.2 Control Block - Screen number register
Screen number register Write the designated screen number into the register, and the HMI switches to the
designated screen. As the example shown below, if you set the address of a Numeric Entry element
as D0 and input its value as 1, the HMI switches to the first screen.
DELTA
D0 = 1
b0 - b15 �
Screen number
Screen 2
Screen 1
4-8
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Control Block and Status Block
Control Block - General control register
Table 4.1.3 Control Block - General control register General control register
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
4
(10)
(9)
(8) (7) (6) (5) (4) (3) (2) (1)
(1) b0 Communication enable / disable flag (2) b1 Backlight enable / disable flag (3) b2 Buzzer enable / disable flag (4) b3 Alarm buffer clear flag (5) b4 Alarm counter clear flag (6) b5 External storage device cache write flag (7) b6 Remote control lock (8) b7 HMI VGA mode (B10VS511)
(9) b8 - b10 Set user security level
(10) b11 - b15 Reserved
Enable / disable the HMI communication. To use the communication enable / disable flag, click [Options] > [Communication Settings], check [Disconnect after communication interrupt], and set the retry times. See the following figure.
b0 � Communication enable / disable
flag
When the HMI communicates with the controller, the HMI automatically stops the communication with the controller and turns the flag ON after the interruption times reach the set retry times without a communication error message popping up (this does not affect the communication between the HMI and other controllers). You can restore the communication between the HMI and the controller by turning the flag OFF.
November, 2018
4-9
Control Block and Status Block
4
DOPSoft User Manual
General control register
Com munica tio n interruption times reach
the set retry time
Communication interrupted
Communication resumed
Communication enable / disable flag
OFF
ON
OFF
The flag is only for restoring the communication when it is automatically stopped. You cannot directly stop the communication between the HMI and any controller by turning the flag ON.
The Auto Reset Flags function is not applicable to this flag.
b1 �
Backlight
enable / disable
flag
Enable / disable the HMI backlight. When the flag is ON, the HMI backlight is disabled. When the flag is OFF, the HMI backlight is enabled. The Auto Reset Flags function is not applicable to this flag.
b2 � Buzzer enable / disable flag
Enable / disable the HMI buzzer. When the flag is ON, the HMI buzzer is enabled. When the flag is OFF, the HMI buzzer is disabled. The Auto Reset Flags function is not applicable to this flag.
b3 � Alarm buffer
clear flag
Clear the HMI alarm buffer. When the flag is turned ON, the HMI clears the alarm buffer. To reactivate the function, you must turn the flag OFF and then ON again.
b4 �
Clear the HMI Alarm Frequency Table. When the flag is turned ON, the data in the
Alarm counter Alarm Frequency Table is cleared. To reactivate the function again, you must turn the
clear flag flag OFF and then ON again.
4-10
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Control Block and Status Block
General control register
Update the HMI cache data into a USB Disk or an SD Card in real time. If the alarm buffer, history buffer or recipe function is activated, and the non-volatile storage location is set to a USB Disk or an SD Card, when the flag is turned ON, the HMI updates the data temporarily stored in the cache into a USB Disk or an SD Card in real time. To reactivate the function again, you must turn the flag OFF and then ON again.
The data written into a USB Disk or an SD Card by the HMI is temporarily stored in the cache first. Before the cache data size reaches the set limit, the data is not written into a USB Disk or an SD Card. This is to keep the USB Disk or SD Card from being damaged by frequent overwriting. However, if the data volume you are accessing is less than the buffer capacity or the power is cut off unexpectedly, part of the data may be lost. To keep the data, you can have the flag turned ON in a cyclic pattern to write the data into the USB Disk or SD Card.
b5 � External storage device cache write flag
4
b6 � Remote control lock
Enable / disable the operation of eRemote. When the flag is ON, eRemote can only be monitored rather than be operated. When the flag is OFF, eRemote can be operated properly. The Auto Reset Flags function is not applicable to this flag.
This bit is only available for the B10VS511 series.
Interconnect COM1 from B10VS511 and COM from DMV; interconnect VGA Port from B10VS511 and VGA Port from DMV. Then, enable the Bit to enter VGA mode.
b7 �
HMI <-> VGA Mode
(B10VS511)
Note:
1. Set the communication protocol station number on DMV communication settings.
2. Complete the output settings in DMV program menu / Output / RS-232. (The PLC station number is not equal to DMV station number in this case. Please do not change the PLC station number. Select MODBUS mode in the output settings.)
3. The communication between DMV and HMI must apply RS-232 and no crossover. (2 2, 3 3).
4. Please select Delta Controller ASCII for communication setting on the HMI side, and the station number must be consistent with DMV.
When it is in VGA mode, a nine-square grid appears on the HMI. You can return to the HMI mode by clicking the top-right corner.
November, 2018
4-11
Control Block and Status Block
4
General control register
DOPSoft User Manual
b8, b9, b10 �
Set user security level
The Auto Reset Flags function is not applicable to this flag.
You can change the current HMI user security by activating the flags of Bit 8, Bit 9, and Bit 10 provided by the general control registers. The HMI internal security level includes: a. Security level 0 - 7: 0 refers to the lowest security level. b. Highest security level: cannot be controlled by these three flags.
You can set security level 0 to 7 with the three flags. Refer to the following table for more details on settings.
Security level
Bit 10
Flag control Bit 9
Bit 8
Security level 0
0
0
0
Security level 1
0
0
1
Security level 2
0
1
0
Security level 3
0
1
1
Security level 4
1
0
0
Security level 5
1
0
1
Security level 6
1
1
0
Security level 7
1
1
1
4-12
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Control Block and Status Block
Curve control register
Table 4.1.4 Control Block - Curve control register Curve control register
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
4
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(1) b0 - b3 Curve sampling flags 1 - 4
(2) b4 - b7 Reserved
(3) b8 - b11 Curve clear flags 1 - 4
(4) b12 - 15 Reserved
The DOPSoft provides four curve sampling flags. The curves include the Trend Graph and X-Y Chart of which curve drawing action is controlled by the curve sampling flags.
If the flag is turned ON, the corresponding curve element samples and draws the curve on the elements. To reactivate the function, you must turn flag OFF and then ON again.
The sampling flag 1 of the Trend Graph element corresponds to the curve sampling flag 1; the sampling flag 2 of the Trend Graph element corresponds to the curve sampling flag 2, and so forth.
b0 - b3 �
Curve sampling flags
(1 - 4)
November, 2018
4-13
Control Block and Status Block
DOPSoft User Manual
4
Curve control register
The DOPSoft provides four curve clear flags. The curves include the Trend Graph and X-Y Chart of which curve clearing action is controlled by the curve clear flags.
If the flag is turned ON, the corresponding Curve element clears the element curves. To reactivate the function, you must turn the flag OFF and then ON again.
The curve element sampling flag 1 corresponds to the curve clear flag 1; the curve element sampling flag 2 corresponds to the curve clear flag 2, and so forth.
b8 - b11 �
Curve clear flags (1 - 4)
4-14
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Control Block and Status Block
History buffer sampling register
Table 4.1.5 Control Block - History buffer sampling register History buffer sampling register
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
4
(2)
(1)
(1) b0 - b11 History buffer sampling flags 1 - 12 (b0 refers to flag 1, and so forth.)
(2) b12 - b15 Reserved
The history buffer sampling register can record up to twelve sets of history buffer
data. Each buffer corresponds to a history buffer sampling flag. To execute sampling with the history buffer sampling flags of the control block, you must set PLC for Trigger Source of the history buffer.
b0 - b11 �
History buffer sampling flags
(1 - 12)
You can determine the sampling timing by triggering the history buffer sampling
flags. When the history buffer sampling flag is ON, the register samples one time. To reactivate the function, you must turn the flag OFF and then ON again.
History buffer clear register
Table 4.1.6 Control Block - History buffer clear register History buffer clear register
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
(2)
(1)
(1) (2)
b0 - b11 � History buffer
clear flags (1 - 12)
b0 - b11 History buffer clear flags 1 - 12 (b0 refers to flag 1, and so forth.) b12 - b15 Reserved
You can clear the buffer by triggering the history buffer clear flags. When the history buffer clear flag is ON, the HMI clears the buffer. To reactivate the function, you must turn the flag OFF and then ON again.
November, 2018
4-15
Control Block and Status Block
DOPSoft User Manual
4
Recipe control register
Table 4.1.7 Control Block - Recipe control register Recipe control register
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
(6)
(5)
(4) (3) (2) (1)
(1) b0 Recipe group change flag (16-bit) (2) b1 Recipe read flag (PLC HMI) (3) b2 Recipe write flag (HMI PLC) (4) b3 Recipe group change flag (32-bit) (5) b4 - b7 Reserved (6) b8 - b15 Designate recipe group number
This is applicable to 16-bit recipes. There are two ways to call or change the recipe group number:
a. Directly change from the HMI internal register RCPNO.
b0 �Recipe group change
flag
b1 � Recipe read flag
(PLC HMI) b2 � Recipe
write flag (HMI PLC)
Numeric Entry element
b. Change with the recipe group change flag To change the HMI recipe group number with this flag, you should first write the
recipe group to be changed into the recipe group control register (Table 4.1.8 recipe group control register) and trigger the recipe group change flag. When the recipe group change flag is turned ON, the recipe group number is changed according to the number defined in the recipe group control register, and the number of the RCPBO internal register is changed automatically. To reactivate the function, you must turn the flag OFF and then ON again.
When the recipe read flag is turned ON, the HMI reads the controller recipe data and writes them into the designated recipe data register. To reactivate the function, you must turn the flag OFF and then ON again.
When recipe write flag is turned ON, the HMI writes the designated recipe data into the controller register. To reactivate the function, you must turn the flag OFF and then ON again.
This is applicable to 32-bit recipes. There are two ways to call or change the recipe group number:
a. Directly change from the HMI internal register RCPG.
b3 � Recipe group change
flag
Numeric Entry element
b8 - b15 Designate recipe group number to be changed
b. Change with the recipe group change flag. When the recipe group change flag is turned ON, the recipe group number is
changed according to the number defined in the recipe group change bits (b8 b15), and the number of the RCPG internal register is changed automatically. To reactivate the function, you must turn the flag OFF and then ON again.
You can designate the recipe group number to be changed with the high byte (Bits 8 -15) from the recipe control register. By activating the recipe group change flag, the HMI changes the number of the RCPG internal register, thus changing the recipe group.
4-16
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Control Block and Status Block
Recipe group control register
Table 4.1.8 Control Block - Recipe group control register Recipe group control register
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
4
Recipe group designation
b0 - b15 �
Recipe group designation
You can designate the recipe group number to be changed with the recipe group control register. By activating the recipe group change flag (Table 4.1.7 recipe control register b0), the HMI automatically changes the number of the RCPG internal register, thus changing the recipe group.
System control flag register
Table 4.1.9 Control Block - System control flag register System control flag register
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
(4)
(3) (2)
(1)
(1) b0 - b7 Multi-language setting values (2) b8 Printer flag (3) b9 Printer form feed flag (4) b10 - b15 Reserved
The system supports 32 languages. You can change the multi-language settings to switch languages. You can click [Options] > [Configurations] > [Multi-language] to edit the multi-language settings. See the following figure.
b0 - b7 �
Multi-language setting values
November, 2018
4-17
Control Block and Status Block
DOPSoft User Manual
4
System control flag register Please note that only one option is enabled at the same time. The screen layout
mode is prioritized. When the printer flag is turned ON, the printing task runs according to the set
mode: Print general screen or Screen Print Setup; when the printer flag is OFF, the printer function is idled.
Printer action process
Start
No
b8 � Printer flag
OFF
Read printer status
Yes
Printer flag
ON
layout printing or general printing
End
When the printer form feed flag is turned ON, the printer retracts the paper and align the paper for the next run automatically; when the flag is OFF, the printer form feed function is idled.
Printer action process
Start
No
Read printer status
b9 - Printer form feed flag
OFF
Yes
Printer form feed flag
ON
The printer prints the next page automatically.
End
4-18
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Control Block and Status Block
Enhanced recipe control register
Table 4.1.10 Control Block - Enhanced recipe control register Enhanced recipe control register
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
4
(6)
(5)
(4) (3) (2) (1)
(1) b0 Enhanced recipe group change flag (ENRCPNO) (2) b1 Enhanced recipe read flag (PLC HMI) (3) b2 Enhanced recipe write flag (HMI PLC) (4) b3 Enhanced recipe group change flag (ENRCPG) (5) b4 - b7 Reserved (6) b8 - b15 Designate enhanced recipe group number to be changed
This is applicable to enhanced recipes. There are two ways to call or change the enhanced recipe group:
a. Directly change from the HMI internal register ENRCPNO.
b0 � Enhanced recipe group change flag
Numeric Entry
element
b. Change with the enhanced recipe group change flag.
To change the HMI enhanced recipe group number with this flag, you should first write the enhanced recipe group to be changed into the recipe group control register (Table 4.1.11 enhanced recipe group control register) and trigger the enhanced recipe group change flag.
When the enhanced recipe group change flag is turned ON, the enhanced recipe group number is changed according to the number defined in the enhanced recipe group control register, and the number in the internal register ENRCPNO is changed automatically. To reactivate the function, you must turn the flag OFF and then ON again.
b1 � Enhanced recipe read flag (PLC HMI)
When the enhanced recipe read flag is turned ON, the HMI reads the controller enhanced recipe data and writes them into the designated enhanced recipe data register. To reactivate the function, you must turn the flag OFF and then ON again.
b2 � Enhanced recipe write flag (HMI PLC)
When the enhanced recipe write flag is turned ON, the HMI writes the designated enhanced recipe data into the controller register. To reactivate the function, you must turn the flag OFF and then ON again.
This is applicable to enhanced recipes. There are two ways to call or change enhanced recipe group:
a. Directly change from the HMI internal register ENRCPG.
b3 � Enhanced recipe group change flag
Numeric Entry element
b. Change with the enhanced recipe group change flag.
When the enhanced recipe group change flag is turned ON, the enhanced change recipe group number is changed according to the number defined in the enhanced change recipe group (b8 - b15), and the number in the internal register ENRCPG is changed automatically. To reactivate the function, you must turn the flag OFF and then ON again.
b8 - b15 Designate enhanced recipe group number to be changed
You can designate the enhanced recipe group number to be changed with the high byte (Bits 8 -15) from the enhanced recipe control register. By activating the enhanced recipe group change flag, the HMI changes the number in the internal register ENRCPG, thus changing the enhanced recipe group.
November, 2018
4-19
Control Block and Status Block
DOPSoft User Manual
4
Enhanced recipe group control register
Table 4.1.11 Control Block - Enhanced recipe group control register Enhanced recipe group control register
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Enhanced recipe group designation
b0 - b15 �
Enhanced recipe group designation
You can designate the enhanced recipe group number to be changed with the enhanced recipe group control register. By activating the enhanced change recipe group flag (Table 4.1.10 enhanced recipe control register b0), the HMI changes the number of the ENRCPNO internal register, thus changing the enhanced recipe group.
4-20
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Control Block and Status Block
4.2 Status Block
You can define the register addresses of the Status Block in the controller or the HMI internal memory. You can view the present HMI status with the Status Block settings, such as current screen number, current security level, curves and history buffer sampling status, recipe control, enhanced recipe control, multi-language settings, printing, etc. The Status Block is a continuous data block in word as the unit as well.
4
Note: when the function of Control Block is not configured, the Status Block cannot monitor the status. Furthermore, the addresses of the Control Block and the Status Block must not be identical.
Table 4.2.1 Status Block - Register type
Status Block register type
General control status Screen number status Curve control status History buffer sampling status History buffer clear status Recipe control status Recipe group control status System control flag status Enhanced recipe control status Enhanced recipe group control status
Controller register
Register (D) Example
Dn
D10
Dn+1
D11
Dn+2
D12
Dn+3
D13
Dn+4
D14
Dn+5
D15
Dn+6
D16
Dn+7
D17
Dn+8
D18
Dn+9
D19
Internal memory
Register ($) Example
$n
$25
$n+1
$26
$n+2
$27
$n+3
$28
$n+4
$29
$n+5
$30
$n+6
$31
$n+7
$32
$n+8
$33
$n+9
$34
November, 2018
4-21
Control Block and Status Block
DOPSoft User Manual
4
General control status register
Table 4.2.2 Status Block - General control register
General control status register
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
(9)
(8)
(7) (6) (5) (4) (3) (2)
(1)
(1) b0 Screen switch status (2) b1 - b2 Reserved (3) b3 Alarm buffer clear flag (4) b4 Alarm counter clear flag (6) b5 External storage device cache write flag (5) b6 Remote control lock (7) b7 Reserved (8) b8 � b10 Set user security level (9) b11 - b15 Reserved
When the screen is switched, the flag is turned ON. When the screen switch is completed, the flag is turned OFF.
Screen switch in progress
Screen switch is done
b0 �
Screen switch status flag
ON
OFF
Screen switch status flag
When the HMI is clearing the alarm buffer, the flag is turned ON. When clearing the alarm buffer is completed, the flag is turned OFF.
Alarm buffer clear in progress
Alarm buffer clear is done
b3 � Alarm buffer clear
flag
ON
OFF
Alarm buffer clear flag
4-22
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Control Block and Status Block
General control status register
When the HMI clears the alarm counter, the flag is turned ON. When clearing the alarm counter is completed, the flag is turned OFF.
Alarm counter clearing Alarm counter
in progress
clearing is done
b4 � Alarm counter clear
flag
ON
OFF
4
Alarm counter clear flag
When the HMI cache data is updated into a USB Disk or an SD Dard, the flag is turned ON.
When data update is completed, the flag is turned OFF.
Updating the cache data to a USB disk or an SD card
Cache data update is done
b5 � External storage device
cache write flag
ON
OFF
Instant flag for USB or SD card data update
b6 � Remote control lock
b8 - b10 � Set user security
level
This bit determines whether VNC is operable. When this flag is turned ON, VNC is not operable but can be monitored. When this flag is turned OFF, VNC is operable.
The Auto Reset Flags function is not applicable to this flag.
You can find the present HMI operator security level from BIT8, BIT9 and BIT10.
Security level
Bit 10
Flag control Bit 9
Bit 8
Security level 0
0
0
0
Security level 1
0
0
1
Security level 2
0
1
0
Security level 3
0
1
1
Security level 4
1
0
0
Security level 5
1
0
1
Security level 6
1
1
0
Security level 7
1
1
1
November, 2018
4-23
Control Block and Status Block
DOPSoft User Manual
4
Screen number status register
Table 4.2.3 Status Block - Screen number register Screen number status register
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b0 - b15 � Screen number status
Screen number You can check the last opened screen number with this status register.
Curve control status register
Table 4.2.4 Status Block - Curve control register
Curve control status register
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(1) b0 - b3 Curve sampling status flags 1 - 4 (b0 refers to flag1, and so forth) (2) b4 - b7 Reserved (3) b8 - b11 Curve clear status flags 1 - 4 (b8 refers to flag1, and so forth) (4) b12 - b15 Reserved
When the Trend Graph or X-Y Chart elements sample the data, the HMI turns the corresponding curve sampling status flag ON. When the sampling is completed, the curve sampling status flag is turned OFF in real time.
Curve sampling in progress
Curve sampling is done
b0 - b3 �
Curve sampling status flags
(1 - 4)
ON
OFF
Curve sampling status flag
The sampling flag 1 of the Trend Graph element corresponds to the curve sampling status flag 1; the sampling flag 2 of the Trend Graph element corresponds to the curve sampling status flag 2, and so forth.
4-24
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Curve control status register
Control Block and Status Block
4
When the Trend Graph or X-Y Chart elements clear the data, the HMI turns the corresponding curve clear status flag ON. When the clearing is completed, the curve clear status flag is turned OFF in real time.
Curve clearing in progress
Curve clearing is done
b8 - b11 � Curve clear status flags
(1 - 4)
ON
OFF
Curve clear status flag
November, 2018
4-25
Control Block and Status Block
DOPSoft User Manual
4
Curve control status register
The clear flag 1 of the Trend Graph element corresponds to the curve clear status flag 1; the clear flag 2 of the Trend Graph element corresponds to the curve clear flag 2, and so forth.
b8 - b11 � Curve clear status flags
(1 - 4)
4-26
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Control Block and Status Block
History buffer sampling status register
Table 4.2.5 Status Block - History buffer sampling status register History buffer sampling status register
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
4
(2)
(1)
(1) b0 - b11 History buffer sampling flags 1 - 12 (b0 refers to flag 1, and so forth) (2) b12 - b15 Reserved
When the HMI samples the history buffer, it turns the corresponding history buffer sampling status flag ON. After the sampling is completed, the history buffer sampling status flag is turned OFF in real time.
History buffer sampling History buffer
in progress
Sampling is done
b0 - b11 � History buffer
sampling status flags
(1 - 12)
ON
OFF
History buffer sampling status flag
November, 2018
4-27
Control Block and Status Block
DOPSoft User Manual
4
History buffer clear status register
Table 4.2.6 Status Block - History buffer clear status register History buffer clear status register
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
(2)
(1)
(1) b0 - b11 History buffer clear status flags 1 - 12 (b0 refers to flag 1, and so forth) (2) b12 - b15 Reserved
When the HMI clears the history buffer, it turns the corresponding history buffer clear status flag ON. After the clearing is completed, the history buffer clear status flag is turned OFF in real time.
History buffer clearing History buffer
in progress
clearing is done
b0 - b11 � History buffer clear status
flags (1 - 12)
ON
OFF
History buffer clear status flag
4-28
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Control Block and Status Block
Recipe control status register
Table 4.2.7 Status Block - Recipe control register Recipe control status register
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
4
(4)
(3) (2) (1)
(1) b0 Recipe group change status flag (2) b1 Recipe read status flag (PLC HMI) (3) b2 Recipe write status flag (HMI PLC) (4) b3 - b15 Reserved
When the control recipe group in the Control Block is changed, the recipe group change status flag is turned ON; when the HMI changes the group and completes updating the RCPNO number, the recipe group change status flag is turned OFF.
Recipe group change in progress
Recipe group change is done
b0 � Recipe group change status
flag
ON
OFF
Recipe group change status flag
When the HMI reads one set of recipe data from the Control Block, the recipe read status flag is turned ON; when completing reading and saving the recipe through the Control Block, the recipe read status flag is turned OFF.
Reading PLC data Reading enhanced into HMI in progress recipe data is done
b1 � Recipe read status flag
ON
OFF
Recipe read status flag
November, 2018
4-29
Control Block and Status Block
DOPSoft User Manual
4
Recipe control status register
When the HMI sends one set of designated recipe data to the Control Block, the recipe write status flag is turned ON; when the HMI completes writing the recipe into the Control Block, the recipe write status flag is turned OFF.
HMI is writing data Writing recipe data
into the PLC
is done
b2 � Recipe write status flag
ON
OFF
Recipe write status flag
Recipe group control status register
Table 4.2.8 Status Block - Recipe group control status register Recipe group control status register
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Recipe group designation status
b0 - b15 �
Recipe group
designation status
No matter you designate the recipe group number by using the recipe group change flag of the Control Block or by the RCPNO register, the recipe group status register updates its value as soon as the group number changes.
The recipe group designation flag must work with the recipe group change flag. Please refer to Table 4.2.7 Recipe control status register b0.
4-30
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Control Block and Status Block
System control status register
Table 4.2.9 Status Block - System control status register System control status register
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
4
(4)
(3) (2)
(1)
(1) b0 - b7 Multi-language status value (2) b8 Printer flag (3) b9 Printer form feed flag (4) b10 - b15 Reserved
b0 - b7 � Multi-language Display the corresponding status value of the language in use.
status value
b8 � Printer When the printer status flag is turned ON, the printer prints the display screen or the status flag edited screen of the HMI; when the printer status flag is turned OFF, the printer is idled.
b9 � Printer form feed status flag
When the printer form feed status flag is turned ON, the printer retracts the paper and aligns the paper for the next run automatically; when the flag is OFF, the printer is idled.
November, 2018
4-31
Control Block and Status Block
DOPSoft User Manual
4
Enhanced recipe control status register
Table 4.2.10 Status Block - Enhanced recipe control status register Enhanced recipe control status register
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
(6)
(5)
(4) (3) (2) (1)
(1) b0 Enhanced recipe group change status flag (RCPNO) (2) b1 Enhanced recipe read status flag (PLC HMI) (3) b2 Enhanced recipe write status flag (HMI PLC) (4) b3 Enhanced recipe metagroup change status flag (5) b4 - b7 Reserved (6) b8 - b15 Designation status of the enhanced recipe metagroup number to be changed
When the enhanced control recipe group in the Control Block is changed, the enhanced recipe group status change flag is turned ON; after the HIM changes the group and updates the RCPNO number, the enhanced recipe group change status flag is turned OFF in real time.
Changing enhanced Changing enhanced recipe group in progress recipe group is done
b0 � Enhanced recipe group change status flag
ON
OFF
Status flag of enhanced recipe group change
When the HMI reads one set of recipe data though the Control Block, the enhanced recipe read status flag is turned ON; when the reading and saving of the enhanced recipe via the Control Block is completed, the enhanced recipe read status flag is turned OFF in real time.
HMI is reading the data from PLC
Reading the enhanced recipe data
is done
b1 � Enhanced recipe read status flag
ON
OFF
Enhanced recipe read status flag
4-32
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Control Block and Status Block
Enhanced recipe control status register
When the HMI sends one set of designated enhanced recipe data through the Control Block, the enhanced recipe write status flag is turned ON; after the enhanced recipe is written through the Control Block, the enhanced recipe write status flag is turned OFF in real time.
HMI is writing data to PLC
Writing enhanced recipe data is done
4
b2 � Enhanced recipe write status flag
ON
OFF
Enhanced recipe write status flag
Enhanced recipe number control status register
Table 4.2.11 Status Block - Enhanced recipe group control status register Enhanced recipe group control status register
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b0 - b15 � Enhanced recipe group designation
status
Designation status of the enhanced recipe group
No matter you designate the enhanced recipe group number by using the enhanced recipe group change flag of the Control Block or by the ENRCPNO register, the enhanced recipe group status register updates its value as soon as the group number changes. The enhanced recipe group designation status flag must work with the enhanced recipe group change status flag. Please refer to Table 4.2.10 Enhanced recipe control status register b0.
November, 2018
4-33
Control Block and Status Block (This page is intentionally left blank.)
4
DOPSoft User Manual
4-34
November, 2018
Buttons
This chapter introduces the usage for the HMI Button elements.
5.1 Set to On / Set to Off / Maintained / Momentary ��������������������������������������5-3 5.2 Multistate ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-25 5.3 Set Value ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-47 5.4 Set Constant��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-68 5.5 Increment / Decrement ������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-89 5.6 Goto Screen ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������5-108 5.7 Other elements ����������������������������������������������������������������������������5-133
5.7.1 System Date and Time������������������������������������������������������������5-133 5.7.2 Password Table Setup ������������������������������������������������������������5-134 5.7.3 Enter Password���������������������������������������������������������������������5-135 5.7.4 Contrast Brightness ���������������������������������������������������������������5-135 5.7.5 Set Low Security �������������������������������������������������������������������5-135 5.7.6 System Menu �����������������������������������������������������������������������5-136 5.7.7 Print Output��������������������������������������������������������������������������5-136 5.7.8 Report List ���������������������������������������������������������������������������5-136 5.7.9 Screen Capture ���������������������������������������������������������������������5-137 5.7.10 Remove Storage �������������������������������������������������������������������5-137 5.7.11 Import / Export Recipe ������������������������������������������������������������5-138 5.7.12 Calibration ���������������������������������������������������������������������������5-138 5.7.13 Language Change �����������������������������������������������������������������5-139 5.7.14 Import / Export FileSlot �����������������������������������������������������������5-140 5.7.15 Shared properties of other elements ������������������������������������������5-141 5.8 Multiple actions ����������������������������������������������������������������������������5-147
November, 2018
5-1
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
This chapter introduces the usage and setting details for the DOPSoft Button elements.
Button element classification Button
Set to On Set to Off Momentary Maintained Multistate Set Value Set Constant Increment Decrement Goto Screen System Date and Time Password Table Setup Enter Password Contrast Brightness Set Low Security System Menu Report List Screen Capture Remove Storage Import / Export Recipe Calibration Language Change Import / Export FileSlot Multiple actions
5-2
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
5.1 Set to On / Set to Off / Maintained / Momentary
Set to On / Set to Off / Maintained / Momentary elements switch the specified communication address to ON / OFF by touching the buttons or running the macros.
You can create the Set to On and Set to Off elements by clicking Elements > Button; or by clicking the icons on the element toolbar; or by right-clicking the screen and select Button to create these elements.
Table 5.1.1 Differences among Set to On / Set to Off / Maintained / Momentary buttons
Press Release
Press Release
5
ON
OFF
Set to On
The specified communication address switches to ON when you press the Set to On button. You cannot switch the state to OFF by pressing the Set to On button again.
Press Release
Press Release
ON
OFF
Set to Off
The specified communication address switches to OFF when you press the Set to Off button. You cannot switch the state to ON by pressing the Set to Off button again.
November, 2018
5-3
Buttons
5
Press
Release
DOPSoft User Manual
ON OFF
OFF
Momentary
The Momentary button allows you to reverse the specified communication address values. When releasing the Momentary button, the communication address recovers to its original state. To keep the communication address values reversed, you must press the button continuously.
Press Release Press Release
OFF
ON OFF
Maintained
The Maintained button allows you reverse the specified communication address values. The Maintained button differs from the Momentary button in that when releasing the Maintained button, the specified communication address values stay reversed. You need to press the Maintained button again for the specified communication address to recover to its original state.
The DOPSoft also provides convenient programming tools for you to double-click the elements to set their properties and thus edit the application screens more easily.
5-4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
When you double-click the Set to On / Set to Off / Momentary / Maintained elements, the property page is shown as follows.
Buttons
5
Figure 5.1.1 Properties of Set to On / Set to Off / Momentary / Maintained
November, 2018
5-5
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
Table 5.1.2 Function page of Set to On / Set to Off / Momentary / Maintained
Function page Preview Main Main-2 Text Picture
Details
Macro Coordinates
Set to On / Set to Off / Maintained / Momentary Description
View State 0 or 1 and multi-language data display. Set the Write and Read Addresses, Write and Read Offset Addresses. Set the Style, Foreground Color, and Blink. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the text content, font, size, color, format, zoom, and alignment. Set the Picture Bank Name, Alignment, Stretch Mode, and Transparent Color.
Set to On / Set to Off / Maintained Set the Interlock Address, Interlock State, Invisible Address, User Security Level, Set Low Security, Min. Press Time, and Confirm Window.
Momentary Set the Interlock Address, Interlock State, Invisible Address, User Security Level, Set Low Security, Min. Press Time, Confirm Window, and Enable OFF Tone. Set the On Macro, Off Macro, Before Execute Macro, and After Execute Macro. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the button elements.
5-6
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main
(3)
(4) (1)
(5)
Buttons
5
(2)
Figure 5.1.2 Main property page for the Set to On / Set to Off / Momentary / Maintained elements
November, 2018
5-7
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
No. Property
Function description
Write Address:
1. You can select the internal memory or the controller register address. If you set the Write Address without setting the Read Address, the HMI automatically reads the Write Address data.
(1) Memory
2. You can select the link for different communication devices from the Link. It displays the quantity of the set links. If you have multiple communication devices, you can select the required link from the drop-down list. As shown below, there are Link2, Link3, Internal Memory, and Internal Parameter.
3. Select the Link and Device Type, input correct addresses, press OK, and the selected element records the corresponding data.
Read Address: you can select the internal memory or the controller register address. Other settings are the same as that of Write Address.
Write Offset Address and Read Offset Address: please refer to the instructions in Appendix D Write and Read Offset Address.
5-8
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
No. Property
Function description
Style: the available styles are Standard, Raised, Round, and Invisible. You can change the appearance of the element with this setting.
Standard
Raised
Round
Invisible
5
Foreground Color: 1. Set the foreground color of the element. 2. When you set the Style to Invisible, the Foreground Color setting is invalid.
(2)
Style
Blink:
You can set the blink prompt of the element when the button changes states. The blink color is the opposite color of the foreground color.
November, 2018
5-9
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
No. Property
Function description
You can preview or change the button elements' state parameters by switching the states.
(3)
State
If you have set the language data, you can edit the displaying text property, etc. with the Language setting of the element.
(4) Language
Record the button actions to be executed. The record is written into the CSV file of the Operation Log Table so that you know what actions have been done.
(5)
Element description
5-10
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Buttons
(1)
5
(2)
(3)
Figure 5.1.3 Main-2 property page for the Set to On / Set to Off / Momentary / Maintained elements
No.
Property
Function description
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The
(1)
Transparent default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the
element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3)
Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
November, 2018
5-11
Buttons Text
5
(4)
DOPSoft User Manual
(2) (1)
(5) (3)
Figure 5.1.4 Text property page for the Set to On / Set to Off / Momentary / Maintained elements
No. Property
Function description
You can enter the text to be displayed in the text box.
(1)
Text
5-12
As long as the element allows text input, you can click the element on the screen and press the space key on the keyboard to start editing and inputting the text.
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
No. Property
Function description
(2)
Text
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, zoom, alignment, and bold /
property italic / underline for the text.
(3)
Edit Multilanguage
Text
If you have added multi-language texts, the Text page allows you to edit multilanguage data.
When this function is enabled, it batch changes the texts of the specified state. The following illustrates the steps: 1. Input 123 to State 0, and 234 to State 1. 2. Click State 0. 3. Click Process the text of all states, and the State 1 text changes to 123.
5
Before change
Process
(1)
(4) the text of
all states
After change
(3) (2)
When this function is enabled, it batch changes the text properties of the specified state. Items included in the text property are shown in the figure below.
Process
(5)
text properties
of all states
November, 2018
5-13
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
No. Property
Function description
The following illustrates the steps:
1. Input Delta to State 0, and set the font to Segoe Script; input HMI to State 1, and set the font to Arial.
2. Click State 0.
3. Click Process text properties of all states, and the State 1 font changes to Segoe Script.
(1)
Before change
(1) Process
(5)
text properties
of all states
After change
5-14
(2)
(3)
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Picture (1)
(2) (3)
Buttons
5
Figure 5.1.5 Picture property page for the Set to On / Set to Off / Momentary / Maintained elements
November, 2018
5-15
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
No. Property
Function description
The default for Picture Bank Name is None. To set the picture display, use the dropdown list to view the picture bank provided by the software and then select the desired pictures.
(1)
Picture Bank Name
5-16
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
You can use the Alignment options to set how pictures are aligned.
Buttons
5
Alignment
The Stretch Mode options include Stretch All, Stretch 1:1, and Actual Size.
Stretch All
Stretch 1:1
Actual Size
(2)
If you select Stretch All, the picture fills the full element display area.
If you select Stretch 1:1, the picture displays in 1:1 size based on the element width and length.
If you select Actual Size, regardless of the element size, the picture displays in its actual size in the element display area.
Stretch Mode
If you check [Process pictures of all states], it assumes that the elements have multiple states and some pictures do not fill the full element display area. You can use this function to process all pictures instead of setting them one by one, which saves the editing time.
Specify a color in the picture and turn this color into transparent. If you select the
Transparent Color icon
and click the white part on the calendar, the software
changes the white part into transparent, which you can see becomes identical to the
element foreground color.
(3)
Transparent Color
November, 2018
5-17
Buttons Details
5
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Figure 5.1.6 Details property page for the Set to On / Set to Off / Momentary / Maintained elements
No. Property
Function description
Interlock State
The Interlock Address enables you to operate a certain element from this particular address, which must be operated along with the Interlock State. If the Interlock State is set to OFF, it means the Interlock Address is operable when the Interlock State is OFF; on the other hand, if the Interlock State is set to ON, the Interlock Address is operable when the Interlock State is ON.
The Interlock Address usage example is as follows:
1. Create a button and set its address to $8.0. Then, set the Interlock Address to $8.0 for the button which address is $99.0.
2. Before having the button which address is $99.0 to operate, you have to press the button which address is $8.0 to validate the button action which address is $99.0.
1. Create a button and set its
(1)
address to $8.0.
Interlock Address
5-18
2. Execute the button (address $8.0) first so you can press the other button (address $99.0).
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
When the Invisible Address is set to ON, the button element is invisible and you cannot enable its functions.
Invisible Address is
off
Buttons
5
(2)
Invisible Address
Invisible Address is
on
Element is invisible
This function sets the security level for pressing the element; this operation is available for users with the set security level or higher.
After you set the User Security Level and press the element, a password input window pops up to confirm whether the security level password is correct (you can modify this password through the Password Table Setup element, please refer to Section 5.7.2 Password Table Setup).
User Security
Level
If you set the Set Low Security to Yes, each time you enter the password, the
(3)
HMI sets the security level to the lowest. The next time you press the element,
the HMI asks you to enter the password for the corresponding security level
again.
Set Low Security
November, 2018
5-19
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
No. Property
Function description
Set the time lapse from button pressing to element activation. The element activates until the pressing exceeds the set time. This function is to prevent executing wrong actions performed by the user. The setting range is 0 - 10 second(s).
Min.
(4)
Press Time
(sec)
If you set the Confirm Window to Yes, the following Confirmation Dialog pops up for you to confirm the pressing action after pressing the element:
(5)
Confirm Window
5-20
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Macro
Buttons
5
(2)
(1)
Figure 5.1.7 Macro property page for the Set to On / Set to Off / Momentary / Maintained elements
November, 2018
5-21
Buttons
5
No. On Macro
Flowchart of On Macro:
DOPSoft User Manual
Function description Off Macro
Flowchart of Off Macro:
(1)
When you press the button and set the state to ON, the HMI executes the On Macro commands. When you press the button and set the state to OFF, the HMI executes the Off Macro commands. If the button states cannot be changed by touching it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI does not execute the On / Off Macro commands.
Every time when you trigger the states to ON / OFF, the HMI executes the On / Off Macros once without repeating the actions.
5-22
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Function description
Before Execute Macro
After Execute Macro
Flowchart of Before Execute Macro:
Flowchart of After Execute Macro:
Buttons
5
(2)
When you touch the button element, the HMI executes the macro commands first, and then executes the button actions. If the button states cannot be changed by touching it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI does not execute the macro commands.
When you touch the button element, the HMI executes the button actions first, and then executes the macro commands. If the button states cannot be changed by touching it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI does not execute the macro commands.
November, 2018
5-23
Buttons Coordinates
5
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 5.1.8 Coordinates property page for the Set to On / Set to Off / Momentary / Maintained elements
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
5-24
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
5.2 Multistate
The Multistate is for displaying various state pictures or state values. If you set the Multistate Memory Address to D100, Data Type to Word, and State Counts to 4, when you change the D100 value, the Multistate element changes the states according to the sequence you set. Please refer to Figure 5.2.1 Multistate example.
5
(2) (1)
(3) (4)
(2) (1)
Figure 5.2.1 Multistate example - 1
November, 2018
5-25
Buttons
5
(5)
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 5.2.2 Multistate example - 2
No.
Item
Content
(1)
Write Address
Create a Multistate button and a Numeric Entry element and set the Write Address to D100.
(2)
Data Type / Data Format
The Multistate button and Numeric Entry element Data Type is Word, and the Data Format is Unsigned Decimal.
(3)
State Counts Set the State Counts of the Multistate button to 4.
(4)
Sequence
Set the Sequence of the Multistate button to Next State.
(5) Set State pictures Set the pictures for States 0 - 3.
5-26
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
No.
Item
Content
Set D100 = 0 to D100 =3 sequentially, and the Multistate element pictures change as well.
D100 = 0
5
(6) Execution results
D100 = 1 D100 = 2
D100 = 3
The Multistate button supports four data types. See the following table for details. If you need to add or remove state counts, you can simply add and remove the state counts from the State Counts on the property page.
Data Type
Table 5.2.1 Multistate Data Type Multistate button State Counts
If the Data Type is Word, you can set 1 to 256 states for the State Counts.
Word
When the Data Type is set to LSB, the register data is first converted to binary data. And then, define the current object state by using the lowest non-zero bit.
If the Data Type is LSB, you can set 1 to 16 states, except for State 0.
LSB / LSB (Support State 0)
November, 2018
5-27
Buttons
5
Data Type
Multistate button State Counts
To display State 0, please select LSB (Support State 0).
DOPSoft User Manual
If you select LSB, the element displays black when State = 0.
LSB / LSB (Support State 0)
If the Data Type is LSB or LSB (Support State 0), the memory address is also in Word as the unit.
The examples in the following table explains how to use the lowest non-zero bit to define the state values when the data is converted from decimal to binary data. There are also examples showing how the software determines the lowest bit to define the display state value when the decimal values are 3 and 7.
Decimal
Binary
State Value
State = 0 when all bits are 0.
0
0000000000000000 You must select LSB (Support State 0).
1
0000000000000001 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State = 1.
2
0000000000000010 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 1, State = 2.
3
0000000000000011 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State = 1.
4
0000000000000100 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 2, State = 3.
7
0000000000000111 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State = 1.
8
0000000000001000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 3, State = 4.
16 0000000000010000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 4, State = 5.
32 0000000000100000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 5, State = 6.
64 0000000001000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 6, State = 7.
128 0000000010000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 7, State = 8.
256 0000000100000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 8, State = 9.
512 0000001000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 9, State = 10.
1024 0000010000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 10, State = 11.
2048 0000100000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 11, State = 12.
4096 0001000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 12, State = 13.
8192 0010000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 13, State = 14.
16384 0100000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 14, State = 15.
32768 1000000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 15, State = 16.
If the Data Type is set to Bit, you can only set 2 state counts.
Bit
5-28
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual When you double-click the Multistate element, the property page is shown as follows.
Buttons
5
Figure 5.2.3 Properties of Multistate
Multistate
Function page
Description
Preview
View the element multistate value and multi-language data display.
Main
Set the Write and Read Addresses, Write and Read Offset Addresses Set the Style, Foreground Color, and Blink. Set the Data Type, Data Format, State Counts, and Sequence of Multistate.
Main-2
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing.
Text
Set the text content, font, size, color, format, zoom, and alignment.
Picture
Set the Picture Bank Name, Alignment, Stretch Mode, and Transparent Color.
Details
Set the Interlock Address, Interlock State, Invisible Address, User Security Level, Low Security Level, and Confirm Window.
Macro
Set the Before Execute Macro and After Execute Macro.
Coordinates Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the button element.
November, 2018
5-29
Buttons Main
5
(1)
(4) (5)
(6)
DOPSoft User Manual (2)
(3)
Figure 5.2.4 Main property page for the Multistate element
No.
Property
Function description
You can choose the internal memory or the controller register
Write Address
address. The input memory type varies depending on the
selected data type, including Word, LSB, or Bit, as shown in
Table 5.2.2.
If you set the Write Address without setting the Read Address,
Read Address
the HMI automatically reads the Write Address values.
(1) Memory
For the Link and Style selection, please refer to Section 5.1.
Write Offset Address
Read Offset Address
Please refer to the instructions in Appendix D Writing and Reading Offset Address.
5-30
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
No.
Property
Function description
Data Type
There are four data types: Bit, Word, LSB, and LSB (Support State 0). See Table 5.2.2 for more details.
You can only select the Data Format when the Data Type is Word.
There are four types of Data Format: BCD, Signed Decimal, Unsigned Decimal, and Hexadecimal.
5
Data Format
(2) Setting
State Counts
Set the State Counts of the Multitstate button. When the Data Type is Word, the State Counts range from 1 to 256; when the Data Type is LSB, 16 states are available; when the Data Type is LSB (Support State 0), 17 states are available; when the Data Type is Bit, only 2 states are available. See Table 5.2.2 for more details.
Set the Multitstate button's state changing sequence, including Next State and Previous State.
Next State: when changing states, the HMI changes the state in ascending order.
Previous State: when changing states, the HMI changes the state in descending order.
Sequence
November, 2018
5-31
Buttons No.
5
DOPSoft User Manual
Property Style
Function description
The available styles are Standard, Raised, Round, and Invisible. You can change the appearance of the element with this setting.
Standard Raised
Round
Invisible
Set the foreground color of the element.
When you set the Style to Invisible, the Foreground Color setting is invalid.
Foreground Color
(3) Style
You can set the blink prompt of the element when the button changes states. The blink color is the opposite color of the foreground color.
Blink
5-32
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
(4)
State
Buttons
Function description
The Multitstate element determines its number of states according to the State Counts you have defined. Therefore, you can view the states with the State.
5
If you have set the language data, you can edit the displaying text properties, etc. with the Language setting of the element.
(5)
Language
Record the button actions to be executed. The record is written in the CSV file of the Operation Log Table so that you know what actions have been done.
(6)
Element description
November, 2018
5-33
Buttons Main-2
5
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 5.2.5 Main-2 property page for the Multistate element
No.
Property
Function description
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The
(1)
Transparent
default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the
element.
(2) Smooth animation The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3)
Anti-aliasing
The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
5-34
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Text (1)
(4) (3)
Buttons
(2)
5
(5)
Figure 5.2.6 Text property page for the Multistate element
November, 2018
5-35
Buttons
5
No. Property
Function description
You can enter the text to be displayed in the text box.
(1)
Text
DOPSoft User Manual
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, zoom, alignment, and bold / (2) Text property italic / underline for the text. You can refer to the Preview section in the figure
above for the text property setting results.
(3)
Edit multi- If you have added multi-language text, the Text page allows you to edit multilanguage text language data.
When this function is enabled, it batch changes the texts of the specified state. The following illustrates the steps: 1. Input 123 to State 0, and 234 to State 1. 2. Click State 0. 3. Click Process the text of all states, and the State 1 text changes to 123.
Before change
Process the
(4)
text of all
states
(1)
5-36
After
(3)
change
(2) November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
No. Property
Function description
When this function is enabled, it batch changes the text properties of the specified state. Items included in the text property are shown in the figure below.
5
The following illustrates the steps: 1. Input Delta to State 0, and set the font to Segoe Script; input HMI to State 1,
and set the font to Arial. 2. Click State 0. 3. Click Process text properties of all states, and the State 1 font changes to
Segoe Script.
(1)
Process text (5) properties of
all states
Before change
(1)
After change
November, 2018
(3) (2)
5-37
Buttons Picture
5
(1)
(3)
DOPSoft User Manual (2)
Figure 5.2.7 Picture property page for the Multistate element
5-38
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
No. Property
Function description
The default for Picture Bank Name is None. To set the picture display, use the drop-down list to view the picture bank provided by the software and then select the desired pictures.
5
(1)
Picture Bank Name
November, 2018
5-39
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
No. Property
Function description
You can use the Alignment options to set how pictures are aligned.
Alignment
The Stretch Mode options include Stretch All, Stretch 1:1, and Actual Size.
Stretch All
Stretch 1:1
Actual Size
(2)
If you select Stretch All, the picture fills the full element display area.
If you select Stretch 1:1, the picture displays in 1:1 size based on the element width and length.
If you select Actual Size, regardless of the element size, the picture displays in its actual size in the element display area.
Stretch Mode
If you check [Process pictures of all states], it assumes that the elements have multiple states and some pictures do not fill the full element display area. You can use this function to process all pictures instead of setting them one by one, which saves the editing time.
Specify a color in the picture and turn this color into transparent. If you select the
Transparent Color icon
and click the white part on the calendar, the
software changes the white part into transparent, which you can see becomes
identical to the element foreground color.
(3)
Transparent Color
Preview
Preview
5-40
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Details
Buttons
5
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Figure 5.2.8 Details property page for the Multistate element
November, 2018
5-41
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
No. Property
Function description
Interlock State
The Interlock Address enables you to operate a certain element from this particular address, which must be operated along with the Interlock State. If the Interlock State is set to OFF, it means the Interlock Address is operable when the Interlock State is OFF; on the other hand, if the Interlock State is set to ON, the Interlock Address is operable when the Interlock State is ON.
The following describes how it works:
1. Create a button and set its address to $8.0. Then, set the Interlock Address to $8.0 for the button which address is $99.0.
2. Before having the button which address is $99.0 to operate, you have to press the button which address is $8.0 to validate the button action which address is $99.0.
(1)
1. Create a button and set its address to $8.0.
Interlock Address
2. Execute the button (address $8.0) first so you can press the other button (address $99.0).
When the Invisible Address is set to ON, the button element is invisible and you cannot enable its functions.
Invisible Address is
off
(2)
Invisible Address
Invisible Address is
on
Element is invisible
5-42
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
No. Property
Function description
This function sets the security level for pressing the element; this operation is available for users with the set security level or higher.
After you set the permission level and press the element, a password input window pops up to confirm whether the security level password is correct (you can modify this password through the Password Table Setup element, please refer to Section 5.7.2 Password Table Setup).
User Security
Level
5
(3)
If you specify Set Low Security to Yes, each time you input the password, the HMI sets the security level to the lowest. The next time you press the
element, the HMI asks you to input the password for the corresponding
security level.
Set Low Security
If you set the Confirm Window to Yes, the following Confirmation Dialog pops up for you to confirm the pressing action after pressing the element.
(4)
Confirm Window
November, 2018
5-43
Buttons Macro
5
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) Figure 5.2.9 Macro property page for the Multistate element
5-44
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Function description
Before Execute Macro
After Execute Macro
Flowchart of Before Execute Macro:
Flowchart of After Execute Macro:
Buttons
5
(1)
When you touch the button element, the HMI executes the macro commands first, and then executes the button actions. If the button states cannot be changed by touching it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI does not execute the macro commands.
When you touch the button element, the HMI executes the button actions first, and then executes the macro commands. If the button states cannot be changed by touching it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI does not execute the macro commands.
November, 2018
5-45
Buttons Coordinates
5
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 5.2.10 Coordinates property page for the Multistate element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
5-46
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
5.3 Set Value
When you touch this button on the HMI end, the built-in Numeric Keypad pops up on the screen for you to input values. After you press ENTER, the HMI sends the values to the corresponding register. You can set the maximum and minimum input values, and set the trigger mode, such as triggering the specified controller Bit address before or after writing.
Please refer to Table 5.3.1 for the Set Value example.
5
November, 2018
5-47
Buttons
5
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 5.3.1 Set Value example Set Value
Create a Set Value element and set the Write Address to D50. Create a Numeric Display element and set the Read Address to D50.
Write Address
Before Set Value
Execution results
After Set Value
Click Set Value, input the value of 100, and the Numeric Display element displays 100.
5-48
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual When you double-click the Set Value element, the property page is shown as follows.
Buttons
5
Figure 5.3.1 Properties of Set Value
Table 5.3.2 Function page of Set Value
Set Value
Function page
Description
Preview
The Set Value element can only view multi-language data display since the multistate property is not available for this element.
Main
Set the Write Address, Write Offset Address, Style, and Foreground Color.
Set the Data Type, Data Format, keypad style, Minimum / Maximum, Integer Digits, and Fractional of the Set Value element.
Main-2
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing.
Text
Set the text content, font, size, color, format, zoom, and alignment.
Picture
Set the Picture Bank Name, Alignment, Stretch Mode, and Transparent Color.
Details
Set the Interlock Address, Interlock State, Trigger Mode, Trigger Addr., Invisible Address, User Security Level, Set Low Security, Mark as Asterisk (*), Confirm Window, and Show overrange message.
Macro
Set the Before Execute Macro and After Execute Macro.
Coordinates Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the button element.
November, 2018
5-49
Buttons Main
5
(1)
(6)
(8) (7)
(9)
DOPSoft User Manual
(2) (3) (4)
(5)
Figure 5.3.2 Main property page for the Set Value element
No.
Property
Function description
You can choose the internal memory or the controller register address. The
Write
input memory type must be Word.
Address
(1)
For the Link and Style selection, please refer to Section 5.1.
Write Offset Address
Please refer to the instructions in Appendix D Write and Read Offset Address.
5-50
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description There are two data types: Word and Double Word.
(2)
Data Type
Buttons
5
When you set the Data Type to Word, the supported data formats are as follows:
Setting
(3)
Data Format
When you set the Data Type to Double Word, the supported data
formats are as follows:
November, 2018
5-51
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
No.
Property
Function description
The allowable ranges for the minimum and maximum values are subject to change based on the selected Data Type and Data Format.
Data Type
Data Format
Allowable range
BCD
0 to 9999
Signed BCD
-999 to 9999
Word
Signed Decimal Unsigned Decimal
-32768 to 32767 0 to 65535
(4)
Minimum / Maximum
Setting
Hex Binary BCD
0 to 0xFFFF 0 to 0xFFFF 0 to 99999999
Signed BCD
-9999999 to 99999999
Double Word
Signed Decimal Unsigned Decimal
Hex
-2147483648 to 2147483647 0 to 4294967295 0 to 0xFFFFFFFF
Binary
0 to 0xFFFFFFFF
Floating
0 to 9999999
Integer
(5)
Digits You can set the displaying number of integer digits and the number of Fractional decimal places.
Digits
The available styles are Standard, Raised, Round, and Invisible. You can change the appearance of the element with this setting.
Standard
Raised
Round
Invisible
(6)
Style
Set the foreground color of the element. When you set the style to Invisible, the Foreground Color setting
is invalid.
(7)
Foreground Color
5-52
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
(8)
Language
Buttons
Function description
If you have set the language data, you can edit the displaying text property, etc. with the Language setting of the element.
5
Record the button actions to be executed. The record is written into the CSV file of the Operation Log Table so that you know what actions have been done.
(9) Element description
November, 2018
5-53
Buttons Main-2
5
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 5.3.3 Main-2 property page for the Set Value element
No.
Property
Function description
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The
(1)
Transparent default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the
element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3)
Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
5-54
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Text
(1) (4)
(3)
Buttons
(2)
5
(5)
Figure 5.3.4 Text property page for the Set Value element
November, 2018
5-55
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
No. Property
Function description
You can input the text to be displayed in the text box.
(1)
Text
As long as the element allows text input, you can click the element on the screen and press the space key on the keyboard to start editing and inputting the text.
(2)
Text property
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, zoom, alignment, and bold / italic / underline for the text. You can refer to the Preview section in the figure above for the text property setting results.
(3)
Edit Multilanguage
Text
If you have added multi-language text, the Text page allows you to edit multilanguage data.
When this function is enabled, it batch changes the texts of the specified state. The following illustrates the steps: 1. Input 123 to State 0, and 234 to State 1. 2. Click State 0. 3. Click Process the text of all states, and the State 1 text changes to 123.
Before change
Process the
(4)
text of all
(1)
states
5-56
After change
(3) (2) November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
No. Property
Function description
When this function is enabled, it batch changes the text properties of the specified state. Items included in the text property are shown in the figure below.
5
Process text (5) properties
of all states
The following illustrates the steps: 1. Input Delta to State 0, and set the font to Segoe Script; input HMI to State 1,
and set the font to Arial. 2. Click State 0. 3. Click Process text properties of all states, and the State 1 font changes to
Segoe Script.
(1)
Before
change
(1)
Process text (5) properties
of all states
After change
November, 2018
(2)
(3)
5-57
Buttons
Picture
5
(1)
(2)
(3)
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 5.3.5 Picture property page for the Set Value element
5-58
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
No. Property
Function description
The default for Picture Bank Name is None. To set the picture display, use the dropdown list to view the picture bank provided by the software and then select the desired pictures.
5
(1)
Picture Bank Name
November, 2018
5-59
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
You can use the Alignment options to set how pictures are aligned.
5
Alignment
The Stretch Mode options include Stretch All, Stretch 1:1, and Actual Size.
Stretch All
Stretch 1:1
Actual Size
(2)
If you select Stretch
If you select Actual Size,
If you select Stretch All, 1:1, the picture displays regardless of the element
the picture fills the full
in 1:1 size based on the size, the picture displays
element display area.
element width and
in its actual size in the
length.
element display area.
Stretch Mode
If you check [Process pictures of all states], it assumes that the elements have multiple states and some pictures do not fill the full element display area. You can use this function to process all pictures instead of setting them one by one, which saves the editing time.
Specify a color in the picture and turn this color into transparent. If you select the
Transparent Color icon
and select the white part on the calendar, the software
changes the white part into transparent, which you can see becomes identical to the
element foreground color.
(3)
Transparent Color
5-60
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Details
(6) (7)
Buttons
5
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Figure 5.3.6 Details property page for the Set Value element
November, 2018
5-61
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
No. Property
Function description
The Interlock Address enables you to operate a certain element from this particular address, which must be operated along with the Interlock State. If the Interlock State is set to OFF, it means the Interlock Address is operable when the Interlock State is OFF; on the other hand, if the Interlock State is set to ON, the Interlock Address is operable when the Interlock is ON.
The following describes how it works:
1. Create a button and set its address to $8.0. Then, set the Interlock Address to $8.0 for the button which address is $99.0.
2. Before having the button which address is $99.0 to operate, you have to press the button which address is $8.0 to validate the button action which address is $99.0.
Interlock State / (1) Interlock Address
1. Create a button and set its address to $8.0.
2. Execute the button (address $8.0) first so you can press the other button (address $99.0).
There are two trigger modes: Before Writing and After Writing.
Before Writing
After Writing
Trigger type
Set the Trigger Address to ON before changing
values.
Change values before setting the Trigger Address to ON.
The trigger function only specifies the set Trigger Address to ON, so you need to specify the Trigger Address to OFF if triggering again is required.
Flowchart of Before Writing
Flowchart of After Writing
Trigger
(2)
Mode / Trigger
Address
5-62
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
No. Property
Function description
When the Invisible Address is set to On, the button element is invisible and you cannot enable its functions.
Invisible Address is
off
5
(3)
Invisible Address
Invisible Address is
on
Element is invisible
User Security
Level This function sets the permission level for pressing the element; this operation is available for users with the set security level or higher.
After you set the User Security Level and press the element, a password input window pops up to confirm whether the security level password is correct (you can modify this password through the Password Table Setup element, please refer to Section 5.7.2 Password Table Setup).
(4)
Set Low Security
If you set the Set Low Security to Yes, each time you enter the password, the HMI sets the security level to the lowest. The next time you press the element, the HMI asks you to enter the password for the corresponding security level again.
November, 2018
5-63
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
No. Property
Function description
If you set the item to Yes, the values displayed are marked as asterisks when you input values to the Numeric Keypad.
Mark as (5) Asterisk
(*)
If you set the Confirm Window to Yes, the following Confirmation Dialog pops up for you to confirm the pressing action after pressing the element.
(6)
Confirm Window
If you set the Show overrange message to Yes, when the inputted value exceeds the set data range, an error message pops up to remind you as shown below:
Show
(7)
overrange
message
5-64
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Macro
Buttons
5
(1) Figure 5.3.7 Macro property page for the Set Value element
November, 2018
5-65
Buttons
5
No.
Property
Function description
Flowcharts of Before / After Execute Macro:
DOPSoft User Manual
(1)
Before Execute Macro
When you touch the button element, the HMI executes the macro commands first, and then executes the button actions. If the button states cannot be changed by touching it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI does not execute the macro commands.
After Execute Macro
When you touch the button element, the HMI executes the button actions first, and then executes the macro commands. If the button states cannot be changed by touching it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI does not execute the macro commands.
5-66
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Coordinates
Buttons
(1)
5
(2)
Figure 5.3.8 Coordinates property page for the Set Value element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2) Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
November, 2018
5-67
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
5.4 Set Constant
When you touch this button on the HMI end, the HMI changes the register data into the specified Constant. Please refer to Table 5.4.1 Set Constant example.
Memory address of
the Set Constant element
Table 5.4.1 Set Constant example Set Constant
Detail of the Set Constant
element
Memory address of the Numeric
Display element
Set the Numeric Display element address to D668.
Data Type
Word Press Set Constant and write 1 into the Numeric Display element.
Execution results
5-68
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual When you double-click the Set Constant element, the property page is shown as follows.
Buttons
5
Figure 5.4.1 Properties of Set Constant
Function page Preview
Main Main-2
Text Picture Details Macro Coordinates
Table 5.4.2 Function page of Set Constant
Set Constant Description
The Set Constant elements can only view multi-language data display since the multistate property is not available for this element. Set the Write Address, Write Offset Address, Style, and Foreground Color. Set the Data Type, Data Format, and Detail for the Set Constant element. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the text content, font, size, color, format, zoom, and alignment. Set the Picture Bank Name, Alignment, Stretch Mode, and Transparent Color. Set the Interlock Address, Interlock State, Trigger Mode, Trigger Addr., Invisible Address, User Security Level, Set Low Security Level, and Confirm Window. Set the Before Execute Macro and After Execute Macro. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the button element.
November, 2018
5-69
Buttons Main
5
(1)
(7) (8)
DOPSoft User Manual
(2) (3)
(4) (5) (6)
Figure 5.4.2 Main property page for the Set Constant element
No. Property
Function description
You can choose the internal memory or the controller register address.
Write
The input memory type has to be Word.
Address
(1)
For the Link and Style selection, please refer to Section 5.1.
Write Offset Address
Please refer to the instructions in Appendix D Write and Read Offset Address.
There are two data types: Word and Double Word.
(2) Data Type
5-70
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
No. Property
Function description
When you set the Data Type to Word, the supported data formats are as follows:
5
(3) Data Format When you set the Data Type to Double Word, the supported data formats are as follows:
Determine the constant value to input.
(4)
Detail
The available element styles are Standard, Raised, Round, and Invisible. You can change the appearance of the element with this setting.
Standard
Raised
Round
Invisible
(5)
Style
November, 2018
5-71
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
No. Property
Function description
Set the foreground color of the element. When you set the Style to Invisible, the Foreground Color setting is invalid.
(6)
Foreground Color
If you have set the language data, you can edit the displaying text property, etc. with the Language setting of the element.
(7) Language
Record the button actions to be executed. The record is written in the CSV file of the Operation Log Table so that you know what actions have been done.
(8)
Element description
5-72
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Buttons
(1)
5
(2)
(3)
Figure 5.4.3 Main-2 property page for the Set Constant element
No.
Property
Function description
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The
(1)
Transparent
default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the
element.
(2) Smooth animation The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3)
Anti-aliasing
The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
November, 2018
5-73
Buttons Text
5 (1)
(4) (3)
DOPSoft User Manual (2) (5)
Figure 5.4.4 Text property page for the Set Constant element
No. Property
Function description
You can enter the text to be displayed in the text box.
(1)
Text
5-74
As long as the element allows text input, you can click the element on the screen and press the space key on the keyboard to start editing and inputting the text.
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
No. Property
Function description
(2)
Text property
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, zoom, alignment, and bold / italic / underline for the text. You can refer to the Preview section in the figure above for the text property setting results.
(3)
Edit Multilanguage
Text
If you have added multi-language text, the Text page allows you to edit multilanguage data.
When this function is enabled, it batch changes the texts of the specified state. The following illustrates the steps: 1. Input 123 to State 0, and 234 to State 1. 2. Click State 0. 3. Click Process the text of all states, and the State 1 text changes to 123.
5
Before change
Process the (4) text of all
(1)
states
After change
(3) (2)
November, 2018
5-75
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
No. Property
Function description
When this function is enabled, it batch changes the text properties of the specified state. Items included in the text property are shown in the figure below.
Process
(5)
text properties
of all states
The following illustrates the steps:
1. Input Delta to State 0, and set the font to Segoe Script; input HMI to State 1, and set the font to Arial.
2. Click State 0.
3. Click Process text properties of all states, and the State 1 font changes to Segoe Script.
5-76
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual No. Property
Function description
Buttons
(1)
5
Before change
(1)
Process
(5)
text properties
of all states
After change
(2)
(3)
November, 2018
5-77
Buttons Picture
5
(1)
(2) (3)
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 5.4.5 Picture property page for the Set Constant element
5-78
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
No. Property
Function description
The default for Picture Bank Name is None. To set the picture display, use the dropdown list to view the picture bank provided by the software and then select the desired pictures.
5
(1)
Picture Bank Name
November, 2018
5-79
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
No. Property
Function description
You can use the Alignment options to set the picture alignment.
Alignment
The Stretch Mode options include Stretch All, Stretch 1:1, and Actual Size.
Stretch All
Stretch 1:1
Actual Size
(2)
If you select Stretch 1:1, If you select Actual Size, If you select Stretch All, the picture displays in regardless of the element
the picture fills the full
1:1 size based on the
size, the picture displays
element display area.
element width and
in its actual size in the
length.
element display area.
Stretch Mode
If you check [Process pictures of all states], it assumes that the elements have multiple states and some pictures do not fill the full element display area. You can use this function to process all pictures instead of setting them one by one, which saves the editing time.
Specify a color in the picture and turn this color into transparent. If you select the
Transparent Color icon
and click the white part on the calendar, the software
changes the white part into transparent, which you can see becomes identical to the
element foreground color.
(3)
Transparent Color
5-80
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Details
Buttons
5
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Figure 5.4.6 Details property page for the Set Constant element
November, 2018
5-81
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
No. Property
Function description
The Interlock Address enables you to operate a certain element from this particular address, which must be operated along with the Interlock State. If the Interlock State is set to OFF, it means the Interlock Address is operable when the Interlock State is OFF; on the other hand, if the Interlock State is set to ON, the Interlock Address is operable when the Interlock State is ON.
The following describes how it works:
1. Create a button and set its address to $8.0. Then, set the Interlock Address to $8.0 for the button which address is $99.0.
2. Before having the button which address is $99.0 to operate, you have to press the button which address is $8.0 to validate the button action which address is $99.0.
Interlock State / (1) Interlock Address
1. Create a button and set its address to $8.0.
2. Execute the button (address $8.0) first so you can press the other button (address $99.0).
5-82
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
No. Property
Function description
There are two trigger modes: Before Writing and After Writing.
Trigger type
Before Writing
Set the button to ON before changing values.
After Writing
The button turns to ON after changing values.
You can create a button element, set the address, and select Before Writing or After Writing to trigger the specified controller Bit address to ON.
The trigger function only turns the controller address to ON, so you need to turn the address to OFF if triggering again is required.
Flowchart of Before Writing
Flowchart of After Writing
5
Trigger
(2)
Mode / Trigger
Address
When the Invisible Address is set to ON, the button element is invisible and you cannot enable its functions.
(3)
Invisible Address
Invisible Address is
off
Invisible Address is
on
Element is invisible
November, 2018
5-83
Buttons No. Property
5
Function description
DOPSoft User Manual
User Security
Level This function sets the permission level for pressing the element; this operation is available for users with the set security level or higher. After you set the User Security Level and press the element, a password input window pops up to confirm whether the security level password is correct (you can modify this password through the Password Table Setup element, please refer to Section 5.7.2 Password Table Setup).
(4)
Set Low Security
If you set the Set Low Security to Yes, each time you input the password, the HMI sets the security level to the lowest. The next time you press the element, the HMI asks you to input the password for the corresponding security level again.
5-84
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
No. Property
Function description
If you set the Confirm Window to Yes, the following Confirmation Dialog pops up for you to confirm the pressing action after pressing the element.
(5)
Confirm Window
5
November, 2018
5-85
Buttons Macro
5
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) Figure 5.4.7 Macro property page for the Set Constant element
5-86
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
Flowcharts of Before / After Execute Macro:
Buttons
5
(1)
Before Execute Macro
After Execute Macro
When you touch the button element, the HMI executes the macro commands first, and then executes the button actions. If the button states cannot be changed by touching it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI does not execute the macro commands.
When you touch the button element, the HMI executes the button actions first, and then executes the macro commands. If the button states cannot be changed by touching it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI does not execute the macro commands.
November, 2018
5-87
Buttons Coordinates
5
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 5.4.8 Coordinates property page for the Set Constant element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
5-88
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
5.5 Increment / Decrement
When you touch the Increment or Decrement button on the HMI end, the HMI reads the register data, adds or deducts the set increment or decrement, and then writes the results into the corresponding register. If the increased or decreased value exceeds the set upper or lower limit, the Increment / Decrement button maintains the upper / lower limit value in the corresponding register.
Note: if you press and hold the Increment / Decrement button, the value continues to increase or decrease.
Memory address
Table 5.5.1 Increment / Decrement example
Increment / Decrement
The Increment element Write Address: $555 The Decrement element Write Address: $555 The Numeric Display element Read Address: $555
Increment
Decrement
5
Increment/ Decrement
setting values
Increment
Execution results
Decrement
Increment by 5
Decrement by 7
November, 2018
5-89
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
When you double-click the Increment / Decrement element, the property page is shown as follows.
Figure 5.5.1 Properties of Increment / Decrement
Table 5.5.2 Function page of Increment / Decrement
Function page Preview
Main
Main-2 Text
Picture Details Macro Coordinates
Increment / Decrement
Description
The Increment / Decrement elements are only for viewing multi-language data display since the multistate property is not available for the element.
Set Write Address, Read Address, Write Offset Address, Read Offset Address, Style, and Foreground Color. Set the Data Type, Data Format, Increase / Decrease values, and Limit for the Increment / Decrement elements.
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing.
Set the text content, font, size, color, format, zoom, and alignment.
Set the Picture Bank Name, Alignment, Stretch Mode, and Transparent Color.
Set the Interlock Address, Interlock State, Trigger Mode, Trigger Addr., Invisible Address, User Security Level, Set Low Security Level, and Confirm Window.
Set the Before Execute Macro and After Execute Macro.
Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the button element.
5-90
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main
(1)
(2)
(8) (6)
(9) (7)
Buttons
(3)
5
(4)
(5)
Figure 5.5.2 Main property page for the Increment / Decrement elements
No.
Property
Function description
Write Address You can choose the internal memory or the controller register address.
(1)
The input memory type has to be Word.
Read Address For the Link and Style selection, please refer to Section 5.1.
Write Offset
Address
(2)
Please refer to the instructions in Appendix D Write and Read Offset Address.
Read Offset
Address
There are two data types: Word and Double Word.
(3)
Data Type
November, 2018
5-91
Buttons No.
5
Property
DOPSoft User Manual
Function description When you set the Data Type to Word, the supported data formats are as
follows:
(4)
Data Format
When you set the Data Type to Double Word, the supported data
formats are as follows:
The Increase/Decrease refers to the increment or decrement value when touching the Increment / Decrement buttons.
Limit refers to the increasing or decreasing value range. After pressing
Increase/Decreas
the confirm button, the DOPSoft checks the value range of the inputted
e
Increase / Decrease values and Limit values according to the selected
Data Type and Data Format.
(5)
Limit
The available styles are Standard, Raised, Round, and Invisible. You can change the appearance of the element with this setting.
Standard
Raised
Round
Invisible
(6)
Style
5-92
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Buttons
Function description
Set the foreground color of the element. When you set the Style to Invisible, the Foreground Color setting is
invalid.
5
(7) Foreground Color
If you have set the language data, you can edit the displaying text property, etc. with the Language setting of the element.
(8)
Language
Record the button actions to be executed. The record is written in the CSV file of the Operation Log Table so that you know what actions have been done.
(9)
Element description
November, 2018
5-93
Buttons Main-2
5
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 5.5.3 Main-2 property page for the Increment / Decrement elements
No.
Property
Function description
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The
(1)
Transparent default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the
element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3)
Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
5-94
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Text
(1)
(4) (3)
Buttons
(2)
5
(5)
Figure 5.5.4 Text property page for the Increment / Decrement elements
No. Property
Function description
You can input the text to be displayed in the text box.
(1)
Text
November, 2018
As long as the element allows text input, you can click the element on the screen and press the space key on the keyboard to start editing and inputting the text.
5-95
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
No. Property
Function description
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, zoom, alignment, and bold / (2) Text property italic / underline for the text. You can refer to the Preview section in the figure
above for the text property setting results.
(3)
Edit Multilanguage
Text
If you have added multi-language text, the Text page allows you to edit multilanguage data.
When this function is enabled, it batch changes the texts of the specified state. The following illustrates the steps:
1. Input 123 to State 0, and 234 to State 1. 2. Click State 0. 3. Click Process the text of all states, and the State 1 text changes to 123.
Before change
Process the
(4)
text of all
states
After
(3)
change
(2)
When this function is enabled, it batch changes the text properties of the specified state. Items included in the text property are shown in the figure below.
Process text (5) properties of
all states
5-96
The following illustrates the steps: 1. Input Delta to State 0, and set the font to Segoe Script; input HMI to State 1,
and set the font to Arial. 2. Click State 0. 3. Click Process text properties of all states, and the State 1 font changes to
Segoe Script.
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual No. Property
Function description
Buttons
(1)
5
Before change
(1)
Process text (5) properties of
all states
After change
(2)
(3)
November, 2018
5-97
Buttons Picture
5
(1)
(2)
(3)
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 5.5.5 Picture property page for the Increment / Decrement elements
5-98
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
No. Property
Function description
The default for Picture Bank Name is None. To set the picture display, use the drop-down list to view the picture bank provided by the software and then select the desired pictures.
5
(1)
Picture Bank Name
November, 2018
5-99
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
No. Property
Function description
You can use the Alignment options to set how pictures are aligned.
The Stretch Mode options include Stretch All, Stretch 1:1, and Actual Size.
Stretch All
Stretch 1:1
Actual Size
(2)
Alignment /
Stretch Mode
If you select Stretch All, the picture fills the full element display area.
If you select Stretch 1:1, the picture displays in 1:1 size based on the element width and length.
If you select Actual Size, regardless of the element size, the picture displays in its actual size in the element display area.
If you check [Process pictures of all states], it assumes that the elements have multiple states and some pictures do not fill the full element display area. You can use this function to process all pictures instead of setting them one by one, which saves the editing time.
Specify a color in the picture and turn this color into transparent. If you select the
Transparent Color icon
and click the white part on the calendar, the
software changes the white part into transparent, which you can see becomes
identical to the element foreground color.
(3)
Transparent Color
5-100
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Details
Buttons
5
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Figure 5.5.6 Details property page for the Increment / Decrement elements
November, 2018
5-101
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
No. Property
Function description
The Interlock Address enables you to operate a certain element from this particular address, which must be operated along with the Interlock State. If the Interlock State is set to OFF, it means the Interlock Address is operable when the Interlock State is OFF; on the other hand, if the Interlock State is set to ON, the Interlock Address is operable when the Interlock State is ON.
The following describes how it works:
1. Create a button and set its address to $8.0. Then, set the Interlock Address
to $8.0 for the button which address is $99.0.
Interlock State
2.
Before having the button which address is $99.0 to operate, you have to press the button which address is $8.0 to validate the button action which
address is $99.0.
(1)
1. Create a button and set its address to $8.0.
Interlock Address
2. Execute the button (address $8.0) first so you can press the other button (address $99.0).
There are two trigger modes: Before Writing and After Writing.
Before Writing
After Writing
Trigger Mode / (2)
Trigger type
Set the button to ON before changing values.
The button turns to ON after changing values.
Trigger
Address You can create a button element, set the address, and select Before Writing
or After Writing to trigger the specified controller Bit address to ON.
The Trigger function only turns the controller address to ON, so you need to turn the address to OFF if triggering again is required.
5-102
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual No. Property
Function description
Flowchart of Before Writing
Flowchart of After Writing
Buttons
5
Trigger Mode / (2) Trigger Address
When the Invisible Address is set to ON, the button element is invisible and you cannot enable its functions.
Invisible Address is
off
(3)
Invisible Address
Invisible Address is
on
Element is invisible
November, 2018
5-103
Buttons No. Property
Function description
DOPSoft User Manual
5
User Security
Level
This function sets the permission level for pressing the element; this operation is available for users with the set security level or higher.
After you set the User Security Level and press the element, a password input window pops up to confirm whether the security level password is correct (you can modify this password through the Password Table Setup element, please refer to Section 5.7.2 Password Table Setup).
(4)
Set Low Security
If you set the Set Low Security to Yes, each time you input the password, the HMI sets the security level to the lowest. The next time you press the element, the HMI asks you to enter the password for the corresponding security level again.
If you set the Confirm Window to Yes, the following Confirmation Dialog pops up for you to confirm the pressing action after pressing the element.
(5)
Confirm Window
5-104
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Macro
Buttons
5
(1) Figure 5.5.7 Macro property page for the Increment / Decrement elements
November, 2018
5-105
Buttons
5
No.
Property
Function description
Flowcharts of Before / After Execute Macro:
DOPSoft User Manual
(1)
Before Execute Macro
When you touch the button element, the HMI executes the macro commands first, and then executes the button actions. If the button states cannot be changed by touching it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI does not execute the macro commands.
After Execute Macro
When you touch the button element, the HMI executes the button actions first, and then executes the macro commands. If the button states cannot be changed by touching it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI does not execute the macro commands.
5-106
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Coordinates
Buttons
(1)
5
(2)
Figure 5.5.8 Coordinates property page for the Increment / Decrement elements
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
November, 2018
5-107
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
5.6 Goto Screen
The Goto Screen button enables you to right-click the button and select Goto Screen to go to the set screen number.
5-108
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
The DOPSoft provides three types of Goto Screen buttons: Goto Screen: when you touch the Goto Screen button on the HMI end, the HMI switches
to the set screen. Previous Page: when you touch the Previous Page button on the HMI end, the HMI
switches to the previously displayed screen. Page Up: when you touch the Page Up button on the HMI end, the HMI records the
screen switching sequence, e.g. Screen 1 > Screen 3 > Screen 2, and then executes the Previous Page button function. Thus, the screen switching sequence is Screen 2 > Screen 3 > Screen 1.
You can set the functions for the three buttons with the Properties on the right-hand side or by double-clicking Goto Screen to enter the setting window.
5
November, 2018
5-109
Buttons
5
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 5.6.1 Properties of Goto Screen
5-110
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
The Goto Screen item in the Goto
Screen element
Table 5.6.1 Goto Screen example Goto Screen
Buttons
5
When you touch Goto Screen, the HMI switches to the specified screen.
When you touch Previous Page, the HMI switches to the previously displayed screen.
Execution results
Screen 1
(1) Goto Screen
Screen 2
(4) Previous Page
(2) Goto Screen
(3) Previous Page
Screen 3
November, 2018
5-111
Buttons
5
DOPSoft User Manual
Goto Screen For the Page Up button, the HMI records the screen switching sequence, e.g.
Screen 1 > Screen 2 > Screen 3, and then executes the Previous Page button function. Thus, the screen switching sequence is Screen 3 > Screen 2 > Screen 1.
Screen 1
Execution results
(4) Page Up (1) Goto Screen
Screen 2
(2) Goto Screen (3) Page Up
Screen 3
5-112
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual When you double-click the Goto Screen element, the property page is shown as follows.
Buttons
5
Figure 5.6.2 Properties of Goto Screen
November, 2018
5-113
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
Function page Preview Main Main-2 Text Picture
Details
Macro Coordinates
Table 5.6.2 Function page of Goto Screen
Goto Screen Description
The Goto Screen element can only view multi-language data display since the multistate property is not available for this element. Set the Style and Foreground Color of the element. Set the Goto Screen, Close Subscreen, and [Set to low security level after screen change] of the Goto Screen element. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the text content, font, size, color, format, zoom, and alignment. Set the Picture Bank Name, Alignment, Stretch Mode, and Transparent Color.
Goto Screen Set the Interlock Address, Interlock State, Trigger Mode, Trigger Addr., Invisible Address, Cancel Action, User Security Level, and Confirm Window.
Previous Page
Set the Interlock Address, Interlock State, Trigger Mode, Trigger Addr., Invisible Address, User Security Level, Set Low Security Level, and Confirm Window. Set the Before Execute Macro and After Execute Macro. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the button element.
5-114
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main
(1) (2)
(5) (6)
Buttons
(3)
5
(4)
Figure 5.6.3 Main property page for the Goto Screen element
No. Property
Function description
The available styles are Standard, Raised, Round, and Invisible. You can change the appearance of the element with this setting.
Standard
Raised
Round
Invisible
(1)
Style
November, 2018
5-115
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
No. Property
Function description
Set the foreground color of the element. When you set the Style to Invisible, the Foreground Color setting is invalid.
(2)
Foreground Color
The Screen Selection window pops up after you click
in the figure above,
and you can select the screen to be changed, as shown below:
(3)
Goto Screen
5-116
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
No. Property
Function description
Close Subscreen
Only when the Goto Screen button is created in the Subscreen will the Close Subscreen option be enabled. When you press Goto Screen, the current Subsreen closes at the same time.
Force set the current User Security Level to the lowest after pressing the button, which can prevent the element from being accidentally operated.
(4)
Set to low security level after screen change.
5
If you have set the language data, you can edit the displaying text property, etc. with the Language setting of the element.
(5) Language
Record the button actions to be executed. The record is written in the CSV file of the Operation Log Table so that you know what actions have been done.
(6)
Element description
November, 2018
5-117
Buttons Main-2
5
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 5.6.4 Main-2 property page for the Goto Screen element
No.
Property
Function description
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The
(1)
Transparent
default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the
element.
(2) Smooth animation The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3)
Anti-aliasing
The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
5-118
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Text
(1)
(4) (3)
Buttons
(2)
5
(5)
Figure 5.6.5 Text property page for the Goto Screen element
November, 2018
5-119
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
No.
Property
Function description
You can input the text to be displayed in the text box.
(1)
Text
As long as the element allows text input, you can click the element on the screen and press the space key on the keyboard to start editing and inputting the text.
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, zoom, alignment, and bold / (2) Text property italic / underline for the text. You can refer to the Preview section in the figure
above for the text property setting results.
(3)
Edit Multi- If you have added multi-language text, the Text page allows you to edit multilanguage Text language data.
When this function is enabled, it batch changes the texts of the specified state. The following illustrates the steps: 1. Input 123 to State 0, and 234 to State 1. 2. Click State 0. 3. Click Process the text of all states, and the State 1 text changes to 123.
Before change
Process the
(4)
text of all
(1)
states
5-120
After change
(3) (2) November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
No.
Property
Function description
When this function is enabled, it batch changes the text properties of the specified state. Items included in the text property are shown in the figure below.
5
The following illustrates the steps: 1. Input Delta to State 0, and set the font to Segoe Script; input HMI to State 1,
and set the font to Arial. 2. Click State 0. 3. Click Process text properties of all states, and the State 1 font changes to
Segoe Script.
(1)
Process text (5) properties of
all states
Before change
(1)
After change
November, 2018
(3) (2)
5-121
Buttons Picture
5
(1)
(2) (3)
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 5.6.6 Picture property page for the Goto Screen element
5-122
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
No. Property
Function description
The default for Picture Bank Name is None. To set the picture display, use the drop-down list to view the picture bank provided by the software and then select the desired pictures.
5
Picture
(1)
Bank
Name
November, 2018
5-123
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
No. Property
Function description
You can use the Alignment options to set how pictures are aligned.
Alignment
The Stretch Mode options include Stretch All, Stretch 1:1, and Actual Size.
Stretch All
Stretch 1:1
Actual Size
(2)
Stretch Mode
If you select Stretch All, the picture fills the full element display area.
If you select Stretch 1:1, the picture displays in 1:1 size based on the element width and length.
If you select Actual Size, regardless of the element size, the picture displays in its actual size in the element display area.
If you check [Process pictures of all states], it assumes that the elements have multiple states and some pictures do not fill the full element display area. You can use this function to process all pictures instead of setting them one by one, which saves the editing time.
Specify a color in the picture and turn this color into transparent. If you select the
Transparent Color icon
and click the white part on the calendar, the software
changes the white part into transparent, which you can see becomes identical to
the element foreground color.
(3)
Transparent Color
5-124
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Details
(5) (6)
Buttons
5
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Figure 5.6.7 Details property page for the Goto Screen element
November, 2018
5-125
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
No. Property
Function description
The Interlock Address enables you to operate a certain element from this particular address, which must be operated along with the Interlock State. If the Interlock State is set to OFF, it means the Interlock Address is operable when the Interlock State is OFF; on the other hand, if the Interlock State is set to ON, the Interlock Address is operable when the Interlock State is ON.
The following describes how it works:
1. Create a button and set its address to $8.0. Then, set the Interlock Address to $8.0 for the button which address is $99.0.
2. Before having the button which address is $99.0 to operate, you have to press the button which address is $8.0 to validate the button action which address is $99.0.
Interlock
(1)
State / Interlock
Address
1. Create a button and set its address to $8.0.
2. Execute the button (address $8.0) first so you can press the other button (address $99.0).
5-126
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
No. Property
Function description
There are two trigger modes: Before Writing and After Writing.
Trigger type
Before Writing
Set the button to ON before changing values.
After Writing
The button turns to ON after changing values.
You can create a button element and set the address, and select Before Writing or After Writing to trigger the specified controller Bit address to ON .
The Trigger function only turns the controller address to ON, so you need to turn the address to OFF if triggering again is required.
Flowchart of Before Writing
Flowchart of After Writing
5
Trigger Mode / (2) Trigger Address
When the Invisible Address is set to ON, the button element is invisible and you cannot enable its functions.
Invisible Address is off
(3)
Invisible Address
Invisible Address is on
Element is invisible
November, 2018
5-127
Buttons No. Property
Function description
DOPSoft User Manual
5
User Security
Level
This function sets the permission level for pressing the element; this operation is available for users with the set security level or higher.
After you set the User Security Level and press the element, a password input window pops up to confirm whether the security level password is correct (you can modify this password through the Password Table Setup element, please refer to Section 5.7.2 Password Table Setup).
(4)
Set Low Security
If you set the Set Low Security to Yes, each time you input the password, the HMI sets the security level to the lowest. The next time you press the element, the HMI asks you to input the password for the corresponding security level again.
If you set the Confirm Window to Yes, the following Confirmation Dialog pops up for you to confirm the pressing action after pressing the element.
(5)
Confirm Window
5-128
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
No. Property
Function description
Cancel Action enables you to pause or cancel the Goto Screen action with this element.
When you set Cancel Action to ON, the Goto Screen button function is invalid; on the other hand, if you set Cancel Action to OFF, the Goto Screen button is valid.
Note: the Goto Screen function is available after the Interlock Address is activated. Cancel
Action enables you to cancel the Goto Screen action during its operation. If Cancel Action is
set to ON continuously, you cannot change the screen even if the Interlock Address is set to
(6)
Cancel Action
ON.
5
November, 2018
5-129
Buttons Macro
5
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) Figure 5.6.8 Macro property page for the Goto Screen element
5-130
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
Flowcharts of Before / After Execute Macro:
Buttons
5
(1)
Before Execute Macro
After Execute Macro
When you touch the button element, the HMI executes the macro commands first, and then executes the button actions. If the button states cannot be changed by touching it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI does not execute the macro commands.
When you touch the button element, the HMI executes the button actions first, and then executes the macro commands. If the button states cannot be changed by touching it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI does not execute the macro commands.
November, 2018
5-131
Buttons Coordinates
5
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 5.6.9 Coordinates property page for the Goto Screen element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
5-132
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
5.7 Other elements
There are 14 other button elements, including System Date and Time, Password Table Setup, Enter Password, Contrast Brightness, Set Low Security, System Menu, Print Output, Report List, Screen Capture, Remove Storage, Import/Export Recipe, Calibration, Language Change, and FileSlot Import/Export. The following describes the functions of each button element.
5
5.7.1 System Date and Time
Function
Illustration
You can set the system date and time on the HMI end with the System Date and Time button.
This function is the same as that of the Date/Time on the HMI screen.
November, 2018
5-133
Buttons
5
5.7.2 Password Table Setup
Function
You can select [Options] > [Configuration] > [Security Level and Password] from the drop-down list and find the Password Table. The table shows the password settings of each security level. After setting the passwords, download them to the HMI.
You can use the Password Table Setup button when you need to change the Password Table during the HMI operation. The system enables the corresponding level according to the User Security Level defined in the Password Table Setup.
If your User Security Level is lower than the set Security Level, you are unable to open the Password Table and the Enter Password window pops up.
Whether the inputted password level is higher than or equivalent to the set Security Level determines if you are able to open the Password Table Setup or not. You are only allowed to change the passwords lower than or equivalent to the current User Security Level after entering the Password Table Setup. You are not allowed to change or view the passwords higher than the current User Security Level.
5-134
Illustration
DOPSoft User Manual
Security level = 4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
5.7.3 Enter Password
Function
The Enter Password button provides the interface for inputting passwords on the HMI end.
You can click [Options] > [Configuration] > [Security Level and Password], and find the Password Table, then input your account and password to log in to the corresponding level.
5.7.4 Contrast Brightness
Function
Adjust the HMI contrast brightness.
Illustration Illustration
Buttons
5
5.7.5 Set Low Security
Function
Set the User Security Level to the lowest. You can set the User Security Level for all the DOPSoft elements so that you can protect the system parameters from being tampered or manipulated resulting in system errors.
November, 2018
5-135
Buttons
5
5.7.6 System Menu
Function
When you press the System Menu button, the HMI switches to the System Menu screen, as shown on the right-hand side. You can go back to the general HMI execution screen by touching the upper-right corner of the System Menu screen.
Illustration
DOPSoft User Manual
5.7.7 Print Output
Function If the HMI project has set up a printer, you can perform printing with the Print Output button.
5.7.8 Report List
Function
There are two storage devices for the Report List button: USB Disk and SD.
You can select the desired device to export the Report List. Touch the Report List button, and you can output the data to the specified storage device.
5-136
Illustration November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
5.7.9 Screen Capture
Function (1)
The Screen Capture function
(2)
enables you to capture the
current HMI screen and store it in an
external storage device, including
USB Disk and SD as shown in
Figure (1).
After you touch the Screen Capture
button, the Screen Capture window
pops up on the HMI to inform you
that it is storing the current screen to an external storage device, as
(3)
shown in Figure (2).
You can check the files in the external devices after the saving is completed. The HMI stores the file folders by date (yyyy / mm / dd) and the screen files by time (hh / mm / ss).
The output picture format is .bmp,
as shown in Figure (4).
(4)
Illustration
Buttons
5
5.7.10 Remove Storage
Function
Prevent data loss of the (1) storage device connected to the HMI. You must execute Remove Storage before turning off the HMI, replacing or removing the storage device.
The HMI informs you that
the storage is removed after
executing the Remove
(2)
Storage button, as shown in
Figure (1).
The HMI supports two types of storage devices: USB Disk and SD, as shown in Figure (2).
November, 2018
Illustration
5-137
Buttons
5
5.7.11 Import / Export Recipe
Function (1)
(2)
You must edit and open the recipe first before executing the Import / Export Recipe button, or the pressing action is invalid.
You can set the Action of the Import /
Export Recipe button to Import or
Export, as shown in Figure (1).
You can set the Save in types,
(3)
including USB Disk and SD, as shown
in Figure (2).
The HMI informs you that the importing / exporting data is in progress after you touch the Import / Export Recipe button, as shown in Figure (3).
The exported file format is .CSV, and the HMI stores the files in the default folder HMI-000.
DOPSoft User Manual Illustration
5.7.12 Calibration
Function
The Calibration button enables you to perform 5-point calibration.
After you touch the Calibration button, the HMI immediately enters the Calibration screen, as shown in the figure on the right-hand side.
5-138
Illustration November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
5.7.13 Language Change
Function (1)
Illustration
(2)
The Language Change button enables you to quickly change the displaying language.
Set the displaying language to Chinese or English, as shown in Figure (1) on the right-hand side. As shown in Figure (2), when you execute the Language Change button, the HMI displays the data in
English when you press
(Change to English); the HMI
displays the data in Chinese when you press Change to Chinese, as shown in Figure (3).
Please activate the Multi-language
function before using the Language
Change button. Please refer to
(3)
Chapter 25 for more details on the
Multi-language function.
Change to English button in Chinese
Buttons
5
November, 2018
5-139
Buttons
5
5.7.14 Import / Export FileSlot
Function (1)
(2)
You must set the FileSlot number and size before using the Import / Export FileSlot button, or the pressing action is invalid.
You can set the Action for the Import / Export FileSlot button to Import or Export, as shown in Figure (1) on the right-hand side.
You need to define the FileSlot ID of the Import / Export FileSlot button, as shown in Figure (2). The FilesSlot ID can be a memory address or a constant value. (3) Memory usage
Variables
Internal memory
PLC Register
Constant
FileSlot ID
After pressing the Import / Export FileSlot button, the File Manager window pops up for you to select the import / export position, as shown in Figure (3). Select the external storage device, then click where the arrow points and enter the filename. After entering the filename and clicking ENT, the exporting is completed as shown in Figure (4).
You need to run the macro FileSlotRead to read the file data into the register after importing FileSlot.
(4)
DOPSoft User Manual Illustration
5-140
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
5.7.15 Shared properties of other elements
Function page
Shared properties of other elements
Property
Function description
The available styles are Standard, Raised, Round, and Invisible. You can change the appearance of the element with this setting.
Standard
Raised
Round
Invisible
Style
5
Main
Set the foreground color of the element.
When you set the Style to Invisible, the Foreground Color setting is invalid.
Foreground Color
You can enter the text to be displayed in the text box.
Text Text
Text property
Edit Multilanguage Text
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, zoom, alignment, and bold / italic / underline for the text.
If you have added multi-language text, the Text page allows you to edit multi-language data.
November, 2018
5-141
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
Function page
Shared properties of other elements
Property
Function description
The default for Picture Bank Name is None. To set the picture display, use the drop-down list to view the picture bank provided by the software and then select the desired pictures.
Picture
Picture Bank Name
5-142
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
Function page
Shared properties of other elements
Property
Function description
You can use the Alignment options to set how pictures are aligned.
Alignment
5
Picture
The Stretch Mode options include Stretch All, Stretch 1:1, and Actual Size.
Stretch All
Stretch 1:1
Actual Size
If you select Stretch All, the picture fills the full element display area.
If you select Stretch 1:1, the picture displays in 1:1 size based on the element width and length.
If you select Actual Size, regardless of the element size, the picture displays in its actual size in the element display area.
Stretch Mode
If you check [Process pictures of all states], it assumes that the elements have multiple states and some pictures do not fill the full element display area. You can use this function to process all pictures instead of setting them one by one, which saves the editing time.
Specify a color in the picture and turn this color into transparent. If you
select the Transparent Color icon
and click the white part on the
calendar, the software changes the white part into transparent, which
you can see becomes identical to the element foreground color.
Transparent Color
November, 2018
5-143
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
Function page
Shared properties of other elements
Property
Function description
Interlock State 1. 2.
The Interlock Address enables you to operate a certain element from this particular address, which must be operated along with the Interlock State. If the Interlock State is set to OFF, it means the Interlock Address is operable when the Interlock State is OFF; on the other hand, if the Interlock State is set to ON, the Interlock Address is operable when the Interlock State is ON.
The following describes how it works:
Create a button and set its address to $8.0. Then, set the Interlock Address to $8.0 for the button which address is $99.0.
Before having the button which address is $99.0 to operate, you have to press the button which address is $8.0 to validate the button action which address is $99.0.
1. Create a button and set its address to $8.0.
Interlock Address
Details
2. Execute the button (address $8.0) first so you can press the other button (address $99.0).
When the Invisible Address is set to ON, the button element is invisible and you cannot execute its functions.
Invisible Address is
off
Invisible Address
Invisible Address is
on
Element is invisible
5-144
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
Function page
Shared properties of other elements
Property
Function description
This function sets the permission level for pressing the element; this operation is available for users with the set security level or higher.
5
User Security Level
After you set the User Security Level and press the element, a password input window pops up to confirm whether the security level password is correct (you can modify this password through the Password Table Setup element, please refer to Section 5.7.2 Password Table Setup).
Details
If you set the Confirm Window to Yes, the following Confirmation Dialog pops up for you to confirm the pressing action after pressing the element.
Confirm Window
November, 2018
5-145
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
Shared properties of other elements
Function page
Property
Function description
Flowcharts of Before / After Execute Macro:
Macro
Coordinates
Before Execute Macro
When you touch the button element, the HMI executes the macro commands first, and then executes the button actions. If the button states cannot be changed by touching it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI does not execute the macro commands.
After Execute Macro
When you touch the button element, the HMI executes the button actions first, and then executes the macro commands. If the button states cannot be changed by touching it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI does not execute the macro commands.
X value and Y value
Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
Width and Height
Set the width and height of the elements.
5-146
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
5.8 Multiple actions
The Multiple actions button allows you to execute multiple actions in one single button. You can define the actions to execute when you press, release, or long press the button. You can use this function to replace the complicated programming process for the macro to trigger the button action. Available button actions in the Multiple actions settings are as follows:
5
Figure 5.8.1 Button actions available for the Multiple actions button
Note: 1. You can set up to 32 actions for each press, release, and long press, so one Multiple actions button
can execute up to 32*3 actions. 2. The System Menu can only be the last action, meaning you cannot add any actions following the
System Menu. 3. One Multiple actions button can only have one page change action, including Goto Screen and
Previous Page. 4. If the button action is set with a macro, the execution of the macro is invalid.
November, 2018
5-147
Buttons
5
Example descriptions for the Multiple actions function are as follows:
Table 5.8.1 Multiple actions button example Multiple actions button
Create a Multiple actions button.
DOPSoft User Manual
Set Multiple actions
Set the button press action with Number 1 as Increment. Then, set the Write Address to $10, the Increase / Decrease value to 3, and the Limit to 1000.
5-148
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
Multiple actions button
Set the button press action with Number 2 as Multistate and the Write Address to $20. The other settings are shown in the figure below.
5
Set the button release action to Goto Screen - Screen_2.
Set Multiple actions
Set the button long press action to Set Constant and the Long pressed time to 3 seconds. Set the Write Address to $30 and the Set value to 5000.
November, 2018
5-149
Buttons
5
DOPSoft User Manual
Multiple actions button Create a Numeric Display element which Read Address is $10 for displaying the
changed value after the increment action is executed.
Set Numeric Display elements
Create a Numeric Display element which Read Address is $30 for displaying the changed value after the Set Constant action is executed.
Create a Multistate button. Set the Write Address to $20, State Counts to 3, and the switching sequence (Sequence) to Next State.
Set Multistate
5-150
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Multiple actions button
Set the Foreground Color for State 0, 1, and 2.
State
Foreground Color
0
Set Multistate
1
Buttons
5
2
Add Screen_2. Create a table element and a Goto Screen button which is set to switch to Screen_1.
New Screen
November, 2018
5-151
Buttons
5
DOPSoft User Manual
Multiple actions button If you press the Multiple Actions button, the Increment and Multistate actions are
executed.
If you release the Multiple Actions button, the Goto Screen action is executed and the HMI screen changes to Screen_2.
Execution results
When you change the screen to Screen_1 and long press the Multiple Actions button for 3 seconds, the Set Constant action is executed. Apart from long pressing the button for 3 seconds, you also pressed the button, so the HMI executes both the Increment and Multistate actions.
5-152
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
When you double-click the Multiple actions button, the property page is shown as follows.
5
Figure 5.8.2 Properties of Multiple actions
Table 5.8.2 Function page of Multiple actions
Function page Preview
Main
Main-2 Text
Picture Details Coordinates
Multiple actions button
Description
The Multiple actions button can only view multi-language data display since the multistate property is not available for this element.
Set the Style, Foreground Color, and Filled style. Set the actions when you press, release, and long press the button as well as the long press time.
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing.
Set the text content, font, size, color, format, zoom, and alignment.
Set the Picture Bank Name, Alignment, Stretch Mode, and Transparent Color.
Set the Interlock State, Interlock Address, Invisible Address, User Security Level, and Set Low Security.
Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the button element.
November, 2018
5-153
Buttons Main
5
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7) (8)
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
(3)
Figure 5.8.3 Main property page for the Multiple actions button element
5-154
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
No. Property
Function description
It is the action to execute after you press the Multiple actions button.
The supported button actions after pressing the button are shown as below:
5
(1)
Action when pressed
(2)
Action when released
It is the action to execute after you release the Multiple actions button. The supported button actions are the same as that of Action when pressed.
Action when long pressed
It is the action to execute after you long press the Multiple actions button.
You must set the Long pressed time for the long press button action to work.
The supported button actions are the same as that of Action when pressed and Action when released.
The setting range for Long pressed time is 0 - 10 second(s).
(3)
Long pressed time
The available styles are Standard, Raised, Round, and Invisible. You can change the appearance of the element with this setting.
Standard
Raised
Round
Invisible
(4)
Style
November, 2018
5-155
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
No. Property
Function description
Set the foreground color of the element. When you set the Style to Invisible, the Foreground Color setting is invalid.
(5)
Foreground Color
You can set the Filled style to Gradient or Fixed.
(6) Filled style
Gradient
Fixed
If you have set the language data, you can edit the displaying text property, etc. with the Language setting of the element.
(7) Language
5-156
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
No. Property
Function description
Record the button actions to be executed. The record is written in the CSV file of the Operation Log Table so that you know what actions have been done.
(8)
Element description
5
November, 2018
5-157
Buttons Main-2
5
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 5.8.4 Main-2 property page for the Multiple actions button element
No.
Property
Function description
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The
(1)
Transparent default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the
element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3)
Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
5-158
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Text
(1)
(4)
Buttons
(2)
5
(5) (3)
Figure 5.8.5 Text property page for the Multiple actions button element
November, 2018
5-159
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
No.
Property
Function description
You can enter the text to be displayed in the text box.
(1)
Text
As long as the element allows text input, you can click the element on the screen and press the space key on the keyboard to start editing and inputting the text.
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, zoom, alignment, and (2) Text property bold / italic / underline for the text. You can refer to the Preview section in the
figure above for the text property setting results.
(3)
Edit Multi-
If you have added multi-language text, the Text page allows you to edit multi-
language Text language data.
(4)
Process the text of all states
This function is not supported as this element does not have multiple states.
Process text (5) properties of all This function is not supported as this element does not have multiple states.
states
5-160
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Picture
(1) (2) (3)
Buttons
5
Figure 5.8.6 Picture property page for the Multiple actions button element
November, 2018
5-161
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
No. Property
Function description
The default for Picture Bank Name is None. To set the picture display, use the drop-down list to view the picture bank provided by the software and then select the desired pictures.
(1)
Picture Bank Name
5-162
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
You can use the Alignment options to set how pictures are aligned.
Alignment
Buttons
5
The Stretch Mode options include Stretch All, Stretch 1:1, and Actual Size.
Stretch All
Stretch 1:1
Actual Size
(2)
If you select Stretch All, the picture fills the full element display area.
If you select Stretch 1:1, the picture displays in 1:1 size based on the element width and length.
If you select Actual Size, regardless of the element size, the picture displays in its actual size in the element display area.
Stretch Mode
If you check [Process pictures of all states], it assumes that the elements have multiple states and some pictures do not fill the full element display area. You can use this function to process all pictures instead of setting them one by one, which saves the editing time.
Specify a color in the picture and turn this color into transparent. If you select the
Transparent Color icon
and click the white part on the calendar, the software
changes the white part into transparent, which you can see becomes identical to
the element foreground color.
(3)
Transparent Color
November, 2018
5-163
Buttons Details
5
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 5.8.7 Details property page for the Multiple actions button element
5-164
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buttons
No. Property
Function description
The Interlock Address enables you to operate a certain element from this particular address, which must be operated along with the Interlock State. If the Interlock State is set to OFF, it means the Interlock Address is operable when the Interlock State is OFF; on the other hand, if the Interlock State is set to ON, the Interlock Address is operable when the Interlock State is ON.
The following describes how it works:
1. Create a button and set its address to $8.0. Then, set the Interlock Address
Interlock
to $8.0 for the button which address is $99.0.
State
2. Before having the button which address is $99.0 to operate, you have to
press the button which address is $8.0 to validate the button action which
address is $99.0.
5
(1)
1. Create a button and set its address to $8.0.
Interlock Address
2. Execute the button (address $8.0) first so you can press the other button (address $99.0).
When the Invisible Address is set to ON, the button element is invisible and you cannot enable its functions.
Invisible Address is
off
(2)
Invisible Address
Invisible Address is
on
Element is invisible
November, 2018
5-165
Buttons
DOPSoft User Manual
5
No. Property
Function description
This function sets the permission level for pressing the element; this operation is available for users with the set security level or higher.
After you set the User Security Level and press the element, a password input window pops up to confirm whether the security level password is correct (you can modify this password through the Password Table Setup element, please refer to Section 5.7.2 Password Table Setup).
User Security
Level
(3) If you set the Set Low Security to Yes, each time you input the password, the HMI sets the security level to the lowest. The next time you press the element, the HMI asks you to enter the password for the corresponding security level again.
Set Low Security
5-166
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Coordinates
Buttons
(1)
5
(2)
Figure 5.8.8 Coordinates property page for the Multiple actions button element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
November, 2018
5-167
Buttons
5
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
DOPSoft User Manual
5-168
November, 2018
Meter
This chapter introduces the usage and setting details for the Meter elements.
6.1 Meter(1) / Meter(2) / Meter(3) / Meter(4)�������������������������������������������������6-2
November, 2018
6-1
Meter
DOPSoft User Manual
6
6.1 Meter(1) / Meter(2) / Meter(3) / Meter(4)
The DOPSoft provides four styles of meters for displaying the measuring values of the set addresses as well as for showing whether the value reaches the upper or lower limit and the target value. In addition, you can define the memory address for the target value and high / low limit to make the application more flexible so it meets your requirements. You can also specify the colors for the lower limit, upper limit, and target value for easier identification and viewing. Further, the Meter elements have the Smooth animation and Anti-aliasing functions that make the display smoother and more delicate. Please refer to the example descriptions below.
Table 6.1.1 Meter example
Meter(1) / Meter(2) / Meter(3) / Meter(4) Create Meter(1), Meter(2), Meter(3), and Meter(4) elements and set their read addresses to $1000.
Read Address
Data Type Word
Data Format Unsigned Decimal
Minimum 0
Maximum 1000
Settings
6-2
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Meter
Input value for activation
range
Meter(1) / Meter(2) / Meter(3) / Meter(4)
Low Limit Property
High Limit Property
Low Range Color Low Range Value High Range Color High Range Value
300
800
6
Screen Cycle Macro
After finishing editing the screens, download them to the HMI. Then, the HMI executes the program in the screen cycle macro and displays the results in the corresponding addresses set for the Meter elements in the accumulation process.
Execution results
Functions for Meter(1), Meter(2), Meter(3), and Meter(4) are the same except the styles; therefore, the section below will only introduce Meter(1).
November, 2018
6-3
Meter
DOPSoft User Manual
When you double-click the Meter element, the property page is shown as follows.
6
Figure 6.1.1 Properties of Meter
Table 6.1.2 Function page of Meter
Meter(1) / Meter(2) / Meter(3) / Meter(4)
Function page
Content description
Preview
Meter elements are only for viewing multi-language data display and have no multiple states.
Main
Set the Read Address, Read Offset Address, Style, Foreground Color, and Background Color.
Set the Mark Number, Subscale Mark Number, Pointer Color, Mark Color, Scale Color, Border Color, Low Range Color, High Range Color, and Numeric Display.
Set the Data Type, Data Format, and Minimum / Maximum input value of the element.
Set whether to display the target value and its color, the Range, Variable target/range limits, Integer Digits, and Fractional.
Main-2
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, Anti-aliasing, Limit Ranges Transparent, Target Value Transparent, Value Color, and Minify the scale.
Text
Set the text content, font, size, color, format, zoom, and alignment.
Picture
Set to Picture Bank Mode or Template Pattern.
Coordinates Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the element.
6-4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main
(1)
Meter
(2)
6
(3)
(4)
(10) (9) (8) (7)
(6) (5)
Figure 6.1.2 Main property page for the Meter elements
No.
Property
Function description
Read Address
You can choose the internal memory or the controller register address. The input memory type must be Word.
For the Link and Style selection, please refer to Section 5.1.
(1)
Read Offset Address
Please refer to the instructions in Appendix D Write and Read Offset Address.
There are two data types: Word and Double Word.
(2)
Data Type
November, 2018
6-5
Meter
No.
6
DOPSoft User Manual
Property
Function description
When you set the Data Type to Word, the supported data formats are as follows:
(3)
Data Format
When you set the Data Type to Double Word, the supported data
formats are as follows:
The allowable ranges for the minimum and maximum values are subject to change based on the selected data type and data format.
Data Type
Data Format
Allowable range
BCD
0 to 9999
Minimum /
(4)
maximum
input value
Word
Signed BCD Signed Decimal Unsigned Decimal
-999 to 9999 -32768 to 32767
0 to 65535
BCD
0 to 99999999
Double Word
Signed BCD Signed Decimal
-9999999 to 99999999 -2147483648 to 2147483647
Unsigned Decimal
0 to 4294967295
6-6
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Meter
No.
Property
Function description
Target
If the Variable target/range limits is unchecked, you can only enter a constant value to define the displayed target value on the meter. You can also specify the displayed color.
(5)
Display Format
Range
The Range includes the lower and upper limits. It is the same as the displayed target value. If the Variable target/range limits is unchecked, you can only enter constant values to define the lower and upper limits of the meter.
Variable target/range limits
If it is checked, you can define the memory addresses to dynamically change the target value, lower and upper limit values displayed.
Integer Digits Fractional
You can set the displaying number of integer digits and the number of decimal places.
Set the element foreground and background colors.
The element foreground color setting is only applicable to the Picture Bank mode of the Picture page.
Foreground
(6)
Color and Background
Color
Border color
Target value color
Low range color
Pointer color Mark color
Scale color Background color
High range color
Foreground color
6
The available styles are Standard, Raised, Sunken and Transparent. You can change the appearance of the element with this setting.
Standard
Raised
Sunken
Transparent
(7)
Style
November, 2018
6-7
Meter
No.
6
(8)
Property
Function description Display the value currently acquired by the meter.
Numeric Display
Set the Numeric Display to Yes.
DOPSoft User Manual
Set the Numeric Display to No.
Border color
Target value color
Low range color
Foreground color
Pointer color Mark color
Scale color Background color
High range color
Mark Number
The minimum mark number must be no less than 1 and the maximum is up to 10.
(9)
Style
Subscale Mark The minimum subscale number can be 0 and the
Number
maximum is up to 99.
Pointer Color
You can define the pointer color to be displayed.
Pointer color setting is only applicable to the Picture Bank Mode of the Picture page.
Mark Color
You can define the mark color to be displayed.
Scale Color
You can define the scale color to be displayed.
Scale color setting is only applicable to the Picture Bank Mode of the Picture page.
Border Color You can define the border color to be displayed.
Low Range Color You can define the low range color to be displayed.
High Range Color You can define the high range color to be displayed.
6-8
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
When you have set multi-language data, you can edit the displayed text properties, etc. with the Language setting of the element.
(10)
Language
Meter
6
November, 2018
6-9
Meter Main-2
6
(4) (5)
(6)
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 6.1.3 Main-2 property page for the Meter elements
No.
Property
Function description
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The
(1)
Transparent
default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the
element.
The Smooth animation function is available for this element. (2) Smooth animation
When enabled, the pointer motion becomes smoother.
6-10
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Meter
Function description
The Anti-aliasing function is available for this element. When enabled, the element display becomes more delicate without jagged edges.
6
Set the Antialiasing to
Yes.
(3)
Anti-aliasing
Set the Antialiasing to
No.
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
Limit Ranges Color
Set the Limit
Ranges
Transparent
(4)
Limit Ranges Transparent
to 50.
Set the Limit Ranges
Transparent to 255.
November, 2018
6-11
Meter
No.
6
Property
DOPSoft User Manual
Function description You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
Target Value Color
Target Value Transparent
Set the Target Value Transparent
to 50.
Set the Target Value Transparent
to 255.
Display the value currently acquired by the meter.
(5)
Value Color
6-12
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Meter
Function description
This function is only applicable to the Picture Bank Mode in the Picture page.
The Minify the scale setting range is 0 - 8. The greater the value is, the longer distance the scale mark to the
meter edge will be.
6
Set the
Minify the
scale to 3.
(6)
Minify the scale
Set the Minify the scale to 8.
November, 2018
6-13
Meter Text
6
(1)
DOPSoft User Manual
(2)
(4) (5)
(3)
Figure 6.1.4 Text property page for the Meter elements
6-14
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
You can enter the text to be displayed in this text box.
(1)
Text
Meter
6
As long as the element allows text input, you can click the element on the screen and press the space key on the keyboard to promptly start editing and inputting the text.
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, zoom, alignment, and
(2)
Text Property bold / italic / underline for the text. You can refer to the Preview section in the
figure above for the text property setting results.
(3)
Edit Multi- If you have added multi-language text, the Text page allows you to edit multilanguage Text language data.
Process the This function batch changes the text of the currently specified state.
(4)
text of all
states
Meter elements have only one state, so this function is not applicable.
This function batch changes the text of the currently specified property. Items included in the text property are shown in the figure below.
Process text
(5)
properties of
all states
Meter elements have only one state, so this function is invalid.
November, 2018
6-15
Meter Picture
6
DOPSoft User Manual
6-16
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
(1)
Meter
6
(2) (3) (1)
(3) (4) (1)
(3) (5)
Figure 6.1.5 Picture property page for the Meter elements
The Picture page has two modes, one is Template Pattern and the other is Picture Bank Mode. When you create meter elements, the default is the Template Pattern mode, but you can select the display mode as required.
In Template Pattern mode, you can use the Template Wizard to define the meter template.
November, 2018
6-17
Meter
6
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 6.1.6 Meter element patterns - Template Wizard
6-18
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Meter
No. Property
Function description
The default for Picture Bank Name is None. To set the picture display, use the drop-down list to view the picture bank provided by the software and then select the desired pictures.
The Meter provides patterns of meters, meter pointers, and meter centers, which allows you to choose from the picture bank.
6
(1)
Picture Bank Name
November, 2018
6-19
Meter
DOPSoft User Manual
6
No. Property
Function description
You can use the Alignment options to set how pictures are aligned.
Alignment
The Stretch Mode options include Stretch All, Stretch 1:1, and Actual Size.
Stretch All
Stretch 1:1
Actual Size
(2)
If you select Stretch All, the picture fills the full element display area.
If you select Stretch 1:1, the picture displays in 1:1 size based on the element width and length.
If you select Actual Size, regardless of the element size, the picture displays in its actual size in the element display area.
Stretch Mode
If you select [Process pictures of all states], it assumes that the elements have multiple states and some pictures do not fill the full element display area. You can use this function to process all pictures instead of setting them one by one, which saves the editing time.
Specify a color in the picture and turn this color into transparent. If you select the
Transparent Color icon
and click the white part on the calendar, the
software changes the white part into transparent, which you can see becomes
identical to the element foreground color.
(3)
Transparent Color
Pointer
(4)
Pattern The default is 4. The setting range is 1 - 21.
Width
Center
(5)
Pattern The default is 10. The setting range is 1 - 53.
Radius
6-20
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Coordinates
Meter
(1)
6
(2)
Figure 6.1.6 Coordinates property page for the Meter elements
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
November, 2018
6-21
Meter
6
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
DOPSoft User Manual
6-22
November, 2018
Bar Chart
This chapter provides the usage and setting details for the Bar elements.
7.1 Normal bar�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������7-2 7.2 Differential bar����������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7-13
November, 2018
7-1
Bar Chart
DOPSoft User Manual
7
7.1 Normal bar
The Normal bar element reads the register values corresponding to the read addresses and displays the minimum value and the maximum value with a bar chart on the HMI screen. Like the case of Meter elements, you can define the memory addresses for the Target value, High Limit, and Low Limit of the Normal bar elements, making the application more flexible and meet user requirements. You can also set the colors for the Low Limit, High Limit, and Target value so users can easily identify them with the set colors, as shown in Table 7.1.1. Please refer to the example descriptions below.
Table 7.1.1 Normal bar element - identifying the high and low limits with colors Using colors to identify the upper and lower limits
Low Range Color Foreground Color High Range Color Background Color
Example (1) Example (2) Example (3) 7-2
100
200
300
400
500
Current Low Limit
High Limit
100
200
300
400
500
Low Limit Current High Limit
100
200
300
400
500
Low Limit
High Limit Current
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Bar Chart
Read Address Settings Target
Range
Table 7.1.2 Normal bar element example
Data Type
Normal bar $1000
Data Format
Minimum
Maximum
Word
Unsigned Decimal
0
1000
Target color
Target value 500
Low Limit property
High Limit property
Low Range Color Low Range value High Range Color High Range value
300
800
7
Clock Macro
Example diagram of Normal bar element
Foreground Color
Background Color
Target Color
Border Color
Current value
Target value
Download the edited screen to the HMI. Next, the HMI executes the program in the Clock Macro and displays the accumulation results on the Normal bar elements with the corresponding addresses.
Execution results
Value < 300: displays in green
Value > 800: displays in red
November, 2018
7-3
Bar Chart
DOPSoft User Manual
When you double-click the Normal bar element, the property page is shown as follows.
7
Figure 7.1.1 Properties of the Normal bar element
Table 7.1.3 Function page of Normal bar
Function page Preview
Main
Main-2 Text
Coordinates
Normal bar
Description
Normal bar elements can only view multi-language data display and have no multiple states.
Set the Read Address, Read Offset Address, Style, Foreground Color, and Background Color.
Set the Style, Border Color, Low Range Color, and High Range Color. Set the element Data Type, Data Format, Minimum / Maximum input value,
and Variable minimum/maximum limits. Set whether to display the target value and its color, input values for the
activation range, and enable Variable target/range limits.
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, Anti-aliasing, and Target Value Style.
Set the text content, font, size, color, format, zoom, and alignment.
Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the element.
7-4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main (1)
(9) (8) (7) (6)
Bar Chart
(2)
(3)
7
(4)
(5)
Figure 7.1.2 Main property page for the Normal bar element
No. Property
Function description
(1)
Read Address
You can select the internal memory address or the controller register address. The input memory type has to be Word.
Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Section 5.1.
Read Offset Address
Please refer to Appendix D for instructions on writing and reading the offset address.
There are two data types available, Word and Double Word.
(2) Data Type
November, 2018
7-5
Bar Chart
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
When the Data Type is Word, the supported data formats are as follows:
7
(3) Data Format When the Data Type is Double Word, the supported data formats are as follows:
The allowable ranges for the Minimum and Maximum values vary based on the selected Data Type and Data Format.
Data Type
Data Format
Allowable range
BCD
0 to 9999
Signed BCD
-999 to 9999
Minimum / Maximum input value
Word
Signed Decimal Unsigned Decimal
Hexadecimal
-32768 to 32767 0 to 65535 0 to 0xFFFF
BCD
0 to 99999999
Double Word
Signed BCD Signed Decimal Unsigned Decimal
-9999999 to 99999999 -2147483648 to 2147483647
0 to 4294697295
Hexadecimal
0 to 0xFFFFFFFF
(4)
Check this box to set the memory addresses and input the Minimum and Maximum
values.
Variable minimum/ maximum
limits
7-6
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Bar Chart
No. Property
(5)
Display format
Target
Range
Variable target/range limits
Integer Digits Fractional (Digits)
Function description
If the checkbox of Variable target/range limits is unchecked, you can only enter a constant to define the displaying target value on the Normal bar chart. You can also specify the displaying color.
Enable the input value range including the Low Limit and High Limit. Like the case of the displaying target value, if the checkbox of Variable target/range limits is unchecked, you can only enter constants to define the Low Limit and High Limit of the Normal bar.
If it is checked, you can define the memory addresses to dynamically change the Target value, Low Limit and High Limit values displayed.
You can set the displaying number of integer digits and the number of decimal places.
Set the element foreground and background colors.
Foreground
(6)
Color and Background
Color
Foreground Color
Background Color Target value color
Border Color
7
Current value
Target value
The available element styles are Standard, Raised, and Sunken. You can change the appearance of the element with this setting.
Standard
Raised
Sunken
(7)
Style
Display format
Left
Right
Top
Bottom
(8)
Style property
Border Color
You can set the border color to be displayed.
Low Range Color You can set the low range color to be displayed.
High Range Color You can set the high range color to be displayed.
November, 2018
7-7
Bar Chart
DOPSoft User Manual
7
No. Property
Function description
When you have set multi-language data, you can use the language used for the element to edit the displaying text properties, etc.
(9) Language
7-8
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Bar Chart
(1)
7
(2)
(3)
(4)
Figure 7.1.3 Main-2 property page for the Normal bar element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is available for this element. When enabled, the element display becomes smoother.
(3)
Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
There are two display styles, Default and Style 1.
(4)
Target Value Style
Default Style 1
November, 2018
7-9
Bar Chart Text
7
(1)
(4)
DOPSoft User Manual (2)
(5) (3)
Figure 7.1.4 Text property page for the Normal bar element
7-10
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
You can enter the text to display in this box.
(1)
Text
Bar Chart
7
As long as the element allows text input, you can click the element on the screen and press the space key to start editing the text.
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, zoom, alignment, and bold / (2) Text property italic / underline for the text. You can refer to the Preview section in the figure
above for the Text property setting results.
(3)
Edit multi- If you have added multi-language data, the Text page allows you to edit multilanguage text language data.
(4)
Process the text of all states
This function batch changes the text of the specified state. Normal bar elements have only one state, so this function is not applicable.
This function batch changes the text of the specified property. Items included in the text property are shown in the figure below.
Process text (5) properties of
all states
Normal bar elements have only one state, so this function is not applicable.
November, 2018
7-11
Bar Chart Coordinates
7
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 7.1.5 Coordinates property page for the Normal bar element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2) Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
7-12
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Bar Chart
7.2 Differential bar
The Differential bar displays the deviation between the value of the read address and the set target value. And the software displays this deviation with the bar chart on the HMI. Like the case of Normal bar elements, you can define the memory addresses for the Target value, High Limit, and Low Limit of the Differential bar elements, making the application more flexible and meet user requirements, as shown in Table 7.2.1.
Table 7.2.1 Differential bar element - Using colors to identify the Low Limit and High Limit Using colors to identify the upper and lower limits
Low Range Color Foreground Color
High Range Color Background Color
7
Example (1) Example (2) Example (3) November, 2018
100
200
300
400
500
Range value
Range value
Current value
100
200
Deviation
300
400
500
Range value Range value
Current value Deviation
100
200
300
400
500
Range value Range value
Deviation
Current value
7-13
Bar Chart
7
Read Address
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 7.2.2 Differential bar element example
Differential bar Differential bar element
Numeric Entry element
Read Address
$444
Write Address
$444
Settings Target display
Data Type
Data Format
Minimum
Word
Unsigned Decimal
0
Deviation Color
Deviation value 25
Foreground Color Background Color
Maximum 100
Target value 50
Example diagram of Differential bar
element
Border Color
Current value Deviation
Compile and download the edited screen to the HMI. Then, execute the Numeric Entry element. Once you input the value, the deviation displays based on the input value.
Execution results
When the value is within the range of �25, it displays in deep red.
When the value is out of the range of �25, it displays in the foreground color.
7-14
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Bar Chart
When you double-click the Differential bar element, the property page is shown as follows.
7
Figure 7.2.1 Properties of the Differential bar element
Function page Preview
Main
Main-2 Text
Coordinates
Table 7.2.3 Function page of Differential bar
Differential bar
Description
Differential bar elements can only view multi-language data display and have no multiple states. Set the Read Address, Read Offset Address, Style, Foreground Color, and
Background Color. Set the Style and Border Color. Set the element Data Type, Data Format, Target value, Min. Value / Max.
Value, and Variable minimum/maximum limits. Set whether to display the deviation value and its color, and enable
Variable Standard Value/Deviation.
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing.
Set the text content, font, size, color, format, zoom, and alignment.
Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the button element.
November, 2018
7-15
Bar Chart Main
7
(1)
(8) (9) (7) (6)
DOPSoft User Manual
(2) (3) (4)
(5)
Figure 7.2.2 Main property page for the Differential bar element
No.
Property
Function description
You can choose internal memory address or controller register address.
Read Address
The input memory type has to be Word.
(1)
Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Section 5.1.
Read Offset Address
Please refer to Appendix D for instructions on writing and reading the offset address.
There are two data types available, Word and Double Word.
(2)
Data Type
7-16
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Bar Chart
No.
Property
Function description
When the Data Type is Word, the supported data formats are as follows:
7
(3) Data Format When the Data Type is Double Word, the supported data formats are as follows:
The allowable ranges for the Min. Value and Max. Value vary based on the selected Data Type and Data Format.
Data Type
Data Format
Allowable range
BCD
0 to 9999
Signed BCD
-999 to 9999
Minimum / Maximum input
value
Word
Signed Decimal Unsigned Decimal
Hexadecimal
-3278 to 32767 0 to 65535 0 to 0xFFFF
BCD
0 to 99999999
Double Word
Signed BCD Signed Decimal
-9999999 to 99999999 -2147483648 to 2147483647
Unsigned Decimal
0 to 4294697295
(4)
Hexadecimal
0 to 0xFFFFFFFF
Check this box to set the addresses for the Min. Value and Max. Value and input the minimum and maximum values.
Variable minimum/ maximum limits
November, 2018
7-17
Bar Chart
DOPSoft User Manual
7
No.
Property
(5)
Display Deviation
Deviation
Function description
If Variable Standard Value/Deviation is unchecked, you can only input a constant to define the deviation value of the Differential bar element. You can also set the displaying color of the deviation which lies within the range.
Variable
If it is checked, you can define the memory addresses to
Standard
dynamically change the Standard Value and Deviation
Value/Deviation displayed.
Set the element foreground and background colors.
Foreground Color Background Color
Foreground
(6)
Color and Background
Color
Border Color
Current value Deviation
The available element styles are Standard, Raised, and Sunken. You can change the appearance of the element with this setting.
(7)
Style
Standard
Raised
Sunken
(8)
Display Format / Border Color
Display Format
Horizontal
Vertical
Border Color You can set the border color to be displayed.
When you have set multi-language data, you can use the language used for the element to edit the displayed text properties, etc.
(9)
Language
7-18
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Bar Chart
(1)
7
(2)
(3)
Figure 7.2.3 Main-2 property page for the Differential bar element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is available for this element. When enabled, the element display becomes smoother.
(3) Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
November, 2018
7-19
Bar Chart Text
7
(1)
DOPSoft User Manual (2)
(4) (5)
(3)
Figure 7.2.4 Text property page for the Differential bar element
7-20
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
You can enter the text to display in this box.
(1)
Text
Bar Chart
7
As long as the element allows text input, you can click the element on the screen and press the space key to start editing the text.
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, zoom, alignment, and (2) Text property bold / italic / underline for the text. You can refer to the Preview section in the
figure above for the Text property setting results.
(3)
Edit multi- If you have added multi-language data, the Text page allows you to edit multilanguage text language data.
Process the This function batch changes the text of the specified state.
(4)
text of all
Differential bar elements have only one state, so this function is not
states
applicable.
This function batch changes the text of the specified property. Items included in the text property are shown in the figure below.
Process text (5) properties of
all states
Differential bar elements have only one state, so this function is not applicable.
November, 2018
7-21
Bar Chart Coordinates
7
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 7.2.5 Coordinates property page for the Differential bar element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2) Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
7-22
November, 2018
Pipe Chart
This chapter provides the usage and setting details for the Pipe elements.
Pipe(1) / Pipe(2) ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������8-2 Pipe(3) / Pipe(4) / Pipe(5) ������������������������������������������������������������������ 8-13 Pipe(6) / Pipe(7) ������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 8-18
November, 2018
8-1
Pipe Chart
DOPSoft User Manual
8
Pipe(1) / Pipe(2)
Functions of Pipe(1) and Pipe(2) are the same except the shapes. The introduction of Pipe(1) is as follows. The register value corresponding to the read address of the Pipe element will have the figure displayed on the pipe chart based on the set Target value, Low Limit, and High Limit. Like the case of the Bar elements, you can define the memory addresses for the target value, lower and upper limits of the Pipe(1) element, making the application more flexible and meet user requirements, as shown in Table 8.1.1. You can set different colors for the Low Limit, High Limit, and Target value so users can easily identify them with the set colors.
Table 8.1.1 Pipe(1) / Pipe(2) elements - identifying the high and low limits with colors Using colors to identify the upper and lower limits
Low Range Color Water Level Color High Range Color Cylinder Color
Example (1) Example (2) Example (3)
High Limit Low Limit Current
High Limit Current Low Limit
Current High Limit
Low Limit
8-2
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Read Address
Pipe Chart
Table 8.1.2 Pipe(1) element example
Pipe(1) Pipe(1) element
Numeric Entry element
Read Address
$444
Write Address
$444
8
Setting value
Check Target, Range, and
Variable target/range limits
Create Numeric Entry elements
Data Type
Data Format
Word
Unsigned Decimal
Target color
Minimum
Maximum
0
100
Target value {Link2}1@D50
Low Limit property
High Limit property
Low Range Color Low Range value High Range Color High Range value
{Link2}1@D55
{Link2}1@D65
Numeric Entry element
Write
{Link2}1@
Address
D50
Numeric Entry element
Write
{Link2}1@
Address
D55
Numeric Entry element
Write
{Link2}1@
Address
D65
November, 2018
8-3
Pipe Chart
8
Pipe(1)
DOPSoft User Manual
Enter 50 for Target value and set orange for the display color. Target
Execution results
Enter 15 for $444, which is smaller than the Low Limit Value of 20, so the displaying color is yellow.
Low Limit
Enter 85 for $444, which is greater than the High Limit Value of 80, so the displaying color is green.
High Limit
8-4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual When you double-click the Pipe(1) element, the property page is shown as follows.
Pipe Chart
8
Figure 8.1.1 Properties of Pipe(1) element
Table 8.1.3 Function page of Pipe(1)
Pipe(1)
Function page
Description
Preview
Pipe elements are only for viewing multi-language data display and have no multiple states.
Main
Set the Read Address, Read Offset Address, and Style of the element.
Set the Water Level Color, Cylinder Color, Low Range Color, and High Range Color.
Set the element Data Type, Data Format, Minimum / Maximum input value, and Variable minimum/maximum limits.
Set whether to display the target value and its color, input values for the activation range, and enable Variable target/range limits.
Main-2
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing.
Text
Set the text content, font, size, color, format, zoom, and alignment.
Coordinates Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the button element.
November, 2018
8-5
Pipe Chart Main
8
(1)
(8) (7)
DOPSoft User Manual
(2) (3) (4)
(5)
(6)
Figure 8.1.2 Main property page for the Pipe(1) element
No.
Property
Function description
You can choose internal memory address or controller register
Read Address
address. The input memory type has to be Word.
(1)
Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Section 5.1.
Read Offset Address
Please refer to Appendix D for instructions on writing and reading the offset address.
There are two data types available, Word and Double Word.
(2)
Data Type
8-6
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Pipe Chart
No.
Property
Function description
When the Data Type is Word, the supported Data Formats are as follows:
8
(3) Data Format When the Data Type is Double Word, the supported data formats are as follows:
The allowable ranges for the Minimum and Maximum values are subject to change based on the selected Data Type and Data Format.
Data Type
Data Format
Allowable range
BCD
0 to 9999
Signed BCD
-999 to 9999
Minimum / Maximum input
value
Word
Signed Decimal Unsigned Decimal
Hexadecimal
-32768 to 32767 0 to 65535 0 to 0xFFFF
BCD
0 to 99999999
Signed BCD
-9999999 to 99999999
Double Word
Signed Decimal
-2147483648 to 2147483647
(4)
Unsigned Decimal
0 to 4294967295
Hexadecimal
0 to 0xFFFFFFFF
Check this box to set the addresses for the Minimum and Maximum values and input the Minimum and Maximum values.
Variable minimum/ maximum limits
November, 2018
8-7
Pipe Chart
DOPSoft User Manual
8
No.
Property
Function description
Target
If the checkbox of Variable target/range limits is unchecked, you can only enter a constant to define the displaying target value on the pipe chart. You can also specify the displaying color.
(5) Display format
Range
Enable the input value range including the Low Limit and High Limit. Like the case of the Target display, if the checkbox of Variable target/range limits is unchecked, you can only enter constants to define the Low and High Limits of the pipe chart.
Variable target/range limits
If it is checked, you can define the memory addresses to dynamically change the Target value, Low Limit and High Limit values displayed.
The available element styles are Standard and Rotation 180. You can change the appearance of the element with this setting.
Standard
Rotation180
(6)
Style
Cylinder Color
Water Level Color
(7)
Style
Water Level Color You can define the Water Level Color to be displayed.
Cylinder Color
You can define the border color to be displayed.
Low Range Color
You can define the low range color to be displayed. Please refer to Table 8.1.1.
High Range Color
You can define the high range color to be displayed. Please refer to Table 8.1.1.
If you have set the language data, you can use the language used for the element to edit the displaying text property, etc.
(8)
Language
8-8
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Pipe Chart
8
Figure 8.1.3 Main-2 property page for the Pipe(1) element
No.
Property
Function description
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The
(1)
Transparent default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the
element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3)
Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
There are two display styles, Default and Style 1.
(4)
Target Value Style
Default Style 1
November, 2018
8-9
Pipe Chart Text
8
(1)
DOPSoft User Manual
(2)
(4) (5)
(3)
Figure 8.1.4 Text property page for the Pipe(1) element
8-10
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
You can enter the text to display in this box.
(1)
Text
Pipe Chart
8
As long as the element allows text input, you can click the element on the screen and press the space key to start editing the text.
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, zoom, alignment, and (2) Text property bold / italic / underline for the text. You can refer to the Preview section in the
figure above for the text property setting results.
(3)
Edit multi-
If you have added multi-language text, the Text page allows you to edit
language text multi-language data.
This function batch changes the text of the specified state.
(4)
Process the text of all states
Pipe(1) / Pipe(2) elements have only one state, so this function is not
applicable.
This function batch changes the text of the specified property. Items included in the text property are shown in the figure below.
Process text (5) properties of all
states
Pipe(1) and Pipe(2) elements have only one state, so this function is not applicable.
November, 2018
8-11
Pipe Chart Coordinates
8
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 8.1.5 Coordinates property page for the Pipe(1) element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
8-12
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Pipe Chart
Pipe(3) / Pipe(4) / Pipe(5)
Pipe(3) / Pipe(4) / Pipe(5) are mainly for connecting Pipe(1) / Pipe(2) / Pipe(6) / Pipe(7). Therefore, these three pipe charts have no parameters for read / write addresses or numeric value setting, etc. You can only set the displaying pipe diameter and rotation angle.
Function page
Preview
Main Main-2 Coordinates
Table 8.2.1 Function page of Pipe(3) / Pipe(4) / Pipe(5)
Pipe(3) / Pipe(4) / Pipe(5)
Description
These three elements are mainly for connecting to other pipe charts; they have only one state without multi-language text for editing. Set the Pipe Diameter and Style of the element. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the X and Y coordinates of the element.
8
November, 2018
8-13
Pipe Chart Main
8
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 8.2.2 Display style of Pipe(3) / Pipe(4) / Pipe(5) Main property page of Pipe(3) / Pipe(4) / Pipe(5)
The Pipe Diameter ranges from 1 to 5.
Pipe(3)
The Pipe Diameter ranges from 1 to 5.
The available element styles are Standard, Rotation 90, Rotation 180, and Rotation 270. You can change the appearance of the element with this setting.
Standard
Rotation 90
Rotation 180
Rotation 270
Pipe(4)
8-14
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Pipe Chart
Main property page of Pipe(3) / Pipe(4) / Pipe(5)
The Pipe Diameter ranges from 1 to 5.
The available element styles are Standard, Rotation 90, Rotation 180, and Rotation 270. You can change the appearance of the element with this setting.
Standard
Rotation 90
Rotation 180
Rotation 270
8
Pipe(5)
November, 2018
8-15
Pipe Chart Main-2
8
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 8.2.1 Main-2 property page for the Pipe(3) / Pipe(4) / Pipe(5) elements
No.
Property
Function description
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The
(1)
Transparent default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the
element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is available for this element. When enabled, the element display becomes smoother.
(3)
Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
8-16
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Coordinates
Pipe Chart
8
Figure 8.2.2 Coordinates property page for the Pipe(3) / Pipe(4) / Pipe(5) elements
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
November, 2018
8-17
Pipe Chart
DOPSoft User Manual
8
Pipe(6) / Pipe(7)
Pipe(6) and Pipe(7) can be used for pipe charts. It can also display the water flow as well as setting the water flow direction and colors so you can set the read address for these elements.
Function page
Preview
Main Main-2 Coordinates
Table 8.3.1 Function page of Pipe(6) / Pipe(7)
Pipe(6) / Pipe(7)
Description
Pipe(6) and Pipe(7) elements are for controlling the water flow direction and have only one state without multi-language for editing. Set the Read Address, Pipe Diameter, Variable Color, and Flow Cursor Color. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, Anti-aliasing, and Flow Cursor Type. Set the X and Y coordinates of the element.
8-18
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Pipe Chart
Main
Table 8.3.2 Display style of Pipe(6) / Pipe(7) Main property page of Pipe(6) / Pipe(7) Set the Read Address; you can set the water flow direction with this address.
8
Pipe(6) Pipe(7)
Water flow direction
Pipe(6) Right Left Left Right
Read Address = 1 Read Address = 2
Water flow direction
Pipe(7) Top Bottom Bottom Top
Read Address = 2 Read Address = 1
The Pipe Diameter ranges from 1 to 5. You can define the Flow Cursor color to display. If Variable Color is Yes, it means you can set the Flow Cursor Color.
November, 2018
8-19
Pipe Chart
8
DOPSoft User Manual
Main property page of Pipe(6) / Pipe(7) When you select Yes, it means the Cursor Color address is set to a variable, which can change dynamically.
The colors corresponding to the values are shown in the figure below.
Set Variable Color to
Yes
Pipe(6) Pipe(7)
When setting to No, it means the Cursor Color address is fixed.
Set Variable Color to
No
8-20
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
(4)
Pipe Chart
(1)
8
(2)
(3)
Figure 8.3.1 Main-2 property page for the Pipe(6) / Pipe(7) elements
No.
Property
Function description
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The
(1)
Transparent default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the
element.
The Smooth animation function is available for this element.
(2)
Smooth animation
When enabled, the element display becomes smoother.
Note: the screen update speed may be slower when the Smooth animation function is
enabled.
(3)
Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
Include Conveyer and Bubble.
(4) Flow Cursor Type
Conveyer
Bubble
November, 2018
8-21
Pipe Chart Coordinates
8
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 8.3.2 Coordinates property page for the Pipe(6) / Pipe(7) elements
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
8-22
November, 2018
Pie Chart
This chapter provides the usage and setting details for the Pie elements.
9.1 Pie(1) / Pie(2) / Pie(3) / Pie(4)��������������������������������������������������������������9-2
November, 2018
9-1
Pie Chart
DOPSoft User Manual
9
9.1 Pie(1) / Pie(2) / Pie(3) / Pie(4)
The only difference among elements Pie(1), Pie(2), Pie(3), and Pie(4) is the element shape; all other functions are the same. The introduction for Pie(1) is as follows. The values set in the register corresponding to the read addresses enable the Pie element to display the Target, Low Limit, and High Limit. Pie(1) elements are the same as the Meter elements; you can define the memory address for the target value and upper / lower limits to make the application more flexible so it meets users' requirements. You can also set the colors for the Low Limit, High Limit, and Target for easier identification and viewing.
Set colors for upper and lower limits of pie chart
Low range color
Foreground color
High range color
Background color
Example 1
Current
Low Limit
High Limit
Example 2
Current Low Limit
High Limit
Example 3
Low Limit
High Limit Current
Table 9.1.1 User-defined display format for Pie(1) element
9-2
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Read Address
Pie Chart
Table 9.1.2 Pie(1) element example
Pie(1)
Pie(1) element
Read Address
$444
Numeric Entry Element
Write Address
$444
9
Settings
Check Target, Range, and Variable
target/range limits
Create numeric entry elements
Data Type
Data Format
Word
Unsigned Decimal
Target value color
Minimum
Maximum
0
100
Target value {Link2}1@D50
Low Limit property
Low Range Color
Low Range Value
High Limit property
High Range Color
High Range Value
{Link2}1@D55
{Link2}1@D65
Numeric Entry element
Write {Link2}1@
Address
D50
Numeric Entry element
Write {Link2}1@
Address
D55
Numeric Entry element
Write {Link2}1@
Address
D65
Pie(1) element diagram example
Foreground color
Border color
Background color
November, 2018
9-3
Pie Chart
9
Pie(1)
DOPSoft User Manual
Enter 50 for Target value and set orange for the display color. Target
Execution results
Enter 15 for $444 and 20 for the Low Limit, and set yellow for the display color.
Low Limit
Enter 85 for $444 and 80 for the High Limit, and set green for the display color.
High Limit
9-4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual When you double-click the Pie(1) element, the property page is shown as follows.
Pie Chart
9
Figure 9.1.1 Pie(1) element property
Function Page Preview
Main
Main-2 Text
Coordinates
Table 9.1.3 Pie(1) function page
Pie(1)
Description
Pie elements are only for viewing multi-language data display and have no multiple states. Set the Read Address, Read Offset Address, Style, Foreground Color, and Background Color. Set the Border Color, Low Range Color, and High Range Color. Set the element Data Type, Data Format, Minimum / Maximum input value, and Variable minimum / maximum limits. Set whether to display the target value and its color, input values for the activation range, and Variable target / range limits. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, Anti-aliasing, and Target Value Style.
Set the text content, font, size, color, format, zoom, and alignment.
Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the button element.
November, 2018
9-5
Pie Chart Main
9
(1)
(8) (9) (7)
(6)
DOPSoft User Manual
(2) (3) (4)
(5)
Figure 9.1.2 Main property page for the Pie(1) element
No.
Property
Function description
You can choose internal memory address or controller register
Read Address
address. The input memory type has to be Word.
Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Section 5.1. (1)
Read Offset Address
Please refer to Appendix D for instructions on writing and reading the offset address.
There are two data types available, Word and Double Word.
(2)
Data Type
9-6
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Pie Chart
Function description
When the Data Type is Word, the supported Data Formats are as follows:
9
(3)
Data Format
When the Data Type is Double Word, the supported Data Formats are
as follows:
The allowable ranges for the minimum and maximum values are subject to change based on the selected data type and data format.
Data Type
Data Format
Allowable range
BCD
0 to 9999
Signed BCD
-999 to 9999
Minimum / (4) Maximum (input
value)
Word
Signed Decimal Unsigned Decimal
Hexadecimal
-32768 to 32767 0 to 65535 0 to 0xFFFF
BCD
0 to 99999999
Signed BCD
-9999999 to 99999999
Double Word Signed Decimal
-2147483648 to 2147483647
Unsigned Decimal
0 to 4294967295
Hexadecimal
0 to 0xFFFFFFFF
November, 2018
9-7
Pie Chart
DOPSoft User Manual
9
No.
Property
Function description
Check this box to set the addresses for the minimum and maximum values and you can also specify the minimum and maximum values.
(4)
Variable minimum/ maximum limits
Display Limit
If the checkbox Variable target / range limits is unchecked, you can only enter a constant to define the displayed target value on the pie chart. You can also specify the displayed color.
(5) Display Format
Range
Enable the input value range including the lower and upper limits. It is the same as the displayed target value. If the checkbox Variable target / range limits is unchecked, you can only enter constants to define the lower and upper limits of the pie chart.
Variable target / range limits
If it is checked, you can define the memory addresses to dynamically change the target value, lower and upper limit values displayed.
Set the element foreground and background colors.
(6)
Foreground Color Background Color
Foreground color
Border color
Background color
There are four element styles to choose from: Standard, Raised, Sunken, and Transparent. You can change the appearance of the element with this setting.
(7)
Style (element style)
Standard
Raised
Sunken
Transparent
(8)
Style
Border Color Low Range Color High Range Color
You can define the border color to display. Please refer to the foreground and background colors of the element.
You can define the low range color to display. Please refer to Table 9.1.1.
You can define the high range color to display. Please refer to Table 9.1.1.
9-8
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
(9)
Language
Pie Chart
Function description
If you have set the language data, you can use the language used for the element to edit the displaying text, property, etc.
9
November, 2018
9-9
Pie Chart Main-2
9
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Figure 9.1.3 Main-2 property page for the Pie(1) element
9-10
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Pie Chart
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is available for this element. When enabled, the element display becomes smoother.
(3)
Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
There are two display styles, Default and Style 1.
9
Default
(4)
Target Value Style
Style 1
November, 2018
9-11
Pie Chart Text
9
(1)
DOPSoft User Manual
(2)
(4) (5)
(3)
Figure 9.1.4 Text property page for the Pie(1) element
No.
Property
Function description
You can enter the text to display in this box.
(1)
Text
As long as the element allows text input, you can click the element on the screen and press the space key to start editing the text.
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, zoom, alignment, and
(2)
Text property bold / italic / underline for the text. You can refer to the Preview section in the
figure above for the text property setting results.
(3)
Edit multi- If you have added multi-language text, the Text page allows you to edit multilanguage text language data.
9-12
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Pie Chart
No.
Property
Function description
(4)
Process the text of all states
This function batch changes the text of the specified state. Pie elements have only one state, so this function is not applicable.
This function batch changes the text of the specified property. Items included in the text property are shown in the figure below.
9
Process text
(5)
properties of
all states
Pie elements have only one state, so this function is not applicable.
November, 2018
9-13
Pie Chart Coordinates
9
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 9.1.5 Coordinates property page for the Pie(1) element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
9-14
November, 2018
Indicator
10
This chapter provides the usage and setting details for the Indicator elements.
10.1 Multistate Indicator ������������������������������������������������������������������������ 10-2 10.2 Range Indicator ���������������������������������������������������������������������������10-20 10.3 Simple Indicator ���������������������������������������������������������������������������10-36
November, 2018
10-1
Indicator
DOPSoft User Manual
10.1 Multistate Indicator
The Multistate Indicator is for displaying the status of a given address. No matter the element
10
uses Bit, LSB, or Word as the Data Type, once the HMI reads the element memory address, the indicator prompts a change of state. You can also use different settings to have the Multistate Indicator change its light or display the corresponding messages to notify the users
about the status change. With such notifications, checking the message for each state becomes
easier.
The indicator can set to display ON and OFF states:
OFF
ON
You can also set the pictures and colors to indicate each state:
Please refer to Table 10.1.1 for the Multistate Indicator example.
10-2
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Indicator
Read Address
Table 10.1.1 Multistate Indicator example
Multistate Indicator
Multistate Indicator
Numeric Entry element
Read Address
$555
Write Address
$555
10
Settings
Data Type: Word Data Format: Unsigned Decimal State Counts: 5
Set Foreground
Color
State 0
State 1
State 2
State 3
State 4
Double-click the element to view the diagram of each state. There are five states in this example with state values 0 - 4, as shown in the red mark in the figure below.
Multistate Indicator diagram example
November, 2018
10-3
Indicator
10
DOPSoft User Manual
Multistate Indicator You can also go to the upper right corner in the element properties window to
switch the state.
Multistate Indicator diagram example
After you download the element, the Multistate Indicator initial state is 0. Next, execute the Numeric Entry element.
Execution results
Input the values 0 - 4 in sequence and you can see the results.
Value = 0
Value = 1
Value = 2
Value = 3
Value = 4
10-4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Indicator
The Multistate Indicator supports four data types, as shown in the Table 10.1.2. To add or reduce the number of states, you can simply add or reduce it from State Counts in the Properties table.
Data Type
Table 10.1.2 Multistate Indicator Data Type
Multistate Indicator
State Counts
Memory Address
If the Data Type is Word, you can set 1 to 256 states.
10
Word
If the Data Type is Word, the memory address unit is Word.
LSB is to first convert the data in the register to binary data, then use the lowest non-zero bit to determine the current state of the object.
If the Data Type is LSB, you can set 1 to 16 states, except for State 0.
LSB / LSB (Support State 0)
To display State 0, please select LSB (Support State 0).
There are four data types, Bit, Word, LSB, and LSB (Support State 0). The memory address uses Word as the unit.
If you selected LSB, then the element is black when the state is 0.
November, 2018
10-5
Indicator
DOPSoft User Manual
10
Data Type
LSB / LSB (Support State 0)
Multistate Indicator
State Counts
Memory Address
The examples in the following table show how the state value is determined with the lowest non-zero bit after converting from decimal value to binary value. There are also examples demonstrating how the software determines the displaying state value with the lowest bit when the decimal values are 3 and 7.
Decimal
0
1 2 3 4 7 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768
Binary
0000000000000000
0000000000000001 0000000000000010 0000000000000011 0000000000000100 0000000000000111 0000000000001000 0000000000010000 0000000000100000 0000000001000000 0000000010000000 0000000100000000 0000001000000000 0000010000000000 0000100000000000 0001000000000000 0010000000000000 0100000000000000 1000000000000000
State Value State = 0 when all bits are 0. [LSB (Support State 0) must be selected] The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State = 1. The lowest non-zero bit is bit 1, State = 2. The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State = 1. The lowest non-zero bit is bit 2, State = 3. The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State = 1. The lowest non-zero bit is bit 3, State = 4. The lowest non-zero bit is bit 4, State = 5. The lowest non-zero bit is bit 5, State = 6. The lowest non-zero bit is bit 6, State = 7. The lowest non-zero bit is bit 7, State = 8. The lowest non-zero bit is bit 8, State = 9. The lowest non-zero bit is bit 9, State = 10. The lowest non-zero bit is bit 10, State = 11. The lowest non-zero bit is bit 11, State = 12. The lowest non-zero bit is bit 12, State = 13. The lowest non-zero bit is bit 13, State = 14. The lowest non-zero bit is bit 14, State = 15. The lowest non-zero bit is bit 15, State = 16.
If the Data Type is Bit, only 2 states are available.
Bit
If the Data Type is Bit, the unit for the memory address is bit.
10-6
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual When you double-click Multistate Indicator, the property page is shown as follows.
Indicator
10
Figure 10.1.1 Properties of Multistate Indicator
Table 10.1.3 Function page of Multistate Indicator
Multistate Indicator
Function page
Description
Preview
You can view the element multistate value and multi-language display data.
Main
Set the Read Address, Read Offset Address, Style, Foreground Color, and Blink. Set the Data Type, Data Format, and State Counts.
Main-2
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing.
Text
Set the text content, font, size, color, format, zoom, and alignment.
Picture
Set the Picture Bank Name, Alignment, Stretch Mode, and Transparent Color.
Details
Set the Invisible Address
Coordinates Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the button element.
November, 2018
10-7
Indicator Main
10
(1)
(8) (9)
DOPSoft User Manual
(2) (3)
(4) (5) (6) (7)
Figure 10.1.2 Main property page for the Multistate Indicator element
No.
Property
Function description
Read Address
You can choose the internal memory or the controller register address. The input memory type varies depending on the selected data type, including Word, LSB, or Bit, as shown in Table 10.1.2.
(1)
Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Section 5.1.
Read Offset Please refer to Appendix D for instructions on writing and reading the offset
Address
address.
(2)
Data Type
There four types, Bit, Word, LSB, and LSB (Support State 0). Please refer to Table 10.1.2 for more details.
10-8
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Indicator
No. Property
Function description
You can only select the Data Format when the Data Type is Word.
The available formats include BCD, Signed Decimal, Unsigned Decimal, and Hexadecimal.
(3)
Data Format
10
Set the total state count of the Multistate Indicators. If the Data Type is Word, you
(4)
State Counts
can set 1 - 256 states; if the Data Type is LSB, you can set 16 states; if the Data Type is LSB (Support State 0), the configurable state count is 17; and if the Data Type is Bit, only 2 states are available. Please refer to Table 10.1.2 for more
details.
The available element styles are Standard, Raised, Round, and Invisible. This setting allows you to change the element appearance.
Standard
Raised
Round
Invisible
(5)
Style
Set the element foreground color.
When you set the element type to Invisible, the Foreground Color setting is invalid.
(6)
Foreground Color
November, 2018
10-9
Indicator
DOPSoft User Manual
10
No. Property
Function description
Set whether the indicator blinks when it switches between states; the blink color is the contrast color of the element.
(7)
Blink
By switching the State, you can preview or change the settings of each button element state.
(8)
State
If you have set the language data, you can use the language used for the element to edit the displaying text property, etc.
(9) Language
10-10
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Indicator
(1)
10
(2)
(3)
Figure 10.1.3 Main-2 property page for the Multistate Indicator element
No.
Property
Function description
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255.
(1)
Transparent
The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of
the element.
(2) Smooth animation The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3)
Anti-aliasing
The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
November, 2018
10-11
Indicator Text
10 (1)
(4)
DOPSoft User Manual (2)
(3)
(5)
Figure 10.1.4 Text property page for the Multistate Indicator element
No. Property
Function description
You can enter the text to display in this box.
(1)
Text
As long as the element allows text input, you can click the element on the screen and press the space key to start editing the text.
(2)
Text property
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, zoom, alignment, and bold / italic / underline for the text. You can refer to the Preview section in the figure above for the text property setting results.
10-12
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Indicator
No. Property
Function description
(3)
Edit multilanguage
text
If you have added multi-language text, the Text page allows you to edit multilanguage data.
When this function is enabled, it batch changes the text of the specified state. The example and setting steps are as follows:
1. Enter the text "123" for State 0 and "234" for State 1.
2. Select State 0.
3. Execute Process the text of all states and the text of State 1 is changed to "123".
10
Before
Process the
(4) text of all
states
(1)
(3) After
(2)
When this function is enabled, it batch changes the text of the specified property. Items included in the text property are shown in the figure below.
Process
(5)
text properties
of all states
The example and setting steps are as follows:
1. Enter the text "Delta" for State 0 and "HMI" for State 1. Select Segoe Script for the text font of State 0 and Arial for the text font of State 1.
2. Select State 0.
3. Execute Process text properties of all states and the text font of State 1 is changed to Segoe Script.
November, 2018
10-13
Indicator No. Property
10
Function description
DOPSoft User Manual (1)
Before (1)
Process
(5)
text properties
of all states
After
(3) (2)
10-14
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Picture
(1) (2) (3)
Indicator
10
Figure 10.1.5 Picture property page for the Multistate Indicator element
November, 2018
10-15
Indicator
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
10
Property
Function description
The default for Picture Bank Name is None. To set the picture display, use the drop-down list to select the desired picture from the picture bank provided by the software.
(1)
Picture Bank Name
10-16
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Indicator
No.
Property
Function description
You can use the alignment options to set how pictures are aligned.
10
Alignment
The Stretch Mode options include Stretch All, Stretch 1:1, and Actual Size.
Stretch All
Stretch 1:1
Actual Size
(2)
If you select Stretch All, the picture fills the full element display area.
If you select Stretch 1:1, the picture displays in 1:1 size based on the element width and length.
If you select Actual Size, regardless of the element size, the picture displays in its actual size in the element display area.
Stretch Mode
If you check [Process pictures of all states], assume that the elements have multiple states and some pictures do not fill the full element display area, you can use this function to process all pictures instead of setting them one by one, which saves the editing time.
Specify a color in the picture and turn this color into transparent.
is for
setting the target to transparent. If you select the white part of the calendar,
the software changes the white part into transparent, which you can see
becomes identical to the element foreground color.
(3)
Transparent Color
November, 2018
10-17
Indicator Details
10
(1)
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 10.1.6 Details property page for the Multistate Indicator element
No. Property
Function description
When Invisible Address is set to on, the button element is invisible and you cannot execute its set functions.
Invisible Address
OFF
(1)
Invisible Address
Invisible Address
ON
Element is invisible
10-18
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Coordinates
Indicator
(1)
10
(2)
Figure 10.1.7 Coordinates property page for the Multistate Indicator element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
November, 2018
10-19
Indicator
DOPSoft User Manual
10.2 Range Indicator
10
The Range Indicator is the same as the Multistate Indicator. Their function is to display the status of a given address. The element displays different states according to the range values corresponding to the read address values. Please refer to Table 10.2.1 for the Range Indicator example.
Read Address
Table 10.2.1 Range Indicator example Range Indicator Range Indicator element
Read Address
$666
Settings
Data Type: Word Data Format: Unsigned Decimal State Counts: 5
Ranges
10-20
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Range Indicator
Indicator
10
Input text in the Text property page
Set the text to display for each state.
State 0
State 1
State 2
State 5 41 - 50
State 4 31 - 40
State 3 21 - 30
Foreground Color
Set the foreground color for each state.
State 0
State 1
State 2
State 3
State 2 11 - 20
State 4
State 1 1 - 10
State 3
State 4
Go to [Options] > [Clock Macro] to input the macro command:
Clock Macro
November, 2018
10-21
Indicator
10
DOPSoft User Manual
Range Indicator You can double-click the element to view the diagram for each state. In this
example, there are 5 states with state values from 0 - 4 as shown in the red mark below.
Range Indicator diagram example
You can also go to the upper right corner in the element Properties window to switch the state.
Execution results
After you have the screen data compiled and downloaded to the HMI, the Range Indicator displays the value range of each state on the element based on the range value set in the read address.
Execution result of each state
State 0
State 1
State 2
State 3
State 4
10-22
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual When you double-click Range Indicator, the property page is shown as follows.
Indicator
10
Figure 10.2.1 Properties of Range Indicator
Table 10.2.2 Function page of Range Indicator
Range Indicator
Function page
Description
Preview
You can view the element multistate value and multi-language display data.
Main
Set the Read Address and Read Offset Address.
Set the Style, Foreground Color, and Blink of the element.
Set the Data type, Data Format, State Counts, Range (constant or variable limits), and whether to set as Continuous Address.
Main-2 Text
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the text content, font, size, color, format, zoom, and alignment.
Picture
Set the Picture Bank Name, Alignment, Stretch Mode, and Transparent Color.
Coordinates Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the button element.
November, 2018
10-23
Indicator Main
10
(9) (6)
(10)
(7) (8)
DOPSoft User Manual
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Figure 10.2.2. Main property page for the Range Indicator element
No.
Property
Function description
Read Address
You can choose the internal memory address or controller register address. The input memory type has to be Word.
(1)
Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Section 5.1.
Read Offset Address
Please refer to Appendix D for instructions on writing and reading the offset address.
(2)
State Counts
Set the state count for the Range Indicator. If the Data Type is Word or Double Word, you can configure 1 - 256 states.
Data Type includes Word and Double Word.
(3)
Data Type
Both the Word and Double Word data formats include BCD, Signed BCD, Signed Decimal, and Unsigned Decimal.
(4) Data Format
10-24
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Indicator
No.
Property
Function description
You can set the range value as constant or variable for the Range Indicator.
If you select Constant Limits, it means the input value is constant; if you select Variable Limits, you can define the memory address.
If you select Variable Limits, then you can set whether it should be a continuous address. Once you check the checkbox of Continuous Address, the software automatically calculates the address range based on the read address and data type set for the Range Indicator.
After checking Continuous Address, you cannot enter the memory address.
10
Input constants in descending order from top to bottom.
Whether the Continuous Address is selected does not influence the input constants.
Constant Limits
(5)
Ranges
Set $100 for the read address. If you select Continuous Address, then the software automatically calculates the continuous address, $100 - $104.
Set Continuous Address for
Variable Limits
November, 2018
Set noncontinuous address for Variable Limits
10-25
Indicator
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
10 (6)
Property Style
Function description
The available element styles are Standard, Raised, Round, and Invisible. This setting allows users to change the element appearance.
Standard
Raised
Round
Invisible
Set the element foreground color.
When you set the element type to Invisible, the foreground color setting is invalid.
(7)
Foreground Color
Set whether the indicator blinks when it switches between states; the blink color is the contrast color of the element.
(8)
Blink
10-26
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
You can check the state value through State.
(9)
State
Indicator
10
If you have set the language data, you can use the language used for the element to edit the displaying text property, etc.
(10) Language
November, 2018
10-27
Indicator Main-2
10
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 10.2.3 Main-2 property page for the Range Indicator element
No.
Property
Function description
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255.
(1)
Transparent
The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency
of the element.
(2) Smooth Animation The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3)
Anti-aliasing
The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
10-28
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Text
(1)
Indicator
(2)
10
(4)
(5) (3)
Figure 10.2.4 Text property page for the Range Indicator element
No. Property
Function description
You can enter the text to display in this box.
(1)
Text
November, 2018
As long as the element allows text input, you can click the element on the screen and press the space key to start editing the text.
10-29
Indicator
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
10
(2) (3)
Text property
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, zoom, alignment, and bold / italic / underline for the text. You can refer to the Preview section in the figure above for the text property setting results.
Edit multilanguage
text
If you have added multi-language text, the Text page allows you to edit multilanguage data.
When this function is enabled, it batch changes the text of the specified state. The example and setting steps are as follows:
1. Enter "123" for State 0 and enter "234" for State 1.
2. Select State 0.
3. Execute Process the text of all states and the text of State 1 is changed to "123".
Before
Process the
(4) text of all
states
(1)
(3) After
(2)
10-30
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Indicator
When this function is enabled, it batch changes the text of the specified property. Items included in the text property are shown in the figure below.
10
The example and setting steps are as follows: 1. Enter the text "Delta" for State 0 and "HMI" for State 1. Select Segoe Script
for the text font of State 0 and Arial for the text font of State 1. 2. Select State 0. 3. Execute [Process text properties of all states] and the text font of State 1 is
changed to Segoe Script.
(1)
Process text (5) properties of
all states
Before (1)
After November, 2018
(3) (2)
10-31
Indicator Picture
10
(1)
(2)
(3)
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 10.2.5 Picture property page for the Range Indicator element
10-32
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Indicator
No. Property
Function description
The default for Picture Bank Name is None. To set the picture display, use the drop-down list to select the desired picture from the picture bank provided by the software.
10
(1)
Picture Bank Name
November, 2018
10-33
Indicator
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
You can use the alignment options to set how pictures are aligned.
10
Alignment
The Stretch Mode options include Stretch All, Stretch 1:1, and Actual Size.
Stretch All
Stretch 1:1
Actual Size
(2)
If you select Stretch All, the picture fills the full element display area.
If you select Stretch 1:1, the picture displays in 1:1 size based on the element width and length.
If you select Actual Size, regardless of the element size, the picture displays in its actual size in the element display area.
Stretch Mode
If you select [Process pictures of all states], assume that the elements have multiple states and some pictures do not fill the full element display area, you can use this function to process all pictures instead of setting them one by one, which saves the editing time.
Specify a color in the picture and turn this color into transparent.
is for
selecting the transparent color. If you select the white part in the calendar, the
software changes the white part into transparent, which you can see becomes
identical to the element foreground color.
(3)
Transparent Color
10-34
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Coordinates
Indicator
10
(1) (2)
Figure 10.2.6 Coordinates property page for the Range Indicator element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
November, 2018
10-35
Indicator
DOPSoft User Manual
10.3 Simple Indicator
10
The Simple Indicator has two states, On and Off. You can change the XOR colors when the state switches. This indicator can be set with Button elements for identifying the On and Off states with different colors. Please refer to Table 10.3.1 for the Simple Indicator example
Table 10.3.1 Simple Indicator example
Read Address
Simple Indicator example
Set On / Off elements
Simple Indicator element
Write Address
$555.0
Read Address
$555.0
Settings
XOR Color
Redraw
NO
After you have the screen data compiled and downloaded to the HMI, the Simple Indicator switches to On or Off state according to the read memory address. If you press ON, the Simple Indicator switches to State 1; if you press OFF, the indicator switches to State 0.
State 0
State 1
Execution results
10-36
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual When you double-click Simple Indicator, the property page is shown as follows.
Indicator
10
Figure 10.3.1 Properties of Simple Indicator
Table 10.3.2 Function page of Simple Indicator
Function page Preview Main Main-2 Text Details
Coordinates
Simple Indicator Description
You can view the element multistate value and multi-language display data. Set the Read Address, Read Offset Address, XOR Color, and Redraw. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the text content, font, size, color, format, alignment type, and state text. Set the Invisible Address. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the button element.
November, 2018
10-37
Indicator Main
10
(1)
DOPSoft User Manual
(2) (3)
Figure 10.3.2 Main property page for the Simple Indicator element
No.
Property
Function description
Read Address
The Simple Indicator only supports Bit data type with options of the internal memory or controller register address.
(1)
Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Section 5.1.
Read Offset Address
Please refer to Appendix D for instructions on writing and reading the offset address.
Specify the background XOR color.
(2)
XOR Color
Before using XOR
After using XOR
10-38
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Indicator
No.
Property
Function description
When you select Yes and overlap the element on the dynamic
element, you can successfully read the data of the dynamic
element. If you select No, then the data of the dynamic element does not display.
As shown in the table below, both the two pictures display the background color of State 1. The displaying text of State 1 should
10
be "State1 1~10". However, if you leave Redraw unchecked, you
can find the range value is covered by the Simple Indicator which
you cannot see the range value.
(3)
Redraw
Yes
No
November, 2018
10-39
Indicator Main-2
10
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 10.3.3 Main-2 property page for the Simple Indicator element
No.
Property
Function description
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255.
(1)
Transparent
The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of
the element.
(2) Smooth animation The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3)
Anti-aliasing
The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
10-40
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Text
(1)
(4) (3)
Indicator
(2)
10
(5)
Figure 10.3.4 Text property page for the Simple Indicator element
No. Property
Function description
You can enter the text to display in this box.
(1)
Text
As long as the element allows text input, you can click the element on the screen and press the space key to start editing the text.
(2)
Text property
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, zoom, alignment, and bold / italic / underline for the text. You can refer to the Preview section in the figure above for the text property setting results.
November, 2018
10-41
Indicator
DOPSoft User Manual
10
No. Property
Function description
(3)
Edit multilanguage
text
If you have added multi-language text, the Text page allows you to edit multilanguage data.
When this function is enabled, it batch changes the text of the specified state. The example and setting steps are as follows:
1. Enter "123" for State 0 and enter "234" for State 1.
2. Select State 0.
3. Execute Process the text of all states and the text of State 1 is changed to "123".
Before
Process the (4) text of all
states (1)
After
(3) (2)
10-42
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Indicator
No. Property
Function description
When this function is enabled, it batch changes the text of the specified property. Items included in the text property are shown in the figure below.
10
The example and setting steps are as follows: 1. Enter the text "Delta" for State 0 and "HMI" for State 1. Select Segoe Script
for the text font of State 0 and Arial for the text font of State 1. 2. Select State 0. 3. Execute Process text properties of all states and the text font of State 1
is changed to Segoe Script.
(1)
Process text (5) properties of
all states
Before (1)
After November, 2018
(2)
(3)
10-43
Indicator Details
10
(1)
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 10.3.5 Details property page for the Simple Indicator element
No. Property
Function description
When the Invisible address is set to on, the button element is invisible and you cannot execute its set functions.
Invisible Address
OFF
(1)
Invisible Address
Invisible Address
ON
Element is invisible
10-44
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Coordinates
Indicator
10 (1)
(2)
Figure 10.3.6 Coordinates property page for the Simple Indicator element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
November, 2018
10-45
Indicator
10
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
DOPSoft User Manual
10-46
November, 2018
Data Display
This chapter provides the usage and setting details for the Data Display elements.
11.1 Numeric Display �����������������������������������������������������������������������������11-2 11.2 Character Display �������������������������������������������������������������������������11-25 11.3 Date Display / Time Display / Week Display ����������������������������������������11-34
11.2.1 Date Display���������������������������������������������������������������������������11-35 11.2.2 Time Display���������������������������������������������������������������������������11-41 11.2.3 Week Display��������������������������������������������������������������������������11-47 11.4 General Message Display ���������������������������������������������������������������11-56 11.5 Moving Sign���������������������������������������������������������������������������������11-69
November, 2018
11-1
Data Display
DOPSoft User Manual
11.1 Numeric Display
11
The main function of the Numeric Display is to read the value of the memory address and display the value on the element. The Numeric Display can also display the status return values of other elements, such as 0 or 1.
Table 11.1.1 Data Display example
Numeric Display Numeric Display element
Numeric Entry element
Read Address
Read Address
$555
Write Address
$555
Settings
Data Type Word
Numeric Display element
Data Format
Integer Digits
Unsigned Decimal
4
Fractional (Digits) 0
After creating the elements, please compile and download the data to the HMI. Next, enter 100 with the Numeric Entry element and the Numeric Display element will display the value you input.
Execution results
Enter 100 and write the value to the specified address ($555).
$555:
Numeric Entry
Numeric Display
11-2
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Data Display
Numeric Display supports two data types, Word and Double Word. The allowable ranges are shown in Table 11.1.2.
Word Double Word
Table 11.1.2 Numeric Display allowable range
Numeric Display Data Format
Allowable range
BCD
0 to 9999
Signed BCD
-999 to 9999
Signed Decimal
-32768 to 32767
Unsigned Decimal
0 to 65535
Hex
0 to 0xFFFF
Binary
0 to 0xFFFF
Data Format
Allowable range
BCD
0 to 99999999
Signed BCD
-9999999 to 99999999
Signed Decimal
-2147483648 to 2147483647
Unsigned Decimal
0 to 4294697295
Hex
0 to 0xFFFFFFFF
Binary
0 to 0xFFFFFFFF
Floating
0 to 9999999999999999
11
November, 2018
11-3
Data Display
DOPSoft User Manual
When you double-click Numeric Display, the property setting page is as follows.
11
Figure 11.1.1 Properties of Numeric Display
Table 11.1.3 Function page of Numeric Display
Function page Preview
Main
Main-2 Text
Details Details-2 Coordinates
Numeric Display
Description
Numeric Display elements do not support multiple status values and multilanguage data display.
Set the Read Address, Read Offset Address, Style, Background Color, and Border Color. Set the Data Type, Data Format, number of integer digits, number of decimal places, Gain, and Offset.
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the displaying text font, size, color, and alignment.
Set the Prefix Zero and Invisible Address.
Set the Type, Unit for the Source and Display, Custom formula, and Percentage. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
11-4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main (1)
(6) (7) (8)
Data Display
(2)
11
(3)
(4) (5)
Figure 11.1.2. Main property page for the Numeric Display element
No.
Property
Function description
Read Address
You can select the internal memory or the controller register address. Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Section 5.1.
(1)
Read Offset Please refer to Appendix D for instructions on writing and reading the offset
Address
address.
(2)
Data Type
There are two data types available: Word and Double Word. Please refer to Table 11.1.2 for details.
November, 2018
11-5
Data Display No.
11
DOPSoft User Manual
Property
Function description When the Data Type is Word, the supported data formats are as follows.
When the Data Type is Double Word, the supported data formats are as
(3)
Data Format
follows.
When the Data Format is Floating, the integer and fractional digits support only 16 digits in total. When exceeding this limit, a warning message pops up.
You can set the displaying number of integer digits and the number of
Integer Digits /
decimal places.
(4)
Fractional
The number of decimal places here is not really a decimal value, but just
(Digits)
the display format. Only when Floating is selected as the Data Format,
the Fractional setting is the actual decimal.
11-6
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Data Display
No.
Property
Function description
The formula of Gain and Offset: y = (a)x + (b).
y
a
x
b
Element display value
Gain
Actual register value
Offset
The Numeric Display element multiplies the register actual value by the set gain value, and then displays the result on the HMI screen. The
11
default of Gain is 1.0. If you set the Gain to 2.0, when the element reads
the register value 10, the actual value displayed on the element is 20.
Numeric Display element
Memory Numeric address value
$101 10
Gain 1.0
Memory Numeric address value
$101 10
Gain 2.0
$101 20
The Numeric Display element adds the register actual value to the set
offset value, and then displays the sum on the HMI screen. The default
offset is 0.0. If you set the Offset to 1.0 and the element reads the
register value 10, then the actual value displayed on the element is 11.
On the other hand, if you set the Offset to -1.0 and the element reads
(5) Gain and Offset
the register value 10, the actual value displayed on the element is 9.
Numeric Display element
Memory Numeric address value
Memory Numeric address value
$101 10
$101 11
Offset -1.0
$101 9
Below is the diagram of examples for [Gain 2.0; Offset 1.0] and [Gain 2.0; Offset -1.0].
Numeric Display element
Memory Numeric address value
$101 10
Gain 2.0 Offset 1.0
Memory Numeric address value
$101 21
$101 10
Gain 2.0 Offset -1.0
$101
19
If you check Round off, the calculation results are rounded off before being displayed on the element.
There are four element styles to choose from: Standard, Raised, Sunken, and Transparent. You can change the appearance of the element with this setting.
(6)
Style
Standard
Raised
Sunken
Transparent
November, 2018
11-7
Data Display
DOPSoft User Manual
11
No.
Property
Function description
Set the border color.
When you set the element style to Transparent, the Border Color setting is invalid.
(7)
Border Color
Border Color
Set the Background Color of the element.
When you set the element style to Transparent, the Background Color setting is invalid.
(8)
Background Color
Background Color
11-8
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Data Display
(1)
11
(2)
(3)
Figure 11.1.3. Main-2 property page for the Numeric Display element
No.
Property
Function description
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The
(1)
Transparent
default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the
element.
(2) Smooth animation The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3)
Anti-aliasing
The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
November, 2018
11-9
Data Display Text
11
DOPSoft User Manual (1)
Figure 11.1.4. Text property page for the Numeric Display element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Text
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, and alignment.
11-10
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Details
Data Display
11
(1) (2)
Figure 11.1.5 Details property page for the Numeric Display element
No.
Property
Function description
The Prefix Zero function determines how many zeros to add according to the set number of integer digits. Please refer to the example below.
Number of integer digits: 5
(1)
Prefix Zero
Prefix Zero
Prefix Zero
November, 2018
11-11
Data Display
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
11
Property
Function description
When Invisible Address is set to On, the Numeric Display element is invisible and you cannot execute its set functions.
Invisible Address is
off
(2)
Invisible Address
Invisible Address is
on
Element is invisible
11-12
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Details-2
(2) (3)
(4)
Data Display
(1)
11
(5)
Figure 11.1.6 Details-2 property page for the Numeric Display element
November, 2018
11-13
Data Display
DOPSoft User Manual
11
No. Property
Function description
You can select the conversion type, including Speed, Pressure, Location, Temperature, Weight, Volume, and Custom formula.
If you select Disable, it means the value does not need conversion.
To set the Custom formula, you have to enter values for Variable A and Variable B. When you select "Floating" for Unit, the formula is [Display value = Source value * A + B].
(1)
Type
11-14
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Data Display
No.
Property
Function description
The unit is subject to change based on the selected type. The table below lists the corresponding unit for each type.
Type
Unit
mm/sec
Speed
inch/sec %
Using the code
kg/cm
bar
Pressure
%
Using the code
(2)
Source
Unit
Location (position)
Temperature
Weight
mm inch % Using the code �F �C % Using the code ton kN
g oz %
Using the code
Volume
L ml kL % Using the code
11
November, 2018
11-15
Data Display No.
11
Property
DOPSoft User Manual
Function description When you select % (percentage) or Using the code as the unit
for either the Source or Display, the percentage setting interface is enabled. When the percentage setting interface allows data input, you need to define values for 0% and 100% which unit setting refers to the Source.
(2) Source
Unit
11-16
When you select Using the code as the unit, it means you can enter variables to specify the unit codes for the Source and Display. The unit codes are as follows:
Type
Unit
Code
mm/sec
101
Speed
inch/sec
102
%
700
kg/cm
201
Pressure
bar
202
%
700
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Data Display
No.
Property
Type
Location (position)
Function description Unit mm inch
%
Code 301 302 700
�F
401
Temperature
�C
402
%
700
Unit
ton
501
kN
502
(2)
Source
Weight
g
503
oz
504
%
700
L
601
ml
602
Volume
kL
603
%
700
Address
User-defined address is only available when you select Using the code for the Unit option.
If both the Source and Display select Using the code as the unit, do not use the same address.
Unit
Please refer to the description for Source.
User-defined address is only available when you select Using
(3)
Display
Address
the code for the Unit option. If both the Source and Display select Using the code as the
unit, do not use the same address.
(4)
Custom formula
Variable A
You can input external / internal memory addresses and constants for both Variable A and Variable B.
To set the Custom formula, you have to enter values for
Variable B
Variable A and Variable B. When the Data Type is Floating,
the formula is [Display value = Source value * A + B].
(5)
Percentage settings
0% 100%
Unit
You can input external / internal memory addresses and constants for both setting values of 0% and 100%.
When you select % (percentage) or Using the code as the unit for either the Source or Display, the percentage setting interface is enabled.
It is subject to change based on the Unit setting of Source.
For the speed setting, if you select % (percentage) or Using the code as the Source unit, you can select mm/sec or inch/sec from the Unit drop-down list in the Percentage setting; if you select mm/sec for the Source unit, mm/sec is the only unit available in the Percentage setting.
11
November, 2018
11-17
Data Display
DOPSoft User Manual
11 Read Address
Table 11.1.3 Unit Conversion example
Unit conversion (fixed unit)
Numeric Display element (Display)
Numeric Entry element (Source)
Read Address
$10
Write Address
$10
Settings
Data Type
Numeric Display / Numeric Entry element
Data Format
Integer Digits Fractional (Digits)
Word
Unsigned Decimal
5
0
Double-click the Numeric Display element and go to the Details-2 page. Select Temperature for Type and �F for Source unit and �C for Display unit.
Unit settings
11-18
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Data Display
Unit conversion (fixed unit)
Since the Numeric Entry element does not need unit conversion, please set Type to Disable.
11
Unit settings
Execution results
After creating the elements, please compile and download the data to the HMI. Then, enter 50 (�F) with the Numeric Entry element and the Numeric Display element will convert the temperature to 10�C.
November, 2018
11-19
Data Display
DOPSoft User Manual
11
Read Address
Table 11.1.4 Unit Conversion example
Unit conversion (Using the code)
Numeric Entry element Read Address $10
Numeric Entry element (Source)
Write Address
$300
Numeric Entry element (Display)
Write Address
$400
Settings
Data Type
Numeric Entry element
Data Format
Integer Digits
Fractional (Digits)
Word
Unsigned Decimal
5
0
Double-click the Numeric Entry element of $10 and go to Details-2. Select Temperature for Type. For the Source settings, select Using the code for Unit and $300 for Address; for the Display settings, select Using the code for Unit and $400 for Address.
Unit settings
Since the Numeric Entry elements of $300 and $400 do not need unit conversion, please select Disable for Type.
11-20
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Data Display
Unit conversion (Using the code)
When you have created the elements, please compile and download the data to the HMI and then enter 50 for $10.
11
Execution results
Enter 401 (means �F) for $300 and enter 402 (means �C) for $400, then $10 converts the value to 10�C.
November, 2018
11-21
Data Display
11 Read Address
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 11.1.5 Unit Conversion example
Unit conversion (percentage)
Numeric Display element
Numeric Entry element (Source)
Read Address
$10
Write Address
$10
Settings
Data Type
Numeric Display / Numeric Entry element
Data Format
Integer Digits
Fractional (Digits)
Word
Unsigned Decimal
5
0
Double-click the Numeric Display element of $10. Go to the Details-2 page, select Temperature for Type, and set the Source unit to % and the Display unit to �C.
Unit settings
Set the percentage 0% to 30.0 and 100% to 1000.0. Since the Source unit is %, the percentage setting unit can be �F or �C.
In this example, �F is used as the reference unit.
11-22
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Data Display
Unit conversion (percentage) Since the Numeric Entry element of $10 does not need unit conversion, please select Disable for Type.
Unit settings
11
After creating the elements, please compile and download the data to the HMI. The value for the Numeric Entry element of $10 is 0, so the Numeric Display element displays 30, meaning 0% equals value 30.
Execution results
If you set $10 to 100, the displayed value will be 1000, which means the value for 100% is 1000.
November, 2018
11-23
Data Display Coordinates
11
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 11.1.7 Coordinates property page for the Numeric Display element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
11-24
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Data Display
11.2 Character Display
The Character Display element is for displaying characters; therefore, the input values have to be readable ASCII codes. The software converts the ASCII codes into characters displaying on the Character Display element. The Character Display is an element reading byte data and the default data type of the Numeric Entry element is Word, which consists of double byte, so one word represents two bytes. Then, the high and low bytes of the value read by the Character Display element exchanges, and this result will be the actual characters displayed. For example, if $0 is 4241 (Hex), it is displayed as "AB" after the exchange of high and low bytes.
11
Numeric Entry
The following conversion table shows the conversion between data formats and characters from A to G. The remaining characters can be deduced with the same pattern.
Unsigned Decimal 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
Table 11.2.1 ASCII code conversion table
Hexadecimal 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Character A B C D E F G
Please refer to Table 11.2.2 for the example of Character Display.
November, 2018
11-25
Data Display
11
Read Address
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 11.2.2 Character Display example
Character Display
Character Display element
Read Address
$555
Numeric Entry element
Write Address
$555
Set the String Length to 4 for the Character Display element.
Settings
The characters of the Character Display will display the corresponding value depending on the Data Format. Please refer to Table 11.2.1.
Numeric Entry element
Data Type
Data Format
Integer Digits
Word
Unsigned Decimal
4
Numeric Entry element
Data Type
Data Format
Integer Digits
Word
Hexadecimal
4
Compile and download the screen data to the HMI, then the Character Display will display the corresponding characters on the element based on the value of the Read Address and the set Data Format.
Execution results
Numeric Entry
Numeric Entry
11-26
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual When you double-click Character Display, the property setting page is as follows.
Data Display
11
Figure 11.2.1 Properties of Character Display
Table 11.2.3 Function page of Character Display
Function page Preview
Main
Main-2 Text
Details Coordinates
Character Display Description
Character Display elements do not support multiple status values and multi-language data display. Set the Read Address, Read Offset Address, Style, Background Color, and Border Color. Set the String Length. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the displaying text font, size, color, and alignment. Set the Invisible Address. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
November, 2018
11-27
Data Display Main
11
(1)
DOPSoft User Manual (2)
(3) (4) (5)
Figure 11.2.2. Main property page for the Character Display element
No.
Property
Function description
Read Address
You can select the internal memory or the controller register address. Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Section 5.1.
(1)
Read Offset Please refer to Appendix D for instructions on writing and reading the offset
Address
address.
(2) String Length The range of the String Length is 1 - 256.
There are four element styles to choose from: Standard, Raised, Sunken, and Transparent. You can change the appearance of the element with this setting.
(3)
Style
Standard
Raised
Sunken
Transparent
11-28
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Data Display
No.
Property
Function description
Set the border color.
When you set the element style to Transparent, the Border Color setting is invalid.
Border Color
(4)
Border Color
11
Set the Background Color of the element.
When you set the element type to Transparent, the Background Color setting is invalid.
(5)
Background Color
Background Color
November, 2018
11-29
Data Display Main-2
11
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 11.2.3. Main-2 property page for the Character Display element
No.
Property
Function description
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The
(1)
Transparent default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the
element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3)
Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
11-30
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Text
Data Display
11
(1)
Figure 11.2.4. Text property page for the Character Display element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Text
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, and alignment.
November, 2018
11-31
Data Display Details
11
DOPSoft User Manual (1)
Figure 11.2.5 Details property page for the Character Display element
No.
Property
Function description
When Invisible Address is set to On, the Character Display element is invisible and you cannot execute its set functions.
(1)
Invisible Address
Invisible Address is off
Invisible Address is on
Element is invisible
11-32
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Coordinates
Data Display
11
(1) (2)
Figure 11.2.6 Coordinates property page for the Character Display element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
November, 2018
11-33
Data Display
DOPSoft User Manual
11.3 Date Display / Time Display / Week Display
11
The Date Display, Time Display, and Week Display are mainly for displaying the date, time, and week of the HMI system. You can set the format of both the Date Display and Time Display and use the multi-language editing for the Week Display. Please refer to Table 11.3.1 Date Display / Time Display / Week Display example.
Table 11.3.1 Date Display / Time Display / Week Display example
Date Display / Time Display / Week Display
Date Display element
Date Format
Date Display
Setting format
mm/dd/yy
Time Display
Time Display element
Time Format
Setting format
HH:MM:SS
If you have set the multi-language data, then you can edit the element to display in multilanguage.
Week Display
Executio n results
Compile and download the screen to the HMI, and the HMI screen displays as follows.
Date Display
Time Display
Week Display
Chinese
English
11-34
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
11.3.1 Date Display
When you double-click Date Display, the property setting page is shown as follows.
Data Display
11
Figure 11.3.1.1 Properties of the Date Display
Function page Preview
Main Text Coordinates
Table 11.3.1.1 Function page of Date Display
Date Display Description
The Date Display is for displaying the HMI system date. This element does not support multiple status values and multi-language display. Set the Style, Border Color, and Background Color of the element. Set the Date Format. Set the displaying text content, font, size, color, and alignment. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
November, 2018
11-35
Data Display Main
11
(1)
DOPSoft User Manual
(4) (2) (3)
Figure 11.3.1.2 Main property page for the Date Display element
No. Property
Function description
There are four element styles to choose from: Standard, Raised, Sunken, and Transparent. You can change the appearance of the element with this setting.
(1)
Style
Standard
Raised
Sunken
Transparent
Set the border color.
When you set the element style to Transparent, the Border Color setting is invalid.
(2)
Border Color
Border Color
11-36
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Data Display
No. Property
Function description
Set the Background Color of the element.
When you set the element style to Transparent, the Background Color setting is invalid.
(3)
Background Color
Background Color
11
The software provides 7 date formats and you can select the format to display. (4) Date Format
November, 2018
11-37
Data Display Main-2
11
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 11.3.1.3 Main-2 property page for the Date Display element
No.
Property
Function description
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The
(1)
Transparent
default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the
element.
(2) Smooth animation The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3)
Anti-aliasing
The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
11-38
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Text
Data Display
(1)
11
Figure 11.3.1.4 Text property page for the Date Display element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Text
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, and alignment.
November, 2018
11-39
Data Display Coordinates
11
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 11.3.1.5 Coordinates property page for the Date Display element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
11-40
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
11.3.2 Time Display
When you double-click Time Display, the property setting page is shown as follows.
Data Display
11
Figure 11.3.2.1 Properties of Time Display
Table 11.3.2.1 Function page of Time Display
Function page Preview
Main Main-2
Text Coordinates
Time Display Description
The Time Display is for displaying the HMI system time. This element does not support multiple status values and multi-language display. Set the Style, Border Color, and Background Color of the element. Set the Time Format. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the displayed text content, font, size, color, and alignment. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
November, 2018
11-41
Data Display Main
11
(1)
DOPSoft User Manual
(4) (2) (3)
Figure 11.3.2.2 Main property page for the Time Display element
No. Property
Function description
There are four element styles to choose from: Standard, Raised, Sunken, and Transparent. You can change the appearance of the element with this setting.
(1)
Style
Standard
Raised
Sunken
Transparent
Set the border color.
When you set the element style to Transparent, the Border Color setting is invalid.
(2)
Border Color
Border Color
11-42
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Data Display
No. Property
Function description
Set the Background Color of the element.
When you set the element style to Transparent, the Background Color setting is invalid.
(3)
Background Color
Background Color
11
The software provides 2 time formats and you can choose the format to display.
(4)
Time Format
November, 2018
11-43
Data Display Main-2
11
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 11.3.2.3 Main-2 property page for the Time Display element
No.
Property
Function description
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The
(1)
Transparent default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the
element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3)
Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
11-44
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Text
Data Display
(1)
11
Figure 11.3.2.4 Text property page for the Time Display element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Text
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, and alignment.
November, 2018
11-45
Data Display Coordinates
11
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 11.3.2.5 Coordinates property page for the Time Display element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
11-46
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Data Display
11.3.3 Week Display
When you double-click Week Display, the property setting page is shown as follows.
11
Figure 11.3.3.1 Properties of Week Display
Table 11.3.3.1 Function page of Week Display
Function page Preview Main Main-2
Text
Coordinates
Week Display Description
In addition to displaying the HMI system week, the Week Display supports multiple status values and multi-language display. Set the Style, Border Color, and Background Color of the element. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the text content, font, size, color, format, zoom, and alignment. Edit the text for the Week Display. If you have set multi-language data, you can edit data in other languages. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
November, 2018
11-47
Data Display Main
11
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 11.3.3.2 Main property page for the Week Display element
No. Property
Function description
There are four element styles to choose from: Standard, Raised, Sunken, and Transparent. You can change the appearance of the element with this setting.
(1)
Style
Standard
Raised
Sunken
Transparent
Set the border color.
When you set the element style to Transparent, the Border Color setting is invalid.
(2)
Border Color
Border Color
11-48
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Data Display
No. Property
Function description
Set the Background Color of the element.
When you set the element style to Transparent, the Background Color setting is invalid.
(3)
Background Color
Background Color
11
November, 2018
11-49
Data Display Main-2
11
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 11.3.3.3 Main-2 property page for the Week Display element
No.
Property
Function description
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The
(1)
Transparent default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the
element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3)
Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
11-50
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Text (2) (1)
(4) (3)
Data Display
11
(5)
Figure 11.3.3.4 Text property page for the Week Display element
November, 2018
11-51
Data Display
No. Property
Function description
You can enter the text to display in this box.
11
(1)
Text
DOPSoft User Manual
As long as the element allows text input, you can click the element and press the space key to start editing the text.
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, zoom, alignment, and bold (2) Text property / italic / underline for the text. You can refer to the Preview section in the figure
above for the text property setting results.
(3)
Edit multi- If you have added multi-language text, the Text page allows you to edit multilanguage text language data.
11-52
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Data Display
No. Property
Function description
This function batch changes the text of the specified state. The example and setting steps are as follows.
1. Enter the text "123" for State 0 and "234" for State 1.
2. Select State 0. 3. Execute Process the text of all states and the text of State 1 is changed to
"123".
11
Before
Process the
(1)
(4) text of all
states
(3) After
(2)
This function batch changes the text of the specified property. Items included in the text property are shown in the figure below.
Process text (5) properties of
all states
The example and setting steps are as follows:
1. Enter the text "Delta" for State 0 and "HMI" for State 1. Select Segoe Script for the text font of State 0 and Arial for the text font of State 1.
2. Select State 0. 3. Execute Process text properties of all states and the text font of State 1 is
changed to Segoe Script.
November, 2018
11-53
Data Display No. Property
11
Function description
DOPSoft User Manual (1)
Before (1)
After
(3) (2)
11-54
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Coordinates
Data Display
(1)
11
(2)
Figure 11.3.3.5 Coordinates property page for the Week Display element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
November, 2018
11-55
Data Display
DOPSoft User Manual
11.4 General Message Display
11
You can use the General Message Display to display the state text message to switch, and this element can read the corresponding state text based on the memory address. Please refer to Table 11.4.1 for the example of General Message Display.
Read Address
Table 11.4.1 General Message Display example
General Message Display
General Message Display element
Set Value element
Read Address
$13
Write Address
$13
Settings
Data Type
General Message Display element
Data Format
State Counts
Word
Unsigned Decimal
3
Double-click General Message Display to go to the Text page and edit the text to display.
State displaying
text
After creating the elements, please compile and download the data to the HMI. Then, enter 0, 1, and 2 with the Set Value element in sequence and the General Message Display element will display the corresponding values.
Execution results
Input 0 with Set
Value element
Input 1 with Set
Value element
11-56
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
General Message Display
Execution results
Input 2 with Set
Value element
Data Display
11
The General Message Display supports four data types, as shown in Table 11.4.2. To add or reduce the number of states, you can simply add or reduce it from State Counts in the property page.
Table 11.4.2 Data Type of General Message Display
Data Type
General Message Display State Counts
If the Data Type is Word, you can set 1 to 256 states.
Word
LSB is to first convert the data in the register to binary data, then use the lowest non-zero bit to determine the current state of the object.
If the Data Type is LSB, you can set 1 to 16 states, except for State 0.
LSB / LSB (Support State 0)
To display State 0, please select LSB (Support State 0).
If you selected LSB, then the element is black when the state is 0. November, 2018
11-57
Data Display
DOPSoft User Manual
11
Data Type
LSB / LSB (Support State 0)
General Message Display
State Counts
The data types include LSB and LSB (Support State 0). The memory address uses Word as the unit.
The examples in the following table show how the state value is determined with the lowest non-zero bit after converting from decimal value to binary value. There are also examples demonstrating how the software determines the displaying state value with the lowest bit when the decimal values are 3 and 7.
Decimal
Binary
State Value
State = 0 when all bits are 0.
0
0000000000000000 [LSB (Support State 0) must be selected]
1
0000000000000001 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State = 1.
2
0000000000000010 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 1, State = 2.
3
0000000000000011 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State = 1.
4
0000000000000100 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 2, State = 3.
7
0000000000000111 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State = 1.
8
0000000000001000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 3, State = 4.
16 0000000000010000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 4, State = 5.
32 0000000000100000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 5, State = 6.
64 0000000001000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 6, State = 7.
128 0000000010000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 7, State = 8.
256 0000000100000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 8, State = 9.
512 0000001000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 9, State = 10.
1024 0000010000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 10, State = 11.
2048 0000100000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 11, State = 12.
4096 0001000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 12, State = 13.
8192 0010000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 13, State = 14.
16384 0100000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 14, State = 15.
32768 1000000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 15, State = 16.
If the Data Type is Bit, only 2 states are available.
Bit
11-58
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Data Display
When you double-click General Message Display, the property setting page is shown as follows.
11
Figure 11.4.1 Properties of General Message Display
Function page Preview
Main
Main-2 Text
Details Coordinates
Table 11.4.3 Function page of General Message Display
General Message Display Description
General Message Display elements can view multiple status values and multilanguage data display. Set the Read Address, Read Offset Address, Style, Background Color, and Border Color. Set the Data Type, Data Format, and State Counts. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the text font, size, color, format, zoom, and alignment. Set the Invisible Address. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
November, 2018
11-59
Data Display Main
11
(8) (9)
DOPSoft User Manual
(2) (1)
(3)
(5)
(4)
(6)
(7)
Figure 11.4.2 Main property page for the General Message Display element
No. Property
Function description
You can choose the internal memory or the controller register address.
Read
The input memory type varies depending on the selected data type,
Address
including Word, LSB, or Bit, as shown in Table 11.4.2.
(1)
Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Section 5.1.
Read Offset Please refer to Appendix D for instructions on writing and reading the offset Address address.
(2)
Data Type
There four types, Bit, Word, LSB, and LSB (Support State 0). Please refer to Table 11.4.2 for more details.
You can only select the Data Format when the Data Type is Word.
The available formats include BCD, Signed Decimal, Unsigned Decimal, and Hexadecimal.
(3) Data Format
11-60
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Data Display
No. Property
Function description
Set the State Counts of the General Message Display element. If the Data Type
is Word, you can set 1 - 256 states; if the Data Type is LSB, you can set 16
(4)
State Counts
states; if the Data Type is LSB (Support State 0), you can set 17 states; and if the Data
Type is Bit, only 2 states are available. Please refer to Table 11.4.2 for more
details.
There are four element styles to choose from: Standard, Raised, Sunken, and Transparent. You can change the appearance of the element with this setting.
(5)
Style
Standard
Raised
Sunken
Transparent
11
Set the border color.
When you set the element style to Transparent, the Border Color setting is invalid.
(6)
Border Color
Border Color
Set the Background Color of the element.
When you set the element style to Transparent, the Background Color setting is invalid.
(7)
Background Color
Background Color
By switching the State, you can preview or change the settings of each button element state.
(8)
State
November, 2018
11-61
Data Display
DOPSoft User Manual
11
No. Property
Function description
If you have set the language data, you can use the language used for the element to edit the displaying text property, etc.
(9) Language
11-62
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Data Display
(1)
11
(2)
(3)
Figure 11.4.3 Main-2 property page for the General Message Display element
No.
Property
Function description
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The
(1)
Transparent default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the
element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3)
Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
November, 2018
11-63
Data Display Text
11 (1)
(4)
DOPSoft User Manual (2)
(3)
(5)
Figure 11.4.4 Text property page for the General Message Display element
No.
Property
Function description
You can enter the text to display in this box.
(1)
Text
As long as the element allows text input, you can click the element and press the space key to start editing the text.
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, zoom, alignment, and
(2)
Text property bold / italic / underline for the text. You can refer to the Preview section in the
figure above for the text property setting results.
11-64
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Data Display
No.
Property
Function description
(3)
Edit multi-
If you have added multi-language text, the Text page allows you to edit multi-
language text language data.
This function batch changes the text of the specified state. The example and setting steps are as follows: 1. Enter the text "123" for State 0 and "234" for State 1.
11
2. Select State 0.
3. Execute Process the text of all states and the text of State 1 is changed to "123".
Before
(4)
Process the text of all states
After
(1)
(3) (2)
November, 2018
11-65
Data Display No.
11
DOPSoft User Manual
Property
Function description
This function batch changes the text of the specified property. Items included in the text property are shown in the figure below.
The example and setting steps are as follows: 1. Enter the text "Delta" for State 0 and "HMI" for State 1. Select Segoe
Script for the text font of State 0 and Arial for the text font of State 1. 2. Select State 0. 3. Execute Process text properties of all states and the text font of State 1
is changed to Segoe Script.
(1)
Process text
(5)
properties of
all states
(1)
Before
After
11-66
(2) (3)
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Details
(1)
Data Display
11
Figure 11.4.5 Details property page for the General Message Display element
No.
Property
Function description
When Invisible Address is set to on, the button element is invisible and you cannot execute its set functions.
Invisible Address is off
(1)
Invisible Address
Invisible Address is on
Element is invisible
November, 2018
11-67
Data Display Coordinates
11
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 11.4.6 Coordinates property page for the General Message Display element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
11-68
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Data Display
11.5 Moving Sign
Apart from using the General Message Display to switch the state text messages, you can use the Moving Sign element to adjust the text displaying direction, moving points per time, and interval. Please refer to Table 11.5.1 for the example of Moving Sign.
Set the Moving Sign element.
Read Address
Table 11.5.1 Moving Sign example
Data Type
Moving Sign
State Counts
Direction
Points per time Interval
Bit
2
Left
Moving Sign element
Read Address
$55.0
1
100 (ms)
Maintained element
Write Address
$55.0
11
Double-click General Message Display to go to the Text page and edit the text to display. State displaying text
After creating the elements, please compile and download the data to the HMI. Next, use the Maintained element to switch between State 0 and State 1, and the Moving Sign element will display the corresponding state text.
Execution results
State 0
State 1
November, 2018
11-69
Data Display
DOPSoft User Manual
The Moving Sign supports four data types, as shown in Table 11.5.2. To add or reduce the number of states, you can simply add or reduce it from State Counts in the property page.
11
Table 11.5.2 Data Type of Moving Sign
Data Type
Moving Sign State Counts
If the Data Type is Word, you can set 1 to 256 states.
Word
LSB is to first convert the data in the register to binary data, then use the lowest non-zero bit to determine the current state of the object.
If the Data Type is LSB, you can set 1 to 16 states, except for State 0.
LSB / LSB (Support State 0)
To display State 0, please select LSB (Support State 0).
If you selected LSB, then the element is black when the state is 0.
The data types include LSB and LSB (Support State 0). The memory address uses Word as the unit.
11-70
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Data Display
Data Type
LSB / LSB (Support State 0)
Moving Sign
State Counts
The examples in the following table show how the state value is determined with the lowest non-zero bit after converting from decimal value to binary value. There are also examples demonstrating how the software determines the displaying state value with the lowest bit when the decimal values are 3 and 7.
Decimal
Binary
State Value
0
0000000000000000
State = 0 when all bits are 0.
[LSB (Support State 0) must be selected]
1
0000000000000001 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State = 1.
2
0000000000000010 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 1, State = 2.
3
0000000000000011 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State = 1.
4
0000000000000100 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 2, State = 3.
7
0000000000000111 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State = 1.
8
0000000000001000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 3, State = 4.
16 0000000000010000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 4, State = 5.
32 0000000000100000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 5, State = 6.
64 0000000001000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 6, State = 7.
128 0000000010000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 7, State = 8.
256 0000000100000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 8, State = 9.
512 0000001000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 9, State = 10.
1024 0000010000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 10, State = 11.
2048 0000100000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 11, State = 12.
4096 0001000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 12, State = 13.
8192 0010000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 13, State = 14.
16384 0100000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 14, State = 15.
32768 1000000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 15, State = 16.
If the Data Type is Bit, only 2 states are available.
11
Bit
November, 2018
11-71
Data Display
DOPSoft User Manual
When you double-click Moving Sign, the property setting page is shown as follows.
11
Figure 11.5.1 Properties of Moving Sign
Table 11.5.3 Function page of Moving Sign
Function page Preview
Main
Main-2 Text
Coordinates
Moving Sign
Description
Moving Sign elements can view multiple status values and multi-language data display.
Set the Read Address, Read Offset Address, Style, Background Color, and Border Color. Set the Data Type, Data Format, State Counts, Direction, Interval (ms), and Points per time (for the movement).
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing.
Set the text font, size, color, format, zoom, and alignment.
Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
11-72
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main
Data Display
11
Figure 11.5.2 Main property page for the Moving Sign element
No. Property
Function description
You can choose the internal memory or the controller register address.
Read
The input memory type varies depending on the selected data type,
Address
including Word, LSB, or Bit, as shown in Table 11.5.2.
(1)
Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Section 5.1.
Read Offset Please refer to Appendix D for instructions on writing and reading the offset Address address.
(2)
Data Type
There four types, Bit, Word, LSB, and LSB (Support State 0). Please refer to Table 11.5.2 for more details.
You can only select the Data Format when the Data Type is Word.
The available formats include BCD, Signed Decimal, Unsigned Decimal, and Hexadecimal.
(3)
Data Format
November, 2018
11-73
Data Display
DOPSoft User Manual
11
No. Property
Function description
Set the State Counts of the Moving Sign element. If the Data Type is Word, you
(4)
State Counts
can set 1 - 256 states; if the Data Type is LSB, you can set 16 states; if the Data Type is LSB (Support State 0), you can set 17 states; and if the Data Type is Bit,
only 2 states are available. Please refer to Table 11.5.2 for more details.
There are four display directions to choose from: Left, Right, Up, and Down. You can select the text moving direction to display.
From right to left
Left
(5) Direction
Right
From left to right
From bottom to top Up
Down
From top to bottom
The Interval (ms) defines the interval time (unit: ms) between two message movements of the Moving Sign. And you can set the moving distance in Points per time.
(6)
Interval (ms)
(7)
Points per The larger the moving points, the greater the distance the text moves each time.
time
The setting range is 1 - 50 pixels.
There are four element styles to choose from: Standard, Raised, Sunken, and Transparent. You can change the appearance of the element with this setting.
(8)
Style
Standard
Raised
Sunken
Transparent
11-74
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Data Display
No. Property
Function description
Set the border color.
When you set the element style to Transparent, the Border Color setting is invalid.
(9)
Border Color
Border Color
11
Set the Background Color of the element.
When you set the element style to Transparent, the Background Color setting is invalid.
(10)
Backgroun d Color
Background Color
By switching the State, you can preview or change the settings of each button element state.
(11)
State
If you have set the language data, you can use the language used for the element to edit the displaying text property, etc.
(12) Language
November, 2018
11-75
Data Display Main-2
11
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 11.5.3 Main-2 property page for the Moving Sign element
No.
Property
Function description
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The
(1)
Transparent default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the
element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3)
Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
11-76
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Text
(1)
(4)
Data Display
(2)
11
(5) (3)
Figure 11.5.4 Text property page for the Moving Sign element
No. Property
Function description
You can enter the text to display in this box.
(1)
Text
(2)
Text property
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, zoom, alignment, and bold / italic / underline for the text. You can refer to the Preview section in the figure above for the text property setting results.
(3)
Edit multilanguage
text
If you have added multi-language data, the Text page allows you to edit multilanguage data.
November, 2018
11-77
Data Display
DOPSoft User Manual
11
No. Property
Function description
This function batch changes the text of the specified state. The example and setting steps are as follows:
1. Enter the text "123" for State 0 and "234" for State 1.
2. Select State 0. 3. Execute Process the text of all states and the text of State 1 is changed to
"123".
Before
Process (4) the text of
all states (1)
After
(3) (2)
11-78
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Data Display
No. Property
Function description
This function batch changes the text of the specified property. Items included in the text property are shown in the figure below.
11
The example and setting steps are as follows:
1. Enter the text "Delta" for State 0 and "HMI" for State 1. Select Segoe Script for the text font of State 0 and Arial for the text font of State 1.
2. Select State 0. 3. Execute Process text properties of all states and the text font of State 1 is
changed to Segoe Script.
Process text
(5) properties of all states
Before
(1) (1)
After November, 2018
(2)
(3)
11-79
Data Display Coordinates
11
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 11.5.5 Coordinates property page for the Moving Sign element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
11-80
November, 2018
Graph Display
This chapter provides the usage and setting details for the Graph Display elements.
12.1 State Graphic �������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 12-2 12.2 Animated Graphic �������������������������������������������������������������������������12-17 12.3 Real-time Image ���������������������������������������������������������������������������12-30
November, 2018
12-1
Graph Display
DOPSoft User Manual
12.1 State Graphic
12
You can create multi-state graphics with the State Graphic element, and the value read by the set read address corresponds to its status value, then have the set state graphic displayed on the HMI.
Examples of the three applications are described below: Table 12.1.1 illustrates the example of Auto Picture Change is set to No, Table 12.1.2 illustrates the example of Auto Picture Change is set to Yes, and Table 12.1.3 illustrates the example of Auto Picture Change is set to Variation.
Table 12.1.1 State Graphic example
Read Address
State Graphic example � Auto Picture Change is set to No
State Graphic element
Set Value element
Read Address
$326
Write Address
$326
Settings Picture
Data Type
State Graphic element
Data Format
State Counts
Auto Picture Change
Word
Unsigned Decimal
3
No
Set the State Graphic display
State 0
State 1
State 2
Execution results
After creating the element, please compile and download the element to the HMI. Next, input a value to the Set Value element and the State Graphic will display the picture corresponding to the input value.
$326
$326 = 0
$326 = 0 $326 = 1
$326 = 2
Switch the displaying picture on the HMI by setting the value of $326.
12-2
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Graph Display
Read Address
Table 12.1.2 State Graphic example
State Graphic example � Auto Picture Change is set to Yes
State Graphic element
Set Value element
Read Address
$326
Write Address
$326
12
Settings Picture
State Graphic element
Data Type
Data Format
State Counts
Auto Picture Change
Word
Unsigned Decimal
3
Yes
Set the State Graphic display
State 0
State 1
State 2
After creating the element, please compile and download the element to the HMI. When you input a value other than 0 to the Set Value element, the State Graphic will automatically change to the set picture display according to the set Change Time (ms). If you input 0, the State Graphic will reset to the initial state without executing any action.
Execution results
$326
HMI default value $326 = 0
Automatically switch the displaying picture on the HMI by setting the value of $326 = 1.
November, 2018
12-3
Graph Display
DOPSoft User Manual
12
Read Address
Table 12.1.3 State Graphic example
State Graphic example � Auto Picture Change is set to Variation
State Graphic element
Set Value element
Set Value element
Read Address $326 Write Address $326 Write Address $327
Settings Picture
Data Type
State Graphic element
Data Format
State Counts
Auto Picture Change
Word
Unsigned Decimal
3
Variation
Set the State Graphic display
State 0
State 1
State 2
Execution results
The Read Address for the State Graphic element indicates the register for the changing state pictures. Read Address+1 is for accessing the register when Auto Picture Change is set to Variation.
After creating the element, please compile and download the element to the HMI. If you press the Set Value element of $327 and input a value other than 0, the State Graphic will automatically change to the set picture display according to the set Change Time (ms). You can also press the Set Value element of $326 to input the value corresponding to the State Graphic. If you input 0 to the Set Value element of $327, the automatic change for the State Graphic will not be executed.
$327
HMI default value $326 = 0
Automatically switch the displaying picture on the HMI by setting the value of $327 = 1.
12-4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Graph Display
State Graphic supports four data types as shown in Table 12.1.4. If you need to add or reduce the total number of states, you can simply add or reduce it from State Counts in the Properties table.
Data Type
Table 12.1.4 State Graphic Data Type
State Graphic State Counts
If the Data Type is Word, you can set 1 to 256 states for the State Counts.
12
Word
LSB is to first convert the data in the register to binary data, then use the lowest non-zero bit to determine the current state of the object.
If the Data Type is LSB, you can set 1 to 16 states, except for State 0.
To display State 0, please select LSB (Support State 0).
LSB / LSB (Support State 0)
If you selected LSB, the element is black when the state is 0.
When the Data Type is LSB or LSB (Support State 0), the memory address is also in Word as the unit.
The examples in the following table show how the state value is determined with the lowest non-zero bit after converting from decimal value to binary value. There are also examples demonstrating how the software determines the displaying state value with the lowest bit when the decimal values are 3 and 7.
Decimal
Binary
State value
0
0000000000000000
State = 0 when all bits are 0. Note: LSB (Support State 0) must be selected.
1
0000000000000001 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State = 1.
2
0000000000000010 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 1, State = 2.
3
0000000000000011 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State = 1.
4
0000000000000100 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 2, State = 3.
7
0000000000000111 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State = 1.
8
0000000000001000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 3, State = 4.
16 0000000000010000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 4, State = 5.
November, 2018
12-5
Graph Display
DOPSoft User Manual
12
Data Type
LSB / LSB (Support State 0)
State Graphic
State Counts
Decimal
Binary
State value
32 0000000000100000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 5, State = 6.
64 0000000001000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 6, State = 7.
128 0000000010000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 7, State = 8.
256 0000000100000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 8, State = 9.
512 0000001000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 9, State = 10.
1024 0000010000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 10, State = 11.
2048 0000100000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 11, State = 12.
4096 0001000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 12, State = 13.
8192 0010000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 13, State = 14.
16384 0100000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 14, State = 15.
32768 1000000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 15, State = 16.
If the Data Type is Bit, only 2 states are available for the State Counts.
Bit
12-6
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Graph Display
The following figure shows the property setting screen when you double-click State Graphic.
12
Figure 12.1.1 Properties of State Graphic
Table 12.1.5 Function page of State Graphic
Function page Preview
Main
Main-2 Picture Details Coordinates
State Graphic
Description
State Graphic elements can view multiple state values, but cannot edit multi-language data display.
Set the read memory address, read offset address, element foreground color and transparency. Set the data type, data format, state counts, Auto Picture Change, and picture change time.
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the Picture Bank Name, Alignment, Stretch Mode, and Transparent Color.
Set the Invisible Address.
Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
November, 2018
12-7
Graph Display Main
12
(1)
(9)
DOPSoft User Manual
(2) (3)
(4)
(7)
(5)
(6) (8)
Figure 12.1.2 Main property page for the State Graphic element
No. Property
Function description
You can select the internal memory or the controller register address.
The input memory type varies depending on the selected data type,
Read
including Word, LSB, or Bit, as shown in Table 12.1.4.
(1)
Address Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Chapter 5 Buttons for
details.
Read Offset Please refer to Appendix D for instructions on writing and reading the offset Address address.
(2)
Data Type
There are four data types available: Bit, Word, LSB, and LSB (Support State 0). Please refer to Table 12.1.4 for details.
You can only select the Data Format when the Data Type is Word.
There are four types of Data Format: BCD, Signed Decimal, Unsigned Decimal, and Hexadecimal.
(3) Data Format
12-8
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Graph Display
No. Property
Function description
Set the total state count for the State Graphic. If the Data Type is Word, you can
(4)
State Counts
select 1 - 256 states; if the Data Type is LSB, you can select 16 states; if the Data Type is LSB (Support State 0), you can select 17 states; and if the Data
Type is Bit, you can select 2 states. Please refer to Table 12.1.4 for details.
There are three options for Auto Picture Change: Yes, No, and Variation.
12
(5)
Auto Picture Change
Please refer to Table 12.1.1, Table 12.1.2, and Table 12.1.3 for application examples of Auto Picture Change.
The setting range for the picture change time is 100 - 3000 milliseconds (ms). The default is 500 ms.
(6)
Change Time (ms)
Set the foreground color of the element. If you set Transparent to Yes, the setting of the foreground color is disabled.
(7)
Foreground Color
November, 2018
12-9
Graph Display
DOPSoft User Manual
12
No. Property
Function description
When you select Yes for Transparent, the result is as follows:
You can also specify a color in the picture and turn this color into
transparent.
is for selecting the transparent color. If you select the
black part in the button, the software changes the black part into
transparent.
(8) Transparent
If both the element and graphic are transparent, the result is as follows:
By switching the State, you can preview or change the settings of each button element state.
(9)
State
12-10
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Graph Display
(1)
12
(2)
(3)
Figure 12.1.3 Main-2 property page for the State Graphic element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3) Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
November, 2018
12-11
Graph Display Picture
12
(1)
(2) (3)
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 12.1.4 Picture property page for the State Graphic element
12-12
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Graph Display
No. Property
Function description
The Picture Bank Name default is None. To set the picture display, use the drop-down list to select the picture bank provided by the software and then select the picture you need.
12
(1)
Picture Bank Name
November, 2018
12-13
Graph Display
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
You can use the alignment options to set how pictures are aligned.
12
Alignment
The Stretch Mode options include Stretch All, Stretch 1:1, and Actual Size.
Stretch All
Stretch 1:1
Actual Size
(2)
If you select Stretch All, the picture fills the full element display area.
If you select Stretch 1:1, the picture displays in 1:1 size based on the element width and length.
If you select Actual Size, regardless of the element size, the picture displays in its actual size in the element display area.
Stretch Mode
If you check [Process pictures of all states], assume that the elements have multiple states and some pictures do not fill the full element display area, you can use this function to process all pictures instead of setting them one by one, which saves the editing time.
Specify a color in the picture and turn this color into transparent.
is for selecting the transparent color. When you set the Foreground
Color to blue, you can use
to select the white part in the calendar, and
the software changes the white part into transparent, which you can see
becomes identical to the element foreground color.
(3)
Transparent Color
12-14
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Details
(1)
Graph Display
12
Figure 12.1.5 Details property page for the State Graphic element
No. Property
Function description
When Invisible Address is set to On, the button element is invisible and you cannot execute its set functions.
Invisible Address is off
(1)
Invisible Address
Invisible Address is on
Element is invisible
November, 2018
12-15
Graph Display Coordinates
12
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 12.1.6 Coordinates property page for the State Graphic element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
12-16
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Graph Display
12.2 Animated Graphic
You can create multiple state pictures or import GIF images with the Animated Graphic element. Previously, DOPSoft decomposes a GIF file into multiple images, then the user sets the corresponding state one by one, which is inconvenient for programming. The new version of DOPSoft has improved the method for importing GIF images, which is one state corresponds to one GIF image.
The read memory address of the Animated Graphic element enables the read values to correspond to the switching graphics set in the Animated Graphic element as well as specifying the target position for the element to move to. Please refer to Table 12.2.1 for the Animated Graphic example.
12
Table 12.2.1 Animated Graphic example
Animated Graphic
Animated Graphic element
Read Address
$444
Read Address
Set the property for the Animated Graphic element
Set State Counts to 3 which means to import three GIF images.
Select Yes for Clear Picture; this means the graphic of the previous state will not stay when switching to the next graphic.
November, 2018
12-17
Graph Display
12
DOPSoft User Manual
Animated Graphic Create a new picture bank named as "test1" and import three GIF images.
Enter the Picture page of the Animated Graphic element, import images for State 0, State 1, and State 2 respectively.
Import File
State 0
State 1
State 2
Go to [Options] > [Clock Macro]: $445 represents the X coordinate (horizontal axis) of the Animated Graphic
element with Read address+1. $446 represents the Y coordinate (vertical axis) of the Animated Graphic element
with Read address+2.
Edit Clock Macro
12-18
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Graph Display
Animated Graphic
After you compile and download the screen data to the HMI, these three GIF images keep rotating and moving according to the memory addresses read by the horizontal and vertical axes.
12
Execution results
November, 2018
12-19
Graph Display
DOPSoft User Manual
12
Animated Graphic element supports three data types as shown in Table 12.2.2. If you need to add or reduce the total number of states, you can simply add or reduce it from State Counts in the Properties table.
Data Type
Table 12.2.2 Animated Graphic Data Type
Animated Graphic State Counts
If the Data Type is Word, you can set 1 to 256 states for the State Counts.
Word
LSB is to first convert the data in the register to binary data, then use the lowest non-zero bit to determine the current state of the object.
If the Data Type is LSB, you can set 1 to 16 states, except for State 0.
LSB / LSB (Support State 0)
To display State 0, please select LSB (Support State 0).
If you selected LSB, the element is black when the state is 0.
When the Data Type is LSB or LSB (Support State 0), the memory address is also in Word as the unit.
12-20
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Graph Display
Data Type
LSB / LSB (Support State 0)
Animated Graphic
State Counts
The examples in the following table show how the state value is determined with the lowest non-zero bit after converting from decimal value to binary value. There are also examples demonstrating how the software determines the displaying state value with the lowest bit when the decimal values are 3 and 7.
Decimal
Binary
State value
0
0000000000000000 State = 0 when all bits are 0.
Note: LSB (Support State 0) must be selected.
1
0000000000000001 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State = 1.
2
0000000000000010 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 1, State = 2.
3
0000000000000011 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State = 1.
4
0000000000000100 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 2, State = 3.
7
0000000000000111 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State = 1.
8
0000000000001000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 3, State = 4.
16 0000000000010000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 4, State = 5.
32 0000000000100000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 5, State = 6.
64 0000000001000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 6, State = 7.
128 0000000010000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 7, State = 8.
256 0000000100000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 8, State = 9.
512 0000001000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 9, State = 10.
1024 0000010000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 10, State = 11.
2048 0000100000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 11, State = 12.
4096 0001000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 12, State = 13.
8192 0010000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 13, State = 14.
16384 0100000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 14, State = 15.
32768 1000000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 15, State = 16.
12
November, 2018
12-21
Graph Display
DOPSoft User Manual
When you double-click Animated Graphic, the property page is shown as follows.
12
Figure 12.2.1 Properties of Animated Graphic
Figure 12.2.3 Function page of Animated Graphic
Function page Preview
Main Main-2 Picture Coordinates
Animated Graphic Description
Animated Graphic elements can view multiple state values, but cannot edit multilanguage data display. Set the Read Address, Read Offset Address, Data Type, Data Format, State Counts, and Clear Picture. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the Picture Bank Name, Alignment, Stretch Mode, and Transparent Color. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
12-22
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main (1)
(6)
(2) (5)
Graph Display
12
(3) (4)
Figure 12.2.2 Main property page for the Animated Graphic element
No.
Property
Function description
You can select the internal memory or the controller register address.
The Animated Graphic switches according to the value of the Read Address.
Read address+1 is the position where the horizontal axis (X) of the
Read Address
Animated Graphic element moves to.
(1)
Read address+2 is the position where the vertical axis (Y) of the
Animated Graphic element moves to.
Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Chapter 5 Buttons for details.
Read Offset Please refer to Appendix D for instructions on writing and reading the offset
Address
address.
(2)
Data Type
There are three data types available: Word, LSB, and LSB (Support State 0). Please refer to Table 12.2.2 for details.
November, 2018
12-23
Graph Display
DOPSoft User Manual
12
No.
Property
Function description
You can only select the Data Format when the Data Type is Word.
There are four types of Data Format: BCD, Signed Decimal, Unsigned Decimal, and Hexadecimal.
(3) Data Format
Set the State Counts for the Animated Graphic element. If the Data Type is
(4)
State Counts
Word, you can select 1 - 256 states; if the Data Type is LSB, you can select 16 states; and if the Data Type is LSB (Support State 0), you can select 17
states. Please refer to Table 12.2.2 for details.
Whether to clear the graphic of the previous state during animation and
(5)
Clear Picture
when switching the State Graphics. Select No for Clear Picture; this means the HMI will display the graphic of
the previous state when switching to the next graphic.
By switching the State, you can preview or change the settings of each button element state.
(6)
State
12-24
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Graph Display
12
Figure 12.2.3 Main-2 property page for the Animated Graphic element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3) Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
November, 2018
12-25
Graph Display Picture
12
(1)
(2) (3)
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 12.2.4 Picture property page for the Animated Graphic element
12-26
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Graph Display
No. Property
Function description
The Picture Bank Name default is None. To set the picture display, use the drop-down list to select the picture bank provided by the software and then select the picture you need.
12
(1)
Picture Bank Name
November, 2018
12-27
Graph Display
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
You can use the alignment options to set how pictures are aligned.
12
Alignment
The Stretch Mode options include Stretch All, Stretch 1:1, and Actual Size.
Stretch All
Stretch 1:1
Actual Size
(2)
If you select Stretch All, the picture fills the full element display area.
If you select Stretch 1:1, the picture displays in 1:1 size based on the element width and length.
If you select Actual Size, regardless of the element size, the picture displays in its actual size in the element display area.
Stretch Mode
If you check [Process pictures of all states], assume that the elements have multiple states and some pictures do not fill the full element display area, you can use this function to process all pictures instead of setting them one by one, which saves the editing time.
Specifies a color in the picture and turn this color into transparent.
is for selecting the transparent color. When you set the Foreground
Color to blue, you can use
to select the white part in the calendar, and
the software changes the white part into transparent, which you can see
becomes identical to the element foreground color.
(3)
Transparent Color
12-28
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Coordinates
Graph Display
12 (1)
(2)
Figure 12.2.5 Coordinates property page for the Animated Graphic element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
November, 2018
12-29
Graph Display
DOPSoft User Manual
12.3 Real-time Image
12
The Real-time Image is mainly for the user to use the ImgTrans.dll library provided by DOPSoft to write external applications and upload graphics to the HMI. Multiple Real-time Image elements can display in one editing screen. The software dynamically configures the available memory capacity according to the created Real-time Image elements and the sizes of the graphics for uploading. Please refer to Table 12.6.1 for the Real-time Image example.
1. Data structure definition:
typedef struct _ETHER_INFO
{
char szIP[32];
WORD IPPort;
} ETHER_INFO;
,szIP is a string indicating the IP address of the Ethernet communication
,IPPort is the port of the Ethernet communication
typedef struct _COMM_INFO
{
char
szCOM[10];
unsigned long dwStation
ETHER_INFO EtherInfo;
} COMM_INFO;
, szCOM is a string, and the input values are COM1, COM2, COM3, ...; if you are using
Ethernet, set this string to "ETHERNET".
, If there is no station number, set dwStation to -1 (set Ethernet to -1); if there is a station
number, set dwStation to > 0.
2. Function list: (1) int hmOpen(const COMM_INFO* pCommInfo); (2) int hmSendImageFromFile(LPCTSTR szFileName); (3) int hmSendImageFromFileByStation(LPCTSTR szFileName, int nStation); (4) HANDLE hmAsyncSendImageFromFile(LPCTSTR szFileName); (5) HANDLE hmAsyncSendImageFromFileByStation(LPCTSTR szFileName,
int nStation); (6) int hmSendImage(HBITMAP hbmp); (7) int hmSendImageByStation(HBITMAP hbmp, int nStation); (8) HANDLE hmAsyncSendImage(HBITMAP hbmp); (9) HANDLE hmAsyncSendImageByStation(HBITMAP hbmp, int nStation); (10) int hmAbortAction(); (11) int hmClose();
12-30
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Graph Display
3. Function description: (1) Function: int hmOpen(const COMM_INFO* pCommInfo);
Input value: COMM_INFO structure Return value: 1 is success, 0 is failure Description: enable the HMI communication and input the string for COM Port, such as COM1, COM2, etc. (2) Function: int SendImageFromFile(LPCTSTR szFileName); Input value: graphic file name Return value: 1 is success, 0 is failure Description: after converting the input graphic format to the element width/height and bits of the HMI, then the graphic data starts to transfer to the HMI. This function is a synchronous function, and this function will not return the execution result until the data transfer is completed.
12
(3) Function: int SendImageFromFileByStation(LPCTSTR szFileName, int nStation); Input value: graphic file name, HMI station number (must be greater than 0) Return value: 1 is success, 0 is failure
Description: after converting the input graphic format to the element width/height and bits of the HMI, then the graphic data starts to transfer to the HMI with the specified station number. This function is a synchronous function, and this function will not return the execution result until the data transfer is completed.
(4) Function: HANDLE hmAsyncSendImageFromFile(LPCTSTR szFileName); Input value: graphic file name Return value: 0 is failure, non-zero value is the Thread Handle
Description: after converting the input graphic format to the element width/height and bits of the HMI, then the graphic data starts to transfer to the HMI. This function is an asynchronous function, and you can use the Thread Handle that is currently transferring the graphic data to perform related operations.
(5) Function: HANDLE hmAsyncSendImageFromFileByStation(LPCTSTR szFileName, int nStation); Input value: graphic file name, HMI station number (must be greater than 0) Return value: 0 is failure, non-zero value is the Thread Handle
Description: after converting the input graphic format to the element width/height and bits of the HMI, then the graphic data starts to transfer to the HMI with the specified station number. This function is an asynchronous function, and you can use the Thread Handle that is currently transferring the graphic data to perform related operations.
November, 2018
12-31
Graph Display
DOPSoft User Manual
12
(6) Function: int hmSendImage(HBITMAP hbmp); Input value: Window HBITMAP Handle Return value: 1 is success, 0 is failure
Description: after converting the input graphic format to the element width/height and bits of the HMI, then the graphic data starts to transfer to the HMI. This function is a synchronous function, and this function will not return the execution result until the data transfer is completed.
(7) Function: int hmSendImageByStation(HBITMAP hbmp, int nStation); Input value: Window HBITMAP Handle, HMI station number (must be greater than 0) Return value: 1 is success, 0 is failure
Description: after converting the input graphic format to the element width/height and bits of the HMI, then the graphic data starts to transfer to the HMI with the specified station number. This function is a synchronous function, and this function will not return the execution result until the data transfer is completed.
(8) Function: HANDLE hmAsyncSendImage(HBITMAP hbmp); Input value: Window HBITMAP Handle Return value: 0 is failure, non-zero value is the Thread Handle
Description: after converting the input graphic format to the element width/height and bits of the HMI, then the graphic data starts to transfer to the HMI. This function is an asynchronous function, and you can use the Thread Handle that is currently transferring the graphic data to perform related operations.
(9) Function: HANDLE hmAsyncSendImage(HBITMAP hbmp, int nStation); Input value: Window HBITMAP Handle, HMI station number (must be greater than 0) Return value: 0 is failure, non-zero value is the Thread Handle
Description: after converting the input graphic format to the element width/height and bits of the HMI, then the graphic data starts to transfer to the HMI with the specified station number. This function is an asynchronous function, and you can use the Thread Handle that is currently transferring the graphic data to perform related operations.
(10) Function: int hmAbortAction(); Input value: none Return value: 0 is failure, 1 is success
Description: abort the graphics transfer of the asynchronous function.
(11) Function: int hmClose(); Input value: none Return value: 0 is failure, 1 is success
Description: disable the HMI communication. This function is automatically called when Dll ends.
12-32
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Table 12.6.1 Real-time Image example Real-time Image
Create a Real-time Image element on the HMI editing screen.
Create Real-time Image element
Graph Display
12
Settings
Compilation screen
This is a communication port that connects the HMI to the PC, which is set to COM2 and transmits with the RS232 communication interface.
HMI station number
Interface
Port
1
RS232
COM2
Create a Real-time Image element and set its communication interface and port, then compile and download the screen data to the HMI.
Use a 9-pin transmission line and a null modem to connect the PC to the HMI. Click [Control Panel] > [Administrative Tools] > [Computer Management] >
[Device Manager] > [Ports] to view the connection ports on the PC end, as shown below.
Execute TestTransfer.exe
November, 2018
1
12-33
Graph Display
12
DOPSoft User Manual
Real-time Image Open [My Computer] > go to the following path [C:\Program Files\Delta
Industrial Automation\DopSoft 4.00.xx\Utility\ImgTrans] and select [TestTransfer.exe]. Open this tool, set the COM port between PC and HMI to COM7, and select the image file for uploading. This example selects the image file DELTA.jpg located in D:\, please see the figure below.
Execute TestTransfer.exe
The figure below is the selected DELTA.jpg file image. After you selected the image file for uploading, click Transfer.
Execution results If the connection is successful, the Status displays "Connect Success". The Real-time Image element on the HMI displays the uploaded image.
12-34
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Graph Display
The following figure shows the property setting screen when you double-click the Real-time Image element.
12
Figure 12.6.1 Properties of Real-time Image
Table 12.6.2 Function page of Real-time Image
Function page Preview
Main
Main-2 Coordinates
Real-time Image Description
No multiple state values and multi-language data display for viewing. Set the element foreground color. Set the HMI Station number, Interface, and COM Port. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
November, 2018
12-35
Graph Display Main
12
(1)
DOPSoft User Manual
(2) (3) (4)
Figure 12.6.2 Main property page for the Real-time Image element
No. Property
Function description
Set the foreground color of the element.
(1)
Foreground Color
The HMI Station number option is mainly for the transmission mode of RS485
(2)
HMI Station
with the setting range from 1 to 255, and the default is 1. When you use RS485 to connect multiple HMIs in series, you can use this HMI Station number to
distinguish each HMI.
12-36
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
The transmission modes include RS232 and RS485.
(3) Interface
Graph Display
12
The RS232 communication ports are COM1 and COM2. The RS485 communication ports are COM2 and COM3.
The communication ports include COM1, COM2, COM3, and Ethernet. Different communication ports are available depending on the transmission mode.
(4) COM Port
Please note that this communication port is the port of the HMI which cannot share a COM with the communication port of the PLC. For example, if the PLC communication is selected as COM1, then you can only select COM2 or COM3 for the communication port of the HMI. If the PLC communication is selected as COM1 and RS232 is selected as the transmission mode, then you can only select COM2 for the communication port of the HMI.
If the communication port is selected as Ethernet, the Interface option is grayed out and cannot be set.
November, 2018
12-37
Graph Display Main-2
12
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 12.6.3 Main-2 property page for the Real-time Image element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3) Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
12-38
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Coordinates
Graph Display
12
(1) (2)
Figure 12.6.4 Coordinates property page for the Real-time Image element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
November, 2018
12-39
Graph Display
DOPSoft User Manual
12
The following is the library path and function description.
Library path
Library description
Library
C:\Program Files\Delta Industrial Automation\DopSoft 1.00.01\Utility\ImgTrans
Load ImgTrans.dll. Data structure definition: typedef struct _COMM_INFO {
char szCOM[8]; } COMM_INFO; szCOM is a string, and the input values are COM1, COM2, COM3... Function list: (12) int hmOpen(const COMM_INFO* pCommInfo); (13) int hmSendImageFromFile(LPCTSTR szFileName); (14) HANDLE hmAsyncSendImageFromFile(LPCTSTR szFileName); (15) int hmSendImage(HBITMAP hbmp); (16) HANDLE hmAsyncSendImage(HBITMAP hbmp); (17) int hmAbortAction(); (18) int hmClose(); Function description: (1) Function: int hmOpen(const COMM_INFO* pCommInfo); Input value: COMM_INFO structure Return value: 1 is success, 0 is failure Description: enable the HMI communication and input the string for COM Port, such as COM1, COM2, etc. (2) Function:int SendImageFromFile(LPCTSTR szFileName); Input value: graphic file name Return value: 1 is success, 0 is failure Description: after converting the input graphic format to the element width/height and bits of the HMI, then the graphic data starts to transfer to the HMI. This function is a synchronous function, and this function will not return the execution result until the data transfer is completed. (3) Function: HANDLE hmAsyncSendImageFromFile(LPCTSTR szFileName); Input value: graphic file name Return value: 0 is failure, non-zero value is the Thread Handle Description: after converting the input graphic format to the element width/height and bits of the HMI, then the graphic data starts to transfer to the HMI. This function is an asynchronous function, and you can use the Thread Handle that is currently transferring the graphic data to perform related operations. (4) Function: int hmSendImage(HBITMAP hbmp); Input value: Window HBITMAP Handle Return value: 1 is success, 0 is failure Description: after converting the input graphic format to the element width/height and bits of the HMI, then the graphic data starts to transfer to the HMI. This function is a synchronous function, and this function will not return the execution result until the data transfer is completed. (5) Function: HANDLE hmAsyncSendImage(HBITMAP hbmp); Input value: Window HBITMAP Handle Return value: 0 is failure, non-zero value is the Thread Handle
12-40
November, 2018
Input
This chapter provides the usage and setting details for the Input elements.
13.1 Numeric Entry ������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 13-2 13.2 Character Entry ����������������������������������������������������������������������������13-33 13.3 Barcode Input ������������������������������������������������������������������������������13-54 13.4 Multi-language Input ����������������������������������������������������������������������13-69
November, 2018
13-1
Input
DOPSoft User Manual
13.1 Numeric Entry
13
With the keypad provided by the Numeric Entry element, you can input a value to the set write address. Next, you can read its value with a read address, such as the Numeric Display element, and then display the value on the HMI. Please refer to Table 13.1.1 for the Numeric Entry example.
Table 13.1.1 Numeric Entry example
Read Address
Numeric Entry
Numeric Entry element
Write Address
$555
Numeric Display element
Read Address
$555
Settings
Execution results
Numeric Entry element
Data Type
Data Format
Integer Digits
Fractional Digits
Word
Unsigned Decimal
4
0
After creating the element, please compile and download the element to the HMI. Next, input 100 with the Numeric Entry element, then the Numeric Display element will display the input value.
Input a value of 100 and write to the specified address ($555)
Value input
Value display
13-2
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Input
Numeric Entry supports two data types: Word and Double Word. The allowable range of the Numeric Entry value is as shown in Table 13.1.2.
Table 13.1.2 Numeric Entry allowable range
Word Double Word
Numeric Entry Data Format
Allowable range
BCD
0 to 9999
Signed BCD
-999 to 9999
Signed Decimal
-32768 to 32767
Unsigned Decimal
0 to 65535
Hex
0 to 0xFFFF
Binary
0 to 0xFFFF
Data Format
Allowable range
BCD
0 to 99999999
Signed BCD
-9999999 to 99999999
Signed Decimal
-2147483648 to 2147483647
Unsigned Decimal
0 to 4294697295
Hex
0 to 0xFFFFFFFF
Binary
0 to 0xFFFFFFFF
Floating
0 to 9999999999999999
13
November, 2018
13-3
Input
DOPSoft User Manual
When you double-click Numeric Entry, the property page is shown as follows.
13
Figure 13.1.1 Properties of Numeric Entry
Table 13.1.3 Function page of Numeric Entry
Function page Preview
Main
Main-2 Text
Details Details-2
Macro Coordinates
Numeric Entry
Description
Numeric Entry elements do not support multiple state values and multi-language data display.
Set Read Address, Write Address, Read Offset Address, Write Offset Address; set the Style, Background Color, and Border Color of the element. Set Data Type, Data Format, Integer / Fractional Digits, Minimum / Maximum values, Variable minimum/maximum limits, Gain, and Offset.
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing.
Set the text font, size, color, and alignment type.
Set the Input Mode, Interlock State, Interlock Address, Trigger Mode, Trigger Addr., Invisible Address, Prefix Zero, Show overrange message, User Security Level, Set Low Security, and Mark as Asterisk (*).
Set the Type of the unit, Unit of Source/Display, Custom formula, and Percentage.
Set Before Execute Macro and After Execute Macro.
Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
13-4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main
(1)
Input
13 (3)
(2)
(4)
(5)
(12)
(9)
(6)
(10)
(7)
(11)
(8)
Figure 13.1.2 Main property page for the Numeric Entry element
No. Property
Function description
Write Address
You can select the internal memory or the controller register address.
(1)
Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Chapter 5 Buttons for
Read
details.
Address
Write Offset
Address
(2)
Please refer to Appendix D for instructions on writing and reading the offset address.
Read Offset
Address
November, 2018
13-5
Input
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
13
Property Data Type
Function description
There are two data types available: Word and Double Word. Please refer to Table 13.1.2 for details. When the Data Type is Word, the supported data formats are as follows:
When the Data Type is Double Word, the supported data formats are as
(3)
follows:
Data Format
When the Data Format is Floating, the integer and fractional digits support only 16 digits in total. If the setting exceeds 16 digits, the software automatically corrects the digits to 16 digits.
By editing the Numeric Keypad, you can adjust the size of the keypad window, title size, font size / type / color of the numeric display, and the background color of the keypad window.
(4)
System Keypad
13-6
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Input
No. Property
Function description
Select the size of the System Keypad.
System Keypad
Set the title column height. Set the font size. Set the font type. Set the font color.
13
Set the background color.
Default size.
(4)
Double-click to set the name of the keypad
window.
You can select the Custom Keypad function only if there is a Keypad Screen in the editing screen. When there is no Keypad Screen, the following message displays when you select the Custom Keypad function:
Custom Keypad
The allowable ranges for the minimum and maximum values vary based on the selected data type and data format.
Data Type
Data Format
Allowable range
BCD
0 to 9999
Signed BCD
-999 to 9999
Word
Signed Decimal Unsigned Decimal
-32768 to 32767 0 to 65535
Minimum /
(5)
maximum
value
Hex Binary BCD
0 to 0xFFFF 0 to 0xFFFF 0 to 99999999
Signed BCD
-9999999 to 99999999
Double Word
Signed Decimal Unsigned Decimal
Hex
-2147483648 to 2147483647 0 to 4294967295 0 to 0xFFFFFFFF
Binary
0 to 0xFFFFFFFF
Floating
0 to 9999999
You can set the displaying number of integer digits and the number of decimal
Integer Digits
places.
(6)
Fractional The number of decimal places here is not really a decimal value, but just the
Digits
display format. Only when Floating is selected as the Data Format, the
Fractional setting is the actual decimal.
November, 2018
13-7
Input
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
Check this option to set the maximum and minimum values as variables.
13
(7)
Variable minimum/ maximum
limits
The formula for gain and offset is y = (a)x + (b).
y
a
x
b
Result
Gain value
Input value
Offset value
If the set Gain or Offset value is a decimal, set the Data Format to Floating.
The Numeric Entry element provides an estimation button to make it easier for users to understand the gain and offset calculations, as shown below:
(8) Gain / Offset
If you check [Round off], the calculation results are rounded off before displaying on the Numeric Display element.
When the Data Format is Unsigned Decimal, a message "Data Overflow" pops up when you input a negative value in the estimation.
13-8
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual No. Property
(8) Gain / Offset
Function description
Input
13
You can change the appearance of the element with this setting. There are four types of element styles:
(9)
Style
Standard
Raised
Sunken
Transparent
Set the Border Color of the element.
When you set the element style to Transparent, the Border Color setting is invalid.
(10) Border Color
Border Color
Set the Background Color of the element.
When you set the element style to Transparent, the Background Color setting is invalid.
(11)
Background Color
Background Color
November, 2018
13-9
Input
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
13 (12)
Property
Function description
Record the button actions to be executed. The record is written in the CSV file of the Operation Log Table so users can know what actions have been done.
Element description
13-10
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Input
(1)
13
(2)
(3)
Figure 13.1.3 Main-2 property page for the Numeric Entry element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3)
Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
November, 2018
13-11
Input Text
13
DOPSoft User Manual (1)
Figure 13.1 4 Text property page for the Numeric Entry element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Text
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, and alignment.
13-12
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Details
(6) (7) (8) (9)
Input
(1) (2)
13
(3)
(4) (5)
Figure 13.1.5 Details property page for the Numeric Entry element
No. Property
Function description
The Prefix Zero function determines how many zeros to add according to the set number of integer digits. Please refer to the example below.
Integer digits is 5
(1) Prefix Zero
Prefix Zero
Prefix Zero
November, 2018
13-13
Input
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
13
(2)
Property
Function description
If you set Show overrange message to Yes, an error message as shown below will pop up when you input a value exceeding the allowable range.
Show overrange message
User Security
Level
You can use this function to set the permission level for pressing the element; this operation is only available to users with the same set security level or higher.
After you set the User Security Level and press the element, a password input window pops up to confirm whether the security level password is correct (you can modify this password with the Password Table element, please refer to Section 5.7.2 Password Table Setup).
(3)
Set Low Security
If you specify Set Low Security to Yes, the HMI automatically sets the security level to the lowest each time you enter the password. Next time you press the element, you will be asked again to enter the password for the corresponding security level.
13-14
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Input
No. Property
Function description
If you specify Mark as Asterisk (*) to Yes, the value appears as asterisks when you input a value to the Numeric Keypad, as shown below:
13
(4)
Mark as Asterisk (*)
If you specify Show #### when overrange to Yes, the value appears in #### when you input a value that is not within the defined minimum and maximum range.
(5)
Show #### when
overrange
For example, set the minimum value to 10 and the maximum value to 50. After executing the command, since the default value is 0 which is not within the set range of 10 - 50, the value appears in #.
The types of Input Mode include Touch Popup, Active Non-Popup, and Touch Non-Popup.
Touch Popup is the default Input Mode for the Numeric Entry element.
Touch Popup means that after pressing the Numeric Entry element,
the Numeric Keypad will pop up.
(6) Input Mode
When the Numeric Keypad pops up, input the value, then press Enter when you are done.
Press the Numeric Entry element.
November, 2018
13-15
Input
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
13
Property
Function description
The Numeric Keypad will not pop up when you press Numeric Entry elements with Active Non-Popup or Touch Non-Popup settings. You must create an additional Keypad element to use with this element.
Active Non-Popup must be used with Interlock Address. Set the Input Mode for the Numeric Entry element as Active Non-Popup and the Interlock Address as $44.0. Then, create a Maintained element and set its Write Address as $44.0.
(6) Input Mode
Press the Maintained element (Interlock Address).
The Numeric Entry element shows the effect of Active Non-Popup.
Like the case of Active Non-Popup, the Numeric Keypad will not pop up when set as Touch Non-Popup, so you must create an additional Keypad element.
Use with the Keypad element to input values.
The Numeric Entry element shows the effect of Touch Non-Popup.
13-16
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Input
No. Property
Function description
Interlock State
Interlock Address is for enabling the operation of another element and has to be used with Interlock State. If Interlock State is set to Off, it means the Interlock Address is operable when this Interlock State is off; on the other hand, if Interlock State is set to On, the Interlock Address is operable when this Interlock State is on.
The following describes how it works:
a. First, create a Maintained button and set its Write Address as $44.0. Next, set the Write Address as $555 for the Numeric Entry element and the Interlock Address as $44.0.
b. In order for the Numeric Entry element $555 to become operable, you need to first press the Maintained button $44.0 to enable $555.
13
(7)
Interlock Address
Triggering method
Trigger types include Before Writing and After Writing.
Before Writing
After Writing
Trigger Address must be set to on before the value changes.
Value is changed before the Trigger Address is set to on.
The triggering function only switches the set Trigger Address to on, so if triggering again is required, you need to set the Trigger Address to off.
Flowchart of Before Writing:
Flowchart of After Writing:
(8)
Trigger Address
November, 2018
13-17
Input
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
13
Property
Function description
When Invisible Address is set to On, the button element is invisible and you cannot execute its set functions.
Invisible Address is off
Invisible Address is on
Element is invisible
(9)
Invisible Address
13-18
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Details-2
(4)
Input
(1)
13
(2)
(3) (5)
Figure 13.1.6 Details-2 property page for the Numeric Entry element
November, 2018
13-19
Input
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
13
Property
Function description
You can select the conversion type, including Speed, Pressure, Location, Temperature, Weight, Volume, and Custom formula.
If you select Disable, it means the value does not need conversion.
To set the Custom formula, you have to enter values for Variable A and Variable B. When you select Floating as the unit, the formula is [Display value = Source value * A + B].
(1)
Type
13-20
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Input
No. Property
Function description
The unit is subject to change based on the selected type. The table below lists the corresponding units for each type.
Type Speed
Unit mm/sec inch/sec
%
13
Using the code
kg/cm
bar Pressure
%
Using the code
mm
inch Coordinates
%
Using the code
Temperature
%
Using the code
ton
kN
g Weight
oz
(2)
Source
% Using the code
L
ml
Capacity
kL
%
Using the code
When you select % (Percentage) or Using the code as the unit for either the Source or Display, the percentage setting interface is enabled. When the percentage setting interface allows data input, you need to define values for 0% and 100% which unit setting refers to the Source.
November, 2018
13-21
Input No. Property
13
Function description
DOPSoft User Manual
When you select Using the code as the unit, it means you can enter variables to specify the unit codes for the Source and Display. The unit codes are as follows:
Type
Unit
Code
mm/sec
101
Speed
inch/sec
102
(2)
Source
%
700
kg/cm
201
Pressure
bar
202
%
700
mm
301
Position
inch
302
%
700
�F
401
Temperature
�C
402
%
700
ton
501
kN
502
Weight
g
503
oz
504
%
700
L
601
ml
602
Capacity
kL
603
%
700
User-defined address is only available when you select Using the code for the unit.
If both the Source and Display select Using the code as the unit, do not use the same address.
Please refer to the Source description for details about the units.
(3)
Display
User-defined address is only available when you select Using the code for the unit.
If both the Source and Display select Using the code as the unit, do not use the
same address.
13-22
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Input
No. Property
Function description
You can input external / internal memory addresses and constants for both
(4)
Custom formula
Variable A and Variable B. To set the Custom formula, you have to enter values for Variable A and
Variable B. When you select Floating as the unit, the formula is [Display value = Source value * A + B].
You can input external / internal memory addresses and constants for both
13
setting values of 0% and 100%.
When you select % (Percentage) or Using the code as the unit for either the
(5)
Percentage
Source or Display, the percentage setting interface is enabled.
settings
The unit is subject to change based on the Source unit setting. Take the speed
setting for example, if you select % (Percentage) or Using the code as the
Source unit, you can select mm/sec or inch/sec from the Unit drop-down list in
the Percentage setting; if you select mm/sec for the Source unit, mm/sec is the
only unit available in the Percentage setting.
November, 2018
13-23
Input
13 Set Address
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 13.1.4 Unit conversion example
Unit conversion (fixed unit)
Numeric Display element (Display) Numeric Entry element (Source)
Read Address
$10
Write Address
$10
Parameter setting
Numeric Display / Numeric Entry element
Data Type
Data Format
Integer Digits
Fractional Digits
Word
Unsigned Decimal
5
0
Double-click the Numeric Display element and go to the Details-2 page. Select Temperature as the Type and select �F for the Unit of Source and �C for the Unit of Display.
Unit setting
Since the Numeric Entry element does not need unit conversion, please select Disable for Type.
13-24
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Input
Execution results
Unit conversion (fixed unit)
After creating the elements, please compile and download the elements to the HMI. Then, enter 50 (�F) to the Numeric Entry element and the Numeric Display element will convert the temperature to 10 (�C).
13
November, 2018
13-25
Input
DOPSoft User Manual
13 Read Address
Table 13.1.5 Unit conversion example
Unit conversion (Using the code) Numeric Entry element Numeric Entry element
(Source) Read Address $10 Write Address $300
Numeric Entry element (Display)
Write Address $400
Setting
Numeric Entry element
Data Type
Data Format
Integer Digits
Fractional Digits
Word
Unsigned Decimal
5
0
Double-click the Numeric Entry element of $10, go to the Details-2 page, and select Temperature as the Type. For the Source settings, select Using the code for the unit and $300 for the address; for the Display settings, select Using the code for the unit and $400 for the address.
Unit setting
Since the Numeric Entry elements of $300 and $400 do not need unit conversion, please select Disable for Type.
13-26
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Input
Unit conversion (Using the code)
After creating the elements, please compile and download the elements to the HMI, then enter 50 to $10.
13
Execution results
Enter 401 (stands for �F) to $300 and enter 402 (stands for �C) to $400, then $10 converts the value to 10�C.
November, 2018
13-27
Input
13 Read Address
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 13.1.6 Unit conversion example
Unit conversion (%)
Numeric Display element
Numeric Entry element (Source)
Read Address
$10
Write Address
$10
Settings
Numeric Display / Numeric Entry element
Data Type
Data Format
Integer Digits
Fractional Digits
Word
Unsigned Decimal
5
0
Double-click the Numeric Display element of $10 and go to the Details-2 page. Select Temperature as the Type and select % for the Unit of Source and �C for the Unit of Display.
Unit setting
Set the percentage 0% to 30.0 and 100% to 1000.0. Since the Source unit is %, the percentage setting unit can be �F or �C.
In this example, �F is used as the unit.
13-28
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Input
Unit conversion (%)
Since the Numeric Entry element of $10 does not need unit conversion, please select Disable for Type.
13
Unit setting
After creating the elements, please compile and download the elements to the HMI. The value for the Numeric Entry element of $10 is 0, so the Numeric Display element displays 30, meaning 0% equals the value 30.
Execution results
If you set the value for the Numeric Entry element of $10 to 100, the Numeric Display element displays 1000, which means 100% equals the value 1000.
November, 2018
13-29
Input Macro
13
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) Figure 13.1.7 Macro property page for the Numeric Entry element
13-30
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
Flowcharts of Before Execute Macro / After Execute Macro:
Input
13
(1)
Before Execute Macro
After Execute Macro
When you press the button element, the HMI will first execute the macro commands, then execute the action of the button. However, if the state of the button is not changed by pressing it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI will not execute the macro commands.
When you press the button element, the HMI will first execute the action of the button, then execute the macro commands. However, if the state of the button is not changed by pressing it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI will not execute the macro commands.
November, 2018
13-31
Input Coordinates
13
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 13.1.8 Coordinates property page for the Numeric Entry element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
13-32
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Input
13.2 Character Entry
The Character Entry element supports only the ASCII code. Therefore, the format of the display and input is character. You can switch to the ASCII input mode with the ALT key as shown below.
13
Figure 13.2.1 ASCII keyboard
Figure 13.2.2 ASCII keyboard
November, 2018
13-33
Input
DOPSoft User Manual
The following conversion table shows the conversion between data formats and characters from A to G. The remaining characters can be deduced with the same pattern.
13
Unsigned Decimal 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
Hexadecimal 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Character A B C D E F G
Table 13.2.1 ASCII conversion table
According to Table 13.2.1, if you input the character A to the Character Entry element, the Numeric Entry element will display 65 (Unsigned Decimal).
Character Entry
Numeric Entry
Read Address
Table 13.2.2 Character Entry example
Character Entry
Character Entry element
Write Address
$555
Numeric Entry element
Write Address
$555
Setting
Character Entry element
String Length
4
Data Type
Numeric Entry element
Data Format
Integer Digits
Fractional Digits
Word
Unsigned Decimal
4
0
After creating the elements, please compile and download the elements to the HMI. Next, input A to the Character Entry element, then the Numeric Entry element will display its corresponding ASCII code which is 65.
Execution results
Character Entry
Numeric Entry
13-34
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual When you double-click Character Entry, the property page is shown as follows.
Input
13
Figure 13.2.3 Properties of Character Entry
Table 13.2.3 Function page of Character Entry
Function page Preview
Main Main-2
Text Details Macro Coordinates
Character Entry Description
Character Entry elements do not support multiple state values and multi-language data display. Set Read Address, Write Address, Read Offset Address, Write Offset Address; set the Style, Background Color, Border Color of the element, and its String Length. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the text font, size, color, and alignment type. Set the Input Mode, Interlock State, Interlock Address, Trigger Mode, Trigger Addr., Invisible Address, User Security Level, Set Low Security, and Mark as Asterisk (*). Set Before Execute Macro and After Execute Macro. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
November, 2018
13-35
Input Main
13
(1)
(2) (8)
DOPSoft User Manual
(3)
(4) (5) (6) (7)
Figure 13.2.4 Main property page for the Character Entry element
No.
Property
Function description
Write Address You can select the internal memory or the controller register address.
(1)
Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Chapter 5 Buttons for
Read Address
details.
Write Offset
(2)
Address Read Offset
Please refer to Appendix D for instructions on writing and reading the offset address.
Address
13-36
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Input
No.
Property
Function description
By editing the Numeric Keypad, you can adjust the size of the keypad window, title size, font size / type / color of the numeric display, and the background color of the keypad window.
13
System Keypad
Select the size of the System Keypad.
Set the title column height.
(3)
Set the font size.
Set the font type.
Set the font color.
Set the background color.
Default size.
Double-click to set the name of the keypad window.
You can select the Custom Keypad function only if there is a Keypad Screen in the editing screen.
When there is no Keypad Screen, the following message displays when you select the Custom Keypad function.
Custom Keypad
(4)
String Length The string length ranges from 1 to 256.
You can change the appearance of the element with this setting. There are four types of element styles:
(5)
Style
Standard
Raised
Sunken
Transparent
November, 2018
13-37
Input
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
13 (6)
Property
Function description
Set the Border Color of the element. When you set the element style to Transparent, the Border Color setting is
invalid.
Border Color
Border Color
Set the Background Color of the element.
When you set the element style to Transparent, the Background Color setting is invalid.
(7)
Background Color
Background Color
Record the button actions to be executed. The record is written in the CSV file of the Operation Log Table so users can know what actions have been done.
(8)
Element Description
13-38
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Input
(1)
13
(2)
(3)
Figure 13.2.5 Main-2 property page for the Character Entry element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3)
Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
November, 2018
13-39
Input Text
13
DOPSoft User Manual (1)
Figure 13.2.6 Text property page for the Character Entry element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Text
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, and alignment.
13-40
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Details
(3) (4) (5) (6)
Input
13 (1)
(2)
Figure 13.2.7 Details property page for the Character Entry element
November, 2018
13-41
Input No. Property
13
User Security
Level
Function description
DOPSoft User Manual
You can use this function to set the permission level for pressing the element; this operation is only available to users with the same set security level or higher.
After you set the User Security Level and press the element, a password input
window pops up to confirm whether the security level password is correct
(you can modify this password with the Password Table element, please refer
(1)
to Section 5.7.2 Password Table Setup).
Set Low Security
If you specify Set Low Security to Yes, the HMI automatically sets the security level to the lowest each time you enter the password. Next time you press the element, you will be asked again to enter the password for the corresponding security level.
If you specify Mark as Asterisk (*) to Yes, the value appears as asterisks when you input a value to the Numeric Keypad, as shown below:
(2)
Mark as Asterisk (*)
13-42
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Input
No. Property
Function description
The types of Input Mode include Touch Popup, Active Non-Popup, and Touch Non-Popup. Touch Popup is the default Input Mode for the Character Entry element.
13
Touch Popup means that after pressing the Character Entry element, the ASCII Keypad will pop up.
When the ASCII Keypad pops up, input the characters, then press Enter when you are done.
Press the Character Entry element.
The ASCII Keypad will not pop up when you press Character Entry elements
with Active Non-Popup or Touch Non-Popup settings. You must create an
(3) Input Mode
additional Keypad element to use with this element.
Active Non-Popup must be used with Interlock Address. Set the Input Mode for
the Character Entry element as Active Non-Popup and the Interlock Address as
$44.0. Then, create a Maintained element and set its Write Address as $44.0.
Press the Maintained The Character Entry element
element (Interlock shows the effect of Active
Address).
Non-Popup.
Like the case of Active Non-Popup, the ASCII Keypad will not pop up when set as Touch Non-Popup, so you must create an additional Keypad element. Use with the Keypad element to input values.
The Character Entry element shows the effect of Touch Non-Popup.
November, 2018
13-43
Input
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
13
Property
Interlock State
Function description
Interlock Address is for enabling the operation of another element and has to be used with Interlock State. If Interlock State is set to Off, it means the Interlock Address is operable when this Interlock State is off; on the other hand, if Interlock State is set to On, the Interlock Address is operable when this Interlock State is on.
The following describes how it works:
a. First, create a Maintained button and set its Write Address as $44.0. Next, set the Write Address as $555 for the Character Entry element and the Interlock Address as $44.0.
b. In order for the Character Entry element $555 to become operable, you need to first press the Maintained button $44.0 to enable $555.
(4)
Interlock Address
Triggering method
Trigger types include Before Writing and After Writing.
Before Writing
After Writing
Trigger Address must be set to on before the value changes.
Value is changed before the Trigger Address is set to on.
The triggering function only switches the set Trigger Address to on, so if triggering again is required, you need to set the Trigger Address to off.
Flowchart of Before Writing
Flowchart of After Writing
(5)
Trigger Address
13-44
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Input
No. Property
Function description
When Invisible Address is set to On, the button element is invisible and you cannot execute its set functions.
Invisible Address is off
13
Invisible Address is on
Element is invisible
(6)
Invisible Address
November, 2018
13-45
Input
DOPSoft User Manual
EASCII instructions
13
The default of the DOP-100 series has been set to support EASCII, so you do not need to enable this function. All you need to do is create a Keypad Screen or Keypad element. Please refer to the example descriptions below for more details.
The default of this function is Yes meaning the HMI can support Swedish. There are IBM and ISO/IEC 8859-1 defined Extended ASCII. The EASCII version is different
in every operating system, but most follow the characters defined in ISO/IEC 8859-1. Microsoft adopts the definition of ISO/IEC 8859-1, so the HMI also adopts the definition of ISO/IEC 8859-1.
The supported extended characters are shown in the table below:
Character
--
�
�
�
�
�
,
~
�
�
�
�
TM
�
�
�
�
�
,,
s
�
�
�
�
�
...
>
�
�
�
�
�
oe
�
�
�
�
�
z
�
�
�
�
�
^
Y
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
S
�
�
�
�
�
<
�
�
�
�
�
OE
�
�
�
�
�
Z
�
�
�
�
�
`
�
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
�
�
"
�
�
�
�
�
"
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
13-46
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Input
Method 1: Keypad element. The following explains how the Keypad element works with EASCII.
1. Create a Character Entry element: set the Write Address to $100 and String Length to 10.
13
2. Create Keypad(2) element:
(1) Select any of the above mentioned extended characters to fill in the ASCII display contents on the keypad.
(2) Continue with the previous step and complete the settings for all characters.
November, 2018
13-47
Input
DOPSoft User Manual
3. Compile and download: after completing all settings, please compile and download the
element to the HMI. First, press the Character Entry element, then press the extended
13
characters on the keypad. When you are done inputting, press Enter.
Method 2: Keypad Screen. The following explains how to create a Keypad Template with the Keypad Screen to work with EASCII. 1. Create a Character Entry element: set the Write Address to $100 and String Length to 10.
13-48
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
2. Create Keypad Screen: (1) Create a new screen and set the Screen Type as Keypad Screen.
Input
13
(2) Go to the Element Bank, select Keypad-Template, and create an EASCII_Small template keypad.
November, 2018
13-49
Input
(3) The below figure is how the keypad looks like.
13
DOPSoft User Manual
3. Compile and download: after completing all settings, please compile and download the element to the HMI. First, press the Character Entry element, and the Keypad Template element will pop up, then you can input the External ASCII characters.
13-50
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Macro
Input
13
(1) Figure 13.2.8 Macro property page for the Character Entry element
November, 2018
13-51
Input
No.
Property
Function description
Flowcharts of Before Execute Macro / After Execute Macro:
13
DOPSoft User Manual
(1)
Before Execute Macro
After Execute Macro
When you press the button element, the HMI will first execute the macro commands, then execute the action of the button. However, if the state of the button is not changed by pressing it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI will not execute the macro commands.
When you press the button element, the HMI will first execute the action of the button, then execute the macro commands. However, if the state of the button is not changed by pressing it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI will not execute the macro commands.
13-52
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Coordinates
Input
13 (1)
(2)
Figure 13.2.9 Coordinates property page for the Character Entry element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
November, 2018
13-53
Input
DOPSoft User Manual
13.3 Barcode Input
13
The Barcode Input element supports only the 1D barcode input of ASCII code. Therefore, the format of the display and input is both characters. The barcode reader supported by the HMI is a scanning device that does not require additional drivers. Please refer to Table 13.3.1 for the Barcode Input example.
Read Address
Table 13.3.1 Barcode Input example
Barcode Input Barcode Input element
Write Address
$555
Barcode Input element
String Length
10
Setting
Execution results
After creating the element, please compile and download the element to the HMI, and then connect the barcode reader to the HMI. The HMI will beep once it recognizes the barcode reader.
Please press the Barcode Input element. When the element starts flashing, scan the barcode, and the barcode will display on the Barcode Input element.
Press the Barcode Input element.
Wait till the Barcode Input element starts flashing. Scan the barcode.
13-54
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual When you double-click Barcode Input, the property page is shown as follows.
Input
13
Figure 13.3.1 Properties of Barcode Input
Table 13.3.2 Function page of Barcode Input
Function page Preview
Main Main-2
Text
Details
Macro Coordinates
Barcode Input
Description
Barcode Input elements do not support multiple state values and multi-language data display.
Set Read Address, Write Address, Read Offset Address, Write Offset Address; set the Style, Background Color, Border Color of the element, and its String Length.
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing.
Set the text font, size, color, and alignment type.
Set the Input Mode, Popup Control Addr., Interlock State, Interlock Address, Trigger Mode, Trigger Addr., Invisible Address, User Security Level, Set Low Security, Mark as Asterisk (*), and Support EASCII.
Set Before Execute Macro and After Execute Macro.
Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
November, 2018
13-55
Input Main
13
(1)
(2) (8)
DOPSoft User Manual
(3)
(4) (5) (6) (7)
Figure 13.3.2 Main property page for the Barcode Input element
No. Property
Function description
Write Address
You can select the internal memory or the controller register address.
(1)
Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Chapter 5 Buttons for
Read
details.
Address
Write Offset
(2)
Address Please refer to Appendix D for instructions on writing and reading the offset Read Offset address.
Address
13-56
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Input
No. Property
Function description
By editing the ASCII Keypad, you can adjust the size of the keypad window, title size, font size / type / color of the numeric display, and the background color of the keypad window.
13
System Keypad
Select the size of the System Keypad.
Set the title column height.
(3)
Set the font size.
Set the font type.
Set the font color.
Set the background color.
Default size.
Double-click to set the name of the keypad window.
You can select the Custom Keypad function only if there is a Keypad Screen in the editing screen.
When there is no Keypad Screen, the following message displays when you select the Custom Keypad function.
Custom Keypad
(4)
String Length
The string length ranges from 1 to 256.
You can change the appearance of the element with this setting. There are four types of element styles:
(5)
Style
Standard
Raised
Sunken
Transparent
November, 2018
13-57
Input
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
Set the Border Color of the element.
When you set the element style to Transparent, the Border Color setting is
13 (6) Border Color
invalid.
Border Color
Set the Background Color of the element.
When you set the element style to Transparent, the Background Color setting is invalid.
(7)
Background Color
Background Color
Record the button actions to be executed. The record is written in the CSV file of the Operation Log Table so users can know what actions have been done.
(8)
Element Description
13-58
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Input
(1)
13
(2)
(3)
Figure 13.3.3 Main-2 property page for the Barcode Input element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3)
Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
November, 2018
13-59
Input Text
13
DOPSoft User Manual (1)
Figure 13.3 4 Text property page for the Barcode Input element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Text
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, and alignment.
13-60
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Details
(3) (4) (5) (6)
(7)
Input
(1)
13
(2)
Figure 13.3.5 Details property page for the Barcode Input element
November, 2018
13-61
Input No. Property
13
User Security Level
Function description
DOPSoft User Manual
You can use this function to set the permission level for pressing the element;
this operation is only available to users with the same set security level or
higher.
After you set the User Security Level and press the element, a password input
window pops up to confirm whether the security level password is correct
(1)
(you can modify this password with the Password Table element, please refer to Section 5.7.2 Password Table Setup).
Set Low Security
If you specify Set Low Security to Yes, the HMI automatically sets the security level to the lowest each time you enter the password. Next time you press the element, you will be asked again to enter the password for the corresponding security level.
If you specify Mark as Asterisk (*) to Yes, the value appears as asterisks when you input a value to the ASCII Keypad, as shown below:
(2)
Mark as Asterisk (*)
13-62
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Input
No. Property
Function description
The types of Input Mode include Touch and Active. Touch is the default Input Mode for the Barcode Input element.
13
Touch means after pressing the Barcode Input element, wait for the element to
flash, and scan the barcode or input the barcode using the Custom Keypad.
The Barcode Input element will then display the barcode.
Press the Barcode Input element.
Wait till the Barcode Input element starts flashing. Scan the barcode.
Wait till the Barcode Use the Keypad element to input the barcode. Press the Barcode Input element starts Input element. flashing.
(3) Input Mode
Active must be used with Interlock Address. Set the Input Mode for the Barcode Input element as Active and the Interlock Address as $44.0. Then, create a Maintained element and set its Write Address as $44.0.
If you set the Input Mode to Active, you can directly use the barcode reader or Keypad element to input the barcode.
Press the Maintained The Barcode Input element Use the barcode reader to scan
element (Interlock
shows the effect of Active the barcode.
Address).
flashing.
Press the Maintained element (Interlock Address).
The Barcode Input element shows the effect of Active flashing.
Use the Keypad element to input the barcode.
Use Popup Control Addr. for controlling whether to display the System Keypad or not. If you set Popup Control Addr. to on, when you press the Barcode Input
element, the System Keypad pops up. When the System Keypad pops up, the
Popup Control Addr. is switched to off. Before you input the barcode next time,
you must set Popup Control Addr. to on again.
Popup Control Addr. is operable only when the Input Mode is set to Touch.
If the Input Mode is set to Active, it means the System Keypad will not pop up,
and thus the setting for Popup Control Addr. is invalid.
(4)
Popup
The following example illustrates the Input Mode set as Touch.
Control Addr.
Set the Popup Control Addr. of the Barcode Input element to $556.0. When
you press the Barcode Input element, and then press the Popup Control Addr.,
the ASCII Keypad pops up.
Press the Barcode Input element.
When the Popup Control Addr. is on, the System Keypad pops up. Press the Maintained element (Popup Control Addr.).
Wait till the Barcode Input element starts flashing.
November, 2018
13-63
Input
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
13
(5)
Property
Interlock State
Interlock Address
Function description
Interlock Address is for enabling the operation of another element and has to be used with Interlock State. If Interlock State is set to Off, it means the Interlock Address is operable when this Interlock State is off; on the other hand, if Interlock State is set to On, the Interlock Address is operable when this Interlock State is on.
The following describes how it works:
a. First, create a Maintained button and set its Write Address as $44.0. Next, set the Write Address as $555 for the Barcode Input element and the Interlock Address as $44.0.
b. In order for the Barcode Input element $555 to become operable, you need to first press the Maintained button $44.0 to enable $555.
13-64
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Input
No. Property
Function description
Trigger types include Before Writing and After Writing.
Before Writing
After Writing
Trigger Address must be set to on before the value changes.
Value is changed before the Trigger Address is set to on.
The triggering function only switches the set Trigger Address to on, so if triggering again is required, you need to set the Trigger Address to off.
Triggering method
Flowchart of Before Writing
Flowchart of After Writing
13
(6)
Trigger Address
When Invisible Address is set to On, the button element is invisible and you cannot execute its set functions.
Invisible Address is off
Invisible Address is on
Element is invisible
(7)
Invisible Address
November, 2018
13-65
Input Macro
13
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) Figure 13.3.6 Macro property page for the Barcode Input element
13-66
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
Flowcharts of Before Execute Macro / After Execute Macro:
Input
13
(1)
Before Execute Macro
After Execute Macro
When you press the button element, the HMI will first execute the macro commands, then execute the action of the button. However, if the state of the button is not changed by pressing it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI will not execute the macro commands.
When you press the button element, the HMI will first execute the action of the button, then execute the macro commands. However, if the state of the button is not changed by pressing it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI will not execute the macro commands.
November, 2018
13-67
Input Coordinates
13
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 13.3.7 Coordinates property page for the Barcode Input element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
13-68
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Input
13.4 Multi-language Input
The Multi-language Input function supports up to 16 languages and you can decide the input methods for editing the display texts. Go to [Options] > [Configuration] > [Multi-language Settings] to check the preferred languages. Then, with the Multi-language Input element in the Input element, you can use the Multi-language Input function.
13
Figure 13.4.1 Multi-language Input
The Multi-language Input element provides functions different from DOP-W, which combines Enhanced Recipe Group naming, Enhanced Recipe Char format, account input, so that you can input Unicode characters for the names and content. Note: the Multi-language Input function does not support online and offline simulations.
Please refer to Table 13.4.1 for the Multi-language Input example.
November, 2018
13-69
Input
13
DOPSoft User Manual Table 13.4.1 Multi-language Input example
Multi-language Input Create a Numeric Entry element and set the Write Address to $10.
Set the User Security Level to 1.
Write Address
Go to [Options] > [Configuration] > [Security Level and Password] to create a level 1 account as the following.
Setting
Go to [Options] > [Configuration] > [Multi-language Settings] to check English and Traditional Chinese as the following.
13-70
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Input
Multi-language Input
After creating the elements, please compile and download the elements to the HMI. Press the Numeric Entry element and the screen will display the following input window.
13
Press Account and the Multi-language Input window will pop up. Input DELTA.
Execution results
Press
to switch to the numeric keyboard and input 12345 as the password.
November, 2018
13-71
Input
13
Multi-language Input Press OK to use the Numeric Entry element.
DOPSoft User Manual
Execution results
13-72
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual When you double-click Multi-language Input, the property page is shown as follows.
Input
13
Figure 13.4.3 Properties of Multi-language Input
Table 13.4.2 Function page of Multi-language Input
Function page Preview
Main Main-2
Text Details Coordinates
Multi-language Input
Description
Multi-language Input elements do not support multiple state values and multi-language data display.
Set Read Address, Write Address, Read Offset Address, Write Offset Address; set the Style, Background Color, Border Color of the element, and its String Length.
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the text font, size, color, and alignment type.
Set the Input Mode, Interlock State, Interlock Address, Trigger Mode, Trigger Addr., Invisible Address, User Security Level, Set Low Security, and Mark as Asterisk (*).
Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
November, 2018
13-73
Input Main
13
(1)
(2)
DOPSoft User Manual
(3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
Figure 13.4.4 Main property page for the Multi-language Input element
No. Property
Function description
Write Address
You can select the internal memory or the controller register address. Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Chapter 5 Buttons for
details.
(1)
Read Address
You can select the internal memory or the controller register address. Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Chapter 5 Buttons for
details.
Write Offset
(2)
Address Please refer to Appendix D for instructions on writing and reading the offset Read Offset address.
Address
(3)
String Length
The string length ranges from 1 to 256.
(4) Read only If this is set to Yes, this element is read-only and not writable.
You can change the appearance of the element with this setting. There are four types of element styles:
(5)
Style
Standard
Raised
Sunken
Transparent
13-74
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Input
No. Property
Function description
Set the Border Color of the element.
When you set the element style to Transparent, the Border Color setting is invalid.
(6)
Border Color
Border Color
13
Set the Background Color of the element.
When you set the element style to Transparent, the Background Color setting is invalid.
(7)
Background Color
Background Color
November, 2018
13-75
Input Main-2
13
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 13.4.5 Main-2 property page for the Multi-language Input element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3)
Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
13-76
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Text
Input
13
(1)
Figure 13.4 6 Text property page for the Multi-language Input element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Text
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, and alignment.
November, 2018
13-77
Input Details
13
(3)
(4) (5)
(6)
DOPSoft User Manual (1)
(2)
Figure 13.4.7 Details property page for the Multi-language Input element
13-78
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
Input
13
User Security Level
You can use this function to set the permission level for pressing the element; this operation is only available to users with the same set security level or higher.
After you set the User Security Level and press the element, a password
input window pops up to confirm whether the security level password is
(1)
correct.
Set Low Security
If you specify Set Low Security to Yes, the HMI automatically sets the security level to the lowest each time you enter the password. Next time you press the element, you will be asked again to enter the password for the corresponding security level.
If you specify Mark as Asterisk (*) to Yes, the value appears as asterisks when you input characters in the Multi-language Input window and press Enter, as shown below:
(2)
Mark as Asterisk (*)
(3)
Input Mode The Multi-language Input element does not support the setting of Input Mode.
November, 2018
13-79
Input
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
Interlock Address is for enabling the operation of another element and has to
be used with Interlock State. If Interlock State is set to Off, it means the
13
Interlock Address is operable when this Interlock State is off; on the other
hand, if Interlock State is set to On, the Interlock Address is operable when
Interlock State
this Interlock State is on.
The following describes how it works:
a. First, create a Maintained button and set its Write Address as $44.0.
Next, set the Write Address as $555 for the Multi-language Input
(4)
element and the Interlock Address as $44.0.
b. In order for the Multi-language Input element $555 to become operable,
you need to first press the Maintained button $44.0 to enable $555.
Interlock Address
Triggering method
Trigger types include Before Writing and After Writing.
Before Writing
After Writing
Trigger Address must be set to on before the value changes.
Value is changed before the Trigger Address is set to on.
The triggering function only switches the set Trigger Address to on, so if triggering again is required, you need to set the Trigger Address to off.
Flowchart of Before Writing
Flowchart of After Writing
(5)
Trigger Address
13-80
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Input
No.
Property
Function description
When Invisible Address is set to On, the button element is invisible and you cannot execute its set functions.
Invisible Address is off
13
Invisible Address is on
Element is invisible
(6)
Invisible Address
November, 2018
13-81
Input Macro
13
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) Figure 13.4.8 Macro property page for the Multi-language Input element
13-82
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property Flowchart of Before Execute Macro:
Function description Flowchart of After Execute Macro:
Input
13
(1)
Before Execute Macro
After Execute Macro
When you press the button element, the HMI will first execute the macro commands, then execute the action of the button. However, if the state of the button is not changed by pressing it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI will not execute the macro commands.
When you press the button element, the HMI will first execute the action of the button, then execute the macro commands. However, if the state of the button is not changed by pressing it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI will not execute the macro commands.
November, 2018
13-83
Input Coordinates
13
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 13.4.9 Coordinates property page for the Multi-language Input element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
13-84
November, 2018
Curve
This chapter provides the usage and setting details for the Curve elements.
14.1 Trend Graph ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 14-2 14.2 X-Y Chart ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������14-19 14.3 X-Y Distribution ����������������������������������������������������������������������������14-36 14.4 Curve Input����������������������������������������������������������������������������������14-47
November, 2018
14-1
Curve
DOPSoft User Manual
14.1 Trend Graph
14
Trend Graph is drawn according to the set Read Address, and you can also define the curve count to be displayed. A Trend Graph element supports up to 4 curves. This element requires using the Curve sampling flag from [Options] > [Configuration] > [Control Command] > [Control Block] > [Curve Control] to draw curves. The Curve sampling flags 1 - 4 correspond to the Sampling flags 1 - 4 of the Trend Graph element respectively.
Please refer to Table 14.1.1 for the Trend Graph example.
14-2
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 14.1.1 Trend Graph example
Trend Graph
Create a Trend Graph element and set its parameters.
Trend Graph element
Read Address
$2000
Sample Number
5
Sample Flag
1
Number of Curves
1
Trend Graph element
Minimum / Maximum Line Weight / Line Color
Curve
14
Numeric Entry element
Create 5 Numeric Entry elements, as the Sample Number of the Trend Graph is set to 5, meaning 5 sampling points are used to draw a curve. Then, the set Read Address $2000 of the Trend Graph starts reading 5 addresses in sequence, which are $2000, $2001, $2002, $2003, and $2004.
Numeric Entry element
Write Address $2000 $2001 $2002 $2003 $2004
Create a Constant element and set its Write Address as D2. This D2 address is for the Curve Control flag in the Control Block.
Set Constant element
Set the Detail.. of the Constant element to 1. 1 corresponds to Bit 0 Curve sampling flag 1; 2 corresponds to Bit 1 Curve sampling flag 2; 4 corresponds to Bit 2 Curve sampling flag 3, and so on. You will also find that the Sample Flag setting of the Trend Graph element is 1 as well.
November, 2018
14-3
Curve
14
Trend Graph
DOPSoft User Manual
Create another Constant element and set its Write Address as D2 as well, and the Detail.. as 256. 256 corresponds to Bit 8 Curve clear flag 1.
Set Constant element
14-4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Curve
Trend Graph After creating the elements, please compile and download the elements to the
HMI. Next, use the Numeric Entry element to enter any value, then press Draw to draw the curve.
14
Execution results After the curve is drawn, if you press Clear, the HMI will clear the drawn curve.
November, 2018
14-5
Curve
DOPSoft User Manual
When you double-click Trend Graph, the property page is shown as follows.
14
Figure 14.1.1 Properties of Trend Graph
Table 14.1.2 Function page of Trend Graph
Function page Preview
Main
Main-2 Coordinates
Trend Graph
Description
The Trend Graph elements do not support multiple status values and multi-language data display.
Set Address, Sample Number, Max Sample Number, Data Format, Sample Flag, Minimum, Maximum, Line Weight, Line Color, and Projection Axis. Set Border Color, Gridline Color, Horiz. Grid Number, Style and Background Color of the element, and Number of Curves.
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing.
Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
14-6
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main
(9) (1)
(10) (11) (12) (13)
(14) (6) (7) (8)
Curve
14
(2) (3) (4) (5)
Figure 14.1.2 Main property page for the Trend Graph element
November, 2018
14-7
Curve
DOPSoft User Manual
No. (1)
14
Property Address
Function description
You can select the internal memory or the controller register address. Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Chapter 5 Buttons for
details.
The number of sampling points is determined by the element width and style. When you set the Style of the Trend Graph element as Standard and its width as 391, then the maximum number of points that can be displayed is 391. But if you set the Style of the Trend Graph element as Raise or Sunken (border width is 7 points) and its width as 391, then the maximum number of points that can be displayed is 377 (391 - (7*2) = 377).
Sampling Number can be set as a constant or a variable. When you set Sample Number as a constant, Max Sample Number is grayed
out and cannot be set.
Sample
(2)
Number / Max Sample
Number
When you set Sample Number as a variable, you can define its Read Address. Also, you need to set the Max Sample Number, which the value is determined by the element width. If the set Sample Number is greater than the Max Sample Number, the software will refer to the setting of the Max Sample Number.
Sample
(2)
Number / Max Sample
Number
Trend Graph supports the following data formats: (3) Data Format
14-8
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Curve
No. Property
Function description
There are 4 sampling flags corresponding to the Curve sampling flags 1 - 4 in the Control Block respectively.
14
(4) Sample Flag
The allowable ranges for the minimum and maximum values vary based on the selected Data Type and Data Format.
Data Type
Data Format
Allowable range
(5)
Minimum / Maximum
BCD Signed BCD
0 - 9999 -999 - 9999
Word
Signed Decimal
-32768 to 32767
Unsigned Decimal
0 - 65535
Hex
0 - 0xFFFF
The line width setting ranges from 1 to 8.
(6) Line Weight
November, 2018
14-9
Curve
No. Property
Function description
You can set the line color for the curve.
14
(7) Line Color
DOPSoft User Manual
There are three types of Projection axis: No projection, X-axis projection, Y-axis projection.
When Projection Axis is set to No projection, the setting is the same as the default setting which only the curve is displayed.
Please see below for the details of X-axis projection and Y-axis projection. X-axis projection
(8)
Projection Axis
(1)
(2) (3)
(4)
14-10
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Curve
No. Property
Function description
(1) Set the Address to $100.
(2) Set the Sample Number to $600 and the Max Sample Number to 100.
(3) Set the Data Format to Unsigned Decimal and the Sample Flag to 1.
Set the Minimum as 100 and the Maximum as 1000. (4)
Set the Projection Axis to X-axis projection.
Please create Numeric Entry elements of $100 - $114 and set all the Data Format as Unsigned Decimal.
14
Please create a Numeric Entry element of $600 for inputting the Sample Number.
Go to [Options] > [Configuration] > [Control Command] and check [Curve Control] with the address as D1.
(8)
Projection Axis
Create a Numeric Entry element with the address as D1.
After completing the above steps, please compile and download the elements to the HMI.
November, 2018
14-11
Curve
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
14
Property
Function description
Enter any value to $100 - $114, input 15 to the Sample Number and 1 to the Sample Flag.
When you are done inputting the above values, the Trend Graph is as follows:
(8)
Projection
Axis
Y-axis projection
(1) (2)
(3) (4)
14-12
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Curve
No. Property
Function description
(1) Set the Address to $100.
(2) Set the Sample Number to $600 and the Max Sample Number to 100.
(3) Set the Data Format to Unsigned Decimal and the Sample Flag to 1.
Set the Minimum as 100 and the Maximum as 1000. (4)
Set the Projection Axis to Y-axis projection.
Please create Numeric Entry elements of $100 - $114 and set all the Data Format as Unsigned Decimal.
14
Please create a Numeric Entry element of $600 for inputting the Sample Number.
Go to [Options] > [Configuration] > [Control Command] and check
(8)
Projection Axis
[Curve Control] with the address as D1.
Create a Numeric Entry element with the address as D1.
November, 2018
14-13
Curve
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
14
Property
Function description
After completing the above steps, please compile and download the elements to the HMI.
Enter any value to $100 - $114, input 15 to the Sample Number and 1 to the Sample Flag.
(8)
Projection Axis
When you are done inputting the above values, the Trend Graph is as follows:
Note: when using the Projection Axis, if there are multiple curves at the same time, the larger curve number will cover the smaller curve number.
Set the Border Color of the Trend Graph element.
(9) Border Color
Border Color
14-14
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
The Gridline Color is the color of the grid line in the Trend Graph.
The default is
.
Curve
14
You can change the color of the grid line. (10) Gridline Color
Gridline Color
The maximum horizontal grid count is 50. Horiz. Grid Number is for separating the blocks in the Trend Graph element.
The default is 2, meaning there is one grid line separating the Trend Graph element into two blocks. If the Horiz. Grid Number is set to 3, there are two grid lines separating the Trend Graph element into 3 blocks, and so on.
1
(11)
Horiz. Grid Number
2
1 2
3
You can change the appearance of the element with this setting. There are four types of element styles:
(12)
Style
Standard
Raised
Sunken
Transparent
November, 2018
14-15
Curve
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
Set the background color of the element.
14
(13)
Background Color
Background Color
The Trend Graph element supports up to 12 curves.
(14)
Number of Curves
You can also change the width and color of the curves.
If you want to use 12 curves, you will only need to set the Read Address as a Continuous Address for sampling. Assuming the Read Address is $1000 and the Sample Number is 5, then, 60 sampling points are required for 12 curves. Thus, the Read Address is $1000 - $1059.
14-16
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Curve
(1)
14
(2)
(3)
Figure 14.1.3 Main-2 property page for the Trend Graph element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth The Smooth animation function is available for this element. When enabled, animation the curve motion is smoother.
(3)
Anti-aliasing
The Anti-aliasing function is available for this element. When enabled, the element display becomes more delicate without jagged edges.
November, 2018
14-17
Curve Coordinates
14
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 14.1.4 Coordinates property page for the Trend Graph element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2) Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
14-18
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Curve
14.2 X-Y Chart
X-Y Chart is drawn according to the set Horiz. Read Address and Vert. Read Address. You can also define the curve count to be displayed, and if X and Y points are connected. An X-Y Chart element supports up to 4 curves. This element requires using the Curve sampling flag from [Options] > [Configuration] > [Control Command] > [Control Block] > [Curve Control] to draw curves. The Curve sampling flags 1 - 4 correspond to the Sampling flags 1 - 4 of the X-Y Chart Graph element respectively.
Please refer to Table 14.2.1 for the X-Y Chart example.
14
November, 2018
14-19
Curve
14
Table 14.2.1 X-Y Chart example
X-Y Chart
Create an X-Y Chart element and set its parameters.
X-Y Chart element
Horiz. Read Address
$3000
Vert. Read Addtress
$4000
Sample Number
5
Sample Flag
1
Number of Curves
1
Connect Adjacent Points
Yes
DOPSoft User Manual
X-Y Chart element
Horiz. Minimum / Horiz. Maximum
Vert. Minimum / Vert. Maximum
Line Weight / Line Color
Numeric Entry element
Set Constant element
Create 5 Numeric Entry elements according to the Horiz. Read Address and Vert. Read Address. As it requires 5 sampling points to draw an X-Y Chart, the X-axis and Y-axis will each sample 5 points to draw the curve. Therefore, the set Horiz. Read Address $3000 of the X-Y Chart starts reading 5 addresses in sequence, which are $3000, $3001, $3002, $3003, and $3004; the Vert. Read Address $4000 starts reading 5 addresses in sequence, which are $4000, $4001, $4002, $4003, and $4004.
Numeric Entry element
Write Address $3000 $3001 $3002 $3003 $3004
Write Address $4000 $4001 $4002 $4003 $4004
Create a Constant element and set its Write Address as D2. This D2 address is for the Curve Control flag in the Control Block.
14-20
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Curve
X-Y Chart
Set the Detail.. of the Constant element to 1. 1 corresponds to Bit 0 Curve sampling flag 1; 2 corresponds to Bit 1 Curve sampling flag 2; 4 corresponds to Bit 2 Curve sampling flag 3, and so on. You will also find that the Sample Flag setting of the X-Y Chart element is 1 as well.
14
Set Constant element
Create another Constant element and set its Write Address as D2 as well, and the Detail.. as 256. 256 corresponds to Bit 8 Curve clear flag 1.
November, 2018
14-21
Curve
14
Set Constant element
X-Y Chart
DOPSoft User Manual
After creating the elements, please compile and download the elements to the HMI. Next, use the Numeric Entry element to enter any value for the X-axis and Y-axis, then press Draw, and the X-Y Chart will draw the curve according to the input values.
Execution results If you press Clear, the HMI will clear the drawn X-Y curve.
14-22
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual When you double-click X-Y Chart, the property page is shown as follows.
Curve
14
Figure 14.2.1 Properties of X-Y Chart
Table 14.2.2 Function page of X-Y Chart
X-Y Chart
Function page
Description
Preview
The X-Y Chart elements do not support multiple status values and multi-language data display.
Main
Set Horiz. Read Address, Vert. Read Address, Sample Number, Max Sample Number, Data Format, Sample Flag, Horiz. Minimum, Horiz. Maximum, Vert. Minimum, Vert. Maximum, Line Weight, Line Color, and Projection Axis.
Set Border Color, Gridline Color, Horiz. Line Number, Vert. Line Number, Connect Adjacent Points, Style and Background Color of the element, and Number of Curves.
Main-2
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing.
Coordinates Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
November, 2018
14-23
Curve Main
14
(10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
(16)
(8) (9)
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
Figure 14.2.2 Main property page for the X-Y Chart element
14-24
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Curve
No.
Property
Function description
The number of sampling points is determined by the element width / height and style. When you set the Style of the X-Y Chart element as Standard, its width as 363 and height as 231, then the maximum number of points that can be displayed is 231 (based on the minimum value of element width and height). But if you set the Style of the X-Y Chart element as Raise or Sunken (border width is 7 points) and its width and height as 231, then the maximum number of points that can be displayed is 217 (231 (7*2) = 217).
When you set Sample Number as a constant, Max Sample Number is grayed out and cannot be set.
14
Sample
(1)
Number / Max Sample
Number
When you set Sample Number as a variable, you can define its Read Address. Also, you need to set the Max Sample Number, which the value is determined by the element width. If the set Sample Number is greater than the Max Sample Number, the software will refer to the setting of the Max Sample Number.
X-Y Chart supports the following data formats: (2) Data Format
Horiz. Read Address
Horiz. Read Address represents the X-axis and Vert. Read Address represents the Y-axis.
(3)
You can select the internal memory or the controller register address for both Horiz. Read Address and Vert. Read Address.
Vert. Read Address
Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Chapter 5 Buttons for details.
November, 2018
14-25
Curve
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
14
Property
Function description
There are 4 sampling flags corresponding to the Curve sampling flags 1 - 4 in the Control Block respectively.
(4) Sample Flag
The allowable ranges for the minimum and maximum values vary based on the selected Data Type and Data Format.
Horiz.
(5)
Minimum / Horiz.
Maximum
Data Type Word
Data Format BCD
Signed BCD Signed Decimal
Allowable range 0 to 9999
-999 to 9999 -32768 to 32767
Unsigned Decimal
0 to 65535
Hex
0 to 0xFFFF
The allowable ranges for the minimum and maximum values vary based on the selected Data Type and Data Format.
Data Type
Data Format
Allowable range
Vert. Minimum
(6)
/ Vert.
Maximum
Word
BCD Signed BCD Signed Decimal
0 to 9999 -999 to 9999 -32768 to 32767
Unsigned Decimal
0 to 65535
Hex
0 to 0xFFFF
The line width setting ranges from 1 to 8.
(7) Line Weight
14-26
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
You can set the line color for the curve.
(8)
Line Color
Curve
14
There are three types of Projection axis: No projection, X-axis projection, Y-axis projection.
When Projection Axis is set to No projection, the setting is the same as the
(9) Projection Axis
default setting which only the curve is displayed.
November, 2018
14-27
Curve
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
14
Property
Function Description Please see below for the details of X-axis projection and Y-axis projection. X-axis projection
(1)
(2)
(3)
(9)
Projection Axis
(1) Set the Sample Number to 5.
Set the Horiz. Read Address to $100. (2) Set the Vert. Read Address to $110.
Set the Data Format to Unsigned Decimal and the Sample Flag to 1.
Set the Horiz. Minimum to 100 and Horiz. Maximum to 1000. (3) Set the Horiz. Minimum to 100 and Horiz. Maximum to 1000.
Set the Projection Axis to X-axis projection. Please create Numeric Entry elements of $100 - $104 and $110 - $114,
and set all the Data Format as Unsigned Decimal.
14-28
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function Description
Go to [Options] > [Configuration] > [Control Command] and check [Curve Control] with the address as D1.
Curve
14
Create a Numeric Entry element with the address as D1.
(9)
Projection Axis
After completing the above steps, please compile and download the elements to the HMI.
Enter any value to $100 - $104 and $110 - $114, and input 1 to the Sample Flag.
When you are done inputting the above values, the X-Y Chart is as follows:
November, 2018
14-29
Curve
No.
Property
Y-axis projection
14
Function Description
(2)
DOPSoft User Manual (1)
(3)
(1) Set the Sample Number to 5.
(9)
Projection Axis
Set the Horiz. Read Address to $100. (2) Set the Vert. Read Address to $110.
Set the Data Format to Unsigned Decimal and the Sample Flag to 1.
Set the Horiz. Minimum to 100 and Horiz. Maximum to 1000. (3) Set the Vert. Minimum to 100 and Vert. Maximum to 1000.
Set the Projection Axis to Y-axis projection.
Please create Numeric Entry elements of $100 - $104 and $110 - $114, and set all the Data Format as Unsigned Decimal.
Go to [Options] > [Configuration] > [Control Command] and check [Curve Control] with the address as D1.
14-30
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function Description
Create a Numeric Entry element with the address as D1.
Curve
14
After completing the above steps, please compile and download the elements to the HMI.
Enter any value to $100 - $104 and $110 - $114, and input 1 to the Sample Flag.
When you are done inputting the above values, the X-Y Chart is as follows:
(9) Projection Axis
Set the Border Color of the X-Y Chart element.
(10) Border Color
Border Color
November, 2018
14-31
Curve
DOPSoft User Manual
14
No.
Property
Function Description
The Gridline Color is the color of the grid line in the X-Y Chart.
The default is
.
You can change the color of the grid line.
(11) Gridline Color
Gridline Color
Both Horiz. Line Number and Vert. Line Number support a maximum of 99 lines.
Horiz. Line Number refers to the number of lines on the X-axis and Vert. Line Number refers to the number of lines on the Y-axis. The default is 1.
Horiz. Line (12) Number / Vert.
Line Number
Horizontal line
Vertical line
You can select Yes or No for Connect Adjacent Points. If you select Yes, the X-coordinate and Y-coordinate will form a curve.
Connect
(13)
Adjacent
Points
If you select No, the chart displays the coordinate points of X-axis and
Y-axis.
14-32
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function Description
You can change the appearance of the element with this setting. There are four types of element styles:
(14)
Style
Standard
Raised
Sunken
Transparent
Set the background color of the element.
Background Color
(15)
Background Color
Curve
14
The X-Y Chart element supports up to 4 curves.
You can also change the width and color of the curves.
(16)
Number of Curves
If you want to use 4 curves, you will only need to set the Horiz. Read Address and Vert. Read Address as Continuous Address for sampling. Assuming the Horiz. Read Address is $3000, Vert. Read Address is $4000, and the Sample Number is 5, then 40 sampling points are required for 4 curves (20 each for horizontal and vertical). Thus, the Read Address is $3000 - $3019 and $4000 - $4019.
November, 2018
14-33
Curve Main-2
14
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 14.2.3 Main-2 property page for the X-Y Chart element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth The Smooth animation function is available for this element. When enabled, animation the curve motion is smoother.
(3)
Anti-aliasing
The Anti-aliasing function is available for this element. When enabled, the element display becomes more delicate without jagged edges.
14-34
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Coordinates
Curve
14 (1)
(2)
Figure 14.2.4 Coordinates property page for the X-Y Chart element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
November, 2018
14-35
Curve
DOPSoft User Manual
14.3 X-Y Distribution
14
X-Y Distribution allows users to set a Read Address as a Continuous Address which can continuously sample points on the X-axis and Y-axis with no maximum on the number of sampling points. Although X-Y Chart also uses Continuous Addresses, its number of sampling points is determined by the type, width, and height of the element. When Continuous Address is not checked, you can still set the Read Addresses for both X and Y, and you can also define the Color and Connection as the Read Address or a Constant. On the contrary, if Continuous Address is checked, both X and Y can only be set as continuous addresses, and the Color and Connection will be automatically set as the subsequent addresses of X and Y. In this case, when you want to change the addresses, you will be unable to do so; you can only reset them to constants.
An X-Y Distribution element can sample a maximum of 4 points. The main difference between the X-Y Distribution element and the Trend Graph and X-Y Chart elements is that it does not require to draw curves with the Curve sampling flag from [Options] > [Configuration] > [Control Command] > [Control Block] > [Curve Control], instead it has its own Control flags. Bit 0 is for sampling and Bit 1 is for clearing.
Please refer to Table 14.3.1 for the X-Y Distribution example.
14-36
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 14.3.1 X-Y Distribution example X-Y Distribution
Create an X-Y Distribution element and set its parameters. X-Y Distribution element
Control
Continuous Address
Sample Number
2
Curve
14
X-Y Distribution element
Sampling setting
As the number of samples is 2, there will be two sets of settings (Sample 0 and
Sample 1).
Create Numeric Entry elements of $20 - $23 as the X, Y, color, and Connection of
Sample 0.
Numeric Entry Create Numeric Entry elements of $30 - $33 as the X, Y, color, and Connection of
element
Sample 1.
Sample Number
X
Y
Color
Connection
Sample 0
$20
$21
$22
$23
Sample 1
$30
$31
$32
$33
November, 2018
14-37
Curve
DOPSoft User Manual
14
X-Y Distribution
Create a Maintained button and set its Write Address as $8.0, meaning the sampling starts when Bit 0 is on.
Set Constant element
Next, create another Maintained button and set its Write Address as $8.1, meaning clearing starts when Bit 1 is on.
After creating the elements, please compile and download the elements to the HMI. Next, use the Numeric Entry element to enter any value for the X-axis and Y-axis, then the X-Y Distribution will draw the curve according to the input values.
For the first input, two points are drawn for the entered values.
Sample 0
Execution results
Sample 1 For the second input, $23 and $33 are both set to 1, so the lines connect the dots.
14-38
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual When you double-click X-Y Distribution, the property page is shown as follows.
Curve
14
Figure 14.3.1 Properties of X-Y Distribution
Table 14.3.2 Function page of X-Y Distribution
Function page Preview
Main
Main-2 Coordinates
X-Y Distribution
Description
The X-Y Distribution elements do not support multiple status values and multi-language data display.
Set Control address, Auto clear after sampling, Continuous Address, X, Y, Color, and Connection addresses for sampling, Sample Number, X Min., X Max., Y Min., and Y Max. Set Border Color, Gridline Color, Horiz. Line Number, Vert. Line Number, Style and Background Color of the element, Line Weight, and Dot Size.
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing.
Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
November, 2018
14-39
Curve Main
14
(8) (9) (10)
(11) (12) (13) (14)
(15)
DOPSoft User Manual
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(5)
(7)
(16)
Figure 14.3.2 Main property page for the X-Y Distribution element
No. Property
Function description
Control address is the independent Curve Control flag of the X-Y Distribution. You do not need to sample data with the Curve Control flags in the Control Block. You can select the internal memory or the controller address for this Control address.
Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Chapter 5 Buttons for details.
Trigger Bit 0 to draw the sampling points and trigger Bit 1 to clear the sampling points.
The Curve Control flag draws only one point per trigger. To draw the second
(1)
Control
point, you need to set this flag to off and trigger it again. You can check
Auto clear to have the HMI automatically clear the flag.
14-40
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Curve
No. Property
Function description
If Continuous Address is checked, when you set the address of X, the addresses of Y, Color and Connection will be set as the subsequent addresses
of X. For example, if the X address is $1000, then the addresses of Y, Color,
and Connection will be the subsequent addresses of $1001 - $1003. If you
(2)
Continuous Address
need to change the Read Addresses of X and Y, you can only change the setting of the X address. Also, you will not be able to change the Read Address of the Color or Connection; you can only set it as a constant.
If Continuous Address is not checked, the addresses of X, Y, Color, and
Connection are discontinuous, and you can define each Read Address
according to the requirement. You can also set the Color and Connection as
Read Addresses or constants.
You can select the internal memory or the controller register address for the
(3)
X
X coordinate. Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Chapter 5 Buttons for
details.
You can select the internal memory or the controller register address for the
(4)
Y
Y coordinate. Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Chapter 5 Buttons for
details.
You can select the internal memory, controller register address, or constant for the Color coordinate.
Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Chapter 5 Buttons for details.
To use Constant for setting the color, you can press Color and select the color for the sampling point.
14
(5)
Color
You can also use Address/Value to input the value ranging from 0 to 65535.
November, 2018
14-41
Curve
DOPSoft User Manual
14
No. Property
Function description
You can select the internal memory, controller register address, or constant for the Connection.
Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Chapter 5 Buttons for
(6) Connection
details.
The setting of Connection is to determine if the sampling point connects with
the previous sampling point to form a curve. Set Constant as 1 to connect and set Constant as 2 for no connection.
The allowable ranges for the X / Y Min. and X / Y Max. values are subject to change based on the selected Data Type and Data Format.
X Min. /
(7)
X Max. / Y Min. /
Y Max.
Data Type Word
Data Format BCD
Signed BCD Signed Decimal
Allowable range 0 to 9999
-999 to 9999 -32768 to 32767
Unsigned Decimal
0 to 65535
Hex
0 to 0xFFFF
Set the Border Color of the X-Y Distribution element.
(8) Border Color
Border Color
The Gridline Color is the color of the grid line in the X-Y Distribution.
The default is
.
You can change the color of the grid line.
(9) Gridline Color
Gridline Color
14-42
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Curve
No. Property
Function description
Both Horiz. Line Number and Vert. Line Number support a maximum of 99 lines.
Horiz. Line Number refers to the number of lines on the X-axis and Vert. Line Number refers to the number of lines on the Y-axis. The default is 1.
Horiz. Line
(10)
Number / Vert. Line
Number
Horizontal line
14
Vertical line
You can change the appearance of the element with this setting. There are three types of element styles:
(11)
Style
Standard Raised
Sunken
Set the background color of the element.
(12)
Background Color
Background Color
The X-Y Distribution element supports up to 4 sets of samples.
To use 4 sets of samples, you only need to set the X and Y Read Addresses of Sample 0, Sample 1, Sample 2, and Sample 3 for sampling.
(13)
Sample Number
November, 2018
14-43
Curve
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
The line width setting ranges from 1 to 8. This setting is only valid when the Constant of Connection is set 1 with the line displaying.
14
Connection Constant = 1
(14) Line Weight
Connection Constant = 0
The Dot Size setting ranges from 1 to 8. When it is set to 5, the dot size is as follows.
(15) Dot Size
If you check this function, it means that X-Y Distribution can also execute
Executed in sampling when on other screens. For example, assume that Screen 1 has a set
background X-Y Distribution and Screen 2 doesn't. When you check this function, if sampling
(16) (if not the is executing on Screen 2, but you switch the screen back to Screen 1, X-Y
current Distribution will continue to finish the sampling.
screen)
Note: if you did not check Auto clear, be sure to set the Sample Flag to off after sampling on
other screens is completed.
14-44
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Curve
(1)
14
(2)
(3)
Figure 14.3.3 Main-2 property page for the X-Y Distribution element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3)
Anti-aliasing
The Anti-aliasing function is available for this element. When enabled, the element display becomes more delicate without jagged edges.
November, 2018
14-45
Curve Coordinates
14
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 14.3.4 Coordinates property page for the X-Y Distribution element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
14-46
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Curve
14.4 Curve Input
Curve Input draws curves according to the continuous sampling by the set Read Address. You can also press the Curve Input element to move the curve to the required position. Curve Input provides two Curve Style options with different effects: Broken line and Block graphs.
Please refer to Table 14.4.1 for the Curve Input example.
14
Table 14.4.1 Curve Input example
Curve Input
Create a Curve Input element and set its parameters.
Curve Input element
Address
$1058
Sample Number
3
Curve Style
Broken line
Curve Input element
Minimum / Maximum
Line Weight / Line Color
Numeric Entry element
Create 3 Numeric Entry elements, as the Sample Number of the Curve Input is set to 3, meaning 3 sampling points are used to draw a curve. Then, the set Read Address $1058 of the Curve Input starts reading 3 addresses in sequence, which are $1058, $1059, and $1060
Numeric Entry element
Write Address
$1058
$1059
$1060
After creating the elements, please compile and download the elements to the HMI. Next, use the Numeric Entry element to enter any value, then the Curve Input will draw the curve according to the input values. You can also press the Curve Input element to move the curve to the required position.
Execution results
November, 2018
14-47
Curve
DOPSoft User Manual
When you double-click Curve Input, the property page is shown as follows.
14
Figure 14.4.1 Properties of Curve Input
Table 14.4.2 Function page of Curve Input
Function page Preview
Main
Main-2 Coordinates
Curve Input
Description
Curve Input elements do not support multiple status values and multi-language data display.
Set Address, Sample Number, Data Format, Sample Flag, Minimum, Maximum, Line Weight, and Line Color. Set Border Color, Gridline Color, Curve Style, Grid Line, Style and Background Color of the element, and Horiz. Grid Number.
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing.
Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
14-48
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main
(7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
(13)
(1)
(5) (6)
Curve
14
(2) (3) (4)
Figure 14.4.2 Main property page for the Curve Input element
No. Property
Function description
You can select the internal memory or the controller register address.
(1)
Address Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Chapter 5 Buttons for
details.
The set value of sampling points must be a constant.
The number of sampling points is determined by the element width and style.
(2)
Sample Number
When you set the Style of the Curve Input element as Standard and its width as 167, then the maximum number of points that can be displayed is 167. But if you set the Style of the Curve Input element as Raise or Sunken
(border width is 7 points) and its width as 167, then the maximum number of
points that can be displayed is 153 (167 - (7*2) = 153).
Curve Input supports the following data formats:
(3) Data Format
November, 2018
14-49
Curve
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
The allowable ranges for the minimum and maximum values are subject to change based on the selected Data Type and Data Format.
14
(4)
Minimum / Maximum
Data Type Word
Data Format BCD
Signed BCD Signed Decimal
Allowable range 0 to 9999
-999 to 9999 -32768 to 32767
Unsigned Decimal
0 to 65535
Hex
0 to 0xFFFF
The line width setting ranges from 1 to 8.
(5) Line Weight
You can set the line color for the curve.
(6) Line Color
Set the Border Color of the Curve Input element.
(7) Border Color
Border Color
14-50
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
The Gridline Color is the color of the grid line in the Curve Input.
The default is
.
You can change the color of the grid line.
(8) Gridline Color
Gridline Color
Curve
14
There are two Curve Style options: Broken line and Block graphs.
Broken line
Block graphs
(9) Curve Style
You can select Yes or No for Grid Line.
Yes
No
(10) Grid Line
You can change the appearance of the element with this setting. There are three types of element styles:
Standard
Raised
Sunken
(11)
Style
Set the background color of the element.
(12)
Background Color
Background Color
November, 2018
14-51
Curve
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
14
The maximum horizontal grid count is 50.
Horiz. Grid Number is for separating the blocks in the Curve Input element. The default is 2, meaning there is one grid line separating the Curve Input element into two blocks. If the Horiz. Grid Number is set to 3, there are two grid lines separating the Curve Input element into 3 blocks, and so on.
1
2
(13)
Horiz. Grid Number
1 2
3
14-52
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Curve
(1)
14
(2)
(3)
Figure 14.4.3 Main-2 property page for the Curve Input element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth The Smooth animation function is available for this element. When enabled, animation the curve motion is smoother.
(3)
Anti-aliasing
Use the anti-aliasing function for this element. When enabled, the element display becomes more delicate without jagged edges.
November, 2018
14-53
Curve Coordinates
14
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 14.4.4 Coordinates property page for the Curve Input element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2) Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
14-54
November, 2018
Sampling
This chapter introduces the sampling function of the history data and provides the usage and setting details.
15.1 History Buffer �������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 15-2 15.2 Historical Trend Graph �������������������������������������������������������������������15-40 15.3 Historical Data Table ����������������������������������������������������������������������15-62 15.4 Historical Event Table���������������������������������������������������������������������15-78 15.5 Historical Overview Table����������������������������������������������������������������15-90 15.6 Operation Log Table �������������������������������������������������������������������� 15-113
November, 2018
15-1
Sampling
DOPSoft User Manual
15.1 History Buffer
15
Before introducing the elements relevant to the sampling function, this chapter will first explain how to use the functions in the History Buffer Setup. The History Buffer Setup is mainly used to define the relevant properties when setting the sampling function elements, such as read address, length of the data type, sampling points, trigger source, whether to record the time and date, whether to store the data in an external device or export as a CSV file, etc.
The formula provided by the software computes all the History Buffer relevant data edited by the users. Then, the set non-volatile memory saves these computation results. If the data is saved in the HMI, the History Buffer size is subject to change based on the HMI model. Please refer to the specifications for non-volatile memory in the HMI installation manual. For data saved in the USB Disk or SD Card, the History Buffer size is determined by the external storage devices.
When you download the history data to the HMI, two log files are generated: DAT and CSV.
1. DAT file formulas Each history data is stored as a Hxxxx.dat file. xxxx indicates the sequence number of the history data record. Each .dat file uses the file size below.
6 Bytes(a) 2 Bytes(b) N(c) Actual file size MBytes
10241024
a: time / date data b: data type c: sample number
Additional history data will occupy the file header.
8Bytes(a) N(b) Actual filesize Bytes
a: file header of each history data b: sample number
2. CSV file formulas The CSV file calculation method is by dynamic configuration, which is calculated based on each character counted as 2 bytes. Each item must be separated by a comma (,) and the comma is also 2 bytes. At the end of each row, a total of 4 bytes for the newline command, 0x0D and 0x0A, is also included. The following describes how to calculate the CSV file size.
15-2
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Title
Sampling
15
Here are two examples of how to calculate the data size of the title:
1. Each character is counted as 2 bytes (characters*2 bytes)
File header
Time column setting
Separator
Date column setting
Separator
Time
Date
2 bytes
8 bytes
2 bytes
8 bytes Total 36 bytes
2 bytes
Data column setting
Data1
10 bytes
Newline command
4 bytes
2. Each character is counted as 2 bytes (characters*2 bytes)
File header
Time column setting
Time
Separator
Date column setting
Date
Separator
Data column setting
Data1
2 bytes
8 bytes
2 bytes
8 bytes
2 bytes 10 bytes
Total 46 bytes
Data column setting
Data2
10 bytes
Newline command
4 bytes
November, 2018
15-3
Sampling Field column
15
DOPSoft User Manual
Data fields
CSV field supports up to 10 columns and 10 rows. Each data field supports up to 128 bytes and each character counts as 2 bytes.
Each character is counted as 2 bytes (characters*2 bytes). Column*row = 2*2.
A1 setting 123
6 bytes
Separator 2 bytes
B1 setting Delta
10 bytes
Separator A2 setting
abc
2 bytes
6 bytes
Total 38 bytes
Separator 2 bytes
B2 setting QWE 6 bytes
Newline command
4 bytes
15-4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Data row
Sampling
15
November, 2018
15-5
Sampling
DOPSoft User Manual
Here are three examples of how to calculate the data size of the data row:
15
1. Each character is counted as 2 bytes (characters*2 bytes)
Time Format setting
Separator
Date Format setting
Separator
Integer digits setting
hh:mm:ss
mm/dd/yyyy
5
16 bytes
2 bytes
20 bytes
2 bytes
10 bytes
Total 54 bytes
Fractional digits setting
0
0 bytes
Newline command
4 bytes
2. Each character is counted as 2 bytes (characters*2 bytes)
Time Format setting
Separator
Date Format setting
Separator
Integer digits setting
hh:mm
mm.dd
4
10 bytes
2 bytes
10 bytes
2 bytes
8 bytes
Total 38 bytes
Fractional digits setting
1
2 bytes
Newline command
4 bytes
3. Each character is counted as 2 bytes (characters*2 bytes)
Time Format Separator setting
N/A 0 bytes
2 bytes
Date Format setting
N/A 0 bytes
Data 1
Separator Integer Fractional
digits
digits
setting setting
4
1
2 bytes 8 bytes 2 bytes
Total 28 bytes
Data 2
Integer Fractional
digits
digits
setting setting
3
2
6 bytes 4 bytes
Newline command
4 bytes
Each data size of the above data row must multiply by the Sample Number N(a).
Therefore, Title + Field column + Data row*Sample Number N(a) is the CSV file size exported by History.
The formula is as follows: Title data size Bytes Field column size Bytes Data row size Bytes N(a) Actual filesize MBytes
10241024 a: Sample Number
This chapter will introduce all element examples that the sampling function uses, including History Buffer Setup, Historical Trend Graph, Historical Data Table, and Historical Event Table.
Please refer to Table 15.1.1 for the History Buffer Setup example.
15-6
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Sampling
Table 15.1.1 History Buffer Setup example
History Buffer Setup Step 1: go to [Options] > [History Buffer Setup] to set up the properties of the history data.
15
History Buffer Setup steps
Step 2: press
to add data to the History Buffer.
November, 2018
15-7
Sampling
15
History Buffer Setup Step 3: please set the buffer properties as follows.
DOPSoft User Manual
History Buffer Setup steps
You can set the name for the CSV column header.
Step 4: after the above setting is complete, you can see a new row for the set data is created in the History Buffer.
15-8
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Sampling
History Buffer Setup
Step 5: create a Historical Trend Graph element and set the properties, such as the display for the time and date, displaying integer and fractional digits, and whether or not to use the Global range. Then, go to the Details page to set Curve 1 to 1 to enable the reading of this data.
15
History Buffer Setup steps
November, 2018
15-9
Sampling
15
DOPSoft User Manual
History Buffer Setup Step 6: go to [Options] > [Clock Macro] and edit the macro command to allow auto increment of $0.
History Buffer Setup steps
Step 7: create a Remove Storage button and select USB Disk for the Save in setting. This ensures that the data is correctly written to the USB Disk. If you do not safely eject the USB Disk before removing it, this may cause data read and write errors leading to the corruption of the saved file.
After completing the setting for the History Buffer Setup and Historical Trend Graph and creating the Remove Storage element, please compile and download the elements to the HMI. The non-volatile memory setting in this example is the USB Disk, so when the HMI reads the screen, the data of H.had and Delta.dat will be generated and stored in the USB Disk. Then, the History Buffer will execute the command in the Clock Macro to change the data, and continue to store the data in the CSV file to the USB Disk. To stop saving the data, press Remove Storage button to remove the external device for ensuring the data is saved correctly.
Execution results
Press Remove Storage button and the following message appears to inform users that the USB Disk is removed.
15-10
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Sampling
History Buffer Setup
You can insert the USB Disk to the PC to read the CSV file and make sure that the data and file name are correct. The file name in this example is Delta and the path to save all CSV files is HMI\HMI-000\CSV\History\xxxxx.CSV.
15
Execution results
Please refer to Table 15.1.2 for the Historical Trend Graph example.
November, 2018
15-11
Sampling
15
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 15.1.2 Historical Trend Graph example Historical Trend Graph
Step 1: double-click the Historical Trend Graph element and press History Buffer Setup to set the parameters.
Create Historical Trend Graph element
Step 2: press
to add new history data.
15-12
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Sampling
Historical Trend Graph
Step 3: set Address to $3765, Read Length (Word) to 2, Sample Number to 100, and check Stamp Time and Date. Use the default H0001 as the File Name, select USB Disk as the Non-volatile memory, check Export CSV File, and set the Field Name. Then, select Timer for Trigger.
15
Create Historical Trend Graph element
You can set the name for the CSV column header.
Step 4: after the above setting is complete, you can see a new row for the set data is created in the History Buffer.
November, 2018
15-13
Sampling
15
Historical Trend Graph Step 5: follow the figure below to set the Historical Trend Graph.
DOPSoft User Manual
Create Historical Trend Graph element
Go to the Details page to set the Enable field as 1 to enable the data reading of the curves, and set the Start Positions of the data for Curve 1 and Curve 2 to 0 and 1 respectively.
15-14
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Sampling
Historical Trend Graph
Since Global range is checked, you will not be able to set the Data Format, Integer Digits, Fractional Digits, and Minimum / Maximum values for each curve.
15
Create Historical Trend Graph element
Step 6: go to [Options] > [Clock Macro] to edit the macro program to change the data in the History Buffer, and save the data in the USB Disk. Since the Read Length is set to read two words, there will be two data locations available for access. Thus, in addition to the originally set $3765 read address, there will be a $3766 data address in the macro as well.
Step 7: create a Remove Storage button and select USB Disk for the Save in setting. This ensures that the data is correctly written to the USB Disk. If you do not safely eject the USB Disk before removing it, this may cause data read and write errors leading to the corruption of the saved file.
November, 2018
15-15
Sampling
15
DOPSoft User Manual
Historical Trend Graph After completing the setting for the History Buffer and creating the Remove Storage
element, please compile and download the elements to the HMI. The non-volatile memory setting in this example is the USB Disk, so when the HMI reads the screen, the data of H.had and H0001.dat will be generated and stored in the USB Disk. Then, the History Buffer will execute the command in the Clock Macro to change the data, and continue to store the data in the CSV file to the USB Disk. To stop saving the data, press Remove Storage button to remove the external device for ensuring the data is saved correctly.
Execution results
Press Remove Storage button and the following message appears to inform users that the USB Disk is removed.
15-16
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Sampling
Historical Trend Graph
You can insert the USB Disk to the PC to read the CSV file and make sure that the data and file name are correct. The file name in this example is H0001 and the path to save all CSV files is HMI\HMI-000\CSV\ with the file name and file extension of .CSV.
15
Execution results
Please refer to Table 15.1.3 for the Historical Data Table example.
November, 2018
15-17
Sampling
15
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 15.1.3 Historical Data Table example
Historical Data Table Historical Data Table should be used with Historical Trend Graph, so you may also refer to Table 15.1.2 Historical Trend Graph example. Use the created Historical Trend Graph and then execute the following setup procedures. Step 1: double-click the Historical Data Table element and press History Buffer Setup, then you can see the data created in the Historical Trend Graph example in Table 15.1.2.
Create Historical Data Table element
Step 2: set Column Counts to 2 (corresponding to the set Read Length of 2 words in the History Buffer). When Column Counts is 2, you will need to set the relevant parameters for Data 1 and Data 2. Set the Start Positions of the data for Data 1 and Data 2 to 0 and 1 respectively, set the displaying color for the values, and check Time Format and Date Format to display the time and date.
15-18
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Historical Data Table
Sampling
15
Step 3: the created Historical Data Table is as shown below.
Create Historical Data Table element
Step 4: go to [Options] > [Clock Macro] to edit the macro program to change the data in the History Buffer, and save the data in the USB Disk. Since the Read Length is set to read two words and the Column Counts is also 2, the Historical Data Table will display two columns to read two data locations.
November, 2018
15-19
Sampling
DOPSoft User Manual
15
Historical Data Table
Step 5: create a Remove Storage button and select USB Disk for the Save in setting. This ensures that the data is correctly written to the USB Disk. If you do not safely eject the USB Disk before removing it, this may cause data read and write errors leading to the corruption of the saved file.
Create Historical Data Table element
After completing the setting for the History Buffer and creating the Remove Storage element, please compile and download the elements to the HMI. The non-volatile memory setting in this example is the USB Disk, so when the HMI reads the screen, the data of H.had and H0001.dat will be generated and stored in the USB Disk. Then, the History Buffer will execute the command in the Clock Macro to change the data, and continue to store the data in the CSV file to the USB Disk. To stop saving the data, press Remove Storage button to remove the external device for ensuring the data is saved correctly.
Execution results
Press Remove Storage button and the following message appears to inform users that the USB Disk is removed.
Please refer to Table 15.1.4 for the Historical Event Table example.
15-20
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Sampling
Table 15.1.4 Historical Event Table example
Historical Event Table Step 1: double-click the Historical Event Table element and press History Buffer Setup to create a new buffer. Set Address to $1, Read Length (Word) to 1, and select HMI as the Non-volatile memory.
15
Create Historical Event Table element
November, 2018
15-21
Sampling
15
DOPSoft User Manual
Historical Event Table Step 2: set Buffer ID to 2 (corresponding to No. 2 in the History Buffer), Data Type to Word, State Counts to 16, and check Time Format and Date Format to display the time and date.
Create Historical Event Table element
Step 3: go to the Text page to edit the text message you want to display.
15-22
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Sampling
Historical Event Table Step 4: go to [Options] >[Clock Macro] to edit the macro program to change the data in the History Buffer, and display the user-defined text message in the Historical Event Table.
Create Historical Event Table element
15
After creating the Historical Event Table elements, please compile and download the elements to the HMI. Then, the Historical Event Table will execute the command in the Clock Macro to change the data and display the user-defined text message in this element.
Execution results
November, 2018
15-23
Sampling
15
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 15.1.5 Historical Overview Table example
Historical Overview Table Historical Overview Table should be used with Historical Trend Graph, so you may also refer to Table 15.1.2 Historical Trend Graph example. Use the created Historical Trend Graph and then execute the following setup procedures. Step 1: double-click the Historical Overview Table element and press History Buffer Setup, then you can see the data created in the Historical Trend Graph example in Table 15.1.2.
Create Historical Overview Table element
Step 2: press to modify the History Buffer setting, check Save As Multi, and set Saving trigger to $100.0.
15-24
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Sampling
Historical Overview Table
Step 3: complete the other settings for the Historical Trend Graph element, such as the display for the time and date, displaying integer and fractional digits, and check Global range. Also, go to the Details page to set the Enable field as 1 to enable the data reading of the curves. Since Global range is checked, you will not be able to set the Minimum / Maximum values for each curve.
15
Create Historical Overview Table element
Go to the Details page to set the Enable field as 1 to enable the data reading of the curves, and set the Start Positions of the data for Curve 1 and Curve 2 to 0 and 1 respectively.
November, 2018
15-25
Sampling
15
DOPSoft User Manual
Historical Overview Table Step 4: go to the Function Buttons page and check the Function Buttons you want to display, then press Set As Default Description.
Create Historical Overview Table element
When the setting is complete, the Historical Overview Table is as follows.
15-26
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Sampling
Historical Overview Table
Step 5: go to [Options] > [Clock Macro] to edit the macro program to change the data in the History Buffer, and save the data in the USB Disk. Since the Read Length is set to two words, there will be two data locations available for access. Thus, in addition to the originally set $3765 read address, there will be a $3766 data address in the macro as well.
15
Create Historical Overview Table element
Step 6: create a Momentary button and set its address as $100.0. Execute this button to immediately save the data of the History Buffer without having to wait for the Sample Number to be full.
Step 7: create a Remove Storage button and select USB Disk for the Save in setting. This ensures that the data is correctly written to the USB Disk. If you do not safely eject the USB Disk before removing it, this may cause data read and write errors leading to the corruption of the saved file.
November, 2018
15-27
Sampling
15
DOPSoft User Manual
Historical Overview Table After completing the setting for the History Buffer, Historical Overview Table, and
creating the Remove Storage element, please compile and download the elements to the HMI. The non-volatile memory setting in this example is the USB Disk, so when the HMI reads the screen, the data of H.had and H0001.dat will be generated and stored in the USB Disk. Then, the History Buffer will execute the command in the Clock Macro to change the data, and continue to store the data in the CSV file to the USB Disk. To stop saving the data, press Remove Storage button to remove the external device for ensuring the data is saved correctly.
Execution results
Press Remove Storage button and the following message appears to inform users that the USB Disk is removed.
15-28
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Sampling
Historical Overview Table
When the Sample Number is reached or the Saving trigger element is triggered, the file will be stored in the HMI\HMI-000\History folder under the USB directory according to the Save As Multi setting, and a new file will be created to continue sampling. You can view the saved files with the Historical Overview Table.
15
Execution results
Pressing Saving Trigger will immediately save the current History Buffer data.
November, 2018
15-29
Sampling
15
DOPSoft User Manual
Historical Overview Table In the file browser on the left side of the Historical Overview Table, press USB and
select the previously saved file, then press Display to see the stored Historical Trend Graph on the right side.
Execution results
Step 1
Step 2
After introducing all the examples for the sampling functions, the following table illustrates the detailed function descriptions of the History Buffer Setup properties.
15-30
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 15.1.6 Property descriptions for History Buffer Setup Property descriptions for History Buffer Setup
Sampling
15
November, 2018
15-31
Sampling
15
DOPSoft User Manual
Property descriptions for History Buffer Setup
is for creating additional data buffers and it supports up to 12 sets of buffers.
These 12 sets of data buffers also correspond to the sampling flags 1 - 12 and clear
flags 1 - 12 of the history buffer respectively in the Control Block area.
Add , Delete , Modify
15-32
Press Press
to delete a data buffer. to go to the Buffer Properties window to change the relevant settings.
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Sampling
Address Read Length
(Word)
Sample Number
Property descriptions for History Buffer Setup
You can select the internal memory or the controller register address. Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Chapter 5 Buttons for details.
Read Length defines the number of words to be sampled, which indicates the data length and supports up to 30 consecutive words.
Sample Number is the number of data to be recorded and is usually used with the Auto Stop function. If Auto Stop is checked, the recording stops automatically when it reaches the set Sample Number. If Auto Stop is not checked, the recording will not stop when it reaches the set Sample Number; instead, the recording restarts from the first record and overwrites the previous data.
Sample Number supports up to 9,999,999 sampling points.
There are two time formats for selection.
15
Time Format
Stamp Time and Date
There are seven date formats for selection.
Date Format
The saving location includes HMI, USB Disk, and SD Card.
Non-volatile Auto Stop
Export CSV File
Save location
When you choose to store the data in the HMI, it means when the power is cut off, the data is saved in the HMI SRAM.
If Export CSV File is checked, please set the Non-volatile memory to USB Disk.
The Auto Stop function determines whether the recording stops automatically when the set Sample Number is reached.
If Auto Stop is checked, the recording stops automatically when the setting in the Sample Number field is reached. If Auto Stop is not checked, the recording will not stop when the setting in the Sample Number field is reached; instead, the recording restarts from the first record and overwrites the previous data.
The supported data format varies according to the read length is 1 or 2 words. The supported data format is as follows.
In the Char format, if the read length is 1, it represents 2 Chars; if the read length is 2, it represents 4 Chars, and so on. When the read length is over 3, Char is the only supported format.
Length is 1
Data Format
Data Type
Data Format BCD
Allowable range 0 to 9999
Signed BCD
-999 to +9999
Word
Signed Decimal Unsigned Decimal
-32768 to +32767 0 to 65535
Hex
0 to 0xFFFF
Char
2 words
November, 2018
15-33
Sampling
15
DOPSoft User Manual
Data Format
Property descriptions for History Buffer Setup
Length is 2
Data Type
Data Format
Allowable range
BCD
0 to 99999999
Signed BCD
-9999999 to +99999999
Signed Decimal
-2147483648 to +2147483647
DWord
Unsigned Decimal Hex
0 to 4294697295 0 to 0xFFFFFFFF
Char
4 words
Floating
0 to 9999999
You can input the field name for displaying on the exported CSV file, including the time, date, and data name.
Export CSV File
Field Name
15-34
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Sampling
Property descriptions for History Buffer Setup The time and date field names (1), the number of columns and rows (2), and the value field name (3) are user-defined and the naming format supports multi-languages. The maximum number of columns and rows is 10 X 10. You can set the displaying name for the title column.
(1)
Time
(2)
15
(3) Date
Export CSV CSV File Fields
Column
The actual exported CSV file will be the same as the setting in the software, as the (1), (2), and (3) shown in the following figure.
(2) (3)
(1)
Name
November, 2018
15-35
Sampling
15
DOPSoft User Manual
Property descriptions for History Buffer Setup The Length corresponds to the Read Length (Word). If the Read Length (Word) is 4, the Length will be 1 - 4.
Export CSV File
Field Name
Length
15-36
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Sampling
Property descriptions for History Buffer Setup
The Data Start Position corresponds to the Read Length (Word). If the Read Length (Word) is 4, the Data Start Position will be 0 - 3.
15
Data Start Position
Export Field CSV File Name
Integer Digits
Fractional Digits
Set the integer and fractional digits according to the required format.
When the Length is 1, the total number of digits of the integer and fractional digits is 5. When the Length is 2, the total number of digits of the integer and fractional digits is 10.
When Timer is the Trigger source, there are two setting options for the Sampling Cycle (ms).
Fixed sampling cycle: minimum 100 ms; maximum 86400000 ms.
Trigger Timer
November, 2018
15-37
Sampling
15
DOPSoft User Manual
Property descriptions for History Buffer Setup Dynamic sampling cycle: you can change the sampling cycle time by using
the specified memory address to trigger the sampling action.
Trigger
Timer
The data type for Custom Cycle (ms) is Word by default; if you need to input as Double Word, please check Use DWORD.
When the PLC is the Trigger Source, the sampling action is triggered by using the history buffer flags in the Control Block. The sampling action is performed when the Bit is on, thus it is irrelevant to the sampling cycle time.
Assume that there are two set History Buffers, the Trigger source PLC of the first set corresponds to sampling flag 1 of history buffer and the Trigger source PLC of the second set corresponds to sampling flag 2 of history buffer, and so on.
Trigger
PLC
Save As The File Name default is H0001, but you can change it according to your preference. The File Single Name supports alphabetical and numeric characters with the length up to 8 characters.
15-38
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Sampling
Property descriptions for History Buffer Setup
If you check Save As Multi, when the History Buffer Sample Number is reached or the Saving trigger bit is triggered, the current data will be saved and sampling continues.
The file name of the data file that is currently sampling is the set File Name, such as HMI0001.dat. And the files that are saved as multiple files will have the date and time when it was saved added to the file name, for example, H0001_Date-2015-06-26_Time-12-02-30.dat.
If you check Save As Multi, the Auto Stop function is unavailable. And when you press OK on the Buffer Properties window, the following warning pops up.
15
File Date You can arrange the date formats for the file name, such as the order of the
File Time
year, month, and day of the date, or you can also choose not to display the date.
Save As Multi
You can arrange the time formats for the file name, such as the order of the hour, minute, and second of the time, or you can also choose not to display the time.
File Name
If the File Time, File Date, and File Name are set as follows, and the set Sample Number is reached at the time of 2015/6/26 12:02:30, then the file name for this file is: H0001_Date-2015-06 -26_Time-12-02-30.
Saving trigger
Other than reaching the set Sample Number will execute the function of Save As Multi, you can also trigger the Saving trigger bit to perform this function.
The controller address (Bit) and the internal register address (Bit) are supported.
November, 2018
15-39
Sampling
DOPSoft User Manual
15.2 Historical Trend Graph
15
The Historical Trend Graph is for storing and displaying address values read during a specific time period. This function can display up to 60 curves and read up to 60 Words. You can save the data displayed on the Historical Trend Graph to the external storage devices, USB Disk and SD Card, that the HMI supports.
When you double-click Historical Trend Graph, the property page is shown as follows.
Figure 15.2.1 Properties of Historical Trend Graph
15-40
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Sampling
Table 15.2.2 Function page of Historical Trend Graph
Function page Preview
Historical Trend Graph
Description
The Historical Trend Graph elements do not support multiple status values and multi-language data display.
Data
Set Buffer ID.
Main
Global range
Scale Settings
Style
Set Scale Settings, Length, Data Format, Integer Digits, Fractional, Minimum / Maximum, Display High Value, Display Low Value, High Value color, and Low Value color.
Set the Display scale, Display mark, Font size, Text Color, Mark Color, Scale Mark Number, Subscale Mark Number, and Scale Width.
Set Number of Curves, Filling Curve, Horiz. Grid Number, Gridline Color, Border Color, and Background Color.
Main-2
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, Anti-aliasing, and Margin.
Details
Function Buttons Coordinates
Set whether the curve enables, Length, Start Position, Data Format, Scope setting Integer Digits, Fractional Digits, Line Weight and Color, Minimum,
and Maximum.
Time/Date
Set Display time/date, Time Interval, Time format, Date Format, and Color.
Check the required function buttons, including Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Reset, Scroll left a space, Scroll right a space, Scroll left a page, and Scroll right a page. Set the Default Description for the function buttons and the Default Button Width and Height.
Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
15
November, 2018
15-41
Sampling Main
15
(4)
(2)
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 15.2.2 Main property page for the Historical Trend Graph element
No. Property
Function description
The Buffer ID corresponds to the set data number in the History Buffer. The History Buffer Setup can set up to 12 sets of data, so the Buffer ID can also set up to 12 sets.
(1) Buffer ID
15-42
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Sampling
No. Property
Function description
The Length can be set as 1 or 2. If Length is 1, it means the length of the read data is 1 word;
if Length is 2, it means the length of the read data is 2 words. Note: when you select 2 as the Length, the Read Length must be 2 or more words.
Length
15
Historical Trend Graph supports the following data formats:
Data Format
Floating is only available when Length is 2.
(2)
Global range
Integer / Fractional
Digits
You can set the displaying number of integer digits and the number of decimal places.
If Global range is checked, you will not be able to set the Minimum / Maximum values for the curves on the Details page; instead the range is determined by the minimum and maximum of the Global range.
The allowable ranges for the minimum and maximum values are subject to change based on the selected data type and data format.
Data Type
Data Format
Allowable range
BCD
0 to 9999
Signed BCD
-999 to +9999
Minimum / Maximum
Word
Signed Decimal Unsigned Decimal
-32768 to +32767 0 to 65535
Hex
0 to 0xFFFF
BCD
0 to 99999999
Signed BCD
-9999999 to +99999999
DWord
Signed Decimal Unsigned Decimal
-2147483648 to +2147483647
0 to 4294697295
Hex
0 to 0xFFFFFFFF
Floating
0 to 9999999
Display High Value /
Display Low Value
Display High / Low Values are available on the Historical Trend Graph. You can set the constant, select the internal memory or the controller register address (Word), and set the color for the Display High / Low Values.
November, 2018
15-43
Sampling No. Property
15
Function description
DOPSoft User Manual
Scale Settings is only available when Global range is checked.
(3)
Scale Settings
Uncheck
Check
15-44
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual No. Property
Function description
Sampling
15
The Display scale options include Not Display, Display on left, and Display on Right.
(3)
Scale Display Settings scale
Not Display
Display on left
Display on Right
November, 2018
15-45
Sampling No. Property
15
Function description Select to display the scale numbers or not.
Uncheck
Display mark
DOPSoft User Manual
Check
(3)
Scale Settings
The Font size setting is valid only when Display mark is checked.
Font size
15-46
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual No. Property
Sampling
Function description
Font size is for setting the size of the numbers displaying on the scale with the font sizes 8 - 224 available.
15
Font size
(3)
Scale Settings
The Text Color setting is valid only when Display mark is checked.
Text Color
You can define the text color to be displayed.
November, 2018
15-47
Sampling No. Property
15
Function description Before change
Text Color
After change
DOPSoft User Manual
The Mark Color setting is valid even if Display mark is not checked.
(3)
Scale Settings
Mark Color
You can define the mark color to be displayed.
15-48
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual No. Property
Function description
Before change
Mark Color
After change
Sampling
15
The Scale Mark Number and Subscale Mark Number settings are valid even if Display mark is not checked.
(3)
Scale Settings
Scale Mark
Number
The minimum is 1 and the maximum is 99 for both the Scale Mark Number and Subscale Mark Number.
When the Scale Mark Number is 5 and the Subscale Mark Number is 1, the graph is as follows.
Subscale Mark
Number
Scale Mark Subscale Mark
November, 2018
15-49
Sampling No. Property
15
DOPSoft User Manual
Function description When the font size is set too big, you can adjust Scale Width so the text shows. Note: 1. Scale Width must be smaller than the element width. 2. When you drag the scale width so it is larger than the element width, the scale
will not display. 3. When you use the set value to make the scale width larger than the element
width, the Scale Width is immediately adjusted to the element width -1. 4. If you enter a non-numeric character, the following error message pops up.
(3)
Scale Settings
Scale Width
A Historical Trend Graph element supports up to 60 curves.
Number
(4)
Style
of
Curves
If you select 60 curves, you can still change the width and color of each curve.
15-50
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual No. Property
Function description
Set to fill the area below the curve. The default is No. If set to Yes, the curve is as follows.
Filling Curve
Set the Historical Trend Graph element border color.
Border Color
Border Color
Sampling
15
(4)
Style
The maximum horizontal grid count is 50. Horiz. Grid Number is for separating the blocks in the Historical Trend
Graph element. The default is 1, meaning there is no grid line. If the Horiz. Grid Number is set to 2, there is one grid line separating the Historical Trend Graph element into 2 blocks; if set to 3, there are two grid lines separating the element into 3 blocks, and so on.
1
2 Horiz. Grid
Number
1 2 3
November, 2018
15-51
Sampling No. Property
15
Function description Set the background color of the element.
DOPSoft User Manual
Background Color
Background Color
(4)
Style
The Gridline Color is the color of the grid line in the Historical Trend
Graph. The default is
.
You can change the color of the grid line.
Gridline Color
Gridline Color
15-52
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
(4)
Sampling
(1)
15
(2)
(3)
Figure 15.2.3 Main-2 property page for the Historical Trend Graph element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3)
Anti-aliasing
The Anti-aliasing function is available for this element. When enabled, the element display becomes more delicate without jagged edges.
The Margin function is available for this element. When you select Yes for Margin, the element will indent as shown in the figure below.
(4)
Margin
Margin is set to Yes
Margin is set to No
November, 2018
15-53
Sampling Details
15
(2)
DOPSoft User Manual (1)
(3)
Figure 15.2.4 Details property page for the Historical Trend Graph element
No. Property
Function description
The Buffer ID corresponds to the set data number in the History Buffer. The History Buffer Setup can set up to 12 sets of data, so the Buffer ID can also set up to 12 sets.
(1) Buffer ID
15-54
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual No. Property
Sampling
Function description
Set whether the curve is enabled to read data. If Constant is selected for Type, then setting the value to 1 indicates
enable and setting to 2 indicates disable. If Bit is selected for Type, then Bit On indicates enable and Bit Off indicates disable. The value supports the Bit of the element, Bit of the internal memory, and constant setting.
15
Enable
(2)
Curve setting
You can set Length to 1 or 2. You can only set Length to 2 when Read Length (Word) is set to 2 or above.
Length
When Global range is checked, you cannot set this function.
November, 2018
15-55
Sampling No. Property
15
DOPSoft User Manual
Function description The Start Position setting is determined by the set Read Length (Word). If the Read Length (Word) is 60, the Start Position can be 0 - 59.
Start Position
(2)
Curve setting
The supported data formats are as follows:
Data Format
When Global range is checked, you cannot set this function. Note: 1. If you select Floating as the Data Format, please set Length to 2. 2. If you select Floating as the Data Format, but set Length to 1 word, a message
will pop up to remind you that you need to set Length to 2 or more words.
15-56
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Sampling
No. Property
Function description
Integer / Fractional
Digits
You can set the displaying number of integer digits and the number of decimal places.
When Global range is checked, you cannot set this function.
You can set the line color for the curve.
15
Line Color
The line width setting ranges from 1 to 8.
(2)
Curve setting
Line Weight
November, 2018
If Global range is checked, you will not be able to set the Minimum / Maximum values for the curves; instead the range is determined by the minimum and maximum of the Global range.
The allowable ranges for the minimum and maximum values are subject to change based on the selected data type and data format.
Data Type
Data Format
Allowable range
BCD
0 to 9999
Signed BCD
-999 to +9999
Minimum / Maximum
Word
Signed Decimal Unsigned Decimal
Hex
-32768 to +32767 0 to 65535 0 to 0xFFFF
BCD
0 to 99999999
Signed BCD
-9999999 to +99999999
DWord
Signed Decimal Unsigned Decimal
-2147483648 to +2147483647
0 to 4294697295
Hex
0 to 0xFFFFFFFF
Floating
0 to 9999999
15-57
Sampling No. Property
15
DOPSoft User Manual
Function description When you check Display time/date, the time scale will display below
the Historical Trend Graph element; if it is not checked, the time scale will not display.
Display time/date
You can set the number of the time scales (up to 9,999) when you check Display time/date. The above figure displays two time scales.
Two time formats are supported as follows:
Seven date formats are supported as follows: Time (3) Time/Date Format / Date Format
With this setting, you can change the displaying color of the time and date, including the recorded time and date shown on top of the Historical Trend
Graph and the time scales. The default is
.
Color
15-58
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Function Buttons
(1)
Sampling
15
(2) (3) Figure 15.2.5 Function Buttons property page for the Historical Trend Graph element
November, 2018
15-59
Sampling
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
15 (1)
Property
Function description
Function description
Check the Function Buttons you want to display on the Historical Trend Graph.
Zoom In
Zoom in on the history data of X-axis.
Zoom Out
Zoom out on the history data of X-axis.
Zoom Reset
Reset the history data of X-axis to the default size.
Scroll left a space Scroll to the left a bit.
Scroll right a space Scroll to the right a bit.
Scroll left a page Scroll to the left for a page.
Scroll right a page Scroll to the right for a page.
If you press Set As Default Description, the texts are automatically set as default.
(2)
Set As Default Description
(3)
Default Button Width / Height
You can adjust the button height and width.
15-60
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Coordinates
Sampling
15 (1)
(2)
Figure 15.2.6 Coordinates property page for the Historical Trend Graph element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
November, 2018
15-61
Sampling
DOPSoft User Manual
15.3 Historical Data Table
15
The Historical Data Table displays the numerical values converted from the data read by the History Buffer. The 60 columns of the Historical Data Table correspond to the Read Length of 60 words in the Historical Trend Graph.
When you double-click Historical Data Table, the property page is shown as follows.
Figure 15.3.1 Properties of Historical Data Table
15-62
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Sampling
Table 15.3.1 Function page of Historical Data Table
Function page Preview Main Main-2
Details
Text Coordinates
Historical Data Table
Description
Historical Data Table elements do not support multiple status values and multi-language data display.
Set Border Color, Background Color, Column Counts, Gridline Color, Show Gridlines, Row Color, Alternating Row Color, and Select Row Color of the element.
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing.
Set Buffer ID. Set Time/Date. Set Length, Start Position, Data Format, Integer Digits, Fractional Digits, Color, Field Width, Prefix Zero, and Title. Set Show Title, Background Color, Text Color, Time, and Date.
Set the text size of the displayed numeric data.
Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
15
November, 2018
15-63
Sampling Main
15
(7) (8)
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Figure 15.3.2 Main property page for the Historical Data Table element
15-64
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
Set the Historical Data Table element border color.
Sampling
15
Border Color
(1) Border Color
Set the background color of the element.
(2)
Background Color
Background Color
November, 2018
15-65
Sampling
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
15
Property
Function description
The maximum of Column Counts is 60 which correspond to the Read Length of 60 words in the History Buffer Setup respectively.
(3)
Column Counts
Set the gridline color of the element. The default is white.
(4) Gridline Color The Gridline color setting is valid only when Show Gridlines is set to Yes and Column Counts is set to 2 or more.
(5) Show Gridlines
Gridline Color
15-66
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
Color of the odd rows. The default is
.
(6)
Row Color
Sampling
15
Color of the even rows. The default is
.
(7)
Alternating Row Color
When you select the data rows to view, the rows are in the color specified in this
setting. The default is
.
(8)
Select Row Color
November, 2018
15-67
Sampling Main-2
15
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 15.3.3 Main-2 property page for the Historical Data Table element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3) Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
15-68
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Details
(2)
Sampling
(1)
15
(3) (4) (5)
Figure 15.3.4 Details property page for the Historical Data Table element
No. Property
Function description
The Buffer ID corresponds to the set data number in the History Buffer. The History Buffer Setup can set up to 12 sets of data, so the Buffer ID can also set up to 12 sets.
(1) Buffer ID
November, 2018
15-69
Sampling No. Property
15
DOPSoft User Manual
Function description The Length corresponds to the Read Length (Word). If the Read Length (Word) is 60, the Length will be 1 - 60.
(2)
Item setting
Length
15-70
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual No. Property
Sampling
Function description
The Start Position setting is determined by the set Read Length (Word). If the Read Length (Word) is 60, the Start Position can be 0 - 59.
15
Start Position
(2)
Item setting
November, 2018
Data Format
The supported data format varies according to the read length is 1 or 2 words. The supported data format is as follows.
In the Char format, if the read length is 1, it represents 2 Chars; if the read length is 2, it represents 4 Chars, and so on.
When the read length is over 3, Char is the only supported format.
Length is 1
Data Type Data Format
Allowable range
BCD
0 to 9999
Signed BCD
-999 to +9999
Word
Signed Decimal Unsigned Decimal
-32768 to +32767 0 to 65535
Hex
0 to 0xFFFF
Char
2 words
15-71
Sampling
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
15
Data Format
Function description Length is 2
Data Type Data Format
Allowable range
BCD
0 to 99999999
DWord
Signed BCD Signed Decimal Unsigned Decimal
-9999999 to +99999999
-2147483648 to +2147483647
0 to 4294697295
Hex
0 to 0xFFFFFFFF
Char
4 words
Floating
0 to 9999999
Note: 1. If you select Floating as the Data Format, please set Length to 2. 2. If you select Floating as the Data Format, but set Length to 1 word,
a message will pop up to remind you that you need to set Length to 2 or more words.
(2)
Item setting
Integer / You can set the displaying number of integer digits and the number
Fractional
of decimal places.
Digits When Global range is checked, you cannot set this function.
You can set the line color for the curve.
Line Color
Column Width
Column Width is for setting the distance between the numeric data records. For example, if the Column Counts is set to 2 and Column Width is set to 40, then the width between the first and second data records is 40.
The Column Width is 40 by default and the setting range is 0 - 999.
15-72
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual No. Property
Sampling
Function description
The Prefix Zero function determines how many zeros to add according to the set number of integer digits. The following example illustrates integers of four digits.
15
Apply Prefix Zero
Prefix Zero
(2)
Item setting
Do not apply Prefix Zero
This function allows you to name the titles for the data display.
Title
November, 2018
15-73
Sampling No. Property
15
DOPSoft User Manual
Function description Set the alignment style for the text in the title field and data. The alignment styles include: Align left, Align center, and Align right.
(2)
Item setting
Field alignment
Two time formats are supported as follows:
Time Format
Seven date formats are supported as follows:
Date Format (3) Time/Date
Set the displaying color of the date and time. The default is .
Color
15-74
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Sampling
No. Property
Function description
Set the alignment style for the date and time. The alignment styles include: Align left, Align center, and Align right.
Alignment (3) Time/Date
15
Field Width
Field Width is for setting the distance between the date and time. For example, if the Field Width is set to 40, then the width between the date and time is 40.
The Field Width is 72 by default and the setting range is 0 - 800.
Set the background color of the column title.
Background
Change the background color to yellow
Set the text color of the column title.
Text Color (4) Show Title
Change the text color to red
Time
You can set the title name for No., Time, and Date.
Date No.
Change to the texts of time and date
Color of No. Set the color of the No. The default is
.
Set the alignment style for the No. The alignment styles include: Align left, Align center, and Align right.
(5) Show No. Alignment of No.
November, 2018
15-75
Sampling Text
15
DOPSoft User Manual (1)
Figure 15.3.5 Text property page for the Historical Data Table element
No. Property
Function description
Set the text size of the displayed numeric data.
(1)
Text
15-76
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Coordinates
Sampling
15 (1)
(2)
Figure 15.3.6 Coordinates property page for the Historical Data Table element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height
Set the width and height of the elements.
November, 2018
15-77
Sampling
DOPSoft User Manual
15.4 Historical Event Table
15
Historical Event Table supports three data types as shown in Table 15.4.1. If you need to add or reduce the total number of states, you can simply add or reduce it from State Counts in the property page.
Table 15.4.1 Data Type of the Historical Event Table
Data Type
Historical Event Table State Counts
If the Data Type is Word, you can set 1 to 256 states for the State Counts.
Word
LSB is to first convert the data in the register to binary data, then use the lowest non-zero bit to determine the current state of the object.
If the Data Type is LSB, you can set 1 to 16 states, except for State 0.
LSB / LSB (Support State 0)
To display State 0, please select LSB (Support State 0).
If you selected LSB, the element is black when the state is 0.
When the Data Type is LSB or LSB (Support State 0), the memory address is also in Word as the unit.
15-78
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Sampling
Data Type
LSB / LSB (Support State 0)
Historical Event Table
State Counts
The examples in the following table show how the state value is determined with the lowest non-zero bit after converting from decimal value to binary value. There are also examples demonstrating how the software determines the displaying state value with the lowest bit when the decimal values are 3 and 7.
Decimal
Binary
State value
0
0000000000000000 State = 0 when all bits are 0.
Note: LSB (Support State 0) must be selected.
1
0000000000000001 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State = 1.
2
0000000000000010 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 1, State = 2.
3
0000000000000011 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State = 1.
4
0000000000000100 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 2, State = 3.
7
0000000000000111 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State = 1.
8
0000000000001000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 3, State = 4.
16 0000000000010000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 4, State = 5.
32 0000000000100000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 5, State = 6.
64 0000000001000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 6, State = 7.
128 0000000010000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 7, State = 8.
256 0000000100000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 8, State = 9.
512 0000001000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 9, State = 10.
1024 0000010000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 10, State = 11.
2048 0000100000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 11, State = 12.
4096 0001000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 12, State = 13.
8192 0010000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 13, State = 14.
16384 0100000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 14, State = 15.
32768 1000000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 15, State = 16.
15
November, 2018
15-79
Sampling
DOPSoft User Manual
When you double-click Historical Event Table, the property page is shown as follows.
15
Figure 15.4.1 Properties of Historical Event Table
Table 15.4.2 Function page of Historical Event Table
Function page Preview
Main
Main-2 Text
Coordinates
Historical Event Table Description
Historical Event Table elements can view multiple status values and multi-language data display. Set Border Color and Background Color. Set Data Type, Data Format, State Counts, Buffer ID, and Data No. Set Time/Date. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the text content, font, size, color, format, zoom, and alignment type. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
15-80
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main
(8)
(9) (2)
(10)
(4) (11)
(12)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Sampling
15 (1)
(3)
Figure 15.4.2 Main property page for the Historical Event Table element
No. Property
Function description
There are three data types available: Word, LSB, and LSB (Support State 0).
(1) Data Type
You can only select the Data Format when the Data Type is Word. There are four types of Data Format: BCD, Signed Decimal, Unsigned Decimal, and Hexadecimal.
(2)
Data Format
November, 2018
15-81
Sampling
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
(3)
15
Property
State Counts
Function description
Set the State Counts for the Historical Event Table. If the Data Type is Word, you can select 1 - 256 states; if the Data Type is LSB, you can select 16 states; and if the Data Type is LSB (Support State 0), you can select 17 states. Please refer to Table 15.4.1 for details.
The Buffer ID corresponds to the set data number in the History Buffer. The History Buffer Setup can set up to 12 sets of data, so the Buffer ID can also set up to 12 sets.
(4) Buffer ID
Data No. reads the Read Length (Word) set in the History Data Buffer. When the Read Length is 1, the Data No. is 0; when the Read Length is 2, the Data No. can be 0 or 1. Thus, when 60 words are read, the Data No. is 0 - 59.
(5) Data No.
15-82
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
Two time formats are supported as follows:
Time Format
Seven date formats are supported as follows: (6)
Date Format
Set the displaying color of the date and time. The default is
(7)
Color
Sampling
15
.
Set the Historical Event Table element border color.
(8)
Border Color
Border Color
November, 2018
15-83
Sampling
No. Property
Function description
Set the background color of the element.
15
DOPSoft User Manual
(9)
Background Color
Background Color
Color of the odd rows. The default is
.
(10) Row Color
Color of the even rows. The default is
.
(11)
Alternating Row
15-84
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Sampling
No. Property
Function description
When you select the data rows to view, the rows are in the color specified in this
setting. The default is
.
(12)
Select Row Color
15
November, 2018
15-85
Sampling Text
15 (1)
DOPSoft User Manual (2)
(4)
(3)
(5)
Figure 15.4.3 Text property page for the Historical Event Table element
No. Property
Function description
You can enter the text to display in this box.
(1)
Text
(2) 15-86
Text Property
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, zoom, alignment, and bold / italic / underline for the texts. You can refer to the Preview section in the figure above for the text property setting results.
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Sampling
No. Property
Function description
(3)
Edit Multilanguage
Text
If you have added multi-language texts, the Text page allows you to edit multi-language data.
When this function is enabled, it batch changes the text of the specified state. Please see the following example:
Step 1: enter the text of State 0 as A, the text of State 1 as B, and the text of State 2
15
as C.
Step 2: use your cursor to select State 0.
Step 3: execute [Process the text of all states], then the texts of State 1 and State 2
will be changed to A.
Before change
Process the (4) text of all
states (1)
After
change
(3)
(2)
When this function is enabled, it batch changes the text of the specified property. Items included in the text property are shown in the figure below.
Process
(5)
text properties
of all states
November, 2018
15-87
Sampling
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
15
Please see the following example:
Step 1: enter the text of State 0 as Delta and the text of State 1 as HMI; set the font of State 0 as Segoe Script and the font of State 1 as Arial.
Step 2: use your mouse to select State 0.
Step 3: execute [Process text properties of all states], then the font of State 1 will be changed to Segoe Script.
(1)
Before change
Process
(1)
text
(5) properties
of all
states
After change
(3) (2)
15-88
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Position
Sampling
(1)
15
(2)
Figure 15.4.4 Coordinates property page for the Historical Event Table element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
November, 2018
15-89
Sampling
DOPSoft User Manual
15.5 Historical Overview Table
15
The Historical Overview Table element is for viewing the stored Historical Trend Graph data. The left side of the element is the file browsing area and the right side is the trend graph. You can select Historical Trend Graph data stored in the USB Disk or SD Card through the file browsing area on the left. Like the Historical Trend Graph, a Historical Overview Table can display up to 60 curves and read 60 words. .
When you double-click Historical Overview Table, the property page is shown as follows.
Figure 15.5.1 Properties of Historical Overview Table
15-90
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Sampling
Table 15.5.1 Function page of Historical Overview Table
Function page Preview
Main
Main-2 Details Function Buttons Coordinates
Historical Overview Table
Description
The Historical Overview Table elements do not support multiple status values and multi-language data display.
Data
Set Buffer ID.
Set Scale Settings, Length, Data Format, Integer Digits, Fractional, Global range Minimum / Maximum, Display High Value, Display Low Value, High
Value color, and Low Value color.
Scale Settings
Set the Display scale, Display mark, Font size, Text Color, Mark Color, Scale Mark Number, and Subscale Mark Number.
Style
Set Number of Curves, Filling Curve, Horiz. Grid Number, Gridline Color, Border Color, and Background Color.
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, Anti-aliasing, and Margin.
Scope setting
Set the curve's Length, Start Position, Data Format, Integer Digits, Fractional Digits, Line Weight and Color, Minimum, and Maximum.
Time/Date
Set Display time/date, Time Interval, Time format, Date Format, and Color.
Set the function buttons to be enabled and the buttons' width and height.
Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
15
November, 2018
15-91
Sampling Main
15
(4)
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
(3)
(2)
Figure 15.5.2 Main property page for the Historical Overview Table element
No. Property
Function description
The Buffer ID corresponds to the set data number in the History Buffer. The History Buffer Setup can set up to 12 sets of data, so the Buffer ID can also set up to 12 sets.
(1) Buffer ID
15-92
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Sampling
No. Property
Length
Data Format
Function description
The Length can be set as 1 or 2. If Length is 1, it means the length of the read data is 1 word; if Length is 2, it means the length of the read data is 2 words. Note: when you select 2 as the Length, the Read Length must be 2 or more words.
15
Historical Overview Table supports the following data formats: BCD, Signed BCD, Signed Decimal, Unsigned Decimal, Hexadecimal, and Floating.
Floating is only available when Length is 2.
Integer / Fractional
Digits
You can set the displaying number of integer digits and the number of decimal places.
(2)
Global range
If Global range is checked, you will not be able to set the Minimum / Maximum values for the curves on the Details page; instead the range is determined by the minimum and maximum of the Global range.
The allowable ranges for the minimum and maximum values are subject to change based on the selected data type and data format.
Data Type
Data Format
Allowable range
BCD
0 to 9999
Signed BCD
-999 to +9999
Minimum / Maximum
Word
Signed Decimal Unsigned Decimal
-32768 to +32767 0 to 65535
Hex
0 to 0xFFFF
BCD
0 to 99999999
Signed BCD
-9999999 to +99999999
DWord
Signed Decimal Unsigned Decimal
-2147483648 to +2147483647
0 to 4294697295
Hex
0 to 0xFFFFFFFF
Floating
0 to 9999999
Display High Value
Display Low Value
Display High Value is available on the Historical Overview Table. You can set the constant, select the internal memory or the controller register address (Word), and set the color for the Display High Value.
Display Low Value is available on the Historical Overview Table. You can set the constant, select the internal memory or the controller register address (Word), and set the color for the Display Low Value.
November, 2018
15-93
Sampling No. Property
15
Function description
DOPSoft User Manual
(3)
Scale Settings Scale Settings is only available when Global range is checked.
Uncheck
Check
15-94
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual No. Property
Function description
Sampling
15
The Display scale options include Not Display, Display on left, and Display on Right.
(3)
Scale Settings
Display scale
Not Display
Display on left
Display on Right
November, 2018
15-95
Sampling No. Property
15
Function description Select to display the scale numbers or not.
DOPSoft User Manual
Uncheck
Display mark
Check
(3)
Scale Settings
If you do not check Display mark when you set the Font size, the texts will not display on the scale, but the spacing for the set Font size will reserved on the scale. For example, if you selected 72 for the Font size, the spacing on the scale will be wider, but without the texts.
Font size
15-96
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual No. Property
Sampling
Function description
Font size is for setting the size of the numbers displaying on the scale with the font sizes 8 - 224 available.
15
Font size
(3)
Scale Settings
The Text Color setting is valid only when Display mark is checked.
Text Color You can define the text color to be displayed.
November, 2018
15-97
Sampling No. Property
15
Function description
DOPSoft User Manual
Before change
Text Color After change
The Mark Color setting is valid even if Display mark is not checked.
(3)
Scale Settings
Mark Color You can define the mark color to be displayed.
15-98
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual No. Property
Function description Before change
Mark Color After change
Sampling
15
The Scale Mark Number and Subscale Mark Number settings are valid even if Display mark is not checked.
Scale Mark Number
(3)
Scale Settings
Subscale Mark
Number
The minimum is 1 and the maximum is 99 for both the Scale Mark Number and Subscale Mark Number.
When the Scale Mark Number is 5 and the Subscale Mark Number is 1, the graph is as follows.
Scale Mark
Subscale Mark
November, 2018
15-99
Sampling No. Property
15
DOPSoft User Manual
Function description
When the font size is set too big, you can adjust Scale Width so the text shows. Note: 1. Scale Width must be smaller than the element width. 2. When you drag the scale width so it is larger than the element width,
the scale will not display. 3. When you use the set value to make the scale width larger than the element
width, the Scale Width is immediately adjusted to the element width -1. 4. If you enter a non-numeric character, the following error message pops up.
(3)
Scale Settings
Scale Width
A Historical Overview Table element supports up to 60 curves.
(4)
Style
Number of Curves
If you select 60 curves, you can still change the width and color of each curve.
15-100
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual No. Property
Function description
Set to fill the area below the curve. The default is No. If set to Yes, the curve is as follows.
Filling Curve
Sampling
15
(4)
Style
The maximum horizontal grid count is 50. Horiz. Grid Number is for separating the blocks for the trend graph
on the right side of the Historical Overview Table. The default is 1, meaning there is no grid line. If the Horiz. Grid Number is set to 2, there is one grid line separating the trend graph into 2 blocks; if set to 3, there are two grid lines separating the trend graph into 3 blocks, and so on.
1
2 Horiz. Grid
Number
1
2
3
November, 2018
15-101
Sampling No. Property
15
DOPSoft User Manual
Function description The Gridline Color is the color of the grid line in the trend graph on
the right side of the Historical Overview Table. The default is .
You can change the color of the grid line.
(4)
Style
Gridline Color
Gridline Color
15-102
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual No. Property
Sampling
Function description Set the Historical Overview Table element border color.
Border Color
15
Border Color
(4)
Style
Set the Historical Overview Table element background color.
Background Color
Background Color
November, 2018
15-103
Sampling Main-2
15
(4)
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 15.5.3 Main-2 property page for the Historical Overview Table element
15-104
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Sampling
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3)
Anti-aliasing
The Anti-aliasing function is available for this element. When enabled, the element display becomes more delicate without jagged edges.
15
The Margin function is available for this element. When you select Yes for Margin, the element will indent as shown in the figure below.
(4)
Margin
Margin is set to Yes
Margin is set to No
November, 2018
15-105
Sampling Details
15
(2)
(3)
DOPSoft User Manual (1)
Figure 15.5.4 Details property page for the Historical Overview Table element
15-106
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Sampling
No. Property
Function description
The Buffer ID corresponds to the set data number in the History Buffer. The History Buffer Setup can set up to 12 sets of data, so the Buffer ID can also set up to 12 sets.
15
(1) Buffer ID
Set whether the curve is enabled to read data.
If Constant is selected for Type, then setting the value to 1 indicates enable and setting to 2 indicates disable. If Bit is selected for Type, then Bit On indicates enable and Bit Off indicates disable.
The value supports the Bit of the element, Bit of the internal memory, and constant setting.
Enable
(2)
Curve setting
You can set Length to 1 or 2. You can only set Length to 2 when Read Length (Word) is set to 2 or above.
Length
When Global range is checked, you cannot set this function.
November, 2018
15-107
Sampling No. Property
15
DOPSoft User Manual
Function description The Start Position setting is determined by the set Read Length
(Word). If the Read Length (Word) is 60, the Start Position can be 0 - 59.
Start Position
(2)
Curve setting
The supported data formats are as follows:
Data Format
When Global range is checked, you cannot set this function. Note:
1. If you select Floating as the Data Format, please set Length to 2.
2. If you select Floating as the Data Format, but set Length to 1 word, a message will pop up to remind you that you need to set Length to 2 or more words.
15-108
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Sampling
No. Property
Function description
Integer / Fractional
Digits
You can set the displaying number of integer digits and the number of decimal places.
When Global range is checked, you cannot set this function.
You can set the line color for the curve.
15
Line Color
The line width setting ranges from 1 to 8.
(2)
Curve setting
Line Weight
If Global range is checked, you will not be able to set the Minimum / Maximum values for the curves; instead the range is determined by the minimum and maximum of the Global range.
The allowable ranges for the minimum and maximum values are subject to change based on the selected data type and data format.
Data Type
Data Format
Allowable range
BCD
0 to 9999
Signed BCD
-999 to +9999
Minimum / Maximum
Word
Signed Decimal Unsigned Decimal
-32768 to +32767 0 to 65535
Hex
0 to 0xFFFF
BCD
0 to 99999999
Signed BCD
-9999999 to +99999999
DWord
Signed Decimal Unsigned Decimal
-2147483648 to +2147483647 0 to 4294697295
Hex
0 to 0xFFFFFFFF
Floating
0 to 9999999
November, 2018
15-109
Sampling No. Property
15
DOPSoft User Manual
Function description When you check Display time/date, the time scale will display below
the trend graph; if it is not checked, the time scale will not display.
Display time/date
You can set the number of the time scales (up to 9,999) when you check Display time/date. The above figure displays two time scales.
Two time formats are supported as follows:
Seven date formats are supported as follows: Time (3) Time/Date Format / Date Format
With this setting, you can change the displaying color of the time and date, including the recorded time and date shown on top of the trend
graph and the time scales. The default is
.
Color
15-110
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Function Buttons
(1)
Sampling
15
(2) (3) Figure 15.5.5 Function Buttons property page for the Historical Overview Table element
November, 2018
15-111
Sampling
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
15 (1)
Property
Function description
Function description
Check the Function Buttons you want to display on the trend graph.
Zoom In
Zoom in on the history data of X-axis.
Zoom Out
Zoom out on the history data of X-axis.
Zoom Reset
Reset the history data of X-axis to the default size.
Scroll left a space Scroll to the left a bit.
Scroll right a space Scroll to the right a bit.
Scroll left a page Scroll to the left for a page.
Scroll right a page Scroll to the right for a page.
If you press Set As Default Description, the texts are automatically set as default.
(2)
Set As Default Description
Note:
1. The display area for the trend graph can only display .dat files.
2. If the file in the file browsing area has the same file name as the File Name set in the Buffer Properties without containing any time and date, it means the History Buffer file is still sampling and the Historical Overview Table cannot display it. If you press Display in the file browsing area, the following warning pops up.
(3)
Default Button Width / Height
Adjust the button height and width to display.
15-112
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Sampling
15.6 Operation Log Table
The Operation Log Table is for recording the operation and date/time of the operation of each element when users enter the HMI screen, such as changing the element data, security level, switching elements, etc. You may refer to the Operation Log Table when the machine malfunctions or there are defects in the products. In addition, you can save the records as CSV files and view them with PCs.
Note: 1. The default for Operation Log Table is a CSV file which saves up to 10,000 sets of data. 2. The Operation Log Table can only be saved in USB Disks or SD Cards, so the read speed of the
external storage device affects the display speed of the Operation Log Table and the update speed of the screen operation.
15
When you double-click Operation Log Table, the property page is shown as follows.
Figure 15.6.1 Properties of Operation Log Table November, 2018
15-113
Sampling
DOPSoft User Manual
15
Table 15.6.1 Function page of Operation Log Table
Function page Preview
Main
Operation Log Table
Description
Operation Log Table elements do not support multiple status values and multi-language data display.
Style
Set Background Color, Border Color, Gridline Color, Row Color, Alternating Row Color, Select Row Color, Mouse Pointed Row Color, and Show Gridlines.
Settings
Enable, Trigger, Save Settings (storage space setting and solutions for insufficient space), and CSV output settings (date/time format, whether to save the records to an external device as CSV file).
Main-2
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing.
Details
Function Buttons
Text Coordinates
Display settings
Title setting Time/Date
You can set whether to record the Time, Date, User Account, Level, Screen, Description, Action, Address, Previous value, New value, and adjust Column order.
Set the text alignment, background color, and text color.
Set Time Format, Date Format, and Color.
Set the function buttons to be enabled and the buttons' width and height.
Set the text font, size, and color. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
15-114
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main
(2)
(3) (4)
(5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
Sampling
(1)
15
Figure 15.6.2 Main property page for the Operation Log Table element
November, 2018
15-115
Sampling
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
15
Property
Function description
You can start the setting by pressing Operation Log Setting... or by going to [Options] > [Operation Log Settings].
Operation
(1)
Log
Settings
Enable Default is not enabled. Check Enable to edit settings.
Trigger
Save Settings
Set Operation Log Table trigger address, and provide addresses of the internal memory and external PLC. Only supports bit trigger. As soon as this address is triggered, the Operation Log Table starts recording all operations of the HMI.
Set the Operation Log Table to save in a USB Disk or SD Card in CSV format.
When the external storage space is insufficient, two solutions are available, to stop recording [Stop Log] or to overwrite the files [Overwrite Files]. [Stop Log] is to stop recording the HMI operations; [Overwrite Files] is to delete the recorded operation data and start recording the operation all over again.
15-116
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual No. Property
Sampling
Function description Set the recording date and time format for the CSV file to output.
15
Operation
CSV
(1)
Log
output
Settings settings Check the display field (a) to output, adjust the column displaying
order (b), and define the setting column display name (c).
(a)
(c)
(b)
Set the background color for the Operation Log Table element.
(2)
Background Color
Background Color
November, 2018
15-117
Sampling
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
Set the border color of the Operation Log Table element.
15
Border color
(3)
Border Color
Set the gridline color of the Operation Log Table element.
Gridline Color
(4)
Gridline Color
15-118
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
Color of the odd rows. The default is
.
(5) Row Color
Sampling
15
Color of the even rows. The default is
.
(6)
Alternating Row Color
When you select the data rows to view, the rows are in the color specified in this
setting. The default is
.
(7)
Select Row Color
(8)
Mouse Pointed Row Color
When the cursor is enabled, the row changes to the specified color where the cursor is placed at.
November, 2018
15-119
Sampling
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
15
Property
Function description
The default is Yes meaning to show gridlines between each data entry in the Operation Log Table.
Select Yes for Show Gridlines
(9)
Show Gridlines
Select No for Show Gridlines
15-120
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Sampling
(1)
15
(2)
(3)
Figure 15.6.3 Main-2 property page for the Operation Log Table element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3) Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
November, 2018
15-121
Sampling Details
15
(2)
DOPSoft User Manual (1)
(4) (3)
Figure 15.6.4 Details property page for the Operation Log Table element
No. Property
Function description
Set the column display order in the Operation Log Table.
(1)
Column order
15-122
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual No. Property
Sampling
Function description
In the default setting, all columns are checked and shown in the Operation Log Table; however, you can uncheck the checkboxes of the display columns as required.
15
Check display columns
Adjust the column width in the Operation Log Table.
(2)
Column Settings
Adjust column
width
You can edit the column titles in the Operation Log Table. The defaults are English strings, but Chinese characters are also supported.
Edit display
title
November, 2018
15-123
Sampling No. Property
15
Function description Adjust the alignment of the titles.
Title Text Alignment
DOPSoft User Manual
The following figure is an example of setting the Title Text Alignment to Center.
(3)
Title Settings
Set the title background color.
Title Background
Set the display title text color.
Title Text Color
Set the date display format. Date Format
Date and
Set the time display format.
(4)
time
settings Time Format
Set the display color for the date and time. Color
15-124
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Function Buttons
(1)
Sampling
15
(2)
(3) Figure 15.6.5 Function Buttons property page for the Operation Log Table element
November, 2018
15-125
Sampling
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
15 (1)
Property
Function description
Function description
Check the Function Buttons you want to display on the Operation Log Table element.
Page Up Go to the previous page of the Operation Log Table.
Page Down Go to the next page of the Operation Log Table.
You can use Page Up and Page Down to change the page only when there are more than 10,000 sets of data in the Operation Log Table. That is, one CSV file has 10,000 operation log data and Page Up and Page Down are for switching between files of Operation Log Tables.
If you press Set As Default Description, the texts are automatically set as default.
(2)
Set As Default Description
(3)
Default Button Width / Height
You can adjust the button height and width.
15-126
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Text
Sampling
15
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 15.6.6 Text property page for the Operation Log Table element
No. Property
Function description
(1)
Font
Set the display text font of the Operation Log Table.
(2)
Size
Set the display text size of the Operation Log Table.
(3)
Color
Set the display text color of the Operation Log Table.
November, 2018
15-127
Sampling Coordinates
15
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 15.6.7 Coordinates property page for the Operation Log Table element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
15-128
November, 2018
Alarm
This chapter provides the usage and setting details for the Alarm elements.
16.1 Alarm Settings �������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 16-2 16.2 Alarm History Table ������������������������������������������������������������������������16-29 16.3 Active Alarm List ����������������������������������������������������������������������������16-45 16.4 Alarm Frequency Table��������������������������������������������������������������������16-61 16.5 Alarm Moving Sign �������������������������������������������������������������������������16-77
November, 2018
16-1
Alarm
DOPSoft User Manual
16.1 Alarm Settings
16
The Alarm Settings page is for setting the read address, sampling cycle, maximum savable data, non-volatile memory, alarm moving sign, exporting the data to a CSV file, editing the display alarm message, and other relevant properties for the alarm elements to display.
Different from the setting methods for the DOP-B and DOP-H series HMIs that use continuous Word addresses, DOP-W and DOP-100 series use non-continuous addresses. Thus, alarms can be triggered with either Bit or Word addresses, which is more flexible and user-friendly. In addition, alarm messages now support dynamic modification. In the previous version, the displayed temperatures on the alarm messages were fixed, e.g. 100 degrees; now you can add d1 to the alarm message and use the monitoring address in Alarm Settings to input the value, so the HMI displays the modified value when the alarm is triggered next time.
Alarm message supports up to 4,096 data entries. DOPSoft also provides a batch tasks tool for you to quickly complete the alarm group settings, allowing you to input the alarm group number easily. The display of the alarm on the Alarm History Table can be sorted, filtered, and so on, so that the alarm messages are displayed in a way that is easier for the user to view.
The formula provided by the software computes all the alarm relevant data edited by the users. Then, the set non-volatile memory saves these computation results. If the data is saved in the HMI, the alarm data size is subject to change based on the HMI model. Please refer to the specifications for non-volatile memory in the HMI installation manual. For data saved in the USB Disk or SD Card, the alarm data size is determined by the external storage devices.
The alarm formulas are applicable to the alarm log file and Alarm Frequency Table, but since the CSV file size is determined by the message (length) input by the user, there is no formula for the CSV file.
The following are the formulas for the alarm log file and Alarm Frequency Table:
Alarm log file
6 Bytes(a) 2 Bytes(b) N(c) 6 Bytes(d) Actual filesize Bytes
a
time / date data
b
Alarm data
c
Sampling number
d
Data file header
Alarm Frequency Table
2 Bytes(a) N(b) Actual filesize Bytes
a Alarm frequency data
b
Alarm records
The following section provides an example for non-continuous addresses settings. Please see Table 16.1.1 below.
16-2
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 16.1.1 Alarm Settings example Alarm Settings
Step 1: go to [Options] > [Alarm Settings] to set the alarm message display properties.
Alarm
16
Alarm setting steps
Step 2: switch to non-continuous address; set [Display alarm screen] to Manual.
November, 2018
16-3
Alarm
Set ten alarms as follows:
Alarm Settings
16 Alarm setting steps
Set the Main page as below:
DOPSoft User Manual
Create Alarm History Table element
Set the Details page as below:
16-4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Alarm Settings Set the Details-2 page as below:
Create Alarm History Table element
Create Maintained buttons and Numeric Entry elements.
Create Numeric
Entry elements
and Maintained buttons for
Alarm Settings and
Alarm History Table addresses
Alarm
16
November, 2018
16-5
Alarm
16
DOPSoft User Manual
Alarm Settings After you create an alarm screen and define it as a sub-screen, please go to [Options] > [Alarms Settings] to specify Alarm 1 and Alarm 6 screens as Screen_2.
Create Alarm Screens
Go to [&Initial Macro] to edit the commands as shown below. The action is set to "when the HMI screen is turned on", Alarms 6 - 10 are on because the trigger conditions are met.
Write Macro Commands
16-6
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Alarm
Alarm Settings
Please compile and download all screen data to the HMI. The actions are illustrated as follows:
The setting conditions for this example: select Manual for [Display alarm screen] and set Action Control Addr. to 2, then the HMI displays the alarm screen.
If you select Auto for [Display alarm screen] and the trigger condition for Alarm 6 is met thus it switches to on, then the HMI automatically displays the set alarm screen.
16
Display alarm screen action
Execution results
Please close the alarm display window.
Use Bit addresses to trigger Alarms 1- 5 and the Alarm History Table displays the user-defined alarm messages.
Trigger Alarms 1 - 5 with Bit
Control
If you change the values of Monitor address and trigger Alarms 1 - 5, the alarm messages change according to the modified values.
November, 2018
16-7
Alarm
16
DOPSoft User Manual
Alarm Settings When you use Bit or Word address to trigger the alarm and the trigger conditions are met, the Alarm History Table shows the trigger date and time.
Trigger Time
Alarm acknowledge time displays according to the specified alarm with the setting of Action control address as 1.
0
Acknowledge Time
Execution results
When you use Bit address to cancel the alarm-triggering action or the Word trigger conditions are not met (such as Condition 1 and Condition 2), the Alarm History Table will show the recovery time.
Recovery Time
Action Control Addr.
If Action Control Addr. is 0, the Alarm History Table has no action.
If Action Control Addr. is 1, the Alarm History Table shows the acknowledge time.
If Action Control Addr. is 2 and [Display alarm screen] is set to Manual, the HMI displays the alarm screen.
16-8
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Alarm
Alarm Settings
If Sorting Control Addr. is 0, the Alarm History Table has no action. If Sorting Control Addr. is 1, the alarms are sorted based on the trigger
time.
16
If Sorting Control Addr. is 2, the alarms are sorted based on the acknowledge time.
Execution results
Sorting Control Addr.
If Sorting Control Addr. is 3, the alarms are sorted based on the recovery time.
If Sorting Control Addr. is 4, the alarms are sorted based on the alarm frequencies from low to high.
November, 2018
16-9
Alarm
16
DOPSoft User Manual
Alarm Settings If Sorting Control Addr. is 5, the alarms are sorted based on the alarm
category numbers in ascending order.
Sorting Control Addr.
Execution results
If Sorting Control Addr. is 6, the alarms are sorted based on the alarm numbers in ascending order.
If Filtering Control Addr. is 0, the Alarm History Table displays all the triggered alarms.
If Filtering Control Addr. is 1, the Alarm History Table hides alarms with both the recovery time and acknowledge time.
Filtering Control Addr.
Not hidden
Hidden
16-10
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Alarm
Alarm Settings If Filtering Control Addr. is 2, the Alarm History Table hides the alarms with
recovery time.
Not hidden
16
Hidden
If Filtering Control Addr. is 3, the Alarm History Table hides the alarms with recovery time and acknowledge time.
Not hidden
Execution results
Filtering Control Addr.
Hidden
If Filtering Control Addr. is 4, the Alarm History Table hides the alarms with acknowledge time.
Not hidden
Hidden Filtering Control Addr. is 5 and [Alarm counter display] is set to 1.
November, 2018
16-11
Alarm
16
DOPSoft User Manual
Alarm Settings The Alarm History Table hides the data with alarm counter value that is
less than 1. In this example, since there is no alarm count that is less than 1, all alarms are displayed.
Not hidden
Hidden
Filtering Control Addr. is 5 and [Alarm counter display] is set to 2.
Execution results
Filtering Control Addr.
The Alarm History Table hides the data with alarm counter value that is less than 2. In this example, all the alarms occurred only once, so all alarms are hidden.
Not hidden
Hidden
Filtering Control Addr. is 6 with the alarm category display start address [Category start] as 1 and the end address [Category end] as 3.
16-12
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Alarm Settings
The alarm category numbers that are out of the range specified by [Category start] and [Category end] will be hidden.
Alarm
16
Not hidden
Execution results
Filtering Control Addr.
Hidden
Filtering Control Addr. is 6 with the alarm category display start address [Category start] as 3 and the end address [Category end] as 5.
The alarm category numbers that are out of the range specified by [Category start] and [Category end] will be hidden.
November, 2018
16-13
Alarm
Alarm Settings
16 Execution results
Filtering Control Addr.
Not hidden
Hidden
DOPSoft User Manual
The following introduces the detailed property functions for Alarm Settings.
16-14
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 16.1.2 Properties of Alarm Settings Properties of Alarm Settings
Alarm
16
Alarm Settings
The default is continuous address. Its usage is the same as that of the DOP-B models.
Switch between continuous and non-continuous
addresses
Press
once, the setting changes to non-continuous address. When the
setting is non-continuous address, you can use Bit or Word addresses for alarm
triggering.
November, 2018
16-15
Alarm
16
DOPSoft User Manual
Properties of Alarm Settings Only applicable to continuous addresses. You can select the internal memory or the controller register address. Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Chapter 5 Buttons for details. Note: if you have created an alarm related element without setting the alarm read address, the software prompts a warning as shown below when data compiling.
Read Address
Scan Time specifies the frequency to execute the sampling action.
Scan Time (seconds)
Max Records
Max Records is the recorded data. When the number of the recorded sampling number reaches the maximum, the record starts from 1 and overwrites the previous data.
The maximum savable data entry is 9,999. Note: 1. The maximum record must not be 0. 2. If you enter 0, the software prompts a warning as shown below.
16-16
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Alarm
Properties of Alarm Settings
Options for the storage location include None, HMI, USB Disk, and SD Card. If you cannot use an SD Card on the model, it only shows the supported items, HMI and
USB Disk; on the other hand, if you cannot use a USB Disk on the model, it only shows the supported items, HMI and SD Card.
16
Non-volatile
When you choose to store the data in the HMI, it means when the power is cut off, the data is saved in the HMI SRAM.
If Export CSV File is checked, please set the non-volatile memory to USB Disk or SD Card.
Checking Export CSV File means you can save the alarm data as CSV files in the external storage devices, USB Disks or SD Cards.
Export CSV File
This function is used with the screensaver. The default is Enable. Assume that the screensaver is enabled and the screensaver image is set, the HMI
does not show the screensaver image if alarm occurs; if the screensaver image is not set, the HMI does not enter the backlight mode. Disable the function for [Exit Screensaver when alarm occurs], then the HMI exits the screensaver when the alarm is triggered the first time. After that, whether the alarm is cleared or not, the HMI enters the screensaver mode according to the set time. Example Create the alarm data.
Exit Screensaver when alarm
occurs
November, 2018
16-17
Alarm
16
DOPSoft User Manual
Properties of Alarm Settings Create a Numeric Entry element and set its address to $100. Go to [Options] > [Configuration] > [Main] > [Others] to check Enable Screensaver and
specify the waiting time as 1 minute.
Exit Screensaver Go to [Screen] > [Screensaver Setup] to specify the screensaver screen. when alarm
occurs
Compile the project and download to the HMI. Enter 1 to the Numeric Entry element $100 to trigger the alarm. Wait 1 minute for the screensaver to enable, and when the HMI detects an alarm, it automatically exits the screensaver mode.
16-18
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Alarm
Display alarm screen
Properties of Alarm Settings
It is categorized into Auto and Manual modes. Auto: the HMI displays the alarm screen as soon as the alarm with a set alarm screen is
triggered. Manual: to have the HMI display the alarm screen, you must go to the Details page of the
Alarm History Table element and enter 2 to Action Control Addr.; or go to the Function Buttons page of the Alarm History Table element and use the [Trigger alarm screen] button.
16
November, 2018
16-19
Alarm
DOPSoft User Manual
16
Properties of Alarm Settings Alarm Moving Sign
You can select Yes or No to enable or disable this function. When the alarm is triggered, selecting Yes means the alarm message will show at the specified position on the screen whereas No means not to show the alarm message.
Enable
Available display positions are Top and Bottom. If you select Top, once the alarm is triggered, the alarm message shows at the top of the HMI screen; if you select Bottom, the alarm message shows at the bottom of the HMI screen.
Top Position
Bottom
16-20
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Properties of Alarm Settings Available directions are Left, Right, Up, and Down.
Alarm
16
Direction
Left Right
Up
Down
Points per time
The greater the number of points, the greater the distance each time the text moves. The setting range is 1 - 50 pixels.
Interval is the time interval between motions of the Alarm Moving Sign. Unit: ms. The moving distance is determined by the setting of Points per time.
Interval (ms)
This is the background color of the Alarm Moving Sign as shown in the figure below.
Background color
The default is white.
November, 2018
16-21
Alarm
DOPSoft User Manual
16
Properties of Alarm Settings Set the transparency level for the message of the Alarm Moving Sign. The default is 255. The minimum is 0.
Set the value to 255
Translucent
Set the value to 100
Alarm Message Display Content
When you use the Backspace or Delete key to delete the message content or leave the content blank, the No. is marked with an asterisk (*), reminding you that this alarm
message still exists unless you use
to delete the alarm message.
No. stands for the alarm message number, which maximum is 4,096. No.
16-22
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Alarm
Properties of Alarm Settings You can edit the alarm messages to display in the message field. If you want to modify the message, you can modify it directly in the field. You can add the "%d1" formatted string to the message content, e.g. Alarm%d1.
This string must be used with monitoring addresses. Note: if you have created an alarm related element with alarm read address, but left the message content blank, the software prompts a warning as shown below when data compiling.
Message Content
16
The category of the alarm number, which idea is similar to groups. The supported range is 1 - 255.
You can use the batch tasks tool
to quickly set the category numbers.
If you specify 1 as the Starting Alarm Number and 10 as the Ending Alarm Number, set Category ID to 5, and press Batch Setting, then Alarm No. 1 - 10 are defined as Group 5.
Category
November, 2018
16-23
Alarm
DOPSoft User Manual
Properties of Alarm Settings
16
Type
When the alarm continuous address button
is canceled, this field shows up and
the alarm read address is disabled. You can trigger the alarms individually depending on
the alarm address type setting which is Bit or Word.
Available types are Bit and Word.
Bit address: user-defined Bit address for alarm triggering.
Word address: user-defined Word address for alarm triggering.
Address
Trigger condition
When the alarm continuous address button
is canceled, this field shows up and
the alarm read address is disabled. You can trigger the alarms individually depending on
the alarm address type setting which is Bit or Word.
You can set the corresponding addresses to trigger the alarms according to the setting types (Bit or Word).
If you select Bit, please enter the Bit address for alarm triggering.
If you select Word, please provide statements for determining whether to trigger the alarm.
Statement
Trigger timing
=
Equal to
>
Greater than
<
Less than
>=
Greater than or equal to
<=
Less than or equal to
>, <
Out of the range
<=, <=
Within the range
The trigger conditions are on and off. If you select on, it means the alarm is triggered when the bit is on; if you select off, it means the alarm is triggered when the bit is off.
Monitoring Address is for displaying the user-defined alarm messages.
Add the "%d1" string to the input message in the message field. Take message "Alarm" as an example, when the monitoring address is 10, the Alarm History Table displays "Alarm 10".
Monitor Address
Alarm message
setting
Execution results
Text Color The text color of the displaying alarm message. The default is black.
16-24
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Alarm
Alarm Screen
Properties of Alarm Settings
Set whether to show the specified alarm screen when the alarm is triggered. If you have created other screens, use the drop-down list to select the screen number to display.
16
When an alarm occurs, the [Mail] function sends a mail to relevant recipients. Please note that you must go to [Options] > [Configuration] > [Network Settings] to enable the [SMTP] function to have the mail work.
After the SMTP function is enabled, you can enter the mail content in the Mail data fields.
Mail
To:
Cc:
Bcc:
Subject: Attach current screen Content
Please fill in the recipient's email address for receiving the notification when an alarm occurs. Same as regular email systems, you can fill in multiple recipients by using semi-columns (;) to separate the recipients' email addresses.
Apart from the main recipients, you can also send alarm notifications to other recipients by entering their email addresses in this field. Please note that main recipients can see those who are in the Cc: field.
Send blind copies to the recipients. The main and Cc: recipients cannot see those who are in the Bcc: field in the alarm notification.
The content in Subject is not editable in the Mail screen. The subject is generated based on the alarm message content. To modify the subject, please go to the message field to change the display message.
If you check this option, the current alarm screen is attached in this mail and sent to the recipients. The attachment is in .bmp format.
You can enter the mail content. This content supports the "%d1" formatted string, which must be used
with monitoring addresses.
November, 2018
16-25
Alarm
DOPSoft User Manual
Alarm Message Text Properties
Properties of Alarm Settings
16
Copy Paste
Delete
Support single and multiple copy functions. Use the Ctrl key to select the alarm number to copy and use the Shift key to select a
range of alarm numbers to copy.
becomes available after you press . It supports single and multiple paste functions.
After you created the alarm message, you can select the message to be deleted and press
to complete the deletion. Note: if you enter the message in the message field and then move on to the next row, it means you have created a new alarm message. Next, if you delete this alarm message with the Delete or Backspace key
on your keyboard instead of , the HMI shows the blank alarm at the specified position after you exit Alarm Settings and download the screens to the HMI.
Font
The font for the displaying alarm message. This is user-defined. The size for the displaying alarm message.
Size
16-26
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Alarm
Properties of Alarm Settings
If you have set the zooming function, you can see the zooming effect on the title and text. The default is 100%.
16
Zoom in / out
100%
150%
Next 2,048 entries When you press
, it shows Alarm No. 2049 - 4096.
Previous 2,048 entries
When you press
, it shows Alarm No. 1 - 2048.
You can press and .ini.
to import the alarm data. Supported file formats are .xls, .xlsx, .alm,
Import
November, 2018
16-27
Alarm
16
DOPSoft User Manual
Properties of Alarm Settings You can export the edited alarm messages. Supported file formats are .xls and .xlsx.
For the editable alarm parameters, apart from alarm messages, the alarm mail and alarm properties are also included.
Export
16-28
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Alarm
16.2 Alarm History Table
The Alarm History Table is different from the previous alarm record method. For easier viewing of the table, alarm trigger time, alarm acknowledge time, and alarm recovery time are added, so that the alarm triggered and recovered times are listed in the same table.
16
You can also sort the alarms, set filter conditions, and use other functions to determine the displayed alarms. To enhance the readability of the data, you can filter the information you want to see and sort in ascending or descending order.
Please refer to Table 16.1.1 Alarm Settings example for the Alarm History Table setting example.
November, 2018
16-29
Alarm
DOPSoft User Manual
When you double-click the Alarm History Table, the property page is shown as follows.
16
Figure 16.2.1 Properties of Alarm History Table
Table 16.2.1 Function page of Alarm History Table
Function page Preview Main
Alarm History Table
Description
The Alarm History Table elements do not support multiple status values and multi-language data display.
Set Background Color, Border Color, Gridline Color, Row Color, Alternating Row Color, Select Row Color, and Show Gridlines of the elements.
Main-2
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing.
Details
Details-2
Function Buttons Coordinates
Set Action Control Addr. of the event; check Use header controls to sort, set Sorting Control Addr. and sort in ascending or descending order; set Filter control address, Alarm counter display address, Alarm category start addr., and Alarm category end addr.
Set the displaying alarm columns, width, description, and the order of the columns. Set Title Text Alignment, Title Background, Title Text Color, and format / color of the date / time.
Set the Action Control function button by checking Trigger alarm screen and Ack alarm; set the displaying texts and default width / height of the buttons.
Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
16-30
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
Alarm
16
Figure 16.2.2 Main property page for the Alarm History Table element
November, 2018
16-31
Alarm
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
Set the background color of the element. The default is white.
16
(1)
Background Color
16-32
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
Set the Border Color of the element. The default is gray.
Alarm
16
(2) Border Color
November, 2018
16-33
Alarm
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
16
Property
Function description
The Gridline Color setting is valid only when you select Yes for Show Gridlines.
Set the Gridline Color of the element. The default is white.
(3) Gridline Color
16-34
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
Set the color for each row of the alarm. The default is
Alarm
.
16
(4)
Row Color
November, 2018
16-35
Alarm
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
Set the color for the alternating row of the alarm. The default is
.
16
(5)
Alternating Row Color
16-36
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
The row color when you select an alarm history data.
Set the color of the selected row. The default is
.
Alarm
16
(6)
Select Row Color
(7)
Show Gridlines
The default is Yes. When you select No, the Gridline Color setting is invalid.
November, 2018
16-37
Alarm Main-2
16
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 16.2.3 Main-2 property page for the Alarm History Table element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3) Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
16-38
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Details
(1) (2)
Alarm
16
(3) (4) (5) (6)
Figure 16.2.4 Details property page for the Alarm History Table element
No. Property
Function description
You can specify the alarms to change screens or acknowledge the alarms with
Action Control Addr.
Value
Description
Action
(1)
Control
Addr.
0
Default; no actions.
1
Acknowledge the selected alarms in the Alarm History Table.
If the selected alarm in the Alarm History Table has a set alarm
2
screen which is set to display manually, the alarm screen is
displayed when the value is 2.
When you check [Use header controls to sort], you can press the Alarm History
Table header to sort the alarms in ascending or descending order. Once you
check this function, you cannot set Sorting Control Addr. and Sorting Order
Address.
Sorting
(2)
Control
Addr.
November, 2018
16-39
Alarm
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
[Use header controls to sort] does not support the sorting of the Message
column.
You can specify the item for sorting with Sorting Control Addr.
16
Value 0 1 2
Description Default; no sorting. Sort by Trigger Time. Sort by Acknowledge Time.
Sorting
(2)
Control
Addr.
3
Sort by Recovery Time.
4
Sort by the alarm count.
5
Sort by the alarm category.
6
Sort by the alarm No.
Sorting Order Address determines the ascending or descending order of the
item specified in Sorting Control Addr. For example, if you set Sorting Control
Addr. to 1 and Sorting Order Address to 0, the trigger time is sorted in ascending
order.
Value
Description
0 Sort in ascending order.
1 Sort in descending order.
You can filter the specified item with Filter control address.
Value
Description
0 Default; display all triggered alarms.
1 Hide the alarms with Recovery Time and Acknowledge Time.
2 Hide the alarms with Recovery Time.
Filter
(3)
control
address
3 Hide the alarms with Recovery Time or Acknowledge Time. 4 Hide the alarms with Acknowledge Time.
This setting must be used with Alarm counter display. 5 When the displayed alarm count is smaller than the value set in
Alarm counter display, the alarm is hidden.
This setting must be used with Alarm category start addr. and Alarm
6
category end addr. When the alarm category number is not within the range set by
these two addresses, the alarm is hidden.
This setting must be used with Filter control address.
When Filter control address is set to 5, input the value of the alarm count.
Alarm
(4)
counter
display
Example
Triggered alarms with alarm counts of
Description
If you input 1, the Alarm History Table displays the triggered alarms with 1 or more alarm counts; if you input 2, the Table displays the triggered alarms with 2 or more alarm counts;
1, 2, and 3 if you input 3, the Table displays the triggered alarms with 3
times
or more alarm counts.
This setting must be used with Filter control address.
Alarm
When Filter control address is set to 6, input the alarm category number.
(5) group start
Example
Description
addr.
When you input 1 to Alarm group start addr. and 3 to Alarm
Alarm (6) group end
Alarms with alarm category number 1 and 5
group end addr., the Alarm History Table displays the category 1 triggered alarms; When you input 1 to Alarm group start addr. and 5 to Alarm group end addr., the Alarm History Table displays the
addr.
category 1 and 5 triggered alarms.
16-40
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Details-2
(1)
(2)
Alarm
(3)
(4)
16
(5)
(6)
Figure 16.2.5 Details-2 property page for the Alarm History Table element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) Column display Check the columns you want to display in the element.
(2)
Column width You can adjust the width for each column.
(3)
Column title You can define the titles for each column.
(4)
Column order After checking the columns you want to display, you can use
and
to adjust the column displaying order.
November, 2018
16-41
Alarm
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description Set the column title to align left, center, or right.
16
Align Left
Title Text Alignment
Center
Align Right
Set the background color of the column title.
(5)
Title
Default
Title Background
After change
Set the text color of the column title.
Title Text Color
Default
After change
Select the display format for the date from the following options.
Date Format
(6)
Date and time
Select the display format for the time from the following options.
Time Format
Set the displaying color of the date and time.
Color
Default
After change
16-42
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Function Buttons
Alarm
(3)
16
(1) (2)
(4)
Figure 16.2.6 Function Buttons property page for the Alarm History Table element
No.
Property
Function description
Two button options are provided for the Action Control function button: Trigger alarm screen and Ack alarm.
By triggering with the function buttons, it is easier to edit the screen. You can use the functions provided by Action Control Addr. without setting the address and value.
(1)
Function Buttons
Value 0
1
Function Buttons
Description
Default; no actions.
Ack alarm
Acknowledge the selected alarms in the Alarm History Table.
If the selected alarm in the Alarm History
2
Trigger alarm screen
Table has a set alarm screen which is set to display manually, the alarm screen is
displayed when the value is 2.
(2)
Set As Default Description
Press this button to insert the default texts to the spaces above.
(3)
Default Description
Press Set As Default Description to insert the default texts to the spaces. You can also enter user-defined texts.
Default Button
(4)
Width and You can adjust the width and height of the function buttons.
Height
November, 2018
16-43
Alarm Coordinates
16
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 16.2.7 Coordinates property page for the Alarm History Table element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2) Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
16-44
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Alarm
16.3 Active Alarm List
The Active Alarm List element displays the information of the current alarms. Please refer to Table 16.3.1 for the Active Alarm List example.
Table 16.3.1 Active Alarm List example Active Alarm List
This example uses the alarm parameters in Table 16.1.1 Alarm Settings example.
16
November, 2018
16-45
Alarm
16
Active Alarm List Step 1: create an Active Alarm List element.
DOPSoft User Manual
Create Active Alarm List element
Step 2: check No. and Trigger Time. Alarm Message is checked by default. Then, the Active Alarm List will display the number of the alarm, the time the alarm is triggered, and the alarm message.
After creating the Active Alarm List element, please compile and download the element to the HMI. When the conditions are met for Alarms 6 - 10, the Active Alarm List shows the current alarm time and date, alarm No., and alarm message. No items are displayed on the Active Alarm List when the alarms are cleared.
Alarm on
Execution results
Alarm off
16-46
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual When you double-click the Active Alarm List, the property page is shown as follows.
Alarm
16
Figure 16.3.1 Properties of Active Alarm List
Table 16.3.2 Function page of Active Alarm List
Function page Preview Main Main-2
Active Alarm List Description
The Active Alarm List elements do not support multiple status values and multi-language data display. Set Background Color, Border Color, Gridline Color, Row Color, Alternating Row Color, Select Row Color, and Show Gridlines of the elements.
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing.
Details Details-2 Coordinates
Set Filter control address, Alarm category start addr., and Alarm category end addr.
Set the displaying alarm columns, width, description, and the order of the columns. Set Title Text Alignment, Title Background, Title Text Color, and format / color of the date / time. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
November, 2018
16-47
Alarm Main
16
(7)
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Figure 16.3.2 Main property page for the Active Alarm List element
16-48
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
Set the background color of the element. The default is white.
Alarm
16
(1)
Background Color
November, 2018
16-49
Alarm
No.
Property
Function description
Set the Border Color of the element. The default is gray.
16
DOPSoft User Manual
(2)
Border Color
16-50
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
The Gridline Color setting is valid only when you select Yes for Show Gridlines.
Set the Gridline Color of the element. The default is white.
Alarm
16
(3)
Gridline Color
November, 2018
16-51
Alarm
No.
16
Property
Function description
Set the color for each row of the alarm. The default is
DOPSoft User Manual .
(4)
Row Color
16-52
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
Set the color for the alternating row of the alarm. The default is
Alarm
.
16
(5)
Alternating Row Color
November, 2018
16-53
Alarm
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
The row color when you select an alarm history data.
16
Set the color of the selected row. The default is
.
(6)
Select Row Color
(7)
Show Gridlines
The default is Yes. When you select No, the Gridline Color setting is invalid.
16-54
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Alarm
(1)
16
(2)
(3)
Figure 16.3.3 Main-2 property page for the Active Alarm List element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3) Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
November, 2018
16-55
Alarm Details
16
(1)
(2)
(3)
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 16.3.4 Details property page for the Active Alarm List element
No. Property
Function description
[Use header controls to sort] does not support the sorting of the Message column.
You can specify the item for sorting with the Filter control address.
Value
Description
(1)
Filter control address
0
Default; no sorting.
1
Sort by Trigger Time.
2
Sort by Acknowledge Time.
3
Sort by Recovery Time.
4
Sort by the alarm count.
5
Sort by the alarm category.
6
Sort by the alarm No.
Alarm
This setting must be used with Filter control address.
(2)
category When Filter control address is set to 6, input the alarm category number.
start addr.
Example
Description
When you input 1 to Alarm category start addr. and 3 to Alarm
(3)
Alarm category end
addr.
Alarms with alarm category number 1 and 5
category end addr., the Alarm History Table displays the category 1 triggered alarms;
When you input 1 to Alarm category start addr. and 5 to Alarm
category end addr., the Alarm History Table displays the
category 1 and 5 triggered alarms.
16-56
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Details-2
(1)
(2)
(3)
Alarm
(4)
16
(5)
(6)
Figure 16.3.5 Details-2 property page for the Active Alarm List element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) Column display Check the columns you want to display in the element.
(2)
Column width You can adjust the width for each column.
(3)
Column title You can define the titles for each column.
(4)
Column order After checking the columns you want to display, you can use
and
to adjust the column displaying order.
November, 2018
16-57
Alarm
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description Set the column title to align left, center, or right.
16
Align Left
Title Text Alignment
Center
Align Right
Set the background color of the column title.
(5)
Title
Default
Title Background
After change
Set the text color of the column title.
Title Text Color
Default
After change
Select the display format for the date from the following options.
Date Format
(6)
Date and time
Select the display format for the time from the following options.
Time Format
16-58
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual No. Property
Function description Set the displaying color of the date and time.
(6)
Date and time
Color
Default
After change
Alarm
16
November, 2018
16-59
Alarm Coordinates
16
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 16.3.6 Coordinates property page for the Active Alarm List element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2) Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
16-60
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Alarm
16.4 Alarm Frequency Table
The Alarm Frequency Table element records and displays the occurrence times of each alarm. Please refer to Table 16.4.1 for the Alarm Frequency Table example.
Table 16.4.1 Alarm Frequency Table example Alarm Frequency Table
This example uses the alarm parameters in Table 16.1.1 Alarm Settings example.
16
November, 2018
16-61
Alarm
16
Alarm Frequency Table Step 1: create an Alarm Frequency Table element.
DOPSoft User Manual
Create Alarm Frequency Table element
Step 2: check No. and Trigger Time. Alarm Message and Alarm Counts are checked by default. Then, the Alarm Frequency Table will display the number of the alarm, the time the alarm is triggered, alarm message, and will also record the occurrence times of each alarm. Display for counting zero is also checked by default.
After creating the Alarm Frequency Table element, please compile and download the element to the HMI. When the conditions are met for Alarms 6 - 10, the Alarm Frequency Table shows the current alarm time and date, alarm number, alarm message, and alarm counts. When Display for counting zero is checked, the Alarm Frequency Table displays 0 in the Frequency column when Alarms 1 - 5 are not triggered.
After the alarm is cleared, the recorded alarm counts in the Alarm Frequency Table will not be cleared.
Execution results
Alarm on
Alarm off
16-62
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual When you double-click the Alarm Frequency Table, the property page is shown as follows.
Alarm
16
Figure 16.4.1 Properties of Alarm Frequency Table
Table 16.4.2 Function page of Alarm Frequency Table
Function page Preview Main Main-2 Details
Details-2
Coordinates
Alarm Frequency Table
Description
The Alarm Frequency Table elements do not support multiple status values and multi-language data display.
Set Background Color, Border Color, Gridline Color, Row Color, Alternating Row Color, Select Row Color, and Show Gridlines of the elements.
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing.
Set Filter control address, Alarm category start addr., and Alarm category end addr.
Set the displaying alarm columns, width, description, and the order of the columns. Set Title Text Alignment, Title Background, Title Text Color, and format / color of the date / time.
Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
November, 2018
16-63
Alarm Main
16
(7)
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Figure 16.4.2 Main property page for the Alarm Frequency Table element
16-64
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
Set the background color of the element. The default is white.
Alarm
16
(1)
Background Color
November, 2018
16-65
Alarm
No.
Property
Function description
Set the Border Color of the element. The default is gray.
16
DOPSoft User Manual
(2) Border Color
16-66
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
The Gridline Color setting is valid only when you select Yes for Show Gridlines.
Set the Gridline Color of the element. The default is white.
Alarm
16
(3) Gridline Color
November, 2018
16-67
Alarm
No.
16
Property
Function description Set the color for each row of the alarm. The default is
DOPSoft User Manual .
(4)
Row Color
16-68
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
Set the color for the alternating row of the alarm. The default is
Alarm
.
16
(5)
Alternating Row Color
November, 2018
16-69
Alarm
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
The row color when you select an alarm history data.
16
Set the color of the selected row. The default is
.
(6)
Select Row Color
(7)
Show Gridlines
The default is Yes. When you select No, the Gridline Color setting is invalid.
16-70
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Alarm
(1)
16
(2)
(3)
Figure 16.4.3 Main-2 property page for the Alarm Frequency Table element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3) Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
November, 2018
16-71
Alarm Details
16
(1)
(2)
(3)
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 16.4.4 Details property page for the Alarm Frequency Table element
No. Property
Function description
[Use header controls to sort] does not support the sorting of the Message column.
You can specify the item for sorting with Filter control address.
Value
Description
(1)
Filter control address
0
Default; no sorting.
1
Sort by Trigger Time.
2
Sort by Acknowledge Time.
3
Sort by Recovery Time.
4
Sort by the alarm count.
5
Sort by the alarm category.
6
Sort by the alarm No.
This setting must be used with Filter control address.
Alarm
When Filter control address is set to 6, input the alarm category number.
(2)
category
start addr.
Example
Description
When you input 1 to Alarm category start addr. and 3 to Alarm
(3)
Alarm category end
addr.
Alarms with alarm category number 1 and 5
category end addr., the Alarm History Table displays the category 1 triggered alarms;
When you input 1 to Alarm category start addr. and 5 to Alarm category end addr., the Alarm History Table displays the
category 1 and 5 triggered alarms.
16-72
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Details-2 (1)
(5)
Alarm
(4)
16
(2)
(3)
(6)
(7)
Figure 16.4.5 Details-2 property page for the Alarm Frequency Table element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) Column display Check the columns you want to display in the element.
(2) Column width You can adjust the width for each column.
(3)
Column title You can define the titles for each column.
(4) Column order After checking the columns you want to display, you can use
and
to
adjust the column displaying order.
November, 2018
16-73
Alarm
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
16
(5)
Property
Display for counting zero
Function description If you check this option, 0 is displayed on the Alarm Frequency Table when the alarm is not triggered; otherwise, the alarm message is not displayed when the occurrence time of the alarm is zero.
Check
Uncheck
Set the column title to align left, center, or right.
Align Left
Title Text Alignment
Center
Align Right
Set the background color of the column title.
(6)
Title
Default
Title Background
After change
Set the text color of the column title.
Title Text Color
Default
After change
16-74
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Alarm
No.
Property
Function description Select the display format for the date from the following options.
Date Format
16
Select the display format for the time from the following options.
Time Format (7) Date and time
Set the displaying color of the date and time.
Color
Default
After change
November, 2018
16-75
Alarm Coordinates
16
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 16.4.5 Coordinates property page for the Alarm Frequency Table element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2) Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
16-76
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Alarm
16.5 Alarm Moving Sign
The Alarm Moving Sign element records the alarm number, the time and date the alarm is triggered. You can also define the interval and moving distance of the Alarm Moving Sign.
The settings of this element are the same as the Alarm Moving Sign parameter settings in [Options] > [Alarm Settings]. You can use this Alarm Moving Sign element and the Alarm Moving Sign in the Alarm Settings at the same time, but the main difference is the Alarm Moving Sign mentioned in this section generates a moving sign message when an alarm is triggered regardless of the operating page you are on. In addition, both settings are independent and do not cross reference.
Please refer to Table 16.5.1 for the Alarm Moving Sign example.
Table 16.5.1 Alarm Moving Sign example Alarm Moving Sign
This example uses the alarm parameters in Table 16.1.1 Alarm Settings example.
16
November, 2018
16-77
Alarm
16
Alarm Moving Sign
DOPSoft User Manual
Step 1: create an Alarm Moving Sign element.
Step 2: check Time Format, Date Format, and Alarm No. Then, the Alarm Moving Sign will display the number of the alarm, the time and date the alarm is triggered, and alarm message. Create Alarm Moving Sign element
16-78
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Alarm
Alarm Moving Sign
After creating the Alarm Moving Sign element, please compile and download the element to the HMI. When the conditions are met for Alarms 6 - 10, the Alarm Moving Sign shows the current alarm time and date, alarm number, and alarm message.
After the alarm is cleared, the Alarm Moving Sign will not show any alarm.
16
Alarm on
Execution results
Alarm off
November, 2018
16-79
Alarm
DOPSoft User Manual
When you double-click the Alarm Moving Sign, the property page is shown as follows.
16
Figure 16.5.1 Properties of Alarm Moving Sign
Table 16.5.2 Function page of Alarm Moving Sign
Function Page Preview
Main Main-2 Coordinates
Alarm Moving Sign Description
The Alarm Moving Sign elements do not support multiple status values and multi-language data display. Set Style, Border Color, Background Color, Direction, Interval (ms), Points per time, Time Format, Date Format, Color, Alarm No., and Alarm Group.
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing.
Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
16-80
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main
(1) (2)
(3)
(4)
(7) (8) (10) (11)
Alarm
16
(5) (6) (9)
Figure 16.5.2 Main property page for the Alarm Moving Sign element
No. Property
Function description
There are four element styles to choose from: Standard, Raised, Sunken, and Transparent. You can change the appearance of the element with this setting.
(1)
Style
Standard
Raised
Sunken
Transparent
November, 2018
16-81
Alarm
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
Set the Border Color of the element. The default is gray.
16
Border Color
(2) Border Color
Set the background color of the element. The default is white.
(3)
Background Color
Background Color
16-82
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
There are four display directions to choose from: Left, Right, Up, and Down.
Alarm
16
Left
(4)
Direction
Right
Up
Down
November, 2018
16-83
Alarm
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
Interval is the time interval between motions of the Alarm Moving Sign. Unit: ms. The moving distance is determined by the setting of Points per time.
16
(5) Interval (ms)
(6)
Points per The greater the number of points, the greater the distance each time the text
time
moves. The setting range is 1 - 50 pixels.
Two time formats are supported.
(7) Time Format
Seven date formats are supported.
(8) Date Format
Set the displaying color of the date and time. The default is
.
(9)
Color
If you check Alarm No., the element shows the alarm number when an alarm is triggered.
(10) Alarm No.
16-84
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Alarm
No. Property
Function description
If you check Alarm Group, the element shows the alarm group number when an alarm is triggered.
(11) Alarm Group
16
November, 2018
16-85
Alarm Main-2
16
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 16.5.3 Main-2 property page for the Alarm Moving Sign element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3) Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
16-86
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Details
(1) (2) (3)
Alarm
16
Figure 16.5.4 Details property page for the Alarm Moving Sign element
No. Property
Function description
[Use header controls to sort] does not support the sorting of the Message column.
You can specify the item for sorting with Filter control address.
Value
Description
(1)
Filter control address
0
Default; no sorting.
1
Sort by Trigger Time.
2
Sort by Acknowledge Time.
3
Sort by Recovery Time.
4
Sort by the alarm count.
5
Sort by the alarm category.
6
Sort by the alarm No.
Alarm
This setting must be used with Filter control address.
(2)
category When Filter control address is set to 6, input the alarm category number.
start addr.
Example
Description
When you input 1 to Alarm category start addr. and 3 to Alarm
(3)
Alarm category end
addr.
Alarms with alarm category number 1 and 5
category end addr., the Alarm History Table displays the category 1 triggered alarms;
When you input 1 to Alarm category start addr. and 5 to Alarm
category end addr., the Alarm History Table displays the
category 1 and 5 triggered alarms.
November, 2018
16-87
Alarm Coordinates
16
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 16.5.5 Coordinates property page for the Alarm Moving Sign element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2) Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
16-88
November, 2018
Keypad
This chapter provides the usage and setting details for the Keypad elements.
17.1 Keypad(1) ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 17-2 17.2 Keypad(2) �����������������������������������������������������������������������������������17-13 17.3 Keypad(3) �����������������������������������������������������������������������������������17-24
November, 2018
17-1
Keypad
DOPSoft User Manual
Keypad(1)
Three types of Keypad elements are provided to use with the Numeric Entry element, Character
17
Entry element, and Barcode Input element. For Numeric Entry and Character Entry elements, the Input Mode must be selected as Active Non-Popup or Touch Non-Popup; while the Input Mode for the Barcode Input element must be selected as Active. The Interlock Addresses for
these three elements must be set up at the same time, but if Touch Non-Popup is selected as the
Input Mode, the Interlock Address setting is not required. Please refer to Chapter 13 Input for
more setting details.
Keypad(1) is a decimal keypad, which you can customize the font, size, color, alignment, and etc. It also provides a variety of modes for selection, including ESC, ENT, CLR, DEL, and ASCII. Keypad(1) is a grouped element, but you can right-click on the element to ungroup the element and separate the buttons on the keypad. You can also double-click the buttons for editing and making changes.
17-2
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Right-click on the grouped element and select UnGroup. Grouped
Keypad
17
Not grouped November, 2018
17-3
Keypad When you double-click Keypad(1), the property page is shown as follows.
DOPSoft User Manual
17
Figure 17.1.1 Properties of Keypad(1)
Table 17.1.1 Function page of Keypad(1)
Function page
Preview
Main Main-2
Text Picture
Keypad(1) Description
Keypad(1) elements do not support multiple state values, but can edit multi-language data display. Set the Style, Foreground Color, Display, and Mode of the element. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the text content, font, size, color, format, zoom, and alignment type. Set the Picture Bank Name, Alignment, Stretch Mode, and Transparent Color.
17-4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main (3)
(4)
(1) (2)
Keypad
17
Figure 17.1.2 Main property page for the Keypad(1) element
No. Property
Function description
When you press a button on Keypad(1), this will be the displaying value of that button.
(1)
Display
November, 2018
17-5
Keypad
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
17
(2)
(3)
Property Mode Style
Function description
You can select a mode to define the action of a button. The 15 available modes include <ESC>, <ENT>, <CLR>, <DEL>, <BKSP>, <Home>, <End>, <Insert>, <Page Up>, <Page Down>, <Left>, <Right>, <Up>, <Down>, and <ASCII>. <ESC>: cancel the entry. If the Keypad element is on a sub-screen, executing
ESC will also close the sub-screen. <ENT>: input the entry. <CLR>: clear a string of characters. <DEL>: delete a single character. <BKSP>: delete a single character. <Home>: move the input cursor to the beginning of that line. <End>: move the input cursor to the end of that line. <Insert>: switch between insert and replace. <Page Up>: switch the current page to the previous page. <Page Down>: switch the current page to the next page. <Left>: move the input cursor to the left by one character. <Right>: move the input cursor to the right by one character. <Up>: move the input cursor up a line. <Down>: move the input cursor down a line. <ASCII>: you can specify the input code.
There are two element styles to choose from: Standard and Raised. You can change the appearance of the element with this setting.
Standard
Raised
Set the foreground color of the element.
(4)
Foreground Color
Foreground Color
17-6
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Keypad
(1)
17
(2)
(3)
Figure 17.1.3 Main-2 property page for the Keypad(1) element
November, 2018
17-7
Keypad
DOPSoft User Manual
No. (1)
17
Property Transparent
Function description
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
The Smooth animation function is available for this element. After ungrouping the Keypad elements, you can activate the Smooth
animation function per button. When you activate the Smooth animation function, the buttons with this setting will enlarge when you press it.
Yes
(2)
Smooth animation
No (3) Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
17-8
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Text
(1)
(4) (3)
Keypad
(2)
17
(5)
Figure 17.1.4 Text property page for the Keypad(1) element
No.
Property
Function description
You can enter the text to display in this box.
(1)
Text
(2)
Text
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, zoom, alignment, and bold / italic / underline for the texts.
(3)
Edit multi-language If you have added multi-language texts, the Text page allows you to edit
text
multi-language data.
(4)
Process the text This function is not supported as the Keypad element does not have multiple
of all states
states.
(5)
Process text properties of all
states
This function is not supported as the Keypad element does not have multiple states.
November, 2018
17-9
Keypad Picture
17
(1)
(3)
DOPSoft User Manual (2)
Figure 17.1.5 Picture property page for the Keypad(1) element
17-10
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Keypad
No. Property
Function description
The Picture Bank Name default is None. To set the picture display, use the drop-down list to select the picture bank provided by the software and then select the picture you need.
17
(1)
Picture Bank Name
November, 2018
17-11
Keypad
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
You can use the alignment options to set how pictures are aligned.
17
Alignment
The Stretch Mode options include Stretch All, Stretch 1:1, and Actual Size.
Stretch All
Stretch 1:1
Actual Size
If you select Stretch 1:1, If you select Actual Size,
(2)
If you select Stretch All, the picture displays in 1:1 regardless of the element
the picture fills the full
size based on the
size, the picture displays
element display area.
element width and
in its actual size in the
length.
element display area.
Stretch Mode
If you check [Process pictures of all states], assume that the elements have multiple states and some pictures do not fill the full element display area, you can use this function to process all pictures instead of setting them one by one, which saves the editing time.
Specify a color in the picture and turn this color into transparent.
is for
selecting the transparent color. If you select the white part in the calendar, the
software changes the white part into transparent, which becomes identical to the
element foreground color.
(3)
Transparent Color
17-12
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Keypad
Keypad(2)
Keypad(2) is a hexadecimal keypad, which you can customize the font, size, color, alignment, and etc. It also provides a variety of modes for selection, including ESC, ENT, CLR, DEL, and ASCII. Keypad(2) is a grouped element, but you can right-click on the element to ungroup the element and separate the buttons on the keypad. You can also double-click the buttons for editing and making changes.
17
November, 2018
17-13
Keypad
17
DOPSoft User Manual
Right-click on the grouped element and select UnGroup. Grouped
Not grouped 17-14
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual When you double-click Keypad(2), the property page is shown as follows.
Keypad
17
Figure 17.2.1 Properties of Keypad(2)
Table 17.2.1 Function page of Keypad(2)
Function page
Preview
Main Main-2
Text Picture
Keypad(2) Description
Keypad(2) elements do not support multiple state values, but can edit multi-language data display. Set the Style, Foreground Color, Display, and Mode of the element. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the text content, font, size, color, format, zoom, and alignment type. Set the Picture Bank Name, Alignment, Stretch Mode, and Transparent Color.
November, 2018
17-15
Keypad Main
17
(3)
(4)
DOPSoft User Manual (1) (2)
Figure 17.2.2 Main property page for the Keypad(2) element
No. Property
Function description
When you press a button on Keypad(2), this will be the displaying value of that button.
(1)
Display
17-16
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Keypad
No. Property
Function description
You can select a mode to define the action of a button. The 15 available modes include <ESC>, <ENT>, <CLR>, <DEL>, <BKSP>, <Home>, <End>, <Insert>, <Page Up>, <Page Down>, <Left>, <Right>, <Up>, <Down>, and <ASCII>.
<ESC>: cancel the entry. If the Keypad element is on a sub-screen, executing ESC will also close the sub-screen.
<ENT>: input the entry.
<CLR>: clear a string of characters.
<DEL>: delete a single character.
<BKSP>: delete a single character.
(2)
Mode
<Home>: move the input cursor to the beginning of that line.
<End>: move the input cursor to the end of that line.
<Insert>: switch between insert and replace.
<Page Up>: switch the current page to the previous page.
<Page Down>: switch the current page to the next page.
<Left>: move the input cursor to the left by one character.
<Right>: move the input cursor to the right by one character.
<Up>: move the input cursor up a line.
<Down>: move the input cursor down a line.
<ASCII>: you can specify the input code.
There are two element styles to choose from: Standard and Raised. You can change the appearance of the element with this setting.
(3)
Style
Standard
Raised
17
Set the foreground color of the element.
(4)
Foreground Color
Foreground Color
November, 2018
17-17
Keypad Main-2
17
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 17.2.3 Main-2 property page for the Keypad(2) element
17-18
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Keypad
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
The Smooth animation function is available for this element.
After ungrouping the Keypad elements, you can activate the Smooth animation function per button. When you activate the Smooth animation function, the buttons with this setting will enlarge when you press it.
17
Yes
(2)
Smooth animation
No (3) Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
November, 2018
17-19
Keypad Text
17
(4)
DOPSoft User Manual
(2) (1)
(5) (3)
Figure 17.2.4 Text property page for the Keypad(2) element
No.
Property
Function description
You can enter the text to display in this box.
(1)
Text
(2)
Text Property
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, zoom, alignment, and bold / italic / underline for the texts.
(3)
Edit multi-language text
If you have added multi-language texts, the Text page allows you to edit multi-language data.
(4)
Process the text of all states
This function is not supported as the Keypad element does not have multiple states.
(5)
Process text
This function is not supported as the Keypad element does not have multiple
properties of all states states.
17-20
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Picture (1)
(3)
Keypad
17
(2)
Figure 17.2.5 Picture property page for the Keypad(2) element
November, 2018
17-21
Keypad
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
17
Property
Function description
The Picture Bank Name default is None. To set the picture display, use the drop-down list to select the picture bank provided by the software and then select the picture you need.
(1)
Picture Bank Name
17-22
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
You can use the alignment options to set how pictures are aligned.
Alignment
Keypad
17
The Stretch Mode options include Stretch All, Stretch 1:1, and Actual Size.
Stretch All
Stretch 1:1
Actual Size
If you select Stretch 1:1, If you select Actual Size,
(2)
If you select Stretch All, the picture displays in 1:1 regardless of the element
the picture fills the full
size based on the
size, the picture displays
element display area.
element width and
in its actual size in the
length.
element display area.
Stretch Mode
If you check [Process pictures of all states], assume that the elements have multiple states and some pictures do not fill the full element display area, you can use this function to process all pictures instead of setting them one by one, which saves the editing time.
Specify a color in the picture and turn this color into transparent.
is for
selecting the transparent color. If you select the white part in the calendar, the
software changes the white part into transparent, which becomes identical to the
element foreground color.
(3)
Transparent Color
November, 2018
17-23
Keypad
DOPSoft User Manual
Keypad(3)
Keypad(3) is an alphanumeric input keypad, which you can customize the font, size, color,
17
alignment, and etc. It also provides a variety of modes for selection, including ESC, ENT, CLR, DEL, and ASCII. Keypad(3) is a grouped element, but you can right-click on the element to ungroup the element and separate the buttons on the keypad. You can also double-click the
buttons for editing and making changes.
Right-click on the grouped element and select UnGroup. Grouped
Not grouped
17-24
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual When you double-click Keypad(3), the property page is shown as follows.
Keypad
17
Figure 17.3.1 Properties of Keypad(3)
Table 17.3.1 Function page of Keypad(3)
Function page
Preview
Main Main-2
Text Picture
Keypad(3) Description
Keypad(3) elements do not support multiple state values, but can edit multi-language data display. Set the Style, Foreground Color, Display, and Mode of the element. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the text content, font, size, color, format, zoom, and alignment type. Set the Picture Bank Name, Alignment, Stretch Mode, and Transparent Color.
November, 2018
17-25
Keypad Main
17
(3)
(4)
DOPSoft User Manual (1) (2)
Figure 17.3.2 Main property page for the Keypad(3) element
No. Property
Function description
When you press a button on Keypad(3), this will be the displaying value of that button.
(1)
Display
17-26
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Keypad
No. Property
Function description
You can select a mode to define the action of a button. The 15 available modes include <ESC>, <ENT>, <CLR>, <DEL>, <BKSP>, <Home>, <End>, <Insert>, <Page Up>, <Page Down>, <Left>, <Right>, <Up>, <Down>, and <ASCII>.
<ESC>: cancel the entry. If the Keypad element is on a sub-screen, executing ESC will also close the sub-screen.
<ENT>: input the entry.
<CLR>: clear a string of characters.
<DEL>: delete a single character.
<BKSP>: delete a single character.
(2)
Mode
<Home>: move the input cursor to the beginning of that line.
<End>: move the input cursor to the end of that line.
<Insert>: switch between insert and replace.
<Page Up>: switch the current page to the previous page.
<Page Down>: switch the current page to the next page.
<Left>: move the input cursor to the left by one character.
<Right>: move the input cursor to the right by one character.
<Up>: move the input cursor up a line.
<Down>: move the input cursor down a line.
<ASCII>: you can specify the input code.
There are two element styles to choose from: Standard and Raised. You can change the appearance of the element with this setting.
(3)
Style
Standard
Raised
17
Set the foreground color of the element.
(4)
Foreground Color
Foreground Color
November, 2018
17-27
Keypad Main-2
17
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 17.3.3 Main-2 property page for the Keypad(3) element
17-28
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Keypad
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
The Smooth animation function is available for this element.
After ungrouping the Keypad elements, you can activate the Smooth animation function per button. When you activate the Smooth animation function, the buttons with this setting will enlarge when you press it.
17
Yes
(2)
Smooth animation
No (3) Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
November, 2018
17-29
Keypad Text
17
(1)
DOPSoft User Manual (2)
(4) (5)
(3)
Figure 17.3.4 Text property page for the Keypad(3) element
No.
Property
Function description
You can enter the text to display in this box.
(1)
Text
(2)
Text Property
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, zoom, alignment, and bold / italic / underline for the texts.
(3)
Edit multi-language If you have added multi-language texts, the Text page allows you to edit
text
multi-language data.
(4)
Process the text of This function is not supported as the Keypad element does not have multiple
all states
states.
(5)
Process text properties of all
states
This function is not supported as the Keypad element does not have multiple states.
17-30
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Picture (1)
(3)
Keypad
17
(2)
Figure 17.3.5 Picture property page for the Keypad(3) element
November, 2018
17-31
Keypad
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
17
Property
Function description
The Picture Bank Name default is None. To set the picture display, use the drop-down list to select the picture bank provided by the software and then select the picture you need.
(1)
Picture Bank Name
17-32
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
You can use the alignment options to set how pictures are aligned.
Alignment
Keypad
17
The Stretch Mode options include Stretch All, Stretch 1:1, and Actual Size.
Stretch All
Stretch 1:1
Actual Size
(2)
If you select Stretch All,
If you select Stretch 1:1, If you select Actual Size, the picture displays in 1:1 regardless of the element
the picture fills the full
size based on the
size, the picture displays
element display area.
element width and
in its actual size in the
length.
element display area.
Stretch Mode
If you check [Process pictures of all states], assume that the elements have multiple states and some pictures do not fill the full element display area, you can use this function to process all pictures instead of setting them one by one, which saves the editing time.
Specifies a color in the picture and turn this color into transparent.
is for
selecting the transparent color. If you select the white part in the calendar, the
software changes the white part into transparent, which becomes identical to the
element foreground color.
(3)
Transparent Color
November, 2018
17-33
Keypad
17
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
DOPSoft User Manual
17-34
November, 2018
Analog
This chapter provides the usage and setting details for the Slider elements.
Slider ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 18-2
November, 2018
18-1
Analog
DOPSoft User Manual
Slider
18
You can use the Slider element to drag and adjust the value easily. Please refer to Table 18.1.1 for the Slider element example.
Table 18.1.1 Slider element example Slider
Step 1: create a Slider element with its Write Address as $100, then set the Minimum and Maximum as 0 and 100 respectively.
Create Slider element
Step 2: create a Numeric Display element with its Read Address as $1357. Read Address
Create Numeric Display element
Numeric Display element
Settings
After creating the elements, please compile and download the elements to the HMI. When you move the Slider element, the Numeric Display element will show the value corresponding to the movement of the Slider element.
Execution results
18-2
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual When you double-click the Slider element, the property page is shown as follows.
Analog
18
Figure 18.1.1 Properties of the Slider element
Table 18.1.2 Function page of the Slider element
Function page Preview
Main
Main-2 Text
Picture Coordinates
Slider Description
Slider elements do not support multiple state values, but can edit multi-language data display. Set the Write Address, Read Address, Write Offset Address, Read Offset Address, Data Type, Data Format, Minimum, and Maximum. Set the Direction, Starting Point, Slider Width, Slider Button Length, Border Color, Foreground Color, and Background Color.
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing.
Set the text content, font, size, color, format, zoom, and alignment type. Set the Picture Bank Name, Alignment, Stretch Mode, and Transparent Color. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
November, 2018
18-3
Analog Main
18
(1)
DOPSoft User Manual
(2) (3)
(5)
(12)
(4)
(6)
(7)
(9)
(8)
(10)
(11)
Figure 18.1.2 Main property page for the Slider element
No. Property
Function description
Write Address
You can select the internal memory or the controller register address.
The input memory type has to be Word.
Read Address
Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Chapter 5 Buttons for details.
(1)
Write Offset
Address Please refer to Appendix D for instructions on writing and reading the offset address.
Read Offset
Address
Data Type includes Word and Double Word.
(2) Data Type
18-4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
When the Data Type is Word, the supported data formats are as follows:
Analog
18
(3) Data Format When the Data Type is Double Word, the supported data formats are as follows:
The allowable ranges for the minimum and maximum values vary based on the selected data type, integer digits, and fractional digits. In the following example, no fractional digit is set.
Data Type
Data Format
Allowable range
BCD
0 to 9999
Signed BCD
-999 to 9999
(4)
Minimum / Maximum
Word
Signed Decimal Unsigned Decimal
Hex
-32768 to 32767 0 to 65535 0 to 0xFFFF
BCD
0 to 99999999
Signed BCD
-9999999 to 99999999
Double Word
Signed Decimal
-2147483648 to 2147483647
Unsigned Decimal 0 to 4294967295
Hex
0 to 0xFFFFFFFF
November, 2018
18-5
Analog
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
18
Property
Function description
The options for Direction include Horizontal and Vertical. Horizontal means the Slider button moves horizontally (left and right); Vertical means the Slider button moves vertically (up and down).
(5) Direction
Horizontal
Vertical
Starting Point varies depending on the selected Direction. This is the starting point position of the Slider button after the Slider element is loaded.
The Starting Point is Left or Right when the Direction is Horizontal; the Starting Point is Bottom or Top when the Direction is Vertical.
Horizontal Left
(6)
Starting Point
Right
18-6
Vertical
Bottom
Top
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Analog
No. Property
Function description
The height of the Slider element determines the maximum value of the Slider Width.
(7) Slider Width
18
The width of the Slider element determines the maximum value of the Slider Button Length.
(8)
Slider Button Length
Set the element border color. (9) Border Color
Border Color
November, 2018
18-7
Analog
No. Property
Function description
Set the foreground color of the element.
18
Foreground Color
DOPSoft User Manual
(10)
Foreground Color
Set the background color of the element.
(11)
Background Color
Background Color
18-8
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Analog
No. Property
Function description
If you have set the language data, you can use the language used for the element to edit the displaying text property, etc.
18
(12) Language
November, 2018
18-9
Analog Main-2
18
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 18.1.3 Main-2 property page for the Slider element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3) Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
18-10
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Text
(1)
Analog
(2)
18
(4) (5)
(3)
Figure 18.1.4 Text property page for the Slider element
No.
Property
Function description
You can enter the text to display in this box.
(1)
Text
As long as the element allows text input, you can click the element and press the space key to start editing the text immediately.
(2)
Text property
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, zoom, alignment, and bold / italic / underline for the text.
(3)
Edit multi-language
text
If you have added multi-language texts, the Text page allows you to edit multi-language data.
November, 2018
18-11
Analog
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
(4)
Process the text This function is not supported as the Slider element does not have multiple of all states states.
18
(5)
Process text properties of all
states
This function is not supported as the Slider element does not have multiple states.
18-12
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Picture
(1) (2) (3)
Analog
18
Figure 18.1.5 Picture property page for the Slider element
November, 2018
18-13
Analog
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
18
Property
Function description
The Picture Bank Name default is None. To set the picture display, use the drop-down list to select the picture bank provided by the software and then select the picture you need.
(1)
Picture Bank Name
18-14
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
You can use the alignment options to set how pictures are aligned.
Alignment
Analog
18
The Stretch Mode options include Stretch All, Stretch 1:1, and Actual Size.
Stretch All
Stretch 1:1
Actual Size
(2)
If you select Stretch All, the picture fills the full element display area.
If you select Stretch 1:1, the picture displays in 1:1 size based on the element width and length.
If you select Actual Size, regardless of the element size, the picture displays in its actual size in the element display area.
Stretch Mode
If you check [Process pictures of all states], assume that the elements have multiple states and some pictures do not fill the full element display area, you can use this function to process all pictures instead of setting them one by one, which saves the editing time.
Specify a color in the picture and turn this color into transparent.
is for selecting
the transparent color. If you select the white part in the calendar, the software
changes the white part into transparent, which becomes identical to the element
foreground color.
(3)
Transparent Color
November, 2018
18-15
Analog Coordinates
18
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 18.1.6 Coordinates property page for the Slider element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2) Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
18-16
November, 2018
List
This chapter provides the usage and setting details for the List elements.
19.1 ComboBox ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 19-2 19.2 ListBox ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������19-23 19.3 GridBox ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������19-42 19.4 PDF Viewer ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������19-86
November, 2018
19-1
List
DOPSoft User Manual
ComboBox
19
ComboBox provides display messages in multiple states allowing users to select the options for execution with the drop-down function. The functions of the same type are grouped in the same drop-down list, so only the currently selected items are displayed in the ComboBox
Please refer to Table 19.1.1 for the ComboBox example.
Table 19.1.1 ComboBox example
ComboBox Create a ComboBox with its Write Address as $10 and select Word for Data Type,
then set the State Counts to 16 and Number of Rows to 5.
On the Text page, edit the text messages to be displayed for the 16 states which are the values of A to P respectively.
Create ComboBox
element
19-2
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
List
ComboBox Create a Numeric Display button, set its Read Address as $10 and complete the settings.
Write Address
19
Create Numeric Display element
Numeric Display
Settings
After creating the elements, please compile and download the elements to the HMI. When you press the drop-down list, the displaying number of rows corresponds to the set value of Number of Rows, which in this example is 5 rows, so A, B, C, D, and E are displayed. And the Numeric Display element will show the corresponding state value of the item you selected in the ComboBox.
Execution results
November, 2018
19-3
List
DOPSoft User Manual
ComboBox supports four data types as shown in Table 19.1.2. If you need to add or reduce the total number of states, you can simply add or reduce it from State Counts in the property page.
19
Table 19.1.2 Data Type of ComboBox
Data Type
ComboBox State Counts
If the Data Type is Word, you can set 1 to 256 states for the State Counts.
Word
LSB is to first convert the data in the register to binary data, then use the lowest non-zero bit to determine the current state of the object.
If the Data Type is LSB, you can set 1 to 16 states, except for State 0.
LSB / LSB To display State 0, please select LSB (Support State 0). (Support State 0)
If you selected LSB, the element is black when the state is 0.
When the Data Type is LSB or LSB (Support State 0), the memory address is also in Word as the unit.
19-4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
List
Data Type
LSB / LSB (Support State 0)
ComboBox
State Counts
The examples in the following table show how the state value is determined with the lowest non-zero bit after converting from decimal value to binary value. There are also examples demonstrating how the software determines the displaying state value with the lowest bit when the decimal values are 3 and 7.
Decimal
Binary
State value
0
0000000000000000
State = 0 when all bits are 0. Note: LSB (Support State 0) must be selected.
1
0000000000000001 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State = 1.
2
0000000000000010 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 1, State = 2.
3
0000000000000011 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State = 1.
4
0000000000000100 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 2, State = 3.
7
0000000000000111 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State = 1.
8
0000000000001000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 3, State = 4.
16 0000000000010000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 4, State = 5.
32 0000000000100000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 5, State = 6.
64 0000000001000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 6, State = 7.
128 0000000010000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 7, State = 8.
256 0000000100000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 8, State = 9.
512 0000001000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 9, State = 10.
1024 0000010000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 10, State = 11.
2048 0000100000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 11, State = 12.
4096 0001000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 12, State = 13.
8192 0010000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 13, State = 14.
16384 0100000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 14, State = 15.
32768 1000000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 15, State = 16.
If the Data Type is Bit, only 2 states are available for the State Counts.
19
Bit
November, 2018
19-5
List
DOPSoft User Manual
When you double-click ComboBox, the property page is shown as follows.
19
Figure 19.1.1 Properties of ComboBox
Table 19.1.3 Function page of the ComboBox element
Function page Preview
Main
Main-2 Text
Details Macro Coordinates
ComboBox Description
ComboBox supports multiple state values and multi-language data display.
Set the Write Address, Read Address, Write Offset Address, Read Offset Address, Data Type, Data Format, and State Counts. Set the Border Color, Background Color, and Foreground Color. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the text content, font, size, color, format, zoom, and alignment type. Set the Interlock State, Interlock Address, Trigger Mode, Trigger Addr., Invisible Address, User Security Level, Set Low Security, and Confirm Window. Set Before Execute Macro and After Execute Macro. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
19-6
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main (1) (8) (9)
(10)
List
(2)
19
(3)
(4) (5)
(6) (7)
Figure 19.1.2 Main property page for the ComboBox element
November, 2018
19-7
List
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
19 (1)
(2)
Property
Write Address
Read Address
Write Offset Address
Read Offset Address Data Type
Function description You can select the internal memory or the controller register address.
The input memory type varies depending on the selected data type, including Word, LSB, or Bit, as shown in Table 19.1.2. Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Chapter 5 Buttons for details.
Please refer to Appendix D for instructions on writing and reading the offset address.
There are four data types available: Bit, Word, LSB, and LSB (Support State 0). Please refer to Table 19.1.2 for details. You can only select the Data Format when the Data Type is Word. There are four types of Data Format: BCD, Signed Decimal, Unsigned
Decimal, and Hexadecimal.
(3)
Data Format
Set the State Counts for the ComboBox element. If the Data Type is Word,
you can select 1 - 256 states; if the Data Type is LSB, you can select 16 states;
(4)
State Counts if the Data Type is LSB (Support State 0), you can select 17 states; and if the
Data Type is Bit, you can select 2 states. Please refer to Table 19.1.2 for
details.
19-8
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
Set the displaying number of rows when you press the drop-down list. The default is 5 and the maximum is 15 rows.
List
19
Display 5 rows
(5) Number of Rows
Display 15 rows
Set the element border color.
(6)
Border Color
Border Color
November, 2018
19-9
List
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
Set the background color of the element.
19
(7) Background Color
Background Color
By switching the State, you can preview or change the settings of each button element state.
(8)
State
If you have set the language data, you can use the language used for the element to edit the displaying text property, etc.
(9)
Language
19-10
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
List
No.
Property
Function description
Record the button actions to be executed. The record is also written in the CSV file of the Operation Log Table so users can know what actions have been done.
19
(10)
Element description
November, 2018
19-11
List Main-2
19
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 19.1.3 Main-2 property page for the ComboBox element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2) Smooth animation The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3)
Anti-aliasing
The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
19-12
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Text (1)
(4)
List
(2)
19
(5) (3)
Figure 19.1.4 Text property page for the ComboBox element
No. Property
Function description
You can enter the text to display in this box.
(1)
Text
As long as the element allows text input, you can click the element and press the space key to start editing the text immediately.
(2)
Text property
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, zoom, alignment, and bold / italic / underline for the texts.
November, 2018
19-13
List
DOPSoft User Manual
19
No. Property
Function description
(3)
Edit multi-language
text
If you have added multi-language texts, the Text page allows you to edit multi-language data.
This function batch changes the text of the specified state. Please see the following example:
1. Enter the text "123" for State 0 and "234" for State 1.
2. Select State 0. 3. Execute Process the text of all states and the text of State 1 is changed to
"123".
Before
change (1)
Process the
(4)
text of all
states
After
(3)
change
(2)
This function batch changes the text properties of the specified state. Items included in the text property are shown in the figure below.
Process text (5) properties of
all states
Please see the following example: 1. Enter the text "Delta" for State 0 and "HMI" for State 1. Select Segoe Script for
the text font of State 0 and Arial for the text font of State 1. 2. Select State 0. 3. Execute Process text properties of all states and the text font of State 1 is
changed to Segoe Script.
19-14
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual No. Property
Function description
Before change
Process text (5) properties of
all states
List (1)
19
(1)
After change
(3) (2)
November, 2018
19-15
List Details
19
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Figure 19.1.5 Details property page for the ComboBox element
19-16
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
List
No. Property
Function description
Interlock State
Interlock Address is for enabling the operation of another element and has to be used with Interlock State. If Interlock State is set to Off, it means the Interlock Address is operable when this Interlock State is off; on the other hand, if Interlock State is set to On, the Interlock Address is operable when this Interlock State is on.
Create a button and set its address to $8.0. Then, set the Interlock Address to $8.0 for the ComboBox which address is $100.
In order for the ComboBox to obtain the correct state value after you press it, you must first press $8.0 to enable the action of the ComboBox.
(1)
19
Interlock Address
Trigger Mode
Trigger Modes include Before Writing and After Writing.
Triggering action
Before Writing
Trigger Addr. must be set to on before the value changes.
After Writing
Value is changed before the Trigger Addr. is set to on.
The triggering function only switches the set Trigger Addr. to on, so if triggering again is required, you need to set the Trigger Addr. to off.
Flowchart of Before Writing:
Flowchart of After Writing:
(2)
Trigger Addr.
November, 2018
19-17
List
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
When Invisible Address is set to On, the button element is invisible and you cannot execute its set functions.
19
Invisible Address is off
Invisible Address is on
Element is invisible
(3)
Invisible Address
User (4) Security
Level
You can use this function to set the permission level for pressing the element; this operation is only available to users with the same set security level or higher.
After you set the User Security Level and press the element, a password input window pops up to confirm whether the security level password is correct (you can modify this password with the Password Table element, please refer to Section 5.7.2 Password Table Setup).
19-18
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
List
No. Property
Function description
(4)
Set Low Security
19
If you specify Set Low Security to Yes, the HMI automatically sets the security level to the lowest each time you enter the password. Next time you press the element, you will be asked again to enter the password for the corresponding security level.
If Confirm Window is set to Yes, after you press the element, the following window will pop up to confirm if you want to execute the action of this button.
(5)
Confirm Window
November, 2018
19-19
List Macro
19
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) Figure 19.1.6 Macro property page for the ComboBox element
19-20
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
List
No.
Property
Function description
Before Execute Macro
When you press the button element, the HMI will first execute the macro commands, then execute the action of the button. However, if the state of the button is not changed by pressing it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI will not execute the macro commands.
After Execute Macro
When you press the button element, the HMI will first execute the action of the button, then execute the macro commands. However, if the state of the button is not changed by pressing it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI will not execute the macro commands.
Flowchart of Before Execute Macro: Flowchart of After Execute Macro:
19
(1)
November, 2018
19-21
List Coordinates
19
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 19.1.7 Coordinates property page for the ComboBox element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2) Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
19-22
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
List
ListBox
Same as the ComboBox, the ListBox provides display messages in multiple states, but the ListBox allows users to view and select the options in a more intuitive way. Please refer to Table 19.2.1 for the ListBox example.
Table 19.2.1 ListBox example ListBox
1. Create a ListBox element with its Write Address as $10 and select Word for Data Type, then set the State Counts to 16.
19
2. On the Text page, edit the text messages to be displayed for the 16 states which are the characters of A to P respectively.
Create ListBox element
November, 2018
19-23
List
DOPSoft User Manual
ListBox Create a Numeric Display button, set its Write Address as $2468, and complete the settings.
19
Read Address
Create Numeric Display element
Numeric Display Element
Settings
After creating the elements, please compile and download the elements to the HMI. And the Numeric Display element will show the corresponding state value of the item you selected in the ListBox element.
Execution results
19-24
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
List
ListBox supports four data types as shown in Table 19.2.2. If you need to add or reduce the total number of states, you can simply add or reduce it from State Counts in the property page.
Data Type
Table 19.2.2 Data Type of ListBox
ListBox State Counts
If the Data Type is Word, you can set 1 to 256 states for the State Counts.
19
Word
LSB is to first convert the data in the register to binary data, then use the lowest non-zero bit to determine the current state of the object.
If the Data Type is LSB, you can set 1 to 16 states, except for State 0.
LSB / LSB (Support State 0)
To display State 0, please select LSB (Support State 0).
If you selected LSB, the element is black when the state is 0.
When the Data Type is LSB or LSB (Support State 0), the memory address is also in Word as the unit.
November, 2018
19-25
List
DOPSoft User Manual
19
Data Type
LSB / LSB (Support State 0)
ListBox
State Counts
The examples in the following table show how the state value is determined with the lowest non-zero bit after converting from decimal value to binary value. There are also examples demonstrating how the software determines the displaying state value with the lowest bit when the decimal values are 3 and 7.
Decimal
Binary
State value
0
0000000000000000
State = 0 when all bits are 0. Note: LSB (Support State 0) must be selected.
1
0000000000000001 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State = 1.
2
0000000000000010 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 1, State = 2.
3
0000000000000011 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State = 1.
4
0000000000000100 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 2, State = 3.
7
0000000000000111 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 0, State = 1.
8
0000000000001000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 3, State = 4.
16 0000000000010000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 4, State = 5.
32 0000000000100000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 5, State = 6.
64 0000000001000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 6, State = 7.
128 0000000010000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 7, State = 8.
256 0000000100000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 8, State = 9.
512 0000001000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 9, State = 10.
1024 0000010000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 10, State = 11.
2048 0000100000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 11, State = 12.
4096 0001000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 12, State = 13.
8192 0010000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 13, State = 14.
16384 0100000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 14, State = 15.
32768 1000000000000000 The lowest non-zero bit is bit 15, State = 16. If the Data Type is Bit, only 2 states are available for the State Counts.
Bit
19-26
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual When you double-click ListBox, the property page is shown as follows.
List
19
Figure 19.2.1 Properties of ListBox
Table 19.2.3 Function page of the ListBox element
Function page Preview
Main
Main-2 Text
Details Macro Coordinates
ListBox Description
ListBox supports multiple state values and multi-language data display.
Set the Write Address, Read Address, Write Offset Address, Read Offset Address, Data Type, Data Format, and State Counts. Set the Background Color and Foreground Color.
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the text content, font, size, color, format, zoom, and alignment type. Set the Interlock State, Interlock Address, Trigger Mode, Trigger Addr., Invisible Address, User Security Level, Set Low Security, and Confirm Window. Set Before Execute Macro and After Execute Macro. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
November, 2018
19-27
List Main
19
(1)
(8) (9)
(10) (7)
DOPSoft User Manual
(4)
(5) (6)
(2) (3)
Figure 19.2.2 Main property page for the ListBox element
No.
Property
Function description
You can select the internal memory or the controller register address.
Write Address
The input memory type varies depending on the selected data type,
including Word, LSB, or Bit, as shown in Table 19.2.2.
(1)
Read Address
Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Chapter 5 Buttons for details.
Write Offset Address
Read Offset Address
Please refer to Appendix D for instructions on writing and reading the offset address.
(2)
Data Type
There are four data types available: Bit, Word, LSB, and LSB (Support State 0). Please refer to Table 19.2.2 for details.
19-28
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
You can only select the Data Format when the Data Type is Word.
There are four types of Data Format: BCD, Signed Decimal, Unsigned Decimal, and Hexadecimal.
(3) Data Format
List
19
Set the State Counts for the ListBox element. If the Data Type is Word, you can
(4)
State Counts
select 1 - 256 states; if the Data Type is LSB, you can select 16 states; if the Data Type is LSB (Support State 0), you can select 17 states; and if the Data Type is
Bit, you can select 2 states. Please refer to Table 19.2.2 for details.
Set the foreground color of the element.
Foreground Color
(5)
Foreground Color
November, 2018
19-29
List
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
Set the background color of the element.
19
Background Color
(6)
Background Color
Set whether or not to display the border of the ListBox.
Show Frame set to Yes
Show Frame set to No
(7) Show Frame
19-30
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
By switching the State, you can preview or change the settings of each button element state.
List
19
(8)
Status
If you have set the language data, you can use the language used for the element to edit the displaying text property, etc.
(9)
Language
Record the button actions to be executed. The record is also written in the CSV file of the Operation Log Table so users can know what actions have been done.
(10)
Element Description
November, 2018
19-31
List Main-2
19
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 19.2.3 Main-2 property page for the ListBox element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2) Smooth animation The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3)
Anti-aliasing
The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
19-32
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Text (1)
(4)
List
(2)
19
(5) (3)
Figure 19.2.4 Text property page for the ListBox element
No.
Property
Function description
You can enter the text to display in this box.
(1)
Text
As long as the element allows text input, you can click the element and press the space key to start editing the text immediately.
(2)
Text property
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, zoom, alignment, and bold / italic / underline for the texts.
November, 2018
19-33
List
DOPSoft User Manual
No. (3)
19
Property
Edit multi-language
text
Function description
If you have added multi-language texts, the Text page allows you to edit multi-language data.
This function batch changes the text of the specified state. Please see the following example: 1. Enter the text "123" for State 0 and "234" for State 1. 2. Select State 0. 3. Execute Process the text of all states and the text of State 1 is changed to "123".
Before change
Process the
(4)
text of all
states
(1)
After
change
(3)
(2)
This function batch changes the text properties of the specified state. Items included in the text property are shown in the figure below.
Process text (5) properties of
all states
Please see the following example: 1. Enter the text "Delta" for State 0 and "HMI" for State 1. Select Segoe Script for the
text font of State 0 and Arial for the text font of State 1. 2. Select State 0. 3. Execute Process text properties of all states and the text font of State 1 is
changed to Segoe Script.
19-34
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual No. Property
Before change
Process text
(5) properties of all states
Function description
List
(1)
19
(1)
After change
(3) (2)
November, 2018
19-35
List Details
19
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Figure 19.2.5 Details property page for the ListBox element
No.
Property
Function description
Interlock State
Interlock Address is for enabling the operation of another element and has to be used with Interlock State. If Interlock State is set to Off, it means the Interlock Address is operable when this Interlock State is off; on the other hand, if Interlock State is set to On, the Interlock Address is operable when this Interlock State is on.
Create a button and set its address to $8.0. Then, set the Interlock Address to $8.0 for the ListBox which address is $100.
In order for the ListBox to obtain the correct state value after you press it, you must first press $8.0 to enable the action of the ListBox.
(1)
Interlock Address
19-36
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
Trigger Modes include Before Writing and After Writing.
Triggering action
Before Writing
Trigger Addr. must be set to on before the value changes.
After Writing
Value is changed before the Trigger Addr. is set to on.
Trigger Mode
The triggering function only switches the set Trigger Addr. to on, so if triggering again is required, you need to set the Trigger Addr. to off.
Flowchart of Before Writing:
Flowchart of After Writing:
List
19
(2)
Trigger Addr.
When Invisible Address is set to On, the button element is invisible and you cannot execute its set functions.
Invisible Address is off
(3)
Invisible Address
Invisible Address is on
Element is invisible
November, 2018
19-37
List
No.
Property
Function description
DOPSoft User Manual
19
User Security Level
You can use this function to set the permission level for pressing the element; this operation is only available to users with the same set security level or higher.
After you set the User Security Level and press the element, a password input window pops up to confirm whether the security level password is correct (you can modify this password with the Password Table element, please refer to Section 5.7.2 Password Table Setup).
(4)
Set Low Security
If you specify Set Low Security to Yes, the HMI automatically sets the security level to the lowest each time you enter the password. Next time you press the element, you will be asked again to enter the password for the corresponding security level.
If Confirm Window is set to Yes, after you press the element, the following window will pop up to confirm if you want to execute the action of this button.
(5)
Confirm Window
19-38
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Macro
List
19
(1) Figure 19.2.6 Macro property page for the ListBox element
November, 2018
19-39
List
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
Flowchart of Before Execute Macro: Flowchart of After Execute Macro:
19
(1)
Before Execute Macro
After Execute Macro
When you press the button element, the HMI will first execute the macro commands, then execute the action of the button. However, if the state of the button is not changed by pressing it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI will not execute the macro commands.
When you press the button element, the HMI will first execute the action of the button, then execute the macro commands. However, if the state of the button is not changed by pressing it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI will not execute the macro commands.
19-40
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Coordinates
List
19 (1)
(2)
Figure 19.2.7 Coordinates property page for the ListBox element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2) Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
November, 2018
19-41
List
DOPSoft User Manual
GridBox
19
This element displays the data set by users in a gridbox format providing an interface for easier selection and operation. Its functions include automatic page change, insert, delete, copy, paste, etc.
Column 1
Column 2
Item 1 Item 2
Please refer to Table 19.3.1 for the GridBox example.
19-42
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
List
Table 19.3.1 GridBox example
GridBox 1. Select [List] > [GridBox] in the element tool of the editing screen and create it on
Screen 1. Set Column Count as 3, Start Address as $1000, and Item Addr. Offset as 10 Words.
19
2. Set the Column Type of Column 1 as State and select the images for States 0 - 2 as shown below.
Create GridBox element
3. Set the Column Type of Column 2 as String and you can set the string length as shown below.
November, 2018
19-43
List
19
DOPSoft User Manual
GridBox 4. Set the Column Type of Column 3 as Numeric and the Data Type can be set as Word or
DWord as shown below.
5. The settings for the control address on the Details page are shown as below.
Create GridBox element
19-44
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
GridBox 6. The settings for the control address on the Details-2 page are shown as below.
List
19
7. Set the Data Start Addr. of Custom Data as $3000, Data Offset as 15 Words, and the Data Length for each data as 5 Words.
Create GridBox element
November, 2018
19-45
List
DOPSoft User Manual
19
Create Numeric Entry and Character
Entry elements
GridBox
1. Create two Numeric Entry elements and set the addresses as $500 and $506. Create a Character Entry element and set its address as $501. These three elements are registers and with the set control bit of the GridBox, the data in these registers can be written into the GridBox.
2. Create a Character Entry element with the address as $4000. This element is an editing area with a user-defined address. Through the macro, the data in this editing area can be written into the user-defined data of the GridBox.
Create a Momentary button and set its address as $200.0. [On Macro] will copy the data from the editing area to the selected items in the GridBox element.
Create Momentary
button element
19-46
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
List
GridBox
Create the figure of the GridBox Details setting on the screen and place the corresponding elements and buttons on the figure for editing the element.
19
Create Numeric
Entry elements ($100 $106) and Maintained
button elements ($110.0 $110.12)
Create screen changing button
Create two buttons for screen changing and open Screen 2 and Screen 3 to view the actual data in the GridBox.
November, 2018
19-47
List
DOPSoft User Manual
19
GridBox Create Screen 2 and display the contents shown in GridBox ($1000, $1001...).
Create Numeric
Entry elements ($1000 -
$1169)
Create Screen 3 and display the user-defined data in GridBox ($3000, $3001...).
Create Numeric
Entry elements ($3000 $3254)
19-48
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
GridBox After creating the elements, please compile and download the screens to the HMI.
List
19
Execution results Select the item and edit the data editing area.
November, 2018
19-49
List
19
DOPSoft User Manual
GridBox Press the red button and the data display on the element changes.
Execution results
Use the Write Address in the register to trigger and the data displayed on the element changes.
19-50
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
GridBox Press Start Address Address $1000~ to switch the screen to Screen 2, and set the
value of $1019 (hidden value) to 1, then the content in the first field in the second column will be hidden.
List
19
Execution results
November, 2018
19-51
List
19
DOPSoft User Manual
GridBox Set $1018 (hidden item) on Screen 2 to 1, then this item will not be displayed and the
Actual Item Count will be more than the Visible Item Count.
Execution results
19-52
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
List
GridBox
Set Select Item Addr. to 6 and press Trigger Selected Item, then the selected element jumps to the 6th item.
19
Execution results
Set Item Count Addr. to 5 and press Trigger Item Count, then the number of the displaying element item becomes 5 and the data exceeding 5 will not be shown.
November, 2018
19-53
List
19
DOPSoft User Manual
GridBox Select Item 2, press Copy Trigger Addr., then select Item 4, press Replace Trigger
Addr., and the content of Item 2 will be pasted to Item 4.
Execution results
19-54
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
GridBox Press Custom Data Address $3000~ to switch the screen and you can see the
custom data of Item 2 is also pasted to Item 4.
List
19
Execution results
November, 2018
19-55
List When you double-click GridBox, the property page is shown as follows.
19
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 19.3.1 Properties of GridBox
19-56
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
List
Table 19.3.2 Function page of the GridBox element
Function page Main
Details
Details-2 Appearance
Macro Coordinates
GridBox
Description
It includes Data Settings and Column Settings. Data Settings: set the Column Count, Initial Item Count, Items per Page, Start
Address, and Item Addr. Offset. Column Settings: set the Current Column, Column Width, Column Type, Align,
State Counts, Distribute Width Evenly, Enable Hide Item, Enable Hide Value, Hide Vert. Line, Align left across columns, and 17-32 columns. The required settings vary according to different Column Types. Address preview can be used to preview the assigned address according to the set data.
It includes State, Custom Data, Others, and Operation. State: set the Selected Item, Actual Item Count, Visible Item Count, Current Page,
Total Page, Auto Update Data, and Update Data. Custom Data: set the Data Start Addr., Data Offset, and Data Length. Others: set the Max item count. Operation: set the Invisible Address, Page Up Trigger Addr., Page Down Trigger,
Previous Item Addr., Next Item Addr., Copy Trigger Addr., Paste Trigger Addr., Replace Trigger Addr., Insert Trigger Addr., Cut Trigger Addr., Touch Protect Addr., Select Item Addr., Trigger Selected Item, Item Count Addr., and Trigger Item Count.
Set the Operation-Buffer selection, including Buffer Start Addr., Insert Selected Item Addr., Add selected item Addr., Add to Last Addr., Read Address, and Write Address.
It includes Column Settings and Style. Column Settings: set the Enable auto numbering, Column Width, Font size, and
Text Color. Style: set the Gridline Color, Background Color, Select Color, and Show Gridlines.
Operate the After Execute Macro.
Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
19
November, 2018
19-57
List Main
19
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(8) (9)
(16)
(18)
DOPSoft User Manual (1)
(6)
(7)
(10)
(13)
(11)
(14)
(15)
(12)
(17)
Figure 19.3.2 Main property page for the GridBox element
No.
Property
Function description
Set the number of columns used by the GridBox element and the
maximum setting is 32.
(1)
Column Count If the Column Count is greater than the Item Addr. Offset, a warning
message regarding the address overlap will pop up.
(2) Initial Item Count Set the Initial Item Count of the element and the maximum setting is 1,000.
(3)
Items per Page
Set the number of items that can be displayed on a single page of the element, and the maximum setting is 100.
Set the address that the element starts to read.
The controller address (Word) and the internal register address (Word) are supported.
(4)
Start Address
Set the interval address offset for the item and the maximum setting is (5) Item Addr. Offset 10,000. If the Item Addr. Offset is greater than the Column Count, a warning
message regarding the address overlap will pop up.
(6)
Address preview
According to the property settings of the current element, it displays the start address of each unit.
19-58
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
List
No.
Property
Function description
(7)
Current Column
Select the column for editing. The largest column number should not exceed the setting of Column Count.
The Column Types include State, String, and Numeric. State: status display; String: string display; Numeric: numeric display. If you select State, the setting of No. (18) is shown as below.
19
If you select String, the setting of No. (18) is shown as below.
(8)
Column Type
If you select Numeric, the setting of No. (18) is shown as below.
The State Counts field is shown only when you select State for Column Type.
(9)
State Counts The maximum setting is 256 states and mainly for displaying the state
type. This setting will affect the displayed number of Current State. If
State Counts is set to 3, then the numbers of Current State would be 0,
1, and 2.
(10) Column Width Set the width of the column and the maximum setting is 65535.
Set the alignment style in the cell.
(11)
Align
(12)
Distribute Width Evenly
Press this button to distribute the width of the columns evenly.
November, 2018
19-59
List
DOPSoft User Manual
19
No.
Property
Function description
When you check to enable this function, the corresponding address of the hidden item will be shown in the Address preview. When the Hide Item address value of an item is not 0, this item will not be displayed on the element.
(13) Enable Hide Item
When you check Enable Hide Value, the corresponding address of the hidden value will be shown in the Address preview.
(14)
Enable Hide Value
If you check Enable Hide Value, only Columns 1 - 16 are hidden. If you want to hide Columns 17 - 32, you need to check 17-32 columns as well.
Each bit of the address in [Hide Value] determines the display of the corresponding column. For example, when Bit 0 is on, it means the data in the first column of this item will not be shown; when Bit 1 is on, it means the data in the second column of this item will not be shown.
(15)
Hide Vert. Line
If you enable this function, the right vertical line of the selected column will be hidden in the table.
This function allows the data to merge left with the data in the left filed.
If this function is enabled, you can combine the data in the two fields.
To merge data, you need to enable this function for the fields to be
merged. For example, if you want to merge the data of Field 2 and Field
(16)
Align left across columns
3, please check Align left across columns for both Field 2 and Field 3.
Align left across columns
Align left across columns enabled
not enabled
for Fields 2 and 3
Previously the Enable Hide Value of the GridBox only supports hiding 1 - 16 fields, but now you can hide up to 32 fields.
When you check 17-32 columns, there will be two addresses for the hidden values. The bits of the first address correspond to Columns 1 - 16; the bits of the second address correspond to Columns 17 - 32.
(17) 17-32 columns
19-60
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description Edit the detail settings of the selected field in Current Column. Current Column is State
List
19
Text properties: set the font, size, color, bold / italic / underline for the texts, and the contents.
Language: if you have added multiple languages, you can select the language data for display.
Picture Bank: the default for the Bank name is "None". To set the picture display, use the drop-down list to select the picture bank provided by the software and then select the picture you need.
(18)
Column data settings
November, 2018
19-61
List No.
Property
19
Function description
DOPSoft User Manual
The Stretch Mode options include Stretch All, Stretch 1:1, and Actual Size.
Stretch All
Stretch 1:1
Actual Size
(18)
Column data settings
If you select Stretch All, the picture fills the full element display area.
If you select Stretch 1:1, the picture displays in 1:1 size based on the element width and length.
If you select Actual Size, regardless of the element size, the picture displays in its actual size in the element display area.
If you check All Picture States, assume that the elements have multiple states and some pictures do not fill the full element display area, you can use this function to process all pictures instead of setting them one by one, which saves the editing time.
Specify a color in the picture and turn this color into transparent.
is
for selecting the transparent color. If you select the white part in the
calendar, the software changes the white part into transparent, which
becomes identical to the element foreground color.
19-62
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
Current Column is String
Set the Text Size, Text Color, and Text Length. Text Length supports up to a maximum of 60.
Current Column is Numeric
List
19
(18)
Column data settings
Data Type includes WORD and DWORD.
Data Format supports only Signed Decimal and Unsigned Decimal regardless of your selection of WORD or DWORD as the Data Type.
If Data Type is set to WORD, the setting range of the fractional digits is 0 - 5; if Data Type is DWORD, the setting range of the fractional digits is 0 - 10.
November, 2018
19-63
List Details
DOPSoft User Manual
19
(1)
(10)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(16)
(6) (7)
(8) (19)
(9) (21)
(22) Figure 19.3.3 Details property page for the GridBox element
(11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (17) (18) (20)
19-64
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
List
No. Property
Function description
Select the element item number.
When you select the item in the second row of the GridBox, the value shown in Selected Item is 2.
19
(1)
Selected Item
The controller address (Word) and the internal register address (Word) are supported.
Display the total number of actual items on the GridBox element.
(2)
Actual Item Count
The controller address (Word) and the internal register address (Word) are supported.
November, 2018
19-65
List
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
Visible Item Count is the value of the Actual Item Count minus the hidden item count.
19
(3)
Visible Item Count
The controller address (Word) and the internal register address (Word) are supported.
When the value of Visible Item Count is bigger than Items per Page, the data will be shown on different pages. And the value of Current Page is the currently displaying page of the element.
(4)
Current Page
The controller address (Word) and the internal register address (Word) are supported.
19-66
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
This element displays the total page number used by visible items.
List
19
(5) Total Page
The controller address (Word) and the internal register address (Word) are supported.
If you select Yes, the element automatically updates the data; if you select No,
you need to trigger the Update Data bit to update the element display.
Auto
(6)
Update
Data
(7)
Update Data
When Auto Update Data is Yes and the Update Data bit is on, the currently displayed content of the element will be updated.
Set the Data Start Addr., Data Offset, and Data Length.
You can customize another data block and the data changes as you edit the element.
Data Start Addr.: the controller address (Word) and the internal register address
(8)
Custom Data
(Word) are supported.
Max item count is for setting the maximum number of items that can be added to
the GridBox.
(9)
Max item Max item count supports up to a maximum of 1,000. count
November, 2018
19-67
List
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
When Invisible Address is on, the GridBox element is hidden.
19
Element is hidden
(10)
Invisible Address
The controller address (Bit) and the internal register address (Bit) are supported.
When the Page Up Trigger Addr. bit is on, the element display switches to the previous page and the bit is automatically cleared once completed.
When the Page Up Trigger Addr. bit is not on, Current Page displays Page 2; when it is on, Current Page displays Page 1.
Page Up (11) Trigger
Addr.
The controller address (Bit) and the internal register address (Bit) are supported.
19-68
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
List
No. Property
Function description
When the Page Down Trigger bit is on, the element display switches to the next page and the bit is automatically cleared once completed.
When the Page Down Trigger bit is not on, Current Page displays Page 1; when it is on, Current Page displays Page 2.
19
Page
(12)
Down
Trigger
The controller address (Bit) and the internal register address (Bit) are supported.
November, 2018
19-69
List
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
19
When the Previous Item Addr. bit is on, the element selects the previous item and the bit is automatically cleared once completed.
When the Previous Item Addr. bit is not on, Selected Item displays Item 4; when it is on, Selected Item displays Item 3.
(13)
Previous Item Addr.
The controller address (Bit) and the internal register address (Bit) are supported.
19-70
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
List
No. Property
Function description
When the Next Item Addr. bit is on, the element selects the next item and the bit is automatically cleared once completed.
When the Next Item Addr. bit is not on, Selected Item displays Item 3; when it is on, Selected Item displays Item 4.
19
(14)
Next Item Addr.
The controller address (Bit) and the internal register address (Bit) are supported.
When the Copy Trigger Addr. bit is on, the current item is copied and the bit is automatically cleared once completed.
Copy (15) Trigger
Addr. The controller address (Bit) and the internal register address (Bit) are supported.
November, 2018
19-71
List
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
19
When the Paste Trigger Addr. bit is on, the copied item is pasted and the bit is automatically cleared once completed.
The copied item is pasted after the selected row.
Before pasting
After pasting
Paste (16) Trigger
Addr.
The controller address (Bit) and the internal register address (Bit) are supported.
When the Replace Trigger Addr. bit is on, the copied item replaces the selected row and the bit is automatically cleared once completed.
The replacing data appears on the selected row.
Before replacing
After replacing
Replace (17) Trigger
Addr.
The controller address (Bit) and the internal register address (Bit) are supported.
19-72
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
When the Insert Trigger Addr. bit is on, a new item is inserted and the bit is automatically cleared once completed.
Before inserting
After inserting
List
19
Insert (18) Trigger
Addr.
The controller address (Bit) and the internal register address (Bit) are supported.
When the Cut Trigger Addr. bit is on, the current item is deleted and the bit is automatically cleared once completed.
Before cutting
After cutting
(19)
Cut Trigger Addr.
The controller address (Bit) and the internal register address (Bit) are supported.
November, 2018
19-73
List
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
When the Touch Protect Addr. bit is on, you cannot press the GridBox element. The controller address (Bit) and the internal register address (Bit) are supported.
19 (20)
Touch Protect Addr.
Use Select Item Addr. to specify the selected item. Then, set Trigger Selected Item to on, and the element will display the selected item.
Select Item Addr.
(21)
The controller address (Word) and the internal register address (Word) are supported.
Trigger Selected
Item
The controller address (Bit) and the internal register address (Bit) are supported.
19-74
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
List
No. Property
Function description
Use Item Count Addr. to specify the visible items. Then, set Trigger Item Count to on, and the element will change the value of Visible Item Count.
19
Item Count Addr.
(22)
The controller address (Word) and the internal register address (Word) are supported.
Trigger Item Count
The controller address (Bit) and the internal register address (Bit) are supported.
November, 2018
19-75
List Details-2
19
(5) (6)
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Figure 19.3.4 Details-2 property page for the GridBox element
No. Property
Function description
This is the start address where the element temporarily stores data. The data
in the buffer can be inserted, added, and written into the selected item, and the
data in the selected item can also be read to the buffer.
The controller address (Word) and the internal register address (Word) are
(1)
Buffer Start Addr.
supported.
19-76
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
List
No. Property
Function description
When the Insert Selected Item Addr. bit is on, the selected item will be inserted after the Buffer Start Addr. plus the Item Addr. Offset. Then, the Actual Item Count adds 1.
If Actual Item Count has reached Max item count, the selected item cannot be inserted.
Before inserting
After inserting
19
Insert
(2)
Selected
Item Addr.
The controller address (Bit) and the internal register address (Bit) are supported.
November, 2018
19-77
List
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
19
Property
Function description
When the Add selected item Addr. bit is on, the selected item will be inserted after the Buffer Start Addr. plus the Item Addr. Offset. Then, the Actual Item Count adds 1.
If Actual Item Count has reached Max item count, the selected item cannot be inserted.
Before adding
After adding
(3)
Add selected item Addr.
The controller address (Bit) and the internal register address (Bit) are supported.
19-78
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
List
No. Property
Function description
When the Add to Last Addr. bit is on, the selected item will be inserted after the Buffer Start Addr. plus the Item Addr. Offset. Then, the Actual Item Count adds 1.
If Actual Item Count has reached Max item count, the selected item cannot be inserted.
Before adding
After adding
19
(4)
Add to Last Addr.
The controller address (Bit) and the internal register address (Bit) are supported.
When the Read Address bit is on, the element saves the content of the selected item to the Buffer Start Addr. without changing the element content.
(5)
Read Address
The controller address (Bit) and the internal register address (Bit) are supported.
November, 2018
19-79
List
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
19
Property
Function description
When the Write Address bit is on, the selected item will be written after the Buffer Start Addr. plus the Item Addr. Offset.
Before writing
After writing
(6)
Write Address
The controller address (Bit) and the internal register address (Bit) are supported.
19-80
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Appearance
(1)
List
(2)
19
Figure 19.3.5 Appearance property page for the GridBox element
No. Property
Function description
Set the Enable auto numbering, Column Width, Font size, and Text Color.
The Enable auto numbering function is for setting whether to display the auto numbering, the width of the auto numbering column, and the font color and size of the auto numbering.
Display auto numbering
Enable auto numbering not checked
Enable auto numbering is checked
(1)
Column Settings
Column width: set the width of the auto numbering column and the maximum setting is 65535.
November, 2018
19-81
List
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
19
The Style function is for setting the color and gridline of the element, which include the Gridline Color, Background Color, Select Color, and Show Gridlines.
Gridline Color
Gridline Color
Background Color
(2)
Style
Select Color
Background Color
Select Color
Show Gridlines
Select Yes for Show Gridlines
Select No for Show Gridlines
19-82
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Macro
List
19
(1) Figure 19.3.6 Macro property page for the GridBox element
November, 2018
19-83
List
DOPSoft User Manual
19
No.
Property
Function description
After Execute Macro
When you press the button element, the HMI will first execute the action of the button, then execute the macro commands. However, if the state of the button is not changed by pressing it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI will not execute the macro commands.
Flowchart of After Execute Macro:
(1)
19-84
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Coordinates
List
19
(1) (2)
Figure 19.3.7 Coordinates property page for the GridBox element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
November, 2018
19-85
List
DOPSoft User Manual
PDF Viewer
19
The PDF Viewer function allows you to read PDF files on the HMI by saving the PDF files in an external storage device and inserting it to the HMI. With this feature, you can view the operation steps without a PC or printouts, which can increase convenience and efficiency.
The PDF Viewer is divided into two sections: the file list is on the left and the content of the PDF file is displayed on the right.
File List
Content of the PDF file
PDF files are displayed on the HMI from the external storage device, so if the USB Disk or SD Card read and write speed is too slow or the PDF file size is too big, the displaying speed of the PDF file will be affected.
Please refer to Table 19.4.1 for the PDF Viewer example.
19-86
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 19.4.1 PDF Viewer example PDF Viewer
Step 1: create a PDF Viewer element.
List
19
Create PDF Viewer element
Step 2: click PDF Viewer, then right click and select UnGroup.
November, 2018
19-87
List
19
DOPSoft User Manual
PDF Viewer Step 3: click the File List on the left to go to the Function Buttons page and the setting is as follows.
Create PDF Viewer
element
Step 4: click the display content on the right to go to the Function Buttons page and the setting is as follows.
19-88
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
PDF Viewer Step 5: when the setting is complete, the PDF Viewer screen is as follows.
List
19
Create PDF Viewer element
Step 6: please compile the screen prior to performing off-line simulation. Select the PDF file to display, press Display, then you can see the content of the PDF file displayed on the right.
The following will explain the properties of the File List on the left and the display content on the right.
November, 2018
19-89
List
DOPSoft User Manual
When you double-click the File List on the left, the property page is shown as follows.
19
Figure 19.4.1 Properties of the PDF Viewer File List
Table 19.4.2 Function page of the PDF Viewer File List
Function Page Main Main-2
Function Buttons
PDF Viewer (File List on the left) Description
Set the Border Color, Tree View Background, Font, Size, and Color.
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Check Scroll up an interval, Scroll down an interval, Scroll up one page, Scroll down one page, and Set As Default Description. You can also set the width and height of the buttons.
19-90
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main
(1) (2)
List
(4) (5)
(6)
(3)
19
Figure 19.4.2 Main property page for the PDF Viewer File List element
November, 2018
19-91
List
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
Set the border color of the File List on the left.
19
Border Color
(1)
Border Color
Set the Tree View Background color of the File List on the left.
(2)
Tree View Background
Tree View Background Color
(3)
Font
Set the text font for the File List on the left.
(4)
Size
Set the text size for the File List on the left.
(5)
Color
Set the text color for the File List on the left.
Set the file extension to be displayed in the File List. The default is PDF,
File
meaning only the files with the PDF file extension will be displayed in the root
(6) Extension
directory of the external drive.
Filter
If you input * to File Extension Filter, all files in the root directory will be
displayed.
19-92
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
List
(1)
19
(2)
(3)
Figure 19.4.3 Main-2 property page for the PDF Viewer File List element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
The Smooth animation function is available for this element. When you (2) Smooth animation activate the Smooth animation function, there is a sliding effect when the
File List expands or retracts.
(3)
Anti-aliasing
The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
November, 2018
19-93
List Function Buttons
19 (1)
DOPSoft User Manual (3)
(2) (4)
Figure 19.4.4 Function Buttons property page for the PDF Viewer File List element
No.
Property
Function description
These are function buttons for the File List. Display is checked by default and cannot be unchecked.
(1) Function Buttons Other function buttons include Scroll up an interval, Scroll down an interval, Scroll up one page, and Scroll down one page, which are used to scroll the File List and determine the scrolling range.
(2)
Set As Default Description
Press this button to insert the default strings to the spaces above.
(3)
Default Description
Press Set As Default Description to insert the default strings to the spaces. You can also enter user-defined strings.
(4)
Default Button Width and Height
You can adjust the width and height of the function buttons.
19-94
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
List
When you double-click the display content on the right, the property page is shown as follows.
19
Figure 19.4.5 Properties of the PDF Viewer display content
Table 19.4.3 Function page of the PDF Viewer display content
Function page Main Main-2
Function Buttons
PDF Viewer (display content on the right)
Description
Set the Read Address and Read Offset Address. You can also set the storage type and string length.
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing.
Check Load, First Page, Total Page, Page Up, Page Down, Last Page, Zoom, Rotations, and Set As Default Description.
You can also set the width and height of the buttons.
November, 2018
19-95
List Main
19
(1)
(2)
DOPSoft User Manual
(3) (4)
Figure 19.4.6 Main property page for the PDF Viewer display content element
No.
Property
Function description
You can select the internal memory or the controller register address.
Select Link Name or Element Style. Please refer to Chapter 5 Buttons for
(1) Read Address
details.
If you choose the Read Address setting, you need to create a Character
Entry element and set the String Length for the PDF file to display on the
HMI.
(2)
Read Offset Address
Please refer to Appendix D for instructions on writing and reading the offset address.
You can select USB Disk or SD Card as the storage device.
(3)
Save in
When you save the PDF file in the USB Disk or SD Card, the HMI can read
the PDF file from the storage device.
The String Length setting is mainly used with the Character Entry element.
(4)
String Length The length of the string determines the input file name of the PDF.
19-96
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
List
(1)
19
(2)
(3)
Figure 19.4.7 Main-2 property page for the PDF Viewer display content element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2) Smooth animation The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3)
Anti-aliasing
The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
November, 2018
19-97
List Function Buttons
19 (1)
DOPSoft User Manual (3)
(2) (4)
Figure 19.4.8 Function Buttons property page for the PDF Viewer display content element
No.
Property
Function description
These are function buttons for the display content, including Load, First Page, Total Page, Page Up, Page Down, Last Page, Zoom, and Rotations.
The Load function button and the Display function button for the File List
are both used to read and display PDF files, but the way to use them are
(1)
Function Buttons
different. For the Load button, you need to manually enter the PDF file name and
use the set Read Address to display the PDF file on the HMI.
As for the Display button, you do not need to enter the PDF file name. To display the PDF file on the HMI, you only need to save the PDF file to a USB Disk or SD Card.
(2)
Set As Default Description
Press this button to insert the default strings to the spaces above. Total Page, Zoom, and Rotations do not have default descriptions.
(3)
Default Description
Press Set As Default Description to insert the default strings to the spaces. You can also enter user-defined strings.
(4)
Default Button Width and Height
You can adjust the width and height of the function buttons.
19-98
November, 2018
Frame
This chapter provides the usage and setting details for the Frame elements.
November, 2018
20-1
Frame
DOPSoft User Manual
Embedded Subscreen
You can embed the subscreen into the main screen and switch between different subscreens to
20
display on the main screen. Note: 1. Embedded Subscreen elements cannot be placed on subscreens.
2. The size of the subscreen can be different from the Embedded Subscreen. Its size remains after
embedding.
3. When the embedded Subscreen has the Screen Lock function enabled, this function is automatically
disabled after embedding.
20-2
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Frame
Table 20.1.1 Embedded Subscreen example
Embedded Subscreen example Select [Frame] > [Embedded SubScreen] in the element tool of the editing screen and create it on Screen 1.
20
Create Embedded Subscreen
element
Set the memory addresses for the Embedded Subscreen element.
Set memory address
Create three Numeric Entry elements ($100, $101, and $102) and one Maintained button element ($103.0).
Create Numeric Entry and Maintained button elements
November, 2018
20-3
Frame
20
Embedded Subscreen example Create Subscreen 2 and Subscreen 3.
DOPSoft User Manual
Create subscreen
20-4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Frame
Embedded Subscreen example
After the screens are downloaded to the HMI, the subscreens are not loaded on the HMI screen.
20
Change the subscreen number $102 to 2 and Subscreen 2 is embedded to the screen.
Execution Change the subscreen number $102 to 3 and Subscreen 3 is embedded to the screen. results
Change the element's position: set $100 to 100 and $101 to 50, then the subscreen moves according to the coordinate position.
November, 2018
20-5
Frame
DOPSoft User Manual
When you double-click Embedded Subscreen, the property page is shown as follows.
20
Figure 20.1.1 Properties of Embedded Subscreen
Function page Main
Coordinates
Table 20.1.2 Function page of the Embedded Subscreen element
Embedded Subscreen Description
Set the LeftTop X-coordinate, LeftTop Y-coordinate, Embedded Subscreen, and Invisible Address. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
20-6
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main
Frame
(1)
20
(2)
(3)
(4)
Figure 20.1.2 Main property page for the Embedded Subscreen element
No. Property
Function description
Set the element's X-axis position on the screen. Only internal memory address (Word) is supported.
(1)
LeftTop X-coordinate
November, 2018
20-7
Frame
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
Set the element's Y-axis position on the screen. Only internal memory address (Word) is supported.
20
(2)
LeftTop Y-coordinate
Set the displaying subscreen number of the element. Only internal memory address (Word) is supported.
(3)
Embedded Subscreen
When Invisible Address is set to On, the Embedded Subscreen element is invisible and you cannot execute its set functions.
Invisible Address
is off
(4)
Invisible Address
Invisible Address
is on
Element is invisible
The controller address (Bit) and the internal register address (Bit) are supported.
20-8
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Coordinates
Frame
20
(1) (2)
Figure 20.1.3 Coordinates property page for the Embedded Subscreen element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2) Width and Height You can also set the width and height of the elements.
November, 2018
20-9
Frame
20
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
DOPSoft User Manual
20-10
November, 2018
Basic Shape
This chapter provides the usage and setting details for the Basic Shape elements.
November, 2018
21-1
Basic Shape
DOPSoft User Manual
DOPSoft provides you with the function to draw basic shapes. The following describes the properties of each Basic Shape element.
21 Basic Shape element classification:
Basic Shape
Rhombus Right Triangle
Pentagon Pie Chart
Arc Hexagon Star Shape Triangle Hollow Circle Stop Circle 1/4 Arc
21-2
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Basic Shape
Rhombus
When you double-click the Rhombus element, the property page is shown as follows.
21
Figure 21.1.1 Properties of Rhombus
Function page Main Main-2
Coordinates
Table 21.1.1 Function page of Rhombus
Rhombus Description
Set the Line Color, Line Weight, Foreground Color, and Transparent. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
November, 2018
21-3
Basic Shape Main
21
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Figure 21.1.2 Main property page for the Rhombus element
No. Property
Function description
You can set the line color for the element.
(1) Line Color
21-4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
The line width setting ranges from 1 to 8.
(2) Line Weight
Basic Shape
21
Set the foreground color of the element.
(3)
Foreground Color
Foreground Color
November, 2018
21-5
Basic Shape
No. Property
Function description
You can select Yes or No for this function.
21
DOPSoft User Manual
If you select Yes, the foreground color of the Rhombus element is transparent
and only the border color is displayed; if you select No, the foreground color of
(4) Transparent
the element is displayed.
Transparent is Yes
Transparent is No
21-6
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Basic Shape
(1)
21
(2)
(3)
Figure 21.1.3 Main-2 property page for the Rhombus element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
The Anti-aliasing function is available for this element and the default is Yes.
Yes (3) Anti-aliasing
No
November, 2018
21-7
Basic Shape Coordinates
21
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 21.1.4 Coordinates property page for the Rhombus element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
21-8
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Basic Shape
Right Triangle
When you double-click the Right Triangle element, the property page is shown as follows.
21
Figure 21.2.1 Properties of Right Triangle
Function page Main Main-2
Coordinates
Table 21.2.1 Function page of Right Triangle
Right Triangle Description
Set the Line Color, Line Weight, Foreground Color, Transparent, and Style. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
November, 2018
21-9
Basic Shape Main
21
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Figure 21.2.2 Main property page for the Right Triangle element
No. Property
Function description
You can set the line color for the element.
(1) Line Color
21-10
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
The line width setting ranges from 1 to 8.
(2) Line Weight
Basic Shape
21
Set the foreground color of the element.
(3)
Foreground Color
Foreground Color
November, 2018
21-11
Basic Shape
No. Property
Function description
You can select Yes or No for this function.
21
DOPSoft User Manual
If you select Yes, the foreground color of the Right Triangle element is
transparent and only the border color is displayed; if you select No,
(4) Transparent
the foreground color of the element is displayed.
Transparent is Yes
Transparent is No
The available styles are Standard, Rotation 90, Rotation 180, and Rotation 270.
(5)
Style
Standard
Rotation 90
Rotation 180
Rotation 270
21-12
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Basic Shape
(1)
21
(2)
(3)
Figure 21.2.3 Main-2 property page for the Right Triangle element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
The Anti-aliasing function is available for this element and the default is Yes.
Yes (3) Anti-aliasing
No
November, 2018
21-13
Basic Shape Coordinates
21
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 21.2.4 Coordinates property page for the Right Triangle element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2) Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
21-14
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Basic Shape
Pentagon
When you double-click the Pentagon element, the property page is shown as follows.
21
Figure 21.3.1 Properties of Pentagon
Table 21.3.1 Function page of Pentagon
Function page Main Main-2
Coordinates
Pentagon Description
Set the Line Color, Line Weight, Foreground Color, and Transparent. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
November, 2018
21-15
Basic Shape Main
21
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Figure 21.3.2 Main property page for the Pentagon element
No. Property
Function description
You can set the line color for the element.
(1) Line Color
21-16
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
The line width setting ranges from 1 to 8.
(2) Line Weight
Basic Shape
21
Set the foreground color of the element.
(3)
Foreground Color
Foreground Color
November, 2018
21-17
Basic Shape
No. Property
Function description
You can select Yes or No for this function.
21
DOPSoft User Manual
If you select Yes, the foreground color of the Pentagon element is transparent and
(4) Transparent
only the border color is displayed; if you select No, the foreground color of the element
is displayed.
Transparent is Yes
Transparent is No
21-18
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Basic Shape
(1)
21
(2)
(3)
Figure 21.3.3 Main-2 property page for the Pentagon element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
The Anti-aliasing function is available for this element and the default is Yes.
Yes (3) Anti-aliasing
No
November, 2018
21-19
Basic Shape Coordinates
21
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 21.3.4 Coordinates property page for the Pentagon element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2) Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
21-20
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Basic Shape
Pie Chart
When you double-click the Pie Chart element, the property page is shown as follows.
21
Figure 21.4.1 Properties of Pie Chart
Table 21.4.1 Function page of Pie Chart
Function page Main Main-2
Coordinates
Pie Chart Description
Set the Line Color, Line Weight, Transparent, Start Angle, End Angle, and Foreground Color. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
November, 2018
21-21
Basic Shape Main
21
(4) (5)
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3) (6)
Figure 21.4.2 Main property page for the Pie Chart element
No.
Property
Function description
You can set the line color for the element.
(1) Line Color
21-22
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
The line width setting ranges from 1 to 8.
(2) Line Weight
You can select Yes or No for this function.
Basic Shape
21
If you select Yes, the foreground color of the Pie Chart element is transparent and
(3) Transparent
only the border color is displayed; if you select No, the foreground color of the
element is displayed.
Transparent is Yes
Transparent is No
November, 2018
21-23
Basic Shape
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
21 (4)
Property
Function description
You can set the opening angle for the Pie Chart with the Start Angle and End Angle settings.
Start Angle
End Angle
(5) End Angle
Start Angle
Set the foreground color of the element.
(6)
Foreground Color
Foreground Color
21-24
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Basic Shape
(1)
21
(2)
(3)
Figure 21.4.3 Main-2 property page for the Pie Chart element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
The Anti-aliasing function is available for this element and the default is Yes.
Yes (3) Anti-aliasing
No
November, 2018
21-25
Basic Shape Coordinates
21
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 21.4.4 Coordinates property page for the Pie Chart element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
21-26
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Arc
When you double-click the Arc element, the property page is shown as follows.
Basic Shape
21
Figure 21.5.1 Properties of Arc
Table 21.5.1 Function page of Arc
Function page Main Main-2
Coordinates
Arc Description
Set the Line Color, Line Weight, Transparent, Start Angle, End Angle, and Foreground Color. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
November, 2018
21-27
Basic Shape Main
21
(4) (5)
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3) (6)
Figure 21.5.2 Main property page for the Arc element
No. Property
Function description
You can set the line color for the element.
(1) Line Color
21-28
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
The line width setting ranges from 1 to 8.
(2) Line Weight
You can select Yes or No for this function.
Basic Shape
21
(3)
Transparent
If you select Yes, the foreground color of the Arc element is transparent and only the border color is displayed; if you select No, the foreground color of the
element is displayed.
Transparent is Yes
Transparent is No
November, 2018
21-29
Basic Shape
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
You can set the opening angle for the Arc with the Start Angle and End Angle (4) Start Angle settings.
21
End Angle
(5) End Angle
Start Angle
Set the foreground color of the element.
(6)
Foreground Color
Foreground Color
21-30
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Basic Shape
(1)
21
(2)
(3)
Figure 21.5.3 Main-2 property page for the Arc element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
The Anti-aliasing function is available for this element and the default is Yes.
Yes (3) Anti-aliasing
No
November, 2018
21-31
Basic Shape Coordinates
21
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 21.5.4 Coordinates property page for the Arc element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
21-32
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Hexagon
When you double-click the Hexagon element, the property page is shown as follows.
Basic Shape
21
Figure 21.6.1 Properties of Hexagon
Table 21.6.1 Function page of Hexagon
Function page Main Main-2
Coordinates
Hexagon Description
Set the Line Color, Line Weight, Foreground Color, and Transparent. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
November, 2018
21-33
Basic Shape Main
21
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Figure 21.6.2 Main property page for the Hexagon element
No.
Property
Function description
You can set the line color for the element.
(1)
Line Color
21-34
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
The line width setting ranges from 1 to 8.
(2)
Line Weight
Basic Shape
21
Set the foreground color of the element.
(3)
Foreground Color
Foreground Color
November, 2018
21-35
Basic Shape
No.
21
Property
Function description You can select Yes or No for this function.
DOPSoft User Manual
(4) Transparent If you select Yes, the foreground color of the Hexagon element is transparent and only the border color is displayed; if you select No, the foreground color of the element is displayed.
Transparent is Yes
Transparent is No
21-36
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Basic Shape
(1)
21
(2)
(3)
Figure 21.6.3 Main-2 property page for the Hexagon element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
The Anti-aliasing function is available for this element and the default is Yes.
Yes (3) Anti-aliasing
No
November, 2018
21-37
Basic Shape Coordinates
21
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 21.6.4 Coordinates property page for the Hexagon element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
21-38
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Basic Shape
Star Shape
When you double-click the Star Shape element, the property page is shown as follows.
21
Figure 21.7.1 Properties of Star Shape
Table 21.7.1 Function page of Star Shape
Function page Main Main-2
Coordinates
Star Shape Description
Set the Line Color, Line Weight, Foreground Color, and Transparent. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
November, 2018
21-39
Basic Shape Main
21
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Figure 21.7.2 Main property page for the Star Shape element
No. Property
Function description
You can set the line color for the element.
(1) Line Color
21-40
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
The line width setting ranges from 1 to 8.
(2) Line Weight
Basic Shape
21
Set the foreground color of the element.
(3)
Foreground Color
Foreground Color
November, 2018
21-41
Basic Shape
No. Property
Function description
You can select Yes or No for this function.
21
DOPSoft User Manual
(4) Transparent If you select Yes, the foreground color of the Star Shape element is transparent and only the border color is displayed; if you select No, the foreground color of the element is displayed.
Transparent is Yes
Transparent is No
21-42
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Basic Shape
(1)
21
(2)
(3)
Figure 21.7.3 Main-2 property page for the Star Shape element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
The Anti-aliasing function is available for this element and the default is Yes.
Yes (3) Anti-aliasing
No
November, 2018
21-43
Basic Shape Coordinates
21
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 21.7.4 Coordinates property page for the Star Shape element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
21-44
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Triangle
When you double-click the Triangle element, the property page is shown as follows.
Basic Shape
21
Figure 21.8.1 Properties of Triangle
Table 21.8.1 Function page of Triangle
Function page Main Main-2
Coordinates
Triangle Description
Set the Line Color, Line Weight, Foreground Color, and Transparent. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
November, 2018
21-45
Basic Shape Main
21
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Figure 21.8.2 Main property page for the Triangle element
No. Property
Function description
You can set the line color for the element.
(1) Line Color
21-46
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
The line width setting ranges from 1 to 8.
(2) Line Weight
Basic Shape
21
Set the foreground color of the element.
(3)
Foreground Color
Foreground Color
November, 2018
21-47
Basic Shape
No. Property
Function description
You can select Yes or No for this function.
21
DOPSoft User Manual
(4) Transparent If you select Yes, the foreground color of the Triangle element is transparent and only the border color is displayed; if you select No, the foreground color of the element is displayed.
Transparent is Yes
Transparent is No
21-48
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Basic Shape
(1)
21
(2)
(3)
Figure 21.8.3 Main-2 property page for the Triangle element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
The Anti-aliasing function is available for this element and the default is Yes.
Yes (3) Anti-aliasing
No
November, 2018
21-49
Basic Shape Coordinates
21
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 21.8.4 Coordinates property page for the Triangle element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
21-50
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Basic Shape
Hollow Circle
When you double-click the Hollow Circle element, the property page is shown as follows.
21
Figure 21.9.1 Properties of Hollow Circle
Table 21.9.1 Function page of Hollow Circle
Function page Main Main-2
Coordinates
Hollow Circle Description
Set the Line Color, Line Weight, Transparent, Annulus Width, and Foreground Color. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
November, 2018
21-51
Basic Shape Main
21
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Figure 21.9.2 Main property page for the Hollow Circle element
No. Property
Function description
You can set the line color for the element.
(1) Line Color
21-52
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
The line width setting ranges from 1 to 8.
(2) Line Weight
You can select Yes or No for this function.
Basic Shape
21
If you select Yes, the foreground color of the Hollow Circle element is transparent
and only the border color is displayed; if you select No, the foreground color of
(3) Transparent
the element is displayed.
Transparent is Yes
Transparent is No
November, 2018
21-53
Basic Shape
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
21
Property
Function description
The maximum of the Annulus Width is determined by taking the minimum value of the element's width and height, and dividing it by 2.
(4)
Annulus Width
Take the minimum value of the element's width and height, and divide it by 2 which is the maximum of the Annulus Width.
Set the foreground color of the element.
(5)
Foreground Color
Foreground Color
21-54
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Basic Shape
(1)
21
(2)
(3)
Figure 21.9.3 Main-2 property page for the Hollow Circle element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
The Anti-aliasing function is available for this element and the default is Yes.
Yes (3) Anti-aliasing
No
November, 2018
21-55
Basic Shape Coordinates
21
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 21.9.4 Coordinates property page for the Hollow Circle element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2) Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
21-56
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Basic Shape
Stop Circle
When you double-click the Stop Circle element, the property page is shown as follows.
21
Figure 21.10.1 Properties of Stop Circle
Function page Main Main-2
Coordinates
Table 21.10.1 Function page of Stop Circle
Stop Circle Description
Set the Line Color, Line Weight, Transparent, Annulus Width, and Foreground Color. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
November, 2018
21-57
Basic Shape Main
21
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Figure 21.10.2 Main property page for the Stop Circle element
No. Property
Function description
You can set the line color for the element.
(1) Line Color
21-58
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
The line width setting ranges from 1 to 8.
(2) Line Weight
You can select Yes or No for this function.
Basic Shape
21
If you select Yes, the foreground color of the Stop Circle element is transparent
and only the border color is displayed; if you select No, the foreground color of
(3) Transparent
the element is displayed.
Transparent is Yes
Transparent is No
November, 2018
21-59
Basic Shape
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
21
Property
Function description
The maximum of the Annulus Width is determined by taking the minimum value of the element's width and height, and dividing it by 2 and then subtracting 1. The reason for subtracting 1 is that the Annulus Width minimum value of the Stop Circle is 1, not 0.
(4)
Annulus Width
Take the minimum value of the element's width and height, and divide it by 2 and then subtract 1 which is the maximum of the Annulus Width.
Set the foreground color of the element.
Foreground Color
(5)
Foreground Color
21-60
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Basic Shape
(1)
21
(2)
(3)
Figure 21.10.3 Main-2 property page for the Stop Circle element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
The Anti-aliasing function is available for this element and the default is Yes.
Yes (3) Anti-aliasing
No
November, 2018
21-61
Basic Shape Coordinates
21
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 21.10.4 Coordinates property page for the Stop Circle element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2) Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
21-62
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
1/4 Arc
When you double-click the 1/4 Arc element, the property page is shown as follows.
Basic Shape
21
Figure 21.11.1 Properties of 1/4 Arc
Function page Main Main-2
Coordinates
Table 21.11.1 Function page of 1/4 Arc
1/4 Arc Description
Set the Line Color, Line Weight, Foreground Color, and Transparent. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
November, 2018
21-63
Basic Shape Main
21
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Figure 21.11.2 Main property page for the 1/4 Arc element
No. Property
Function description
You can set the line color for the element.
(1) Line Color
21-64
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
The line width setting ranges from 1 to 8.
(2) Line Weight
Basic Shape
21
Set the foreground color of the element.
(3)
Foreground Color
Foreground Color
You can select Yes or No for this function.
(4) Transparent If you select Yes, the foreground color of the 1/4 Arc element is transparent and only the border color of the arc part is displayed; if you select No, the foreground color of the entire element is displayed.
Transparent is Yes
Transparent is No
November, 2018
21-65
Basic Shape Main-2
21
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 21.11.3 Main-2 property page for the 1/4 Arc element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
The Anti-aliasing function is available for this element and the default is Yes.
Yes (3) Anti-aliasing
No
21-66
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Coordinates
Basic Shape
21 (1)
(2)
Figure 21.11.4 Coordinates property page for the 1/4 Arc element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
November, 2018
21-67
Basic Shape
21
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
DOPSoft User Manual
21-68
November, 2018
Drawing
22
This chapter provides the usage and setting details for the Drawing elements.
Test
22.1 Line �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 22-3 22.2 Rectangle������������������������������������������������������������������������������������22-10 22.3 Circle �����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������22-23 22.4 Polygon ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������22-31 22.5 Text��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������22-37 22.6 Scale������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������22-46 22.7 Table ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������22-54
November, 2018
22-1
Drawing
DOPSoft User Manual
22
To create a Drawing element, go to [Element] > [Drawing] and click on the element to be created or click on the toolbar on the far left side of the window screen and select the Drawing element.
22-2
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Drawing
22.1 Line
When using the Line element, press and hold the left mouse button to decide on the starting point of the line. Drag the mouse to a length to be created and release the left mouse button to create a straight line. When you click on this line, a rectangle shaped range will appear to help you easily adjust the size of this line. You can also change the width and color of this line. In addition, you can use the set Read Address to control the moving position, color, blinking, and other functions of the line.
When you double-click the Line, the property page is shown as follows.
22
Figure 22.1.1 Properties of Line
Function page Preview
Main Main-2 Coordinates
Table 22.1.1 Function page of the Line element
Line Description
The Line element does not support multiple status values and multi-language display. Set Read Address, Read Offset Address, Line Style, Line Weight, Line Color, and Blink. Set Data Format, Variable Position, and Variable Color. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the X and Y coordinates, width and height of the elements.
November, 2018
22-3
Drawing Main
22
(1)
(5) (6) (7) (8)
DOPSoft User Manual
(2) (3) (4)
Figure 22.1.2 Main property page for the Line element
22-4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Drawing
No. Property
Function description
Available options are internal memory and controller register address.
When Variable Position is set to Yes, the value of the Read Address is regarded as the X coordinate for the starting point of the dynamic Line.
When Variable Position is set to Yes, [Read Address+1] is regarded as the Y coordinate for the starting point of the dynamic Line.
When Variable Position is set to Yes, [Read Address+2] is regarded as the X coordinate for the ending point of the dynamic Line.
When Variable Position is set to Yes, [Read Address+3] is regarded as the Y coordinate for the ending point of the dynamic Line.
When Variable Color is set to Yes, [Read Address+4] is regarded as the color for the dynamic Line. Its value ranges from 0 to 65535.
When Blink is set to Yes, [Read Address+5] is regarded as the blinking for the dynamic Line. When its value is greater than 1, the dynamic Line element is displayed as blinking; when the value is 0, it does not blink.
Variable Position
Variable Color
Blink
22
Read Address (1)
N N+1 N+2 N+3 N+4
X coordinate for the starting point of the line
Y coordinate for the starting point of the line
X coordinate for the ending point of the line
Y coordinate for the ending point of the line
Line color
N+5
Line blinks or not
Read Offset Address
For information about selecting Link Name or Element Style, please refer to Chapter 5 Buttons.
Please refer to Appendix D for instructions on writing and reading the offset address.
The formats include BCD, Signed Decimal, Unsigned Decimal, and Hexadecimal.
(2) Data Format
November, 2018
22-5
Drawing
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
22 (3)
You can select Yes or No for Variable Position. When you select Yes, the position of the dynamic Line can be changed; when you select No, the dynamic Line element cannot be moved.
Variable Position
You can select Yes or No for Variable Color. When you select Yes, the color of the dynamic Line can be changed; when you select No, the color of the dynamic Line cannot be changed. Its value ranges from 0 to 65535.
(4)
Variable Color
The following seven types of line styles are available for selection. (5) Line Style
The line width setting ranges from 1 to 8. (6) Line Weight
22-6
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
You can set the displaying color for the line.
(7) Line Color
Drawing
22
You can select Yes or No for Blink. When you select Yes, the dynamic Line is displayed as blinking; when you select No, the dynamic Line does not blink. When its value is greater than 1, the dynamic Line element is displayed as blinking; when the value is 0, it does not blink.
(8)
Blink
November, 2018
22-7
Drawing Main-2
22
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 22.1.3 Main-2 property page for the Line element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
The Anti-aliasing function is available for this element and the default is Yes.
Yes (3) Anti-aliasing
No
22-8
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Coordinates
Drawing
22 (1)
(2)
Figure 22.1.4 Coordinates property page for the Line element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
November, 2018
22-9
Drawing
DOPSoft User Manual
22.2 Rectangle
22
Other than drawing rectangular graphs with the Rectangle element, you can also import graphs from the Picture Bank. The Invisible Address function is also added to this element enabling the use of covering the entire editing screen with a Rectangle element and after you triggered this Invisible Address, the editing screen under the Rectangle element will display. In addition, you can use the set Read Address to control the moving position, color, size, and blinking of the rectangle.
When you double-click the Rectangle, the property page is shown as follows.
Figure 22.2.1 Properties of Rectangle
Function page Preview
Main
Main-2 Picture Details Coordinates
Table 22.2.1 Function page of the Rectangle element
Rectangle Description
The Rectangle element does not support multiple status values and multi-language display. Set Read Address, Read Offset Address, Line Color, Line Weight, Round Corner Radius, Foreground Color, Blink, Transparent, and Penetrate. Set Data Format, Variable Position, Variable Color, and Variable Size. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the Picture Bank Name, Alignment, Stretch Mode, and Transparent Color. Set the Invisible Address. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
22-10
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main
(1)
(2)
(6) (7) (8)
(9) (10) (11) (12)
Figure 22.2.2 Main property page for the Rectangle element
Drawing
22
(3) (4) (5)
November, 2018
22-11
Drawing
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
22
(1)
Property
Read Address
Function description
Available options are internal memory and controller register address.
When Variable Position is set to Yes, the value of the Read Address is regarded as the X coordinate of the horizontal axis for the upper left corner of the dynamic Rectangle.
When Variable Position is set to Yes, [Read Address+1] is regarded as the Y coordinate of the vertical axis for the upper left corner of the dynamic Rectangle.
When Variable Size is set to Yes, [Read Address+2] is regarded as the width for the dynamic Rectangle.
When Variable Size is set to Yes, [Read Address+3] is regarded as the height for the dynamic Rectangle.
When Variable Color is set to Yes, [Read Address+4] is regarded as the color for the dynamic Rectangle. Its value ranges from 0 to 65535.
When Blink is set to Yes, [Read Address+5] is regarded as the blinking for the dynamic Rectangle. When its value is greater than 1, the dynamic Rectangle element is displayed as blinking; when the value is 0, it does not blink.
For information about selecting Link Name or Element Style, please refer to Chapter 5 Buttons.
When Variable Position is set to No, the corresponding memory address will be automatically filled in.
Variable Position
Variable Color
Variable Position
Variable Color
Variable Size
Blink
Variable Size
Blink
N N+1 N+2 N+3 N+4
X coordinate of the horizontal axis for the upper left corner of the Rectangle
Y coordinate of the vertical axis for the upper left corner of the Rectangle
X coordinate of the horizontal axis for the lower right corner of the Rectangle
Y coordinate of the vertical axis for the lower right corner of the Rectangle
Rectangle color
N N+1 N+2 N+3
X coordinate of the horizontal axis for the lower right corner of the Rectangle
Y coordinate of the vertical axis for the lower right corner of the Rectangle
Foreground Color of the Rectangle
Rectangle blinks or not
N+5
Rectangle blinks or not
Read Offset Address
Please refer to Appendix D for instructions on writing and reading the offset address.
The formats include BCD, Signed Decimal, Unsigned Decimal, and Hexadecimal.
(2) Data Format
22-12
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Drawing
No. Property
Function description
You can select Yes or No for Variable Position. When you select Yes, the position of the dynamic Rectangle can be changed; when you select No, though the dynamic Rectangle element cannot be moved, the size of the Rectangle element can still be changed.
(3)
Variable Position
22
You can select Yes or No for Variable Color. When you select Yes, the color of the dynamic Rectangle can be changed; when you select No, the color of the dynamic Rectangle cannot be changed. Its value ranges from 0 to 65535.
(4)
Variable Color
You can select Yes or No for Variable Size. When you select Yes, the dynamic Rectangle changes the size of the Rectangle element by changing its coordinates at the lower right corner; when you select No, the size of the Rectangle element cannot be changed.
(5) Variable Size
November, 2018
22-13
Drawing
No. Property
Function description
You can set the displaying color for the line.
22
DOPSoft User Manual
(6) Line Color
The line width setting ranges from 1 to 8. (7) Line Weight
(8)
Round Corner Radius
The size of this radius is determined by the width and height of the Rectangle element. Take the minimum value of the Rectangle element's width divided by 2 and height divided by 2, and this is the maximum set value for Round Corner Radius.
Set the Foreground Color of the element.
Foreground Color
(9)
Foreground Color
22-14
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Drawing
No. Property
Function description
You can select Yes or No for Blink. When you select Yes, the dynamic Rectangle is displayed as blinking; when you select No, the dynamic Rectangle does not blink. When its value is greater than 1, the dynamic Rectangle element is displayed as blinking; when the value is 0, it does not blink.
(10)
Blink
22
You can select Yes or No for Transparent. When you select Yes, the setting for the Foreground Color of the element is invalid; when you select No, the dynamic Rectangle element displays only the rectangle border line with the middle shown in transparent color.
(11) Transparent
When an element overlaps with the Rectangle, this function allows you to click on that element.
Please refer to the example below. Create a Numeric Entry element and create a Rectangle element that overlaps on top of the Numeric Entry element.
You can penetrate the rectangle and click on the Numeric Entry element.
Penetrate is on
(12) Penetrate
You cannot penetrate the rectangle and click on the Numeric Entry element.
Penetrate is off
After you click on the rectangle, the keypad will not pop up.
November, 2018
22-15
Drawing Main-2
22
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3)
Figure 22.2.3 Main-2 property page for the Rectangle element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
The Anti-aliasing function is available for this element and the default is Yes.
Yes (3) Anti-aliasing
No
22-16
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Picture (1)
(3)
Drawing
(2)
22
Figure 22.2.4 Picture property page for the Rectangle element
November, 2018
22-17
Drawing
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
22
The Picture Bank Name default is None. To set the picture display, use the drop-down list to select the picture bank provided by the software and then select the picture you need.
(1)
Picture Bank Name
22-18
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
You can use the alignment options to set how pictures are aligned.
Alignment
Drawing
22
The Stretch Mode options include Stretch All, Stretch 1:1, and Actual Size.
Stretch All
Stretch 1:1
Actual Size
(2)
If you select Stretch All, the picture fills the full element display area.
If you select Stretch 1:1, the picture displays in 1:1 size based on the element width and length.
If you select Actual Size, regardless of the element size, the picture displays in its actual size in the element display area.
Stretch Mode
If you check [Process pictures of all states], assume that the elements have multiple states and some pictures do not fill the full element display area, you can use this function to process all pictures instead of setting them one by one, which saves the editing time.
Specify a color in the picture and turn this color into transparent.
is for
selecting the transparent color. If you select the white part in the calendar, the
software changes the white part into transparent, which becomes identical to
the element foreground color.
(3)
Transparent Color
November, 2018
22-19
Drawing Details
22
(1)
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 22.2.5 Details property page for the Rectangle element
22-20
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Drawing
No.
Property
Function description
When Invisible Address is set to On, the button element is invisible and you cannot execute its set functions.
Invisible Address is
off
22
Invisible
(1)
Invisible Address
Address is on
Element is invisible
November, 2018
22-21
Drawing Coordinates
22
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 22.2.6 Coordinates property page for the Rectangle element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2) Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
22-22
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Drawing
22.3 Circle
Press the left mouse key and drag a range to form a circle. If the length is equal to the width, the graph created will become a circle; if not equal, it will become an oval. You can also use the set Read Address to control the moving position, color, size, and blinking of the circle.
When you double-click the Circle, the property page is shown as follows.
22
Figure 22.3.1 Properties of Circle
Function page Preview
Main Main-2 Coordinates
Table 22.3.1 Function page of the Circle element
Circle Description
The Circle element does not support multiple status values and multi-language display. Set Read Address, Read Offset Address, Line Color, Line Weight, Foreground Color, Blink, and Transparent. Set Data Format, Variable Color, Variable Central Point, and Variable Radius. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
November, 2018
22-23
Drawing Main
22
(6) (7)
DOPSoft User Manual
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4) (5) (8) (9) (10)
Figure 22.3.2 Main property page for the Circle element
22-24
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Drawing
No. Property
Function description
Available options are internal memory and controller register address.
When Variable Central Point is set to Yes, the value of the Read Address is
regarded as the X coordinate of the horizontal axis for the center point of the circle.
When Variable Central Point is set to Yes, [Read Address+1] is regarded as the Y coordinate of the vertical axis for the center point of the circle.
22
When Variable Radius is set to Yes, [Read Address+2] is regarded as the
extension of the horizontal axis for the center point of the circle which is the
width.
When Variable Radius is set to Yes, [Read Address+3] is regarded as the extension of the vertical axis for the center point of the circle which is the
height.
When Variable Color is set to Yes, [Read Address+4] is regarded as the
color for the Circle. Its value ranges from 0 to 65535.
When Blink is set to Yes, [Read Address+5] is regarded as the blinking for
the Circle. When its value is greater than 1, the Circle element is displayed
as blinking; when the value is 0, it does not blink.
For information about selecting Link Name or Element Style, please refer to Section 5.1.
When Variable Central Point is set to No, the corresponding memory
Read
address will be automatically filled in.
Address (1)
Variable Central Point
Variable Color
Variable Central
Point
Variable Color
Variable Radius
Blink
Variable Radius
Blink
N N+1 N+2 N+3 N+4
X coordinate of the horizontal axis for the center point of the circle
Y coordinate of the vertical axis for the center point of the circle
Extension of the horizontal axis for the center point of the circle which is the width
Extension of the vertical axis for the center point of the circle which is the height
Circle color
N N+1 N+2 N+3
Radius of the horizontal axis for the circle
Radius of the vertical axis for the circle
Foreground Color of the circle
Circle blinks or not
N+5
Circle blinks or not
Read Offset Address
Please refer to Appendix D for instructions on writing and reading the offset address.
The formats include BCD, Signed Decimal, Unsigned Decimal, and Hexadecimal.
(2) Data Format
November, 2018
22-25
Drawing
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
22
You can select Yes or No for Variable Color. When you select Yes, the color of the Circle can be changed; when you select No, the color of the Circle cannot be changed. Its value ranges from 0 to 65535.
(3)
Variable Color
You can select Yes or No for Variable Central Point. When you select Yes, the position of the center point of the circle can be changed; when you select No, though the Circle element cannot be moved, you can extend the size of the Circle element.
Variable
(4)
Central
Point
You can select Yes or No for Variable Radius. When you select Yes, the size of the Circle element can be extended; when you select No, the size of the Circle element cannot be extended.
(5)
Variable Radius
22-26
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
You can set the displaying color for the line.
(6) Line Color
Drawing
22
The line width setting ranges from 1 to 8. (7) Line Weight
Set the Foreground Color of the element.
(8)
Foreground Color
Foreground Color
November, 2018
22-27
Drawing
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
22
You can select Yes or No for Blink. When you select Yes, the Circle is displayed as blinking; when you select No, the Circle does not blink. When its value is greater than 1, the Circle element is displayed as blinking; when the value is 0, it does not blink.
(9)
Blink
You can select Yes or No for Transparent. When you select Yes, the setting for the Foreground Color of the element is invalid; when you select No, the Circle element displays only the circle border line with the middle shown in transparent color.
(10) Transparent
22-28
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Drawing
(1)
22
(2)
(3)
Figure 22.3.3 Main-2 property page for the Circle element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
The Anti-aliasing function is available for this element and the default is Yes.
Yes (3) Anti-aliasing
No
November, 2018
22-29
Drawing Coordinates
22
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 22.3.4 Coordinates property page for the Circle element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
22-30
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Drawing
22.4 Polygon
You can press the left mouse key to set each point for the polygon. When all the points are set, press the right mouse key to form a polygon.
When you double-click the Polygon, the property page is shown as follows.
22
Figure 22.4.1 Properties of Polygon
Table 22.4.1 Function page of the Polygon element
Function page
Preview
Main Main-2 Coordinates
Polygon Description
The Polygon element does not support multiple status values and multi-language display. Set Line Color, Line Weight, Foreground Color, and Transparent. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
November, 2018
22-31
Drawing Main
22
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Figure 22.4.2 Main property page for the Polygon element
No. Property
Function description
You can set the displaying color for the line.
(1) Line Color
22-32
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
The line width setting ranges from 1 to 8.
(2) Line Weight
Drawing
22
Set the Foreground Color of the element. Foreground Color
(3)
Foreground Color
November, 2018
22-33
Drawing
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
22
You can select Yes or No for Transparent. When you select Yes, the foreground color for the pie is transparent with only the border color displayed for the pie; when you select No, the foreground color is displayed.
(4)
Transparen t
Transparent is set to Yes
Transparent is set to No
22-34
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Drawing
(1)
22
(2)
(3)
Figure 22.4.3 Main-2 property page for the Polygon element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
The Anti-aliasing function is available for this element and the default is Yes.
Yes (3) Anti-aliasing
No
November, 2018
22-35
Drawing Coordinates
22
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 22.4.4 Coordinates property page for the Polygon element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
22-36
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
22.5 Text
You can use the Text element to enter the text for display. When you double-click the Text, the property page is shown as follows.
Drawing
22
Figure 22.5.1 Properties of Text
Table 22.5.1 Function page of the Text element
Function page Preview
Main Main-2
Text Details Coordinates
Text Description
The Text element does not support multiple status values, but the multi-language display can be edited. Set Read Address, Read Offset Address, Foreground Color, Transparent, and Smoothing. Set Data Format and Variable Position. Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing. Set the text content, font, size, color, format, zoom, and alignment type. Set the Invisible Address. Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
November, 2018
22-37
Drawing Main
22
(1)
DOPSoft User Manual
(2)
(3) (4) (5) (6)
Figure 22.5.2 Main property page for the Text element
No.
Property
Function description
Available options are internal memory and controller register address.
When Variable Position is set to Yes, the value of the Read Address is
Read Address
regarded as the X coordinate for the horizontal axis of the Text.
(1)
When Variable Position is set to Yes, the value of [Read Address+1] is
regarded as the Y coordinate for the vertical axis of the Text.
Read Offset Please refer to Appendix D for instructions on writing and reading the offset
Address
address.
The formats include BCD, Signed Decimal, Unsigned Decimal, and Hexadecimal.
(2) Data Format
22-38
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Drawing
No.
Property
Function description
You can select Yes or No for Variable Position. When you select Yes, the position of the Text can be changed; when you select No, the position of the Text cannot be changed.
(3)
Variable Position
22
Set the Foreground Color of the element.
(4)
Foreground Color
Foreground Color
You can select Yes or No for Transparent. When you select Yes, the foreground color for the Text is transparent with only the text color displayed for the Text; when you select No, the foreground color is displayed.
(5)
Transparent
Transparent is set to Yes
Transparent is set to No
November, 2018
22-39
Drawing
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
22
Property
Function description
You can select Yes or No for Smoothing. When you select Yes, the font will not be displayed with jagged edges and will be smoother; when you select No, the font will be displayed with jagged edges and will not be smooth.
(6)
Smoothing
Smoothing is set to Yes
Smoothing is set to No
22-40
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Drawing
(1)
22
(2)
(3)
Figure 22.5.3 Main-2 property page for the Text element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3) Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
November, 2018
22-41
Drawing Text
22
(4)
(1) (3)
DOPSoft User Manual (2) (5)
Figure 22.5.4 Text property page for the Text element
No.
Property
Function description
You can enter the text to display in this box.
(1)
Text
As long as the element allows text input, you can click the element and press the space key to start editing the text.
Set the text properties, including the font, size, color, zoom, alignment, and
(2)
Text property
bold / italic / underline for the text. You can refer to the Preview section in the figure above for results of the text
property setting.
(3)
Edit multi-
If you have added multi-language text, the Text page allows you to edit multi-
language text language data.
22-42
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No.
Property
Function description
(4)
Process the text of all states
This element does not support multi-state functions.
Process text (5) properties of all This element does not support multi-state functions.
states
Drawing
22
November, 2018
22-43
Drawing Details
22
(1)
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 22.5.5 Details property page for the Text element
No. Property
Function description
When Invisible Address is set to On, the button element is invisible and you cannot execute its set functions.
Invisible Address is off
Invisible
(1)
Invisible Address
Address is on
Element is invisible
22-44
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Coordinates
Drawing
22
(1) (2)
Figure 22.5.6 Coordinates property page for the Text element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2) Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
November, 2018
22-45
Drawing
DOPSoft User Manual
22.6 Scale
22
You can use the Scale element to indicate the curve value for the History Trend Graph. In the Scale element, you can set the Scale Mark Number and Subscale Mark Number, as well as Data Type, Data Format, Maximum, and Minimum to be displayed. You can also decide whether to display the marked value or only to display the scale.
When you double-click the Scale, the property page is shown as follows.
Figure 22.6.1 Properties of Scale
Table 22.6.1 Function page of the Scale element
Function page Preview
Main
Main-2 Text
Coordinates
Scale
Description
The Scale element does not support multiple status values and multi-language display.
Set Display Mark, Scale Mark Number, Subscale Mark Number, Mark Color, and Style. Set Data Type, Data Format, Minimum, Maximum, Integer Digits, and Fractional (Digits).
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing.
Set the displayed text font, size, and color.
Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
22-46
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main
(5)
(6) (7)
(8)
Drawing
22 (1)
(2) (3)
(4)
Figure 22.6.2 Main property page for the Scale element
No. Property
Function description
The Data Type includes Word and Double Word.
(1) Data Type
November, 2018
22-47
Drawing
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
When the Data Type is Word, the supported data formats are as follows:
22
(2)
Data Format
When the Data Type is Double Word, the supported data formats are as follows:
The allowable ranges for the Minimum and Maximum values vary based on the selected Data Type, Integer Digits, and Fractional (Digits). The table below is based on the example with no Fractional (Digits) set.
Data Type
Data Format
Allowable range
Integer Fractional Digits (Digits)
Minimum / (3) Maximum
value
BCD Word Signed Decimal
Unsigned Decimal
0 to 9999 -3278 to 32767
0 to 65535
4
0
5
0
5
0
BCD
0 to 99999999
8
0
Double Word
Signed Decimal -2147483648 to 2147483647
10
0
Unsigned Decimal
0 to 4294697295
10
0
(4)
Integer / Fractional
Digits
You can set the displaying number of integer digits and the number of decimal places.
22-48
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Drawing
No. Property
Function description
You can select Yes or No for Display Mark. When you select Yes, the value on the Scale is displayed; when you select No, the value on the Scale is not displayed and only the Scale is displayed.
22
(5)
Display Mark
Display Mark is set to Yes
Display Mark is set to No
You can set the number of marks to display for Scale Mark Number and Subscale Mark Number with the maximum of up to 99.
Scale
(1)
Mark
Number
(6)
Subscale Mark
Number (2)
November, 2018
22-49
Drawing
No. Property
Function description
You can customize the color displayed for the scale.
22
(7)
Mark Color
Mark Color
DOPSoft User Manual
The Style setting includes Standard, Rotation 90, Rotation 180, and Rotation 270. You can change the appearance of the element with this setting.
Standard
Rotation 90
Rotation 180
Rotation 270
(8)
Style
22-50
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Drawing
(1)
22
(2)
(3)
Figure 22.6.3 Main-2 property page for the Scale element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
(3) Anti-aliasing The Anti-aliasing function is not available for this element.
November, 2018
22-51
Drawing Text
22
DOPSoft User Manual (1)
Figure 22.6.3 Text property page for the Scale element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Text property Set the Text properties which include font, size, and color.
22-52
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Coordinates
Drawing
22
(1) (2)
Figure 22.6.4 Coordinates property page for the Scale element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
November, 2018
22-53
Drawing
DOPSoft User Manual
22.7 Table
22
The Table element offers the same functions as those in the Office editing program, enabling users to add rows and columns. You can also set the colors for the rows and columns which adds more variety to the appearance of the tables.
When you double-click the Table, the property page is shown as follows.
Figure 22.7.1 Properties of Table
Table 22.7.1 Function page of the Table element
Function page Preview
Main
Main-2 Coordinates
Table
Description
The Table element does not support multiple status values and multi-language display.
Set Border Color, Gridline Color, Number of Rows, Number of Columns, and Background Color. Set Row Header, Column Header, (Alternate) Rows / Columns, and (Alternate) Row Header / Column Header. Set to Distribute Rows Evenly and Distribute Columns Evenly.
Set the Transparent, Smooth animation, and Anti-aliasing.
Set the X and Y coordinates, width, and height of the elements.
22-54
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main (5) (4)
(6) (7)
(3)
Drawing
22 (1)
(2)
Figure 22.7.1 Main property page for the Table element
November, 2018
22-55
Drawing
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
You can set to display the Row Header for the first row of the Table and set the displaying color for the Row Header.
22
Check
Row Header
Uncheck
(1) You can set to display the Column Header for the first column of the Table and set the displaying color for the Column Header.
Check
Column Header
Uncheck
22-56
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Drawing
No. Property
Function description
You can set the displaying color for the (Alternate) Rows and set to use the (Alternate) Rows format.
22
Check
(Alternate) Rows
Uncheck
(2) You can set the displaying color for the (Alternate) Columns and set to use the (Alternate) Columns format.
Check
(Alternate) Columns
Uncheck
November, 2018
22-57
Drawing
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
To use (Alternate) Row Header, you need to check (Alternate) Rows to enable the (Alternate) Row Header function.
22
Check
(Alternate) Row
Header
Uncheck
(2)
To use (Alternate) Column Header, you need to check (Alternate) Columns to
enable the (Alternate) Column Header function.
Check
(Alternate) Column Header
Uncheck
22-58
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Drawing
No. Property
Function description
The Distribute Rows Evenly option adjusts uneven height between the rows in a table.
22
Before
Distribute
(3)
Rows
Evenly
After
You can set the height for the row with the sum of the height not exceeding the element height.
If the set row height is greater than the element height, the software prompts the following message.
November, 2018
22-59
Drawing
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
The Distribute Columns Evenly option adjusts uneven width between the columns in a table.
22
Before
Distribute Columns Evenly
After
You can set the width for the column with the sum of the width not exceeding the element width.
If the set column width is greater than the element width, the software prompts the following message.
22-60
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
Set the Border Color for the table.
(4)
Border Color
Border Color
Drawing
22
Set the Gridline Color for the table.
(5)
Gridline Color
Gridline Color
Number of
(6)
Rows
Up to 99 rows and columns can be added for the Number of Rows and
Number of Columns.
Columns
November, 2018
22-61
Drawing
DOPSoft User Manual
No. Property
Function description
You can customize the displaying color for the element background.
22
Background Color
(7)
Background Color
22-62
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Main-2
Drawing
(1)
22
(2)
(3)
Figure 22.7.3 Main-2 property page for the Table element
No.
Property
Function description
(1)
Transparent
You can set the transparency value within the range of 50 to 255. The default is 255. The smaller the value, the higher the transparency of the element.
(2)
Smooth animation
The Smooth animation function is not available for this element.
The Anti-aliasing function is available for this element and the default is Yes.
Yes (3) Anti-aliasing
No
November, 2018
22-63
Drawing Coordinates
22
DOPSoft User Manual
(1) (2)
Figure 22.7.4 Coordinates property page for the Table element
No.
Property
Function description
(1) X value and Y value Set the upper left X coordinate and Y coordinate of the elements.
(2)
Width and Height Set the width and height of the elements.
22-64
November, 2018
Recipe
This chapter explains the memory address occupied by recipes and the way to set up recipes in detail.
Test
23.1 16-bit Recipe��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 23-3 23.2 32-bit Recipe��������������������������������������������������������������������������������23-20 23.3 Indirect recipe index register (*RCP) �������������������������������������������������23-37 23.4 Enhanced recipe���������������������������������������������������������������������������23-40 23.5 Enhanced indirect recipe index register (*ENRCP) �������������������������������23-62
November, 2018
23-1
Recipe
DOPSoft User Manual
23
A recipe is comprised of a number of parameters. When using different products for different industrial applications, these products will have their corresponding parameters. You can change the type of the products and use the corresponding recipe parameters. You can also set and save the recipe parameters. The created recipe tables can be uploaded from the HMI to the PLC or downloaded from the PLC to the HMI. The recipe function enables the user to store a large number of numeric parameters in the HMI memory area. For example, the baking time varies for different types of bread, and these time variables can be controlled by the HMI recipe function. The purpose is to reduce the load of the controller, so that the register of the controller can be conserved for other operations.
Classification of recipe setup elements for the HMI:
Recipe setup
16-bit Recipe 32-bit Recipe Enhanced Recipe
23-2
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Recipe
23.1 16-bit Recipe
Check Enable to use the 16-bit Recipe and set the 16-bit Recipe Address, then the dedicated register will appear and you can create the 16-bit Recipe data.
The 16-bit Recipe has its own registers, which are RCP and RCPNO.
RCP RCPNO
Recipe register Recipe number register
23
Figure 23.1.1 16-bit Recipe register November, 2018
23-3
Recipe
DOPSoft User Manual
When using the 16-bit Recipe, the size of each recipe register is 16 bits (16 bits = 1 word). Assuming that the length is L and the group is G, the actual recipe count is L*G words.
23
Actual recipe size: L * G
Length (L)
Group (G)
Figure 23.1.2 16-bit Recipe register size Recipe number register (RCPNO) RCPNO is used to specify the number for the 16-bit Recipe. Reading / writing of the recipe means to read / write a set of recipes according to the recipe number recorded in the recipe number register. When you select the first set of recipes, RCPNO = 1; when you select the fourth set of recipes, RCPNO = 4. Note: the recipe number register does not feature the non-volatile function, so the data in the register cannot be maintained when the HMI is powered off.
RCPNO = 1
RCPNO = 4 Figure 23.1.3 Recipe number editing screen
23-4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Recipe
Recipe register (RCP) A recipe buffer is featured in the HMI and is configured at the front of the recipe register. This buffer is used to store the selected group of recipes, and the length of the recipe buffer equals the length of the selected group of recipes, that is, the recipe buffer also occupies L recipe registers. Thus, the number of the recipe registers that a recipe table occupies is L * (G+1), where G+1 stands for the number of the registers with an additional buffer. With the recipe buffer, you only need to switch between the recipe numbers to check the currently specified recipe parameters. When the selected recipe number (RCPNO) is 1, the value of recipe number 1 will be displayed in the recipe buffer (i.e. RCPNO = 1 in the figure below).
23
(1) RCPNO = 1
(2) Length (L)
RCPn { n: 0~(L*(G+1)-1) } -1 means the recipe register address Group (G)
starts from 0
(1)
Actual recipe size: L * G
RCPNO = 1 (2)
(1) Recipe buffer area (2) Recipe table address - first recipe
Figure 23.1.4 16-bit Recipe buffer configuration
Accessing range of the recipe register:
Table 23.1.1 Recipe register
Accessing type Word Bit
Note: n = Word (0 - 65535)
Element type RCPn RCPn
Accessing range RCP0 - RCP65535 RCP0.0 - RCP65535.15
November, 2018
23-5
Recipe
DOPSoft User Manual
23
The address accessing range provided by RCP is limited according to the recipe size that you created. Assume the recipe size is length 3*group 3, then the RCP address ranges from RCP0 to RCP11. When creating the RCP12 address, a warning message will pop up, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 23.1.5 Recipe register configuration
16-bit Recipe size limit 1. If the non-volatile memory area is set in the USB Disk or SD Card, the editable size of a
16-bit Recipe is (L*G) = 4194304. You can go to [View] > [Memory List] to check the size and capacity for the 16-bit Recipe.
23-6
Figure 23.1.6 16-bit Recipe external storage
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Recipe
2. If the non-volatile memory area is set to HMI, the editable size of a 16-bit Recipe is (L*G) = 65536 words or 64K. Hence, when the edited 16-bit Recipe exceeds 64K, a warning message will appear on the recipe setup window to remind the user that the current recipe size has exceeded the allowable limit.
23
Figure 23.1.7 16-bit Recipe internal storage
November, 2018
23-7
Recipe
DOPSoft User Manual
23
Go to [Options] > [Recipe] to create the 16-bit Recipe data. By setting the recipe, you can write a large amount of data in batch to the PLC using the recipe control flag in the control area or read the data from the PLC to the HMI. The recipe can be used for production process control in the industry, enhancing convenience in processing a large amount of data.
Figure 23.1.8 16-bit Recipe Refer to the 16-bit Recipe example in Table 23.1.4 below.
23-8
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 23.1.2 16-bit Recipe example 16-bit Recipe
Step 1: go to [Options] > [Recipe] > [16-Bit Recipe]. 1. Check Enable. 2. Set the external address to D20.
Recipe
23
Set 16-bit Recipe 3.
Click
to set the Length and Groups to 3.
4. Click OK and a table with the set Length and Groups appears. Fill in the values to be displayed.
November, 2018
23-9
Recipe
23
DOPSoft User Manual
16-bit Recipe Create a Numeric Entry element and set the Write Address to Internal Memory. Select RCPNO for the Device Type. This element is used to select the Recipe Group.
Create RCPNO Numeric
Entry element
The following is an example of the created element: RCPNO
23-10
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Recipe
16-bit Recipe
The steps are as follows: 1. Input the size of the recipe (Length (L) x Group (G) = 3 x 3) into the formula L * (G+1) to
get the actual configured RCP = RCP0 - RCP11. 2. Create 12 Numeric Entry elements and set their Read Address starting from RCP0 of
the Internal Memory in sequence.
23
Create RCP Numeric Entry elements
3. The following is an example of the created elements: Recipe buffer
area
Recipe start address
Note: the created RCP0 - RCP2 are the recipe buffers and the actual recipe data RCPs are RCP3 RCP11. For more information, refer to Figure 23.1.4 16-bit Recipe buffer configuration.
November, 2018
23-11
Recipe
23
DOPSoft User Manual
16-bit Recipe Create three Numeric Entry elements, which are D20, D21, and D22, to display changes made to the data when reading or writing the PLC recipes. Set the Read Address to D20 for the Numeric Entry element , as shown below:
Create Numeric
Entry elements for the Recipe
Address
The following is an example of the created elements: PLC address
Go to [Options] > [Configuration] > [Control Block], and check the Recipe Control flag. Then, set the Start Address for the Control Block to define the recipe control address. Once the setting is complete, click OK to exit the Configuration window.
Set Recipe Control flag in Control
Block
23-12
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Recipe
16-bit Recipe
Create two Set Constant buttons. Set the Write Address to D5 and the setting value to 2 and 4 corresponding to Bit 1 and Bit 2 of the recipe control flag D5 respectively for reading and writing the recipe.
23
Create Set Constant elements
After creating all the elements, please compile and download all data to the HMI.
Select the Recipe Group. The recipe data will be displayed in the created RCP0 RCP11 according to the set recipe, with RCP0 - RCP2 as the recipe buffers. The starting address for the first group of the actual recipe data is RCP3.
Execution results
RCPNO
RCP0
RCP3 RCP6 RCP9
RCP1 RCP4 RCP7 RCP10
RCP2 RCP5 RCP8 RCP11
Recipe buffer area First recipe data Second recipe data Third recipe data
PLC address D20
D21
D22
Trigger the Recipe Write button and the recipe data of the selected recipe group will be written to the PLC. Trigger the Recipe Read button and the recipe data that were written to the PLC will be read back to the HMI with reference to the selected recipe group. The recipe data will be changed to match with the content of the selected recipe group.
November, 2018
23-13
Recipe
23
16-bit Recipe RCPNO
Write recipe (HMI to PLC)
(2) PLC address
RCPNO (2)
Execution results
Second recipe data
DOPSoft User Manual (1)
Write recipe data to PLC
(1)
PLC address Read recipe (PLC to HMI) After carrying out step (2), the second group of recipe data will be
displayed in 1, 2, and 3 because of having read the PLC data.
RCPNO
23-14
Read data from the PLC back to the HMI
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
The following section introduces the property settings for the 16-bit Recipe. Table 23.1.3 Properties of the 16-bit Recipe setting Properties of the 16-bit Recipe setting
Recipe
23
Enable
Check Enable to use the recipe register address. With Enable not checked, the HMI recipe function will not be activated. The non-volatile memories include HMI, USB Disk, and SD Card.
Non-volatile
The non-volatile memory of DOP-103 and DOP-107 can only be set in the HMI and USB Disk; DOP-110 can be set in the HMI, USB Disk, and SD Card.
If you select to save in the HMI, the data is saved in the HMI ROM when power is off.
November, 2018
23-15
Recipe
23
DOPSoft User Manual
Properties of the 16-bit Recipe setting Available options are internal memory and controller register address. For information about selecting Link Name or Element Style, please refer to Section 5.1.
Recipe read
address
To set the Length and Groups for the recipe, click .
Add recipe
After entering the Length and Groups values for the recipe, press OK to create the recipe.
The Length and Groups cannot be 0. If you input 0 in Length or Groups, an error message will pop up.
Length / Groups
23-16
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Recipe
Properties of the 16-bit Recipe setting
Enter the Length and Groups to form a table of Length (L) x Groups (G) in the blank
area. For example, with 4 for the Length and 3 for the Groups, the table will be 4 x 3.
Note: limited by the internal memory size of the HMI, the recipe size cannot exceed 64K (Length x Groups cannot be greater than 65536). If the recipe size exceeds 64K, the software will prompt the following warning message:
23
Recipe You can fill in the recipe data in this table. content
The import recipe function supports CSV and RCP file formats for you to select and import the recipe.
Import recipe
The opened and imported recipe file provides the recipe data content only and the recipe address does not support loading the original set address. If you use the 16-bit Recipe to open a RCP or CSV file of the 32-bit Recipe, the software will prompt the following error message once the file is loaded.
November, 2018
23-17
Recipe
23
DOPSoft User Manual
Properties of the 16-bit Recipe setting The export recipe function saves the current 16-bit Recipe. The supported file
formats are the same as those of the Open function, which are CSV and RCP files.
Export recipe
The saved recipe data does not support saving the set recipe address. Clear the recipe content that has the value entered.
Before clearing Clear configuration
After clearing
23-18
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Properties of the 16-bit Recipe setting
Click
to delete the entire recipe. You will have to create a new recipe.
The delete function also sets the 16-bit Recipe Address to None.
Recipe
23
Before
Delete recipe
After
Reset the Length and Groups for the recipe. Recipe Settings
November, 2018
23-19
Recipe
DOPSoft User Manual
23.2 32-bit Recipe
23
The data type that the 32-bit Recipe supports is Double Word. The data formats include Signed Decimal, Unsigned Decimal, and Floating. The size of each recipe register is 32 bits (2 Words or 1 Double Word, DW). Unlike 16-bit Recipes, the 32-bit Recipe features an additional recipe grouping option. When reading or writing the recipe, you have to specify both the recipe number and recipe group before reading / writing one of the recipe sets.
(1)
(2)
RCPNO = 1 (3)
RCPn { n: 0 ~ (L*(G+1)-1) } -1 means the recipe register address
starts from 0
(1)
Group (G)
(2)
Length (L)
RCPNO = 1 (3)
(1) Recipe group (2) Recipe buffer area (3) Recipe table address - first recipe
Figure 23.2.1 32-bit Recipe buffer configuration
The 32-bit Recipe has its own registers which are RCP, RCPNO, and RCPG.
RCP RCPNO RCPG
Recipe register Recipe number register Recipe group register
RCP and RCPNO are registers that are jointly used with the 16-bit Recipe, as have already been introduced in the section on the 16-bit Recipe. The following section introduces the features of the RCPG register.
23-20
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Recipe
Recipe group register (RCPG) The recipe group register is used to specify the group for the 32-bit Recipe. You can create up to 255 groups of 32-bit Recipe data.
The Recipe Group 0 (RCPG 0) is assigned for use by the 16-bit Recipe. Calling the 32-bit Recipe data requires use of the Recipe Groups 1 - 255 (RCPG 1 - 255).
23
For a 32-bit Recipe, when you select the first recipe number in the first group, RCPG = 1 and RCPNO = 1; when you select the fourth recipe number in the third group, RCPG = 3 and RCPNO = 4.
Note: the recipe group register does not feature the non-volatile function, so the data in the register cannot be maintained when the HMI is powered off.
RCPG = 1
RCPNO = 1
RCPG = 3
Figure 23.2.2 32-bit Recipe group editing screen
RCPNO = 4
November, 2018
23-21
Recipe
DOPSoft User Manual
23
Recipe number register (RCPNO) RCPNO is used to specify the number for the 32-bit Recipe. Reading / writing of the recipe means to read / write a set of recipes according to the recipe number recorded in the recipe number register. When you select the first set of recipes, RCPNO = 1; when you select the fourth set of recipes, RCPNO = 4.
Note: the recipe number register does not feature the non-volatile function, so the data in the register cannot be maintained when the HMI is powered off.
RCPNO = 1
RCPNO = 4
Figure 23.2.3 Recipe Number editing screen
32-bit Recipe size limit If the non-volatile memory area is set in the USB Disk or SD Card, the size of the 32-bit Recipe file cannot exceed 50MB. Unlike the 16-bit Recipe, the editable size of the 32-bit Recipe is dependent upon the specification of the flash memory for the HMI of different models when the non-volatile memory area is set in the HMI. You can go to [View] > [Memory List] to check the editable recipe size, as shown in Figure 23.2.4.
23-22
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Recipe
23
Figure 23.2.4 32-bit Recipe memory list Refer to the 32-bit Recipe example in Table 23.2.1 below.
November, 2018
23-23
Recipe
23
Table 23.2.1 32-bit Recipe example
32-bit Recipe
Step 1: go to [Options] > [Recipe] > [32-Bit Recipe]. 1. Check Enable. 2. Set Recipe Address to D50.
Step 2: click
to enter the 32-bit Recipe Settings.
DOPSoft User Manual
Set both the Length and Group to 3 for the first set of Recipe. Set Data Format to Unsigned Decimal.
Set 32-bit Recipe
23-24
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Recipe
32-bit Recipe Step 3: repeat Step 2. Set both Length and Group to 3. The recipe data is shown below:
23
Set 32-bit Recipe
Step 4: repeat Step 1. Set both Length and Group to 3. The recipe data is shown below:
Create a Numeric Entry element and set the Write Address to Internal Memory. Select RCPG for the Device Type. This element is used to select the Recipe Group.
Create RCPG Numeric Entry element
The following is an example of the created element: Recipe Group
November, 2018
23-25
Recipe
23
DOPSoft User Manual
32-bit Recipe Create a Numeric Entry element and set the Write Address to Internal Memory. Select RCPNO for the Device Type. This element is used to select the Recipe Number.
Create RCPNO Numeric
Entry element
The following is an example of the created element:
Recipe number
Step 1: before the Numeric Entry elements are created to display the 32-bit Recipe register, you can use the recipe register formula [(L*(G+1)-1)}] to calculate the number that n in RCPn represents. Input the set size of the recipe (Length (L) x Group (G) = 3 x 3) into the formula to gain RCPn = RCP0 - RCP11.
Step 2: create 12 Numeric Display elements and set their Write Address starting from RCP0 of the Internal Memory and so on.
Create RCP Numeric Entry elements
23-26
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
32-bit Recipe The following is an example of the created elements:
Recipe buffer area
Create RCP Numeric Entry elements
Recipe table save address
Recipe
23
Note: the created RCP0 - RCP2 are the recipe buffers and the actual recipe data RCPs are RCP3 RCP11. For more information, refer to Figure 23.2.1 32-bit Recipe buffer configuration.
Create three Numeric Entry elements by referring to the address set for the 32-bit Recipe to display changes to the data when reading or writing the PLC recipe. The 32-bit Recipe uses the Double Word format, so the Recipe Address entered needs to start from D50 and increment by 2 addresses to D52, D54.
Set the Read Address to D50 for the Numeric Entry element , as shown below:
Create Numeric
Entry elements for the Recipe
Address
The following is an example of the created elements: PLC address
November, 2018
23-27
Recipe
23
DOPSoft User Manual
32-bit Recipe Go to [Options] > [Configuration] > [Control Block], and check the Recipe Control flag. Then, set the Start Address for the Control Block to define the recipe control address. Once the setting is complete, click OK to exit the Configuration window.
Set Recipe Control flag in Control
Block
Create two Set Constant buttons. Set the Write Address to D5 and the setting value to 2 and 4 corresponding to Bit 1 and Bit 2 of the recipe control flag D5 respectively for reading and writing the recipe.
Create Set Constant
button element
23-28
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Recipe
32-bit Recipe After creating all the elements, please compile and download the screen data and
recipe to the HMI.
The default for the Recipe Group (RCPG) is 0 after loading to the HMI, meaning that the 16-bit Recipe data is displayed. You need to select 1 for the Recipe Group to display the 32-bit Recipe data. Recipe group RCPG
23
Buffer 16-bit Recipe data
Execution results
Recipe group RCPG
32-bit Recipe data
November, 2018
23-29
Recipe
23
DOPSoft User Manual
32-bit Recipe
The recipe data will be displayed in RCP0 - RCP11 according to the selected recipe group. RCP0 - RCP2 are the recipe buffers and the starting address for the first set of recipe data is RCP3.
Recipe group RCPG
RCP0
Buffer
Actual recipe start address
RCP3 RCP6
RCP1 RCP4 RCP7
Recipe number RCPNO
RCP2
RCP5
RCP8
RCP9
RCP10
RCP11
Execution results
D50
D52
D54
Trigger the Recipe Write button and the recipe data of the selected recipe group will be written to the PLC. Trigger the Recipe Read button and the recipe data that were written to the PLC will be read back to the HMI with reference to the selected recipe group. The recipe data will be changed to match with the content of the selected recipe group.
Step 1
Recipe group RCPG
Write recipe (HMI
to PLC)
Buffer
Actual recipe start address
Step 2
Write recipe data to PLC
23-30
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Step 1
32-bit Recipe
Recipe group RCPG
Step 2
Recipe
23
Execution results
Read
recipe (PLC
to
HMI)
After carrying out Step 2, the first set of recipe data will be displayed in 1, 2, and 3 because of having read the PLC data.
Recipe group RCPG
Read data from the PLC back to the HMI
November, 2018
23-31
Recipe
DOPSoft User Manual
The following section introduces the property settings for the 32-bit Recipe.
23
Table 23.2.2 Properties of the 32-bit Recipe setting Properties of the 32-bit Recipe setting
Enable
Check Enable to use the 32-bit Recipe. If Enable is not checked, all settings for the 32-bit Recipe will not take effect.
The non-volatile memories include HMI, USB Disk, and SD Card.
Non-volatile
The non-volatile memory of DOP-103 and DOP-107 can only be set in the HMI and USB Disk; DOP-110 can be set in the HMI, USB Disk, and SD Card.
If you select to save in the HMI, the data is saved in the HMI ROM when power is off. Available options are internal memory and controller register address. For information about selecting Link Name or Element Style, please refer to
Section 5.1. Addresses set by the 32-bit Recipe share one common memory address
regardless of the number of the recipe sets created.
Address
23-32
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Properties of the 32-bit Recipe setting
Go to the 32-bit Recipe window, click
to add a 32-bit Recipe data.
Recipe
23
Add recipe
You can add 255 groups of 32-bit Recipe data via the
button.
The Length and Group represent the recipe length and group that you entered respectively. The size of Length x Group cannot exceed 50MB.
Length / Groups
The Length and Group cannot be 0. If you input 0 in Length or Group, an error message will pop up.
November, 2018
23-33
Recipe
23
DOPSoft User Manual Properties of the 32-bit Recipe setting Data formats include Signed Decimal, Unsigned Decimal, and Floating.
Data Format
You can only set the integer and fractional digits when the data format is floating.
Integer Digits Add recipe
When the data format is floating, the integer and fractional digits support only 7 digits in total. When exceeding this limit, a warning message pops up.
Fractional Digits
23-34
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Recipe
Properties of the 32-bit Recipe setting
The import recipe function supports CSV and RCP file formats for you to select and import the recipe.
23
Import recipe
The opened and imported recipe file provides the recipe data content only and the recipe address does not support loading of the original set address. If you use the 32-bit Recipe to open a RCP or CSV file of the 16-bit Recipe, the recipe data is unable to display once loaded in, and an error message will pop up.
The export recipe function saves the current 32-bit Recipe. The supported file format is the same as that of the Open function, which is CSV file.
Export recipe
The saved recipe data does not support saving the set recipe address.
November, 2018
23-35
Recipe
DOPSoft User Manual
Properties of the 32-bit Recipe setting The delete recipe function deletes the 32-bit Recipe data. When executing this function, a warning message will appear confirming if you want to delete the data.
23 Delete recipe
Clear the recipe content that has the value entered.
Before clearing
Clear configuration
After clearing
To use the 32-bit Recipe Settings function, there must be recipe data in the 32-bit Recipe. You can use this function to change the Length, Group, and Data Format of the recipe.
Recipe Settings
23-36
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Recipe
23.3 Indirect recipe index register (*RCP)
Indirect recipe index register can be used by both 16-bit and 32-bit Recipes. Indirect recipe index register (*RCP n) acquires the value from RCP n first. It treats this value as the new address and then accesses the value from this new address. For example, RCP1 = 3, RCP3 = 99, so *RCP1 = 99 (see Figure 23.3.1).
Recipe Value register content
RCP0
23
RCP1 3 Indirect address
*RCP1 99
RCP1 RCP2 RCP3 99
Figure 23.3.1 Indirect recipe index
The accessing range of the indirect recipe index register is as follows:
Accessing type Word
Note: n = Word (0 - 65535)
Element type *RCPn
Accessing range RCP0 - RCP65535
The address accessing range provided by *RCP is limited according to the recipe size created by the users. Assuming the recipe size is Length 3 * Group 3, then the RCP address ranges from *RCP0 to *RCP11. When creating *RCP12, a warning message will pop up, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 23.3.2 Indirect recipe index register configuration The following section introduces the example for the indirect recipe index.
November, 2018
23-37
Recipe
23
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 23.3.1 Example of indirect recipe index register Indirect recipe index register
Create a 16-bit Recipe (1024 for Length, 64 for Group) and set RCP3 to 65535.
Set 16-bit Recipe
Create a Numeric Entry element and select *RCP for the Device Type. Then enter 3 for Address/Value.
Create four Numeric Entry elements and select RCP for the Device Type. Then enter 0 to 3 for Address/Value respectively.
Create Numeric
Entry elements
Create a Numeric Entry element and select RCP for the Device Type. Then enter 65535 for Address/Value.
23-38
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Recipe
Indirect recipe index register Create the Clock macro command *RCP3 = *RCP3 + 1.
Create Numeric Entry
elements
23
Execution results
After executing compiling for the screen, download it to the HMI. The values of *RCP3 and RCP65535 will increase simultaneously.
*RCP3
RCP0
RCP1
RCP2
RCP3
RCP65535
November, 2018
23-39
Recipe
DOPSoft User Manual
23.4 Enhanced recipe
23
During the production process, recording information with character format is sometimes needed for ease of identification. Thus, the provided enhanced recipe is able to record character format (string) / numeric format in mixed use. Its supported data type is Word or Double Word and its data format selections include BCD, Signed Decimal, Unsigned Decimal, Hexadecimal, Floating, and Char. Among them, the Char format supports read length of up to 32 Words (= 64 bits) and Unicode input.
The use of its Control Block setting is the same as that of the 16-bit / 32-bit Recipe with the exception of using a different Control Block address. When reading or writing the recipe, you have to specify both the recipe number and recipe group before reading / writing one of the recipe sets.
DOPSoft provides an enhanced recipe that incorporated the multi-language input element to name the recipe group. Unlike the previous ENRCPG register address, you have to remember the content and other information for the first recipe group. With the added ENRCPGNAME register address, you can enter the recipe name to call the recipe, which is more user-friendly. Also, ENRCPGNAME names the group in Unicode, so you can enter different languages. Therefore, you need to use the multi-language input element with the ENRCPGNAME register.
23-40
Figure 23.4.1 Using enhanced recipe address in Control Block November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Recipe
The enhanced recipe has its own registers, including ENRCP, ENRCPNO, ENRCPG, ENRCPGNAME, and *ENRCP.
ENRCP ENRCPNO ENRCPG ENRCPGNAME
*ENRCP
Enhanced recipe register Enhanced recipe number register
Enhanced recipe group register Enhanced recipe group register Enhanced indirect recipe index register
23
The following section introduces the features of each register mentioned above. Enhanced recipe number register (ENRCPNO) ENRCPNO is used to specify the number for the enhanced recipe. Reading / writing of the recipe means to read / write a set of recipes according to the recipe number recorded in the recipe number register. When you select the first set of recipes, ENRCPNO = 1; when you select the fourth set of recipes, ENRCPNO = 4.
Note: the recipe number register does not feature the non-volatile function, so the data in the register cannot be maintained when the HMI is powered off.
ENRCPNO = 1
ENRCPNO = 4 Figure 23.4.2 Enhanced recipe number editing screen
November, 2018
23-41
Recipe
DOPSoft User Manual
23
Enhanced recipe register (ENRCP) A recipe buffer is featured in the HMI and is configured at the front of the recipe register. This buffer is used to store the selected group of recipes, and the number of fields for the recipe buffer equals the number of fields for the selected recipes, that is, the recipe buffer occupies L registers. Thus, the number of the registers that a recipe table occupies is L * (G+1), where G+1 stands for the additional register for the buffer. With the recipe buffer, you only need to switch between the recipe numbers to check the currently specified recipe parameters. When the selected recipe number (ENRCPNO) is 1, the value of recipe number 1 will be displayed in the recipe buffer (i.e. ENRCPNO = 1 in the figure below).
Enhanced recipe group (1)
ENRCPNO = 1
(2)
RCPn { n: 0~(L*(G+1)-1) } -1 means the recipe register address
starts from 0
(1)
Group (G)
ENRCPNO = 1 (2)
ENRCPGNAME / ENRCPG Length (L)
(1) Recipe buffer area (2) Recipe table address - first recipe
Figure 23.4.3 Enhanced recipe buffer configuration
23-42
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Recipe
Enhanced recipe group register (ENRCPG / ENRCPGNAME) Enhanced recipe group register is used to specify the group for the enhanced recipe. Up to 255 groups of enhanced recipe data can be created. Calling the enhanced recipe data requires the use of the Recipe Groups 1 - 255 (RCPG 1 - 255). If the enhanced recipe is activated, the default value of the recipe group is 1.
For an enhanced recipe, if you select the first recipe number in the first group, ENRCPG = 1 / ENRCPGNAME = Chocolate and ENRCPNO = 1; if you select the third recipe number in the second group, ENRCPG = 2 / ENRCPGNAME = Strawberry and ENRCPNO = 3.
The ENRCPGNAME function is identical to the ENRCPG function. The main difference is that with ENRCPGNAME, the recipe content is acquired by entering the recipe name; with ENRCPG, enter a value between 1 and 255.
Note: the recipe group register does not feature the non-volatile function, so the data in the register cannot be maintained when the HMI is powered off.
23
ENRCPG = 1 ENRCPGNAME = Chocolate
ENRCPNO = 1
ENRCPG = 2 ENRCPGNAME = Strawberry
November, 2018
ENRCPNO = 3 Figure 23.4.4 Recipe Group editing screen
23-43
Recipe
DOPSoft User Manual
23
Enhanced recipe size limit If the non-volatile memory area is set in the USB Disk or SD Card, the size of the enhanced recipe file cannot exceed Fields 256 x Groups 10000.
If the non-volatile area is set in the HMI, the editable size of the enhanced recipe is dependent upon the specification of the flash memory for the HMI of different models.
Please refer to Table 23.4.1 below for the example of the enhanced recipe.
Table 23.4.1 Enhanced recipe example
Enhanced recipe
Step 1: go to [Options] > [Recipe] > [Enhanced Recipe]. 1. Check Enable. 2. Set Recipe Address to D100.
Step 2: click
to enter the Enhanced Recipe Settings.
Set enhanced
recipe
1. Set the first recipe Name as Chocolate, Fields as 3, and Group as 4.
23-44
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Recipe
Enhanced recipe
2. Set Data Format as follows. Field 1: Unsigned Decimal. Set the Length as 1. Field 2: Floating. Set the Length as 2, Integer Digits as 3, and Fractional Digits as 2. Field 3: Char. Set the Length as 5.
23
Step 3: Click Finish and enter the recipe data as follows: Set enhanced
recipe
Step 4: repeat Step 1 and 2, and set Fields to 3 and Group to 4. The recipe data is shown below:
November, 2018
23-45
Recipe
23
DOPSoft User Manual
Enhanced recipe Step 1: create a Numeric Entry element and set the Write Address to Internal Memory.
Select ENRCPG for the Device Type. This element is used to select the enhanced recipe group.
Create Numeric Entry elements for ENRCPG and
ENRCPNO
The following is an example of the created element:
Enhanced recipe group
Step 2: create a Multi-language Input element. Set the String Length to 10 and Write Address to Internal Memory, and select ENRCPGNAME as the Device Type. This element is used to select the enhanced recipe group by entering the recipe name.
23-46
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Recipe
Enhanced recipe The following is an example of the created element: Enhanced recipe group
Step 3: create a Numeric Entry element and set the Write Address to Internal Memory. Select ENRCPNO for the Device Type. This element is used to select the enhanced recipe number.
23
Create Numeric Entry elements for ENRCPG and
ENRCPNO
The following is an example of the created element:
Enhanced recipe group
Before the Numeric Entry Element is created to display the enhanced recipe register, you can use the recipe register formula [(L*(G+1)-1)}] to calculate the number that n in ENRCPn represents. Plug the size of the recipe (Length (L) x Group (G) = 3 x 3) into the formula to gain ENRCPn = ENRCP0 - ENRCP11. Step 1: create a Numeric Entry Element and set the Write Address to Internal Memory
ENRCP0. Set the way of expression according to Field 1 of the recipe table with the Data Type as Word and Data Format as Unsigned Decimal.
Create ENRCP Numeric Entry Elements
November, 2018
23-47
Recipe
23
DOPSoft User Manual
Enhanced recipe Step 2: create a Numeric Entry Element and set the Write Address to ENRCP1 of the
Internal Memory. Set the way of expression according to Field 2 of the recipe table with the Data Type as Double Word and Data Format as Floating. Then, set the Integer Digits to 3 and Fractional (Digits) to 2.
Create ENRCP Numeric
Entry elements
Step 3: create a Multi-language Input element and set the Write Address to ENRCP2 of the Internal Memory. Set the way of expression according to Field 3 of the recipe table and set the String Length to 10 (the length of 1 word can store two bits).
Repeat Steps 1 - 3 to create the Display elements for ENRCP3 - ENRCP11 and set the Data Format. The following is an example of the created elements:
Buffer
Recipe save address
Note: the created ENRCP0 - ENRCP2 are the recipe buffers and the actual recipe data ENRCPs are ENRCP3 - ENRCP11. For more information, refer to Figure 23.4.3 Enhanced recipe buffer configuration.
23-48
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Recipe
Enhanced recipe
Step 1: create a Numeric Entry element by referring to the address set for the enhanced recipe to display the data change when reading or writing the PLC recipe. Each field length of the enhanced recipe is not fixed, so you need to set the PLC address to be entered based on the recipe table. For example, the first field of this recipe table is in Unsigned Decimal format and its read length is 1. Thus, the Read Address is set to D100, Data Type is Word, and Data Format is Unsigned Decimal.
23
Step 2: create a Numeric Entry element and set the Write Address to D101, Data Type as Double Word, and Data Format as Floating. Then, set the Integer Digits to 3 and Fractional (Digits) to 2.
Create Numeric
Entry elements
for the enhanced
recipe address
Step 3: create a Multi-language Input element and set the Write Address to D103 and String Length to 10.
The following is an example of the created elements. PLC
address
November, 2018
23-49
Recipe
23
DOPSoft User Manual
Enhanced recipe Go to [Options] > [Configuration] > [Control Block], and check the Enhanced Recipe Control flag. Then, set the Start Address for the Control Block to define the recipe control address. Once the setting is complete, click OK to exit the Configuration window.
Set Recipe Control flag in Control
Block
Create 2 Set Constant buttons with the Write Addresses as D8 and the setting values as 2 and 4 respectively, which correspond to Bit 1 and Bit 2 of the enhanced recipe control flag D8 for reading and writing the recipe.
Create Set Constant
button elements
23-50
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Recipe
Enhanced recipe After creating all the elements, please compile and download all data to the HMI.
When the enhanced recipe group is loaded into the HMI, the default value is 1. To display different groups, you can select a different enhanced recipe group according to the requirement.
The recipe data will be displayed in ENRCP0 - ENRCP11 according to the selected recipe group. ENRCP0 - ENRCP2 are the recipe buffer data and the starting address for the first set of recipe data is ENRCP3.
23
Enhanced recipe number
Enhanced recipe group Enhanced recipe group
Buffer
Actual recipe address
Execution results
PLC address
Trigger the Recipe Write button and the recipe data of the selected enhanced recipe group will be written to the PLC. Trigger the Recipe Read button and the recipe data that were written to the PLC will be read back to the HMI with reference to the selected enhanced recipe group. The recipe data will be changed to match with the content of the selected recipe group.
Enhanced recipe number
Enhanced recipe group
Enhanced recipe group
Write recipe (HMI
to PLC)
Recipe address
PLC address
Write recipe data to PLC
Step 1
November, 2018
23-51
Recipe
23
Enhanced recipe Press the ENRCPGNAME element.
DOPSoft User Manual Step 1
Enter "Strawberry", then press
.
Execution results
Read recipe (PLC
to HMI)
Step 2
Read data from the PLC back to the HMI
After executing Step 2, the result is shown as follows.
23-52
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
The following section introduces the property settings for the enhanced recipe. Table 23.4.2 Properties of the enhanced recipe setting Properties of the enhanced recipe setting
Recipe
23
Enable
Check Enable to use the enhanced recipe. If Enable is not checked, all settings for the enhanced recipe will not take effect.
The non-volatile memories include HMI, USB Disk, and SD Card.
Non-volatile
The non-volatile memory of DOP-103 and DOP-107 can only be set in the HMI and USB Disk; DOP-110 can be set in the HMI, USB Disk, and SD Card.
If you select to save in the HMI, the data is saved in the HMI ROM when power is off.
November, 2018
23-53
Recipe
23
DOPSoft User Manual
Properties of the enhanced recipe setting Available options are internal memory and controller register address. For information about selecting Link Name or Element Style, please refer to Section 5.1. Addresses set by the enhanced recipe share one common memory address regardless of
the number of the recipe sets created.
Address
Go to the Enhanced Recipe window. Click
to add the enhanced recipe data.
Add recipe
You can add 255 groups of enhanced recipe data via the
button.
23-54
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Recipe
Properties of the enhanced recipe setting
You can name the enhanced recipe group and the use of Unicode characters
is supported.
With the Multi-language Input element, you can enter the name of the enhanced recipe to call the recipe.
The following example shows the first recipe group name in Japanese, the second recipe group name in Chinese, and the third recipe group name in English.
23
Name
The Fields and Group represent the recipe length and group that you entered respectively. The numbers in Fields x Group cannot exceed 256 x 10000. Add recipe Fields / Group
The numbers in Fields and Group cannot be 0. If any of the value is 0, the system will automatically set the value to the minimum which is 1. Data formats include BCD, Signed Decimal, Unsigned Decimal, Hexadecimal, Floating, and Char.
Data Format
Note: if you select Char as the data format, please do not use the same character for the input value and delimiter. Otherwise, it may cause data error and failure to import the data.
November, 2018
23-55
Recipe
23
DOPSoft User Manual
Length
Properties of the enhanced recipe setting
Limit of the read length varies according to different data formats.
Data Format
Length
Note
BCD
1 or 2
Signed Decimal Unsigned Decimal
1 or 2 1 or 2
1: Word 2: Double Word
Hexadecimal
1 or 2
Floating
2
2: Double Word
Char
1 - 32
Supports up to 32 Words (64 bits)
If you select Char as the data format, the system automatically fills in the blank string if there is any remaining space after you entered the characters.
You can only set the integer and fractional digits when the data format is Floating.
Floating
Add recipe
When the data format is Floating, the integer and fractional digits support only 7 digits in total. When exceeding this limit, a warning message pops up.
Integer Digits / Fractional Digits
23-56
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Recipe
Properties of the Enhanced Recipe Setting
The import recipe function only supports CSV file format for you to select and import the recipe.
23
Import recipe
The opened and imported recipe file provides the recipe data content only and the recipe address does not support loading the original set address. If you use the enhanced recipe to open a CSV file of the 16- or 32-bit Recipe, the software will prompt the following error message once the file is loaded.
The export recipe function saves the current enhanced recipes. The supported file format is the same as that of the Open function, which is CSV file.
Export recipe
November, 2018
23-57
Recipe
DOPSoft User Manual
Properties of the enhanced recipe setting The delete recipe function deletes the enhanced recipe data. When executing this function, a warning message will pop up confirming if you want to delete the data.
23 Delete recipe
Clear the recipe content that has the value entered.
Before clearing
Clear configuration
After clearing
23-58
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Recipe
Properties of the Enhanced Recipe Setting
To use the Enhanced Recipe Setting function, there must be recipe data in the enhanced recipe. You can use this function to change the Name, Fields, Group, and Data Format of the recipe.
23
Enhanced Recipe Setting
The recipe table displays up to 25 groups of recipe data on one page. This function allows you to quickly and easily select the recipe group that you want to view.
Groups
November, 2018
23-59
Recipe
23
DOPSoft User Manual
Properties of the Enhanced Recipe Setting The recipe table displays up to 25 groups of recipe data on one page. When you press
, you can quickly view the next 25 groups of recipe data.
Before
After
23-60
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Recipe
Properties of the Enhanced Recipe Setting The recipe table displays up to 25 groups of recipe data on one page. When you press
, you can quickly view the previous 25 groups of recipe data.
23
Before
After
November, 2018
23-61
Recipe
DOPSoft User Manual
23.5 Enhanced indirect recipe index register (*ENRCP)
23
The enhanced indirect recipe index register is used specifically for the enhanced recipe. Enhanced indirect recipe index register (*ENRCPn) acquires the value from ENRCPn first, then it treats this value as the new address and accesses the value from this new address. For example, if ENRCP1 = 3 and ENRCP3 = 99, then *ENRCP1 = 99 (see Figure 23.5.1).
Enhanced Value recipe register content
ENRCP0
ENRCP1 3 Indirect address *ENRCP1 99
ENRCP1 ENRCP2 ENRCP3 99
Figure 23.5.1 Enhanced indirect recipe index
The accessing range of the enhanced indirect recipe index register is as follows:
Accessing type Word
Note: n = Word (0 - 65535)
Element type *ENRCPn
Accessing range ENRCP0 - ENRCP65535
The address accessing range provided by *ENRCP is limited according to the recipe size created by the users. Assuming the recipe size is Length 3 * Group 3, then the ENRCP address ranges from *ENRCP0 to *ENRCP11. When creating *ENRCP12, a warning message will pop up, as shown in the figure below.
23-62
Figure 23.5.2 Enhanced indirect recipe index register configuration November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
The following section introduces the example for the enhanced indirect recipe index. Table 23.5.1 Example of enhanced indirect recipe index register Enhanced indirect recipe index register
Create an enhanced recipe (64 for Fields, 1024 for Group) and set ENRCP3 to 65535.
Recipe
23
Set enhance d recipe
Create a Numeric Entry element and select *ENRCP for the Device Type. Then enter 3 for Address/Value.
Create four Numeric Entry elements and select ENRCP for the Device Type. Then enter 0 � 3 for Address/Value respectively.
Create Numeric
Entry elements
Create a Numeric Entry element and select ENRCP for the Device Type. Then enter 65535 for Address/Value.
November, 2018
23-63
Recipe
DOPSoft User Manual
23
Create Numeric
Entry elements
Enhanced indirect recipe index register Create the Clock macro command *ENRCP3 = *ENRCP3 + 1.
After executing compiling for the screen, download it to the HMI. The values of *ENRCP3 and ENRCP65535 will increase simultaneously.
*ENRCP3
Execution results
ENRCP0
ENRCP1
ENRCP2
ENRCP3
ENRCP65535
23-64
November, 2018
Macro
This chapter mainly describes the types and commands of macro provided by the HMI and the setting details of the macro commands. test
24.1.1 On Macro / Off Macro �������������������������������������������������������������� 24-4 24.1.2 Before Execute Macro ������������������������������������������������������������� 24-5 24.1.3 After Execute Macro���������������������������������������������������������������� 24-6 24.1.4 Screen Open Macro ���������������������������������������������������������������� 24-7 24.1.5 Screen Close Macro���������������������������������������������������������������� 24-8 24.1.6 Screen Cycle Macro ���������������������������������������������������������������� 24-9 24.1.7 Submacro ����������������������������������������������������������������������������24-12 24.1.8 Initial Macro��������������������������������������������������������������������������24-21 24.1.9 Background Macro�����������������������������������������������������������������24-23 24.1.10 Clock Macro �������������������������������������������������������������������������24-25
24.3.1 Arithmetic ����������������������������������������������������������������������������24-40 24.3.2 Logical Operation ������������������������������������������������������������������24-61 24.3.3 Data transfer ������������������������������������������������������������������������24-70 24.3.4 Data Conversion �������������������������������������������������������������������24-80 24.3.5 Comparison��������������������������������������������������������������������������24-97 24.3.6 Flow Control �����������������������������������������������������������������������24-145 24.3.7 Bit Setting ��������������������������������������������������������������������������24-151 24.3.8 Communication �������������������������������������������������������������������24-155 24.3.9 Drawing�����������������������������������������������������������������������������24-182 24.3.10 File Access�������������������������������������������������������������������������24-189 24.3.11 Others�������������������������������������������������������������������������������24-197
November, 2018
24-1
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
DOPSoft provides a variety of macro commands for you to perform various operations, including Arithmetic, Logical Operation, Data transfer, Data Conversion, Comparison, FlowControl, Bit Setting, Communication, Drawing, etc.
24
Figure 24.1.1 Types of Macro
24-2
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
Types of macro
Macros consist of independent commands processing programs written by the user. 512 lines of commands can be edited in each type of macro. The main features of each type of macros are shown in the following table.
24
Type of macro On Macro Off Macro
Before Execute Macro
After Execute Macro Screen Open Macro Screen Close Macro Screen Cycle Macro
Submacro Initial Macro Background Macro Clock Macro
Table 24.1.2 Features of macro
Features of macro
When the On Macro is triggered, it is executed only once. It is available only in Set to On, Set to Off, Maintained, and Momentary
buttons.
When the Off Macro is triggered, it is executed only once. It is available only in Set to On, Set to Off, Maintained, and Momentary
buttons.
When you press the button element, the HMI executes the macro commands first, and then executes the button actions. If the button states cannot be changed by pressing it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI does not execute the macro commands.
It is available in all button and input elements.
When you press the button element, the HMI executes the button actions first, and then executes the macro commands. If the button states cannot be changed by pressing it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI does not execute the macro commands.
It is available in all button and input elements.
Execute only once when opening a screen.
Execute only once when closing a screen.
Execute the macro continuously in the screen. If you set the Screen Open Macro, it will be executed before the execution of Screen Cycle Macro.
There are 512 submacros and 512 lines of commands can be written in each one.
Submacros are similar to subroutines in programming languages where you can write repeating executive programs or functions. And you can call the submacros when needed.
Initial macro is the first one to be executed after the start of the HMI and it is executed only once.
Background Macro is a program that is executed repeatedly during the HMI operation with one line or several lines being executed at a time (not finished with one execution). It will be executed once again at the end of the last line.
The Clock Macro is executed repeatedly during the HMI operation. It batch runs programs all at once rather than running one line or several lines at a time.
November, 2018
24-3
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
On Macro / Off Macro
On Macro / Off Macro are functions available only when creating Set to On, Set to Off,
24
Maintained, and Momentary buttons. When you swtich the state to On by pressing the button, the HMI executes the On Macro commands. When you switch the state to Off by pressing the button, the HMI executes the Off
Macro commands. However, the On Macro / Off Macro commands will not be executed if the
button states cannot be changed by pressing it (using external controller commands or other
macros instead).
Figure 24.1.1.1 Flowchart of On / Off Macros
24-4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
Before Execute Macro
Before Execute Macro can only be used when the created elements are button and input elements.
When you press the button element, the HMI executes the macro commands first, and then executes the button actions. If the button states cannot be changed by pressing it (using external controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI does not execute the macro commands.
24
Figure 24.1.2.1 Flowchart of Before Execute Macro
November, 2018
24-5
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
After Execute Macro
After Execute Macro can only be used when the created elements are button and input
24
elements. When you press the button element, the HMI executes the button actions first, and then executes the macro commands. If the button states cannot be changed by pressing it (using external
controller commands or other macros instead), the HMI does not execute the macro commands.
Figure 24.1.3.1 Flowchart of After Execute Macro
24-6
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Screen Open Macro
Go to [Screen] > [Screen Open Macro] to edit the Screen Open Macro.
Macro
24
Figure 24.1.4.1 Screen Open Macro
Every screen created by DOPSoft contains a Screen Open Macro which will be executed when you open the current screen or switch to another screen. Other actions of the screen will not be executed until the execution of the Screen Open Macro is finished.
November, 2018
Figure 24.1.4.2 Flowchart of Screen Open Macro
24-7
Macro
Screen Close Macro
Go to [Screen] > [Screen Close Macro] to edit the Screen Close Macro.
24
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 24.1.5.1 Screen Close Macro
Every screen created by DOPSoft contains a Screen Close Macro which will be executed when you close the current screen or switch to another screen. Actions of the new screen will not be executed until the execution of the macro is finished.
24-8
Figure 24.1.5.2 Flowchart of Screen Close Macro
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Screen Cycle Macro
Go to [Screen] > [Screen Cycle Macro] to edit the Screen Cycle Macro.
Macro
24
Figure 24.1.6.1 Screen Cycle Macro
November, 2018
24-9
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
Every screen created by DOPSoft contains a Screen Cycle Macro which will be executed
according to the Cycle Macro delay time set by users after the execution of Screen Open Macro
is finished. You can double-click on the screen to go to Screen Property page for setting the
24
Macro Cycle Delay. It represents the delay time before the re-execution of each Screen Cycle Macro. The default is 100 ms.
Figure 24.1.6.2 Setting of Macro Cycle Delay
24-10
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
24
Figure 24.1.6.3 Flowchart of Screen Cycle Macro
November, 2018
24-11
Macro
Submacro
Go to [Options] > [Submacro] to set the Submacro.
24
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 24.1.7.1 Submacro
24-12
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
24
Figure 24.1.7.2 Submacro setting window
Submacro provides 512 submacro programs with numbers of 1 - 512 respectively. Submacros are similar to subroutines in programming languages where users can write repeating executive programs or functions. And you can call the submacros when needed, which can save the time to write macros and make it easier for maintenance as well. Note: the actions of calling submacros in the Submacro should not exceed six layers.
November, 2018
Figure 24.1.7.3 Submacro Screen I
24-13
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
To call a submacro, you can call its number directly or name it in the Alias column and call its alias. Submacro names support character and Chinese input for up to 64 words.
24
Figure 24.1.7.4 Submacro Screen II
24-14
Figure 24.1.7.5 Submacro Screen III
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Macro contents written in the Screen Cycle Macro.
Macro contents written in the Submacro.
Macro
24
Figure 24.1.7.6 Flowchart of Submacro
November, 2018
24-15
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
Submacro also provides the function of password protection which can encrypt each submacro.
24
Figure 24.1.7.7 Protection function of Submacro When Protection is checked, you are immediately asked to input a set of password.
24-16
Figure 24.1.7.8 Submacro encryption
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
After Submacro Number 1 is encrypted, you must enter the password to enter Submacro Number 1 and edit the macro commands.
Macro
24
When Protection is unchecked, you are also required to enter the password set for Submacro Number 1 to disable the protection function.
November, 2018
Figure 24.1.7.9 Disable Submacro encryption
24-17
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
When submacros are password-protected, the functions affected are as follows:
24
If there is a communication station number in a protected submacro, the function of changing station number will be invalid.
If the station number in the protected submacro is 1, change the PLC Station to 2 and then enter the protected submacro. You will find that the station number must be 1 and will not be changed.
(1)
If $100 is set inside the protected submacro, $100 will not be found when the find address function is executed.
(2)
24-18
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
If $100 is set inside the protected submacro, $100 cannot be replaced by $500 when executing the replace address function.
24
(3)
If the station value in the protected submacro is 1, it cannot be replaced by 2 when executing the Replace Station Value function.
(4)
November, 2018
24-19
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
When there is a call command in the macro, right-click and select Open Macro. You will be asked to enter the password if the submacro is password-protected.
24
(5)
Change the Link Name to Link3, and Link2 cannot be changed to Link3 in the protected submacro. (6)
24-20
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Initial Macro
Go to [Options] > [Initial Macro] to set the Initial Macro.
Macro
24
Figure 24.1.8.1 Initial Macro
November, 2018
24-21
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
Initial Macro is the first macro to be executed when the HMI starts up, so you can write the initial settings required for the whole HMI program in Initial Macro.
24
Figure 24.1.8.2 Flowchart of Initial Macro
24-22
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Background Macro
Go to [Options] > [Background Macro] to set the Background Macro.
Macro
24
Figure 24.1.9.1 Background Macro
Background macro is a program that is executed repeatedly during the operation of the HMI with one line or several lines being executed at a time (not finished after executing once). It will be executed once again at the end of the last line. To define the number of lines for each Background Macro execution, go to [Options] > [Configuration] to set the Background macro update cycle with a maximum of 512 lines.
November, 2018
24-23
Macro
24
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 24.1.9.2 Background macro update cycle
Suppose that 10 elements are created on the HMI screen, input 6 lines of macro commands into the Background Macro and set the Background macro update cycle to 3 lines, then the execution process of Background Macro is shown as follows:
24-24
Figure 24.1.9.3 Flowchart of Background Macro
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Clock Macro
Go to [Options] > [Clock Macro] to set the Clock Macro.
Macro
24
Figure 24.1.10.1 Clock Macro
Clock Macro will be executed repeatedly in the process of the HMI operation. Unlike Background Macro, Clock Macro executes its commands all at once rather than one line or several lines at a time. Similar to Screen Cycle macro, the Clock Macro is executed repeatedly according to the set macro delay time. You can go to [Options] > [Configuration] to set the Clock Macro Delay Time. At the end of each Clock Macro execution, it will resume its execution according to the set delay time. The default is 100 ms and the maximum is 65535 ms.
November, 2018
24-25
Macro
24
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure 24.1.10.2 Clock Macro Delay Time
Clock Macro also provides you with the function to prioritize the execution of the Clock Macro, which provides the selections of Low, Medium, and High. Set the Clock Macro Priority, and when the priority is higher, it ensures the Clock Macro Delay Time is more accurate.
24-26
Figure 24.1.10.3 Clock Macro Priority
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
24
Figure 24.1.10.4 Flowchart of Clock Macro
November, 2018
24-27
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro edit window
Go to the macro screen to be edited to start editing the macros. The maximum lines for each type
24
of macros is 512 lines and the maximum words is 640 bytes or 640 words. The right side of the macro edit window can only record a maximum of 10 recently-opened macros. If there are more than 10 records, the first macro will be closed and a new macro will be added. If the first macro
record is updated before being closed, the system will prompt you to save the first macro before
adding the new macro.
Figure 24.2.1 Macro edit window Each macro has a toolbar to assist you in planning and editing macro commands.
Figure 24.2.2 Macro toolbar
24-28
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
The functions in the macro toolbar are shown in the following table.
Icon
Function
Figure 24.2.1 Description of macro toolbar functions
Macro toolbar functions
Content
The Open function is equivalent to the action of import. The software provides two formats: txt and mro. You can import edited macros to reduce the time for repeated editing.
24
Open
The Save function is equivalent to the action of export. The software only provides the txt format for saving. You can save the edited macros for backup or for use of other screens.
Save
November, 2018
24-29
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro toolbar functions
Icon Function
Content
24
The Update function is to update the modified macro contents and check the macro syntax as well. If you close the macro edit window without executing
, the software will inform you that the macro has been changed.
Update
If
is executed, the current syntax will be checked. If there are syntax
errors, the software will show the following message.
Cut Copy Paste
Operations of Cut, Copy, and Paste are the same as those of Office. You can also execute Cut, Copy, and Paste with the keyboard shortcuts (cut: Ctrl + X; copy: Ctrl + C; paste: Ctrl + V).
The function of Syntax check is used to make sure that macro commands are correct. An error message will pop up if there is any syntax error.
Syntax check
Note: the Syntax check function is not equivalent to macro compilation. You need to execute the compile function to compile macros.
24-30
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
Macro toolbar functions
Icon Function
Content
The Macro Wizard function provides convenient and easy input of macro commands, which are less error-prone than manually entering macro commands.
24
Macro Wizard
Up Down
You can move the cursor up or down
You can select to move to which line by using the Up and Down functions.
Execute the Update button and check whether the syntax of macro command is correct. If there are syntax errors, an error message will pop up.
Edit
Update
If you change data and close the Macro Wizard window without updating it, the software will also display a message asking if you want to update the data as it has been changed.
November, 2018
24-31
Macro Icon Function
24
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro toolbar functions Content
Insert (add) a line of macro command. The new macro command will be inserted above the macro command of which the cursor has selected and the original one will be moved down.
Insert
Macro Wizard
Edit
Delete
Delete the macro command of which the cursor has selected. If there are other macro commands below the deleted one, they will be moved up automatically. If the cursor has selected a line without a macro command, the delete action is invalid.
Comment
The function of Comment is to help you manage macros, improve readability, and simply maintenance. You can simply type the symbol "#" in the macro edit screen, or use the [Edit] > [Comment]
on the Macro Wizard or click , and then write comments or macro programs. The comments written will not be executed in macros.
Command includes all functions of macro commands which are shown as follows:
Command
24-32
For a detailed description of macro command functions, refer to Section 24.3 Macro commands.
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
Icon Function
Macro Wizard
Macro toolbar functions
Content
Double Word
Macro commands provide 32 bits and signed number operations. The command will be operated with signed number if Signed is checked and will be operated with unsigned number if it is not checked. The command will be operated with 32 bits if Double Word is checked and will be operated with 16 bits if it is not checked.
Unsigned
Unsigned number
Signed
Signed number
Word
16-bit data
Signed
DW (Double Word)
32-bit data
Note: if the macro command is set to Double Word, two registers will be occupied for each memory in the command.
Command
The Command function is the same as the Command function in the Macro Wizard window, which is used to select macro commands. Refer to Section 24.3 Macro commands for more details.
You can directly click
to set parameters if the variables are
required in macro commands.
24
Variable
You can input the PLC memory address to be used in the macro through the Input Address function to prevent inputting the wrong address.
Input Address
November, 2018
24-33
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro commands
Macro commands include Arithmetic, Logical Operation, Data transfer, Data Conversion,
24
Comparison, FlowControl, Bit Setting, Communication, Drawing, File Access, and Others.
Figure 24.3.1 Types of macro commands
A list of macro commands are shown in the following table.
Macro type Arithmetic
Command + * / % +-*/
MUL64 ADDSUMW
FADD
FSUB
FMUL
FDIV
FMOD SIN COS TAN COT SEC CSC
Expression
Description
Var1 = Var2 + Var3
Addition
Var1 = Var2 - Var3
Subtraction
Var1 = Var2 * Var3
Multiplication
Var1 = Var2 / Var3
Division
Var1 = Var2 % Var3
Remainder
Var1 = Var2
Arithmetic
Var1 = MUL64(Var2, Var3) (Signed DW) 64-bit multiplication
Var1 = ADDSUMW(Var2, Var3)
Accumulative
Var1 = FADD(Var2, Var3) (Signed DW)
Floating-point number addition
Var1 = FSUB(Var2, Var3) (Signed DW)
Floating-point number subtraction
Var1 = FMUL(Var2, Var3) (Signed DW)
Floating-point number multiplication
Var1 = FDIV(Var2, Var3) (Signed DW)
Floating-point number division
Var1 = FMOD(Var2, Var3) (Signed DW)
Floating-point number remainder
Var1 = SIN(Var2) (Signed DW)
Sine function
Var1 = COS(Var2) (Signed DW)
Cosine function
Var1 = TAN(Var2) (Signed DW)
Tangent function
Var1 = COT(Var2) (Signed DW)
Cotangent function
Var1 = SEC(Var2) (Signed DW)
Secant function
Var1 = CSC(Var2) (Signed DW)
Cosecant function
24-34
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro type
Logical Operation
Command |
&& ^ NOT
<<
Expression Var1 = Var2 | Var3 Var1 = Var2 && Var3 Var1 = Var2 ^ Var3 Var1 = NOT Var2
Var1 = Var2 << Var3
Data transfer
>> MOV BMOV ArrayCopy FILL FILLASC STRCAT FMOV
Var1 = Var2 >> Var3
Var1 = Var2 BMOV(Var1, Var2, Var3) Var1 = ArrayCopy(Var2, Var3, Var4, Var5, Var6) FILL(Var1, Var2, Var3) FILLASC(Var1, " ") Var1 = STRCAT(Var2, Var3, Var4)
Var1 = FMOV(Var2) (Signed DW)
BCD
Var1 = BCD(Var2)
BIN
Var1 = BIN(Var2)
TODWORD Var1 = TODWORD(Var2)
TOWORD
Var1 = TOWORD(Var2, Var3)
TOBYTE
Var1 = TOBYTE(Var2, Var3)
Data Conversion
SWAP
XCHG MAX MIN
SWAP(Var1, Var2, Var3)
XCHG(Var1, Var2, Var3) Var1 = MAX(Var2, Var3) Var1 = MIN(Var2, Var3)
TOHEX
Var1 = TOHEX(Var2)
TOASC
Var1 = TOASC(Var2)
FCNV ICNV SPRINTF
Var1 = FCNV(Var2) (Signed DW) Var1 = ICNV(Var2) (Signed DW) Var1 = SPRINTF(Var2, "%u", Var4)
Macro
Description OR logical operation AND logical operation XOR logical operation NOT logical operation SHL (left shift) logical operation SHL (right shift) logical operation Data specified operand Copy block
24
Copy array
Fill block
Convert text to ASCII values
Connection string
Specify floating-point number data
Convert decimal values to BCD values
Convert BCD values to decimal values
Convert values from Word to Double Word
Convert values from Byte to Word
Convert values from Word to Byte
Swap high and low bytes of Word
Exchange value data
Get maximum
Get minimum
Convert 4 ASCII characters to Word hexadecimal integers
Convert a hexadecimal integer of Word to 4 Word ASCII characters
Convert an integer to a floating-point number
Convert a floating-point number to an integer
Format string
November, 2018
24-35
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
24
Macro type Comparison
Command
Expression
IF ==
IF Var1 == Var2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3
IF !=
IF Var1 != Var2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3
IF >
IF Var1 > Var2 T HEN GOTO LABEL Var3
IF >=
IF Var1 >= Var2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3
IF <
IF Var1 < Var2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3
IF ... THEN GOTO
IF <= IF AND == 0
IF Var1 <= Var2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3
IF (Var1 && Var2) == 0 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3
IF AND != 0
IF (Var1 && Var2) != 0 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3
IF == ON
IF Var1 == ON THEN GOTO LABEL Var2
IF == OFF
IF Var1 == OFF THEN GOTO LABEL Var2
IFB == ON
IFB Var1 == ON THEN GOTO LABEL Var2
IFB == OFF
IFB Var1 == OFF THEN GOTO LABEL Var2
IF == CALL
IF Var1 == Var2 THEN CALL Var3
IF != CALL
IF Var1 != Var2 THEN CALL Var3
IF > CALL
IF Var1 > Var2 THEN CALL Var3
IF >= CALL
IF Var1 >= Var2 THEN CALL Var3
IF ... THEN CALL
IF < CALL IF <= CALL
IF Var1 < Var2 THEN CALL Var3
IF Var1 <= Var2 THEN CALL Var3
IF AND == 0 CALL
IF (Var1 && Var2) == 0 THEN CALL Var3
IF AND != 0 CALL
IF (Var1 && Var2) != 0 THEN CALL Var3
IF == ON CALL
IF Var1 == ON THEN CALL Var2
IF == OFF CALL
IF Var1 == OFF THEN CALL Var2
Description
If... GOTO execute according to the specified label name
If...call submacro
24-36
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
Macro type Comparison
FlowControl Bit Setting
Command
IF...
ELSEIF...
ELSE ENDIF FCMP GOTO LABEL CALL RET FOR NEXT END BITON BITOFF BITNOT GETB
Expression
IF ==
IF Var1 == Var2
IF !=
IF Var1 != Var2
IF >
IF Var1 > Var2
IF >=
IF Var1 >= Var2
IF <
IF Var1 < Var2
IF <=
IF Var1 <= Var2
IF AND == 0
IF (Var1 && Var2) == 0
IF AND != 0
IF (Var1 && Var2) != 0
IF == ON
IF Var1 == ON
IF == OFF
IF Var1 == OFF
ELSEIF ==
ELSEIF Var1 == Var2
ELSEIF !=
ELSEIF Var1 != Var2
ELSEIF >
ELSEIF Var1 > Var2
ELSEIF >=
ELSEIF Var1 >= Var2
ELSEIF <
ELSEIF Var1 < Var2
ELSEIF <=
ELSEIF Var1 <= Var2
ELSEIF AND == ELSEIF (Var1 && Var2) ==
0
0
ELSEIF AND != ELSEIF (Var1 && Var2) !=
0
0
ELSEIF == ON ELSEIF Var1 == ON
ELSEIF == OFF ELSEIF Var1 == OFF
ELSE
ENDIF
Var1 = FCMP(Var2, Var3) (Signed DW)
GOTO LABEL Var1
LABEL Var1 CALL Var1 RET FOR Var1 NEXT END BITON Var1 BITOFF Var1
BITOFF Var1
Var1 = GETB Var2
Description
Logical comparison
Logical comparison
Logical comparison Logical comparison Comparison of floating-point value Go to a label unconditionally (LABEL) Label Call submacro Exit submacro Program loop End macro program Set the bit to On Set the bit to Off Inverse bit (ONOFF, OFFON) Get bit value
24
November, 2018
24-37
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro type
Command
Expression
Description
INITCOM
Var1 = INITCOM(Var2, Var3, Var4, Var5, COM PORT
Var6, Var7, Var8)
initialization
24
ADDSUM XORSUM
Var1 = ADDSUM(Var2, Var3) Var1 = XORSUM(Var2, Var3)
Calculate CHECKSUM by addition
Calculate CHECKSUM by XOR
PUTCHARS
Var1 = PUTCHARS(Var2, Var3, Var4)
Export characters via the communication port
GETCHARS
Var1 = GETCHARS(Var2, Var3, Var4)
Get characters via the communication port
SELECTCOM
SELECTCOM(Var1)
Select COM Port
CLEARCOMBUFFER CLEARCOMBUFFER(Var1, Var2)
Clear buffer of Com Port
Communication
CHRCHKSUM LOCKCOM
Var1 = CHRCHKSUM("Var2", Var3, Var4)
Var1 = LOCKCOM(Var2, Var3)
Calculate the length and checksum of string
Lock COM Port
UNLOCKCOM
UNLOCKCOM(Var1)
Unlock COM Port
STATION CHK
Var1 = STATIONCHK(Var2, Var3)
Check COM Port communication state
STATIONON
STATIONON(Var1, Var2)
Station On
STATIONOFF
STATIONOFF(Var1, Var2)
Station Off
IPON
Var1 = IPON(Var2, Var3, Var4, Var5, Var6)
Enable IP address
IPOFF
Var1 = IPOFF(Var2, Var3, Var4, Var5, Var6)
Disable IP address
IPCHANGE
Var1 = IPCHANGE(Var2, Var3, Var4, Var5, Var6, Var7)
Change the IP address of the connecting controller and the communication port
RECTANGLE
RECTANGLE(Var1)
Rectangle
Drawing
LINE POINT
LINE(Var1) POINT(Var1)
Line Point
CIRCLE
CIRCLE(Var1)
Circle
FileSlotRead
Var1 = FileSlotRead(Var2, Var3, Var4, Var5)
Read file
FileSlotWrite
Var1 = FileSlotWrite(Var2, Var3, Var4, Var5)
Write file
File Access
FileSlotRemove FileSlotGetLength
Var1 = FileSlotRemove(Var2) Var1 = FileSlotGetLength(Var2, Var3)
Remove file Read length of file
FileSlotExport
Var1 = FileSlotEXPORT(Var2, Var3, Var4, Var5)
Export file
FileSlotImport
Var1 = FileSlotIMPORT(Var2, Var3, Var4, Var5)
Import file
24-38
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
Macro type Others
Command
Time Tick
GETLASTERROR Comment Delay
GETSYSTEMTIME SETSYSTEMTIME
GETHISTORY EXPORT EXRCP16 IMRCP16 EXRCP32 IMRCP32 EXENRCP
IMENRCP EXHISTORY EXALARM DISKFORMAT BMPCAPTURE PLCDOWNLOAD OPENSCREEN CLOSESUBSCREEN
GetCircleCenter
VAR
Expression
Var1 = TIMETICK
Var1 = GETLASTERROR # Delay(Var1) Var1 = GETSYSTEMTIME SETSYSTEMTIME(Var1) Var1 = GETHISTORY(Var2, Var3, Var4, Var5, Var6) EXPORT(Var1) Var1 = EXRCP16(Var2, Var3) Var1 = IMRCP16(Var2, Var3) Var1 = EXRCP32(Var2, Var3) Var1 = IMRCP32(Var2, Var3) Var1 = EXENRCP(Var2, Var3)
Var1 = IMENRCP(Var2, Var3) Var1 = EXHISTORY(Var2, Var3, Var4) Var1 = EXALARM(Var2, Var3) Var1 = DISKFORMAT(Var2) Var1 = BMPCAPTURE(Var2) Var1 = PLCDOWNLOAD(Var2, Var3, Var4, Var5, Var6) OPENSCREEN(Var1) CLOSESUBSCREEN(Var1)
Var1 = GetCircleCenter(Var2, Var3)
VAR Var1
Description Get the time from the start of the system up to now Get the error value of the previous command Comment Delay Get system time Set system time
Get history data
Export list Export 16-bit Recipe Import 16-bit Recipe Export 32-bit Recipe Import 32-bit Recipe Export enhanced recipe Import enhanced recipe Export history data Export alarm data Format disk Screen capture Download DVP or ISP file to PLC via the HMI Open screen Close subscreen Calculate the coordinates of the center of a circle Variable
24
November, 2018
24-39
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
Arithmetic
Arithmetic includes integer and floating-point operations. Its macro commands are detailed below.
24
Figure 24.3.1.1 Arithmetic
24-40
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
+ (addition) Expression
Var1 = Var2 + Var3 (W) Var1 = Var2 + Var3 (DW) Var1 = Var2 + Var3 (Signed W) Var1 = Var2 + Var3 (Signed DW)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Sum
Var2
Addend
Var3
Augend
Description of action
Add Var2 and Var3, and put the result in Var1.
Note
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
24
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is the internal memory address, and Var2 and Var3 are constants.
When the command is $1 = 67 + 34, the addition operation is executed and the result of 67 + 34 is put in $1, so $1 = 101.
November, 2018
24-41
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
- (subtraction) Expression
24
Var1 = Var2 - Var3 (W) Var1 = Var2 - Var3 (DW) Var1 = Var2 - Var3 (Signed W) Var1 = Var2 - Var3 (Signed DW)
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Meaning of variable
Var1
Difference
Var2
Subtrahend
Var3
Minuend
Description of action
Subtract Var2 from Var3, and put the result in Var1.
Note
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is the internal memory address, and Var2 and Var3 are constants.
When the command is $1 = 67 - 34, the subtraction operation is executed and the result of 67 - 34 is put in $1, so $1 = 33.
24-42
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
* (multiplication) Expression
Var1 = Var2 * Var3 (W) Var1 = Var2 * Var3 (DW) Var1 = Var2 * Var3 (Signed W) Var1 = Var2 * Var3 (Signed DW)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Product
Var2
Multiplier
Var3
Multiplicand
Description of action
Multiply Var2 by Var3, and put the result in Var1.
Note
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
24
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is the internal memory address, and Var2 and Var3 are constants.
When the command is $1 = 67 * 34, the multiplication operation is executed and the result of 67 * 34 is put in $1, so $1 = 2278.
November, 2018
24-43
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
/ (division) Expression
24
Var1 = Var2 / Var3 (W) Var1 = Var2 / Var3 (DW) Var1 = Var2 / Var3 (Signed W) Var1 = Var2 / Var3 (Signed DW)
Note: Var3 cannot be 0
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Meaning of variable
Var1
Quotient
Var2
Dividend
Var3
Divisor
Description of action
Divide Var2 by Var3 and put the result in Var1.
Note
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is the internal memory address, and Var2 and Var3 are constants.
When the command is $1 = 67 / 34, the division operation is executed and the result of 67 / 34 is put in $1, so $1 = 1.
24-44
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
% (remainder) Expression
Var1 = Var2 % Var3 (W) Var1 = Var2 % Var3 (DW) Var1 = Var2 % Var3 (Signed W) Var1 = Var2 % Var3 (Signed DW)
Note: Var3 cannot be 0
Meaning of variable
Var1
Remainder
Var2
Dividend
Var3
Divisor
Description of action
Divide Var2 by Var3 and put the remainder in Var1.
Note
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
24
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is the internal memory address, and Var2 and Var3 are constants.
When the command is $1 = 67 % 34, the remainder operation is executed and the result of 67 % 34 is put in $1, so $1 = 33.
November, 2018
24-45
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
+-*/ (arithmetic) Expression
24
Var1 = Var2 (W) Var1 = Var2 (DW) Var1 = Var2 (Signed W) Var1 = Var2 (Signed DW)
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1
Sum
Var2
Expression
Description of action
Put the result of Var2 expression in Var1.
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Variable
Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
String
Example Var1 is the internal memory address, and Var2 and Var3 are constants.
When the command is $1 = $2 + $3 - 57 * $4, the arithmetic operations will be executed, and the result of $2 + $3 subtracting 57 * $4 will be put in $1. Take the following figure as an example. Input 66, 55, and 2 into $2, $3, and $4 respectively, and the result in $1 will be 7.
$1
$2
$3
$4
24-46
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
MUL64 (64-bit multiplication) Expression
Var1 = MUL64(Var2, Var3) (W) Var1 = MUL64(Var2, Var3) (DW) Var1 = MUL64(Var2, Var3) (Signed W) Var1 = MUL64(Var2, Var3) (Signed DW)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Product
Var2
Multiplier
Var3
Multiplicand
Description of action
Multiple Var3 by Var2, and put the result in Var1.
Note
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
24
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is the internal memory address, and Var2 and Var3 are constants.
November, 2018
24-47
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
Example If Double Word is checked, set the Data Type of the elements to Double Word so as to save the
correct value.
24
When the command is $1 = MUL64(67, 34), the MUL64 bit multiplication is executed and the result of 67 multiplied by 34 is put in $1, so $1 = 2278.
24-48
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
ADDSUMW (accumulation)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1
Result
Var2
Start address
Var1 = ADDSUMW(Var2, Var3) (W) Var1 = ADDSUMW(Var2, Var3) (DW)
Var3
Length
Description of action
Add up Var3 length addresses continuously from Var2 start address, and put the result in Var1.
W: Word DW: Double Word
Note: if Double Word is selected, the Start Address increments by 2 to Length; if Word is selected, it increments by 1.
24
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example
Var1 and Var2 are the internal memory addresses, Var3 is a constant, and Double Word is checked. Memory address increments by 2 addresses from $0 to 5 lengths: $0, $2, $4, $6, $8.
Enter $0 = 1, $2 = 2, $4 = 3, $6 = 4, and $8 = 5, and put the accumulated value in $50, so $50 = 15.
November, 2018
24-49
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
FADD (floating-point number addition)
Expression
Meaning of variable
24
Var1 = FADD(Var2, Var3) (Signed DW)
Var1
Sum
Var2
Addend
Var3
Augend
Description of action
Add Var2 and Var3, and put the result in Var1.
Note
DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is the internal memory address, and Var2 and Var3 are constants.
When the command is $1 = FADD(67.5, 34.9), the floating-point number addition operation is executed and the result of 67.5 plus 34.9 is put in $1, so $1 = 102.4.
24-50
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
FSUB (floating-point number subtraction)
Expression Var1 = FSUB(Var2, Var3) (Signed DW)
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1
Difference
Var2
Subtrahend
Var3
Minuend
Description of action
DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Subtract Var2 from Var3, and put the result in Var 1.
24
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is the internal memory address, and Var2 and Var3 are constants.
When the command is $1 = FSUB(67.5, 34.9), the floating-point number subtraction operation is executed and the result of 67.5 minus 34.9 is put in $1, so $1 = 32.6.
November, 2018
24-51
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
FMUL (floating-point number multiplication)
24
Expression Var1 = FMUL(Var2, Var3) (Signed DW)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Product
Var2
Multiplier
Var3
Multiplicand
Description of action
Multiply Var 3 by Var 2, and put the result in Var 1.
Note
DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is the internal memory address, and Var2 and Var3 are constants.
When the command is $1 = FMUL(67.5, 34.9), the floating-point number multiplication is executed and the result of 67.5 multiplied by 34.9 is put in $1, so $1 = 2355.75.
24-52
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
FDIV (floating-point number division)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1
Quotient
Var1 = FDIV(Var2, Var3) (Signed DW)
Var2
Dividend
Var3
Divisor
Description of action
DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Divide Var 2 by Var 3, and put the result in Var 1.
24
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is the internal memory address, and Var2 and Var3 are constants.
When the command is $1 = FDIV(67.5, 34.9), the floating-point number division operation is executed and the result of 67.5 divided by 34.9 is put in $1, so $1 = 1.934.
November, 2018
24-53
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
FMOD (floating-point number remainder)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Var1
Remainder
24
Var1 = FMOD(Var2, Var3) (Signed DW)
Var2
Dividend
Var3
Divisor
Description of action
Divide Var2 by Var3 and put the remainder in Var1.
Note
DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is the internal memory address, and Var2 and Var3 are constants.
When the command is $1 = FMOD(67.5, 34.9), the floating-point number remainder operation is executed and the remainder of 67.5 divided by 34.9 is put in $1, so $1 = 32.6.
24-54
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
SIN (sine function)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1
Sine
Var1 = SIN(Var2) (Signed DW)
Var2
Angle
Description of action
Sine operation is executed for the value input in Var2, and the result is put in Var1.
DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Note: 1. The Data Format for Var1 must be Floating. 2. The Data Format for Var2 must be Signed Decimal and no decimal digits can be set.
24
Variable
Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is the internal memory address and Var2 is a constant.
When the command is $1 = SIN(67), the input angle of 67 is used for sine operation and the result is put in $1, so $1 = 0.921.
November, 2018
24-55
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
COS (cosine function)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Comment
24 Var1 = COS(Var2) (Signed DW)
Var1
Cosine
Var2
Angle
Description of action
Cosine operation is executed for the value input in Var2, and the result is put in Var1.
DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Note: 1. The Data Format for Var1 must be Floating. 2. The Data Format for Var2 must be Signed Decimal, and no decimal digits can be set.
Variable
Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is the internal memory address and Var2 is a constant.
When the command is $1 = COS(67), the input angle of 67 is used for cosine operation and the result is put in $1, so $1 = 0.391.
24-56
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
TAN (tangent function)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1
Tangent
Var1 = TAN(Var2) (Signed DW)
Var2
Angle
Description of action
Tangent operation is executed for the value input in Var2, and the result is put in Var1.
DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Note: 1. The Data Format for Var1 must be Floating. 2. The Data Format for Var2 must be Signed Decimal, and no decimal digits can be set.
24
Variable
Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is the internal memory address and Var2 is a constant.
When the command is $1 = TAN(67), the input angle of 67 is used for tangent operation and the result is put in $1, so $1 = 2.356.
November, 2018
24-57
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
COT (cotangent function)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
24 Var1 = COT(Var2) (Signed DW)
Var1
Cotangent
Var2
Angle
Description of action
Cotangent operation is executed for the value input in Var2. and the result is put in Var1.
DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Note: 1. The Data Format for Var1 must be Floating. 2. The Data Format for Var2 must be Signed Decimal, and no decimal digits can be set.
Variable
Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is the internal memory address and Var2 is a constant.
When the command is $1 = COT(67), the input angle of 67 is used for cotangent operation and the result is put in $1, so $1 = 0.424.
24-58
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
SEC (secant function)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1
Secant
Var1 = SEC(Var2) (Signed DW)
Var2
Angle
Description of action
Secant operation is executed for the value input in Var2, and the result is put in Var1.
DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Note: 1. The Data Format for Var1 must be Floating. 2. The Data Format for Var2 must be Signed Decimal, and no decimal digits can be set.
Variable
Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
24
Example Var1 is the internal memory address and Var2 is a constant.
When the command is $1 = SEC(67), the input angle of 67 is used for secant operation and the result is put in $1, so $1 = 2.559.
November, 2018
24-59
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
CSC (cosecant function)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
24 Var1 = CSC(Var2) (Signed DW)
Var1
Cosecant
Var2
Angle
Description of action
Cosecant operation is executed for the value input in Var2, and the result is put in Var1.
DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Note: 1. The Data Format for Var1 must be Floating. 2. The Data Format for Var2 must be Signed Decimal, and no decimal digits can be set.
Variable
Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is the internal memory address and Var2 is a constant.
When the command is $1 = CSC(67), the input angle of 67 is used for cosecant operation and the result is put in $1, so $1 = 1.086.
24-60
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
Logical Operation
Logic Operation contains six operators which convert numerical values to binary 0 and 1 representations, and then conduct |, &&, ^, NOT, < <, and > > operations. The macro commands are detailed below.
24
Figure 24.3.2.1 Logical Operation
| (OR logical operation)
Expression 0 | 0 0 | 1 1 | 0 1 | 1
OR logical operation feature
Result 0 1 1 1
Expression
Var1 = Var2 | Var3 (W) Var1 = Var2 | Var3 (DW)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Result
Var2
Logical Variable
Var3
Logical Variable
Description of action
Execute OR operation on Var2 and Var3, and put the result in Var1.
Note
W: Word DW: Double Word
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
November, 2018
24-61
Macro Example
Var1 is the internal memory address, and Var2 and Var3 are constants.
24
DOPSoft User Manual
After converting the values of Var2 and Var3 into binary representations (2 = 0010 and 3 = 0011), execute OR logical operation on 0010 and 0011, and the result is 0011 which is also 3.
Binary
Value
representation content
0010 2
| (OR operation) 0011 3
0011 3
24-62
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
&& (AND logical operation)
Expression 0 && 0 0 && 1 1 && 0 1 && 1
AND logical operation feature
Result 0 0 0 1
Expression
Var1 = Var2 && Var3 (W) Var1 = Var2 && Var3 (DW)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Result
Var2
Logical Variable
Var3
Logical Variable
Description of action
Execute AND operation on Var2 and Var3, and put the result in Var1.
Note
W: Word DW: Double Word
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Macro
24
November, 2018
24-63
Macro Example
Var1 is the internal memory address, and Var2 and Var3 are constants.
24
DOPSoft User Manual
After converting the values of Var2 and Var3 into binary representations (2 = 0010 and 3 = 0011), execute AND logical operation on 0010 and 0010, and the result is 0010 which is also 2.
Binary
Value
representation content
0010 2
&& (AND operation) 0011 3
0010 2
24-64
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
^ (XOR logical operation)
Expression 0 ^ 0 0 ^ 1 1 ^ 0 1 ^ 1
XOR logical operation feature
Result 0 1 1 0
24
Expression
Var1 = Var2 ^ Var3 (W) Var1 = Var2 ^ Var3 (DW)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Result
Var2
Logical Variable
Var3
Logical Variable
Description of action
Execute XOR operation on Var2 and Var3, and put the result in Var1.
Note
W: Word DW: Double Word
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
November, 2018
24-65
Macro Example
Var1 is the internal memory address, and Var2 and Var3 are constants.
24
DOPSoft User Manual
After converting the values of Var2 and Var3 into binary representations (2 = 0010 and 3 = 0011), execute XOR logical operation on 0010 and 0011, and the result is 0001 which is also 1.
Binary
Value
representation content
0010 2
^ (XOR operation) 0011 3
0001 1
24-66
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
NOT (NOT logical operation)
Expression NOT 0 NOT 1
NOT logical operation feature
Result 1 0
24
Expression
Var1 = NOT Var2 (W) Var1 = NOT Var2 (DW) Var1 = NOT Var2 (Signed W) Var1 = NOT Var2 (Signed DW)
Variable
Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Meaning of variable
Var1
Result
Var2
Logical Variable
Description of action
Execute NOT operation on Var2, and put the result in Var1.
Note
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is the internal memory address and Var2 is a constant.
After converting the value of Var2 into binary representation (2 = 0000000000000010), execute NOT 2 logical operation on 0000000000000010, and the result is 1111111111111101.
NOT operation
November, 2018
24-67
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
<< (SHL left shift logical operation)
Expression
24
Var1 = Var2 << Var3 (W) Var1 = Var2 << Var3 (DW)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Result
Var2
Source
Var3
Shift left by the number of bits
Description of action
Move the number of bits of Source Var2 to the left by Var3, and put the result in Var1.
Note
W: Word DW: Double Word
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
After converting the value of Var2 into binary representation (3 = 0000000000000011), execute the logical operation of << left shift by 2 bits on 0000000000000011, and the result is 0000000000001100.
<< (left shift operation)
24-68
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
>> (SHR right shift logical operation)
Expression
Var1 = Var2 >> Var3 (W) Var1 = Var2 >> Var3 (DW)
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1
Result
Var2
Source
Var3
Shift right by the number of bits
Description of action
W: Word DW: Double Word
Move the number of bits of Source Var2 to the right by Var3, and put the result in Var1.
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
Macro
24
After converting the value of Var2 into binary representation (8 = 0000000000001000), execute the logical operation of >> right shift by 2 bits on 0000000000001000, and the result is 0000000000000010.
>> (right shift operation)
November, 2018
24-69
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
Data transfer
Data transfer includes the following transfer commands which are detailed below.
24
Figure 24.3.3.1 Data transfer
MOV (data specified operand)
Expression
Var1 = Var2 (W) Var1 = Var2 (DW) Var1 = Var2 (Signed W) Var1 = Var2 (Signed DW)
Content
Note
Var1
Destination
Var2
Source
Description of action
Copy the source of Var2 to the Var1 destination, and Var2's source will not be changed due to the data specify command.
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Variable
Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
24-70
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses.
Macro
24
When the command $1 = $2 is executed, the input value of $2 will be moved to $1. If the input value
of $2 is 34, $1 will equal 34.
$1
$2
=
November, 2018
24-71
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
BMOV (copy block) Expression
24 BMOV(Var1, Var2, Var3) (W)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Destination
Var2
Source
Var3
Length (Word)
Description of action
Copy Var3 data lengths from Var2 source to Var1 destination.
Note W: Word
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
Move the three data lengths starting with $1 to $10, so the values entered in $1, $2, and $3 will be transferred to $10, $11, and $12 respectively.
$10
$1
$11
$2
$12
$3
24-72
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
ArrayCopy (copy array) Expression
Var1 = ArrayCopy(Var2, Var3, Var4, Var5, Var6)
Meaning of variable
Return value
Var1
Failed
0
Succeeded
1
Var2
Destination
Var3
Destination offset
Var4
Source
Var5
Source offset
Var6
Length(WORD)
Description of action
Copy a continuous address data to another address.
24 Note
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3 Var4 Var5 Var6
Internal memory
Type PLC register
String
Constant
November, 2018
24-73
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
Example Var1, Var2, and Var4 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 and Var5 are constants.
24
Address Offset
$0 $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 ... ... $20 $21 $2 $2 $24 $25 $26 ...
+0 +1 +2 +3
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4
...
Copy the offset (4, address is $24) specified by the source address ($20) to the offset (3, address is $5) specified by the destination address ($2) and move 2 Word of length according to the start address determined by the offset, as shown in the figure below.
$2
$3
$4
$5
$6
$20
$21
$22
$23
$24
$25
24-74
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
FILL (fill block) Expression
FILL(Var1, Var2, Var3) (W) FILL(Var1, Var2, Var3) (Signed W)
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1 Destination Start Address
Var2
Source
Var3
Length
Description of action
W: Word
Store values of Var2 to the Var1 start address in sequence. The total length is Var3.
24
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is the internal memory address, and Var2 and Var3 are constants.
Save the input value of $1 for 3 data lengths in sequence to $10, $11, and $12.
$1
$10
$11 $12
November, 2018
24-75
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
FILLASC (convert text to ASCII values)
Expression
24 FILLASC(Var1, "Var2") (W)
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1
Destination address for storing string
Var2
String
Description of action
W: Word
Convert each character of Var2 string into an ASCII value, and put it in Var1 address.
Variable
Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
String
Example Var1 is the internal memory address and Var2 is a string.
The results after operation are $1 = 3231H and $2 = 3433H.
$1
$2
24-76
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
STRCAT (connection string) Expression
Var1 = STRCAT(Var2, Var3, Var4)
Meaning of variable
Return value
Var1
Failed
0
Succeeded
1
Var2
Destination
Var3
Source
Var4
Maximum length of the destination string (unit: Char)
Description of action
Connect the source address string to the destination address string.
24 Note
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3 Var4
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is the internal memory address, Var2 and Var3 are strings, and Var4 is a constant.
Create a Numeric Entry element with the address as $1 and create Character Entry elements of $100 and $200.
After execution, enter the following values.
$100
November, 2018
$200
24-77
Macro
Example The results after operation are $100 = ABCDEFG and $1 = 1.
24
$1
DOPSoft User Manual $100
$200
A length of 7 indicates a maximum length of 7 characters in $100. If the connection string is more than 7 characters, only 7 characters will be displayed.
$1
$100
$200 If the total length is less than 7 characters, it will be added to 7 characters for display.
$1
$100
$200
24-78
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
FMOV (specify floating-point number data)
Expression Var1 = FMOV(Var2) (Signed DW)
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1
Destination
Var2
Source
Description of action
Copy the floating-point number data of Var2 to Var1, and Var2's source will not be changed due to the specify floating-point number data command.
DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
24
Variable
Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is the internal memory address and Var2 is a constant.
Store the floating-point number data of 67.5 to $1, so $1 = 67.5.
November, 2018
24-79
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
Data Conversion
Data Conversion includes conversion of Data Format, Maximum and Minimum, and value data
24
swap commands, which are explained in detail below.
Figure 24.3.4.1 Data Conversion
BCD (convert decimal values to BCD values)
Expression
Var1 = BCD(Var2) (W) Var1 = BCD(Var2) (DW)
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1
BCD Value
Var2
Decimal Value
Description of action
Convert the decimal value in Var2 to the BCD format value, and put it in Var1.
W: Word DW: Double Word
Variable
Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
24-80
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses.
Macro
24
Convert the decimal value of $2 to BCD and store it in $1.
$1 (BCD)
$2 (Unsigned Decimal)
November, 2018
24-81
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
BIN (convert BCD values to decimal values)
Expression
24
Var1 = BIN(Var2) (W) Var1 = BIN(Var2) (DW)
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1
Decimal Value
Var2
BCD Value
Description of action
Convert the BCD format value in Var2 to a decimal value and put it in Var1.
W: Word DW: Double Word
Variable
Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses.
Convert the BCD value format of $2 to decimal value format and save it in $1.
$1 (Unsigned Decimal)
$2 (BCD)
24-82
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
TODWORD (convert values from Word to Double Word)
Expression
Var1 = TODWORD(Var2) (W) Var1 = TODWORD(Var2) (Signed W)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Double Word
Var2
Word
Description of action
Convert the Word format value in Var2 to the Double Word value and put it in Var1.
Note
W: Word Signed: signed number
24
Variable
Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses.
Convert the Word value of $20 to Double Word value and store it in $1. Because the value has been converted to Double Word format, it actually occupies two addresses, $1 and $2.
TOWORD (convert values from Byte to Word)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Var1
Word value
Var2
Source Start Address
Var1 = TOWORD(Var2, Var3) (W)
Var3
Length
Description of action
Starting from Var2 start address, convert a continuous Var3 bytes to Word value and save the result in Var1. Add 0 for the high byte of each Var1.
Note: 1. Since the unit of Var2 is Word, each Word of Var2 can be converted into 2 Words. 2. After data conversion, the high and low bytes of Word will be swapped.
Note W: Word
November, 2018
24-83
Macro
24
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
DOPSoft User Manual Constant
Convert a continuous 4 bytes from $20 to Word value and put it in $1.
The Data Format of $1 and $20 is set to Hex.
Suppose $20 = AB67H and $21 = 9A62H, read 4 bytes of data in $20 with the TOWORD command and put them in $1, $2, $3, and $4. Accordingly, the data obtained are $1 = 67H, $2 = ABH, $3 = 62H, and $4 = 9AH.
$1
$20
$2
$21
$3
$4
24-84
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
TOBYTE (convert values from Word to Byte)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1
BYTE Value
Var2
Source Start Address
Var1 = TOBYTE(Var2, Var3) (W)
Var3
Length
Description of action
W: Word
Starting from the low byte of Var2, convert a continuous Var3 Words to byte values and ignore the high byte of Var2. The result is saved in Var1.
Note: after data conversion, the high and low bytes of Word will be swapped.
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
Macro
24
Convert a continuous 4 Words from $20 to byte value and put it in $1.
The Data Format of $1 and $20 is set to Hex.
Suppose $20 = 12H, $21 = 76H, $22 = 23H, and $23 = ABH, read 4 Words of data in $20 with the TOBYTE command and put them in $1 and $2. Accordingly, the data obtained are $1 = 7612H and $2 = AB23H.
$1 $2
November, 2018
$20 $21 $22 $23
24-85
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
SWAP (swap high and low bytes of Word)
Expression
24 SWAP(Var1, Var2, Var3) (W)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Destination Start Address
Var2
Source Start Address
Var3
Length
Description of action
Convert Var3 lengths from Var2 start address and swap high and low bytes of Var2 Word data to Var1.
Note W: Word
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
Swap high and low bytes of the value in $20, and put them in $10. Exchange 2 data lengths of values.
The Data Format of $10 and $20 is set to Hex.
Suppose $20 = 5612H and $21 = B723H, swap high and low bytes of the data in $20 with the SWAP command and put them in $10 and $11. Accordingly, the data obtained are $10 = 1256H and $11 = 23B7H.
$10 $11 24-86
$20 $21
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
XCHG (exchange value data)
Expression
XCHG(Var1, Var2, Var3) (W) XCHG(Var1, Var2, Var3) (DW)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Destination Start Address
Var2
Source Start Address
Var3
Length
Description of action
Exchange Var2 start address data to Var1 destination start address according to Var3 lengths.
Note
W: Word DW: Double Word
24
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
Exchange 2 data lengths of values in $20 and $10.
The Data Formats of $10 and $27 is set to Hex.
Suppose $20 = 1234H, $21 = 5678H, $10 = ABCDH, and $11 = EFDCH, exchange the data in $20 and $21 with the data in $10 and $11 with the SCHG command. Accordingly, the data obtained are $20 = ABCDH, $21 = EFDCH, $10 = 1234H, and $11 = 5678H.
$10 $11 November, 2018
$20 $21
24-87
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
MAX (get maximum) Expression
24
Var1 = MAX(Var2, Var3) (W) Var1 = MAX(Var2, Var3) (DW) Var1 = MAX(Var2, Var3) (Signed W) Var1 = MAX(Var2, Var3) (Signed DW)
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1
Maximum
Var2
Variable1
Var3
Variable2
Description of action
W: Word DW: Double Word
Take the maximum value of Var2 and Var3, and put it in Var1.
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is the internal memory address, and Var2 and Var3 are constants.
Put the maximum value of 67 and 34 in $1, so $1 = 67.
24-88
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
MIN (get minimum) Expression
Var1 = MIN(Var2, Var3) (W) Var1 = MIN(Var2, Var3) (DW) Var1 = MIN(Var2, Var3) (Signed W) Var1 = MIN(Var2, Var3) (Signed DW)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Minimum
Var2
Variable1
Var3
Variable2
Description of action
Take the minimum value of Var2 and Var3 and put it in Var1.
Note
W: Word DW: Double Word
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is the internal memory address, and Var2 and Var3 are constants.
Macro
24
Put the minimum value of 67 and 34 in $1, so $1 = 34.
November, 2018
24-89
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
TOHEX (convert 4 ASCII characters to HEX)
Expression
24 Var1 = TOHEX(Var2) (W)
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1
HEX Value
Var2
ASCII Start Address
Description of action
W: Word
Convert 4 ASCII characters of WORD to HEX from Var2 and put it in Var1.
24-90
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Variable
Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses.
Macro
Constant
24
Convert 4 consecutive ASCII characters of Word from the address of $20 to HEX value and put it in $10.
The Data Format of $10 and $20 is set to Hex.
Suppose $20 = 31H, $21 = 32H, $22 = 33H, and $23 = 34H, convert ASCII characters in $20, $21, $22, and $23 to HEX with the TOHEX command and put it in $10. Accordingly, the data obtained is $10 = 1234H.
$10
$20
$21 $22
$23
November, 2018
24-91
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
TOASC (convert HEX to 4 ASCII characters of Word)
Expression
24 Var1 = TOASC(Var2) (W)
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1
ASCII Value
Var2
HEX Start Address
Description of action
W: Word
Convert HEX from the address of Var2 to 4 ASCII characters of WORD and put them in Var1.
Variable
Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses.
Convert HEX value of $20 into 4 consecutive ASCII characters of Word and put them in $10.
The Data Format of $10 and $20 is set to Hex.
Suppose $20 = 1234H, convert HEX in $20 into ASCII characters with the TOASC command and put them in $10, $11, $12, and $13. Accordingly, the data obtained are $10 = 31H, $11 = 32H, $12 = 33H, and $13 = 34H.
$10 $11 $12 $13
24-92
$20 November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
FCNV (convert integer to floating-point number)
Expression Var1 = FCNV(Var2) (Signed DW)
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1
Floating
Var2
Integer
Description of action
Convert the integer in Var2 to floating-point number and put it in Var1.
DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
24
Variable
Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses.
Convert the integer value of 67 to a floating-point value and put it in $10. The Data Format set for $10 is Floating and the Data Type is Double Word. The result after the HMI operation is $10 = 67.0.
November, 2018
24-93
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
ICNV (convert floating-point number to integer)
Expression
24 Var1 = ICNV(Var2) (Signed DW)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Integer
Var2
Floating
Description of action
Convert the floating-point number in Var2 to integer and put it in Var1.
Note
DW; Double Word Signed: signed number
Variable
Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses.
Convert the floating-point value of 67.3 into an integer value and put it in $10. The Data Format set for $10 is Unsigned Decimal, and the Data Type is Word. The result after the HMI operation is $10 = 67.
24-94
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
SPRINTF (format string)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
Return value
Var1
Failed
0
Succeeded
1
Var1 = SPRINTF(Var2, "%u", Var4) (DW)
Var1 = SPRINTF (Var2, "%u", Var4, ..., Var23) (DW) (Note 2)
Var2
Var3 Var4
...
Enter destination address of string
Format description string (Note 1)
Value 1
...
DW: Double Word
Var23
Value 20
Description of action
Connect the values according to Var2 "format description string" and fill in the destination address.
Note: 1. The supporting string formats are as follows:
%d: signed integer %u: unsigned integer %c: ASCII character %x: hexadecimal value 2. Support up to 20 numeric variables. 3. The number of the parameters of variable conversion in the string contents should be consistent with the number of values.
24
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3 Var4
... Var23
Internal memory
...
Type PLC register
String
...
Constant
...
November, 2018
24-95
Macro
24
Example
DOPSoft User Manual
Create a Character Entry element, set the address as $100, and set the length as 20.
Create Numeric Entry elements of $1, $2, $3, and $4.
After downloading the screen to the HMI, enter $1 = 68 (representing D in ASCII code), $2 = 2017, $3 = 6, and $4 = 1 on the HMI. The results are as follows.
$1
$100
$2
$3 $4
24-96
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
Comparison
Comparison contains IF... THEN GOTO, IF... THEN CALL, IF, ELSEIF and other comparison commands, as detailed below.
24
Figure 24.3.5.1 Comparison The nested structure of IF... supports up to 7 layers.
November, 2018
24-97
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
IF...THEN GOTO (if...GOTO execute according to the specified label name)
24
The following will introduce the 12 commands of the IF... THEN GOTO macro.
(1) IF ==
Expression
Meaning of variable
IF Var1 == Var2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3 (W)
IF Var1 == Var2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3 (DW)
IF Var1 == Var2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3 (Signed W)
IF Var1 == Var2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3 (Signed DW)
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Condition2
Var3
Label Name
Description of action
If Condition1 equals Condition2, then GOTO executes LABEL Var3.
Note
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
24-98
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
Macro
24
If the value of $1 equals $2, execute LABEL1 ($100 = $200); if $1 does not equal $2, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(2) IF !=
Expression
Meaning of variable
Var1
Condition1
IF Var1 != Var2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3 (W)
IF Var1 != Var2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3 (DW)
IF Var1 != Var2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3 (Signed W)
IF Var1 != Var2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3 (Signed DW)
Var2
Condition2
Var3
Label Name
Description of action
If Condition1 does not equal Condition2, then GOTO executes LABEL Var3.
Note
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
November, 2018
24-99
Macro Example
Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
24
DOPSoft User Manual
If the value of $1 does not equal $2, execute LABEL1 ($100 = $200); if $1 equals $2, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(3) IF >
Expression
Meaning of variable
IF Var1 > Var2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3 (W)
IF Var1 > Var2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3 (DW)
IF Var1 > Var2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3 (Signed W)
IF Var1 > Var2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3 (Signed DW)
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Condition2
Var3 Label index name
Description of action
If Condition1 is greater than Condition2, then GOTO executes LABEL Var3.
Note
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
24-100
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
Macro
24
If the value of $1 is greater than $2, execute LABEL1 ($100 = $200); if $1 is less than or equal to $2, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(4) IF >=
Expression
IF Var1 >= Var2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3 (W)
IF Var1 >= Var2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3 (DW)
IF Var1 >= Var2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3 (Signed W)
IF Var1 >= Var2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3 (Signed DW)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Condition2
Var3
Label Name
Description of action
If Condition1 is greater than or equal to Condition 2, then GOTO executes LABEL Var3.
Note
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
November, 2018
24-101
Macro Example
Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
24
DOPSoft User Manual
If the value of $1 is greater than or equal to $2, execute LABEL1 ($100 = $200); if $1 is less than $2, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(5) IF <
Expression
IF Var1 < Var2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3 (W)
IF Var1 < Var2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3 (DW)
IF Var1 < Var2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3 (Signed W)
IF Var1 < Var2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3 (Signed DW)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Condition2
Var3
Label Name
Description of action
If Condition1 is less than Condition2, then GOTO executes LABEL Var3.
Note
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
24-102
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
Macro
24
If the value of $1 is less than $2, execute LABEL1 ($100 = $200); If $1 is greater than or equal to $2, execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(6) IF <=
Expression
Meaning of variable
Var1
Condition1
IF Var1 <= Var2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3 (W)
IF Var1 <= Var2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3 (DW)
IF Var1 <= Var2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3 (Signed W)
IF Var1 <= Var2 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3 (Signed DW)
Var2
Condition2
Var3
Label Name
Description of action
If Condition1 is less than or equal to Condition2, then GOTO executes LABEL Var3.
Note
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
November, 2018
24-103
Macro Example
Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
24
DOPSoft User Manual
If the value of $1 is less than or equal to $2, execute LABEL1 ($100 = $200); if $1 is greater than $2, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(7) IF AND == 0 Expression
IF (Var1 && Var2) == 0 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3 (W) IF (Var1 && Var2) == 0 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3 (DW)
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Condition2
Var3
Label Name
Description of action
W: Word DW: Double Word
If the result of AND operation on Condition1 and Condition2 is 0, then GOTO executes LABEL Var3.
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
24-104
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
Macro
24
If the result of AND operation on $1 and $2 is 0, execute LABEL1 ($100 = $200); if the result of AND operation on $1 and $2 is not 0, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(8) IF AND != 0 Expression
IF (Var1 && Var2) != 0 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3 (W) IF (Var1 && Var2) != 0 THEN GOTO LABEL Var3 (DW)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Condition2
Var3
Label Name
Description of action
If the result after AND operation on Condition1 and Condition2 is not 0, then GOTO executes LABEL Var3.
Note
W: Word DW: Double Word
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
November, 2018
24-105
Macro Example
Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
24
DOPSoft User Manual
If the result of AND operation on $1 and $2 is not 0, execute LABEL1 ($100 = $200); if the result of AND operation on $1 and $2 is 0, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
24-106
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
(9) IF == ON
Expression
IF Var1 == ON THEN GOTO LABEL Var2 (W)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Label Name
Description of action
If Condition1 is ON, then GOTO executes LABEL Var2.
Note W: Word
Variable Var1 Var2
Internal memory
(can only be Bit)
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is the internal memory address and Var2 is a constant.
Macro
24
If $1.0 is ON, execute LABEL1 ($100 = $200); if $1.0 is not ON, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
November, 2018
24-107
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
(10) IF == OFF
Expression
24
IF Var1 == OFF THEN GOTO LABEL Var2 (W)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Label Name
Description of action
If Condition1 is OFF, then GOTO executes LABEL Var2.
Note W: Word
Variable Var1 Var2
Internal memory
(can only be Bit)
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is the internal memory address and Var2 is a constant.
If $1.0 is OFF, execute LABEL1 ($100 = $200); if $1.0 is not OFF, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
24-108
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
(11) IFB == ON
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1
Condition1
IFB Var1 == ON THEN GOTO LABEL Var2 (W)
Var2
Label Name
Description of action
W: Word
If Condition1 is ON, then GOTO executes LABEL Var2.
Note: for the IFB == ON command, its Bit address of Var1 can support the setting of external PLC register.
Variable Var1 Var2
Internal memory
(can only be Bit)
Type PLC register
(can only be Bit)
Constant
Example Var1 is the address of PLC register and Var2 is a constant.
Macro
24
If M1 is ON, execute LABEL1 ($100 = $200); if M1 is not ON, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
November, 2018
24-109
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
(12) IFB == OFF
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1
Condition1
24
IFB Var1 == OFF THEN GOTO LABEL Var2 (W)
Var2
Label Name
Description of action
If Condition 1 is OFF, then GOTO executes LABEL Var2.
W: Word
Note: for the IFB == OFF command, its Bit address of Var1 can support the setting of external PLC register.
Variable Var1 Var2
Internal memory
(can only be Bit)
Type PLC register
(can only be Bit)
Constant
Example Var1 is the address of PLC register and Var2 is a constant.
If M1 is OFF, execute LABEL1 ($100 = $200); if M1 is not OFF, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
24-110
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual IF...THEN CALL (If...call submacro)
Macro
24
The following will introduce the 10 commands of the IF... THEN CALL macro.
(1) IF ==
Expression
IF Var1 == Var2 THEN CALL Var3 (W)
IF Var1 == Var2 THEN CALL Var3 (DW)
IF Var1 == Var2 THEN CALL Var3 (Signed W)
IF Var1 == Var2 THEN CALL Var3 (Signed DW)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Condition2
Var3
Label Name
Description of action
If Condition1 equals Condition2, then call Submacro Var3.
Note
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
November, 2018
24-111
Macro Example
Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
24
DOPSoft User Manual
If the value of $1 equals $2, call Submacro 1 ($100 = $200); if $1 does not equal $2, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(2) IF !=
Expression
IF Var1 != Var2 THEN CALL Var3 (W)
IF Var1 != Var2 THEN CALL Var3 (DW)
IF Var1 != Var2 THEN CALL Var3 (Signed W)
IF Var1 != Var2 THEN CALL Var3 (Signed DW)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Condition2
Var3
Label Name
Description of action
If Condition1 does not equal Condition2, call Submacro Var3.
Note
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
24-112
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
Macro
24
If the value of $1 does not equal $2, call Submacro 1 ($100 = $200); if $1 equals $2, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
November, 2018
24-113
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
(3) IF >
Expression
24
IF Var1 > Var2 THEN CALL Var3 (W)
IF Var1 > Var2 THEN CALL Var3 (DW)
IF Var1 > Var2 THEN CALL Var3 (Signed W)
IF Var1 > Var2 THEN CALL Var3 (Signed DW)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Condition2
Var3
Label Name
Description of action
If Condition1 is greater than Condition2, call Submacro Var3.
Note
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
If the value of $1 is greater than $2, call Submacro 1 ($100 = $200); if $1 is less than or equal to $2, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
24-114
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
(4) IF >=
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
IF Var1 >= Var2 THEN CALL Var3 (W)
IF Var1 >= Var2 THEN CALL Var3 (DW)
IF Var1 >= Var2 THEN CALL Var3 (Signed W)
IF Var1 >= Var2 THEN CALL Var3 (Signed DW)
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Condition2
Var3
Label Name
Description of action
If Condition1 is greater than or equal to Condition2, call Submacro Var3.
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
24
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
If the value of $1 is greater than or equal to $2, call Submacro 1 ($100 = $200); if $1 is less than $2, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
November, 2018
24-115
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
(5) IF <
Expression
24
IF Var1 < Var2 THEN CALL Var3 (W)
IF Var1 < Var2 THEN CALL Var3 (DW)
IF Var1 < Var2 THEN CALL Var3 (Signed W)
IF Var1 < Var2 THEN CALL Var3 (Signed DW)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Condition2
Var3
Label Name
Description of action
If Condition1 is less than Condition2, call Submacro Var3.
Note
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
If the value of $1 is less than $2, call Submacro 1 ($100 = $200); if $1 is greater than or equal to $2, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
24-116
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
(6) IF <=
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
IF Var1 <= Var2 THEN CALL Var3 (W)
IF Var1 <= Var2 THEN CALL Var3 (DW)
IF Var1 <= Var2 THEN CALL Var3 (Signed W)
IF Var1 <= Var2 THEN CALL Var3 (Signed DW)
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Condition2
Var3
Label Name
Description of action
If Condition1 is less than or equal to Condition2, call Submacro Var3.
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
24
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
If the value of $1 is less than or equal to $2, call Submacro 1 ($100 = $200); if $1 is greater than $2, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
November, 2018
24-117
Macro
(7) IF AND == 0
Expression
Meaning of variable
Var1
Condition1
24
IF (Var1 && Var2) == 0 THEN CALL Var3 (W)
IF (Var1 && Var2) == 0 THEN CALL Var3 (DW)
Var2
Condition2
Var3
Label Name
Description of action
If the result of the AND operation on Condition1 and Condition2 is 0, call Submacro Var3.
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
DOPSoft User Manual
Note
W: Word DW: Double Word
Constant
If the result of the AND operation on $1 and $2 is 0, call Submacro 1 ($100 = $200); if the result of the AND operation on $1 and $2 is not 0, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
24-118
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
(8) IF AND != 0 Expression
IF (Var1 && Var2) != 0 THEN CALL Var3 (W) IF (Var1 && Var2) != 0 THEN CALL Var3 (DW)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Condition2
Var3
Label Name
Description of action
If the result of the AND operation on Condition1 and Condition2 is not 0, call Submacro Var3.
Note
W: Word DW: Double Word
24
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
If the result of the AND operation on $1 and $2 is not 0, call Submacro 1 ($100 = $200); if the result of the AND operation on $1 and $2 is 0, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
November, 2018
24-119
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
(9) IF == ON Expression
24 IF Var1 == ON THEN CALL Var2 (W)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Label Name
Description of action
If Condition1 is ON, call Submacro Var2.
Note W: Word
Variable Var1 Var2
Internal memory
(can only be Bit)
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is the internal memory address and Var2 is a constant.
If $1.0 is ON, call Submacro 1 ($100 = $200); if $1.0 is not ON, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
24-120
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
(10) IF == OFF Expression
IF Var1 == OFF THEN CALL Var2 (W)
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Label Name
Description of action
W: Word
If Condition1 is OFF, call Submacro Var2.
Variable Var1 Var2
Internal memory
(can only be Bit)
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is the internal memory address and Var2 is a constant.
Macro
24
If $1.0 is OFF, call Submacro 1 ($100 = $200); if $1.0 is not OFF, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
November, 2018
24-121
Macro IF... (If...)
24
DOPSoft User Manual
The following will introduce the 10 commands of the IF... macro.
(1) IF ==
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
IF Var1 == Var2 (W) IF Var1 == Var2 (DW) IF Var1 == Var2 (Signed W) IF Var1 == Var2 (Signed DW)
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Condition2
Description of action
If Condition1 equals Condition2, execute...
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Note: the IF macro command must be used with ENDIF, otherwise an error message will pop up while compiling.
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
24-122
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
Macro
24
If the value of $1 equals $2, execute $100 = $100 + 1; if $1 is greater than or less than $2, then $100 = $100 + 1 will not be executed.
(2) IF !=
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
IF Var1 != Var2 (W) IF Var1 != Var2 (DW) IF Var1 != Var2 (Signed W) IF Var1 != Var2 (Signed DW)
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Condition2
Description of action
If Condition1 does not equal Condition2, execute...
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Note: the IF macro command must be used with ENDIF, otherwise an error message will pop up while compiling.
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
November, 2018
24-123
Macro Example
Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
24
DOPSoft User Manual
If the value of $1 does not equal $2, execute $100 = $100 + 1; if $1 is greater than or less than $2, then $100 = $100 + 1 will not be executed.
24-124
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
(3) IF >
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
IF Var1 > Var2 (W) IF Var1 > Var2 (DW) IF Var1 > Var2 (Signed W) IF Var1 > Var2 (Signed DW)
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Condition2
Description of action
If Condition1 is greater than Condition2, execute...
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Note: the IF macro command must be used with ENDIF, otherwise an error message will pop up while compiling.
24
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
If the value of $1 is greater than $2, execute $100 = $100 + 1; if $1 is less than or equal to $2, then $100 = $100 + 1 will not be executed.
November, 2018
24-125
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
(4) IF >=
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
24
IF Var1 >= Var2 (W) IF Var1 >= Var2 (DW) IF Var1 >= Var2 (Signed W) IF Var1 >= Var2 (Signed DW)
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Condition2
Description of action
If Condition1 is greater than or equal to Condition2, execute...
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Note: the IF macro command must be used with ENDIF, otherwise an error message will pop up while compiling.
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
If the value of $1 is greater than or equal to $2, execute $100 = $100 + 1; if $1 is less than $2, then $100 = $100 + 1 will not be executed.
24-126
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
(5) IF <
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
IF Var1 < Var2 (W) IF Var1 < Var2 (DW) IF Var1 < Var2 (Signed W) IF Var1 < Var2 (Signed DW)
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Condition2
Description of action
If Condition1 is less than Condition2, execute...
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Note: the IF macro command must be used with ENDIF, otherwise an error message will pop up while compiling.
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
Macro
24
If the value of $1 is less than $2, execute $100 = $100 + 1; if $1 is greater than or equal to $2, then $100 = $100 + 1 will not be executed.
November, 2018
24-127
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
(6) IF <=
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
24
IF Var1 <= Var2 (W) IF Var1 <= Var2 (DW) IF Var1 <= Var2 (Signed W) IF Var1 <= Var2 (Signed DW)
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Condition2
Description of action
If Condition1 is less than or equal to Condition2, execute...
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Note: the IF macro command must be used with ENDIF, otherwise an error message will pop up while compiling.
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
If the value of $1 is less than or equal to $2, execute $100 = $100 + 1; if $1 is greater than $2, then $100 = $100 + 1 will not be executed.
24-128
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
(7) IF AND == 0 Expression
IF (Var1 && Var2) == 0 (W) IF (Var1 && Var2) == 0 (W)
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Condition2
Description of action
If the result of the AND operation on Condition1 and Condition2 is 0, execute...
W: Word DW: Double Word
Variable
Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses.
Macro
24
If the result of the AND operation on $1 and $2 is 0, execute $100 = $100 + 1; if the result of the AND operation on $1 and $2 is not 0, then $100 = $100 + 1 will not be executed.
November, 2018
24-129
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
(8) IF AND != 0 Expression
24
IF (Var1 && Var2) != 0 (W) IF (Var1 && Var2) != 0 (DW)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Condition2
Description of action
If the result of the AND operation on Condition1 and Condition2 is not 0, execute...
Note
W: Word DW: Double Word
Variable
Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses.
If the result of the AND operation on $1 and $2 is not 0, execute $100 = $100 + 1; if the result of the AND operation on $1 and $2 is 0, then $100 = $100 + 1 will not be executed.
24-130
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual (9) IF == ON Expression
IF Var1 == ON (W)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Condition1
Description of action
If Condition1 is ON, execute...
Variable Var1
Internal memory
(can only be Bit)
Type PLC register
Var1 is the internal memory address.
Example
Note W: Word
Constant
Macro
24
If $1.0 is ON, execute $100 = $100 + 1; if $1.0 is not ON, then $100 = $100 + 1 will not be executed.
November, 2018
24-131
Macro
(10) IF == OFF Expression
24 IF Var1 == OFF (W)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Condition1
Description of action
If Condition1 is OFF, execute...
Variable Var1
Internal memory
(can only be Bit)
Type PLC register
Var1 is the internal memory address.
Example
DOPSoft User Manual Note
W: Word
Constant
If $1.0 is OFF, execute $100 = $100 + 1; if $1.0 is not OFF, then $100 = $100 + 1 will not be executed.
24-132
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual ELSEIF... (else if...)
Macro
24
The following will introduce the 10 commands of ELSEIF... macro.
(1) ELSEIF ==
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
ELSEIF Var1 == Var2 (W) ELSEIF Var1 == Var2 (DW) ELSEIF Var1 == Var2 (Signed W) ELSEIF Var1 == Var2 (Signed DW)
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Condition2
Description of action
Else if Condition1 equals Condition2, execute...
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Note: the ELSEIF macro command must be used with IF...ENDIF, otherwise an error message will pop up while compiling.
Variable
Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses.
November, 2018
24-133
Macro
Example
DOPSoft User Manual
24
If the value of $1 does not equal $2, execute $200 = $200 + 1; else if $1 equals $2, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(2) ELSEIF !=
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
ELSEIF Var1 != Var2 (W) ELSEIF Var1 != Var2 (DW) ELSEIF Var1 != Var2 (Signed W) ELSEIF Var1 != Var2 (Signed DW)
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Condition2
Description of action
Else if Condition1 does not equal Condition2, execute...
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Note: the ELSEIF macro command must be used with IF...ENDIF, otherwise an error message will pop up while compiling.
Variable
Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses.
Constant
24-134
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Example
Macro
24
If the value of $1 equals $2, execute $200 = $200 + 1; else if $1 does not equal $2, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(3) ELSEIF >
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
ELSEIF Var1 > Var2 (W) ELSEIF Var1 > Var2 (DW) ELSEIF Var1 > Var2 (Signed W) ELSEIF Var1 > Var2 (Signed DW)
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Condition2
Description of action
Else if Condition1 is greater than Condition2, execute...
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Note: the ELSEIF macro command must be used with IF...ENDIF, otherwise an error message will pop up while compiling.
Variable
Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses.
November, 2018
24-135
Macro
Example
DOPSoft User Manual
24
If the value of $1 equals $2, execute $200 = $200 + 1; else if $1 is greater than $2, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(4) ELSEIF >=
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
ELSEIF Var1 >= Var2 (W) ELSEIF Var1 >= Var2 (DW) ELSEIF Var1 >= Var2 (Signed W) ELSEIF Var1 >= Var2 (Signed DW)
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Condition2
Description of action
Else if Condition1 is greater than or equal to Condition2, execute...
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Note: the ELSEIF macro command must be used with IF...ENDIF, otherwise an error message will pop up while compiling.
Variable
Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses.
24-136
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Example
Macro
24
If the value of $1 is less than $2, execute $200 = $200 + 1; else if $1 is greater than or equal to $2, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(5) ELSEIF <
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
ELSEIF Var1 < Var2 (W) ELSEIF Var1 < Var2 (DW) ELSEIF Var1 < Var2 (Signed W) ELSEIF Var1 < Var2 (Signed DW)
Var 1
Condition 1
Var 2
Condition 2
Description of action
Else if Condition1 is less than Condition2, execute...
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Note: the ELSEIF macro command must be used with IF...ENDIF, otherwise an error message will pop up while compiling.
Variable
Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses.
November, 2018
24-137
Macro
Example
DOPSoft User Manual
24
If the value of $1 is greater than or equal to $2, execute $200 = $200 + 1; else if $1 is less than $2, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(6) ELSEIF <=
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
ELSEIF Var1 <= Var2 (W) ELSEIF Var1 <= Var2 (DW) ELSEIF Var1 <= Var2 (Signed W) ELSEIF Var1 <= Var2 (Signed DW)
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Condition2
Description of action
Else if Condition1 is less than or equal to Condition2, execute...
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Note: the ELSEIF macro command must be used with IF...ENDIF, otherwise an error message will pop up while compiling.
Variable
Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses.
24-138
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Example
Macro
24
If the value of $1 is greater than $2, execute $200 = $200 + 1; else if $1 is less than or equal to $2, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(7) ELSEIF AND == 0 Expression
ELSEIF (Var1 && Var2) == 0 (W) ELSEIF (Var1 && Var2) == 0 (DW)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Condition2
Description of action
Else if the result of the AND operation on Condition1 and Condition2 is 0, execute...
Note
W: Word DW: Double Word
Variable
Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses.
November, 2018
24-139
Macro
Example
DOPSoft User Manual
24
If the result of the AND operation on $1 and $2 is not 0, execute $200 = $200 + 1; else if the result of the AND operation on $1 and $2 is 0, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(8) ELSEIF AND != 0 Expression
ELSEIF (Var1 && Var2) != 0 (W) ELSEIF (Var1 && Var2) != 0 (DW)
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1
Condition1
Var2
Condition2
Description of action
Else if the result of the AND operation on Condition1 and Condition2 is not 0, execute...
W: Word DW: Double Word
Variable
Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses.
24-140
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Example
Macro
24
If the result of the AND operation on $1 and $2 is 0, execute $200 = $200 + 1; else if the result of the AND operation on $1 and $2 is not 0, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
(9) ELSEIF ==ON Expression
ELSEIF Var1 == ON (W)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Condition1
Description of action
Else if Condition1 is ON, execute...
Note W: Word
Variable Var1
Internal memory
(can only be Bit)
Type PLC register
Constant
Var1 is the internal memory address.
Example
If $1.0 is OFF, execute $200 = $200 + 1; else if $1.0 is ON, then execute $100 = $100 + 1. November, 2018
24-141
Macro
(10) ELSEIF == OFF Expression
24 ELSEIF Var1 == OFF (W)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Condition1
Description of action
Else if Condition1 is OFF, execute...
Variable Var1
Internal memory
(can only be Bit)
Type PLC register
Var1 is the internal memory address.
Example
DOPSoft User Manual Note
W: Word
Constant
If $1.0 is ON, execute $200 = $200 + 1; else if $1.0 is OFF, then execute $100 = $100 + 1.
24-142
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
ELSE The ELSE command is mainly used to execute other programs when conditions of IF... or ELSEIF are not met. ELSE must be used together with IF... and ENDIF, otherwise the software will prompt a syntax error message while compiling.
24
ENDIF ENDIF is mainly used together with IF..., ELSE, and ELSEIF... commands.
FCMP (comparison of floating-point value)
Expression Var1 = FCMP(Var2, Var3) (Signed DW)
Meaning of variable
Return value of comparison result
Var1
=
0
>
1
<
2
Var2
Condition1
Var3
Condition2
Description of action
Compare Var2 and Var3, and put the result in Var1.
Note
DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Variable Var1 Var2 Var3
November, 2018
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
24-143
Macro Example
Var1 is the internal memory address, and Var2 and Var3 are constants.
24
DOPSoft User Manual
Compare the floating-point values of 67.5 and 34.9. 67.5 > 34.9, and the return value is 1, so $1 = 1.
24-144
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
Flow Control
FlowControl includes commands such as GOTO, LABEL, CALL, RET, FOR, NEXT, END, etc., which you can use to control the execution process while writing macro programs. The details will be provided below.
24
Figure 24.3.6.1 FlowControl
GOTO LABEL (unconditionally execute a label name)
Expression GOTO LABEL Var1 (W)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Goto Label
Description of action
Directly execute the specified label name.
Variable Var1
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Var1 can only be a constant.
Example
Note W: Word
Constant
Execute LABEL 1 directly. The command of LABEL 1 is $100 = $100 + 1. November, 2018
24-145
Macro
LABEL (label name)
Expression
Meaning of variable
24
Var 1
Label name
LABEL Var1 (W)
Description of action
Specify the label name.
Note: the same label name shall not be used in the same macro.
Variable Var1
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Var1 can only be a constant.
Example
DOPSoft User Manual Note
W: Word
Constant
CALL (call submacro)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1
Submacro number (1 - 512)
CALL Var1 (W)
Description of action
W: Word
Specify the names of submacros.
Note: Var1 can support the input of Chinese and English names. If you want to input Chinese and English names, please enter its macro alias manually. The Macro Wizard only supports the input of submacro numbers.
Variable Var1
24-146
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Var1 is the internal memory address.
Example
Macro
24
You can execute the submacro commands by entering submacro numbers via the internal memory address $1000 (Numeric Entry element).
RET (exit submacro)
Expression RET
Description of action
Note
Exit submacro and return to the next line of the CALL submacro and then execute the command.
RET should be added at the end of the submacro, and must be used together with the CALL command.
CALL 1
Enter submacro
Execute submacro 1
RET
Exit submacro
Return to the next line of the CALL macro and then execute the command
November, 2018
24-147
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
Example The RET command must be written at the end of the submacro.
24
Return and execute the next line of the CALL macro command after exiting the submacro.
FOR, NEXT (program loop)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Var1
Loop Counter
FOR Var1 (W)
Description of action
Execute the statement for Var1 times continuously.
Expression
Description of action
NEXT
It must be used together with the FOR command.
Note: the multilayer loops can be used to support up to 10 layers.
Variable Var1
Internal memory
Memory usage PLC register
Var1 is a constant.
Example
Note W: Word
Note
Constant
24-148
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Example
Macro
24
FOR 4 means that the $100 = $100 + 1 comand is executed for four times, so the result obtained is 4.
END (end macro programs)
Expression
Description of action
END
End macro programs.
Note
Adding END to the submacro means the program will not return to the original macro command to continue executing the next line.
Statement 1
Statement 2
END Will not continue to execute Statement 3
Statement 3
November, 2018
24-149
Macro Example
Commands below END will not be executed.
24
DOPSoft User Manual
Commands below END will not be executed
When the END command is written to the end of a submacro, it means the program will not return to execute the previous macro command.
This line of command will not be executed
24-150
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
Bit Setting
Bit Setting includes BITON, BITOFF, BITNOT, GETB and other instructions, which allow you to set the On / Off state of bit, inverse bit, and get the value represented by the bit. The details will be provided below.
24
Figure 24.3.7.1 Bit Setting
BITON (set bit as On) Expression
BITON Var1 (W)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Bit setting
Description of action
Set Var1 to ON.
Variable Var1
Internal memory
(can only be Bit)
Type PLC register
(can only be Bit)
Var1 is the internal memory address.
Example
Note W: Word
Constant
Create a Maintained button and set the Write Address to $1.0. When BITON $1.0 is executed, the result is as follows.
November, 2018
24-151
Macro
BITON (set bit as Off) Expression
24 BITOFF Var1 (W)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Bit setting
Description of action
Set Var1 to Off.
Variable Var1
Internal memory
(can only be Bit)
Type PLC register
(can only be Bit)
Var1 is the internal memory address.
Example
DOPSoft User Manual Note
W: Word
Constant
Create a Maintained button and set the Write Address to $1.0. When BITOFF $1.0 is executed, the result is as follows.
BITNOT (inverse bit, ONOFF,OFFON)
Expression BITNOT Var1 (W)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Bit setting
Description of action
Set Var1 bit from On to Off and from Off to On.
Note W: Word
Variable Var1
Internal memory
(can only be Bit)
Type PLC register
(can only be Bit)
Constant
24-152
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Var1 is the internal memory address.
Example
Macro
24
Create a Maintained button and set the Write Address to $1.0. When BITNOT $1.0 is executed, the actions of the Maintined button will be continuously switched from On to Off and from Off to On.
GETB (get bit value) Expression
(Var1) = GETB (Var2) (W)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Bit setting
Description of action
Put the Var2 bit value in Var1.
Note W: Word
Variable Var1 Var2
Internal memory
(can only be Bit)
(can only be Bit)
Type PLC register
(can only be Bit)
(can only be Bit)
Constant
November, 2018
24-153
Macro Example
Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses.
24
DOPSoft User Manual
Set $1.0 and $2.0 as Set to On button elements. When executing $1.0 = GETB $2.0, press the $2.0 button, then $1.0 will be triggered to ON.
24-154
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
Communication
The Communication macro command provides several macros related to COM Port and network IP control, as detailed below.
24
Figure 24.3.8.1 Communication
November, 2018
24-155
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
INITCOM (COM Port initialization)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
Return value
24
Var1 Var2
Failed
0
Succeeded
1
COM Port
Var3
Interface
Var4
Data Bits
Var1 = INITCOM(Var2, Var3, Var4, Var5, Var6, Var7, Var8) (W)
Var5 Var6
Parity Bits Stop Bits
W: Word
Var7
Baud Rate
Var8
Flow Control
Description of action
The initialization of COM Port is used to open the communication port, set the communication protocol (Var2 - Var8), and put the return value of the initialization result in Var1.
Note: the INITCOM command can only be issued once. If it is used again, the command is invalid.
Variable Var1
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
24-156
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Variable Var2
Option COM Port
Var3
Interface
Var4
Data Bits
Var5
Parity Bits
Var6
Stop Bits
Var7
Baud Rate
Var8
Flow Control
Parameter setting Option content COM1 COM2 COM3
RS232 RS422 RS485
7 Bits 8 Bits
None Old Even
1 Bits 2 Bits
300 600 900 1200 2400 4800 9600 14400 19200 28800 38400 57600 115200
No Flow Control CTS RTS Flow Control DTR DSR Flow Control Xon Xoff Flow Control
Macro
Corresponding code 0 1 2
0 1 2
0 1
0 1 2
0 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
0 1 2 3
24
November, 2018
24-157
Macro
Notes for Flow Control
DOPSoft User Manual
24
No Flow Control Flow Control
CTS / RTS Flow Control
Flow Control
DSR / DTR Flow Control
Xon / Xoff Flow Control
Flow Control is not set.
While using serial port to transmit data, real-time compression, debugging, and other transmission processing technologies greatly increase the speed and accuracy of communication, but also make the speed of data transmission between the computer and the HMI greater than the real data transfer speed. In order to ensure the security and integrity of data in transmission, the transfer flow must be controlled.
Flow control for the hardware, which is achieved by the electrical pulse wave generated by the hardware flowing to internal modem or to external modem through a connecting cable.
Flow control for the hardware, which is achieved by a cable directly connecting the computer and the HMI.
Flow control for the software, which is only used in 2400 bps modem. It is achieved by adding the control code generated by software to the data in transmission.
Var1 is the internal memory address.
Example
After executing the INITCOM command, 0 or 1 will be returned to $1 for failure or success, respectively.
24-158
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
ADDSUM (get CHECKSUM through addition)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1
CHECKSUM Value
Var2
Source Start Address
Var3
Data Length
Var1 = ADDSUM(Var2, Var3) (W)
Description of action
Get CHECKSUM through addition. Var1 is the CHECKSUM value after calculation, Var2 is the start address of the data to be calculated, and Var3 is the length of the data.
W: Word
Note: the value of CHECKSUM calculated by ADDSUM is based on Byte. If the length of data is 6, it has to be divided by 2, so the actual length is 3.
24
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
November, 2018
24-159
Macro Example
Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
24
DOPSoft User Manual
Conduct addition operation for 3 (6 / 2 = 3) consecutive data length from the start address of $20 and put the value result in $10. The expression is $20 + $21 + $22 = $10.
$10
$20
$21
$22
XORSUM (get CHECKSUM through XOR)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1
CHECKSUM Value
Var2
Source Start Address
Var3
Data Length
Var1 = XORSUM(Var2, Var3) (W)
Description of action
Get CHECKSUM through addition. Var1 is the CHECKSUM value after calculation, Var2 is the start address of the data to be calculated, and Var3 is the length of the data.
W: Word
Note: the value of CHECKSUM calculated by XORSUM is based on Byte. If the length of data is 6, it has to be divided by 2, so the actual length is 3.
24-160
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 is a constant.
Macro
Constant
24
Conduct XOR operation for 3 (6 / 2 = 3) consecutive data length from the start address of $20 and put the value result in $10.
PUTCHARS (output characters via the communication port)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
Return value
Var1
Failed
0
Succeeded
1
Var2
Source Start Address
Var1 = PUTCHARS(Var2, Var3, Var4) (W)
Var3 Var4
Data Length Communication Time
W: Word
Description of action
By the selected communication port, output characters of Var3 data length to Var2 start address within the required Var4 communication time, and put the return value in Var1.
Note: 1. The PUTCHARS command must be used together with INITCOM and SELECTCOM. 2. The unit of Var3 is Byte. 3. The unit of Var4 is ms, which means to complete the macro execution within a specific time and end the execution
when the time is up, so as to avoid delaying the execution of macros below.
November, 2018
24-161
Macro
24
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3 Var4
Internal memory
Type PLC register
DOPSoft User Manual
Constant
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 and Var4 are constants.
In the case of $50 = PUTCHARS($67, 12, 500), its action is to send 12 bytes (6 words) data and write them to $67. If 12 bytes cannot be sent within 500 ms, the program will exit the macro command when the time is up and write 0 to $50; if 12 bytes are sent successfully, it will exit this command immediately and write 1 to $50.
24-162
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
GETCHARS (get characters via the COM Port )
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
Return value
Var1
Failed
0
Succeeded
1
Var2
Source Start Address
Var1 = GETCHARS(Var2, Var3, Var4) (W)
Var3 Var4
Data Length Communication Time
W: Word
Description of action
By the selected communication port, obtain characters of Var3 data length to Var2 start address within the required Var4 communication time, and put the return value in Var1.
Note: 1. The GETCHARS command must be used together with INITCOM and SELECTCOM. 2. The unit of Var3 is Byte. 3. The unit of Var4 is ms, which means to complete the macro execution within a specific time and end the execution
when the time is up, so as to avoid delaying the execution of macros below.
24
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3 Var4
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
November, 2018
24-163
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
Example Var1 and Var2 are internal memory addresses, and Var3 and Var4 are constants.
24
In the case of $51 = GETCHARS($100, 12, 500), its action is to collect 12 bytes (6 words) data and write them to $100. If 12 bytes cannot be collected within 500 ms, the program will exit the macro command when the time is up and write 0 to $51; if 12 bytes are collected successfully, it will exit this command immediately and write 1 to $51.
SELECTCOM (select COM Port )
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
COM1
0
Var 1
COM2
1
SELECTCOM(Var1) (W)
COM3
2
W: Word
Description of action
Select the communication port.
Note:
1. The SELECTCOM command must be used together with INITCOM.
2. The specified COM Port cannot be the same as the one used by the system. The selected COM Port will process relevant communication commands, so the SELECTCOM command in different macros will not support or interfere with each other.
24-164
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Variable Var1
Internal memory
Var1 can only be a constant.
Type PLC register
Example
Macro
Constant
24
CLEARCOMBUFFER (clear buffer of COM Port )
Expression CLEARCOMBUFFER(Var1, Var2) (W)
Meaning of variable
COM1
0
Var1
COM2
1
COM3
2
Receive Buffer 0 Var2
Transmit Buffer 1
Description of action
Clear buffer of Var1 COM Port.
Note W: Word
Variable Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
November, 2018
24-165
Macro
Var1 and Var2 can only be constants.
Example
24
DOPSoft User Manual
CHRCHKSUM (calculate the length and CHECKSUM value of the string)
Expression
Var1 Var2 Var3
Meaning of variable String Length Input String
Memory address for storing strings
Note
Var1 = CHRCHKSUM("Var2", Var3, Var4) (W)
Var4
Select the display format for
CHECKSUM result
1 BYTE
2 BYTES (WORD)
1 W: Word
2
Description of action
Calculate string length and CHECKSUM value, and put them in Var1.
Note:
1. The string length of Var1 varies according to the format set by Var4.
2. If the input string is "345", Var4 is set as 2, the result value of the string length of Var1 is 5. On the contrary, if Var4 is set as 1, the result value is 4. (Unit based on Byte.)
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3 Var4
Internal memory
PLC register
Type String
Constant
(can only input 1 and 2)
24-166
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Example 1
Example
Macro
24
$50 = CHRCHKSUM ( 24 , $67, 2)
String length
$50
4=
Address for storing CHECKSUM value for string length storing string length
$67
$68
0X34 0X32 0X66 0X00
0X34 + 0X32
0X66
Low High Byte Byte
Setting of 2 indicates that the display format of CHECKSUM
is 2 Bytes
November, 2018
24-167
Macro Example 2
24
Example
DOPSoft User Manual
$50 = CHRCHKSUM ( 2425 , $67, 1)
String length
$50
5=
Address for storing string length
$67
$68
0X34 0X32 0X35 0X32
CHECKSUM value for storing string length
$69 0XCD
0X34 0X32 0X35 + 0X32 0XCD
Low High Byte Byte
Setting of 1 indicates that the display format of CHECKSUM
is 1 Byte
24-168
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
LOCKCOM / UNLOCKCOM (lock COM Port / unlock COM Port)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
Return value
Var1
Failed
0
Succeeded
1
COM1
0
Var1 = LOCKCOM(Var2, Var3) (W)
Var2
COM2
1
COM3
2
Var3
Time Out Description of action
W: Word
Lock COM port.
COM1
0
Var1
COM2
1
UNLOCKCOM(Var1) (W)
COM3
2
Description of action
Unlock COM port.
Note:
1. If the LOCKCOM command is set to infinite waiting (i.e. Var3 = 0), it means LOCKCOM will be executed twice in the same macro which will cause the HMI unable to respond.
2. If there are communication commands in more than one macro at the same time, it may cause interference of the communication data. To prevent this problem, LOCKCOM and UNLOCKCOM can be added before and after the communication commands. This can avoid communication interruption and execution of other communication actions in the same period of time to ensure the integrity of communication contents.
3. Please use LOCKCOM and UNLOCKCOM together, otherwise the HMI cannot execute the download action.
4. The unit of Var3 Time Out value is ms.
24
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
LOCKCOM command type PLC register
Constant
Variable Var1
Internal memory
UNLOCKCOM command type PLC register
Constant
November, 2018
24-169
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
The following are examples of the proper, improper, and incorrect usages of the LOCKCOM / UNLOCKCOM macro commands.
24
LOCKCOM / UNLOCKCOM example (proper use)
Background Macro
Element On Macro
Screen Cycle Macro
$50 = LOCKCOM(0,500) $51 = PUTCHARS($67, 3, 300) UNLOCKCOM(0)
$50 = LOCKCOM(0,500) $51 = GETCHARS($67, 3, 300) UNLOCKCOM(0)
$50 = LOCKCOM(0,500) $51 = PUTCHARS($67, 3, 300) UNLOCKCOM(0)
Suppose that communication commands are currently executed in three macros, when the Background macro executes LOCKCOM(0, 500) first, then COM 1 is locked. As a result, LOCKCOM(0, 500) in Element On Macro and Screen Cycle Macro will stop, which will not be executed until Background macro executes UNLOCKCOM(0) to unlock COM 1. This action can avoid data interference or receiving error.
LOCKCOM / UNLOCKCOM example (improper use)
Element On Macro
Screen Cycle Macro
$51 = GETCHARS($67, 3, 300)
$50 = LOCKCOM(0,500) $51 = PUTCHARS($67, 3, 300) UNLOCKCOM(0)
Suppose that communication commands are currently executed in two macros, when Screen Cycle Macro executes LOCKCOM(0, 500) first, COM 1 is locked. However, because Element On Macro is not locked by LOCKCOM, the GETCHARS command can still be executed, meaning it does not need to wait until the Screen Cycle Macro executes the UNLOCKCOM command. This will result in data interference and errors, so please avoid the above usage.
LOCKCOM / UNLOCKCOM example (Incorrect use)
Background Macro
Element On Macro
$50 = LOCKCOM(0, 500) $51 = PUTCHARS($67, 3, 300)
UNLOCKCOM(0)
Suppose you lock COM Port in the Background macro and transmits data through COM Port, but you cannot unlock COM Port in Element On Macro. This means that the two commands of locking COM Port and unlocking COM Port cannot be written separately.
24-170
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Example Var1 is the internal memory address, and Var2 and Var3 can only be constants.
Macro
24
Var1 can only be a constant.
November, 2018
24-171
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
STATIONCHK (check COM connection status)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
Return value
24
Var1
Failed
0
Succeeded
1
COM1
0
Var1 = STATIONCHK(Var2, Var3) (W)
Var2
COM2
1
W: Word
COM3
2
Var 3
Station No.
Description of action
Check COM connection status.
Note: this command reads internal memory parameters without increasing the HMI communication.
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is the internal memory address, and Var2 and Var3 are constants.
After executing this macro, if the communication between the HMI COM2 and the PLC of Station No. 128 is normal, the return value is $50 = 1; if the communication is abnormal, the return value is $50 = 0.
24-172
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
STATIONON (station On)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
COM1
0
Var1
COM2
1
COM3
2
STATIONON(Var1, Var2) (W)
Var2
Station No.
Description of action
W: Word
Enable Station No. Var2 of COM Var1 and the HMI can communicate with the station controller.
Note: the STATIONON macro and the [Disconnect after communication interrupt] of [Options] > [Communication Settings] cannot be used at the same time.
Macro
24
Variable Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
November, 2018
24-173
Macro Example
Var1 and Var2 are constants. Enable Station No. 1 on COM 1.
24
DOPSoft User Manual
STATIONON (station OFF)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
COM1
0
Var1
COM2
1
COM3
2
STATIONOFF(Var1, Var2) (W)
Var2
Station No.
Description of action
W: Word
Disable Station No. Var2 of COM Var1, and the HMI cannot communicate with the station controller.
Note: the STATIONOFF macro and the [Disconnect after communication interrupt] of [Options] > [Communication Settings] cannot be used at the same time.
24-174
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Variable Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Example Var1 and Var2 are constants. Disable Station No. 1 on COM 1.
Macro
Constant
24
IPON (activate IP address) Expression
Var1 = IPON(Var2, Var3, Var4, Var5, Var6)
Meaning of variable
Return value
Var1
Failed
0
Succeeded
1
Var2
IP1
Var3
IP2
Var4
IP3
Var5
IP4
Var6
Port
Description of action
Activate IP Var2, Var3, Var4, Var5, and Port Var6, and the HMI can communicate with the station controller.
Note W: Word
November, 2018
24-175
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
Note: 1. Using Var6 is not necessary. All ports under this IP will be activated when it is not in use. 2. The IPON macro and the [Disconnect after communication interupt] of [Options] > [Communication Settings] cannot
be used at the same time.
24
24-176
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3 Var4 Var5 Var6
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Macro
Constant
24
Example
Var1 is the internal memory address, and Var2 to Var6 are constants. Activate IP 192.168.0.1 Port: 1025.
If you are not using Var6, enter $50 = IPON(192, 168, 0, 1), and all ports of IP 192.168.0.1 will be activated after the macro operation.
November, 2018
24-177
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
IPOFF (disable IP address)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
Return value
24
Var1 Var2
Failed
0
Succeeded
1
IP1
Var1 = IPOFF(Var2,Var3,Var4,Var5,Var6) (W)
Var3 Var4 Var5
IP2
IP3
W: Word
IP4
Var6
Port
Description of action
Disable IP Var2, Var3, Var4, Var5, and Port Var6, and the HMI cannot communicate with the station controller.
Note:
1. Using Var6 is not necessary. All ports under this IP will be disabled when it is not in use.
2. The IPOFF macro and the [Disconnect after communication interrupt] of [Options] > [Communication Settings] cannot be used at the same time.
24-178
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3 Var4 Var5 Var6
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Macro
Constant
24
Example
Var1 is the internal memory address, and Var2 to Var6 are constants. Disable IP 192.168.0.1 Port: 1025.
If you are not using Var6, enter $50 = IPON(192, 168, 0, 1), and all ports in IP 192.168.0.1 will be disabled after the macro operation.
November, 2018
24-179
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
IPCHANGE (change the connection IP and communication port of the connection controller)
24
Expression
Var1 = IPCHANGE(Var2, Var3, Var4, Var5, Var6, Var7) (W)
Note: Link No. starts from 0.
Meaning of variable
Note
Return value
Var1
Failed
0
Succeeded
1
Var2
Link No
Var3
IP1
Var4
IP2
Var5 Var6
IP3
W: Word
IP4
Var7
Port
Description of action
Change the IP setting of PLC connection, Var3, Var4, Var5, Var6, and Port Var7, and the HMI can dynamically change the information of Link for the HMI to reconnect with another PLC.
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3 Var4 Var5 Var6 Var7
Internal memory
24-180
Type PLC register
Constant
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Example Var1 is the internal memory address, and Var2 to Var7 are constants.
Macro
24
Change the IP of PLC connection to 192.168.123.250 Port: 502.
November, 2018
24-181
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
Drawing
Drawing includes commmands such as RECTANGLE, LINE, POINT, CIRCLE, etc., which allow
24
you to draw figures. The commands are described in detail below.
RECTANGLE (rectangle) Expression
RECTANGLE(Var1)(W)
Figure 24.3.9.1 Drawing
Meaning of variable
Var1
Upper-left X-coordinate
Var1+ 1
Upper-left Y-coordinate
Var1+ 2
Rectangle width
Var1+ 3
Rectangle height
Var1+ 4
Rectangle color
Description of action
Draw a rectangle with continuous addresses.
Note W: Word
Variable Var1
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Var1 is the internal memory address.
Example
24-182
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Example
Macro
24
$50 $51 $52 $53 $54
November, 2018
24-183
Macro LINE (line) Expression
24
LINE(Var1) (W)
DOPSoft User Manual
Meaning of variable
Var1
X-coordinate of starting point
Var1+ 1
Y-coordinate of starting point
Var1+ 2
X-coordinate of end point
Var1+ 3
Y-coordinate of end point
Var1+ 4
Line width
Var1 + 5
Line color
Description of action
Draw a line with continuous addresses.
Note W: Word
Variable Var1
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Var1 is the internal memory address.
Example
24-184
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Example
Macro
24
$50 $51 $52 $53 $54 $55
POINT (point) Expression
POINT(Var1) (W)
Meaning of variable
Var1
X-coordinate
Var1+ 1
Ycoordinate
Var1+ 2
Point color
Description of action
Draw a point with continuous addresses.
Note W: Word
Variable Var1
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
November, 2018
24-185
Macro
Var1 is the internal memory address.
Example
24
DOPSoft User Manual
Drawn point 24-186
$50 $51 $52
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual CIRCLE (circle) Expression
CIRCLE(Var1) (W)
Meaning of variable
Var1
X-coordinate at the center of a circle
Var1+ 1
Y-coordinate at the center of a circle
Var1+ 2
Circle length
Var1+ 3
Circle width
Var1+ 4
Circle color
Description of action
Draw a circle with continuous addresses.
Note W: Word
Variable Var1
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Var1 is the internal memory address.
Example
Macro
24
November, 2018
24-187
Macro
24
Example
DOPSoft User Manual
$50 $51 $52 $53 $54
24-188
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
File Access
File Access includes FileSlotRead, FileSlotWrite, FileSlotRemove, FileSlotGetLength, FileSlotExport, FileSlotImport and other FileSlot related instructions. The commands are described in detail below.
Macro
24
24.3.10.1 File Access
FileSlotRead (read the file)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
Return value
Var1
Failed
0
Succeeded
1
Var2
FileSlot ID
Var1 = FileSlotRead (Var2, Var3, Var4, Var5) (W)
Var3 Var4
Destination W: Word
FileSlot content start address (DW)
Var5
Word data length
Description of action
Read FileSlot contents of Var2 for Var5 Word data starting from Var4 to Var3 destination address and return the results to Var1.
Note: if the specified FileSlot file does not exist yet, use the FileSlotWrite command to create the file.
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3 Var4 Var5
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
November, 2018
24-189
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
FileSlotWrite (write the file)
Expression
24
Var1 = FileSlotWrite (Var2, Var3, Var4, Var5) (W)
Meaning of variable
Note
Return value
Var1
Failed
0
Succeeded
1
Var2
FileSlot ID
Var3 Var4
Source W: Word
FileSlot content start address (DW)
Var5
Word data length
Description of action
Read Var5 Word data starting from Var3, write in Var2 FileSlot from Var4 start address, and return the results to Var1.
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3 Var4 Var5
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
24-190
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Example Use FileSlotWrite to create a file before using FileSlotRead to read data. The procedures are
introduced below. 1. Go to [Options] > [File Management] to set FileSlot.
Macro
24
2. Create two Momentary buttons and write On macros.
November, 2018
24-191
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
Example
3. After compiling the screen and downloading it to the HMI, edit 10 Word files from $1000 as the start address. Set $101 as 1, $102 as 0, and $104 as 10. By triggering FileSlotWrite, data of $1,000 - $1009 will be written to the FileSlot ID 1 starting from address 0.
24
4. Reset the data of $1000 - $1009 to zero. Set $104 as 8 and by triggering FileSlotRead, the 8 Word data starting from the 0th address of the FileSlot ID 1 will be written in $1000 to $1007.
24-192
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
FileSlotRemove (remove the file)
Expression Var1 = FileSlotRemove (Var2) (W)
Meaning of variable
Note
Return value
Var1
Failed
0
Var2
Succeeded
1
FileSlot ID
W: Word
Description of action
Remove FileSlot of Var2 and return the result to Var1.
24
Variable Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example
Var1 is the internal memory address and Var2 is a constant. Remove FileSlot ID 1 (Var2) and put the return value in $100 (Var1).
FileSlotGetLength (read the file length)
Expression
Var1 = FileSlotGetLength (Var2, Var3) (W)
Note: unit of read length is Byte.
Meaning of variable
Return value
Var1
Failed
0
Succeeded
1
Var2
FileSlot ID
Var3
FileSlot length return value(DW)
Description of action
Store the length of the Var2 FileSlot to Var3 and return the result to Var1.
Note W: Word
November, 2018
24-193
Macro
Variable
Var1
24
Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
DOPSoft User Manual Constant
Example
Var1 and Var3 are internal memory addresses, and Var2 is a constant. Get the length of FileSlot ID 1 (Var2) and save it to $106, and put the return value in $100 (Var1). If the FileSlot length is 10 words, the value returned to $106 is 20 (Byte).
FileSlotExport (export the file)
Expression
Var1 = FileSlotExport (Var2, Var3, Var4, Var5) (W)
Meaning of variable
Return value
Var1
Failed
0
Succeeded
1
Var2
FileSlot ID
Var3
File export device
USB Disk SD Card
2 3
Var4
Name of the file exported
Var5
Name length of the file exported
Description of action
Export the Var2 FileSlot to the external storage device Var3, name the file as Var4, and return the result to Var1.
Note W: Word
24-194
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3 Var4 Var5
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
24
Example
Var1, Var4, and Var5 are internal memory addresses, and Var2 and Var3 are constants. Export FileSlot ID 1 (Var2) to USB Disk (Var3), which name length of the file is 2 (Var5) and file name is Slot (Var4), and put the return value in $100 (Var1).
FileSlotImport (import the file)
Expression
Var1 = FileSlotImport (Var2, Var3, Var4, Var5) (W)
Meaning of variable
Return value
Var1
Failed
0
Succeeded
1
Var2
FileSlot ID
Var3
File import device
USB Disk SD Card
2 3
Var4
Name of the file imported
Var5
Name length of the file imported
Description of action
Import the file named Var4 in the external storage device Var3 to the Var2 FileSlot and send the return value to Var1.
November, 2018
Note W: Word
24-195
Macro
24
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3 Var4 Var5
Internal memory
Type PLC register
DOPSoft User Manual
Constant
Example
Var1, Var4, and Var5 are internal memory addresses, and Var2 and Var3 are constants. Import the file named Slot (Var4) with the length of 2 (Var5) in USB Disk (Var3) to the FileSlot ID 1 (Var2), and put the return value in $100 (Var1).
24-196
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
Others
Others include Time Tick, GETLASTERROR, Comment, Delay, GETSYSTEMTIME, SETSYSTEMTIME, EXPORT, EXRCP, IMRCP, EXENRCP, IMENRCP, EXHISTORY, EXALARM, DISKFORMAT, BMPCAPTURE, PLCDOWNLOAD, GetCircleCenter, and other commands. The commands are described in detail below.
24
Figure 24.3.11.1 Others
November, 2018
24-197
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
Time Tick (get the time from the start of the system up to now)
Expression
24
Var1 = TIMETICK (W) Var1 = TIMETICK (DW)
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1
Elapsed time during HMI startup
Description of action
Get the time from the start of the system up to now and put it in Var1 (unit: ms).
W: Word DW: Double Word
Variable Var1
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is the internal memory address. Put elapsed time during the HMI startup in $50.
24-198
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
GETLASTERROR (get error value of previous command)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
Error code of previous macro
1: Succeeded
Var1 = GETLASTERROR (W) Var1 = GETLASTERROR (DW) Var1 = GETLASTERROR (Signed W) Var1 = GETLASTERROR (Signed DW)
Var1
Negative value: error
(See Section 24.4 Macro error codes for the meaning of negative value.)
Description of action
W: Word DW: Double Word Signed: signed number
Get the error value of the previous macro command and put the result in Var1.
Note: this command must follow a macro command with an error in order to obtain its error value.
24
Variable Var1
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example
Var1 is the internal memory address. Get the result of the error value of the previous macro command and put it in $50.
November, 2018
24-199
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
COMMENT (comments) Expression
24 #Var1 (W)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Contents of command
Description of action
Comment Var1.
Note W: Word
Variable Var1
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example
Add # before the command to make a comment on the command. # can also be used for describing the purpose of a macro.
24-200
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
Delay (delay)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1
Delay time
Delay(Var1) (W)
Description of action
Delay the time of Var1 before executing commands of the next line. The unit is ms.
W: Word
Note: 1. Due to the multitasking of the HMI, a system delay may occur by default. If you set this Delay command, the delay time
may increase because of the busy operations of the system, and the command will not be executed in advance. 2. Excessive Delay setting will result in slow response of the HMI. 3. When the Delay command is executed, the HMI will suspend all actions until the Delay time is over.
24
Variable Var1
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is a constant and set the Delay time to 500 ms.
November, 2018
24-201
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
GETSYSTEMTIME (get system time)
Expression
24
Var1 = GETSYSTEMTIME (W)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Year
Var1 + 1
Month
Var1 + 2
Day
Var1 + 3
Week
Var1 + 4
Hour
Var1 + 5
Minute
Var1 + 6
Second
Description of action
Get the system time from Var1 to Var7 for 7 consecutive Words address.
Note W: Word
Variable Var1
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
24-202
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Example Var1 is the internal memory address. Put the current system time in $50 to $56.
Macro
24
Year
$50
Month
$51
Day
$52
Week
$53
Hour
$54
Minute
$55
Second
$56
November, 2018
24-203
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
SETSYSTEMTIME (set system time)
24
Expression
Var1 = SETSYSTEMTIME (W)
Meaning of variable
Var1
Year
Var1 + 1
Month
Var1 + 2
Day
Var1 + 3
Week
Var1 + 4
Hour
Var1 + 5
Minute
Var1 + 6
Second
Description of action
Set the system time from Var1 to Var7 for 7 consecutive Words address.
Note W: Word
Variable Var1
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
24-204
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Example Var1 is the internal memory address. Set the current system time and put it in $50 to $56.
Macro
24
Year
$50
Month
$51
Day
$52
Week
$53
Hour
$54
Minute
$55
Second
$56
November, 2018
24-205
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
GETHISTORY (get history data)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1
Store Data Length
24
Var2 Var3 Var4
History Buffer ID
Read starting address for sampling
Read the number of record accessing point
Var1 = GETHISTORY(Var2, Var3, Var4, Var5, Var6) (W)
Var5
Data storage address
W: Word
Data
0
Var6 Data Type
Time
1
Data and time 2
Description of action
Get history data.
Note: Double Word is recommended to be used for Var1, Var3, and Var4. If the continuous address of Word is used, data may be overwritten and the result may be affected.
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3 Var4 Var5 Var6
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example
Var1 and Var5 are internal memory addresses, and Var2, Var3, Var4, and Var6 are constants. Set the History Buffer ID as 1 (Var2), sample from the fifth data (Var2) to the tenth data (Var3), put the data type (including time and data) set as 2 (Var6) in the continuous address (Var5) of $100, and finally put the obtained data length in $50 (Var1).
24-206
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Example Set the Read Address $1000 as the history buffer sampling data address.
Macro
24
Edit the Screen Cycle Macro to add up the history data of $1000. Create a Momentary button, edit On macro, and set the GETHISTORY command as follows
November, 2018
24-207
Macro Example
Create a Numeric Entry element and set the Write Address as $50.
24
DOPSoft User Manual
Create Numeric Entry elements of $100 to $134, as shown below.
24-208
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Example Create a Historical Trend Graph and enable it.
Macro
24
November, 2018
24-209
Macro Example
After compiling the screen, the execution result is as follows:
24
Time $50
DOPSoft User Manual History data
EXPORT (export data)
Expression EXPORT(Var1) (W)
Meaning of variable
SD Card
0
Var1 Data export device USB Disk
1
Printer
2
Description of action
Export and print historical and alarm data to external storage device Var1.
Note W: Word
Variable Var1
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is a constant. Export data to the USB Disk.
24-210
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
EXRCP16 / EXRCP32 (export 16-bit Recipe / export 32-bit Recipe)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
Return value
Var1
Failed
0
Succeeded
1
Var1 = EXRCP16(Var2, Var3) (W) Var1 = EXRCP32(Var2, Var3) (W)
Var2 Var3
File name of the exported 16-bit Recipe / 32-bit Recipe
Recipe export USB Disk
2
storage device SD Card
3
W: Word
Description of action
Export the 16-bit Recipe / 32-bit Recipe and store in Var3, and return the result to Var1.
Note: the exported 16-bit and 32-bit Recipe files will be stored in the root directory of the external storage device.
24
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example
The following example will show the export command of 16-bit Recipe which is the same as that of 32-bit Recipe.
Export 16-bit Recipe data to the USB Disk, and the file name is Delta. The steps are as follows: 1. Go to [Options] > [Recipe] and set the recipe data.
2. Create a Momentary button ($5.0) and a Numeric Entry element ($50).
3. Go to the Momentary button and write On macro as follows. Put the "Delta" string in $200 and store the data in the USB Disk by exporting 16-bit Recipe, and the file name is Delta.
November, 2018
24-211
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
Example 4. Trigger the $5.0 button after compiling the screen and downloading the recipe data to the HMI, and $50
will show 1 representing successful action and export the 16-bit Recipe data to the USB Disk.
24
IMRCP16 / IMRCP32 (import 16-bit Recipe / Import 32-bit Recipe)
Expression
Var1 = IMRCP16(Var2, Var3) (W) Var1 = IMRCP32(Var2, Var3) (W)
Meaning of variable
Return value
Var1
Failed
0
Succeeded
1
Var2
File name of the imported 16-bit Recipe / 32-bit Recipe
Var3
Recipe import storage device
USB Disk SD Card
2 3
Description of action
Import the 16-bit Recipe / 32-bit Recipe from Var3 to the HMI, and return the result to Var1.
Note W: Word
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
24-212
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
Example
The following example will show the import command of 16-bit Recipe which is the same as that of 32-bit Recipe.
Import 16-bit Recipe data from the USB Disk to the HMI, and the file name is HMI. The steps are as follows:
1. Refer to the figure below, use Excel to make a recipe file called HMI.csv and store it to the USB Disk.
24
2. Create a Momentary button ($5.0), a Numeric Entry element ($50), and recipe addresses RCP0 to RCP11. This is the default recipe content of the software.
3. Go to the Momentary button and write On macro as follows. Put the "HMI" string in $200 and import 16-bit Recipe data from the USB Disk.
4. Trigger the $5.0 button after compiling the screen and downloading the recipe data to the HMI, then $50 will show 1 representing successful action, and the 16-bit Recipe data will be imported to the HMI. The recipe data of the HMI will be changed to the HMI recipe file.
November, 2018
24-213
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
EXENRCP (export enhanced recipe)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
Return value
24
Var1
Var1 = EXENRCP(Var2, Var3) (W)
Var2
Var3
Failed
0
Succeeded
1
File name of the exported
enhanced recipe
W: Word
Recipe export
USB Disk 2
storage device
SD Card 3
Description of action
Export the enhanced recipe and store it in Var3, and return the result to Var1.
Note: the exported enhanced recipe file will be stored in the root directory of the external storage device.
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
24-214
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
Example
Export the enhanced recipe data to the USB Disk, and the file name is ABC. The steps are as follows: 1. Go to [Options] > [Enhanced recipe] and set the recipe data.
24
2. Create a Momentary button ($5.0) and a Numeric Entry element ($50).
3. Go to the Momentary button to write On macro as follows. Put the "ABC" string in $200 and store the data in the USB Disk by exporting the enhanced recipe, and the file name is ABC.
4. Trigger the $5.0 button after compiling the screen and downloading the recipe data to the HMI, then $50 will show 1 representing successful action and export the enhanced recipe data to the USB Disk.
November, 2018
24-215
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
24
Example
For each Data Format and the corresponding defined value, refer to the following table.
Data Format
DOPSoft defined value
BCD
0
Signed Decimal
1
Unsign Decimal
2
Hexdecimal
3
Binary
4
Floating
5
Char
8
Each cell of the exported CSV file is explained as follows:
Excel cell A-1 A-2 B-2 C-2 A-3 B-3 C-3 D-3 A-4 B-4 C-4 D-4 A-5 B-5 C-5 D-5
Definition Version Enhanced recipe group name Column number Group number Data Format of Column 1 Data Length of Column 1 Integer Digits of Column 1 Fractional (Digits) of Column 1 Data Format of Column 2 Data Length of Column 2 Integer Digits of Column 2 Fractional (Digits) of Column 2 Data Format of Column 3 Data Length of Column 3 Integer Digits of Column 3 Fractional (Digits) of Column 3
Content ENRCP-2.0
Delta 3 3
2 (Unsigned Decimal) 1 (Word) 0 0
5 (Floating) 2 (Word) 3 2 8 (Char) 5 (Word) 0 0
24-216
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
IMENRCP (import enhanced recipe)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Return value
Var1
Failed
0
Succeeded
1
Var1 = IMENRCP(Var2, Var3) (W)
Var2 Var3
File name of the imported enhanced recipe
Recipe import storage device
USB Disk 2
SD Card
3
Description of action
Import the enhanced recipe from Var3 to the HMI and return the result to Var1.
Note W: Word
24
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example
Import the enhanced recipe from the USB Disk to the HMI, and the file name is DEF. The steps are as follows:
1. Refer to the figure below, use Excel to make a recipe file called DEF.csv and store it to the USB Disk.
2. Create a Momentary button ($5.0), a Numeric Entry element ($50), and recipe addresses RCP0 to RCP11.
November, 2018
24-217
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
Example
3. Go to the Momentary button to write On macro as follows. Put the "DEF" string in $100 and import the enhanced recipe from the USB Disk.
24
4. Trigger the $5.0 button after compiling the screen and downloading the recipe data to the HMI, then $50 will show 1 representing the successful action, and the enhanced recipe data will be imported to the HMI. The recipe data of the HMI will be changed to the DEF recipe file.
24-218
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
EXHISTORY (export history data)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
Return value
Var1
Failed
0
Succeeded
1
Var2
History Buffer ID
Var1 = EXHISTORY(Var2, Var3, Var4) Var3
Exported file name
Var4
External
USB Disk
storage device SD Card
2 3
Description of action
Export history data to an external storage device.
Note:
1. The Export CSV File in the Buffer Properties setting must be checked. If not, execution of this macro will only export .dat file.
2. When you input 0 to the buffer number, it means to export all history buffers. If 3 history buffers are opened, 3 files will be exported after execution. The file names are "Export file name 1.csv", "Export file name 2.csv," and "Export file name 3.csv" respectively. When you input a non-0 number, it represents that the specified number of history buffers will be exported. After execution, one file will be exported with the name of "Export file name.csv"
3. File extension ".csv" will be added automatically after exporting. The file name cannot contain characters such as \, /, :, *, ?, ", <, >, and |. x00 indicates the end of the file name string.
24
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3 Var4
Internal memory
Type PLC register
String
Constant
November, 2018
24-219
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
Example
24
Step 1: set three history buffers as follows:
1. For History data buffer 1, set the Address to $1000, Read Length (Word) to 10, and check Export CSV File.
24-220
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
Example
2. For History data buffer 2, set the Address to $1100, Read Length (Word) to 5, and check Export CSV
File.
24
November, 2018
24-221
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
Example 3. For History data buffer 3, set the Address to $1200, Read Length (Word) to 1, and check Export CSV
File.
24
24-222
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Example Step 2: add up history data in the Clock Macro.
Macro
24
Step 3: create a Character Entry element on the screen with the address as $580 and string length as 5. File name
Step 4: create 3 Numeric Entry elements on the screen with the addresses of $500, $591, and $501.
Return value
Buffer ID
External storage device
Step 5: create a Maintained button element on the screen with the address of $100.0, and add the On macro.
November, 2018
24-223
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
Example
24
Macro commands description: Line 1: clear $510 - $539. Line 2: convert the unit of $580 (file name string) from byte to word. Line 3: move the system time to $200 - $206 (year, month, day, week, hour, minute, second). Line 4: add "_ year, month, day" and "_History" to "three characters of device name" to form a continuous
string and assign it to the $510 start address. Line 6: export the history data to the specified external device and file name.
Step 6: download the editing screen to the HMI and insert the USB Disk into the HMI.
Step 7: enter the device name as "ABC" on the screen, and select "2" to use the USB Disk for the external storage device. Set the buffer ID as 0 (export all) and press the EXHISTORY button. The return value becomes 1 after the action.
Step 8: after the USB Disk is removed, the files exported to the USB Disk are as follows:
EXALARM (export alarm data)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
Return value
Var1
Failed
0
Succeeded
1
Var1 = EXALARM(Var2, Var3)
Var2
Exported file name
Var3
External storage device
USB Disk SD Card
2 3
Description of action
Export alarm data to external storage devices.
Note:
1. Export CSV File must be checked in the alarm setting.
2. File extension ".csv" will be added automatically after exporting. The file name cannot contain characters such as \, /, :, *, ?, ", <, >, and |. x00 indicates the end of the file name string.
24-224
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
String
Constant
24
Example The steps are as follows: 1. The alarm settings are as follows. Set the Address as $6666 and set the Export CSV File to Yes.
2. Create Maintained elements that trigger alarm bits on the screen to trigger alarms. Set the addresses as $6666.0, $6666.1, $6666.2, $6666.3, and $6666.4 in sequence.
3. Create an Alarm History Table element on the screen to display the current history alarm.
4. Create a Character Entry element on the screen with the address as $580 and string length of 5. File name
November, 2018
24-225
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
Example 5. Create 2 Numeric Entry elements on the screen with the addresses as $500 and $591.
24
Return value
External storage device
6. Create a Maintained button element on the screen with the address as $100.1, and add the On macro.
The macro commands are described as follows: Line 1: clear $510 - $539. Line 2: convert the unit of $580 (device name string) from byte to word. Line 3: move the system time to $200 - $206 (year, month, day, week, hour, minute, second). Line 4: add "_ year, month, day" and "_Alarm" to "three characters of device name" to form a continuous
string and assign to the $510 start address. Line 6: export the history alarm to the specified external device and file name.
7. Download the editing screen to the HMI and insert the USB Disk into the HMI. 8. Trigger the alarm and enter the device name as "AAA" on the screen, and select "2" to use the USB
Disk for the external storage device.
24-226
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Example 9. Press the EXALARM Macro button and the return value becomes 1 after the action.
Macro
24
10. After the USB Disk is removed, the file exported to the USB Disk is as follows:
EXALARMGROUP (export group data specified by alarm)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
Return value
Var1
Failed
0
Succeeded
1
Var2
Alarm group number
Var1 = EXALARMGROUP(Var2, Var3
Exported file name
Var3,Var4)
Var4
External storage device
USB Disk SD Card
2 3
Description of action
Export the alarm data to the external storage device in accordance with the specified group.
Note:
1. Export CSV File must be checked in the alarm settings.
2. File extension of "- group number" and ".csv " will be added automatically after exporting. The file name cannot contain characters such as \, /, :, *, ?, ", <, >, and |. x00 indicates the end of the file name string.
November, 2018
24-227
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
24
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3 Var4
Internal memory
Type PLC register
String
Constant
Example
The steps are as follows: 1. The alarm settings are as follows. Set the Address to $1000 and set the Export CSV File to Yes.
Set Alarms 1 - 3 as Group 1, Alarms 4 - 6 as Group 2, and Alarms 7 - 9 as Group 3.
24-228
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
Example 2. Create Maintained elements that trigger alarm bits on the screen to trigger alarms. Set the Write
addresses as $1000.0, $1000.1, $1000.2 to $1000.9 in sequence.
3. Create an Alarm History Table element on the screen to display the current history alarm and set the group number as variable and the read address as $302.
24
November, 2018
24-229
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
Example
4. Create a Character Display element on the screen with the address as $304 and the string length as 20; create 2 Numeric Entry elements with the addresses as $302 and $301; create a ComboBox with the address as $303. The total number of State is 2, the State Index of State 1 is 3, the text is SD, the State Index of State 2 is 2, and the text is USB.
24
5. Create a Maintained button element on the screen with the address as $300.0, and add the On macro.
The macro commands are described as follows: Line 1: record the system time to $200 - $206 (year, month, day, week, hour, minute, second). Line 2: add "_ year, month, day, hour, minute, second" and "_Group" to "Alarm" to form a continuous string
and assign to the $304 start address as file name. Line 3: export history alarm to the specified external device according to the specified group number and file
name. 6. Download the editing screen to the HMI and insert the USB Disk into the HMI. 7. Trigger Alarm 1 to Alarm 10, enter group number "1" on the screen, and select USB for the external
storage device.
24-230
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Example
Macro
24
8. Press the EXALARMGROUP button and the file name will be displayed, and the return value will become 1 after the action.
9. Then, set group numbers as 2 and 3 as in Step 8, and press the button EXALARMGROUP respectively.
10. After the USB Disk is removed, the files exported to the USB Disk are as follows:
November, 2018
24-231
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
DISKFORMAT (disk format)
Expression
24
Var1 = DISKFORMAT(Var2) (W)
Meaning of variable
Return value
Var1
Failed
0
Succeeded
1
Var2
External storage device
USB Disk SD Card
1 2
Description of action
Select Var2 device to be formatted and return the result value to Var1.
Note W: Word
Variable
Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example
Var1 is the internal memory address and Var2 is a constant. Format the USB Disk and put the return value in $50.
24-232
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
BMPCAPTURE (screen capture)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
Return value
Var1
Failed
0
Succeeded
1
Var1 = BMPCAPTURE(Var2) (W)
Var2
External storage device
USB Disk SD Card
1 W: Word 2
Description of action
Store the captured screen file in the Var2 device and return the result value to Var1.
Note:
1. All formats of the exported files are .BMP.
2. The exported path is the folder with the current date in the root directory of the external storage device, and the current screen file is saved in hour, minute and second.
24
Variable
Var1 Var2
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example
Var1 is the internal memory address and Var2 is a constant. Save the captured screen to the USB Disk and put the return value in $50.
November, 2018
24-233
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
PLCDOWNLOAD (PLC file download)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Return value
24
Var1
Failed Succeeded
0
1
COM1
0
Var2
COM Port
COM2
1
COM3
2
Var1 = PLCDOWNLOAD(Var2, Var3, Var4, Var5, Var6) (W)
Var3 Var4
PLC station number
DELTA PLC file name (i.e. delta.dvp, delta.isp)
Var5
External storage device
USB Disk SD Card
1 2
Var6
PLC password
Description of action
Download PLC file to PLC.
Note: 1. Only support Delta PLC. 2. Support .dvp and .isp file formats. 3. Please use Character Entry elements for Var6 password.
Note W: Word
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3 Var4 Var5 Var6
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
24-234
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
Example Store the DVP or ISP file to be downloaded to the USB Disk or SD Card and put the return value in $50.
24
Var4 is the PLC file name. First, the name string of the file to be downloaded must be put in a register address with the FILLASC command provided by the software. Then fill in the register address $100 with Var4 of PLCDOWNLOAD.
The PLC password of Var6 must be set by going to [System Security] > [Password Setting] of the WPL and ISP software. After the setting is finished, enter the password with the Character Entry element of the HMI, then the PLC files can be downloaded to the PLC.
November, 2018
24-235
Macro WPL password setting.
24
Example
DOPSoft User Manual
24-236
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual ISP password setting.
Example
Macro
24
November, 2018
24-237
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
OPENSCREEN
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
24 OPENSCREEN(Var1) (W)
Var1
Screen number
Description of action
W: Word
Open the screen number specified by Var1.
Note: this macro does not support Screen Cycle Macro, Screen Open Macro, and Screen Close Macro.
Variable Var1
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is the internal memory address. When $999 = 2, the macro switches the screen to Screen 2.
24-238
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
CLOSESUBSCREEN
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
Var1
Subscreen number
CLOSESUBSCREEN(Var1) (W)
Description of action
W: Word
Close the subscreen number specified by Var1.
Note: this macro does not support Screen Cycle Macro, Screen Open Macro, and Screen Close Macro.
24
Variable Var1
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
Example Var1 is the internal memory address. When $999 = 2, the macro closes Subscreen No. 2.
November, 2018
24-239
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
GetCircleCenter (calculate coordinates of the center of a circle)
Expression
Meaning of variable
Note
24
Var1
Return value
Failed
0
Succeeded
1
Var1 = GetCircleCenter (Var2, "Var3)
Var2 Var3
Input coordinates of the 3 points (Note 1)
Center coordinates after calculation (Note 2)
DW: Double Word
Description of action
Enter the calculated coordinates of 3 points to calculate the center coordinates. (Note 3)
Note: 1. Input coordinates of the 3 points: Set the 3 points as P1(x1, y1), P2(x2, y2), and P3(x3, y3), and the length of each point is Signed DW. If Var2 is $100: Save LOW WORD of x1 in $100, HIGH WORD in $101 Save LOW WORD of y1 in $102, HIGH WORD in $103 Save LOW WORD of x2 in $104, HIGH WORD in $105 Save LOW WORD of y2 in $106, HIGH WORD in $107 Save LOW WORD of x3 in $108, HIGH WORD in $109 Save LOW WORD of y3 in $110, HIGH WORD in $111
2. Center coordinates after calculation: Set the center coordinates as P4(x4, y4), and the length of each point is Signed DW. If Var 3 is $200: Save LOW WORD of x4 in $200, HIGH WORD in $201 Save LOW WORD of y4 in $202, HIGH WORD in $203
3. Formulas: x = x/ y = y/ where = 2(xa - xb) * (yc - yb) - 2(ya - yb) * (xc - xb) x = (yc - yb) * (xa� + ya� - xb� - yb�) - (ya - yb) * (xc� + yc� - xb� - yb�) y = (xa - xb) * (xc� + yc� - xb� - yb�) - (xc - xb) * (xa� + ya� - xb� - yb�)
Variable
Var1 Var2 Var3
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
24-240
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Example $1 = GetCircleCenter($100, $200)
Example
Macro
24
The steps are as follows: 1. Create a Numeric Display element as $1 and the Data Type is Word. 2. Create Numeric Entry elements of $100, $102, $104, $106, $108, and $110, and the Data Type is
Double Word. Enter the following values: $100 = 0 $102 = 0 $104 = 100 $106 = 100 $108 = 0 $110 = 100 3. Create Numeric Display elements of $200 and $202, and the Data Type is Double Word. After executing the macro, the screen is as follows:
$1
$100 (X1) $102 (Y1) $104 (X2) $106 (Y2) $108 (X3) $110 (Y4)
$200 (X4) $202 (Y4)
November, 2018
24-241
Macro VAR Expression
24 VAR Var1 (W)
DOPSoft User Manual
Meaning of variable
Var1
Variable Name
Description of action Specify a name as a global variable.
Note W: Word
Variable Var1
Internal memory
Type PLC register
String
Constant
Example Var1 is a word string. Declare DELTA as a variable.
Set the value of the variable "delta" as 3, then move the value to $100, and execute $100 = 3. $100
24-242
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
Macro error codes
Error codes will be listed in the output field for easier troubleshooting while compiling the macros. If you miss out a command, the software will also prompt error messages to notify syntax errors. Error message during editing
24
Code -100 -101 -102
-103
-104 -105 -106 -107
Code name
Cause of error
LABEL cannot be found
This error message indicates that the LABEL requested by GOTO cannot be found.
Recursion occurred
This error message indicates the occurrence of recursion which mostly occurs in submacros. The reason is that if a submacro calls itself, whether directly or indirectly, it is the occurrence of recursion. Technically, submacros cannot be recursively edited, but if this is unavoidable, use GOTO or For (infinite loop) instead.
More than 10 nested FOR are used
This error message indicates that more than 10 nested FOR commands have been used. The purpose is to prevent excessive use of nested FOR and insufficient memories. You can use GOTO or IF when necessary.
Submacro does not exist
This error message indicates that the submacro called does not exist. For example, a line of CALL 5 means to CALL Submacro 5, but you have not edited Submacro 5. In order to avoid unpredictable consequences caused by these mistakes (i.e. input error or you forgot to edit the corresponding submacro), this editing error message will pop up to remind you.
The number of NEXT is less than the number of
FOR
This error message indicates that the number of NEXT operand does not match the number of FOR operand. Because FOR and NEXT need to be used in pairs, if a NEXT is missing, an error will occur while the program is running.
The number of FOR is less than the number of
NEXT
This error message indicates that the number of NEXT operand does not match the number of FOR operand. Because FOR and NEXT need to be used in pairs, if there is one extra NEXT, an error will occur while the program is running.
Repeated LABEL
This error message indicates a LABEL is set repeatedly in the same macro. This means GOTO will generate two different results. In order to avoid unpredictable mistakes, this editing error message will pop up to remind you.
There is RET in macro
This error message indicates the use of RET in a macro. Since RET is designed for the submacro to return to the next command called, which means the program is not finished. END should be used to end a program if it is necessary to mark the end of a macro.
November, 2018
24-243
Macro
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro error messages in the HMI
The GETLASTERROR macro command can be used to read an error message on the HMI, but
if a new correct command is executed before the error message is read, the error message will
24
be changed. The execution of a macro will not change the error messages of other macros.
Code -10
Code name GOTO error
Cause of error There is a GOTO error in the macro.
This error message indicates that you called too many submacros,
-11
Stack overflow
so the stacks are not enough as a result of many different macros executing at the same time. This is a protection to avoid memory
insufficiency.
This is a call submacro error. Since the command of CALL can call
-12
Empty submacro
the submacro ID represented by the value in the internal memory of CALL, if you enter the value of this memory address while there is
no corresponding submacro to call, this error message occurs.
-13
Data read error
Data read error may be an error of the internal memory data, but it mostly represents data read error of the controller.
-14
Data write error
Data write error may be an error of the internal memory data, but it mostly represents data write error of the controller.
-15
Divisor is 0
The divisor is 0 during the division or remainder operation.
-16
Data process error with BCD format
An error occured while executing the BCD macro command.
-17
Data process error while converting ASCII to HEX
An error occured while executing the TOHEX macro.
-18
NEXT OFFSET processing error
The macro data error results in errors while executing the NEXT macro command.
-19
Character command error
An error occured while executing FILLASC.
-20
Data process error with BIN format
An error occured while executing the BIN command.
-21
Submacro data error The macro data error results in errors while calling submacros.
-22
FOR loop has OFFSET The macro data error results in errors while executing the FOR
error
macro command.
-23
INITIAL ERROR
An error occured while executing the INICOM macro command.
-24
Memory allocation error The HMI memory is insufficient to execute macros.
-25
COM Port error
An error occured in COM Port resulting in execution failure of the COM Port related communication macros.
-26
Print Port error
Print Port selection error when printing.
-27
Read value error
An error occured when macros read parameter data that are out of range.
-28
IF ELSE ENDIF error
An error occured while executing the IF ELSE ENDIF macro command.
-29
Pen width setting error An error occured while setting the pen width for the drawing macro.
-30
History data error
An error occured while executing the GETHISTORY macro.
-31
Export option error
An error occured while executing the EXPORT macro.
An error occured in the external or internal disk resulting in
-32
Disk reading error
execution error in the associated macros (EXPORT,
DISKFORMAT...).
24-244
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Macro
Code -33 -34 -35 -36 -37 -38 -39
Code name Print error Stack overflow in IF ELSE ENDIF
Password error
Password lock error
ID code identification error
Syntax error Connection failure /
no response
Cause of error
An error occured while the macro is executing printing.
An error occurred due to stack overflow when the IF ELSE ENDIF macro command is executing.
Password confirmation is required when executing the macro, and the password entered is incorrect.
Password confirmation is required when executing the macro, and you have reached the password attempt limit.
ID password confirmation is required when executing the macro, and the ID password entered is incorrect.
Syntax error occured after downloading the PLC program.
The connection fails or does not respond when the PLC program is downloaded.
24
PLC related file error description, including file formats of DVP and ISP.
Code -40
-41
-42 -43 -44 -45 -46 -47
-48 -49 -50
Code name This file name is not
supported This version is not
supported
File open error
File Handle error File read error
File Seek error
File write error
File removal error
File Rename error
File length error File data error
Cause of error
The file name to be opened by the macro execution is not supported.
The file version to be opened by the macro execution is not supported. There is an action to open file when the macro is executed, and the action failed. Index error in the file opened by the macro. The file opened by the macro execution cannot be read properly. The content of the file opened by the macro execution cannot be moved properly. The file opened by the macro execution cannot be written properly. There is an action to remove file when the macro is executed, and the action failed. There is an action to rename the file when the macro is executed, and the action failed. A file length error is found when the macro is executed. A file data error is found when the macro is executed.
November, 2018
24-245
Macro
24
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
DOPSoft User Manual
24-246
November, 2018
Multi-language
This chapter illustrates how to use the multi-language function. Test
25.1 Multi-language setup ������������������������������������������������������������������������ 25-2
November, 2018
25-1
Multi-language
DOPSoft User Manual
25.1 Multi-language setup
25
The Multi-language function supports all languages and you can select up to 32 languages at the same time.The Multi-language setup example is described below.
Go to [Options] > [Configuration] > [Multi-language] to set the Multi-language parameters.
Figure 25.1.1 Multi-language setup interface
25-2
November, 2018
Multi-language
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 25.1.1 Multi-language setup
Multi-language setup Multi-language settings allow users to add, modify, and delete the language settings.
[Language 1] is the default setting, which you can change its Language Name and Detail as desired.
25
Add
You can click
to add a new language, as shown in the figure below.
To delete a language, select the language to be deleted and click selected language.
to delete the
Delete
When executing the delete function, a pop-up window will appear asking to confirm the deletion.
November, 2018
25-3
Multi-language
DOPSoft User Manual
25
Language Name
Multi-language Setup
You can set the Language Name based on the name of the language or your preference. The Detail column is used to switch between languages.
The software switches the language to the corresponding setting using the [System Control] in the [Control Block]. The [Language Change] in the Button element also switches the language to the corresponding language based on the set Detail.
Modify
Detail
You can determine whether to enable the added languages. As shown in the figure below, you can enable the added No. 2 language.
If you attempt to uncheck the [Enable] for [Language 1], a pop-up warning message will
Enable
appear to inform users that this language cannot be disabled.
25-4
November, 2018
Multi-language
DOPSoft User Manual
Multi-language Setup
Default Font Style provides you with the option to apply the font name and size based on the language selected.
25
Default Font Style
When you choose to apply either the Font Name or Font Size, the font setting only applies to the newly created elements after you make a change to the font setting.
When you choose to apply both Font Name and Font Size, the font setting applies to both newly- and already-created elements.
Note: the Font Name and Font Size settings are applied to the elements that users can input text by themselves.
November, 2018
25-5
Multi-language
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 25.1.2 Multi-language example
25
Step 1
Multi-language
Go to [Options] > [Configuration] > [Multi-language] to add a language named "English", and change the name of the existing Language 1 to "Chinese".
Go to [Options] > [Configuration] > [Control Block] to check System Control.
Step 2
Create an Increment button with the Write Address as $13, and set the other required parameters.
Step 3
25-6
November, 2018
Multi-language
DOPSoft User Manual
Multi-language Enter the Chinese and English texts to be displayed in the Text page as shown below.
25
Step 3 Write the following instructions in the [After Execute Macro] of the Increment button.
Create a static text. Enter the Chinese and English texts to be displayed in the Tex] page as shown below.
Step 4
November, 2018
25-7
Multi-language
Multi-language Execute compile and download the screen to the HMI.
25
Step 5
DOPSoft User Manual
After downloading to the HMI, click ROC to switch the language to English and the static text changes to DELTA.
Step 6
Before switching
After switching
25-8
November, 2018
Print Setup
This chapter explains the Screen Print function and introduces how to use ePrinter to print.
Test 26.1 Screen print setup ��������������������������������������������������������������������������� 26-4 26.2 ePrinter ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������26-10
26.2.1 PrnServer ����������������������������������������������������������������������������26-11 26.2.2 HMI link settings ��������������������������������������������������������������������26-14 26.3 Error code of printer������������������������������������������������������������������������26-19
November, 2018
26-1
Print Setup
DOPSoft User Manual
Selection of a printer driver is required to set the print function. You can go to [Options] > [Configuration] > [Print] page to select the printer to be used.
26
Figure 26.1.1 Printer driver
The print function provides the Successive Data Print option, but it is available only when the printer to be used has been selected. This option is applicable only to the Sampling elements, Alarm elements, and Curve elements (excluding Curve Input elements). When the current screen is printed out and the data recorded for the screen element are not completely sampled, you can use this option to print the rest of the data until the sampling is completed.
26-2
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Print Setup
26
Figure 26.1.2 Successive data print November, 2018
26-3
Print Setup
DOPSoft User Manual
26.1 Screen Print Setup
26
The Screen Print Setup function enables the user to print multiple pages, set the print layout, and print history data. You need to create the Print Screen view before using the Screen Print function.
Figure 26.1.3 Print Screen view
The following instructions must be observed before executing the Print Setup: The screen specified by the Goto Screen cannot be set as the print screen. Cannot change to the print screen via Goto Screen. The print screen cannot be the default screen. The print screen cannot be the base screen. The print screen cannot be the subscreen. The print screen cannot be the screensaver screen.
All screens that you dragged to the Print Screen on the right side for printing will be printed out. History data can also be printed out using this option. You can select the screen to be printed, set the printing sequence, or delete the screen that does not need to be printed.
26-4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Print Setup
26
Figure 26.1.4 Screen Print Setup view
With all functions and properties for Screen Print Setup introduced, the following section provides an example for Screen Print Setup.
November, 2018
26-5
Print Setup
DOPSoft User Manual
26
Table 26.1.2 Screen Print Setup example
Screen Print Setup Create a new project. Select ePrinter as the printer, set the IP address to the IP address of
the PC and the Port as 85, and add 3 new screens.
Step 1 Create a Circle and a Rectangle element on Screen 1.
26-6
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Screen Print Setup Create a Historical Trend Graph on Screen 2 as shown below.
Print Setup
26
Step 1 Create a Right Triangle and a Hollow Circle element on Screen 3 as shown below.
November, 2018
26-7
Print Setup
DOPSoft User Manual
26
Screen Print Setup
Go to [Options] > [Screen Print Setup] to drag Screen 2 and Screen 3 to the Print Output Screen window on the right side. Click OK to exit the Screen Print Setup screen.
Step 2
Create a Print Output button. Step 3
26-8
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Screen Print Setup Configure IP address and ePrinter to be under the same network segment.
Then, execute compile and download the screen to the HMI. Open PrnServer.
Print Setup
26
Step 4 Select Start.
Once PrnServer is connected to port 85, click on Report List to print out the Screen Print Setup Step 5 screen you set up previously. It takes more time for the HMI to print out the data if there are many
screens or sampling data sets for printing.
November, 2018
26-9
Print Setup
DOPSoft User Manual
26.2 ePrinter
26
ePrinter enables users to print directly via network without the need to connect the HMI to a physical printer, which saves space for the hardware equipment and makes the printing convenient. Refer to the following diagram for the structure of the ePrinter network.
With a PC as a medium, ePrinter opens PrnServer on the PC and then configures the IP address for the PLC through the HMI that triggers Report List button element to transfer the print file via the network to any printer connected to the PC.
Figure 26.2.1 ePrinter structure
The ePrinter functions are described in two areas: one is introduction to PrnServer, and the other is explanation on how to set up the connection between the HMI and ePrinter to carry out network printing.
26-10
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Print Setup
26.2.1 PrnServer
As an executable file, you can run PrnServer to print out the files via the network. Path of the PrnServer executable file placed on the PC: C:\Program Files (x86)\Delta Industrial Automation\DOPSoft 4.00.04\PrnServer.exe
26
Figure 26.2.1.1 ePrinter application path Upon opening, the screen view is shown as follows:
November, 2018
Figure 26.2.1.2 ePrinter screen
26-11
Print Setup
26
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 26.3.1 ePrinter function explanation
Connect
Before using the HMI to carry out printing, you need to click on connecting to the printer.
The default connecting port for the printer connected is 85. It will automatically connect to the default printer for the PC.
to start
Once clicking , PrnServer will display the following message. Disconnect
Printer
Display printer-related settings.
Settings You can change the printers to be connected here.
26-12
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Print Setup
Printer
Click on Exit to end PrnServer. You must exit when you do not need to use the network printing anymore.
Closing the PrnServer window by clicking
directly will not
terminate the connection. If you click on
to close the PrnServer
window and when you run PrnServer again, the following message will be
displayed.
Exit
26
Display current version of PrnServer. Description About
November, 2018
26-13
Print Setup
DOPSoft User Manual
26.2.2 HMI link settings
26
HMI settings help users learn about how to set up the ePrinter function on the HMI screen and use the HMI to trigger printing. Please follow the steps below:
1. Create a project. Select 107WV and set ePrinter as the Printer (as shown in Figure 26.2.2.1). Then click on Next.
Figure 26.2.2.1 HMI screen setting I
26-14
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual 2. Complete the communication and network settings.
Print Setup
26
November, 2018
Figure 26.2.2.2 HMI screen setting II
26-15
Print Setup
DOPSoft User Manual
3. Set up the Print settings. Go to [Options] > [Configuration] > [Print]. Select Ethernet as Interface and fill in the IP address and Port info.
26
Figure 26.2.2.3 HMI screen setting III
4. IP address: This address is filled in for the IP address of the PC to start PrnServer. You can use ipconfig of the command mode to lookup the IP address of the PC. This is an example with an address of 192.168.123.143. Note: this IP address needs to be under the same network segment as the IP address of the HMI screen.
26-16
Figure 26.2.2.4 Lookup for IP address of the PC
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Print Setup
5. Port: the default connecting port for the printer is 85, which is also the printer port to be connected to when starting the PrnServer connection.
26
Figure 26.2.2.5 ePrinter connecting port
6. Create a Print Output element. Create a Rectangle and a Circle element on the DOPSoft editing screen.
Figure 26.2.2.6 Create Print Output element
Figure 26.2.2.7 Create Rectangle and Circle elements November, 2018
26-17
Print Setup
DOPSoft User Manual
7. Run compile and download the screen data to the HMI. 8. Before running the Print Output (Print) element, start PrnServer and run connection.
26
Figure 26.2.2.8 Run PrnServer 9. Then trigger the Print button on the HMI to complete printing.
26-18
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Print Setup
26.3 Error code of printer
If an error occurs when executing the printing function, you could use the error code displayed by the printer to understand and troubleshoot the error.
Code
Code definition
ERROR_PRINT_PORT
-2
Printer Port error
ERROR_MEMORY_NULL
-3
Memory allocation error
ERROR_USB -4 Unable to print because of an error
with the printer
ERROR_USB_NOT_SELECT -5 Printer starting failed, unable to
connect
ERROR_USB_PAPER -6 Printer unable to print because it is
out of paper
-7
ERROR_USB_NOT_CONNECT Failed to connect to the printer
-8
ERROR_USB_OPEN Failed to open USB
ERROR_USB_CLOSE
-9
Failed to close USB
ERROR_NOT_OK -11 Printer initialization not yet
completed
PRINTER ERROR -14 Printer printing failed
Reason
Error in selecting USB, parallel port, and COM port.
HMI memory insufficient, unable to process print data.
Unable to print because of printer malfunctioning, resulting in this error message.
The printer is connected, but it cannot recognize the device.
Troubleshooting
Please check if the transfer port setting is correct.
Delete screens to be printed or replace with a model with larger memory capacity for the printing.
The malfunctioning might be caused by the printer is out of ink or paper jam. Print again after troubleshooting.
Printer driver cannot connect with the HMI. Please contact our customer service for help.
Printer responded with the This issue can be solved by error of no printing paper. adding paper to the printer.
USB cable is not connected to the printer.
Failed to open USB when starting to print.
Failed to close USB when printing ended.
Printer will initialize upon starting up. When printing at this moment, the printer will respond with this error message.
CTS pin status error.
Check if the USB cable is connected to the printer correctly.
Restart the HMI. If still unable to print, please contact our customer service for help.
Restart the HMI. If still unable to print, please contact our customer service for help.
Some printers require longer time to initialize. Wait until initialization is complete to carry out the printing.
Check if CTS communication pin is correctly connected. If still unable to print, please contact our customer service for help.
26
November, 2018
26-19
Print Setup
26
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
DOPSoft User Manual
26-20
November, 2018
Parameter Settings
This chapter provides the descriptions of the module parameters, communication parameters, change model and environment settings.
Te
st
November, 2018
27-1
Parameters Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
Configuration
27
Configuration includes seven parts: Main, Control Block, Real Time Clock, Print, Default, Network Settings and Multi-language.
Main, Real Time Clock, Print, Default, Network Settings and Multi-language Settings are
described below.
For detailed settings of Control Block, please refer to Control Block and Status Block in chapter 4.
For settings of multi-language, please refer to chapter 25.
Table 27.1.1 Configuration- Project and Basic Settings [Configuration] - [Main]
You can change the name of the project and the new name will be displayed in the project tree on the left.
Name
27-2
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
[Configuration] - [Main]
Parameters Settings
27
This name will be the default name of the file to be saved.
HMI Type
It displays the HMI model being used.
Set Boot Delay Time to wait for the start of the controller within the range of 0 - 255 seconds.
If the Boot Delay Time is set to be 3 seconds, after downloading the screen to the HMI, the HMI counts down from 3 seconds to 0 before displaying the HMI screen, as shown in the following figure.
Boot Delay Time
November, 2018
27-3
Parameters Settings
27
[Configuration] - [Main]
DOPSoft User Manual
Clock Macro Delay Time
Clock Macro Priority
Background macro
update cycle
Clock Macro Delay Time ranges from 50 to 65535 ms. This is the interval time between an execution of Clock macro and the next one. Clock Macro Priority can be divided into Low, Medium and High. The higher the priority of execution of the Clock macro, the more accurate the
delay time of the Clock macro will be.
Set the number of lines executed per cycle for the Background macro, which ranges from 1 to 512.
It can be used to describe the purpose and description of the HMI screen.
Project Description
After executing the software, when you select this file, you can view the project description to better understand the purpose of the project.
27-4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 27.1.2 Configuration - Non-volatile [Configuration] - [Main]
Parameters Settings
27
Non-volatile data storage can be categorized as three parts: Alarm, Recipe and History Buffer.
The storage location for the History data depends on whether the client has created a history buffer.
Non-volatile data
storage location
If you need to use data of the three parts, you can choose the data storage location, which includes HMI, USB Disk, and SD Card.
You can directly click on the Storage Location to set the location for saving the non-volatile data of Alarm, Recipe and History buffer.
November, 2018
27-5
Parameters Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
27
Write the cache size of the
external storage device
[Configuration]-[Main]
External storage devices include USB Disk and SD Card.
The data written to an external storage device by the HMI is temporarily placed in the cache. [Write the cache size of the external] is for setting the cache size. Data is not actually written to the external storage device until the cache size is reached. This can prevent damage to the external storage device due to continuous writing.
If the data size to be accessed is less than the buffer capacity or the HMI power is unexpectedly cut off, some of the data may be lost. To avoid data loss, you can set to force trigger Bit 5 of the Control Block (External storage device cache write flag) to write the data to the external device in a cyclic pattern to ensure the data is saved.
27-6
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Parameters Settings
Table 27.1.3 Configuration -- Security Level and Password [Configuration] - [Main]
27
Highest security password
Highest security password is the password of highest level of the HMI which is level 8. The default value for Highest security password is "12345678". This password is used for screen and recipe data upload/download (please check the password verification first), password protection, system formatting, system file encryption and file copy (check the update cycle of the screen first). The password text format is in hexadecimal, 0 - F.
Default startup security level
Minutes before reset to default boot permission
Prompt a reminder for insufficient security level
Don't show password input window when the security level is
insufficient
If you want to use the default startup security level, set it with the User Security Level of the element properties.
The default startup security level is the permission level of HMI startup, which ranges from 0 to 7.
If you do not operate the HMI for a period of time after logging in through the user permission, the HMI logs out and resets to the default boot permission.
Suppose that the user permission set by the element is higher than the default boot
permission and this option is checked, the element will prompt a reminder for insufficient security level after downloading data to the HMI.
If this option is checked, password input keypad does not appear when the security level is insufficient.
November, 2018
27-7
Parameters Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
27
[Configuration] - [Main]
If you check this option, you must first download this setting to the HMI, and then download the screen data and recipe for the second time, only in this way will the software require you to enter the highest security password.
Check password
when downloading
program
You can download the screens to the HMI only when the password is correct; if not, a warning window will pop up to inform you that the password entered is incorrect and you cannot download the screens.
Buzzer ON/OFF
The buzzer is on when this option is checked, and off when unchecked. Buzzer sound of the HMI includes the sound of triggering button, the sound of
message popping out and the sound when an error occurs. Therefore, once the buzzer is off, the HMI will not make any sound.
When you try to upload all the data after downloading the screen to the HMI, DOPSoft will display the following message to inform you that screen data cannot be uploaded.
Screen upload prohibited
27-8
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Parameters Settings
[Configuration] - [Main]
The password list setting is used to distinguish the HMI permission levels. There are 8 permission levels, from 0 to 7, and each level has a default password. The DOP-100 series models provide multiple accounts and passwords for multiple users to log in at the same time. Note: 1. The password cannot be blank.
27
Account and Password list
Settings
2. Passwords can be the same but account names cannot be the same with the same permission level.
3. Account names can be the same for different permission levels, for example, the account name of level 0 is 123, the account name of level 1 can also be 123.
4. The length of the account and password is limited to 24 characters.
5. The account and password are case-insensitive; they are displayed in uppercase only.
Permission level 0
No protection function, anyone can operate it.
Permission levels 1 - 7
You need to input the corresponding password or password of higher permission level before operation.
Permission level 8
The highest permission password. The permission level 8 is higher than levels 1- 7, and the highest permission password is also used for protecting the saved project, password verification for download, and formatting system files.
When you use the same account with the same permission level, the HMI will inform you that the account is duplicate.
You can also change the password and account through the button element "Password Table Setup" or by going to the system screen to select [System Settings] > [Password].
The account supports Unicode input and you can log in with the Multi-language elements for different user permissions.
November, 2018
27-9
Parameters Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 27.1.4 Configuration - Global Keypad Settings
[Configuration] - [Main]
27
The Global Keypad Settings provide decimal, hexadecimal, binary and ASCII keypads for users to choose. This function can be used to edit the screen with multiple Numeric Entry or Character Entry elements. Set decimal, hexadecimal, binary or ASCII keypads through Global Keypad Settings and then execute the application, the system keypad can be updated into the custom format. You do not need to worry that the keypad style of multiple Numeric Entry or Character Entry elements on the previous screen cannot apply. Global Keypad Settings provide the function of "Apply to all", which can replace all the previous keypad styles with the new one. If it is a new element, the software also provides the function of "Apply to new", which only applies the format to the keypad newly created. Therefore, you can easily update the customized keypad format on the new or old ones.
The decimal keypad style can be customized.
Decimal Keypad
System keypad
27-10
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Parameters Settings
Decimal Keypad
Apply Settings
Not apply
[Configuration]-[Main]
Even if the keypad style is customized, the old or new keypads will maintain the original system keypad style.
Apply to all Replace the old keypad styles altogether with the new style.
Apply to new
Only apply to the keypad newly created.
Binary keypad style can be customized.
27
Binary Keypad
System keypad
Apply Settings
Not apply
Even if the keypad style is customized, the old or new keypads will maintain the original system keypad style.
Apply to all Replace the old keypad styles altogether with the new style.
Apply to new
Only apply to the keypad newly created.
The hexadecimal keypad style can be customized.
Hexadecimal System
Keypad
keypad
November, 2018
27-11
Parameters Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
27 Hexadecimal Keypad
Apply Settings
[Configuration] - [Main]
Not apply
Even if the keypad style is customized, the old or new keypads will maintain the original system keypad style.
Apply to all Replace the old keypad styles altogether with the new style.
Apply to new
Only apply to the keypad newly created.
The ASCII keypad can be customized.
System keypad
ASCII keypad
Apply Settings
Not apply
Apply to all Apply to new
Even if the keypad style is customized, the old or new keypads will maintain the original system keypad style. Replace the old keypad styles altogether with the new style.
Only apply to the keypad newly created.
27-12
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 27.1.5 Configuration - Others [Configuration] - [Main]
Parameters Settings
27
System Settings
Enable Touch Cursor
The HMI provides the same mouse cursor as the Windows system. When you touch the HMI screen, the icon of the mouse cursor will appear.
The HMI supports wireless mouse with a Unifying receiver.
[Display initial screen at startup] means that the initial screen will be displayed at each startup, as shown in the following figure. You can set whether to display the initial screen.
Display initial screen at startup
USB Upload/ Download mode
Auto
"Auto" is the main mode for USB Upload/Download of the HMI.
If USB Upload/Download mode is set to AUTO, the HMI will maintain the current mode of USB Upload/Download after the project is downloaded. If USB Upload/Download mode is set to Disk (USBCommMode is 1), the HMI will upload and download the data with Disk mode after the project is downloaded; If USB Upload/Download mode is set to CDC (USBCommMode 2), the HMI will still upload and download the data with CDC mode after downloading the project.
Except for the B05S100, B05S101, B07S201 and B07S211 models, the factory defaults of all the other HMI models are Auto.
November, 2018
27-13
Parameters Settings
System Settings
27
DOPSoft User Manual
[Configuration] - [Main]
The Disk mode is the same as USBCommMode 1. A removable storage device named "DELTA" in [This PC] can be checked after downloading to the HMI through Disk mode.
Disk
USB Upload/ Download mode
The CDC mode is the same as USBCommMode 2. When CDC is set, you can go to [This PC] and right-click on the mouse to go to [Contents] > [Device Manager] to check whether there is a device named "HMI" in [Ports] after downloading to the HMI.
CDC
Enable auto detect baud
rate
When this function is enabled, the baud rate of the HMI is adjusted automatically the same as the PLC.
27-14
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
[Configuration] - [Main]
Parameters Settings
27
Backlight Brightness
The condition for adjustment is that the baud rate of the HMI is different from that of the PLC.
You can adjust the backlight brightness.
TP Delay
Set the delay time of HMI processing the touch and movement data. The farther to the right, the shorter the delay time, which means the speed is faster; the farther to the left, the longer the delay time, which means the speed is slower.
TP Force
Set the sensitivity to the touch force of the HMI screen. The farther to the left, the more sensitive the HMI detects the force, it means it's easier to tap; the farther to the right, the more insensitive the HMI detects the force, it means you need to tap the screen harder.
Screensaver Setup
Enable screensaver
The Screensaver Setup is enabled only when you check Enable screensaver.
After the screensaver is activated, you can exit the screensaver mode simply by touching the screen again.
If Enable screensaver is checked, but there is no screensaver set in [Screen] > [Screensaver], the screen is displayed in all black.
If Enable screensaver is not checked, but you have edited the screensaver screen in [Screen] > [Screensaver], the screensaver remains disabled.
Wait Time
If Enable screensaver is checked, you can set the wait time for the HMI to enter the screensaver mode. The time range is 1 - 100 min., and the default value is 10 min.
Transition time
If Enable screensaver is checked, you can set the transition time. It is the interval time when screens switch. The time range is 1- 255 s and the default time is 1 second.
Return to
original screen
If Enable screensaver is checked, you can select the next screen to go to after exiting the screensaver. [Return to original screen] means that the HMI goes to the original screen after exiting the screensaver.
After exiting the
screensaver
If Enable screensaver is checked, you can also select the screen to go to by specifying its number, so the HMI swiches to the designated screen after it exits the screensaver. Note: if you select [Choose screen], you must set the screensaver.
Choose screen
The flowchart of the screensaver is shown as follows:
November, 2018
27-15
Parameters Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
27
[Configuration] - [Main] Screen 1
Screensaver
disabled
No
Enable Screensaver?
Return to
Yes
original
screen
Yes
Screen 10
Choose Screen
Show disk accessing error message
When Alarm, History Buffer, and Recipe are stored as non-volatile data in the USB Disk or SD Card, you can use this option to determine whether to display the warning message if DOPsot fails to access the external storage.
The disk access failure occurs when the History Buffer is set to be stored in the USB Disk as non-volatile data, but the HMI cannot detect the USB Disk to write the data. Therefore, if [Show disk accessing error message] is not checked, when the HMI cannot detect the USB Disk to write the data, no error messages will pop up.
27-16
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Parameters Settings
Table 27.1.6 Configuration - Real Time Clock
[Configuration] - [Real Time Clock]
Some PLC controllers do not have a built-in clock (real-time clock, RTC), so you cannot use it for operations related to time setting, such as the timer switch to turn on/off the machine on a daily basis and access control. If a PLC controller has a built-in RTC and the HMI provides synchronization function, you can synchronize the HMI RTC time with the PLC or vice versa. To use the RTC update settings, you must first check Enable RTC Updates. RTC update settings include PLC Link Settings and Time Field Setting.
27
Note: 1. If you are using a Delta PLC, you do not need to set the Time Field Setting. The setting fields are grayed out by
DOPSoft and PLC's special RTC register D1319 - D1313 are set automatically. 2. Some old Delta PLC models (ES/SS/EC) do not support RTC update. PLC Link Settings
Check it to enable the RTC update settings.
Enable RTC Updates
November, 2018
27-17
Parameters Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
[Configuration]-[Real Time Clock]
PLC Link Settings
27
You can select any of the link names, whether the controller connects to COM1 / COM2 / COM3 or Ethernet.
Link Name
Station No.
You can set the PLC station number for the time update. If the selected controller does not support the station number setting, this option is
unavailable.
There are two modes available: [HMI RTC set to PLC] and [PLC RTC set to HMI].
Update settings
There are three modes of triggering: Timer, Bit On, and Bit Off.
Trigger Mode
If you choose the Timer mode, you can set how often the auto update is executed. The minimum time is 1 minute and the maximum is 1440 minutes (1 day). The system default is 60 minutes.
If you select Bit On, the update setting is activated when the bit is on. If you select Bit Off, the update setting is activated when the bit is off. Either you select Bit On or Bit Off, you need to set the trigger address additionally,
which can be an internal memory or a controller register.
27-18
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Parameters Settings
[Configuration] - [Real Time Clock] Time Field Setting
Set the controller register address for RTC time synchronization.
Start Address
27
If you are using Delta PLCs, the start address setting is not required. You can choose the length based on the number of time fields you want to synchronize. The minimum length is 1 and the maximum is 7.
Length
Example
RTC update steps
If you are using Delta PLCs, setting the length is not required.
Step 1: go to [Options] > [RTC Update Settings]. Step 2: set the properties associated with RTC update.
1. Enable RTC Auto Updates. 2. Select Link name: Link3 (Mitsubishi-FX3U and FX3GA). 3. Select [PLC RTC set to HMI] for Update setting. 4. Set Bit On for Trigger Mode. 5. Set the trigger address to $11.0. 6. Set Start Address to {Link3}1@D8013. 7. Set the Length to 6. 8. Select Second for the Time Field corresponding to {Link3}1@D8013. 9. Select Minute for the Time Field corresponding to {Link3}1@D8014. 10. Select Hour for the Time Field corresponding to {Link3}1@D8015. 11. Select Day for the Time Field corresponding to {Link3}1@D8016. 12. Select Month for the Time Field corresponding to {Link3}1@D8017. 13. Select Year for the Time Field corresponding to {Link3}1@D8018. Step 3: after setting is complete, click OK to exit the RTC Update settings. Please refer to the following figure.
November, 2018
27-19
Parameters Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
27
[Configuration] - [Real Time Clock]
Since the Mitsubishi-FX3U controller does not require station number setting, neither does it require in RTC update settings.
RTC update steps
Step 1: create a Maintained button and set its write address to $11.0.
Step 2: input the text of the Maintained button as "RTC BIT OFF" for State 0 and set the foreground color of State 1 to red with the text as "RTC BIT ON", which is the state when the bit is on.
Create Maintained
button element
State 0
State 1
Create Numeric
Entry elements
Step 1: create 6 Numeric Entry elements, and set the address as {Link3}1 @d8013 - {Link3}1 @d8018 in order. Step 2: create another 6 Numeric Entry elements and set the internal system parameters as TIME_YEAR, TIME_MONTH, TIME_DAY, TIME_HOUR, TIME_MINUTE and TIME_SECOND in order.
PLC Address
Internal system parameters
27-20
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Parameters Settings
[Configuration] - [Real Time Clock]
After creating all the elements, please compile and download the elements to the HMI. When the RTC Maintained button (BIT ON) is triggered, the system will set the HMI time as the PLC's RTC time, so the HMI internal system parameters TIME_YEAR, TIME_MONTH, TIME_DAY, TIME_HOUR, TIME_MINUTE and TIME_SECOND will synchronize with the PLC's RTC.
27
BIT OFF
D8013
D8014
D8015
D8016
D8017
D8018
Execution result
HMI_Year HMI_Month HMI_Day HMI_Hour HMI_Minute HMI_Second
BIT ON
D8013
D8014
D8015
D8016
D8017
D8018
HMI_Year HMI_Month HMI_Day HMI_Hour HMI_Minute HMI_Second
November, 2018
27-21
Parameters Settings
27
Table 27.1.7 Configuration - Print [Configuratin] - [Print]
DOPSoft User Manual
The Print setting includes typesetting printing and general printing (Hard Copy). Please refer to chapter 26 for details of printing methods.
DOP-100 supports HP and ePrinter.
Printer
Paper Quality Margin Print Size
The paper varies depending on the printer you choose. It generally includes A4, Letter, Custom and other settings.
Quality refers to the printing resolution. At present, only 72 DPI is available.
You can set the top, bottom, left, and right margin of the paper which is reserved for blank.
The unit of the margin is mm, and the range is 0 - 550 mm.
You can set the scaling of the width and height in the Print Size setting. The maximum scaling ratio is 400%, the minimum is 10%, and the default is 100%.
27-22
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Parameters Settings
[Configuratin]-[Print] The DOP-100 supports HP and ePrinter, and the transmission interface of this printer
includes USB and Ethernet.
27
Transimission Interface
If you select ePrinter, you need to input the PC's IP address and printer port 85. Print Direction includes vertical printing and horizontal printing.
Vertical printing
Print Direction
Horizontal printing
Auto Flip
Auto Flip means that the printer can automatically return the paper and print the next page. If this option is checked, when a page is printed, the printer will automatically change to the next page to continue printing; if not checked, after a page is printed, the printer returns the paper and you must manually change to the next page.
November, 2018
27-23
Parameters Settings
27
Table 27.1.8 Configuration � Default [Configuration] - [Default]
DOPSoft User Manual
System Default Value Default Boot Screen
It is the initial screen when the HMI boots up. You can choose another screen as the boot screen, and the default is Screen 1.
Default Data Format
It is the default data format while creating an element. The default data format is Unsigned Decimal.
Default Screen Background
It is the background color while editing a screen. The default background color is white.
System Error Display Time
It is the error message displaying time when an error occurs. The default is 3 seconds and the setting range is 0 - 5 seconds. Note: when it is set to 0 second, the HMI will not display the message if an error occurs.
System Key Mode sets the response of the HMI when you press the system key. The software provides three options: Disabled, Enable password check, and Uncheck password.
System Key Mode 27-24
Disabled
Enable password check
Uncheck Password
When setting to [Disabled], the HMI is unable to enter the HMI system screen when you press the system key.
When setting to [Enable password check], you will be asked to enter the system key password after pressing the system key.
When setting to [Uncheck Password], the system key password is not required to enter the HMI system screen after you press the system key.
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Parameters Settings
System Default Value System Key Password
System Default Font
[Configuration] - [Default]
System Key Password is the password required when the System Key Mode is set as [Enable password check]. You can change the system key password. The default system key password is 12345678. The system default font is Verdana, and you can change the font.
27
Faster HMI page changing
Element Default Value
Enabling Faster HMI page changing will speed up the switching between pages, but it also occupies the memory space of the project screen.
This function is mainly used to speed up the switching between pages when the screen has a large number of graphics and static texts.
If you check Wrap Text and enter the text in an element, the text automatically wraps so it appears on multiple lines in an element, as shown in the figure below.
If Wrap Text is not checked, the text extends beyond the element edge instead of wrapping automatically, as shown in the figure below.
Wrap Text
In addition, if you need to convert the.dop file (B series program) for the DOP-100 models to edit, the software also provides the Wrap Text option for you.
Element Font/Size/Color
Scroll Size
The font, size and color of the text when creating an element. The default font, size and color of element are Arial, 12, and black respectively.
This is for elements with scrolls, such as history data, alarm and other related tables. The default scroll size is 20 pixels and the range is 20 - 60 pixels.
November, 2018
27-25
Parameters Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
[Configuration]-[Default]
Element Default Value
27
This function is operable only when an element has the property of Blink.
Blink Time
The Blink Time setting is valid only when Blink is set to Yes. The default value is 1000 ms and the range is 500 - 5000 ms.
Sometimes the HMI displays the value after the communication completes due to multitask execution.To avoid confusion, DOPSoft provides options for you to set the value display timing. The options are [Updating values, then communication] and [Communication, then updating values].
Sequence of updating value while
changing screens
27-26
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Parameters Settings
[Configuration] - [Default]
Element Default Value
The elements supporting this function are as follows:
Numeric Entry
Input element
Character Entry
Barcode Input
Set to On button
Set to Off button
Button element
Momentary button
Maintained button
Multistate button
Multistate Indicator
Indicator element
Range Indicator
Simple Indicator
Meter element
Meter(1), Meter(2), Meter(3), Meter(4)
Numeric Display
Data Display element
Character Display General Message Display
Moving Sign Display
Graph Display element
State Graph Display Animated Graphic
Curve Graph element
Curve Input
Pipe element
Pipe(1), Pipe(2)
27
Sequence of updating value while changing
screens
Analog element
Slider
Here's the difference.
If this option is selected, after the screen switches, the reading of values is normal without being affected by the communication.
Screen 1 D0 = 1
Updating values, then communication
Switch to Screen 2 and set D0 to 123
Screen 2 Numeric Entry element D0
displays 123
Obtain the updated value and then complete the communication
Numeric Entry element D0 displays 123
November, 2018
27-27
Parameters Settings
Element Default Value
27
DOPSoft User Manual
[Configuration]-[Default]
The display of the Numeric Entry element lags due to screen switching.
Screen 1 D0 = 1
Sequence of updating value while changing
screens
Communication, then updating values
Switch to Screen 2 and set D0 to123
Screen 2 Numeric Entry element shortly
blinks
When communication completed, display the updated value
Numeric Entry element D0 displays 123
27-28
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 27.1.9 Configuration - Boot Logo [Configuration] - [Default]
Parameters Settings
27
After you check Enable, you may select the boot screen from the picture bank. To use files not in the picture bank, you can import the image files into the picture bank.
Enable
If you select a GIF image file and the gray circle below appears as
, it indicates
that the GIF preview is available on the software.
When the Boot Screen is enabled, you can replace the HMI boot screen from [Tools] >
[Download Boot Screen]. Or you can use Download All Data to download the boot
screen.
Note:
1. After downloading the boot screen, please cycle power on the HMI.
2. Supported image file formats include BMP, JPG, GIF, ICO, and PNG.
3. The HMI animated boot screen playing time for GIF image files is 3 seconds.
November, 2018
27-29
Parameters Settings
27
Table 27.1.10 Configuration - Network Settings [Configuration] - [Network Settings]
DOPSoft User Manual
HMI name
Upload/ Download
Port
You can set the HMI name for identification. If you use remote network monitoring or data sampling, you can easily identify which HMI is being monitored or accessed by the name.
The communication port is a specified connection address that allows programs on different computers to communicate. There are 65,536 ports, and some specific ports are reserved for specific programs.
The default Upload/Download Port of the HMI is 12346.
The default Port of Modbus TCP Server is 502. This port must be consistent with that of the Modbus TCP/IP controller.
Modbus TCP Server
Port
Enable Ethernet IP Time Zone
NTP
You can also customize the port numbers, but the settings must be the same.
If the HMI is communicating with Modbus software on the PC, please change the port here instead of changing the port of the controller by going to [Options] > [Communication Settings] > [Ethernet1 ] > [Device].
This function is not enabled by default. When it is enabled, the other controllers can search for the HMI under the Ethernet IP protocol.
Whether it is enabled or not does not affect the Ethernet IP function in communication parameters.
You can choose the time according to the time zone of the HMI.
Enable NTP
After it is checked, the HMI can correct its time according to the network time.
If you want to enable NTP, make sure the network is unobstructed.
Server Name
Users can select the server provided in the software, or enter the name of the local NTP server.
Calibration when startup
If it is checked, the HMI corrects its time when booting.
27-30
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Parameters Settings
Calibration at set intervals
After it is checked, you need to set the time in the unit of second. The time calibration starts after the HMI enters the boot screen with the time you set.
The time is 180 seconds by default, with a minimum of 10 seconds and a maximum of 99,999 seconds.
Table 27.1.11 Configuration - Remote Desktop and Data Collection
Remote Desktop
[Configuration] - [Network Settings]
27
eServer
Check Enable to set the Password, Sampling time, Port and [Show warning when disconnected].
Enable
Password Sampling time
You can change the password. The default is 12345678. After eServer and eRemote are executed, you need to eneter the password to
monitor or access the data.
This is the frequency the eServer and eRemote execute sampling. The range is 100 - 5000 ms, and default is 100 ms.
November, 2018
27-31
Parameters Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
[Configuration] - [Network Settings]
27
Port
Show warning when disconnected
The connection port of eServer and eRemote is set to 12348. This Port of eServer is different from the HMI Upload/Download Port; ports are different for different programs.
Check to enable this option. When the HMI and eServer or eRemote are disconnected, the HMI will display
the warning message of disconnection.
Close warning window when the
connection is restored
Check [Close warning window when the connection is restored] to enable this function.
If this option is checked, the warning window will not be closed until the connection between the HMI and eServer / eRemote is restored.
If this option is not checked, the warning window for disconnection will only pop out once.
VNC
VNC (Virtual Network Computing) is a software that can monitor and operate the HMI remotely. This software can transmit the movement data of the keyboard and mouse and real-time images through the network.
To use the VNC on a web page, the browser must support Java installation, or it cannot be enabled.
Java versions below 1.7.0_45 (inclusive) are recommended.
Enable
Check Enable to remotely monitor and operate the HMI via VNC.
Password
You can change the password. The default is 12345678.
The default Port is 5900. If you set the software connection port to 5902, you need to change the Port of VNC to 5902 as well when connecting with the VNC Viewer.
Do not use 5800 while setting the software connection port. If you set 5800, the following message will appear to remind you to change the VNC Port after you download the screen to the HMI.
Port
The VNC Viewer provides web page operation, which you can enable the connection by setting the HMI IP Address and the port as 5800 for the browser. If the software link port default is not 5900, please enter 5800 for the connection port when operating with the browser. For example, http://192.168.123.148:5800.
27-32
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Real-time Monitoring
[Configuration] - [Network Settings]
Parameters Settings
27
Network real-time monitoring allows you to write values from the web page to the HMI; or when you write values to the HMI, you can monitor the values from the web page.
The real-time monitoring interface provides multiple data formats. Supported data formats include BCD, Signed Decimal, Unsigned Decimal, Hex, Floating and Char.
You can set the read length of each data format to determine whether to read Word or Double Word. When the read length is 1, the integer can be set up to 5 digits, meaning the data format is Word. When the read length is 2, the integer can be set up to 10 digits, meaning the data format is Double Word.
You can input Word and Bit data for the address and internal memory address and external PLC address are supported.
To use the Real-time Monitoring, check [Enable real-time monitoring] and set the address in the software. Next, type http://[HMI IP]/RemoteMon/ in the browser. Then, you can see the following login screen. Enter the network password to log in. Capitalize R and M, otherwise you cannot connect to the
November, 2018
27-33
Parameters Settings
27
HMI through the web.
[Configuration] - [Network Settings]
DOPSoft User Manual
Enable real-time monitoring
Check [Enable real-time monitoring] to add and delete monitoring addresses.
Click to add a new monitoring address.
Add monitoring address
Users can name the address. The name length can be up to 30 characters.
Delete monitoring address Import CSV contents
Select the number of monitoring address for deletion, then click
to delete it.
After making changes to the exported CSV file, click address parameters.
Export monitoring address contents to a CSV file.
to import the monitoring
Export CSV contents
Password
Items per page Update frequency
(second)
The default password is 12345678. This password is required after entering the link address through web page.
You can set the number of addresses to be monitored per page. The default setting is 10, the minimum is 1 and maximum 20.
It refers to the update frequency of screens after values are changed. The default setting is 30 seconds, the minimum is 1 second and maximum 30 seconds.
27-34
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 27.1.12 Configuration - SMTP [Configuration] - [Network Settings]
Parameters Settings
27
SMTP is short for Simple Mail Transport Protocol. This server is for sending messages. SMTP is a set of rules for sending mail from a source address to a destination address, and it controls the way mails are transferred.
DOPSoft provides the SMTP function to notify you with an e-mail when an alarm occurs.
After setting the SMTP parameters, you must also go to [Options] > [Alarm Settings] to fill in the recipient email and other alarm information in the Mail column.
November, 2018
27-35
Parameters Settings
27
[Configuration][Network Settings]
DOPSoft User Manual
To enable SMTP, please check Enable Mail Host, then you can set the Server IP address, Server Port, and security authentication of the account and password.
This IP address is the Mail Server IP created by the user. Please set up Mail Server environment or search for free Mail Server on the Internet before using SMTP.
Other than entering the IP address, you can also check the Domain Name function to enter the domain name.
Server IP
Server Port Sender Address
SSL Encrypted Transmission
The default server port is 25 which is the general SMTP communication port.
Please enter the sender's email address.
SSL is short for Secure Sockets Layer which provides secure transmission over the Internet. SSL was first proposed by Netscape with the goal of ensuring the confidentiality and integrity of the communication between two applications, as well as to verify the identity of the server.
To use SSL encryption, your e-mail must also support this feature.
27-36
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Parameters Settings
[Configuration][Network Settings]
Gmail itself also requires SSL encryption. To send a message using Gmail, you need to make the following settings.
1. Login Gmail and select Google account.
27
2. Select Sign-in & security
3. Go to the bottom of the page and enable [Allow less secure apps].
After finishing the above 3 settings, you can use the Gmail to receive alarm messages.
November, 2018
27-37
Parameters Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
[Configuration][Network Settings]
27
Enable Security Authentication
Account
Password
Before enabling the security authentication function, you must check Enable Mail Host first to set the account and password.
If you have set the authentication of the account and password when setting up the SMTP server, you need to check this option.
The account and password are based on the account and password required by the SMTP server. When you set up the SMTP Mail Server, you must first enter a set of account and password if you checked the [Enable Security Authentication] option. This set of account and password is used to check whether the recipient is a legitimate backend email user. This avoids unattended emails taking up spaces in the system and creating potential security issues.
Please note that the format of the account will be different because of the different formats required by each SMTP Mail Server. Please ask your MIS regarding the guidelines.
The HMI provides a time zone feature that allows you to select the local time zone so that the HMI does not have time differences between places and the time it sends the alarm message is also more precise.
Time Zone
27-38
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 27.1.13 Configuration - FTP [Configuration] - [Network Settings]
Parameters Settings
27
The FTP Server function allows you to download the alarms, history data, recipes, and operation logs saved in the USB Disk or SD Card through the Internet to read on the PC; you can also upload the files in the PC to the USB Disk or SD Card.
FTP rules
Description
Supported HMI
Net-based HMI
File transfer software
Supported connections Windows Explorer
DOS Command Line
Connection limit
Allows 3 FTP clients to connect at the same time Disconnect automatically while being idle for more than 90 seconds
Unable to add directories
Unable to upload files
Anonymous login
Unable to download files
Unable to delete files
Login method
Can change file names Can add directories
Can upload files
Account login
Can download files
Can delete files
Can change file names
November, 2018
27-39
Parameters Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
[Configuration][Network Settings]
FTP rules
Description
27
Unlimited traffic Support resume download Unlimited transfer file size Maximum file name length is 260 bytes
File transfer rules
Can change file names Support Chinese file names Encryption is not supported
Support active mode / passive mode connection
When the FTP is transferring files, you can access the system directory
The FTP supports three connection methods. Please refer to the following for more information. 1. File transfer software It is necessary to use an FTP client software to upload or download files from the FTP Server provided by the HMI, or use the Windows Explorer or DOS Command line to connect to the FTP Server. The file transfer software in this example is FileZilla. This is a free software which you can download from: https://filezilla-project.org/download.php. Open FileZilla after installation.
Name
Action description
Host
Enter the HMI IP address. The IP address in this example is 192.168.123.114.
Username Enter the same username as the software setting, which is admin.
Password Enter the same password as the software setting, which is 1234.
Port
Enter the same port as the software setting, which is 21.
Quickconnect Before executing this button, please make sure the above four settings are complete.
2. Windows Explorer Please open Explorer, input ftp://192.168.123.114/, enter account and password to log in to the FTP.
Once you are logged in, you can see all the files in the USB Disk.
27-40
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
[Configuration][Network Settings]
Parameters Settings
27
3. DOS Command Line
Enter ftp 192.168.123.114 under the command prompt, and enter user account "admin" and password "1234" to connect to the FTP.
In the ftp command, you can enter "help" to see the supported commands.
November, 2018
27-41
Parameters Settings
[Configuration][Network Settings] Enter "dir" command to see the list of all the files currently in the USB Disk.
27
DOPSoft User Manual
If you want to download files from the USB Disk or SD Card, enter "get" command. If you want to upload files to the USB Disk or SD Card from the PC, enter "put" command.
27-42
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
[Configuration][Network Settings] The properties for the software interface are introduced below.
Parameters Settings
27
Enable FTP host function
FTP Host Port Account Password
Root Directory
Anonymous
Check this option to use the FTP function.
The FTP Host Port default is 21. You can enter the account name you want to use. You can enter the password you want to use. The root directory is the location where the HMI files are stored. The default is USB Disk. You can also select SD Card as the storage location. If you check this option, you can access the FTP without logging in with an
account. If you access the FTP anonymously, you cannot upload / download files, delete
files, or add directories.
November, 2018
27-43
Parameters Settings
27
Table 27.1.14 Configuration - Multi-language [Configuration][Multi-language]
DOPSoft User Manual
The system language refers to the language displayed in the system directory screen, the error message and warning message displayed by the HMI.
You can set the system language to Traditional Chinese, Spanish, Simplified Chinese, and English.
27-44
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 27.1.15 Configuration - Multi-language Settings [Configuration][Multi-language]
Parameters Settings
27
The multi-language input function supports up to 15 languages and you can choose the language for editing texts.
Go to [Options] > [Configuration] > [Multi-language Settings] to check the preferred language. Then, with the Multi-language Input element in the Entry Element, you can use the multi-language input function.
Multi-language Input function does not support online and offline simulations.
The multi-language input function is only available on DOP-103WQ, DOP-107WV and DOP-110WS models.
Please refer to chapter 13 for instructions on multi-language input of elements.
November, 2018
27-45
Parameters Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
Communication Settings
Users can set related communication parameters of COM 1, COM 2, COM 3, and Ethernet
27 through [Options] > [Communication Settings].
Figure 27.2.1 Communication Settings
Communication parameters of each COM port and controller settings as well as Ethernet parameter settings are described below.
27-46
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 27.2.1 Communication Settings Communication Settings
Parameters Settings
27
Communication parameter of COM 1, COM 2 and COM 3 and controller settings are detailed as follows.
Connection
If you check Connection, it means the communication of COM port is enabled. You can select the COM port as required, such as COM 1, COM 2, and COM 3.
You must check Connection before you set the Link Name and Controller (PLC) to be used. Please refer to the connection manual for the selection and use of the controller.
If Connection is unchecked, the software will detect that the current Link2 has been used by the Control Block and Status Block, so it prompts a warning message to remind users that the link cannot be removed because there are elements referring to Link2.
November, 2018
27-47
Parameters Settings
27
Communication Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
Connection
Users can adopt the following methods to cancel this Link2 of COM 2.
I. Add new controller for COM 3 1. Add a new Link for COM 3 and click OK to complete the setting.
2. Next, uncheck Connection for COM 2 and a message of deletion failure will pop up. Click OK to enter the Address List to change the address of the Link. Select the link name (Link3) to be converted to, and then click Change.
27-48
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Communication Settings
Parameters Settings
27
Connection
According to the Word devices table, Link2 on the left is the controller register address to be cancelled, and Link3 on the right is the controller register address to be changed to. You can change the address in accordance with the default order or specify the address to change.
November, 2018
27-49
Parameters Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
27
Communication Settings
II. Move Link2 to COM 1 by using the up and down arrows at the upper left corner. Next, go to COM 2 to check if the Link name has been changed to Link1. The arrows allow you to directly move the Link to the other communication ports.
Please refer to the steps below. Step 1: Go to COM2 and click the up arrow.
Connection Step 2: then, you can see Link 2 is moved to COM 1.
27-50
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Parameters Settings
Communication Settings Step 3: go to COM 2 to check the setting. The Link name of COM 2 is changed to Link 1.
27
Connection
Note:
1. The default setting of COM 1 is Link 1, COM 2 is Link 2 and COM 3 is Link 3.
2. When you use the arrow to move the Link 2 to COM 1, and COM 2 becomes Link 1; similarly, when Link 2 is moved to COM 3, COM 2 becomes Link 3.
3. This movement action does not change the Link name, so the warning message will not pop up. The up and down arrows work the same way as the up and down function in the previous Screen Editor.
When you cancel all the links, the software prompts you to set at least one link.
November, 2018
27-51
Parameters Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
27
HMI Station No.
Communication Settings
You can set the HMI Station No. within the range of 1 - 255 and the default is 0.
Communication interface is the transmission mode, which includes RS232, RS422 and RS485.
When you select COM 1, only RS232 is selectable for the communication interface; when you select COM 2 and COM 3, selectable options are RS232, RS422 and RS485.
Communic-atio n Interface
RS232
COM 1 V
COM 2 V
COM 3 V
RS422
V
V
Data Bits
RS485
V
V
The availbe options for Data Bits are 7 Bits and 8 Bits. This is also the data type and the recieved packet length.
Communication Parameters
Stop Bits
The availbe options for Stop Bits are 1 Bit and 2 Bits. This is for notifying the the data revceiving is complete.
The available options for Baud Rate are 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200. Baud Rate refers to the data transmission speed in the unit of bps.
Baud Rate
Parity Bits are for checking the errors when data is transmitted, which options include None, Odd, Even, Mark and Space.
Parity Bits
Controller Settings
PLC Station No.
Password
Comm. Delay Time(ms)
The default PLC station number is the number automatically generated by the software after you select the controller to be used.
You can also adjust the station number within the range of 0 - 255.
If the PLC you set needs password verification, you must set the corresponding password for the communication in the software setting. The default is 12345678.
It refers to the time interval after each communication. The range is 0 - 255 ms and the default is 0 ms.
27-52
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Parameters Settings
Controller Settings
Optimize
Communication Settings
Timeout (ms)
The interval of time passed without the PLC's response after the communication starts. The range is 10 - 2000 ms and the default is 1000 ms.
Retry Counts
If the PLC does not respond after the communication starts, the HMI sends the communication command again. If the number of attempts reaches the set Retry Counts, a warning message of abnormal communication pops up. The range is 0 - 15 times and the default is 2 times.
Check Optimize to optimize the process of reading the elements and make the communication faster. If Optimize is unchecked, the Optimize function is disabled and the speed for reading the elements becomes slower.
This option is checked by default, so all element read addresses referring to this link will be optimized.
27
You must first check [Disconnect after a communication interrupt] to set [Retry times after disconnection]. If [Disconnect after a communication interrupt] is checked, when communication is interrupted and the retry times setting is reached, the HMI stops trying to connect to the controller. The range is 0 - 255 times and the default is 3 times.
When the communication between HMI and the controller stops because the set retry times is reached, you can use Bit 0 in the Control Block to enable/disable the communication.
Disconnect after communication
interrupt
November, 2018
27-53
Parameters Settings
Communication Settings The detailed operation settings for Ethernet are described below.
27
DOPSoft User Manual
Device
27-54
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Parameters Settings
Communication Settings
Click the icon
on the Device page to add an EtherLink1 link device.
This link name EtherLink1 can be changed on demand by users.
Please select the controller to be used after adding the link device. If you select a PLC that is
not a network device, a warning message will pop up to inform you that the hardware of
controller cannot be applied to this interface.
27
Device
November, 2018
27-55
Parameters Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
27
Communication Settings
After adding the new internet link device, you can set two protocols only; for example, Delta DVP TCP/IP and S7 300 (ISO TCP). If you add the third Protocol, the following message is displayed.
Each protocol can only have 16 links. If a Protocol adds more than 16 links, a warning message will pop up to remind you that the number of controllers exceeds the range.
Device
Communication
Parameters
Controller Settings
Optimize
HMI Station Set the HMI station number.
No.
The range is 1 - 255 and the default station number is 0.
You can set the IP address of the PLC here. Please set the Controller IP address of the same network segment as the HMI IP to enable
the communication between the PLC and HMI.
COM Port
The COM Port varies depending on the controller you select. You can also set the COM Port corresponding to the PLC's port.
PLC Station
The default PLC station number is the number automatically generated by the software after you select the controller to be used.
You can also adjust the station number within the range of 0 255.
Password
If the PLC you set needs password verification, you must set the corresponding password for the communication in the software setting. The default is 12345678.
Comm. Delay Time(ms)
It refers to the time interval after each communication. The range is 0 - 255 ms and the default is 0 ms.
The interval of time passed without the PLC's response after the Timeout (ms) communication starts.
The range is 10 - 2000 ms and the default is 1000 ms.
Retry Counts
If the PLC does not respond after the communication starts, the HMI sends the communication command again. If the number of attempts reaches the set Retry Counts, a warning message of abnormal communication pops up. The range is 0 - 15 times and the default is 2 times.
Check Optimize to optimize the process of reading the element and make the communication faster. If Optimize is unchecked, the Optimize function is disabled and the speed for reading the elements becomes slower.
This option is checked by default, so all element read addresses referring to this link will be optimized.
27-56
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Communication Settings
Parameters Settings
27
Local host
HMI Localhost
Overwrite IP
Obtain an IP address
automatically HMI IP Address
HMI Localhost represents the localhost's IP address of the HMI, which you can select [Overwrite IP] and [Obtain an IP address automatically].
If Overwrite IP is not checked, the HMI uses the default IP address 0.0.0.0. If you choose not to write the IP address from the software, you can enter the system screen and go to [System Setting] > [Network] to change the IP address.
Check Overwrite IP to change the IP address through the software, and you can set parameters such as IP address and HMI name to be written.
To enable [Obtain an IP address automatically], you must check Overwrite IP first.
When both of the two options are checked, it means that HMI obtains the IP address through DHCP mode. You can enter the system screen and go to [System Setting] > [Network] to check the current IP address.
The HMI IP address must be set in the same network segment as the controller IP address.
November, 2018
27-57
Parameters Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
27
Communication Settings
The Subnet Mask is used for segment the network and identifying the destination address. Its format is the same as the IP address, which is also represented by four bytes separated by decimal points.
IP Class
Network Address
Subnet Mask
Subnet Mask
Class A 1.x.x.x - 126.x.x.x Class B 128.0.x.x - 191.255.x.x
255.0.0.0 255.255.0.0
Class C 192.0.0.x - 223.255.255.x 255.255.255.0
Localhost
HMI Localhost
Gateway
Subnet mask must be set when IP address is set on each computer. Take Class C in the figure above for example, the first three bytes of the IP address are Network ID. Therefore, the first 3 bytes of the Subnet Mask are all 255, while the last byte is 0 the Host ID.
The Gateway is mostly used to connect local-area network and large computer host system. Generally, a gateway is required as long as there are two systems with different levels to be connected.
The gateway is the exit of the local-area network. All packets to be sent to the Internet are first sent to the gateway and are then transmitted to other hosts on the Internet and finally to the host at the destination.
If you need to connect to the external network, you can set the gateway address according to the network rules. The default is 0.0.0.0.
27-58
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Parameters Settings
Change model
DOPSoft 4.0 only supports the DOP-100 series HMIs. You can change to other models of 100 series with this function.
27
Table 27.3.1 Change Model
The software enables you to open the screens of the DOP-B, DOP-W, and HMC models and convert the screens into the compatible format for the DOP-100 models to edit
November, 2018
27-59
Parameters Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
Environment settings
27
You can set environment parameters related to the HMI system with the Environment settings, including the software language and download mode. The parameters in the Environment settings are described below.
Table 27.4.1 Description of environment setting properties
In the Environment settings, you can view the system path and output path, set the system environment parameters for the Upload/Download setting and USB driver installation.
Output path
It refers to the output path of a CIN file generated after screen compilation. Software functions such as the on-line and offline simulation, file upload/download will refer to the data of this path. So, do not change this path unless necessary, otherwise program execution may error or the software cannot find the file.
27-60
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Parameters Settings
The software provides the interface in three langauges: Traditional Chinese, English and Simplified Chinese.
Traditional Chinese
27
Language
English
Select one of the languages, click OK and a message will pop up, which displays "Change of language requires restarting the program. Proceed? (Y/N)". Click Yes to close the message box and the software is restarted automatically. Then, you can find the language is changed.
Simplified Chinese
Upload/ Download
settings
USB Ethernet
The default transmission mode for data upload/download between the software and HMI is USB.
There are four types of USB transmission modes. The first one is the general upload/download type (Normal = USBCommMode 0) and you must manually install the driver. The second one is the USB Disk type (Disk = USBCommMode 1), which allows you to upload/download HMI programs without installing the driver. The third one is the USB CDC type (CDC = USBCommMode 2), which you need to install additional driver for transmission. The fourth one is the Auto type; the HMI remains using the current USB upload/download mode.
USBCommMode 1 and USBCommMode 2 are compatible with Windows XP / Windows Vista / Windows 7 / Windows 8 operating systems.
The Ethernet options is for HMI data upload/download over the network.
If you use Ethernet to upload/download the data, you must set the IP address of both the HMI and the computer on the same network segment. You can set the HMI IP by checking [Overwrite IP] or [Obtain an IP address automatically].
November, 2018
27-61
Parameters Settings
27
DOPSoft User Manual
HMI To set the IP address, you can go to [Options] > [Communication Settings] > [Ethernet1] > [Localhost], or enter the System screen and go to [System Setting] > [Network]. The setting interface provided the software is shown in the figure below:
Overwrite The setting interface of the system screen is shown in the figure
IP
below:
27-62
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Parameters Settings
Computer In Windows, go to [Start] > [Control panel] > [Network and Sharing
Center]
> [Local area connection] > [Networking] > [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)].
27
Upload/ Download Ethernet
settings
Overwrite IP
Click Properties to enter the TCP/IP setting page, as shown below.
November, 2018
27-63
Parameters Settings
27
DOPSoft User Manual
HMI: When you check [Obtain an IP address automatically], you do not need to set the IP address; DHCP dynamically assigns the IP address to the HMI instead. You can also enter the System screen and go to [System Setting] > [Network] and set DHCP to ON. The interface set by the software is shown in the figure below:
The setting interface of the system screen is shown in the figure below.. Computer In Windows, go to [Start] > [Control panel] > [Network and Sharing
Center]
Upload/ Download Ethernet
settings
Obtain an IP address automatically
> [Local area connection] > [Networking] > [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)].
27-64
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Parameters Settings Click Properties to enter the TCP/IP setting page, as shown below.
27
Obtain an IP address automatically
Upload/ Download Ethernet
settings
After the IP addresses of the HMI and computer are set in the same network segment, the HMI upload/download can be done via Ethernet. When you click Download Screen Data or Upload Screen Data, the software will automatically search for the HMI with the same network segment and you can click OK to start the transmission.
November, 2018
27-65
Parameters Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
27
PC COM Port is for data upload/download between the PC COM port and HMI. If you select PC COM Port to upload/download, you must first enter the HMI system screen and go to [Up/Download] > [Standard Mode] and choose COM 1 or 2 COM.
Next, set the port number for the PC COM Port in the software.
Right-click on [This Computer] > [Manage] > [Ports (COM & LPT)] to see the COM Port number of the computer.
Upload/ Download
settings
PC COM Port
You can set the time interval for the software to save the project automatically. If you set it to AutoSave 0 min, it means this option is unchecked (function disabled). The default minimum is 3 min. and
time the maximum is 120 min. interval
Open
previous file when starting
If you check this option, the HMI automatically displays the last edited project the next time you start DOPSoft.
ScrEditor
27-66
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Parameters Settings
If you check [Display drawing zone at center], the editing screen is displayed in the center.
27
Display drawing zone at center If it is not checked, the editing screen is at the upper left corner by default.
Include
picture data when
If the edited project has graphic data, but this option is not checked, the graphic content will be empty after uploading the screen data to the HMI.
uploading
November, 2018
27-67
Parameters Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
27
This function automatically converts the element memory address into a tag name according to the tag name list, so the address of the element to be created will be displayed with a tag name.
The steps to check [Auto convert input address to tag name] are as follows:
Step 1: go to [Options] > [Tag name list] to edit the data.
Step 2: go to [Options] > [Environment], and check [Auto convert input address to tag name]. Create a Numeric Entry element and set the Write Address to $100.
Auto convert
input address
to tag name
Step 3: after you input the data, the memory address is automatically converted to the tag "DELTA".
Auto
reboot after firmware
When this option is checked, the HMI automatically reboots once the firmware is updated, instead of prompting a message "Update Firmware Succeed!!!".
update
27-68
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Parameters Settings
Reinstall After executing [Reinstall HMI USB Driver], the system reinstalls the USB driver for the HMI. HMI USB After executing [Uninstall HMI USB Driver], the system uninstalls the USB driver for the HMI.
Driver These two options are used when you are unable to upload/download data through USB Uninstall transmission. In this case, you can uninstall and then reinstall the HMI USB driver to ensure HMI USB normal transmission between the HMI and the software.
Driver This method is applicable in Nomral and CDC USB transmission mode.
Four separators are provided.You can set the displaying separator in the CSV files to be exported.
27
,
CSV
Separator
;
TAB
SPACE You can use WordPad to check whether the separators in the exported CSV file are correct.
November, 2018
27-69
Parameters Settings
27
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
DOPSoft User Manual
27-70
November, 2018
Advanced Settings
This chapter explains the module parameters, communication parameters, model conversion, and environment setup.
Test
28.1 Tag Table ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 28-2 28.2 HMI Identifier ������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 28-13 28.3 FileSlot File Management ��������������������������������������������������������������� 28-15 28.4 Device Data table�������������������������������������������������������������������������� 28-22 28.5 Picture Bank �������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 28-27 28.6 Text Bank ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 28-31 28.7 Multi-Lang input character count calculation����������������������������������������28-35
November, 2018
28-1
Advanced Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
28.1 Tag Table
28
Tag Table is used to help users set tags for the memory addresses. For example, with an address set as $100 = DELTA, when entering $100 later, DELTA can be used to replace $100. Refer to the figure below.
Figure 28.1.1 Tag Table
Figure 28.1.2 Set tags
Tag Table allows users to import and make use of the Symbol Table edited by WPL and ISPSoft, enhancing convenience of programming. The following section introduces each item on the Tag Table.
28-2
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 28.1.1 Tag Table Tag Table
Advanced Settings
28
You can open an already-created tag or CSV file in the Tag Table. The CSV file includes the Symbol Table file exported by WPL and ISPSoft or the Tag Table exported by DOPSoft.
Import Label
November, 2018
28-3
Advanced Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
28
Tag Table
Export a Symbol Table using WPL. The steps are as follows: 1. Run the WPL software. Add a project and select [View] > [Symbol Table].
Import Label
2. After entering the table, double-click the left mouse button.
3. Enter "D2000" for Device Name and "delta" for Identifier. Press OK to exit the Edit Symbol window.
28-4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Tag Table 4. Right-click on the added symbol and export the symbol as a CSV file.
Advanced Settings
28
5. Name the exported CSV file as "delta.csv".
Import Label
6. Run DOPSoft. Select [Options] > [Tag Table]. Click importing.
and select the "delta.csv" file for
November, 2018
28-5
Advanced Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
28
Tag Table
7. Select the COM Port to import to and set Station number. The default station number is 0, but you can set the number as you like. Press OK once finishing the setup.
Import Label
28-6
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Advanced Settings
Tag Table 8. After pressing OK, the Symbol Table of WPL is imported to DOPSoft.
Note: the imported symbols are all recognized by DOPSoft as upper case letters. Thus, for the example above, the lower case symbols of "delta" edited in WPL are recognized as upper case symbols of "DELTA". Export a Symbol Table using ISPSoft.
The steps are as follows:
1. Run the ISPSoft software. Create a project. Right-click in the program to add a POU. Press OK to finish.
28
Import Label
November, 2018
28-7
Advanced Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
28
Tag Table 2. After adding a POU, right-click on a blank area in Local Symbols to add a symbol.
Import Label
3. Enter "delta" for the Identifier and "D3000" for the Address. Once done, press OK to exit the window.
28-8
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Advanced Settings
Tag Table
4. Once done adding a symbol, enter the Local Symbols window. Right-click on the "delta" identifier to select Export Local Symbol and save it as a HMI.csv file.
28
Import Label
November, 2018
28-9
Advanced Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
28
Tag Table
5. Run DOPSoft. Select [Options] > [Tag Table]. Click importing.
and select the "HMI.csv" file for
6. Select the COM Port to import to and set Station number. The default station number is 0, but you can set the number as you like. Press OK once finishing the setup.
Import Label
7. After pressing OK, the Symbol Table of ISPSoft is imported to DOPSoft.
Note: the imported symbols are all recognized by DOPSoft as upper case letters. Thus, for the example above, the lower case symbols of "test" edited in ISPSoft are recognized as upper case symbols of "TEST".
28-10
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Tag Table
You can save the edited tag as a CSV file.
Export Label
Advanced Settings
28
Press
Add Label
to add a new tag data entry.
When you press , the new data entry is inserted above the row of the selected data entry.
Insert Label
When you select a row of data entry, press
Delete Label
to delete the selected data entry.
November, 2018
28-11
Advanced Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
28
Tag Table If you added or inserted a row of data entry, and exit this editing screen without filling in any data info, the following warning message will pop up to warn you that the tag value is incorrect.
Exit the screen
28-12
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Advanced Settings
28.2 HMI Identifier
This chapter explains the HMI Identifier setting provided in DOPSoft. When a HMI Identifier is set on the HMI, an error message will pop up when opening a screen that does not contain an identical HMI Identifier. This function restricts the users to only download the exclusive screen project to the user's exclusive HMI. When enabling the HMI Identifier function, the HMI will match the correct HMI Identifier for normal operation upon booting up. Thus, the HMI Identifier can be set separately for the HMI and screen.
28
November, 2018
Figure 28.2.1 HMI Identifier Settings
28-13
Advanced Settings
28
Table 28.2.1 Properties of HMI Identifier Settings Property of HMI Identifier Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
Check to enable protection for the HMI Identifier. Enable Protection
Password
The input format for passwords is HEX that supports numerals 0 - 9 and alphabets A F. Other characters and symbols cannot be correctly entered to the password field.
Download HMI Identifier
Executing this button only writes the identifier to the HMI. Once downloaded, the screen file and HMI Identifier will be compared every time
when the HMI is turned on.
Note:
1. After you check Enable Protection and set its password, if you download by using Download All Data without executing Download HMI Identifier, only the identifier for the screen will be downloaded.
2. When there is an identifier for the HMI, but no identifier for the screen, the [Check HMI Machine ID Fail 1] message will appear.
3. When there is an identifier for the screen, but no identifier for the HMI, the [Check HMI Machine ID Fail 2] message will appear.
4. When there is an identifier for both the HMI and screen, but the comparison does not match, the [Check HMI Machine ID Fail 3] message will appear.
5. If you forget the set identifier, the HMI identifier can only be deleted by going to [Tools] > [Restore Factory Default]. However, all the screen files in the HMI will also be deleted.
28-14
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Advanced Settings
28.3 FileSlot File Management
In the FileSlot File Management setup window, users can plan for the size and content of each FileSlot. FileSlot files offer users more flexibility and convenience in planning for storage and use of a large amount of data. After creating a FileSlot, you can use FileSlotRead to read the file content to the register. You can also store the register data in these files. For example, as the pickup arm program for each product is different, you can store the program for each product in a different FileSlot and quickly switch the program for the product by reading a different FileSlot. Note: 1. After downloading the FileSlot to the HMI, a memory space required by the FileSlot will be reserved in
the HMI memory ROM.
28
HMI Flash ROM
FileSlot 1
FileSlot 2
Screen Data
FileSlot 3 ...
FileSlot 4 ...
FileSlot (n-1) FileSlot n
2. With efficiency of the HMI and characteristics of data storage in consideration, only memory space will be reserved when downloading screens with FileSlot to the HMI, instead of directly generating a file. The file macros such as FileSlotWrite and ImportFileSlot are needed in order to really generate the file.
3. To delete the FileSlot file on the HMI, use Format HMI, Restore Factory Default, or the FileSlotRemove macro command to remove the file.
4. When a FileSlot file is in the HMI, downloading the screen will not change the FileSlot file in the HMI. For screen files created using DOPSoft and auto update files for the screens, copying the screens through the File Copy option in the HMI system to the HMI that has the FileSlot file saved in will not change the FileSlot file in the HMI.
5. As updating screens will not change the FileSlot file, we advise that you execute Format HMI or Restore Factory Default before re-planning the screens and FileSlot size.
6. The File Copy function in the HMI system exports the FileSlot file. The exported file is stored in HMI-000\FILESLOT. Through this approach, you can import the FileSlot file to another HMI. If the FileSlot file is saved in the other HMI, the FileSlot file in this HMI will be overwritten.
November, 2018
28-15
Advanced Settings
The following section is the properties for File Management.
28
Table 28.3.1 Properties of File Management File Management settings
DOPSoft User Manual
FileSlot Count
You can input the count of FileSlots you need. You can use up to 1024 FileSlots in maximum.
Input the total FileSlot count, then click Update to plan for the set number of FileSlot. As shown in the figure below, if you set the total FileSlot count to 6, there will be 6 FileSlots planned.
Update
28-16
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Advanced Settings
File Management settings
You can set the Max Size for the FileSlot in batch. Enter the Start ID, End ID, and New Max Size. Click Batch Setting to set the New Max Size to the FileSlot with the assigned ID. As shown in the figure below, set the Start ID to 3, End ID to 6, and New Max Size to 8 to change the Max Size for the FileSlot of ID3 - ID6 to 8, with the Max Size for the remaining FileSlots kept to the default value of 4.
28
Batch Setting Max Size
The Delete button deletes the FileSlots in the File Management window. Select one FileSlot and press Delete.
Delete
Before deletion
November, 2018
28-17
Advanced Settings
28
DOPSoft User Manual
File Management settings There were 6 FileSlots originally, with 5 remaining after the deletion.
After deletion
Max Size
Each FileSlot can have its Max Size set individually. The maximum value for Max Size is 102400 KB and the minimum value is 4 KB, as listed in the table below.
DOP-103BQ
DOP-103WQ
DOP-107BV
DOP-107CV
4 KB
DOP-107EV
DOP-107EG
DOP-107WV
DOP-110CS
DOP-110WS
28-18
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Advanced Settings
File Management settings
Once finished setting the FileSlot File Management properties, click OK to save the previous changes and then exit the File Management window. If the total FileSlot file size is larger than the User Application space in the Flash ROM provided for the model, a warning message will pop up, as shown in the figure below. For the size of the User Application space in the Flash ROM of each model, refer to the manual of each model.
28
OK
Cancel
When you click Cancel, there is no action of saving no matter if there is any change in the
data. It is same as clicking
on the upper right corner of the window.
November, 2018
28-19
Advanced Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
The following section is the example of File Management.
28
Table 28.3.2 File Management example
File Management example Go to [Options] > [File Management]. Set the FileSlot Count to 5. Click Update to display the set FileSlot Count. You can set
the maximum file size for each FileSlot, and when finished, click OK to exit the File Management window.
Add FileSlot
Create the
button for executing
macro command
On the DOPSoft editing screen, create two Momentary buttons and set their Write Addresses to $50.0 and $50.1. In On Macro, enter the respective FileSlotRead command, $100 = FileSlotRead($101, $1000, $102, $104) and FileSlotWrite command, $100 = FileSlotWrite($101, $1000, $102, $104)
28-20
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Advanced Settings
File Management example
On the screen, create Numeric Entry elements that correspond to the macro command parameters, as shown in the figure below.
28
Create Numeric
Entry element
On the screen, create Numeric Entry elements (addresses of $1000 - $1048) to read the content of the FileSlot file, as shown in the figure below.
When all the elements are created, execute compile and download the screen to the HMI. Use the FileSlotWrite macro to write the data in the data area to the specified FileSlot
file. The example in the figure below shows how to write the 10 Words in the data area to the FileSlot file with the ID as 1. When the data is written into the FileSlot, it can be read back using FileSlotRead.
Execution result
Before using the FileSlotRead, be sure to use FileSlotWrite or FileSlotIMPORT to create the actual files.
November, 2018
28-21
Advanced Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
28.4 Device Data table
28
Device Data table enables the HMI to import or export non-volatile $M data, but it does not enable downloading after editing of the data on the DOPSoft. To use the table, read the $M data from HMI A. Use the upload function available on the DOPSoft to upload and export the data. Then, import the data to HMI B to get a shared content of $M data.
With [Include device table] checked, you can update $M data into the HMI when downloading all screen data, creating screen data files, or copying files, which enhances convenience when multiple HMIs need to share the same set of $M data.
Figure 28.4.1 Device Data table
28-22
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Table 28.4.1 Properties of Device Data table Device Data table
Advanced Settings
28
Device Data table displays $M non-volatile data with a range of $M0 - $M1023. You can set the Data Type or Data Format for display.
WORD The default Data Type displayed is WORD. You can change the $M data to the data type displayed for DWORD.
Data Type DWORD
November, 2018
28-23
Advanced Settings
28
Device Data table The default Data Format displayed is Decimal.
Decimal
DOPSoft User Manual
Data Format
You can change the $M data to the data format displayed for Hexadecimal.
Hexadecimal
This action reads the current $M data on the HMI and uploads it to this Device Data table for display.
Before carrying out this action, you will be required to enter the highest security password. The default is 12345678.
Action
Upload from HMI
Download to
HMI
This action downloads the $M data displayed on the Device Data table to the HMI.
You can check if the data is correct by creating registers $M0 - $M1023 on the HMI.
28-24
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Advanced Settings
Device Data table
You can import the Device Data table stored on another HMI. The supported file format is .dep.
28
Import
Action
You can export the $M data displayed on the current Device Data table. The file format saved is .dep.
Export
When [Include device table] is checked, you can download $M non-volatile data to the HMI by executing Downloading All Data.
When download
all data
November, 2018
28-25
Advanced Settings
28
Device Data table
DOPSoft User Manual
When [Include device table] is checked, you can create the screen data file to sync the Devi ce Data table to another HMI via file copying.
28-26
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Advanced Settings
28.5 Picture Bank
Picture Bank enables users to quickly apply the pictures to the elements. It allows users to import pictures not provided by the system and perform simple processing on the pictures, such as Inverse, Convert to 256 Colors Grayscale, Horizontal Mirror, and Vertical Mirror.
Table 28.5.1 Properties of Picture Bank Picture Bank
28
Picture Bank provides functions including [Add Picture Bank
], [Open / Install Picture Bank
],
[Remove Picture Bank ], [Update Picture Bank Content ], [Import Picture Data ], [Export
Picture Bank Content to File ], [Delete ], [Inverse ], [Convert to 256 Colors Grayscale ],
[Horizontal Mirror ], [Vertical Mirror ], and [Adjust Saturation ].
Click
and the software will require that you enter the name for the picture bank.
Add Picture Bank
After adding the picture bank, click
to import the picture to the picture bank.
November, 2018
28-27
Advanced Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
28
Picture Bank Open / Install Picture Bank enables users to use the picture bank created in another project after
clicking
to have it installed. You need to select the path to the location where the old
picture bank is stored.
Open / Install Picture Bank
After you click , the software will ask if you would like to remove the picture bank.
Remove Picture Bank
After adding the picture bank, you can click
to import the picture into the picture bank.
Import Picture
Data
28-28
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Advanced Settings
Picture Bank
After importing the picture, the content of the picture bank can also be exported. The file will be exported according to the selected picture file format. Formats such as JPG and PNG will be saved in .bmp format; if the picture file format is GIF, it will be saved in .GIP format.
28
Export Picture Bank Content to File
This function is to delete the imported picture data and pictures. Before deleting, the program will confirm with you whether to proceed with deleting.
Delete
The Inverse function switches colors for the original picture to have it displayed in negatives.
Before
After
Inverse
The Grayscale 256 option converts original colors of the picture to have it displayed in grayscale (256 levels).
Convert to 256 Colors Grayscale
Before
After
November, 2018
28-29
Advanced Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
28
Picture Bank
Horizontal Mirror creates a left / right mirror effect for the original picture.
Before
After
Horizontal Mirror
Vertical Mirror creates an up / down mirror effect for the original picture.
Before
After
Vertical Mirror
Saturation is also known as chroma of the colors. It refers to the brightness of the colors or the amount of a single color within a specific color. The higher the amount, the higher the color saturation is for this color; whereas, the lower the amount, the lower the color saturation is for this color.
This function is to make the original pictures more vivid in color rendering.
The settings below adjust the saturation to 100.
Adjust Saturation
Before
After
28-30
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Advanced Settings
28.6 Text Bank
Users can edit some frequently used phrases and store them in the Text Bank. This way, when you need to input text to the element, you can directly import the previously edited string from the Text Bank with no need of re-entering the string. After the text string is created in the Text Bank, the [Edit] > [Text Process] function enables users to connect to the Text Bank and import the already-created text directly to the selected element, as shown in the figure below.
28
November, 2018
Figure 28.6.1 Import from Text Bank
28-31
Advanced Settings
DOPSoft User Manual
If you have set multiple languages, you can also edit the texts in different languages in the Text Bank.
28
Table 28.6.1 Multi-language Text Bank content
Chinese
English
Table 28.6.2 Properties of Text Bank Text Bank
28-32
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Advanced Settings
Text Bank
The Text Bank functions include [Add a text bank bank file], and [Save].
], [Delete selected text bank
You can also change the font for the entered text in the Text Bank.
], [Open text
When you have created multiple languages, the corresponding language screen will be added according to the multi-language setting.
28
Press
Add a text bank
to add a data row for you to enter the Message Content.
To delete a data row, click on the data to be deleted and press . Delete selected text bank
You can directly use the open function to import data from the already-created text file (.txt).
The figure below shows the created text file.
Open text bank file
November, 2018
28-33
Advanced Settings
Text Bank Press Open and select the text file to be imported.
28
Open text bank file
DOPSoft User Manual
After opening the text file, the text bank will import the data in the text file. For the Save option, you can export the content in the text bank and save it to a file.
Save
28-34
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Advanced Settings
28.7 Multi-Lang input character count calculation
This feature allows users to know the exact total bytes of the input characters. The number of bytes for different languages varies, so errors may occur when calculating the length. Thus, this tool can let you calculate the correct number of bytes for Unicode characters.
28
Figure 28.7.1 Multi-Lang input character count calculation tool The following examples are the calculations of the byte numbers in three languages.
Table 28.7.1 Multi-Lang input character count calculation result Traditional Chinese
English
Japanese
November, 2018
28-35
Advanced Settings
28
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
DOPSoft User Manual
28-36
November, 2018
System Screen
This chapter describes the functions that the HMI system screen provides, including System Setting, Up/Download, System Info, and HMI Doctor.
Test A.1 System screen overview ���������������������������������������������������������������������A-3 A.2 System Setting����������������������������������������������������������������������������������A-8 A.3 Up/Download ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������A-29 A.4 System Info ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������A-38 A.5 HMI Doctor�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������A-39
November, 2018
A-1
System Screen
DOPSoft User Manual
A
Before entering the HMI system screen, DOPSoft allows users to set the language to be displayed on the system screen, including English, Simplified Chinese, Spanish, and Traditional Chinese. English will be used as an example for the description below.
Figure A.1 System Language setup
A-2
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
System Screen
A.1 System screen overview
How to enter the system screen Step 1: press on a blank space for more than 3 seconds. You will then hear a buzzer sound. Step 2: after hearing the buzzer sound, press the top left corner within 1 second to enter the system screen.
How to exit the system screen Once in the system screen, press the button on the top right corner to exit the HMI system screen.
A
Figure A.1.1 Press the top right corner to exit the system screen
How to operate the system screen You can press the icon on the screen to access the corresponding function options. The following section introduces each of the functions on the system screen.
Figure A.1.2 System screen
November, 2018
A-3
System Screen
A
DOPSoft User Manual
Table A.1.1 System screen function list
System screen function list
Display
Brightness
Adjust brightness.
Date/Time
Date
Set system date.
Time
Set system time.
System Setting Touch panel
Delay
Set delay time for the touch panel.
Force
Set pressing force on the touch panel.
Network
Calibration
Calibrate the touch panel.
HMI name
Mode
IP Mask Gateway DNS MAC
Display the name set for the HMI. DHCP Auto-acquire IP address. Static Customize IP addess. BOOTP Auto-acquire IP address.
Set IP address. Set network mask. Set gateway. Set domain name. Display MAC address for the HMI.
A-4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual System Setting
System Screen
System screen function list
Network App
VNC
Enable Password
eRemote / eServer
Enable Password
Enable or disable VNC. Set connection password. Enable or disable eRemote / eServer.
Set connection password.
COM Port Audio
COM 1 COM 2 COM 3 Buzzer
Set COM Mode, Baud Rate, Stop Bits, Data Bits, Parity Bits, Communication Delay, Communication Timeout, Communication Retry Times, HMI Station, PLC Station, Multi-Drop, and Baud Rate Tuning for COM 1 - COM 3.
Adjust HMI key tone and buzzer volume.
A
Password
Set the Password Table for Levels 0 - 7. The highest security password is needed for setting up the Password Table.
MISC.
Touch Cursor ScreenSaver
Time Boot Delay
Times Default Language
Boot Display
USB Comm. Mode
Set up display of touch cursor. Set up the time after which the screensaver is enabled. Set up delay time for booting the device.
Select multi-language ID.
Set up display of boot screen when starting up.
Set USB upload / download mode.
November, 2018
A-5
System Screen
A
System Setting
DOPSoft User Manual
System screen function list
Format
Formatting is available for HMI, USB Disk, and SD Card. The file system is cleared after formatting.
File Manager
File Copy
Copy the screen to external storage (USB Disk or SD Card).
Multi-Screen File
Set up multiple boot screens.
FW Update
Update HMI firmware from USB Disk or SD Card.
Up/Download System Info
Standard Mode Bypass Mode Transfer Mode
COM 1
COM 2
Mode 1 COM 1
COM 2 Mode 2 COM 2 COM 1 Upload
Download
When using COM Port for up- and downloading, COM 1 or COM 2 in the Standard Mode must be selected for up- and downloading screen data.
The HMI is used as a bridge in the Bypass Mode to transmit data between PC and PLC.
Upload and download DVP files used in the PLC.
Display HMI-related data, including firmware version, model, battery capacity, memory space, CPU rate, test data, current time, PLC driver in use, and connection to external storage.
A-6
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual HMI Doctor
System screen function list Network
Network test.
Color ADC
Red Green Blue Black White Color
Red screen test. Green screen test. Blue screen test. Black screen test. White screen test. Color saturation test.
ADC test.
System Screen
A
Buzz/LED
Buzzer / LED test.
Draw Line
Line drawing test for the touch panel.
November, 2018
A-7
System Screen
A
A.2 System Setting
The System Setting operation is described below.
The item is not selected when the icon background is blue.
DOPSoft User Manual
Return to System screen menu.
Use left and right arrows to move function bar icons.
The item is selected when the icon background is gray.
Figure A.2.1 System Setting operation
A-8
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Display
System Screen
A
Set up LCD display Display
Figure A.2.2 Display
Brightness
You can adjust the brightness of the HMI.
November, 2018
A-9
System Screen Date/Time
A
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure A.2.3 Date/Time Set date and time (year, month, day, hour, minute, second) for the HMI system.
Date
Date/Time
Set HMI system date with the year, month, and day. Time
Set HMI system time with the hour, minute, and second.
A-10
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Touch Panel
System Screen
A
Figure A.2.4 Touch Panel
Set the touch panel, including the Delay time, pressing Force, and Calibration.
Delay
Set delay time for the HMI to process touch and movement of messages. Move the slider right to reduce the delay time for quicker movement; move the slider left to increase the delay time for slower movement.
Touch Panel
Force
Set the pressing force for the HMI panel. Move the slider left to reduce the force, meaning the HMI is more sensitive to forces, therefore requires less force for the touch operation; move the slider right to increase the force, meaning the HMI is less sensitive to forces, therefore requires more force for the touch operation.
Calibration
Follow the instructions and touch the center of the calibration icon to conduct five-point calibration for the HMI touch panel. A significant deviation may occur to the touch panel if you touch a point far away from the center point in the calibration area. It is suggested that you use a dedicated stylus for the calibration.
November, 2018
A-11
System Screen Network
A
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure A.2.5 Network You can use this option to set network IP access mode, IP, Mask, Gateway, and DNS.
You can go to [Options] > [Communication Settings] > [Ethernet1] > [Localhost] in the HMI program to change the following settings for the network in the System Setting.
Network
A-12
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
System Screen
Network
HMI Name
Display the name set for the HMI. This name is set up by the HMI, and to change its name, go to [Options] > [Configuration] > [Main].
DHCP Auto-acquire IP address for the HMI.
Mode
Mask Gateway
DNS MAC
Static Manually set IP address for the HMI.
BOOTP
Auto-acquire IP address for the HMI, but there is no lease period for this IP address.
Set network mask. When DHCP is OFF, the mask can be set manually.
Set gateway. When DHCP is OFF, the gateway can be set manually.
Set domain name server. When DHCP is OFF, DNS can be set manually.
Display the MAC address of the HMI. This setting cannot be changed.
A
November, 2018
A-13
System Screen Network App
A
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure A.2.6 Network App
Set to enable VNC and eRemote / eServer functions.
Network App
VNC
eRemote / eServer
EtherNet/IP
Enable Password
Enable Password
Enable
The default is OFF. When set to ON, you can use VNC Viewer to
remotely control the HMI.
The default password is 12345678. You can change the password.
The default is OFF. When set to ON, you can use eRemote to remotely
control the HMI and use eServer to collect the HMI data.
The default password is 12345678. You can change the password.
The default is OFF. When set to ON, the host equipment can search
and locate this HMI.
A-14
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual COM Port
System Screen
A
Figure A.2.7 COM Port
Set COM 1, COM 2, and COM 3 parameters.
COM Port
COM 1 COM 2 COM 3
Set COM Mode, Baud Rate, Stop Bits, Data Bits, Parity Bits, Communication Delay, Communication Timeout, Communication Retry Times, HMI Station, PLC Station, Multi-Drop, and Baud Rate Tuning for COM 1 - COM 3
November, 2018
A-15
System Screen Audio
A
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure A.2.8 Audio
Set volume for the speaker and buzzer.
Audio
Buzzer
Adjust volume for the HMI buzzer. Move the slider left to decrease the volume; move the slider right to increase the volume.
A-16
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual Password
System Screen
A
Figure A.2.9 Password Set up HMI Password Table for passwords of Levels 0 - 7.
Set the Password Table for Levels 0 - 7. Select the level to log in with, then enter the account and password to set the password.
Password
November, 2018
A-17
System Screen MISC.
A
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure A.2.10 MISC.
Set MISC. settings for the HMI, as listed below:
MISC.
Touch Cursor
ScreenSaver Time
Boot Delay Times
Set up display of touch cursor. Set up the time after which the screensaver is enabled. Set up delay time for booting the device. Select multi-language ID.
Default Language
Boot Display Set up display of boot screen when starting up.
A-18
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
System Screen
Use this mode to look for a removable storage device named "DELTA" in Computer.
DISK
Under this mode, go to My Computer > Right click and select Content > Go to Device Manager and see if the device named "HMI" is displayed under Ports.
A
MISC.
USB Comm. Mode
CDC
November, 2018
A-19
System Screen File Manager
A
DOPSoft User Manual
Figure A.2.11 File Manager
This setting is for formatting, copying files, selecting multiple boot screens, and updating firmware.
Format Formatting is available for HMI, USB Disk, and SD Card. The file system is cleared after formatting.
File Manager
File Copy
Copy the screen to external storage devices (USB Disk or SD Card).
Multi-Screen File Set up multiple boot screens.
FW Update
Update HMI firmware from USB Disk or SD Card.
A-20
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
System Screen
Format
You can format the HMI internal and external devices with this Format function, which include HMI, USB Disk, and SD Card. You cannot select the USB and SD options if the USB Disk and SD Card are not inserted into the HMI. After selecting the device to be formatted, enter the highest security password (default is 12345678), and the selected device will be formatted once the password is verified. When formatting is completed, the system prompts a reminder that the HMI will be rebooting.
A
November, 2018
A-21
System Screen
A
DOPSoft User Manual
A-22
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
File Copy You can select files in the source directory to copy to the destination directory.
System Screen
A
Note: 1. The HMI does not support direct copying between disks. 2. The HMI only supports the fixed directories HMI-000 to HMI-255. 3. If you select HMI as the destination directory, the original files will be removed before the files from the
source directory are copied to the destination directory. 4. If you select New... as the destination directory, the HMI will look for a directory not used in HMI-000
to HMI-255 and create it as the destination directory. 5. If the screen file in the source directory is password protected, the HMI will prompt for the password.
Enter the highest security password for the screen file of the source directory to perform the copy function.
November, 2018
A-23
System Screen
DOPSoft User Manual
A
Multi-Screen File Multi-Screen File enables the user to select the startup screen file. You can set the boot screen file after entering the highest security password.
Note: 1. The HMI only supports the fixed directories HMI-000 to HMI-255. 2. If you find the boot directory of the external disk not existing when you boot the machine, the HMI will
open the internal screen file instead of changing the path to the boot directory. Whereas, if the boot directory is found when you boot the machine, the orignally assigned directory of the external disk will be used as the boot directory. 3. If the boot directory is in an external disk, the non-volatile data of this screen will be stored in this boot directory automatically, no matter the data is set to save in the internal or external disk.
A-24
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
System Screen
FW Update This function enables the user to perform firmware update using an external storage device (USB Disk or SD Card).
A
The following section presents an example for the firmware update. Select [File] > [Create Screen Data File].
Step 1
November, 2018
A-25
System Screen
DOPSoft User Manual
Select an external disk (USB Disk or SD Card) for creating the screen data and click OK.
A
Step 2
When the screen data is created successfully, the following message appears. Step 3 Step 4 Insert the external disk into the HMI.
Enter the HMI system screen and select [System Setting] > [File Manager] > [FW Update].
Step 5
A-26
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
System Screen
Select source location of the firmware to be updated. The firmware version after the update will be displayed on the screen. Confirm the version and click the icon below to update the firmware.
A
Step 6
After execution, the HMI will process and unzip the firmware file in the USB Disk or SD Card.
Step 7
November, 2018
A-27
System Screen
DOPSoft User Manual
Upon completing unzipping the firmware file, the HMI will automatically restart and proceed with the firmware updating.
A Step 8
A-28
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
A.3 Up/Download
System Screen
A
November, 2018
A-29
System Screen
DOPSoft User Manual
A
Standard Mode
Set the COM Port to the communication protocol setting for DOPSoft and wait for the DOPSoft to send the motion command and data packet for up/download. Standard Mode is used when you use the PC COM Port provided by the software to download ([Options] > [Environment]), and you need to go to the system screen to select [Up/Download] > [Standard Mode]. Select COM 1 or COM 2 ports and wait for the up/download of the screen data and recipe data.
A-30
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
System Screen
A
Standard Mode
COM 1 COM 2
COM 1 for up/download. Set COM 1 to transmit and receive the command data and data packet for the up/downloading of DOPSoft.
COM 2 for up/download. Set COM 2 to transmit and receive the command data and data packet for the up/downloading of DOPSoft.
November, 2018
A-31
System Screen
DOPSoft User Manual
A
Bypass Mode With the HMI as an intermediary, it will transmit the data received from the source port to the destination port.
Bypass Mode
Mode 1 COM 1 COM 2
With COM 1 as the source port and COM 2 as the destination port, the data that COM 1 received is transmitted using the COM 2 protocol.
Mode 2 COM 2 COM 1
With COM 2 as the source port and COM 1 as the destination port, the data that COM 2 received is transmitted using the COM 1 protocol.
A-32
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
System Screen
Transfer Mode Transfer Mode is used for up/download of the DVP and ISP files in the PLC used by the HMI.
A
Select COM 1, and the HMI will automatically search for the PLC.
November, 2018
A-33
System Screen
DOPSoft User Manual
A
Once the search is complete, the DVP file found can be uploaded or downloaded from the external storage device to the PLC.
Transfer Mode
Upload Download
Upload and download the DVP and ISP files used in the PLC. When you press COM 1 - COM 3, the software will automatically search the currently connected PLC devices. Once done searching, the files found during the search can be uploaded to the storage device. To copy the DVP and ISP files from the storage device to the PLC, click the download button.
A-34
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
System Screen
Download DVP file to PLC Select the communication port that connects to the PLC. Then, the HMI will search for the files in the PLC.
A
Select the Dvp1.dvp file in the external storage device, and click the download button to download the file to the PLC.
November, 2018
A-35
System Screen
DOPSoft User Manual
A
Upload DVP file in the PLC to the external storage device (USB Disk) Select the DVP file in the PLC communication port and click the upload button to upload the file to the USB Disk.
Note: 1. If a PLC file is to be uploaded as a new file, select "New.." from the window on the left and press the upload
button. 2. The program uploaded by the HMI will be saved in *.DVP format. 3. When downloading a PLC file, the HMI will ask for the project password and PLC password*. 4. When downloading a PLC file, both the program and PLC need IDs, and their IDs need to be identical to be
allowed for downloading. Or, when both of them have no IDs, the downloading is also allowed. 5. When downloading a PLC file, the HMI prompts the pop-up window for the project password first and then
the PLC password. 6. When uploading a PLC file, the HMI prompts the pop-up window for the PLC ID first and then the PLC
password. 7. When uploading a file, the HMI will ask for the PLC ID and PLC password. If the PLC has a set PLC
password, this PLC password will be placed in the program as the project password when uploading. For example, assumie that the PLC password is set to 1234 and the project password is set to 5678, the password inquired by the HMI is the PLC password when uploading the file. The PLC password will be regarded as the project password for the program when opening the file after uploading. At this time, both the PLC password and the project password will be 1234. 8. When using a project edited by ISPSoft, execute compile before downloading it to the PLC. Otherwise, the error message "IL code size is mismatch" will appear. 9. The Transfer Mode only supports *.dvp and *.isp up/download. It does not support the upload or download of Subroutine / Ladder Graphic Code / SFC Graph / Device Name Comment / Row Comment / Non-volatile Data / Label Structure / Symbol Structure... etc.
A-36
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
System Screen
*PLC password is the password set in the WPL and ISP software by selecting [System Security Setting] > [Password Function].
See the table below for the functions supported on each version:
PLC series
PLC password
ES / EC / EC3
V
SS
V
EX
V
SA
V
SX
V
SC
V
EH
V
EH2
V
SV
V
ES2 / EX2
V
SS2
V
SA2
V
SX2
V
SE
V
MC
V
EH3
V
SV2
V
Limit on login
attempts
V8.20 or above X
V8.20 or above X
V3.00 or above X X
V1.40 or above
V1.40 or above V V
V V V V V V
Password for subroutines
V8.20 or above X
V8.20 or above X
V3.00 or above X X
V1.40 or above
V1.40 or above V V V V V V V V
PLC ID and program ID
V8.20 or above X
V8.20 or above X
V3.00 or above X X
V1.40 or above
V1.40 or above V V V V V V V V
Project password (set in editing software)
WPLSoft V2.20 and ISPSoft V1.60 or above versions support the project password function
A
AH series
AHCPU510-EN AHCPU510-RS2 AHCPU520-EN AHCPU520-RS2 AHCPU530-EN AHCPU530-RS2
PLC password
V V V V V V
Limit on login
attempts
V V V V V V
Password for
subroutines
V V V V V V
PLC ID and program ID
V V V V V V
Project password (set in editing software)
ISPSoft supports the Project
Password function
November, 2018
A-37
System Screen
DOPSoft User Manual
A
A.4 System Info
This function enables the user to view the HMI-related info including the firmware version, model, current battery capacity, size of internal Flash ROM, CPU clock, current system date and time, PLC device, and the external storage device.
After switching the screen, you can see the PLC Driver information of the HMI.
A-38
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
System Screen
A.5 HMI Doctor
HMI Doctor is a simple application that enables the user to test the hardware interface. Functions currently available include Color (Red, Green, Blue, Black, and White), Draw Line, Buzz/LED, ADC, and Network.
A
Red screen test Check if there is any dark point or similar stain on the red screen of the LCD surface.
November, 2018
A-39
System Screen
DOPSoft User Manual
A
Green screen test Check if there is any dark point or similar stain on the green screen of the LCD surface.
Blue screen test Check if there is any dark point or similar stain on the blue screen of the LCD surface.
A-40
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
System Screen
Black screen test Check if there is any dark point or similar stain on the black screen of the LCD surface.
A
White screen test Check if there is any dark point or similar stain on the white screen of the LCD surface.
November, 2018
A-41
System Screen
A
Color test Check if the LCD color scale is displayed normally.
DOPSoft User Manual
Draw Line This function tests if there is deviation between the position where you draw the line and the actual position of the line displayed on the screen. If the deviation is significant, please re-calibrate the touch panel.
A-42
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Buzz/LED The Buzz/LED function tests if the buzzer would ring.
System Screen
A
ADC test The ADC test function tests the Pressing Force, touch XY, system voltage, Battery, and Temperature.
November, 2018
A-43
System Screen
DOPSoft User Manual
A
Network test This function tests to see if the network is successfully connected. At first, the Lan 1 icon displays in gray, and if the connection is successful, the icon will be displayed in color.
A-44
November, 2018
Multi-Drop
This appendix explains the multi-drop structure and limits, as well as the multi-drop setup steps.
Test B.1 Multi-drop example ��������������������������������������������������������������������������B-4
November, 2018
B-1
Multi-Drop
DOPSoft User Manual
B
The multi-drop concept refers to the connection of multiple HMIs to one or more PLCs. When the host HMI is connected to a device, all client HMIs can create virtual connections via the network. Hence, you can operate a physical equipment using a single HMI in the multi-drop mode. Up to 12 links are available in the multi-drop structure, with every communication port added indicating a link for each of the 12 links. For example, if only one COM Port (using one PLC) is used, up to 12 HMIs can be connected. Assuming that each COM Port is connected to one PLC (using three PLCs), up to four HMIs can be connected. Refer to the figure below.
Multi-drop structure
Limit
12 links
HMI Client
HMI HOST
HMI Client
HMI Client
HMI Client
PLC x 3
PLC x 3
PLC x 3
PLC x 3
Figure B.1.1 Multi-drop structure I
Multi-drop structure
Limit
12 links
HMI HOST
HMI Client
HMI Client
HMI Client
HMI Client
HMI Client
HMI Client
HMI Client
HMI Client
HMI Client
HMI Client
HMI Client
HMI Client
PLC x 1 PLC x 1
PLC x 1
PLC x 1 PLC x 1 PLC x 1 PLC x 1 PLC x 1 PLC x 1 PLC x 1 PLC x 1 PLC x 1
Figure B.1.2 Multi-drop structure II
The concept and limit of the multi-drop structure are described above, with the setup and operation of the multi-drop structure explained below.
B-2
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Multi -Drop
The multi-drop mode is not supported if Delta DVP Q-Link is selected for the controller.
B
Figure B.1.3 Multi-drop mode
November, 2018
B-3
Multi-Drop
DOPSoft User Manual
B
B.1 Multi-drop example
The following example is taken in an environment using 3 HMIs to test the multi-drop mode. HMI-HOST is the host end, while HMI-Client1 and HMI-Client2 are the client end. The HMI-HOST is physically connected to a Delta DVP PLC. Refer to the figure below.
Ethernet
HMI-HOST
COM 2
Delta DVP PLC
HMI-Client 1
HMI-Client 2
Figure B.1.4 Multi-drop environment
B-4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Multi -Drop
HMI-HOST setup Create a project. Set the controller to "Delta DVP PLC" and select "Host" for Multi-Drop.
B
Figure B.1.5 Select "Host" for the Multi-Drop mode
November, 2018
B-5
Multi-Drop
DOPSoft User Manual
B
Go to [Ethernet1] > [Localhost]. Check Overwrite IP and set HMI IP Address as 172.16.190.100. Go to [Options] > [Configuration] > [Network Settings] to set the HMI name as HMI-HOST.
Figure B.1.6 HMI-HOST IP address setup
B-6
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Multi -Drop
Create a Numeric Entry element on the editing screen and set its write address to "D100". Create a Numeric Display element and set its read address to "D200".
B
Figure B.1.7 Create elements
After the editing is completed, execute compiling and download the screen to the HMI. HMI-Client 1 setup Create a project. Set the controller to "Delta DVP PLC" and select "Client" for Multi-Drop. Enter "172.16.190.100" in the IP Address field, which is the HMI-HOST IP address.
Figure B.1.8 Select "Client" for the Multi-Drop mode
November, 2018
B-7
Multi-Drop
DOPSoft User Manual
B
Go to [Ethernet1] > [Localhost]. Check [Overwrite IP] and set HMI IP Address as 172.16.190.101. Go to [Options] > [Configuration] > [Network Settings] to set the HMI name as HMI-Client1.
Figure B.1.9 HMI-Client1 IP address setup
B-8
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Multi -Drop
Create a Numeric Entry element on the editing screen and set its write address to "D200". Create a Numeric Display element and set its read address to "D100".
B
Figure B.1.10 Create elements
After the editing is completed, execute compiling and download the screen to the HMI. HMI-Client 2 setup Create a project. Set the controller to "Delta DVP PLC" and select "Client" for Multi-Drop. Enter "172.16.190.100" in the IP Address field, which is the HMI-HOST IP address.
Figure B.1.11 Select "Client" for the Multi-Drop mode
November, 2018
B-9
Multi-Drop
DOPSoft User Manual
B
Go to [Ethernet1] > [Localhost]. Check [Overwrite IP] and set HMI IP Address as 172.16.190.102. Go to [Options] > [Configuration] > [Network Settings] to set the HMI name as HMI-Client2.
Figure B.1.12 HMI-Client2 IP address setup
B-10
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Multi -Drop
Create a Numeric Entry element on the editing screen and set its write address to "D200". Create a Numeric Display element and set its read address to "D100".
B
Figure B.1.13 Create elements
After the editing is completed, execute compiling and download the screen to the HMI.
After HMI-HOST, HMI-Client1, and HMI-Client2 are set up and downloaded to the HMI, you can use any HMI to operate the PLC. If D200 is used to input 36 in HMI-Client1, both the D200 addresses of the HMI-HOST and HMI-Client2 will show as 36. If D100 is used to input 99 in HMI-HOST, both the D100 addresses of the HMI-Client1 and HMI-Client2 will show as 99.
Ethernet
HMI-HOST [On HMI-HOST, use the
Numeric Entry element D100
to input 99] D200 = 36
COM 2
Delta DVP PLC
HMI-Client 1 D100 = 99 [On HMI-Client1, use the
Numeric Entry element D200 to input 36]
Figure B.1.14 Execution results
HMI-Client 2 D100 = 99 D200 = 36
November, 2018
B-11
Multi-Drop
B
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
DOPSoft User Manual
B-12
November, 2018
Communication Error Messages
This appendix describes the meanings of the communication error messages and the ways to troubleshoot these errors when a communication error occurs for the HMI.
Test C.1 Communication error messages ���������������������������������������������������������� C-2
November, 2018
C-1
Communication Error Messages
DOPSoft User Manual
C
C.1 Communication error messages
This appendix describes the meanings of the communication error messages and the ways to troubleshoot these errors when a communication error occurs for the HMI. COMMUNICATION ERROR 3 displayed in the screenshot below is the code for the error.
For communication error messages for DOP-100, a message has been added to display which register cannot access data normally, as can be seen in the screenshot below, the D100 address cannot be accessed normally.
Figure C.1.1 Example of the HMI communication error message
C-2
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Communication Error Messages
Through these codes, you can view the messages displayed and determine the reason why the HMI cannot be connected. The following table lists the communication error codes and messages, as well as the corresponding meanings of these error codes.
Table C.1.1 Communication error codes
Code 0x02 0x03 0x05 0x06
0x07 0x08 0x09 0x0A 0x0E
0x0F
0x10 0x1A 0x1B
Communication error messages Unknown
NoResponse
ControllerCheckSumError
CommandError
AddressError ValueError
Controller busy NoCTS
HMIStationNumberError
PLCStationNumberError
UARTCommunicateFail RTCSYNCError Receive Error
Cause
Noise interference.
Incorrect communication cable wiring, PLC station number, and communication parameters including baudrate, parity, data bits, stop bit, and etc.
Error identified by HMI from checking the PLC CheckSum.
Read and write PLC command is in error.
Read and write PLC address is in error.
Error in data written to the PLC. PLC busy and unable to process the given command.
HMI CTS pin did not receive PLC RTS signal.
HMI station number error.
PLC station number error.
Communication error occurred at the bottom layer of HMI. COM port was not opened correctly, or task overload on HMI causing abnormal COM port operation. PLC does not support this command. Data format sent by PLC is in error.
Troubleshooting
Improve the anti-noise interference equipment and shielding for the transmission cable.
Check if the setting on the left is incorrect.
Check if PLC CheckSum has been enabled (usually requires use of PLC software for the checking).
Check if the read and write address for the HMI exceeded the address available for use by the PLC, or if this address cannot be written.
Check if the read and write address for the HMI exceeded the address available for use by the PLC, or if this address cannot be written.
Check the range of value accepted by the PLC.
PLC is busy, please try again later.
Check if CTS pin on HMI end and RTS pin on PLC end are connected, or if the PLC has sent out RTS signal.
Check if the HMI station number exceeded the range of valid station numbers, or if it is duplicated with other station numbers.
Check if the PLC station number exceeded the range of valid station numbers, or if it is duplicated with other station numbers.
Make sure if the COM port could be used normally, or simplify HMI task load, for example, delete ALARM or MACRO command.
Use the PLC that supports this command.
Make sure the data format is correct.
C
November, 2018
C-3
Communication Error Messages
DOPSoft User Manual
C
MPI communication error codes are created for Siemens' controllers, such as S7-300 series (Direct MPI), S7-300 series (Without PC Adaptor), and S7-200 series, when communication with the HMI fails.
Figure C.1.2 Siemens controller
C-4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Communication Error Messages
Code 0x11 0x12 0x14 0x18 0x0B 0x0C 0x3F
Table C.1.2 MPI communication error codes
Communication error messages
MPI_IDLE (For S7 300 - without PC adaptor, S7 300 - Direct MPI, or S7-200)
MPI_SN_COLLID (For S7 300 - without PC adaptor, S7 300 - Direct MPI, or S7-200)
MPI_NO_SC (For S7 300 - without PC adaptor, S7 300 - Direct MPI, or S7-200)
MPINoResponse (For S7 300 - without PC adaptor or S7 300 - Direct MPI)
NoResource (For S7 300 - without PC adaptor, S7 300 - Direct MPI, or S7-200)
NoService (For S7 300 - without PC adaptor, S7 300 - Direct MPI, or S7-200)
Read Error (For S7 300 - without PC adaptor, S7 300 - Direct MPI, or S7-200)
Cause
This is a special error message for Siemens PLC. HMI cannot acquire packets under idle internet connection.
This is a special error message for Siemens PLC. Station numbers are duplicated.
This is a special error message for Siemens PLC. The number of connected stations is full, with no more connections available.
This is a special error message for Siemens PLC. There is no response for the connection requested, as there is no resource allocated.
This is a special error message for Siemens PLC. It is caused by task overload on the PLC.
This is a special error message for Siemens PLC. It is caused by task overload on the PLC.
This is a special error message for Siemens PLC. The set PLC address exceeded the accessible range.
Troubleshooting
Check if there are too many connected modules causing insufficient bandwidth.
Make sure if there are modules with duplicated stations.
Check if the number of the connected modules exceeds the limit.
Check if the network cable is disconnected or if it has poor connection.
This issue can be solved by simplifying the programs on the PLC to reduce task load. This issue can be solved by simplifying the programs on the PLC to reduce task load.
Set the PLC address within the accessible range.
C
November, 2018
C-5
Communication Error Messages
DOPSoft User Manual
C
If the connecting controller used for communication is Omron's C/CPM/CQM Series, please refer to the following Table C.1.3 for the applicable error code when an error occurred.
Figure C.1.3 Omron controller
Table C.1.3 Omron communication error codes
Code
Communication error messages
0x1F NOTExecutableInRunMode
Cause
It means the HMI is already connected with the PLC, but PLC is in Run mode, so it cannot accept "write data" command.
Troubleshooting
The PLC must be in Monitor mode to accept "write data" command. This error message will only appear once because when the HMI notices an error with the mode, it will automatically change the PLC mode to Monitor mode.
C-6
November, 2018
Write and Read Offset Address
This appendix describes the method for writing and reading offset address. Test
D.1 Write and read offset address ��������������������������������������������������������������D-2
November, 2018
D-1
Write and Read Offset Address
DOPSoft User Manual
D
D.1 Write and read offset address
The offset address enables users to flexibly read and write the memory address without downloading the screen again when changing the address.
After setting the offset address: Actual write address of the element: Write Address + Value in Write Offset Address � Element [Data Type]. Actual read address of the element: Read Address + Value in Read Offset Address � Element [Data Type].
If you have set the Write Offset Address but not the Read Offset Address, the Read Offset Address will be regarded the same as the Write Offset Address.
Figure D.1.1 Offset address setup
Note: 1. Values in offset addresses have to be unsigned with ranges from 0 to 65535. 2. If the button element does not have the Data Type selection, its Data Type is Bit.
Data Type for the Character Display and Character Entry elements is Word, not String Length. 3. All elements that can be set with a write address can also be set with a write offset address.
The same applies to elements set with a read address can also be set with a read offset address. Please refer to the following table for all the elements that can be set with write or read offset addresses.
D-2
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Write and Read Offset Address
Element
Set to On
Set to Off
Momentary
Maintained
Button
Multistate
Set Value
Set Constant
Increment
Decrement
Meter (1)(2)(3)
Normal Bar
Differential
Pipe (1)(2)(6)(7)
Pie (1)(2)(3)(4)
Multistate Indicator
Indicator
Range Indicator
Simple Indicator
Numeric Display
Data Display
Character Display General Message Display
Moving Sign
Graph Display
State Graphic Animated Graphic
Numeric Entry
Input
Character Entry Barcode Input
Multi-language Input
Analog
Slider
ComboBox List
ListBox
Line
Drawing
Rectangle Circle
Text
Write
Offset address
Read
4. You can select the internal memory or controller register address as the Write / Read Address for the elements, but the controller register address which the Data Length is not Word is currently not supported. For example, C200 - C255 in Delta's DVP PLC is not supported because its Data Length is Double Word.
Variables
Write Offset Address Read Offset Address
Internal memory
Type PLC register
Constant
D
November, 2018
D-3
Write and Read Offset Address
DOPSoft User Manual
D
See the following examples of Offset Address.
Table D.1.1 Examples for applying offset address
Create Numeric Entry elements
Examples for applying offset address
Create three Numeric Entry elements and set the write addresses to $100, $200, and $300, respectively.
Step 1: create five Numeric Display elements with the Data Type as Word and set the addresses from $1000 to $1004 in sequence.
Create Numeric Display elements Step 2: create five Numeric Display elements with the Data Type as Double
Word and set the addresses from $2000 to $2004 in sequence.
Create Maintained button elements
Create five Maintained button elements and set the addresses from $3000.0 to $3000.4 in sequence.
Step 1: create one Numeric Entry element with the Data Type as Word and set the Write Address to $1000 and Write Offset Address to $100.
Set offset addresses
Step 2: create one Numeric Entry element with the Data Type as Double Word and set the Write Address to $2000 and Write Offset Address to $200.
D-4
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Write and Read Offset Address
Examples for applying offset address
Step 3: create one Maintained button element and set the Write Address to $3000.0 and Write Offset Address to $300.
D
Set offset addresses
After creating all the elements, please compile and download the elements to the HMI.
Download the screen to HMI
November, 2018
D-5
Write and Read Offset Address
DOPSoft User Manual
D
Examples for applying offset address
When the Write Offset $100 is 0, the actual write address of the Numeric Entry element Word is $1000.
When the Write Offset $100 is 1, the actual write address of the Numeric Entry element is 1 Word address after $1000, which is $1001.
Execution result when the
Data Type is Word
When the Write Offset $100 is 3, the actual write address of the Numeric Entry element is 3 Word addresses after $1000, which is $1003.
When the Write Offset $200 is 0, the actual write address of the Numeric Entry element Double Word is $2000.
When the Write Offset $200 is 1, the actual write address of the Numeric Entry element is 1 Double Word address after $2000, which is $2002.
Execution result when the
Data Type is Double Word
When the Write Offset $200 is 3, the actual write address of the Numeric Entry element is 3 Double Word addresses after $2000, which is $2006.
D-6
November, 2018
DOPSoft User Manual
Write and Read Offset Address
Examples for applying offset address
When the Write Offset $300 is 0, the actual write address of the Maintained button element is $3000.0.
D
When the Write Offset $300 is 1, the actual write address of the Maintained button element is 1 Bit address after $3000.0, which is $3000.1.
Execution result when the Data
Type is Bit
When the Write Offset $300 is 3, the actual write address of the Maintained button element is 3 Bit addresses after $3000.0, which is $3000.3.
November, 2018
D-7
Write and Read Offset Address (This page is intentionally left blank.)
D
DOPSoft User Manual
D-8
November, 2018
Revision History
Release date November, 2018
Version V1.0 (First edition)
Chapter
Revision contents
November, 2018
1
Revision History
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
DOPSoft User Manual
2
November, 2018